■  ^^^^ 


/8X9 


titE 

EMBRACING  SOME 

I^EAmNG  FACTS  &  PKINCIPI.ES  OF  SCIEJ^CE, 

AND 

A  VARIETY  OF  MATTER  ADAPTED  TO  THE  WANTS 

OF  THE 

ARTIST,  3IECHANIC,  3IANUFACTURER, 

AND 

MERCANTILE  COMMUNITYi 

TO    WHICH  IS  ANNEXED  AN 

ABSTRACT  OF  TONNAGE,   DUTIES,  CUS't^OM- 

HOUSE    TARES,    ALLOWANCES,  A^ 

USEFUL  MENSURATION  TABLES. 


Commerce  and  Manufactures — the  main  anchor  of  a  nation. 


THIRD   EDITION, 

WITH  ADDITIONS     AND  IMPROVEMENtS. 

NEW- YORK: 

PEINTED    BY    J.  C    JOHNSON. 

1829. 


Northern  District  of  New-Yoik,  to  wit : 

BE  IT  REMEMBERED,  That  on  the  eighth  day  of  November,  in 
the  fifty -Srstye^r  ot  the  independence  of  the  United  States  of  America, 
A,  D.  1827,  John  Shcpard,  of  the  said  district,  hath  deposited  in  this  of- 
fice the  title  of  a  book,  the  right  whereof  he  claims  as  proprietor,  in  the 
words  following,  to  wit. 

"  The  Artist  and  Tradesman's  Guide  ;  embracing  some  leading  facts 
and  principles  of  science,  and  a  variety  of  matter  adapted  to  the  wants 
of  the  artist,  mechanic,  manufacturer,  and  mercantile  community.  To 
which  is  annexed  an  abstract  of  tonnage,  duties,  custom-house  tares  and 
allowances.  Commerce  and  manufactures — the  main  sheet  anchor  of  a 
nation." 

In  conformity  to  the  act  of  the  Congress  of  the  United  States,  entitled 
"  An  act  for  the  encouragement  of  learning,  by  securing  the  copies  of 
maps,  charts,  and  books,  to  the  authors  and  proprietors  of  such  copies, 
during  ti|||'times  therein  mentioned ;"  and  also  to  the  act  entitled  "  An 
act  supplementary  to  an  act  entitled  '  An  act  for  the  encouragement  of 
learning,  by  securing  the  copies  of  maps,  charts,  and  books,  to  the 
authors  and  proprietors  of  such  copies  during  the  times  therein  incn>- 
tioned,'  and  extending  the  benefits  thereof  to  the  acts  of  designing  en- 
graving, and  etching,  historical,  and  other  prints." 

R.  R.  LANSING, 
Clerk  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States, 
for  the  Northern  District  of  New-York 


ADVERTISEMENT  TO  TttE  SECOND  EDITION. 

IN  presenting  the  American  Public  with  this  Edition, 
it  is  not  presumed,  after  the  care  and  labour  bestowed,  that  it 
is  free  from  error  or  defect,  but  it  is  hoped  that  the  errors 
are  not  material,  or  deficiencies  more  numerous,  than  works 
of  a  similar  nature  and  size,  which  do  not  admit  of  perfec- 
tion. 

As  the  work  is  designed  more  particularly  to  interest  the 
Merchant  and  Mechanic,  it  is  believed  it  will  be  found  in 
its  present  form  more  worthy  of  their  patronage. 

To  render  it  practically  useful,  rather  than  to  make  a  dis- 
play of  science  and  fine  writing,  has  been  our  greatest  object^ 

The  reception  which  the  work  has  already  experienced 
calls  for  the  expression  of  the  authors  gratitude. 

Numerous  testimonials  in  its  favour  might  bo  inserted,  if 
they  were  deemed  necessary  in  accelerating  the  sale,  but  in 
this  age  of  inquiry  and  improvement,  most  minds  are  capable 
of  erecting  a  standard  of  discrimination,  whereby  they  can 
deterriiine  in  regard  to  the  merits  of  a  Work  without  the  aid 
or  recommendation  of  others.  Nevertheless,  it  may  not  be 
improper  to  advert  to  the  fact  that  the  first  edition  was  dispo- 
sed of  in  a  very  few  weeks  after  its  publication. 

Finally,  if  the  Merchant  and  Mechanic  are  benefitted  by 
our  exertions,  and  we  have  the  vanity  to  believe  that  they 
will  be,  we  have  not  "  laboured  for  nought,"  but  shall  reap 
a  rich  reward  in  the  reflection  that  we  have,  in  any  degree, 
been  useful  to  those  classes  of  community  who  are  the  bone 
and  sinews  of  our  republic.  To  them  we  commit,  without 
further  remark  this  little  manual, 

THE  AUTHOR. 
August,  1,829.  . 


WEIGHTS  AND    MEASURED. 

1  Gallon  measure  contains  8  pints^ 

8  pints  16  ounces, 

1  ouncey  8^  drachm«y 

1  drachm,  60  minims^ 

WEIGHT    OF    DRY    SUBSTANCES^ 

1  pound  contains  12  ounces^ 

1   ounce,  8  drachmSy 

1   drachm,  GO  grains^ 

1  scruple,,  20  grains. 

It  is  customary  to  distinguish  quantities  of  fluid  from  diy 
Substances,  by  prefixing  the  letter  f.  (fluid)  when  an  ounce  or 
drachm  is  mentioned  in  medical  works  ;  but  in  the  formulas 
in  this  work,  it  was  considered  unnecessary,,  as  tho  slightest 
acquaintance  with  the  substances  to  be  used  will  point  out 
what  is  implied.  The  reader  will  also  understand  that  the 
letters  q.  s,  or  q,  p.  are  used  to  imply  (sufficient  or  proper 
quantity  ;)  pp,  or  ppd,  (prepared  or  previously  prepared.) 


TIIU 

ARTIST  &  TRABESMAN'S  GUIBE- 

CHAPTER  I. 
INTRODUCTION. 

To  the  Manufacturer,  Chemistry  has  lately  become 
fruitful  of  instruction  and  assistance.  In  the  arts  of  brewing, 
tanning,  dying,  v.nd  bleaching,  iis  doctrines  are  important 
truidoa.  In  'making  soap,  glass,  pottery,  and  all  metallic, 
wares,  its  principles  arc  daily  applied,  and  aru  capable  of  a 
still  more  useful  application,  as  they  become  better  understood 
Indeed  every  mechanic  art,  in  the  different  processes  of  which 
heat,  moisture,  solution,  mixture  or  fermentatiou  is  necessary, 
nuist  ever  keep  pace  in  improvement  with  this  brnnch  of  phi- 
losophy. Finally,  there  is  scarcely  an  art  of  human  life, 
which  the  science  of  chemistry  is  not  fitted  to  subserve ; 
scarcely  a  department  of  human  inquiry,  either  for  health, 
pleasure,  ornament,  or  profit,  which  it  may  not  be  made  in 
in  its  present  improved  state,  eminently  to  promote.  To  il^ 
lustrate  tlie  science  fully,  in  all  its  parts,  would  require  more 
pages  than  this  work  is  designed  to  contain  ;  therefore,  we 
shall  be  confined  to  some  of  the  leading  principles,  and  most 
useful  practical  operations,  which  it  embraces. 

CHAPTER.  II. 

General  principles    of    CIicmistrT/—' Simple    Substances — 
Compound  Bodies — Attraction. 

TiiR  science  of  Chemistry  naturally  divides  itself  into  three 
parts  ;  a  description  of  the  component  parts  of  bodies,  or  of 
elementary  or  siitlplc  substances  as  they  are  called, — a  de- 
scription of  the  compound  bodies  formed  by  the  union  of  sim- 
ple substances,  and  an  account  of  the  nature  of  the  power 
which  produces  these  combinations.  This  power  is  known 
in  chemistry  by  the  name  of  affinity,  or  chemical  attraction. 
By  simple  substances  is  not  meant  what  the  ancient  philoso- 
phers called  elements  of  bodies,  as  fire,  air,  earth,  and  water, 
nor  particles  of  matter  incapable  of  farther  diminution  or  di- 
vision.     They  signify  merely,  bodies  that   have   neVer  been 


U  tllE    AliTtST    AlCD 

decomposed  or  formed  by  art-.  The  simple  substances  of 
which  a  body  is  composed  are  called  the  constituent  parts  of 
that  body  ;  and  in  decomposing  it,  we  separate  its  constituent 
parts.  If,  on  the  contrary  we  divide  a  body  by  cutting  it  to 
pieces,  or  even  by  grinding  it  to  the  finest  powder,  each  of 
these  small  particles  will  consist  of  a  portion  of  the  general 
constituent  parts  of  the  whole  body ;  these  are  called  the  in- 
tegrant  parts.  Compound  bodies  are  formed  by  the  combi- 
nation of  two  or  more  simple  substances  with  each  other.  At- 
traction is  that  unknown  force  which  causes  bodies  to  ap- 
proach each  other.  Its  most  obvious  instances  are  the  grav- 
itation of  bodies  to  th.e  earth ;  that  of  the  planets  towards 
each  other,  and  the  attractions  of  electricity  and  magnetism. 
But  that  attraction  which  comes  under  the  more  immediate 
cognizance  of  chemists,  subsists  between  particles  of  bodies; 
and  when  it  operates  between  particles  of  the  same  species, 
it  is  called  the  attraction  of  cohesion;,  or  the  attraction  of  ag- 
gregation; but  when  between  the  particles  of  ditferent  sub- 
stances, it  is  called  the  attraction  of  composition,  chemical  at- 
traction, or  chemical  affinity.  The  attraction  of  cohesion, 
then,  is  the  power  which  unites  the  integrant  particlei  of  a 
body  :  the  attraction  of  composition,  that  which  combines 
the  constituent  particles.  When  particles  are  united  by  the 
attraction  of  cohesion,  the  result  of  such  a  union  is  a  body  of 
the  same  kind  as  the  particles  of  which  it  is  formed  ;  but  the 
attraction  of  composition,  by  combining  particles  of  a  dissim- 
ilar nature,  produces  compound  bodies  quite  different  from 
any  of  their  constituents.  If,  for  instance,  you  pour  upon  a 
piece  of  copper,  placed  in  a  glass  vessel,  some  of  the  liquid 
called  nitrous  acid,  (aqua  fortis)  for  which  it  has  a  strong  at- 
traction, every  particle  of  the  copper  will  combine  with  a  par- 
ticle Qf  the  acid,  and  together  they  will  form  a  new  body,  to- 
tally dilferent  from  either  the  copper  or  nitrous  acid.  If  you 
wish  to  decompose  the  compound  which  3'ou  have  thus  form- 
ed, present  it  to  a  piece  of  iron,  for  which  the  acid  has  a 
stronger  affinity  than  for  copper,  and  the  acid  will  quit  the 
copper  to  combine  with  the  iron,  and  the  copper  will  be  then 
what  the  chemists  call  precipitated,  that  is  to  say,  it  will  be 
thrown  down  in  its  separate  state,  and  reappear  in  its  simple- 
form.  In  order  to  produce  this  effect,  dip  the  blade  of  a 
knile  into  the  fluid,  and  when  you  take  it  out,  you  will  ob- 
serve, that  instead  of  being  wetted  with   a  bluish  liquid,  like 


tuaoesman's  guide.  '  7 

tliat  contained  in  the  glass,  it  will  be  covered  with  a  thin  coat 
of  copper. 

It  will  be  most  conducive  to  science  to  consider  all  those 
substances  as  simple,  which  no  mode  of  decomposing  has  yet 
been  discovered.  Simple  substances  naturally  divide  them- 
selves into  two  classes.  Those  which  belong  to  the  first  class 
are  of  too  subtile  a  nature  to  be  confined  to  any  vessels  which 
we  possess.  They  do  not  seriously  affect  the  most  delicate 
balance,  and  have  received  therefore  the  name  of  imponder- 
able  bodies.  The  second  class  of  bodies  maybe  confined  in 
proper  vessels,  may  be  exhibited  in  a  separate  state,  and  their 
weights  or  other  properties  may  be  determined.  They  have 
received  the  name  oi ponderable  bodies.  The  imponderable 
bodies  at  presciit  supposed  to  exist  are  four,  light,  heat  or  ca- 
loric, ele<:tric4ty,  and  magnetism.  The  first  three  are  inti- 
mately connected  with  chemistry,  but  magnetism  has  with  it 
no  known  connexion. 

CHAPTER  ITT. 

Caloric — Sensible   Heat Latent  Heat Thermometer-^ 

Boiling  Heat — Blood  Heat — Interesting  Experiments, 

Chemists  have  agreed  to  call  the  matter  of  heat  Caloric^ 
in  order  to  distinguish  it  from  the  sensation  which  this  matter 
produces.  Caloric  has  a  tendency  to  diffuse  itself  equally 
among  ali  substances  that  come  in  contact  with  it.  If  the 
hand  ha  put  «pon  a  hot  body,  part  of  the  caloric  leaves  the 
hot  body^  and  enters  the  hand  ;  this  produces  the  sensation 
of  heat.  On  the  contrary,  if  the  hand  be  put  upon  a  cold 
body,  part  of  the  caloric  contained  in  the  hand  leaves  the  hand 
to  unite  with  the  cold  body  ;  this  produces  the  sensation  of 
cold.  Cold  therefore  is  notliing  but  a  negative  quality,  sim- 
ply implying  the  absence  of  the  usual  quantity  of  caloric.  Ca- 
loric is  uniform  in  its  nature  ;  but  there  exist  in  all  bodies, 
two  portions  very  distinct  from  eacji  other.  The  one  is  cal- 
led sensible  heat,  or  free  caloric  ;  the  other  latent  heat,  or 
combined  caloric.  Sensible  caloric  is  the  nature  of  heat  dis- 
engaged from  other  bodies,  or,  if  united,  not  chemicallif  uni- 
ted with  them.  Latent  caloric  is  that  portio*i  of  the  matter 
of  heat,  which  makes  no  sensible  addition  to  the  temperature 
of  the  bodies  in  which  it  exists.  Wrouglit  iron,  though  quite 
colli,  contains  a  large  portion  of  latent  caloric  ;  and  if  it  be 


S  trtE    ARTfST    ANi> 

briskly  liamrtiorod  for  some  time  on  an  anvil,  it  will  become 
red  hot,  by  the  action  of  this  species  of  caloric,  which  by  the 
percussion  of  hammering  is  now  evolved  and  forced  out  as 
sensible  heat.  Caloric  pervades  all  bodies  ;  and  this  is  not 
the  case  with  any  other  substance  with  which  we  arc  acquaint 
ted.  It  combines  with  different  substances,  however,  in  very 
different  proportions  ;  and  for  this  reason  one  body  is  safd  trt 
have  a  greater  capaciii/  for  caloric  than  another.  When  ga- 
seous substances  become  liquid,  or  liquid  substances  S'olid,  by 
this  change  of  state,  the}^  lose  in  a  grctit  measure  their  capa- 
city for  caloric.  During  the  slacking  of  qutck  limo,  the  ca- 
loric which  is  involved  escapes  frorii  the  water,  in  conse^ 
quence  of  its  <:hangii>g  from  a  liquid  to  a  solid  form,  by  its 
union  with  the  lime.  When  solid  bodies  become  liquid  or 
gaseous,  their  capacity  for  caloric  is  proportionably  increas- 
ed. If  yon  plji^e  a  glass  of  \i'ater  in  a  mixture  of  equal 
quantities  of  snow  and  salt,  during  their  conversion  to  a  liquid, 
the  water  will  be  frc-zon  in  consequence  of  parting  with  its 
caloric  to  supply  the  iflcreascd  capacity  of  the  mixture.  The 
portion  of  cah^ric.  necessary  to  raise  a  body  to  any  given  tem- 
perature, is  called  specific  caloric.  The  instrument  in  com- 
mon use  for  measuring  the  temperature  of  bodies,  is  called  a 
thermometer.  Fahrenheit's  is  generally  used  in  the  United 
States.  W^hen  a  thermometer  is  brought  in  contact  with  any 
inbstance,  the  mercury  expands  or  contracts  till  it  acquires 
ihc  same  temperature  ;  and  the  height  at  which  the  mercury 
stands  in  the  lube,  indicates  the  exact  temperature  of  the  sub- 
stance to  which  it  has  been  applied.  It  will  not  show  the 
absolute  caloric  in  substance's  ;  for  it  cannot  hieasure  that  por- 
tion which  is  latent,  or  chemically  cbhibined  with  any  body. 
Caloric  is  the  cause  of  fluidity  in  all  substances  capable  of 
becoming  fluids,  from  the  heaviest  metal  to  the  lightest  gas. 
It  insinuates  itself  among  their  particles  and  invariably  sepa- 
rates them  in  sohib  measure  from  each  other.  Thus  ice  is 
coitvcrtied  into  water,  and  by  a  further  portion  of  caloric  into 
steam.  We  have  reason  to  believe  that  every  solid  substance 
on  the  face  of  the  earth  might  be  converted  to  a  fluid  of  a 
very  high  temperature  in  peculiar  circumstances.  Some  bod- 
ies give  out  their  superabundant  caloric  much  sooner  than 
others.  Iron  is  a  quicker  conductor  of  caloric  than  glass,  and 
glass  than  wood.  If  you  take  a  piece  of  iron  in  one  hand, 
ond  a  piece  of  wood  in  the  other,  the  iron  feels  cold,  the  wood 


TRADESMAN  S    OUIDK.  l? 

warmer,  though  the  thermometer  sho^s  that  their  tempera- 
ture is  the  same.  Substances  usually  become  more  dense  by 
the  loss  of  caloric  ;  but  the  freezing  of  water  is  a  striking  cx- 
ccptlon  to  this  general  law  of  nature,  and  is  a  memorable  in- 
stance of  the  wisdom  and  provident  care  of  the  Almighty, 
when  he  established  the  laws  of  the  universe. 

Abstract  caloric  from  steam  until  but  212  degrees  remain,  according 
to  l*'ahreiiheit's  scale,  and  it  will  become  water.  Take  away  180  de^ 
flrrees  more,  leavinjr  but  32,  and  it  will  become  ice.  All  gases  and  liquids 
would  become  solids,  if  caloric  were  abstracted  to  a  certain  degree,  till 
at  length  all  things  would  become  permanently  solid  as  the  oldest  primi- 
tive rockp. 

Water  requires  but  212  degrees  of  heat  for  converting  it  inta 
vapour  :  it  has  been  made  to  boil  at  G7  d<^frrces,  which  is  31  below  blood 
heat.  Therefore  it  requires  145  degrees  of  heat  to  resist  the  pressure 
ot  the  atmosphere.  From  tlie  following  experiment  we  are  taught, 
that  combined  caloric  does  not  excite  the  sensation  of  heat,  nor  affect 
the  thermometer  :  Put  a  piece  of  tinder  in  the  end  of  the  piston  of  a 
fire  syringe,  made  of  cotton  cloth  dipped  in  a  very  strong  solution  of 
salt  petre.  and  well  dried — force  down  the  piston  suddenly  and  the  tin- 
dfer  will  take  fire.  Caloric  was  combined  with  the  air  in  the  syringe 
before  it  was  compressed,  which  did  not  excite  the  sensation  of  heat 
iior  inflame  the  tinder.  There  is  so  much  caloric  in  the  combination  of 
air,  water  and  other  substances  about  us,  that  if  it  were  capable  of  pro- 
dUcing  the  ordinary  effects  of  heat,  the  whole  human  family  would  he 
burned  in  a  day.  From  the  principle  that  caloric  expands  solids  as  well 
as  gases,  the  variation  in  length  of  pendulums  of  clocks  and  balance 
wheels  of  watches,  according  to  the  varying;  temperature  of  the  weather, 
causing  them  to  run  faster  in  cold  and  slower  in  hot  weather,  can  be 
accounted  for. 

That  caloric  expands  liquids  is  clearly  demonstrated  by  the  facts, 
that  spirits  guage  more  in  warm,  and  less  in  cold  weather.  The  ex- 
periment may  easily  be  tried  by  placing  a  barrel  of  rum  in  the  sun, 
nearly  full;  if  the  thermometer  ranires  hifrh,  the  liquor  will  soon  run  over. 
Then  place  it  in  a  cold  cellar,  let  it  remain  awhile,  and  the  reverse  will 
be  evident. 

An  iron  stove  quickly  gives  off  caloric  heat  into  a  room,  and  as  soon 
cools.  A  brick  Russian  stove,  must  be  heated  a  great  while  belore  it 
begins  to  give  off  caloric,  and  will  not  cool  in  a  long  time.  Clothes  made 
of  wool  and  silk  arc  slow  conductors  of  caloric  ;  those  made  of  flax  con- 
duct rapidly — stone  is  a  better  conductor  of  caloric  than  brick.  A  stone 
house  has  its  rooms  sooner  heated  in  summer  and  cooled  in  -jvinter,  than 
a  brick  house,  A  white  earthen  tea  pot  v/ill  keep  tea  hot  longer  than  a 
black  one — a  bright  tin  coiTec  pot  will  keep  coffee  hot  longer  than  a  jap- 
paned  one.  We  are  kept  cooler  in  summer  with  light  coloured  clothes 
and  warmer  in  winter,  than  with  those  which  are  dark  coloured  ;  for  our 
bodies  being  warmer  than  the  air  in  cold  weather,  caloric  passes  out 
through  our  clothes,  but  the  hot  rays  of  the  sun  in  summer  pass  through 
our  clothes  inwardly. 


10  THE    ARTIST    AND 

CHAPTER  IV. 

Waier — Solid  or  ice — Liquid  or  water — Vapour  or  Steam — 
in  a  state  of  Solidity  in  Marble — in  Crystals — in  Spars — 
in  Gems — in  Alkaline  and  Metalic  Salts — in  Mortar — Ce- 
ments— Plaster  of  Paris, 

Water  is  composed  of  88  parts  by  weight  of  oxygen,  and 
12  of  hydrogen  in  every  100  parts  of  the  fluid.  It  is  found 
in  four  states,  namely  :  solid,  or  ice  ;  liquid,  or  water  ;  vap- 
our, or  steam  ;  and  in  a  state  of  composition  with  other  bod- 
ies. Its  most  simple  state  is  that  of  ice,  and  the  difference 
between  liquid  water  or  vapour  and  ice,  is  merely  that  the 
water  contains  a  larger  portion  of  caloric  then  ice,  and  that 
vapour  is  combined  with  still  a  greater  quantity  than  water. 
However  long  we  boil  a  fluid  in  an  open  vessel  we  cannot 
make  it  in  the  smallest  degree  hotter  than  its  boiling  point, 
for  the  vapour  absorbs  the  caloric,  and  carries  it  off  as  it  is 
produced.  It  is  owing  to  this  that  all  evaporation  produces 
cold.  t\x\  animal  might  be  frozen  to  deaiii  in  the  midst  of 
summer  by  repeatedlj^  sprinkling  ether  upon  him,  for  its  evap- 
oration would  shortly  carry  off  the  whole  of  his  vital  heat. 
Water  thrown  on  burning  bodies  acts  in  the  same  way — it 
becomes  in  an  instant  converted  into  vapour,  and  by  thus  de- 
priving them  of  a  large  portion  of  their  caloric,  the  fire,  as  wo 
term  it,  is  extinguished.  Vapour  .occupies  a  space  eight 
hundred  times  greater  than  it  does  when  in  the  form  of  water 
— and  the  expansive  force  of  steam  is  found  by  experiment  to 
be  much  greater  than  that  of  gun  powder.  There  is  no  rea- 
son to  disbelieve  that  in  time,  steam  may  be  applied  to  many 
useful  purposes  of  v>hich  we  have  no  idea. 

Water  is  said  to  be  in  a  stale  of  composition  with  other 
bodies,  because  in  many  cases  it  becomes  one  of  their  com- 
ponent parts.  It  is  combined  in  a  state  of  solidity  in  marble, 
in  crystals,  in  spars,  in  gems,  and  in  many  alkaline,  earthly, 
and  metallic  salts,  both  natural  and  artificial,  to  all  of  which 
substances  it  imparts  hardness,  and  to  most  of  them  transpar- 
ency. Near  the  poles  water  is  always  solid  ;  there,  it  is 
similar  to  the  hardest  rocks,  and  may  be  formed  by  the  chisel 
of  the  statuary,  like  stone.  It  becomes  still  more  solid  in 
the  composition  called  mortar,  and  in  cements,  having  parted 
with  more  of  its  caloric  in  that  combination  than  in  the  act  of 
freezing.       If  you  take  some  ground  plaster  of  Paris,  fresh 


I'RADESMEN  S    Gt^IDE,  11 

i:alcinetl,  and  mix  it  with  a  little  water,  llic  affinity  of  tlie 
plaster  for  the  water  is  so  great,  that  in  a  few  minutes  the 
whole  will  be  converted  to  a  solid. 

CHAPTER   y. 

Earths  and  Alkalies — Silcx  or  pure  Flint^^Alvmine — Lijue 
— Potash  and  Soda — Ammonia^-^ Argillaceous  and  CaU 
carcous  Earth. 

Earths  are  such  incombustible  substances  as  are  not  duc- 
tile, are  mostly  insoluble  in  water  or  oil,  and  preserve  their 
constitution  in  a  strong  heat.  ISotwithstanding  the  varied 
appearance  of  the  earth  under  our  feet,  and  the  mountainous 
parts  of  the  world,  whose  diversified  strata  present  to  our 
view  substances  of  every  texture  and  shade,  the  whole  is  com- 
posed of  only  nine  primitive  earths  ;  and  as  three  of  these 
occur  but  seldom,  the  variety  produced  by  the  other  six  be- 
comes the  more  remarkable.  One  of  the  most  valuable  earths 
with  which  we  are  acquainted  is  siiex  or  pure  flint.  It  is  the 
most  durable  article  in  the  state  of  gravel  for  the  formation 
of  roads,  It  is  a  necessary  ingredient  in  earthen  ware,  por- 
celain and  cements  ;  it  is  the  basis  of  glass,  and  of  all  nitrous 
substances.  It  is  white,  inodorous,  and  insipid,  in  its  pure 
state,  and  the  various  colours  which  it  assumes  in  different 
substances,  proceed  from  the  different  ingredients  with  which 
it  is  mixed.  Alumine  obtained  its  name  from  its  being  the 
base  of  the  salt  called  alum,  It  is  distributed  over  the  earth 
in  the  form  of  clay,  and  on  account  of  its  aptitude  for  moulds 
ing  into  different  forms  and  its  property  of  hardening  in  the 
fire,  is  employed  for  various  useful  purposes.  In  making 
earthen  wars,  a  due  proportion  both  of  silex  and  alumine  are 
necessary  ;  for  if  alumine  alone  were  used,  the  ware  could 
not  be  sufficiently  burnt  without  shrinking  too  much,  and  even 
cracking  ;  and  a  great  excess  of  silex  would  lessen  the  tena- 
city and  render  the  ware  brittle.  Lime  is  never  found  pure 
in  nature  ;  it  is  obtained  b}^  decomposing  calcareous  matters 
by  the  action  of  fire,  which  deprives  them  of  their  acid.  In 
its  pure  state  it  is  used  in  many  of  the  arts.  It  is  employed 
by  the  farmers  as  a  manure  ;  and  by  bleachers,  tanners,  iron- 
masters and  others  in  their  several  manufactures,  and  in  me- 
dicine. The  use  of  lime  in  agriculture  may  be  attributed  to 
its  property  of  hastening  the  dissolution  of  all  vegetable  and 
animal  matters,  and  of  imparting  to  the  soil  a  power  of  re- 


12  iiiE    ARTlfeT    Ai\i> 

taining  a  quantity  of  moisture  necessary  for  the  nourishment 
and  vigorous  growth  of  the  plants.  Magnesia,  besides  being 
the  basis  of  several  salts,  is  of  great  use  in  medicine  ;  and  is 
employed  by  the  manufacturers  of  enamels  and  porcelain. 
The  alkalies  are  distinguished  by  an  acrid  and  peculiar  taste, 
they  change  the  blue  juices  of  vegetables  to  a  green,  and  the 
yellow  to  a  brown,  and  have  the  property  of  rendering  oil 
miscible  with  water.  They  form  various  salts  by  combina- 
tion with  acids,  act  as  powerful  caustics,  when  applied  to  the 
flesh  of  animals,  and  are  soluble  in  water.  Potash  and  soda 
haye  been  called  fixed  alkalies,  because  they  will  endure  a 
great  heat  without  being  volatilized  j  and  yet  in  a  very  high 
temperature  they  are  dissipated  \h  vapour.  They  are  com- 
pounds of  metallic  substances,  called  potassium^  sodium  and 
oxygen*  They  have  various  uses  in  surgery  and  medicine^ 
and  are  employed  in  large  quantities  by  the  glassmaker^  the 
dyer,  the  soapmaker,  the  colourmakor,  and  by  many  other 
manufacturers*  Ammonia  is  so  extremely  volatile  as  to  ox- 
hale  at  all  known  temperatures*  When  combined  wilh  car- 
bonic acid,  it  takes  a  concrete  form,  and  a  beautiful  white 
colour,  and  is  known  in  commerce  by  the  name  of  volatile 
salts.  With  muriatic  acid  it  forms  what  is  termed  sal  am- 
monia,  which  is  employed  in  many  of  our  manufactures,  par- 
ticularly by  dyers,  to  give  a  brightness  to  certain  colours*  In 
tinning  metals  it  is  of  use  to  cleanse  the  surfaces,  and  prevent 
them  from  oxydizing  b}^  the  heat  which  is  given  to  them 
in  the  operation.  Ammonia  is  furnished  from  all  animal  sub- 
stances by  decomposition.  The  horns  of  cattle,  especially 
tiiose  of  deer,  yield  it  in  abundance,  and  it  is  from  this  cir- 
cumstance that  a  solution  of  ammonia  in  water  has  been 
termed  hartshorn. 

Besides  the  nine  earths  above  enumerated,  we  have  now  thorind, 
which  is  a  raw  earthy  substance  lately  discovered.  A  new  alkali,  call^ 
ed  lithia,  has  recently  been  discovered,  which,  like  potash  and  soda,  is 
found  to  be  a  metallic  oxide  ;  its  base  is  called  lithium.  Three  new 
vegetable  alkalies  have  also  been  discovered,  called  morphia,  picrotox- 
ine,  and  vanqueline.  Clay,  as  it  exists  in  soils  is  commonly  called  ar* 
gillaceous  earths,  and  lime  in  soils  is  called  calcareous  earth. 

CHAPTER  VL 

Acids  and  salts — Sulphuric^  Carbonic,  and  Muriatic  Acid — ^ 
Crystalized  Salts —  Chalk — Limestone — Marble — Plaster 
^f  Paris — Muriate  of  Lime — Magncna  and  Soda — iVi* 


TRADESMAN'S    GUlbE.  1^ 

irate  of  Potash — Phosphate  of  Lime — Salt  Mountains. 

The  name' acid,  in  the  language  of  chemists,  has  been  given 
to   all   substances,  whether  liquids  or   solids,  which  produce 
that  sensation  on  the  tongue  which  we  call  sour.   Most  of  the 
acids  owe  their  origin  to  the  combination  of  certain  substances 
with   oxygen  ;  and  they  have  the  property  of  changing  the 
blue,  green,  and  purple  vegetables  to   red,  and  of  combining 
with  alkalies,  earths,  and  metallic   oxides,  so   as  to  compose 
the  compounds  termed  saHs,      The   acids  were  formerly  di- 
vided into  three  classes,  mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal;  but 
the   more  useful  and  scientific  way  of  dividing  them,  is  into 
two   classes   only.      The   undecomposible    acids,    and   those 
which  are  formed  with  two  principles,  are  comprised   in  the 
first   class  ;   while  those  acids  which    are   formed  with   more 
than  two  princii)les  compose  the  second  class.   Sulphuric  acid, 
in  commerce  called  oil  of  vitriol,  is  procured  by  burning  sul- 
phur in  contact  with  some  substance  containing  oxygen,  and 
becomes  acidified.      That   peculiar   acid  which  is  called  mu- 
riatic is  usually  obtained  from  muri:ite  of  soda,  which  is  the 
chemical  name  of  common  salt.     Carbonic  acid  is  a  combina- 
tion of  carbon  and  oxygon,  formerly  called  fixed  air,  on  ac- 
count of  its  being  intimately  combined   in  chalk,  brimstone, 
and  other  substances.      (See  the  article  carbonic  acid  gas.) 
The  number  of  acids  that  are  well   known  amount  to  more 
than  forty,  and  their  uses  are  so  many  and   important,  that  it 
is  impossible  to  name  them.      They  are  indispensable  to  va- 
rious arts  and  manufactures  ;  they  are  employed  for  culinary 
purposes,  and   for  medicine;   they  act  an    important  part  in 
the  great  laboratory  of  nature,  and  form  a  great  proportion 
of  the  mountainous  districts  of  the  globe  in  their  various  com- 
binations.    The  precise  number  of  the  salts  is  not  known, 
but  they  probably  amount  to  more  than  two  thousand.     The 
diflerent  salts  are  known  from  each  other  by  the  peculiar  fi- 
gure of  their  crystals,  by  their  taste,  and  other  distinctive  or 
specific  characters.     Tbeir  crystalization  is  owing  to  the  ab- 
straction of  the  heat  or  water  by  which  they  were  displaced. 
Crystalized  salts  are  liable  to  changes  in  their  appearance  by 
exposure  to  the  atmosphere.      Some  have  so  great  an  aflinity 
for  water,  that  they  absorb   it  with  avidity  from  the  atmos- 
phere, and  thus  becoming  moist  or  liquid  they  are  said  to  de- 
liquesce.     Others  having  less  affinity  for   water  than  atmos- 
pheric air  has,  lose  their  water  of  crystalization  by  exposure. 


14  ICHE    ARTIST    AND 

and  readily  fall  into  powder.  Such  sails  are  said  to  eftloresce. 
Sali^  have  not  only  the  property  of  dissolving  i»  water,  but 
by  exposure  to  great  heat  they  will  melt  ;  and  they  require 
different  degrees  of  heat  to  put  them  into  a  state  of  fusion,  as 
well  as  different  quantities  of  water  for  their  solution.  Many 
of  the  salts  are  to  be  found  native,  and  the  carbonates,  sul- 
phates, and  the  muriates,  are  the  most  frequent.  Chalk,  lime- 
stone, and  marble,  are  all  included  in  the  term  carbonate  of 
limov  Few  salts  are  more  copiously  disseminated  than  the 
sulphate  of  lime,  particularly  in  the  cityof  Paris^  and  hence 
Its  name,  plaster  of  Paris.  Of  the  native  muriates,  muriate 
<Df  lime  occurs  with  rock  salt,  and  muriate  of  magnesia  occurs 
in  abundance  in  sea  water  ;  and  muriate  of  soda  not  only  ex- 
ists in  immense  quantities  in  the  ocean^  but  vast  mountains  in 
different  parts  of  the  worlds  are  entirely  formed  of  this  salt. 
Nitrate  of  potash,  known  by  the  more  familiar  name  of  nitre 
or  salt  petre,  is  collected  in  various  parts  of  the  globe.  Phos- 
phate of  lime  which  is  the  basis  of  animal  bones,  exists  native 
in  Hungary,  and  composes  several  entire  mountains  in  Spain. 
Mountains  of  salt  were  probably  formed  in  very  remote  ages, 
and  by  processes  of  which  wo  can  form  no  idea.  It  may  be 
supposed^  however,  that  the  changes  have  been  slow  and  gra- 
dual ;  for  several  of  the  native  salts  exhibit  marks  of  regula- 
rity and  beauty  in  their  crystalization,  which  cannot  be  imi- 
atted  by  art. " 

CHAPTER  VII. 

Simple     Combustibles — Light    and    Caloric — Hydrogen — 
Sulphur — Phosphorus — Carbon — Carburetted  Hydrogen 
— -Accidents  to  Miners — Curious  Experiments — Cast  Iron 
—  Wrought  Iron — Steel — Classification  of  simple  Bodies, 
Most  of   the  simple  substances    arc  combustible,    or  bear 
some  relation  to    combustion.   Light  and   caloric  are  evolved 
during  combustion.       Oxygen    is  the    principal   agent;  and 
hydrogen,  sulphur,  phosphorus,    carbon,    and  the  metals  are 
the  subjects,  or  instruments  of  this  process.      Hydrogen  gas 
may  be  combined  with  water,    sulphur,  phosphurus    or  car- 
bon.    When  combined  with  phosphorus  it   forms  phosphur- 
etted  hydrogen  gas,  which  takes   fire  when  it   comes  in  con- 
tact with  atmospheric  air.     The  elastic  substance  called  car- 
buretted hydrogen  gas,  is  carbon  dissolved  in  hydrogen,  it  has 
also  been  called  heavy  inflammable  air.     It  is  this  gaseous 
compound  which  has  occasioned  so  many  dreadful  accidents 


tradesman's  guide,  15 

to  miners,  who  call  it  fire  damp.  It  is  procured  from  pil 
coal  by  dry  distillation,  and  from  its  imflammability  and  bril 
liant  flame,  it  has  been  used  for  lighting  streets,  shops,  manu- 
factories and  light  houses  on  the  sea  coast.  The  rate  at 
which  it  is  obtained  is  comparative]}^  trifling  compared  with 
oil  aud  tallow. 

Phosphorus  is  a  solid  imflammable  substance,  which  burns 
at  a  very  low  temperature  when  in  contact  with  oxygen  gas 
or  atmospheric  air.  Many  amusing  experiments  can  be  per- 
formed with  it ;  but  it  must  be  handled  with  extreme  caution. 
If  you  fix  a  piece  of  solid  phosphorus  in  a  quill,  and  write 
with  it  upon  paper,  the  writing  in  a  dark  room  will  appear 
beautifully  luminous.  If  the  face  or  hands  be  rubbed  with 
phosphuretted  ether,  they  will  appear  in  a  dark  place  as 
though  on  fire,  without  danger  or  sensation  of  heat.  Pure 
carbon  is  known  only  in  the  diamond  ;  but  carbon  in  a  state 
of  charcoal  may  be  procured  by  heating  to  redness  a  piece  of 
wood  closely  covered  with  sand  in  a  crucible,  so  as  to  pre- 
serve it  while  in  the  fire,  and  afterwards,  while  cooling,  from 
the  action  of  the  atmosphere.  It  is  capable  of  forming  va- 
rious combinations,  but  charcoal  is  that  with  which  we  are 
most  familiar.  Carbon  is  not  only  a  component  part,  but  it 
forms  nearly  the  whole  of  the  solid  basis  of  all  vegetables, 
from  the  most  delicate  flower  in  the  garden,  to  the  huge  oak 
of  the  forest.  It  not  only  constitutes  the  basis  of  the  woody 
fibre,, but  is  a  component  part  of  sugar,  and  of  all  kinds  of 
wax,  oils,  gums,  and  resins,  and  of  these  again  how  great  is 
the  variety  !  It  is  imagined  that  most  of  the  metals  may  be 
combined  with  carbon  ;  but  at  present  we  know  of  only  its 
combination  with  iron.  In  one  proportion  it  forms  cast-iron, 
in  another  steel,  and  in  a  third  plumbago,  generalh^  though 
improperly  called  black  lead.  There  is  no  lead  in  its  com- 
position. Cast  iron  contains  about  one  forty-fifth  of  its  weighl 
of  carbon.  Steel  is  combined  with  about  one  part  of  carbon 
in  two  hundred  of  iron,  and  .plumbago,  or  carburet  of  iron, 
has  been  found  to  consist  of  nearly  nine  parts  of  carbon  to 
one  of  iron.  Wrought  iron  difiers  from  cast  iron,  in  being 
deprived  of  its  carbon  and  oxygen,  by  continued  heat  and  re- 
peated hammering,  which  renders  the  metal  malleable.  Steel 
is  made  of  wrought  iron,  by  various  processes,  whereby  the 
metal  resumes  a  small  portion  of  the  carbon,  and  acquires  a 
capacity  of  receiving  different  degrees  of  hardness.  The  me- 
tals ar9  generally  procured   from  beneath  the  surface   of  i\w 


16  THE    ARTIST    AND 

earth,  in  a  state  of  combination  either  with  other  metals,  or 
with  sulphur,  oxygen  or  acids ;  though  a  few  of  them  have 
been  found  in  a  state  of  piirity.  Metals  are  the  great  agents 
by  which  we  can  examine  the  recesses  of  nature  ;  and  their 
uses  are  so  multiplied,  that  they  have  become  of  the  greatest 
importance  in  every  occupation  of  life.  They  are  the  instru- 
ments of  all  our  improvements,  of  civilization  itself,  and  are 
even  subservient  to  the  progress  of  the  human  mind  towards 
perfection.  They  differ  so  much  from  each  other,  that  na- 
ture seems  to  have  had  in  view  all  the  necessities  of  man,  in 
order  that  she  might  suit  every  possible  purpose  his  ingenuity 
can  invent  or  his  wants  require.  We  not  only  receive  this 
great  variety  from  the  hand  of  nature,  but  these  metals  are 
rendered  infinitely  valuable  by  various  other  properties  which 
they  possess  ; — by  their  combustibility,  their  solubility  in  fluids 
their  combinations  with  various  substances,  and  by  their  union 
with  each  other,  thereby  compound  and  alloys  are  formed, 
extremely  useful  in  a  variety  of  arts,  manufactures,  and  other 
requisites  of  life.  By  combining  them  with  oxygen  we  can 
invest  them  with  new  properties,  and  are  enabled  to  employ 
them  to  promote  the  progress  of  the  fine  arts,  by  imitating  the 
i^aster  pieces  of  creation  in  the  production  qf  artificial  salts, 
gems,   and  crystals,  of  every  colour  and  of  every  shade, 

The  following  is  an  enumeration  of  the  classification  of  the  simple 
bodies  in  general.  I.  Copiprehending  the  imponderable  agents,  Heat  or 
Caloric,  Light,  and  Electricity.  11.  Comprehending  agents  capable  of 
uniting  with  inflammable  bodies,  and  in  most  instances  of  elfecting  their 
combustion, — Oxygen,  Chlorine,  and  Iodine.  Many  learned  chemists 
have  doubted  wheiher  chlorine  and  iodine  were  supporters  of  combus- 
tion, any  further  than  they  contain  oxygen.  They  are  classed  among 
the  simple  bodies,  because  they  have  not  as  yet,  been  resolved  into  other 
ingredients.  The  name  chlorine  is  simply  expressive  of  its  greenish  col- 
our, and  iodine  of  its  violet  colour.  111.  Comprehending  bodies  capable 
of  uniting  with  oxygen,  and  forming  with  its  various  compounds, — 1. 
Hj'-drogen,  forming  water,  2.  Bodies  forming  acids.  Nitrogen,  form- 
ing nitric  acid,  Sulphur,  forming  sulphuric  acid,  Phosphorus,  ^orming 
phosphoric  acid.  Carbon,  forming  carbonic  acid,  Boron,  forming  boric 
acid.  Fluorine,  forming  fluoric  acid.  3  Metallic  bodies  which  have 
been  divided  into  the  seven  following  ciases.  1st.  The  metals  which 
combine  with  oxygen  and  form  alkalies.  These  are  potassium,  sodium 
and  lithium.  The  volatile  alkali  ammonia  has  been  found  by  Sir  Hpm- 
prh<?y  Davy  to  be  a  triple  compound  of  nitrogen,  hydrogen  and  oxygen. 
2.  Those  rnetals  which  by  combining  with  oxygen  form  the  alkaline 
earths,  viz.  calcium,  magnesium,  borium  and  strontium.  Calcium  is 
the  base  of  lime,  magnesium  of  magnesia,  and  so  on.  The  metallic  sub- 
stances are  of  the  colour  of  silver.''  3.  Those  metals  which  by  combin- 
ing with  oxygen  constitute  the  remainder  of  the  earthg.      Tl^cge  ^x% 


tradesmen's  guide.  17 

siiicum,  alumium,  zirconium,  jrlucinum,  gitrium  and  thorinum.  These 
are  presumed  metals  ;  for  the  earths,  of  which  tlioy  are  supposed  to 
constitute  the  bases,  have  been  as  yet  but  partially  decomposed  ;  res- 
pecting some  of  them  but  little  is  known.  4th.  The  metals  which  ab- 
sorb oxygen  and  decompose  water  at  a  hi^li  temperature.  These  are 
iron,  tin,  zinc,  cadmium  and  manganese.  5th.  Those  metals  which  ab- 
sorb oxygeri  at  different  temperatures,  but  do  not  decompose  water  at 
any  temperature.  This  class  is  composed  of  twelve  distinct  metals,  viz. 
osmium,  ceiium,  tellurium,  titanium,  uranium,  nickel,  cobalt,  copper, 
lead,  antimony,  bizmuth,  and  mercury.  6th.  'JThose  metals  which  do 
not  decompose  water,  but  absorb  oxygen  and  thereby  convert  it  into 
iacids.  These  are  arsenic,  molybdenum,  tungsten,  chromium,  colum-. 
bium  and  seleniun).  7th.  Tliose  metals.which  do  not  decompose  water, 
or  absorb  oxygen  from  the  atmosphere  at  any  temperature.  These  are 
platina,  gold,  silver,  palladium,  rhodium  and  iridiiani. 

CHAPTER  virr. 

Oxides  and  Combustion — Gas  producing  pleasurable  sensa- 
tion^—  Combustion  defined — Interesting  Experiments— 
Reficctions, 

Any  metal  cir  combustible  body.,  which  is  tionibiiied  with 
less  oxygen  than  is  sufficient  to  render  it  acid,  is  usually  cal- 
led an  oxide.  Whenever  a  substance  is  converted  into  ah 
oxide,  v'e  sdy  it  is  oxydized.  Tiie  mineral,  the  animal^  and 
vegetable  kingdom  all  furnish  matters  which  are  convertible 
into  oxides  by  an  union  with  oxygen;  Metallic  oxides  are 
formed  in  several  ways,  the  chief  of  which  are  by  theaccess 
of  atmospheric  air,  by  the  decomposition  6^  water,  and  by  the 
decomposition  of  acids;  Iron  may  be  mentioned  as  a  fami- 
liar example  of  rrtetals  becoming  oxydized  by  atmospheric 
air.  It  is  well  knowrii  that  wheri  this  metal  ii5  exposed  to  air 
and  moisture  it  acquires  rust,  or  in  other  words,  iis  surface  is 
converted  X6  an  oxide,  in  which  state,  the  nielal  will  be  found 
to  have  afc(|uirtfd  an  increase  of  weight.  Common  rl^d  lead, 
which  is  a  true  oxide  of  lead,  is  made  by  melting  that  metal 
in  ovens  so  constr«cted  as  to  have  a  free  access  to  atmospheric 
air.  Goldj  silver  and  platina,  cannot  be  oxj'dized,  unless  iii 
a  very  high  tertiperature  ;  and  with  resppct  to  other  metals,  they 
not  only  differ  in  their  capacity  for  oxygen,  but  also  in  therf 
attraction  for  it^  so  that  one  will  often  rob  the  other,  thus  re- 
ducing the  lirst  oxide  to  its  primitive  metallic  form.  W  you 
dissolve  some  quicksilver  hi  nitric  acid,  and  after  dropping  a 
little  of  the  solution  upon  a  bright  piece  of  copper,  gently 
rub  it  with  a  piece  of  cloth,  the  mercury  will  precipitcite  itself 
upon  the  copper,  which  will  be  completely  silvered.     W'** 


18  THE    ARTIST    AND 

regard  to  oxide  of  nitrogen,  the  first  degree  of  oxydizement 
produces  iiiti'ous  oxide  ;  a  further  portion  of  oxygen,  nitric 
oxide,  and  they  are  both  in  a  state  of  gas.  Nitrous  oxide  gas 
bears  the  nearest  resemblance  of  any  other  to  that  of  the  at- 
mospheric air.  It  will  support  combustion  even  better  than 
common  air  ;  it  is  respirable  for  a  short  time,  and  it  is  absorb- 
ed by  water.  Persons  who  have  inhaled  this  gas  have  felt 
sensations  similar  to  that  produced  b}^  intoxication.  In  some 
people  it  produces  involuntary  muscular  motion,  and  a  pro- 
pensity to  leaping  and  running;  in  others  involuntary  fits  of 
laughter;  and  in  all  high. spirits,  and  the  most  exquisitely 
pleasurable  sensations,  without  any  subsequent  feelins^s  of  de- 
l)ility.  (li  is  readily  procured  by  exposing  crystals  of  nitrate 
of  ammonia,  in  a  letort,  to  the  heat  of  a  lamp,  W  which  means 
the  ammoniacal  salt  is  decomposed,  and  this  gas  is  evolved.) 
Combustion  may  be  defined  to  be  a  process  by  which  certain 
substances  decompose  oxygen  gas,  absorb  its  base,  and  suffer 
its  caloric  to  escape  in  the  state  of  sensible  heat.  The  agency 
of  oxygen  in  combustion  is  attributable  to  its  affinity  for  com- 
bustible bodies.  The  combustible  having  a  greater  afTniity 
to  oxygen  than  the  oxygon  has  to  caloric,  the  oxygen  gas  is 
decomposed,  and  its  oxj^gen  combines  with  the  ignited  body, 
which  is  caloric,  becoming  free,  is  diffused  among  tlie  sur- 
rounding bodies.  Whenever  we  burn  a  combustible  body,  a 
continued  stream  of  atmospheric  air  flows  towards  the  fire 
place,  to  occupy  the  vacancy  left  by  the  air  that  has  under- 
gone decomposition,  and  which,  in  its  turn,  becomes  decom- 
posed also.  Hence  a  supply  of  caloric  is  furnished  without 
intermission,  till  the  whole  of  the  combustible  is  saturated 
with  oxygen*  As  the  combustible  burns,  light  is  disengaged, 
and  the  more  subtile  parts,  now  converted  by  caloric  into 
gas,  are  dissipated  in  that  state.  When  the  comhustion  is 
over,  nothing  remains  but  the  earthy  parts  of  the  combusti- 
ble, and  that  portion  which  is  converted  by  the  process,  into 
an  oxide  or  an  acid.  The  smoke  which  arises  from  a  com- 
mon fire  is  chiefl}^  water  in  the  state  of  vapour,  with  a  mix- 
ture of  carburettcd  hydrogen  and  bituminous  substances  ;  part 
of  the  v/ater  comes  from  the  moisture  of  the  fuel;  and  the 
other  part  is  formed  during  combustion,  by  the  union  of  the 
hydrogen  of  the  combustible  with  the  oxygon  of  the  atmos- 
phere. The  agency  of  oxygen  in  combustion  may  be  de- 
monstrated by  placing  a   lighted  candle  under  a  g^lass  vessel 


TRADESMAN  S    GUIDE.  19 

inverted  upon  a  plate  of  water.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  candle 
will  go  out  as  soon  as  it  havS  consumed  all  the  oxygen  con- 
tained in  the  included  air,  and  that  the  water  will  rise  up  in 
the  vessel  to  fill  the  vacancy.  In  the  decomposition  of  atmos- 
pheric air  by  combustion,  it  is  natural  to  ask,  what  becomes 
of  the  nitrogen  gas'?  As  the  oxygen  becomes  fixed  in  the 
combustible  body,  its  caloric  is  disengaged,  a  part  of  which 
combines  with  the  nitrogen,  and  carries  it  off  in  the  form  of 
rarified  nitrogen  gas.  When  bodies  are  burnt,  none  of  their 
principles  are  destroyed.  We  believe  that  every  particle  of 
matter  is  indestructible,  and  that  the  process  of  combustion 
merely  decomposes  the  body,  and  sets  its  several  component 
parts  at  liberty,  to  separate  from  each  other,  to  form  other 
new  and  varied  combinations,  It  was  said  of  old,  that  the 
Creator  weighed  the  dust  and  measured  the  water,  when  he 
made  the  world.  The  first  quantity  is  here  still  ;  and  though 
man  can  gather*and  scatter,  move,  mix  and  unmix,  yet  he 
can  destroy  nothing  ;  the  dissulution  of  one  thing  is  a  prepa- 
ration for  the  being,  and  the  bloom,  and  the  beauty  of  an- 
other. Something  gathers  up  all  the  fragments,  and  nothing 
is  lost. 

CHAPTER  IX. 
Of  the  Gases — Experiments,  useful  and  cjitcrtaining-^  Vital 
Air — The  cause  of  the  vermiUion  colour  of  the  Blood — 
Gas  so  destructive  of  Life — The  cause  of  Torrents  of 
llain — Infammahle  Air — The  Phcnomefta  of  Lights, 
siich  as  are  seen  on  damp  grounds,  accounted  for — F\ital 
Accidents  resulting  from  Carbonic  Acid — Carbonated 
Waters,  called  Soda  Waters — Death  of  Pliny,  the  Na- 
turalist- — To  change  Vegetable  Colours — Contagious  Va- 
pours—  To  discharge  Vegetable  Colours — Burn  Metals — 
.Process  of  bleaching'  coloured  Goods — To  resemble  the 
firing  of  Musketry — To  produce  luminous  Appearances-^ 
JBrilliajit  Sparks— r^P ho sfJiarzis  Bottles — Matches  for  in- 
stantaneous Light— r^ Artificial  Volcanoes^. 

Oxygen  Gas — Vital  Air,  Put  a  quantity  of  oxymurlate 
of  potash  into  a  small  glass  retort,  to  whicli  is  adapted  a  bent 
tube  to  collect  the  gas,  and  which  passes  beneath  a  bell  glass 
filled  with  water  ;  the  retort  is  gradually  heated  ;  the  air  in 
the  apparatus  is  expelled,  the  salt  melts,  is  decomposed,  and. 
we  obtain  all  the  oxygen  that  enters  into  the  composition  of 


20  THE    ARTIST    AND 

chloric  acid  and  the  potash — there  remains  in  the  retort  a 
chlorulet  of  potassium.  One  hundred  grains  of  the  oxymu- 
riate,  yields  thirty-nine  grains  of  oxygen  gas; 

The  Atmosphere^  is  composed  of  two  distinct  substances; 
termed  oxygen  and  nitrogen  gas.  It  is  not  a  chemical  com- 
pound, but  a  mere  mixture  of  these  gaseous  substances  in  the 
proportion  of  21  of  the  former  and  79  of  the  latter.  It  con- 
tains^  also,  about  one  part  in  every  thousand  of  carbonic  acid 
gasj  a  considerable  portion  of  water  in  a  state  of  elastic  va- 
pour, and  several  adventitious  substances.  Oxygen  is  an  ele- 
ment, or  simple  substance  generally  diffused  through  nature; 
though  like  caloric  it  does  not  exist  byitself.  It  takes  its 
name  from  two  Greek  words,  signifying  that  which  produces 
or  generates  acids,  because  one  of  its  general  properties  is  to 
form  acids  by  combining  with  different  substances,  which  are 
called  the  bases,  of  the  several  acids.  Its  different  combina- 
tions are  essential  to  animal  life  and  combustion.  Acted  upon 
or  combined  with  caloric  it  becomes  oxygen  gas,  which  is  dis- 
tinguished from  all  other  gaseous  matter  by  several  important 
properties*  Inflammable  substances  burn  in  it,  under  tl  e 
same  circumstances  as  in  common  air,  but  \Vith  vastly  greater 
vividness.  If  a  taper^  the  flame  of  which  has  been  extin- 
guished, the  wick  only  remaining  ignited,  be  plunged  inrd  a 
bottle  filled  with  it,  the  flame  will  instantly  be  rekindled,  and 
be  \ery  brilliant,  and  accoir.panied  by  a  crackling  no'fse.  If 
a  steel  wire,  or  thin  file,  having  a  sharp  pointj  armed  with  a 
bit  of  wood  in  a  state  of  inflammation  be  introduced  into  a 
jar  filled  with  the  gas,  the  steel  will  take  fire^  and  its  combus- 
tion will  continuej  producing  a  most  brilliant  phenomenon; 
Oxygen  gas  is  a  little  heavier  than  atraosphoric  aipj  and  from 
its  being  absolutely  necessar}'  to  the  sup{)Oit  of  animal  life^ 
has  been  called  vital  airj 

Nitrogen  Gas,  Phosphorus  is  inflamed  in  a  given  quan- 
tity of  air— ^this  gives  up  all  its  oxygen  and  the  nitrogen  is  set 
free.  For  this  purpose  wo  set  on  fire  a  sn^all  bit  of  phospho- 
rus^ pjappd  on  a  brick,  which  has  been  previously  fixed  on 
the  shelf  of  a  pneumatic  trough,  and  which  oupht  to  be  so 
elevated^  tl:^at  the  phosphorus  may  be  above  the  water  in  the 
trough,  and,  of  pourse,  in  contact  with  the  air.  As  soon  as 
the  phosphorus  is  inflamed,  it  should  be  covered  with  a  large 
bell-glass  full  of  atmospheric  air,  which  dips  into  the  water  o,f 
the  trough— -the  phosphorus,  now  in   coiitact  with  the  ait  of 


TRADESMAN  a»    GUIDEv  21, 

the  vessel,  robs  it  of  all  its  oxygen,  forms  phosphoric  aciJ. 
which  we  see  under  the  appearance  of  a  very  dense  cloud, 
and  a  great  apount  of  caloric  and  light  is  extricated  ;  the  air 
dilated  by  the  heat  which  is  produced,  partly  escapes  in  large 
bubbles;  at  the  expiration  of  one  or  two  minutes,  the  phos- 
phorus goes  out,  and  the  process  is  terminated.  The  appa- 
ratus is  left  in  the  same  situation,  and  the  water  is  seen  to 
rise  in  the  bell-glass  until  this  is  cool  ;  the  phosphoric  acid 
is  completely  dissolved,  and  the  interior  of  the  apparatus,  be- 
fore nebulous  and  very  opaque,  regains  its  transparency. 
The  nitrogen  gas,  which  remains  above  the  water,  ought  to 
be  shaken  sometimes  with  that  fluid  to  remove  any  phospho- 
ric acid  it  may  retain,  and  particularly  to  decompose  a  por- 
tion of  phosphuretted  nitrogen  gas  which  always  is  formed  in 
the  process,  and  which,  thus  agitated,  abandons  the  phospho- 
rus. Yery  pure  nitrogen  gas  can  be  obtained  by  passing  a 
stream  of  chlorine  gas  through  liquid  ammonia  inclosed  in  a 
bottle. 

Nitrogen  is  a  substance  diffused  through  nature,  and  parti- 
cularly in  animal  bodies.  It  is  not  to  be  found  in  a  solid  or 
liquid  state  ;  but  combined  with  caloric,  it  forms  nitrogen,  or 
as  the  French  cliemists  call  it  on  account  of  its  being  so  des- 
tructive of  life,  azotic  gas,  in  which  no  animal  can  breathe, 
or  any  combustible  burn.  It  is  uninflammable  and  somewhat 
lighter  than  atmospheric  air,  and  though  by  itself  it  is  so  noxi- 
ous to  animals,  it  answers  an  important  end,  when  mixed  with 
oxygen  gas  in  atmospheric  air.  Were  it  not  for  this  large 
quantity  of  nitrogep  in  the  atmosphere,  the  stimulating  power 
of  the  oxygen  \yould  cause  the  blood  to  flow  with  tou  great 
rapidity  through  the  vessels  ;  the  consequence  of  which  would 
be,  that  the  life  of  man  would  not  be  protracted  to  the  length 
it  now  is.  The  vermillion  colour  of  the  blood  is  owing  to 
the  inhalation  of  oxygen  gas.  When  the  dark  purple  blood 
of  the  veins  arrives  at  the  lungs,  it  imbibes  the  vital  air  of  the 
atmosphere,  which  changes  its  dark  colour  to  a  brilliant  red, 
rendering  it  the  spur  to  the  action  of  the  heart  and  arteries, 
the  source  of  animal  heat,  and  the  cause  of  sensibility,  irrita- 
bility and  motion.  With  regard  to  the  nitrogen  that  is  com- 
bined with  atmospheric  air,  the  greatest  part  of  it  is  thrown 
out  of  the  lungs  at  every  respiration,  and  it  rises  above  tho 
head,  that  a  fresh  portion  of  air  maybe  taken  in,  and  that  the 
5ame  air  niay  not  be  repeatedly  breathed.  The  leaves  of  tfeej 


22  THE    ARTIST    AND 

and  other  vegetables  give  out  during  the  d^iy  a  hirge  portion 
of  oxygen  gas,  which,  uniting  with  the  nitrogen  thrown  off  by 
animal  respiration,  keeps  up  the  equilibrium,  and  preserves 
the  purity  of  the  atmosphere.  In  the  dark,  plants  absorb 
oxygen,  but  the  proportion  is  small  compared  to  what  they 
exhale  by  day. 

Hydrogen  Gas.  Put  a  quantity  of  filings  of  zinc  into  a 
vessel  which  has  a  glass  tube  adapted  to  it,  and  pour  upon 
them  sulphuric  acid,  (oil  of  vitriol)  diluted  with  six  or  eight 
times  the  quantity  of  water — an  effervescence  will  immedi- 
ately take  place — the  oxygen  of  it  will  immediately  become 
united  to  the  meial,  and  the  hydrogen  gas  will  be  disengaged, 
and  may  be  conveyed  by  the  glass  tube  into  any  proper  re- 
ceiver. While  it  is  rushing  tlirongh  the  tube,  it  may  be  kin- 
dled with  a  taper,  and  it  Will  burn  with  a  long  flame  like  a 
andle. 

Hydrogen  gas  is  only  one  fourteenth  the  weight  of  atmos- 
pheric air,  and  occupies  a  space  1500  times  greater  than  it 
possessed  in  its  aqueous  combination.  It  is  continually  emit- 
ting from  vegetable  and  animal  matter  during  their  decay, 
and  is  evolved  from  various  mines,  volcanoes,  and  other  na- 
tural sources.  From  its  great  levity  it  has  been  used  to  fill 
air  balloons.  In  the  burning  of  the  gas,  ihe  hydrogen  unites 
with  the  oxygen  of  the  atjnosphere,  and  the  result  of  the  com- 
bination is  flame  and  water.  It  has  been  supposed  that  tor- 
rents of  rain,  which  generally  accompany  thunder  storms  may 
arise  from  a  sudden  combusiion  of  hydrogen  and  oxygen  gases 
by  means  of  lightning.  Hydrogen  was  the  base  of  the  gas 
which  was  formerly  called  inflammable  air,  and  when  in  tho 
aeriform  state  is  the  lightest  of  all  ponderable  things. 

Hydrogen  gas  is  procured  by  decomposing  water  by  the 
galvanic  battery  ;  in  this  case  it  is  extremely  pure.  It  is  also 
largely  procured  by  decomposing  the  vapour  of  water  made 
to  pass  over  iron  filings,  or  wire,  in  a  gun  barrel. 

Nitrous   Oxide   Gas.     (See  chapter  vi.) 

Phosphuretted  Hydroqen  GASt  Take  a  tir^  quart  ba- 
sin— make  an  inch  hole  through,  the  bottom — .have  a  tin 
quart  decanter  with  straight  sides,  let  the  mouth  be  soldered 
to  the  underside  of  the  basin,  so  that  it  may  fit  the  hole  in 
the  basin — now  introduce  through  the  hole  in  the  decanter, 
dry  newly  slacked  lime,  two  parts  mixed  with  one  part  of  dry 
pearlashes,  occasionally  pouring  in    a    little  cold  water,  just 


tKADESMAN's    GUIDE.  ^S 

sufficient  for  a  thin  paste,  until  it  is  nearly  filled  to  the  bottom 
of  the  basin — drop  in  two  inches  of  a  stick  of  phosphorus, 
cut  into  small  pieces — stir  tlie  whole  so  as  to  mix  all  parts 
thoroughlj' — set  the  decanter  part  on  coals,  or  suspend  it  over 
a  lamp—  raise  a  moderate  heat :  before  the  mass  is  to  a  boil- 
ing heat  bubbles  of  the  gas  will  appear  in  the  neck  and  ex- 
plode ; — now  fill  the  neck  with  water,  and  lay  on  the  mouth 
a  piece  of  lead  about  two  inches  in  diameter  wiih  a  hole  in 
the  centre  about  the  size  of  a  pipe  stem.  Fill  up  the  basin 
with  cold  water,  which  must  be  occasionally  changed^  bj^  dip- 
ping out  when  it  becomes  too  warm.  Bubbles  of  gas  will 
rise  to  the  top  of  the  water,  explode,  and  form  an  ascending 
corona  or  wreath,  but  they  will  sometimes  spread  over  the 
surface,  appearing  very  small.  Break  off  the  foot  of  a  wine^ 
glass  and  use  it  as  a  receiver  for  collecting  and  turning  up 
large  bubbles,  and  for  transferring  gases  into  a  cistern. 

By  this  experiment  we  are  rurnish'3d  with  an  exhibition  resernbliug' 
whut  is  sometimes  called  Jack  o'tiie  lantern,  frequently  seen  in  damp 
groandfs,  where  animals  are  putrifying. 

Carbonic  Acid  Gas.  This  is  more  destructive  of  life 
than  any  other,  and  it  extinguishes  tlame  instantatieously.— ^ 
Water  may  be  made  by  pressure,  to  absorb  three  limfes  its 
bulk  of  this  gas,  by  which  it  acquires  an  acidulous  and  nor 
unpleasant  taste.  Soda  water,  cider,  and  other  fermented 
liquors  owe  their  briskness  and  sparkling  to  the  pressure  of 
this  gas.  Fatal  accidents  often  happen  from  the  burning  of 
charcoal  in  chambers,  for  whnrever  charcoal  is  burned,  this 
gas  is  always  formed.  It  so  often  occupies  the  bottom  of 
wells  that  workmen  ought  not  to  venture  Into  such  places 
without  previously  letting  down  a  lighted  candle — if  the  can- 
dle burns  they  may  enter  it  with  safety;  if  not,  a  quantity  of 
quicklime  should  be  let  down  in  buckets,  and  gradually  sprink- 
led with  water.  As  the  lime  slacks  it  will  absorb  the  gas, 
and  the  workmen  may  afterwards  descend  in  safety. 

Pulverize  a  piece  of  marble — put  a  wine-glass  full  into  a 
retort — pour  on  it  a  gill  of  water — when  it  has  soaked  a  min- 
ute, pour  in  slowly  half  a  wine  glass  of  sulphuric  acid,  diluted 
with  about  five  times  as  much  water:  the  carbonic  acid  will 
come  over  in  the  state  of  gas,  andean  be  collected  in  any 
recieiver  placed  on  a  shelf  of  the  cistern.  On  this  principle 
the  carbonic  acid  for  making  acidulous  waters,  improperly 
called  soda  water,  is  obtained. 

Pass  some  of  the  gas  into  a   decanter  of  pure    cold  water, 


24  THE    ARTIST    AKt> 

and  agitate  it  until  the  water  and  gas  are  well  mixed ;  poiit 
into  a  wine-olass  of  it  some  of  the  blue  infusion  of  led  cab- 
bage, and  it  will  become  a  very  light  red  colour.  The  in- 
fusion ought  rather  to  be  greenish  when  put  in,  by  having  ad- 
ded to  it  an  extremely  small  quantity  of  an  alkali  before  it  is 
used,  otherwise  the  change  in  colour  made  by  the  acidulous 
water  will  hardly  be  perceived.  Carbonated  waters,  called 
soda  waters  are  made  upon  this  principle.  The  waters,  sold 
under  the  name  of  soda  waters,  as  prepared  geuarally,  con- 
tain both  sulphurous  acid  and  murir.tic  acid.  Chalk  is  com- 
monly used  which  contains  generally  a  little  cf  the  muriate 
of  soda — this  being  decomposed,  furnishes  muriatic  acid — it 
is  impossible  to  avoid  a  little  mixture  of  sulphuric  acid,  used 
in  the  process.  To  cleanse  the  gas  fi'om  these  deleteiious 
impurities,  prepare  the  gas  and  force  it  through  a  condenser, 
containing  a  small  quantity  of  water,  before  the  water  for  use 
is  introduced.  Carbonated  water,  containing  but  about  thrice 
its  bulk  of  the  gas,  used  with  the  syrups  commonly  employed 
makes  an  excellent  table  drink  in  hot  weather. 

Sulphurous  Acid  Gas.  Put  into  a  glass  retort,  two  parts 
of  sulphuric  acid,  and  one  of  mercury,  and  apply  the  heat  of 
a  lamp  ;  the  mixture  effervesces,  and  a  gass  issues  from  the 
beak  of  the  retert,  which  may  be  received  in  glass  jars  filled 
with  mercur\^,  and  standing  in  a  mercurial  trough.  In  this 
process,  the  mercury  in  the  retort  combines  with  the  oxygen 
of  the  sulphuric  acid  ;  and  the  sulphuric  acid,  having  lost  a 
certain  portion  of  its  oxygen,  is  converted  into  sulphurous 
acid.  This  gas  is  very  abundant  in  the  environs  of  volca- 
noes. It  was  the  vapour  of  sulphurous  acid  which  suffocated 
Pliny,  the  naturalist,  in  that  eruption  of  Vesuvius  by  which 
Herculaneum  was  swallowed  up,  in  the  year  of  Christ,  79 
— It  is  composed  of  68  parts  sulphur  and  32  parts  oxygen. 

Sulphureous  acid  gas  is  produced  by  the  slow  combustion  of 
sulphur.  If  this  gas  be  received  in  water  the  gas  combines 
with  it,  and  sulphurous  acid  will  be  the  result.  Water  at 
40*^  absorbs  one  third  of  its  weight  of  sulphurous  acid  gas. 

Sulphurous  acid  possesses  very  slight  acid  properties.  In- 
stead of  changing  vegetable  blues  to  red,  as  acids  generally 
"do,  it  invariably  renders  them  white.  Suspend  a  red  rose 
within  a  glass  jar,  and  in  that  situation  expose  it  to  the  con- 
ined  fumes  of  a  brimstone  match  ;  this    will   soon   produce 


TRADESMAN  8    GUH>r..  25 

.  change  in   its  colour,  an<l  al    loDgth  the  flower  will  become 
quire  whitp. 

Muriatic  Acid  Gas.  Pdur  one  part  of  sulphuric  acid 
upon  two  parts  of  dry  muriate  of  soda,  in  a  turbulated  retort, 
and  collect  the  gas  as  it  becomes  disengaged,  over  mercury 
in  a  pneumatic  apparatuss.  Or,  take  some  of  the  muriatic 
acid  of  t;ommerce^  heat  it  in  a  glass  retort,  and  it  may  be  col- 
lected as  in  the  preceding  method.  Proceed  as  in  the  first 
experiment,  but  instead  of  collecting  the  gas  over  mercury, 
receive  it  in  a  vessel  containing  a  small  portion  of  water.  By 
these  means  liquid  muriatic  acid  will  be  formed.  Take  a 
small  quantity  of  silver,  or  a  piece  of  an  ore  containing  silver, 
m\d  digest  it  in  some  purified  nitric  acid,  which  will  dissolve 
the  whole  of  the  silver.  A  single  drop  of  muriatic  acid  will 
sej)aiatc.ii  portion  of  the  silver  in  white  flakes,  which  will  fall 
to  the  bottom  of  the  gUss  in  an  insoluble  precipitate.  Pro- 
ceed as  in  the  last  experiment,  but  instead  of  using  muriatic 
u<!id  drop  in  a  portion  of  common  salt,  which  will  as  eflectu- 
ally  precipitate  the  silver.  By  these  nu?ans  any  ore  may  bo 
divested  of  the  silver  it  contains. 

2^0  rcmoi^c  Contagious  Vapours  arising  from  the  Beds  of 
the  Sick,  Remove  the  sick  and  other  persons  from  the 
room — set  a  tea*cup  or  gallipot  on  the  floor,  half  filled 
with  table  salt — pour  into  it  strong  sulphuric  acid,  and  the 
room  will  be  filled  with  muriatic  acid  gas — after  a  feAV 
minutes  open  the  windows,  and  the  a  r  of  the  room  will  be 
purified* 

To  Neutralize  Animal  Effluvia  arising  from  the  Beds  of 
the  Sick,  Pour  a  tea-spoonful  of  muriatic  acid  upon  a  red 
hot  iron  shovel,  and  then  pouring  a  wine-glass  of  water  upon 
it — the  acid  will  rise  up  in  the  state  of  a  sudocating  gas,  and 
the  water  will  follow  it  in  the  state  of  vapour  and  absorb  it  al- 
most instantaneously,  so  that  the  suffocating  gas  will  wholly 
disappear. 

Chlorine  Gas.  Put  into  a  retort  a  little  black  oxide  of 
manganese  in  powder,  and  pour  upon  it  double  its  weight 
of  strong  muriatic  acid,  connect  the  retort  with  the  pneumatic 
trough,  and  receive  the  gas  pver  water,  ^^'hen  the  ascensioa 
of  the  gas  slackens,  apply  the  heat  of  a  lamp,  and  it  will  be 
disengaged  in  abundance.  Its  specific  gravity  is  to  that  of 
hydrogen,  nearly  as  34  to  1. 

If  a  small  quantity  of  liquid  oxymuriatic  is  \^  anted,  it  may 

3 


^^  TITE  ARTIST  ANt> 

readily  bo  found  with  a  Yinleeif chlorine,  (a  compound  f)f 
chlorine  and  oxygei> ;  chlororfs;  acld^)  by  dissolving  a  few 
grains  of  oxymiiriate  of  potash,  and  adding  the  solution  to  an 
ounce  of  common  muriatic  acid.  It  is  of  a  yellowish  green 
colour,  which  was  the  cause  of  its  being  called  chlorine.  Thif* 
gas  cannot  be  breathed  without  great  injury.  It  discharges 
vegetable  colours — burns  all  the  metals,  and  when  combined 
with  water,  will  dissolve  gold  and  platinum:  with  various  aika*- 
line  and  earthly  bases,  it  forms  salts,  called  fJiIorides,  Ins-ead 
of  changing  blue  vegetable  colours  red^  as  is  the  case  with 
acids  generally,  chlorine  destroys  colours,  Inslead  of  dis- 
tinguishing it  as  one  of  the  acids,  it  would  be  more  proper  to 
cajl  It  Qn  acidifying  principle,  for  it  possesses  few  properties 
'vvhiCh  characterise  that  ctass  of  bodies.  Its  taste  is  astringent; 
and,  unlike  the  acids,  is  combined  very  sparingly  with  water- 
It  has  not  been  decomposed  either  by  electricity  of  galvanisn:>; 
which  is  presumptive  proof  of  its  being  a  simple  substances. 
Its  greatest  use  is  the  bleaching.  The  following  experiment 
may  be  considered  as  a. complete  example  of  the  process  of 
bleaching  coloured  goods  :  if  a  few  pieces  of  dyed  linen  cloth,, 
of  diflerent  colours  be  dipped  into  a  phial  o-f  oxymuiiatic  acid, 
the  colours  will  be  quickly  discharged  ;  for  there  arc  few 
colours  which  can  resist  its  energetic  effects, 

Carburettcfl  Hj/drogcir  Go.''.  Take  some  pieces  of  coal 
from  a  coal  pit  bed,  or  some  other  plnce,  where  the  coal  has 
been  exposed  to  the  weather  a  long  time,  and  has  become  in- 
^im'ately  combined  with  water  ;  dry,  pulverize,  and  heat  it  in 
n  gun  barrel  ;  the  heat  must  be  raised  gradually,  for  a  slow 
heat  will  evaporate  the  water,  with  but  very  little  combination. 
Collect  the  gas  into  the  cistern,  and  put  some  into  a  glass- 
holder  and  burn  it,  when  will  be  produced  a  blue  flame  with- 
out giving  much  light. 

Carhuretted  Hydro  gen, united  with  Oxygen  Ga%,  Mix 
the  gases  in  equal  volumes,  in  a  bell  glass,  or  tumbler,  pour 
this  into  a  narrow  mouthed  bottle  or  decanter,  sink  the  bot- 
tle under  the  water  of  the  cistern,  holding  the  thumb  over  its 
mouth  :  wet  a  roll  of  paper  in  spirits  turpentine,  light  it  arrd 
hold  it  close  to  the  water  over  the  bottle  and  let  up  the  gas 
in  small  bubbles — when  they  come  in  contact  with  the  blaze 
of  the  taper  they  will  explode,  which  produces  a  noise  like 
the  firing  of  musketry  under  the  water. 

Heavy    Carhuretted  Hydrogen,  o)^   White    Gas.       Tak^ 


TRADESMAN'S   GUIDE.  27 

lialfa  gill  of  alcohol,  put  it  into  a  deep  turbuJated  retort,  pour 
upon  it  in  a  small  steady  stream,  about  twice  as  much  by 
measure,  of  strong  sulphuric  acid— -prut  in  the  stopper,  and 
apply  the  candle  to  the  retort,  approaching  it  g-i-adually.  Let 
a  little  of  the  lirst  escape,  which  consists  of  atmospheric  air 
and  ether,  collect  the  gas  over  water  ;  if  it  contains  consid- 
tjrabie  sulphuric  acid,  it  will  generally  disappear  soon,  while 
standing  over  water;  but  lime  water  will  purify  it  if  necessary. 
Mix  it  witli  double  its  volume  of  oxygen  and  explode  it,  as 
directed  with  the  carburetted  hydrogen.  Burn  it  pure  in  a 
stream,  and  it  will  give  a  very  luminous  blaze.  Fill  a  glass 
cylinder,  or  eight  ounce  phial  with  liquid  chlorine,  pass  this 
gas  up  into  it,  until  about  two-thirds  of  the  liquid  chlorine, 
is  displaced.  The  volume  of  the  gas  will  be  diminished  on 
standing  a  {tiw  seconds,  and  wiffer  will  ascend.  On  the  sur- 
face of  the  water  Will  be  seen  oily  masses  resembling'small 
drops  of  tallow. 

A  Gas  which  icill  produce  a  luminous  appcararice.  Take 
uri  ounce  phial — fill  it  two-thirds  full  of  sweet  oil ;  now  in^ 
»i:;rt  shavings  of  phosphorus,  half  an  inch  of  a  common  stick 
will  answer — hold  the  piiial  near  the  fire,  until  nearly  as  hot 
as  can  be  borne  by  the  hand  ;  keep  it  at  this  temperature  till 
the  phosphorus  is  melted,  then  take  out  the  cork,  the  upper 
part  of  the  phial  will  become  luminous  in  the  dark;  let  every 
light  be  extinguished  in  the  room,  and  pour  two  or  three 
teaspoonfuls  of  it  in  you  hand — rub  it  thoroughly  over  your 
face  and  hair — the  face  will  become  exceedingly  luminous — 
the  hair  exhibiting  undulating  flames.  The  phial  must  be 
warm,  not  hot,  that  the  oil  may  iiave  a  temperature  .ecjuai  to 
blood  heat  when  apj)lied.. 

Phospfiortts,  is  obtained  from  animal  bones.  The  pro- 
cess is  too  lengthy  to  show  in  this  work;  a  very  small  quantity 
is  sufficient  for  experiments— which  is  easily  procured  at  the 
druirg  shops. 

To  obtain  the  Oxide  of  Phosphorus,     Let  a  stick  of  phos 
phorus  he  exposed  in  water,  for  severals  days  in  a  phial:  the 
outside  will  be  covered  with  a  white  substances — this  is  the 
oxide,  which  is  more  inflammable  than  that  which  is  free. 

Application.  1.  Scrape  a  little  off,  and  expose  it  to  the 
rays  of  the  sun,  and  in  a  short  time  it  will  take  fire. 

2.  By  heating  a  phial  moderately,  with  a  pice  of  phosphorus 
altaclied  to  the  end  of  a  wire,  and  rubbing  it  about  the  iiisi^^ 


2S  THE    ARTIST    AND 

in  a  half  meltea  state,  so  as  to  coat  it,  wg  obtain  the  oxiJ(?, 
or  as  it  is  sometimes  called  *'  Phosphoric  coat  match  phial." 
If  it  is  not  very  cold  weather,  by  taking  a  little  out  and  ex- 
posing it  to  the  air,  it  will  take  fire  and  Inrn  spontaneously. 
In  preparing  it  there  is  danger  of  its  taking  fire,  in  which 
case  the  phial  must  be  stopped  until  the  flame  is  extinguished. 

3.  Rub  a  stick  of  phosphorus  lijzhtly  on  a  board,  and  it  \yili 
appear  luminous  in  the  dark.  Blow  on  it,  and  undulating 
waves  will  be  exhibited  and  vanish  alternately. 

4.  7'o  produce  brilliant  sparks.  Place  on  a  table,  a  per- 
fectly dry  eaithen  plate,  in  the  centre  of  which  lay  a  small^ 
piece  of  phosphorus  ;  set  it  on  (ire  and  invert  over  it  a  half 
gallon  turbulated  bell  glass,  perfectly  dry  :  raise  one  side  a 
little,  or  place  a  chip  under  itp;  start  the  stopp(?r  of  the  tur- 
bulature  a  little,  so  as  to  permit  the  nitrogen  gas  to  escape, 
as  the  oxygen  of  air  in  the  glass  becomes  exhausted.  Wo 
are  thus  furnished  with  the  exhibition  of  a  snow  storm.  Dry 
white  phosphoric  acid  will  fall  on  the  plate  ;  it  strongly  at- 
tracts water,  like  the  other  acids  ;  it  will  become  liquid, 
though  corked  very  tight  in  a  phial  5  therefore,  much  care  is 
necessary  to  keep  it  perfectly  tight  in  a  phial.  While  the 
powder  remains  dry  and  undisturbed  on  the  plate,  dip  a  fine 
shaving  brush  into  some  cold  watcr^  and  strike  it  a  cross  your 
finger,  so  as  to  sprinkle  very  fine  drops  of  water  on  the  pow- 
der, and  very  brilliant  sparks  will  be  exfiibited. 

Phosphorus  bottles.  Phosphorus  two  drachms,  lime  one 
drachm,  mixed  together,  put  into  a  closely  st(t>pped  phial,  and 
heat  it  before  the  fire,  or  in  a  ladle  of  sand  for  about  hall  an 
hour. 

2,  Phosphorus  one  drachm,  cera  alba  fifteen  grains,  put  it 
into  a  bottle  under  water,  and  melt  them  together  ;  let  the 
water  cool,  and  as  it  begins  to  grow  solid,  turn  the  bott^o 
round  that  the  sides  may  be  coated  ;  then  pour  oul  the  watei^ 
and  dry  it  in  a  cool  place. 

Matches  jor  wstanianeous  light.  Oxymuriate  of  potash, 
flour  of  sulphur,  each  half  a  scrupel,  vermillion  two  grains,  a 
sufficient  cjuantiry  of  oil  of  turpentine  to  make  a  paste,  with 
which  coat  the  ends  of  slips  of  wood,  previously  dipped 
in  oil  of  turpentine  and  dried  ;  when  these  matches  are 
plunged  in  oil  of  vitriol,  and  immediately  withdrawn,  they 
take  fire  instantaneously.  To  prevent  the  oil  of  vitriol  from 
npilling,  if  the  bottle  should  accidently  fall  ou  one  side,  poun- 


TRADESMAN'S    GUDlJE.  i<> 

ded  asbestos,  or  saiid,  is  put  in  the  bottle  to  soak  up  the 
acid, 

2.  Oxymnriate  of  potash  nine  grains,  sugar  three  grains^ 
Hour  of  sulphur  two  grains,  a  sufficient  quantity  of  spirits  of 
wine  ;  the  wood  to  b6  pi^eviously  primed  with  camphire  dis- 
solved in  spirits  of  wine. 

Artificial  Volcanoes,  Ram  with  force  into  a  large  pot,  a 
paste,  made  of  109  po'tii^ds  of  iro«  filings,  intimately  mixed 
with  lOO  pounds  of  pulverized  sulphur,  and  just  water  enough 
to  make  a  dense  paste.  Tliis  paste  is  then  buried  to  a  consid- 
?Grablc  depth  in  the  earth,  and  between  ten  and  twenty  hours 
afterwards  it  bursts  and  burns  with  great  force.  It  is  presu- 
^Bcd  this  experiment  was  never  tried  in  America,  it  requires 
a  great  quantity  of  the  mixture  to  produce  any  efiect.  Leni  * 
m^y  produced  it  with  the  quantity  above  specified. 

CHAPTER  X. 

Electricity — Peculiar  and  Surprising  Phenomena — Conduc- 
tor s-^Ley  den  Phial — The.  cause  of  Lightning-Galvauism 
~- Voltaic  Pile — Experiments. 

The  surface  of  the  earih,  and  of  all  the  bodies  with  which 
wo  are  acquainted^  is  supposed  to  contain  or  possess  a  power 
of  exhiting  or  exhibitibg  a  certain  quantity  of  an  exceedingly 
subiile  agent^  called  the  electric  fluid  or  ])owcr.  The  quantity 
usually  belonging  to  any  surface^  is  called  its  natural  share, 
and  tlien  it  produces  no  sensible  effects  ;  but  when  any  sur- 
face becomes  possessed' of  more,  or  of  less  than  ils  natural 
quantity,  it  is  electrified,  and  it  then  exhibits  a  variety  of  pe- 
culiar and  surprising  phenomenn,  ascribed  to  the  ])ower  cal- 
led electric.  All  those  bodies  which  transmit  or  conduct 
electricity  from  one  surface  to  another,  are  called  conductors, 
and  those  surfaces  which  will  not  transmit  the  electric  power, 
are  called  electrics  or  non-concfuclors.  The  general  class  of 
conductors  comprehends  metals,  ores,  and  fluids,  in  their  na- 
ural  state,  except  air  and  oils*  Vitrified  and  resinous  sub:- 
stances,  amber,  sulphur,  wax,  silk,  cotton^  and  feathers  are 
electrics  or  non-conductors.  Many  of  these,  such  as  glass, 
resin  and  air,  become  conductors  by  being  heated.  When 
a  surface  is  supposed  to  have  more  than  its  naturul  quantity 
of  this  fluid,  it  is  said  to  be  Jt?osi7u'eZ?/ electrified,  and  when 
less  than  its  natural  share,  to  tie  negativeli/  electrified.  When 
any    electrified  conductor    is    wholly   surrounded   by    non- 

3* 


50  I'We   artist  AN£P 

conductors,  so  that  the  electric  fluid  can  »ot  pass  fruiii  h 
along  conductors  to  the  earth,  it  is  said  to  be  insulated. 
The  human  body  is  a  good  conductor  of  electricity  j  but  if  a 
person  stand  on  a  cake  of  resin,  or  on  a  stool  supported  by 
glass  legs,  the  electric  fluid  cannot  pass  from  him  to  the  earth, 
and  ii  he  is  touched  by  another  person  standing  on  the 
ground,  a  sparkling  appearance  and  noise  will  be  exhibited. 
Two  sux-faces,  both  positively  or  both  negatively  electritied, 
r^^eZ  each  other;  and  two  substances,  of  which  one  is  posi- 
tively and  the  ether  negatively  electrified,  attract  each  other. 
Opposite  electricities  always  accompany  each  other,  for  if 
any  surface  become  positive^  the  surface  with  which  it  is  rub- 
bed becomes  negative  ;  and  if  any  surface  be  rendered  posi- 
tive, the  nearest  conducting  surface  will  become  negative. 
When  one  side  of  a  conductor  receives  the  electric  fluid  its 
whole  surface  is  instantly  pervaded  ;  but  whert  an  electric  or 
non-conductor  is  presented  to  an  electriflt^d  body,  it  becomes 
electrified  on  a  small  spot  only,  if  to  one  side  of  a  pane  of 
glass  you  communicate  positive  electricity,  the  opposite  side 
will  become  negatively  cdectritied,  and  the  plate  is  then  said 
to  be  charged.  These  electricities  cannot  come  together^ 
unless  a  communication,  by  means  of  conductors,  is  made  he-^ 
tween  the  sides  of  the  glass;  and  if  their  unioa  be  ixiade, 
th/ough  the  human  body,  it  produces  an  allection  of  the  nerVex 
called  an  electric  shock.  As  the  excitatioa  whicb  is  produ- 
ced by  rubbing  with  the  hand  oa  a  tubo  or  plate  of  glass,  is 
not  nn]y  very  laborious,  but  iniadequat©-  to.  i\xo  prodtiction,  of 
any  material  quantity  of  electric  fluid,,  n^chi^ne^  have>-  been, 
constructed  of  various,  furm.s  foi?  this  purpose-^-— So nae  of  the 
experiments  which  may  be  made  with  an  elect^MCid  niyachine 
are  ncc(?ssary  far  illustiTatiag  the  laws  of  electricity,,  aad  oth- 
ers are  merely  enterlainin^x  If  the  uiside  of  a  glass  tumbler, 
be  electrified  by  presenting  it  to  a  pointed  wire,  extending, 
from  the  prime  conductor,,  and  then  placed  over  a  few  pitcli. 
balls  laid  upon  a:  table,,  the-  balls  will  imaiediately  begin  to  leap, 
up  along  the  sides  of  the  glass,,  and  then  back  on  the  table  ^ 
— they  are  attracted  and  repelled  by  the  electrified  Inside  sur- 
face of  the  g^Fass^  the  ekctricity  of  which  they  gradually  con- 
duct to  the  table.  If  a  person  having  long  liair,,  not  tied  up,, 
be  placed  upon  an  insulated  stand,  and>  by  means  of  a  chain,, 
be  connected  with  the  prime  conductor,  when  the  machine  iss 
put  in  motion,  the  hairs  on  his  head,,  by  repelling  each  other^ 


TRADESMAN  S    GUIDE.  31 

will  stand  out  in  a  most  surprising  maimer.  A  piece  of  sponge," 
filled  with  water,  and  liung  to  the  conductor,  when  eh^ctrified 
in  a  dark  room,  exhibits  a  most  beautiful  appearance.  If  a 
piece  cf  sealing  wax  be  fastened  to  a  wire,  and  the  wire  be 
fixed  into  the  end  of  the  conductor,  and  the  wax  lighted,  the 
moment  the  machine  is  worked,  the  wax  will  fly  off  in  the  fi- 
nest threads  imaginable.  Take  a  two  ounce  phial,  half  full 
of  olive  oil,  pass  a  slender  wire  through  the  cork,  and  let  the 
end  of  it  be  so  bent  as  to  touch  the  glass  just  below  the  sur- 
face of  the  oil  ;  then  place  your  thumb  opposite  to  the  point 
of  the  wire  in  the  phial,  and,  if  in  that  position^  you  take  a 
spark  from  the  charged  conductor,  the  spark,  in  order  to  reach 
your  thumb,  will  actually  perforate  the  glass.  In  this  way 
holes  may  be  made  all  around  the  phial.  Substances  should 
be  warmed  and  experiments  made  when  the  wind  is  northerly, 
and  the  atmosphere  dry,  to  produce  the  best  efiect. 

By  means  of  the  Leyden  Phial,  a  hundred  persons  may  re- 
ceive a  shock  at  the  same  instant,  and  electric  fluid,  on  the 
same  principle,  might  be  conveyed  many  miles  in  a  moment 
of  time.  The  electric  fluid  may  be  made  to  appear  in  the 
form  of  a  vivid  flash,  accompanied  with  a  loud  report,  with 
this  phial.  But  the  greatest  discovery  that  was  ever  made  in 
electricity,  was  reserved  for  Dr.  Franklin,  of  Philadelphia. 
Franklin  brought  the  suppasiiion  that  a  similarity  existed  be- 
tween lightning  and  the  electric  fluid  to  the  test,  and  proved 
the  truth  of  it  by  means  of  a  boy's  kite  covered  with  a  silk 
handkerchief  instead  of  paper,  and  some  wire  fastened  in  the 
upper  part,  which  served  to  collect  and  conduct  the  fluid. 
When  he  raised  this  machine  into  tho  atnmsphere,  he  drew 
electric  fluid  from  the  passing  clouds,  which  descended  through 
the  iic^xen  string  of  the  kite,  as  a  conductor,  and  was  after- 
wards drav^n  from  an  ii  on  key,  which  he  tied  to  the  line  at  a 
small  distance  from  his  hand  ;  from  this  experiment  origina- 
ted the  formation  of  a  conductor  \^  secure  buildings  from  tho 
effects  of  lightning. 

When  aqueous  vapour  is  condensed,  tho  clouds  formed  are 
usually  more  or  less  electrical,  and  the  eartix  below  them  be- 
ing brought  into  an  opposite  state,  a  discharge  takes  place, 
when  the  clouds  approach  within  a  certain  distance,  constitu- 
ting lightning,  and  the  collapsing  of  the  air,  which  isi  rarified 
in  the  electric  circuit,  is  the  cause  of  the  thunder,  which  is 
ntore  or  less  intense^  and  of  longer  or  shorter  dMration^ac-* 


32  THE    ARTIST    AND 

cording  to  the  quantity  of  the  air  acted  upon,  and  the  dls^ 
tance  of  the  place  where  the  report  is  heard  from  the  pidnt 
of  the  discharge. 

Galvanism.  Galvanism  is  another  mode  of  exciting  elec- 
tricity. In  electricity  the  elfects  are  chiefly  produced  by 
mechanical  action,  but  the  effects  of  Galvanism  are  produced 
by  the  chemical  action  of  bodies  upon  each  other.  When 
it  was  observed,  that  common  electricit}^,  even  that  of  light- 
ning, produced  vivid  convulsions  in  the  limbs  of  recently  kiU 
led  animals,  it  was  ascertained  that  metallic  substances,  by 
mere  contact,  under  particular  circumstances,  excited  similar 
commotions.  It  was  found  essential  that  the  forces  of  metals 
employed  should  be  of  different  kinds.  Apply  one  piece  of 
metal  to  the  nerve  of  the  part,  and  the  other  to  the  musclcj 
and  afterwards  connect  the  metals,  cither  by  bringing  them 
together,  or  connecting  them  by  an  arch  of  metallic  sub- 
stance ;  every  time  this  connexion  is  formed,  a  convulsion 
takes  place.  The  greatest  muscular  contractions  are  found 
to  be  produced  by  zinc,  silver,  and  gold.  A  porson  may  be 
made  sensible  of  this  kind  of  electric  action  by  the  followinsf 
experiments.  If  he  places  a  piece  of  one  metal,  as  a  half 
crown  above,  and  a  piece  of  some  other  metal,  as  zinc,  below 
his  tongue,  by  bringing  the  outer  edge  of  these  pieces  in  con- 
tact, he  will  perceive  a  peculiar  "taste,  a:  d  in  the  dark  will 
see  a  Hash  of  light.  If  he  puts  a  slip  of  tin  foil  upon  the  ball 
of  one  of  his  eyes,  and  a  piece  of  silver  in  his  mouth,  by 
causing  these  pieces  to  communicate,  in  a  dark  phice  a  faint 
flash  v/ill  appear  before  his  eyes*  Galvani  supposed  that  the 
virtues  of  this  new  agent  resided  in  the  nerves  of  the  animal^ 
but  Volta  showed  that  the  phenomena  did  not  depend  on  the 
organs  of  the  animal;  but  upon  the  electrical  agency  of  the 
metals,  which  is  excited  b^Mhe  moisture  of  the  animal,  whose 
organs  were  only  a  delicate  test  of  the  presence  of  electric 
influence.  The  conductors  of  the  galvanic  fluid  are  divided 
into  the  perfect,  which  consist  of  metalic  substances  and  char- 
coal, and  imperfect,  which  are  water  and  oxydated  fluids,  as 
the  acids,  and  all  the  substances  that<:ontain  these  fluids.  To 
render  the  Galvanic,  or  more  properly,  the  Voltaic  power 
sensible,  the  combination  must  consist  of  three  conductors  of 
the  different  classes.  When  two  of  the  three  conductors  are 
of  the  first  class,  the  combination  is  said  to  be  of  the  first  or- 
^er ;  when  otherwise,  it  is  said  to  be  of  the  second  order.   If 


TRADESMAN  fc$    GUIDE.  33 

a  piece  of  zinc  be  laij  upon  a  piece  of  flannel,  moisted  with 
a  solution  of  salt  water,  a  circle  of  the  first  class  is  formed  ; 
and  then,  if  three  other  pieces  be  laid  on  these  in  the  same 
order,  and  repeated  several  times,  the  whole  will  form  a  pile 
or  batten/  of  the  first  order.  The  effects  may  be  increased 
to  any  degree  by  a  repetition  of  the  same  simple  combina- 
tion. The  following  is  a  cheap  J.nd  easy  method  of  con- 
structing a  Voltaic  pile.  Cast  20  or  30  pieces  of  zinc,  of  the 
size  of  a  cent;  take  as  many  cents  and  as  many  pieces  of 
paper  or  woollen  cloth  cut  in  the  same  shape,  and  d'p  in  a 
solution  of  salt  and  water.  In  building  the  pile,  place  a  piece 
of  zinc,  then  wet  paper,  the  superabundant  water  being  pressed 
out,  after  which  the  copper  ;  then  zinc,  paper,  and  copper^ 
and  so  on,  until  the  whole  is  finished.  The  sides  of  the  pile 
may  be  supported  with  rods  of  glass,  or  varnished  wood  fixed 
in  the  board  on  which  it  is  built.  Having  wet  both  hands, 
touch  the  lower  part  of  the  pile  with  one  hand,  and  the  up- 
per part  with  the  other,  constant  little  shocks  of  electricity 
will  be  felt  until  one  hand  be  removed.  If  the  hand  bo 
brought  back,  a  similar  repetition  of  shocks  will  bo  experi- 
enced. Hold  a  silver  spoon  in  one  hand,  and  touch  with  it 
the  battery  in  the  lower  part,  then  touch  the  upper  part  with 
the  tongue  ;  the  bitter  taste  is  extreme.  If  the  end  of  the 
spoon  be  put  under  the  eyebrow,  close  to  the  ball  of  the  eye, 
a  sensation  will  be  felt  like  the  burning  of  red  h.ot  iron,  but 
which  ceases  the  instant  the  spoon  is  removed.  The  plates 
will  soon  become  oxydated,  and  require  cleaning  in  order  to 
make  them  act. 

CHAPTER  XI. 

Light — Bodies  reflecting  Ugl\t — Colours  changed  hij  the  ap-^ 
plication  of  the  laics  of  chemical  ajfinity — Ejperimenis. 

Light  is  derived  from  the  sun  in  the  solar  sjstem.  This  is 
called  solar  or  celestial  light.  It  is  also  derived  from  terres^ 
trial  objects  ;  as  from  combustion,  friction,  chemical  attrac- 
tion, i^c.  whieh  is  called  terrestrial.  It  is  generally  accom- 
panied witli  caloric.  Every  ray  of  common  light  contains  in 
itself  seven  different  kinds  ;  these  may  be  best  separated  by 
a  triangular  glass  prjsm,  but  the  same  operation  may  by  per- 
formed with  a  tumbler  of  water.  The  seven  kinds  of  light 
differ  in  two  remarkable  characteristics ;  thoy  are  ofdiffereut 


34  THE    ARTIST    AND 

colours,  and  degrees  of  refraugibility  ;  viz.  red,  orange,  yel- 
low, greCQ,  blue,  indigo  and  violet.  The  red  is  least  refrang- 
ible ;  the  violet  most ;  and  the  intermediates  vary  in  their 
degree  of  refrangibility  according  to  this  order  of  succession. 
The  different  colouring  of  bodies  depends  on  the  different 
kinds  of  light  which  they  reflect  to  the  eye.  White  bodies 
reflects  all  kinds  of  light  ;  black,  reflect  none  :  the  diflerent 
kinds,  according  to  the  arrangement  of  the  constituent  atoms 
of  bodies  reflecting  them,  not  according  to  the  nature  of  those 
bodies. 

Example  1.  Prepare  the  following  solutions  :  1.  Sugnr  of 
lead  dissolved,  1  to  .50of  water  per  weight.  2.  Pearlash,  1 
to  4  of  water.  3.  Corrosive  sublimate,  1  to  30  water.  4. 
Copperas,  1  to  6  of  water.  5.  Sulphuric  acid,  1  to  12  of 
water.  6.  1  to  100  of  water.  7.  Strong  liquid  of  ammonia. 
8.  Tincture  of  red  cabbage.  9.  Tincture  of  galls.  10. 
Prus'ate  of  potash.  11.  Nitrate  of  mercury,  made  of  1  of 
mercury  to  4  of  nitric  acid,  to  which  add  twice  as  much  water. 
By  mixing  these  liquids  we  make  red — 1  of  5  with  1  of  8. 
Orange,  4  of  3  with  1  of  2  ;  limpid  with  1  of  5.  Yellow,  4 
of  11  with  1  of  2.  Grren,  3  of  8  with  1  of  2  ;  ruby  red, 
with  1  of  5.  Blue,  3  of  6  with  I  of  7  ;  limpid  with  1  of  5. 
Indigo,  1  of  4  with  1  of  10.  Violet,  add  the  red  to  the  indigo. 
White,  mix  3  of  1  with  1  of  1.  Black,  3  of  9  with  1  of  4  ; 
limpid  with  1  of  5. 

These  liquids  eitlier  reflect  different  colours  before  they  are  mixed, 
from  those  which  they  reflect  afterwards,  or  reflect  no  colour  as  some 
of  them  are  limpid.  It  follows  as  a  necessary  conclusion,  that  colour- 
ing is  not  inherent  in  matter,  but  depends  en  the  peculiar  arrangement 
of  the  constitu(mt  atoms.  As  colours  arc  changed  by  the  various  ap- 
plications of  the  laws  of  chemical  affinity,  dyers,  limners,  «fec.  ought  to 
be  well  acquainted  with  them. 

Example  2.  Rub  two  pieces  of  white  quartz  slightly  to, 
gether  in  the  dark,  nnd  they  will  become  luminous. 

There  are  other  bodies  which  absorb  and  give  oft' light,  as 
rotten  wpod,putrid  fish,  some  artificial  preparations,  &c. 
Snow  absobrs  light  by  day,  which  it  gives  ufl'  at  night — thus 
light  is  radiated  from  many  substances,  whicli  seem  not  to  be- 
long to  the  class  of  luminous  bodies.  The  particles  of  light 
are  so  extremly  minute,  that  although  tlicy  are  projected  in 
diiferent  directions,  aad  cross  each  other,  yet  they  are  never 
known  to  interfere,  or  impede  each  other's  course.  It  is  still 
a  disputed  point,  however,  whether  light  be  a  substance  com- 


tkADESMAN's  GUIDE.  35 

posed  of  particles  like  other  bodies.  In  some  respects  it  is 
obedient  to  the  laws  which  govern  bodies;  in  others  it  appears 
independent  of  them  :  thus,  though  its  course  is  guided  by  the 
laws  of  motion,  it  does  not  seem  to  be  influenced  by  the  laws 
of  gravity.  It  has  never  been  discovered  to  have  weight, 
though  a  variety  of  interesting  experiments  have  been  made 
in  order  to  ascertain  that  point.  Some  have  supposed  that 
the  rays  of  light,  instead  of  being  particles,  consist  of  the  un- 
dulations of  an  elastic  medium,  which  fills  all  space,  and 
which  produces  the  sensation  of  light  in  the  eye,  just  as  the 
vibrations  of  the  air  produce  the  sensation  of  sound  to  the  ear^ 
Most  of  the  phenomena  may  be  accounted  for  by  either 
hypothesis  ;  but  that  of  their  being  particles  applies  more 
happily  to  some  of  the  facts  respecting  the  modifications  of 
light  by  refraction  and  reflection.  Twilight  is  occasioned 
partly  by  refraction,  but  chiefly  by  reflection  of  the  sun's  rays 
by  the  athiosphere,  and  it  lasts  till  the  sun  is  eighteen  degrees 
below  the  horizon.  Were  no  atmosphere  to  reflect  and  re- 
fract the  sun's  rays,  only  that  part  of  the  heavens  would  be 
luminous  in  which  the  sun  is  placed  ;  and  if  we  could  live 
without  air,  and  should  turn  our  backs  to  the  sun,  the  whole 
heavens  would  appear  as  dark  as  in  the  night.  In  this  case 
also,  a  sudden  transition  from  the, brightest  sunshine  to  dark 
liight,  would  immediatelp  take  place  upon  the  setting  of  the 
sun. 

CHAPTER  XII. 

Miscellaneous— Elective  Affinity-Salt  used  in  Bronzing^-^ 
Peroxide  of  Tin  used  for  various  purposes — Important 
Mordaut  for  Dying — To  resemble  the  irregular  discharge 
of  Musketry — Pojvder — To  detect  the  Carbonate  of  Lime 
-^Clay  unfit  for  Pottery—-- Alkaline  Salts — To  purify 
Meat — Sal  Ammonia—^ Double  elective  Affinity. 

Glauber  Salts,  Put  a  tea  spoonful  of  table  salt  into  a 
Tv'ine  glass,  which  has  been  previously  dried  on  a  plate  ;  pour 
upon  it  a  tea  spoonful  of  sulphuric  acid.  Muriatic  gas  will 
escape  into  the  atmosphere,  and  glauber  salts  will  be  formed 
in  the  wine  glass.  By  this  cxjjeriment  elective  affinity  is  il- 
lustrated. 

Put  some  sulphuric  acid  into  a  tumbler,  diluted  with  six 
times  as  much  water  ;  drop  in  some  carbonate  of  soda  until 
effervescence  ceases;  and  the  nauseous  taste  of  glauber  salts 


36  titK    ARTIST    ANti 

will  be  recognized.  By  slow  ev;i[)oralioii  it  m;iy  he  crys^ 
talized* 

Silver  Boiling  Poivder,  White  argol,  common  salt,  of 
each  a  sufficicient  quaotity  ;  a  small  quantity  of  this  powder 
is  put  into  waterj  and  plate  is  boiled  in  it,  to  which  it  gives  a 
brilliant  brightness. 

Borax,  Common  borax  dissolved  in  about  sixteen  times 
its  bulk  of  hot  water  in  a  gallipot  ;  then  ponr  into  it  nearly 
half  its  weight  of  sulphuric  acid  ;  stir  it  on  hot  coals  five  or 
^ix  minutes,  then  set  it  by  to  cool.  Decomposition  takes 
place  ;  sulphate  of  soda  is  formed,  which  remains  in  solution  ; 
the  boracic  acid  is  disengaged,  and  appears  as  shining  solid 
scales  ;  pour  off  the  solution  and  rinse  the  scales  several  times 
in  cold  water  ;  each  time  v/ait  for  them  to  separate  from  the 
water  ;  when  well  Washed,  they  are  nearly  tasteless.  Now 
(dissolve  some  of  the  scrdes  in  alcohv")l  on  an  earthen  plate  ; 
set  the  alcohol  on  fire  with  a  lighted  roll  of  paper  ;  as  It  burns 
the  sides  ofl',  the  flame  will  be  tinged  with  a  beautiful   green. 

The  salt  whicli  this  acid  forma  in  combustion  with  soda  is  much  used 
in  bronzing,  under  the  name  of  borax.  It  brings  brass  to  the  hqiiid 
state,  when  thrown  upon  it  at  a  temperature  considerably  lower  than 
.ts  fusinor  point. 

Epsom  Salts^  Put  sulphuric  acid  into. a  tumbler,  diluted 
vv'iih  about  six  times  as  much  watei  :  drop  in  carbonate  of 
magnesia  until  elfervescence  ceases;  tlius  epsom  salts  are 
formed  in  solution. 

Piur^  Silcx  Poivder,  Heat  a  gun  flint  red  hot  and  throw 
it  into  cold  water  in  order  to  render  it  brittle  ;  pulverize  it 
very  fine  and  mix  the  powder  with  about  five  times  its  bulk 
ofpearlash,  melt  the  mixture,  and  keep  it  in  a  state  effusion 
fifteen  minutes  :  now  dissolve  it  in  two  or  three  times  its 
bulk  of  water;  pour  in  diluted  sulphuric  acid,  a  little  at  a 
time,  as  long  as  it  continues  to  cause  a  precipitation.  After  it 
stands  a  little  while  to  settle,  pour  oft  the  liquid  part,  and 
wash  or  rinse  the  precipitate  in  hot  water  several  times,  until 
the  water  poured  ofl*  is  tasteless. 

This  substance  is  the  principal  ingredient  in  gun  flints,  rock  crystals, 
cornelian,  &c.     On  this  principle  glass  is  manufactured. 

Oxydated  Tin,  Put  some  tin  in  an  iron  ladle  and  heat  it 
no  higher  than  to  melt  it  ;  the  surfiice  will  immediately  ab- 
sorb oxygen  from  the  atmosphere,  sufficient  to  form  the  pro- 
toxid  of  tin,  called  the  yellow  oxide.     This  may  be  scraped 


tradesman's  guide.  3f 

r>ff  With  an  iron  poker,  when  another  similar  pellicle  will  be 
formed  ;  and  the  succession  may  be  continued  until  the  whole 
mass  is  an  oxide. 

If  the  protoxid  of  tin  be  put  into  a  crucible,  heated  to  red- 
ness, and  continually  stir'red  with  an  iron  rod  for  some  time, 
it  will  absorb  another  definite  proportion  of  oxvgen.  It  then 
becomes perozid  of  tin ^  called  the  white  oxide,*^or  putty  of  tin. 

The  white  oxide  of  tin  is  an  excellent  material  for  sharpen- 
ing edge  tools,  as  knives,    razors,  &c.— for   polishing  burn- 
ishers, glass  lenses,  &c.    When  melted  with  glass  it  forms  the  - 
white  enamel  used  for  clock  and  watch  faces,  &,c. 

Acetate  of  Alamine,  Dissolve  equal  parts  of  alum  and 
sugar  of  lead  in  water,  in  separate  wine  glasses,  and  mix  these 
solutions.  The  acids  exchange  bases  ;  and  the  sulphate  of 
lead  falls  down  while  the  acetate  of  alumine  remains  over  it 
in  a  liquid  state.      This  liquid  may  be  poured  off  for  use. 

It  is  an  important  mordant  much  used  in  dying,  and  it  is  manufac- 
tured in  this  way  by  cahco  printers. 

Explosive  Powder,  Scatter  some  thin  shavings  of  phos- 
phorus over  the  bottom  of  a  broad  iron  mortar;  sprinkle 
crystals  of  oxy muriate  of  potash  among  them.  ISow,  putting 
a  leather  glove  upon  the  hand,  rub  the  iron  pestle  smartly 
around  among  the  shavings  and  the  phosphorus,  and  a  suc- 
cession of  explosions  will  be  made,  resembling  the  irregular 
discharge  of  musketry. 

All  explosive  powders  are  indebted  for  their  powers  to  the  same  prin*^ 
clple.     Gun  powder  is  composed  of  75  per  cent,  of  nitrate  of  potash, 
15  per  cent,  of  charcoal,  and  10  per  cent,  of  sulphur. 

Lime,  Put  a  little  potter's  clay  paste  into  a  crucible,  and 
heat  it  it  in  the  forge  as  high  as  white  heat  of  iron  :  now  pour 
it  out  upon  a  brick  on  a  table,  and  it  will  be  perceived  that 
it  is  not  melted  ;  mix  some  of  the  same  kind  of  clay  inti- 
mately with  about  an  equal  quantity  of  pulverized  marble  or 
chalk,  and  heat  it  again  as  hot  as  before  ;  pour  it  out  and  the 
whole  mass  will  spread  on  the  brick  in  the  state  of  melted 
cinder. 

On  this  principle  potters  reject  all  clay  which  contains  lime.  When 
clay  contains  a  very  small  per  centum  of  carbonate  of  lime,  it  would 
he  sufficient  to  cause  a  kiln  of  potter's  ware  to  melt.  The  carbonate 
of  lime  can  always  be  detected  by  pourinor  a  few  drops  of  diluted  mu- 
riatic acid.  Ever  so  small  a  quantity  of  hme  will  caues  an  effervescence 
tfnd  prove  the  mas&to  be  clay-marl,  unfit  for  pottery. 


S8  THE    ARTIST    A]vri> 

Alkaline  Salts,  Dissolve  in  separate  wine  glasses  a  little 
fcopperas,  blue  vitriol,  white  vitriol  and  sugar  of  lead  ;  pour 
into  each  a  small  quantity  of  the  solutions  of  either  j)otashj 
soda,  or  ammonia,  and  the  metallic  oxide  of  the  salt  will  bo 
precipitated,  and  an  alkaline  salt  formed  in  each  glass. 

This  principle  is  of  much  use  in  the  manufactare  of  articles  used  in 
medicine  and  the  arts,  as  will  be  evident  by  attendino;  the  daily  business 
of  the  laboratory. 

Liver  of  Sulphur ^  Take  some  dry  pearlasb,  and  half  as 
much  sulphur,  mix  them  and  rub  them  v\eli  together:  melt 
them  in  a  crucible,  covered  with  another.  As  soon  as  mel- 
ted it  must  be  poured  out,  and  corked  up  tight  in  a  phial  to 
prevent  its  deliqueucing.  Sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas  may  be 
made  with  this  equally  as  well  as  the  sulphate  of  iron. 

Magnesia^  is  found  pure,  or  merely  combined  with  water  : 
sometimes  it  forms  one  of  the  constituents  of  the  soap  stone 
or  talcose  rocks,  of  asbestos,  and  some  other  minerals.  It  is 
penerally  obtained  from  sea  water,  after  it  is  separated  from 
the  common  salt:  it  exists  in  the  state  of  a  muriate  and  sul- 
phate in  sea  water,  from  which  it  is  obtained  by  mixing  with 
it  a  solution  of  common  pearlasb.  A  double  decomposition 
takes  place  ;  and  while  the  sulphate  of  potash  remains  in  sol- 
ution, the  carbonate  of  magnesia  falls  down.  This  is  the  car- 
bonated, or  white  magnesia  of  the  shops. 

Calcined  Magnesia,  Drop  diluted  sulphuric  acid  upon 
carbonate  of  magnesia  of  the  shops,  and  it  will  effervesce  vio- 
lently ;  that  is,  a  bubbling  will  be  caused  by  the  escape  of 
carbonic  acid  in  the  state  of  gas  :  put  a  little  of  the  same  car- 
bonate of  magnesia  into  a  crucible,  and  keep  it  about  the  white 
heat  of  iron  fifteen  minutes  :  now  after  it  cools,  drop  on  it 
diluted  sulphuric  acid,  and  it  will  scarcely  effervesce  because 
the  carbonic  acid  is  driven  out.  If  a  little  of  it  be  dissolved 
in  water  it  will  give  the  alkaline  test  with  red  cabbage,  much 
stronger  than  before  heating. 

It  is  difficult  to  drive  off  all  the  carbonic  acid  by  heat,  so  that  no  ef-- 
fervscenco  can  be  produced  by  the  application  ol  sulphuric  acid. 

Tooth  Powder.  Heat  finely  pulverized  charcoal  to  red- 
ness in  an  iron  skillet,  and  pouring  it  while  hot  into  a  bowl  of 
clean  water,  is  the  best  of  all  substances  to  preserve  the  teeth 
from  decay,  after  it  has  commenced.  If  kept  in  a  bottle,  it 
will  remain  under  water,  defended  from  gases,  and  if  shaken 
up  and  a  tea  spoonful  taken  occasionally  in   the   mouth,  and 


TRADESMAN'S    GUIDE.  S§ 

the  tcetli  rubbed  with  it,  every  thing  impure  will  beabsorbed* 

Putrid  meat  will  become  purified  by  immersing  it  in  a  similar  man- 
ner: putrid  water  is  purified  by  pouring  into  it  heated  charcoal  powder; 

2.  Rad,  irid,  flor.  four  ounces  ;  oss,  sepise,  two  ounces; 
crem.  tart,  one  ounce  ;  oL  caryoph.  sixteen  drops  ;  lake  16 
drops, 

3.  .Catechu,  one  ounce;  cort.  peruv.  flav.,  crem,  tart,  cassia, 
bol,  armen.,  of  each  4  drachms;  sang,  dracoD,  myrrh,  of  each 
two  (irachms, 

4.  Rose  pink,  20  ounces;  bol.  armen.  oss.  sepiae,  crem.  tart, 
of  each  8  ounces  ;  aij^rh  4  ounces  ;  rad.  irid.  lior.  2  ounces; 
ess.  bergam.  half  a  drachm. 

5.  Oss.  sepicG,  four  ouiices  ;  crem.  tart.  rad.  irid.  flor  of 
each  t-wo  ounces  ;   alum,  ustri,  rose  pink,  of  each  one  ounce. 

6.  Magnesia,  rad.  irid.  flor.,  rose  pink,  cretge  ppae,  of 
each  two  ounces  ;  natr.  ppi.  six  drachms  ;  oL  rhodii,  two 
drops. 

Ginger  Beer  Powders,  White  sugar,  one  drachm  two 
scruples  ;  ginger,  five  grains  ;  natr,  jjp,  twenty-six  grains  in 
«ach  blue  paper  :  acid  of  tartar,  one  scruple  and  ti  half  in 
each  white  paper.  These  quantities  are  for  half  a  pint  of 
water. 

Spruce  Beer  Powders,  White  sugar,  1  drachm  2  scruples; 
natr.  pp.  26  grains;  essence  of  spruce,  10  grains,  in  each  blue 
paper:  acid  of  tartar  ,half  a  drachm  in  each  white  paper;  for 
half  a  pint  of  water. 

Soda  Powders.  Carbonate  of  soda,  half  a  drachm  in  each 
blue  paper  :  acid  of  tartar,  twenty-five  grains,  in  each  white 
paper  ;  for  half  a  pint  of  water — a  very  pleasant  and  cooling 
beverage  in  summer  :  sugar,  if  desirable,  may  be  added  to  tha* 
paper  containing  the  acid  of  tartar. 

Portable  Lemonade.  Acid  of  tartar,  one  ounce  ;  sugar, 
six  ounces  ;  essence  of  lemon,  one  drachm  :  rub  together, 
divide  into  twenty-four  papers,  for  a  tumbler  of  water  each. 

Copperas^  Sulphate  of  Iron.  Put  diluted  sulphuric  acid 
into  a  Florence  flask,  consisting  of  about  five  times  as  much 
water  as  acid.  Apply  a  very  little  heat,  so  as  rather  to  warm 
than  heat  the  acid.  Drop  in  iron  filings  until  they  will  fall  to 
the  bottom  quietly  ;  pour  off  the  limpid  liquid  into  e,)rthen 
plates.  This  is  copperas  in  solution;  and  by  a  slow  evapor-^ 
ation  it  may  be  crystallized.  On  this  principle  the  copperas 
tif  commerce  is  manufactured  ;  but  the   process  is  differontf 


4# 


THE    ARTIST   AND 


Iron  pyrites  is  moistened  and  exposed  to  the  atmosphere  U 
considerable  time  in  a  shallow  vat  or  box  ;  after  it  become? 
covered  with  a  crust  it  is  dissolved  in  water  or  leached,  ana 
evaporated. 

Blue  Vitriol,  Boil  copper  filings  in  -sulphuric  acid,  and 
the  salt  will  be  formed  in  the  liquid  state  :  this  may  be  evap- 
orated in  the  usual  way. 

On  this  principle  the  blue  vitriol  of  the  shops  is  made, 
though  the  operation  is  not  similar  ;  the  native  sulphuret  is 
heated  and  exposed  to  air  and  moisture,  and  thereby  the  per- 
oxide is  obtained  ;  then  the  salt  is  readily  formed  by  pour- 
ing sulphuric  acid  upon  it. 

Oxymuriate  of  Potash.  Mix  common  salt  three  pounds^ 
manganese  two  pounds,  and  add  oil  of  vitrei  two  pounds,  pre- 
viously diluted  with  a  sufficient  quantity  of  water,  distil  into  a 
receiver  containing  prepared  kali,  six  ounces  :  dissolved  iii 
water,  three  pounds :  when  the  distillation  is  finished,  evap- 
orate the  liquid  in  the  receiver  slowly  in  the  dark  ;  the  oxy- 
muriate will  crystallize  first  in  flakes  ;  stimulant,  from  one  to 
two  grains  ;  explodes  when  struck,  or  dropped  into  acid. 

Salt  of  SorreL  From  the  leaves  of  wood  sorrel  bruised 
and  expressed  ;  the  juice  is  then  left  to  settle,  poured  off 
clear,  and  crystallized  by  slow  evaporation  ;  one  hundred 
weight  of  wood  sorrel  yields  five  or  six  ounces. 

2.  By  dropping  aqua  kali  into  a  saturated  solution  of  ox- 
alic acid  in  water,  it  will  precipitate,  and  may  be  separated 
by  filtration,  if  too  much  alkali  is  added,  it  is  taken  uo,  and 
will  require  an  addition  of  the  acid  to  throw  it  down  again  ; 
cooling— used  to  make  leraonadoj  and  whey,  as  also  salt  of 
lemons. 

Ammonia,  Ammonia  is  serviceable  in  dying,  and  \n  stain- 
ing ivory ;  but  its  principal  use  is  in  making  the  muriate  of 
ammonia,  of  which  it  is  the  bases.  It  is  formed  by  combin- 
ing ammonia  with  muriatic  acid.  It  is  known  in  commerce 
by  the  name  of  Sal  Ammoniac. 

Convey  some  muriatic  acid  gas  into  a  glass  jar  containing 
a  portion  of  ammoniacal  gas.  From  the  mixture  of  these 
two  invisible  gases  a  solid  substance  will  be  produced  j  viz. 
the  common  sal  ammoniac. 

Sal  ammoniac  is  used  by  some  dyers  in  what  they  call  com- 
position, to  prevent  the  tin  from  precipitating.  In  tinning 
metals  it  is  of  use  to  cleanse  the  surfaces,  and  to  prevent  them 


41 

from  oxydizing  by  the  heat  which  is  given  to  them  in  theop^ 
eration.  It  is  also  employed  in  the  assay  of  metals,  to  disco* 
ver  the  presence  of  iron.  Ammoniacal  ga^  maybe  procured 
by  heating  strong  liquid  ammonia;  this  gas  will  be  disenga- 
ged in  abundance.  On  account  of  its  affinity  for  water,  it 
must  be  received  over  mercury,  when  it  is  intended  to  exhibit 
it  in  the  state  of  gas*  Poiir  a  little  caustic  ammonia  into  & 
clear  solution  of  sulphate  of  zinc.  This  will  precipitate  the 
metal  in  a  white  powder.  If  the  phial  be  now  shaken,  the 
zinc  will  be  immediately  re-dissolved,  thus  serving  as  a  test 
to  distingiiish  zinc  from  iron  and  various  metals.  Drop  aS 
much  nitrate  of  copper  into  water  as  will  form  a  colourless 
isdlution  ;  then  add  a  little  ammonia,  equally  colourless,  and 
an  intense  blue  color  will  arise  from  the  mixture.  Take  the 
blue  solution  formed  by  the  last  experiment,  add  a  little  sul- 
phuric acid,  and  the  color  will  disappear  ;  pour  in  a  little  so- 
lution of  caustic  ammonia,  and  the  blue  colour  will  be  resto- 
red. Thus  may  the  liquor  be  alternately  changed  at  pleas- 
ure. Dissolve  some  oxide  of  cobalt  in  caustic  ammonia  ; 
this  will  produce  a  red  solution,  different  in  color  from  that 
of  all  other  metallic  solutions. 

,  1;  Double  elective  affinity/.  Take  about  four  parts  of  liiii- 
riate  of  lime,  and  five  parts  of  sulphate  of  soda,  weighing 
them  after  being  well  dried  over  coals,  on  plates.  Dissolve 
ihem  in  water  separately.  Now  mix:  them  in  a  wine-glass^ 
and  a  precipitate  of  lime  (gypsum)  will  soori  settle  at  the  bot- 
tom, and  a  solution  of  the  muridte  of  soda  will  stand  over  li; 
On.testijig  the  new  compounds  with  red  cabbage,  they  will 
be  foKnd  to  be  neutral  salts,  exhibiting  neither  the  acid  or  al- 
<kaline  test.  On  tasting  the  liquid,  it  will  be  found  a  solutidii 
of  table  salt. 

Corrosivfi  sublimnte  of  the  shops  is  made  upon  this  principle,  by  6tiU 
jphate  of  mercury,  and  muriate  of  soda. 

Dr.  Wallaston  constructed  a  scale,  by  whtT^h  the  artist  or 
chemist  can  at  sight  determine  what  proportions  of  any  com- 
pounds are  required  for  decomposing  each  other  without  lossi 
For  example,  if  a  given  quantity  of  sulphuric  acid  and  muri- 
atic acid  would  require  three  times  as  much  potash  as  alu- 
mine  for  saturation  :  though  all  these  acids  would  differ  fromf 
each  other  in  the  absolute  quantity  required. 

2.  Put  into  two  wine-glasses,  half  a  spoonful  of  muriatic 
*4 


42  THE    ARTIST    AN& 

acid  to  each  ;  weigh  two  equal  parcels  of  carbonate  of  sod's, 
about  a  teaspoonful  to  each  glass.  Drop  the  carbonate  of  so- 
da from  each  parcel  into  its  respective  glass,  till  effervescence 
ceases.  Now  weigh  what  remains  of  each  parcel,  and  they 
will  be  found  equal*  Try  the  two  liquids  with  tasting  rods, 
(pine  sticks  are  as  good  for  the  purpose  as  tasting  rods,)  and 
the  taste  of  common  table  salt  will  be  recognized.  From  this 
eJfperiment  will  be  learned  that  the  law  of  definite  propor- 
tiotis,  is  of  great  importance  in  the  arts.  It  regulates  the  uni- 
formity of  compound  bodies,  and  prevents  the  evils  which 
might  arise  from  carelessness  or  mistake  in  the  manufacture 
of  many  articles.  For  example,  in  the  manufacture  of  cop- 
peras, 36  parts  of  protoxyde  of  iron  will  unite  with  precisely 
40  parts  of  sulphuric  acid.  And  in  the  manufacture  of  white 
vitriol,  42  parts  of  oxide  of  zinc  will  unite  with  40  parts  of 
sulphuric  acid.  These  are  the  uniform  proportions  in  the 
dry  state,  and  each  take  63  p^wts  of  water  for  crystallization. 
3.  Mix  alcohol  and  water,  or  sulphuric  acid  aad  water. 
The  qualities  and  sensible  proportions  of  both  these  liquids 
will  remain  urK^hanged,  being  diffused  among  the  water,  there 
will  be  less  of  them  in  a  given  measure,  but  they  will  remain 
unchanged.  Thus,  by  affinity,  some  substances  unite  in  in- 
definite proportions,  and  their  properties  and  sensible  quali- 
ties are  not  changed, 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

Simple  Affinity — Soaps — Pomades, 

To  maJce  Soap,  Melt  a  little  common  potash  in  an  iron 
ladle,  then  put  into  it  small  bits  of  fresh  meat  and  woollen 
rags,  and  boil  them  in  a  short  time.  The  rags  and  meat  will 
be  dissolved  and  soap  formed.  On  this  principle  soap  is  made 
by  boiling  any  animal  substance  with  lye.  It  requires  very 
strong  lye,,  or  rather  potash,  to  convert  rags  and  some  other 
animal  substances  into  soap. 

White  Soap,  Into  half  a  wineglass  of  water,  pour  a  tea- 
spoonful  of  olive  oil — no  combination  takes  place— drop  in  a 
piece  of  pearlash  of  the  size  of  half  a  pigeon's  egg  i  let  it 
dissolve  and  stir  the  mixture,  which  effects  a  chemical  eom-^ 
bination,  and  produces  white  soap. 

This  experiment  illustrates  simple  affinity. 

Jiard  Soap,     Heat  in  a  clean  tin  basin,  good  jsoft  soap, 


tradesman's  guide.  43 

until  dissolved,  with  about  twice  its  measure  of  rain  or  river 
water — then  put  in  about  half  a  gill  of  fine  common  salt,  to 
a  quart  of  this  solution.  The  muriatic  acid  of  the  salt  will 
unite  with  the  potash  of  the  soap,  and  leave  the  soda  of  the 
salt  to  unite  with  the  oil  of  the  soap;  this  latter  compound, 
after  al»ttle  boiling,  will  become  sojnewhat  dense  and  float  on 
the  surface  of  the  liquid.  On  draining  off  the  liquid,  which 
is  chiefly  muriate  of  potash,  and  drying  the  floating  compoun  d 
we  obtain  common  hard  soap. 

Soap  boilors  make  common  hard  soap  on  this  principle.  The  liquid 
muriate  of  potash,  they  call  waste  lye,  or  dead  lye.  The  fine  hard  soap 
is  made  directly  from  the  barilla  or  kelp,  which  is  a  rough  sub-carbon-« 
ate  of  soda,  made  from  the  leached  ashes  of  sea-weeds. 

White  Wash  Baits,  One  pound  sap.  alb.  hisp. ;  3  pts. 
aqua  rosar.  album,  ovor  no.  ij.  ;  one  ounce  aq.  kali  ppi.  :  boil 
till  hard  again,  add  one  scruple  ol.  lign.,  rhod.,  ten  drops  ol. 
caryoph.  one  drachm  ess.  jasiuin.  half  a  drachm  of  ess.  ne- 
roli,  and  form  into  squares. 

2.  Five  pounds  of  white  soap,  four  ounces  rad.  irid.  flor  ; 
three  ounc.  amyli  ;   one  ounce,  styrae  calum.  aq.  rosar.  q.  s. 

3.  One  pound  sap.  alb.  hisp.  almonds  blanched,  beat  up 
into  a  paste  with  rose  water  and  orange  flower  water,  three 
ounces;  one  ounce  magister.  marcasitae  ;  two  drachms  of 
kali  ppi. ;  six  grains  of  musk  ;  three  grains  of  cive  ;  one 
scruple  ol.  lign.  rliodi  ;   one  drachm  ess.  jasmin. 

Cream  Balls,  Seven  pounds  white  curd  soap  ;  one  pound 
amyli  ;  water  a  sufficient  quatitity  ;  beat  it  together,  weigh  it 
into  ounce  balls,  and  roll  in  pulverized  amyli. 

White  soap,  starch,  of  each  one  pound  ;  ess.  lemon  four 
drachms;  aq.  rosar.  eight  ounces;  make  into  balls  of  three 
ounces  and  a  half  each. 

Red  Mottled  Wash  Balls,  Cut  white  soap  into  small 
square  pieces,  roll  them  in  vermilion,  and  squeeze  the  pieces 
together  into  balls  without  mixing  them  more  than  is  neces- 
sary. 

Blue  Mottled  Wash  Balls,  In  like  manner  rc.lling  the 
pieces  in  powder  blue. 

Windsor  Soap,  Hard  curd  soap,  melted  and  scented  with 
ol.  carui  and  ess.  bergam.  ;  an  inferior  sort  is  made  with  ol. 
carui  only. 

Starkei/'s  Soap,  Made  by  rubbing  warm  kali  ppi.  with 
ol.  turpentine,  adding  a  little  water. 


44  THE    AilTlbT    AM) 

Macguier^s  Acid  Soap.  Four  ounces  sapou.  ven. ;  o1. 
vitriol,  q.  s.  add  the  acid  by  degrees  to  tlie  soap,  rendered 
soft  by  a  little  water,  continually  rubbing  the  mass  in  a  mor- 
tar-—detergent,  used  when  alkalies  would  be  prejudicial. 

Shaving  Liquid — Shaving  Oil.  Sap.  Moll,  four  pounds; 
spirits  of  wine  rectified  five  pints. 

Essaice  Roy  ale  pour  fair  la  barhc.  Sap.  cast,  eight  oz., 
proof  spirits  one  pint. 

Pomade  dc  la  jeuncsse.  Pomatum  mixed  wi^h  pearl  whiter 
or  magestery  of  bismuth,  turns  the  hair  black. 

Pomade  Divine.  One  pound  eight  ounces  of  beef's  mar- 
row ;  cinnamon,  one  ounce  and  a  half;  stor.  calani.  benzoi-* 
ni,  rad.  irid  flor.  of  each  once  ounce;  caryoph.  nuc.  myrist. 
of  each  one  drachm. 

2.  Sevi.  ovilli,  one  pound  eight  oimces  ;  stor.  calam,  ben- 
zoini,  rad.  irid.  flor.,  rad  cyperi,  cinnam,  caryoph.  arom.  nuc. 
rnosch.,  of  each  nine  drachms  ;  keep  melted  in  a  gentle  heat 
for  some  time,  thion  strain. 

3.  Sevi.  ovilli  four  pounds  ;  cera  alb.  one  pound  ;  ess. 
bergam.  ess.  lemon,  of  each  one  ounce  and  a  half;  ol.  lav- 
end.,  ol.  orijani,  of  each  four  drachms. 

CHAPTER  XIY. 

The  injlucnce  of  Premiums  in  Scotland  and  Ireland^ — Ba- 
lance of  Trade  in  favour  of  Great  Britain-— Middle  and 
Eastern  States. 

It  is  well  understood  that  artificers,  or  artisans,  or  mecha- 
nics, are  those  who  carrj'  on  any  mechanical  trade  ;  that  they 
are  very  numerous  in  all  great  trading  countries;  still,  per- 
haps, their  importance  in  society  is  not  generally  considered 
by  those,  who  move  (in  what  is  said  to  be)  a  more  exalted 
sphere  of  life  ;  or  more  likely,  by  those  ivho  flatter  themselves 
that  they  have  been  cast  in  finer  moulds.  It  is  not  expected; 
that  this  essay  will  be  very  pleasing  to  the  taste  o^  those  gen- 
tlemen^ who  measure  their  consequence  either  by  their  cash 
or  garb  ;  but  we  hope  it  will  contribute  in  some  measure  to 
produce  a  better  feeling  towards  so  important  a  class  of  com- 
munity, the  mechanics,  and  lead  all  to  examine,  if  they  are 
not  alloyed  with  more  human  vanity  than  ordinarily  becomes 
them.  As  things  are  constituted  at  present  among  the  trad- 
ing countries  of  the  world,  those  which  subsist  upon  their  na- 
lural  productions,  or  merely  by  bartciing  or  exchanging  such' 


tradesmen's  guide.  45 

tortimodltles,  for  those  of  other  countries,  have  never  distin- 
giiished  themselves  as  a  trading  people.  Tlie  Indians  in 
North  America,  as  well  as  the  Negroes  in  Africa,  are  plain 
instances  of  the  fact.  If  the  Chinese  were  deprived  of  their 
useful  artificers,  (or,  if  you  please,  manufacturers,  for,  they 
may  as  reasonably  be  called  the  one  as  the  other,  though  cus- 
toiii  among  us  has  made  a  distinction,)  they  would  very  pro- 
bably degenerate  into  the  like  savage  dispositions  with  the 
wildest  Africans,  or  American  Indians.  And  this  we  pre- 
sume, also,  might  be  the  case  with  the  people  of  the  United 
States.  It  is  the  arts  which  keep  the  mass  of  people  in  use- 
ful action,  and  which  keep  their  minds  also  on  useful  inven-  ^ 
tion,  beneficial  to  the  whole  community  ;  consequently,  this 
is  the  grand  preservative  against  that  barbarism,  brutality  and 
a  slothfulness  in  trade,  which  ever  attend  an  indolent  and  in- 
active stupidit3^  The  due  cultivation  of  practical  manual  arts 
in  a  nation,  has  a  greater  tendency  to  polish,  and  humanize 
mankind,  than  mere  speculative  science,  however  refined  and 
sublime  it  ma}^  be  ;  and  tliese  arts  are  not  only  the  most  na- 
turally adapted  to  the  bulk  of  the  people,  but  by  giving  real 
existence  to  their  ideas,  by  their  practical  inventions,  improve 
their  minds  more  sensibly  and  feelingly,, than  any  ideal  con- 
templation could  do,  which  ma>  have  no  other  being,  but  in 
the  mind  of  the  speculator.  Moreover,  it  is  observable,  that 
those  who  are  fruitful  in  useful  inventions  and  discoveries,  in 
the  practical  mechanical  arts,  are  men,  not  onl}'  of  the  great- 
est utility,  but  possess  an  understanding,  which  should  be 
most  highly  estimated.  Whether  this  may  be  attributed  to 
the  constant  exercise  of  their  intellectual  faculties  in  those 
things  which  they  see  and/eeZ,  may  deserve  the  consideration 
of  those  who  contemplate  on  the  most  natural  way  of  improv- 
ing the  mind. 

The  delicate  mechanism  of  a  watch,  by  those  great  artists,. 
a  Graham,,  or  an  Ellicot,  demonstrate  the  utility  of  such  arti- 
sans to  a  trading  country,  as  their  workmanship  has  been  ad- 
mired throughout  the  civilized  world.  It  is  the  same  by  other 
artificers  who  excel  in^  tjieir  peculiar  branch.  This  not  only 
brings  credit  and  honour,  but  treasures  into  a  nation,  in  pro- 
portion as  they  are  stocked  with  such  celebrated  mechanics 
or  artificers.  An  English  writer  sa3's,  "  nothing  is  more  ob- 
vious than  that  the  commerce  and  navigation  of  the  nation, 
principally  depends  on  the  daily  improvement  made  by  our 


46  THE    ARTIST    AND 

artificers,  in  the  infinite  and  amazing  variety  in  our  mechanic 
and  manufactural  arts  ;  wherefi)re,  artists,  who  strike  out  new 
inventions,  or  who  improve  the  ohl  mechanics  and  manufacr 
tures,  are  de:ierving  of  some  regard  and  encouragement,  more 
than  they  acquire  to  themselves,  by  dint  of  their  own  pecu- 
liar profession  only."  Experience  has  manifested  the  ex- 
traordinary effeci  of  those  small  rewards  given  in  ScotlaiM 
and  Ireland,  for  the  improvement  of  their  manufactures  ; 
though  it  is  not  always  the  case,  that  premiums  operate  so 
powerfully,  as  the  motive  of  emulation  ;  for  that  credit  and 
reputation,  which  attends  a  man's  excelling  in  his  employ- 
ment, has,  sometimes,  a  far  greater  influence  upon  the  indus- 
trious and  ingenious  mind,  than  pecuniary  rewards  only.  Yet 
these  are  not  to  be  neglected  in  trading  countries  ;  as  it  is 
most  commonly  the  case,  that  new  inventions  or  improve- 
ments, made  by  one  for  the  benefit  of  trade,  are  soon  enjoy- 
ed equally  by  all  ;  the  inventors,  very  rarely,  being  able  to 
preserve  the  benefit  to  themselves,  scarcely  long  enough,  to 
recompense  for  the  time  and  expense  they  have  generally 
been  obliged  to  bestow  upon  them. 

If  it  was  fashionable  for  persons  of  leisure  to  devote  a  pro- 
portion of  their  rural  retirements  to  practical  or  experimental 
philosophy,  it  might  not  only  prove  a  salubrious  bodily  exer- 
cise to  them,  but  a  great  benefit  and  advantage  to  our  arti- 
ficers in  general,  and  consequently  to  the  general  trade  and 
tarffic  of  the  country. 

The  mechanic  inventions  are  improved  by  others,  besides 
the  common  artificers  themselves.  This  will  undeniable  ap- 
pear, if  we  will  be  convinced  by  instances;  for  it  is  evident, 
that  various  naanufactures  have  been  given  us  by  men, 
who  were  not  bred  up  in  trades  that  resembled  those  which 
they  discovered.  The  admirable  art  of  composing  letters,  so 
far  from  being  started  by  a  man  of  learning,  was  the  device 
of  a  soldier  ;  and  powder,  to  make  recompense,  was  invented 
by  a  monk,  whose  course  of  life  was  most  averse  from  hand- 
ling the  materials  of  war.  The  ancient  Tyrian  purple  was 
brought  to  light  by  a  fisher  ;  and  if  ever  it  can  be  recovered, 
it  is  likely  to  be  done  by  some  such  accident.  The  scarlet 
of  the  moderns  is  a  very  beautiful  colour,  and  it  was  the  pro- 
duction of  a  chemist  and  not  of  a  dyer.  The  warmth  and 
vigour  which  attend  new  discoveries,  is  seldom  confined  to  its 
own  sphere  ;  but  is  gerierally  extended  to  the  ornament  of  its 


47 

neighbour.  The  ordinary  method  in  which  this  happens,  is 
the  introduction  of  new  arts.  It  is  true,  indeed,  the  increase 
of  tradesmen  is  an  injury  to  others  that  are  bred  up  in  parti- 
cular trades,  if  they  are  enabled  to  supply  all  demands  in  their 
various  branches  ;  but  there  can  never  be  too  great  a  surplus 
of  trades.  Tha"  country  is  still  the  richest,  and  most  power- 
ful, which  produces  and  employs  the  greatest  number  of  arti- 
ficers and  manufucturers. 

The  hands  of  men  employed,  are  true  riches  ;  the  saving 
of  those  hands  by  invention  of  arts,  and  applying  them  to 
other  works;  will  increase  those  riches.  Where  this  is  done, 
there  will  never  a  sufficient  subject  for  profit  be  wanting  ; 
for,  if  there  is  not  vent  for  the  productions  at  home,  a  market 
will  be  opened  abroad.  Tims,  in  those  districts  where  com- 
merce and  manufactures  do  not  flourish  to  any  degree,  exchange 
is  against  them,  and  in  favour  of  those  places,  where  they  are 
more  extended  ;  hence  we  learn  the  balance  of  trade  is  against 
us,  and  in  favour  of  Great  Britain  ;  but  we  need  not  cross  the 
Atlantic  to  maintain  our  position,  for  the  argument  is  appli- 
cable tQ  the  western  and  southern  in  favour  of  the  middle  and 
New-England  states  ;  to  those  who  negotiate  in  bills  of  ex- 
change, this  subject  cannot  be  new.  Where  the  ways  of  life 
are  few,  the  fountains  of  profit  wll  be  possessed  by  few; 
whence  it  is  manifest  that  poverty  among  a  people  is  caused 
by  a  small  number,  not  by  having  a  multitude  engaged  in  a 
variety  of  trades.  An  English  writer  asserts,  that,  "by  the 
increase  of  artificers  and  manufacturers,  all"  things  will  bo 
dearer,  because  more  must  be  maintained  ;  for  the  high  rate 
of  things  is  an  argument  of  the  flourishing,  and  the  cheapness, 
of  the  scarcity  of  money,  and  ill-peopling  of  all  countries. 
The  first  is  a  sign  of  many  inhabitants,  which  is  true  great- 
ness, the  second  is  only  a  fit  subject  for  poets  to  describe,  and 
to  compare  to  their  golden  age  ;  for,  where  all  things  are 
without  price  or  value,  they  will  be  without  arts,  or  empire, 
or  strength."  From  the  sentiments  of  this  zealous  promoter 
of  the  useful  art^s,  for  the  benefit  of  commerce,  it  is  evident 
that  he  makes  the  prosperity  of  a  trading  nation  to  consist  in 
the  multiplying  of  the  number  of  new  trades  ;  that  is  to  say, 
in  multiplying  the  different  species  of  mechanics,  artificers 
and  manufacturers  ;  it  is  for  want  of  this,  that  all  the  old  ways 
of  gain  become  overstocked,  and  then  people  complain  for 
want  of  trade,  when  the  true   cause  is  owing  to  the  want  of 


46  THE    AUTIST    AND 

art,  or  to  the  waul  of  the  hivention  of  a  number  of  new  trades, 
and  new  arts,  in  proportion  to  the  increase  of  population,  and 
in  proportion  as  other  rival  states  strike  into  the  like  trades 
and  arts,  with  similar  advantages.  .  Finally,  if  our  labourers 
are  as  diligent  as  our  lawgivers,  we  shall  prove  the  most  la- 
bourious,  if  not  the  most  wealthy  nation  under  heaven.  But 
the  true  method  of  increasing  industry,  and  improvement,  and 
wealth,  and  respectability,  is  that  which  was  recommended 
by  the  Royal  Society  of  London^  "  by  works  and  endeavours, 
and  not  by  the  prescriptions  of  words,  or  pajjer  com- 
mands,''^ 

CHAPTER  XV. 

Mi7ieralog}j— characters  of  Minerals — classification  of  31  in- 
crals — Salt  Springs — Platina — Gold — Silver — Mercury 
Copper — Lead — Iron — Tin — Zinc Manganese — Anti- 
mony— Arsenic, 

MINERALOGY. 

The  whole  science  of  mineralogy  has  been  created  since 
the  year  1770.  All  the  solid  materials  of  which  this  globe 
of  ours  is  composed  have  received  the  name  of  minerals.  But 
it  is  only  very  lately  that  the  method  of  ascertaining  the  com- 
ponent parts  of  these  substances  was  discovered,  or  that  it 
was  possible  to  describe  them  so  as  to  be  intelligible  to  oth- 
ers. Nothing  at  first  appears  easier  to  describe  than  a  min- 
eral, but  in  reality  it  is  attended  with  a  great  deal  of  difficul- 
ty. The  properties  of  minerals  must  be  described  in  terms 
rigidly  accurate,  which  convey  precise  ideas  of  the  very  pro- 
perties intended,  and  of  no  other.  The  smallest  deviation 
would  lead  to  confusion  and-uncertaint3^  Mineralogy  there- 
fore must  have  a  language  of  its  own,  that  is  to  saj-,  it  must 
have  a  term  to  denote  every  mineralogical  property,  and  each 
of  these  terms  must  be  accurately  defined.  The  language  of 
mineralogy  was  invented  by  the  celebrated  Werner,  of  Fry- 
biirg,  and  first  made  known  to  the  world  by  the  publication 
of  his  treatise  on  the  External  Characters  of  Minerals,  The 
object  of  this  philosopher  was  to  invent  a  method  of  descri- 
bing minerals  with  such  precision,  that  every  species  could 
readily  be  recognized  by  those  who  were  unacquainted  with 
the  terms  employed.  For  this  purpose,  it  was  necessary  to 
make  use  of  those  pro{)er:ies  only,  which  presented  them- 
selves to  our  senses  on  inspecting  the  mineral.     These  were 


tradesman's  *tiUIDE,  49 

Tei^^^^IVenier,  external  clmraclers,  because  ibey  may  be 
ascertained  without  destroying  the  mineral  examined.  These 
consti'tute  the  first  division  of  the  characters  of  minerals.  To 
the  second  belong  those  which  are  derived  from  a  chemical 
composition,  or  discovered  by  any  chemical  change  which  the 
mineral  suflers ;  to  the  third,  are  refered  those  properties 
which  are  afforded  by  certain  physical  characters,  derived 
from  circumstances  frequentl}^  observed  with  regard  to  a  min- 
eral, as  to  the  place  where  it  is  found,  or  the  minerijls  by 
which  it  is  usually  accomj)anied. 

Werner  divides  the  external  characters  of  minerals  into  two 
kinds,  viz.  general  and  particular »  The  general  characters 
are  the  following  :  1.  Colour.  2.  Cohesion.  2.  Unctuos- 
ity.  4.  Coldness.  5.  Weight.  6.  Smell.  7.  Taste. — 
The  particular  characters  are  :  1.  Aspect  of  surface.  2.  As- 
pect of  the  fracture.  3.  Aspect  of  the  distinct  concretions. 
4.  General  aspect.  5.  Hardness.  6.  Tenacity.  7.  Fran- 
gibility.  8.  Flexib'lity.  9.  Adhesion  to  the  tongue.  10. 
sound. 

Genera!  Characters,  1,  The  colours  of  minerals  are  ex- 
tremely various.  Werner  conceives  eight  fundamental  col- 
ours, and  describes  rdl  the  rest  as  compounds  of  various  pro- 
portions of  these.  The  fundamental  colours  are,  1.  Snow 
white.  2i  Ash  Grey.  3.  Velvet  black.  4.  Berlin  or  Pru- 
sian  blue.  5.  Emerald  green.  6.  Lemon  }eHow.  7.  Car- 
mine red.  8.  Chcsnut  brown.  IF.  With  respect  to  coke- 
sion,  minerals  are  either,  solicl,  friable,  or  fluid.  III.  With 
respect  to  unctuosity,  minerals  are  distinguished  into  greasy 
^cid  meagre  ;  the  first  have  a  certain  degree  of  greasiness  in 
feeling  ;  the  second  not.  The  other  four  general  characters 
require  no  particular  description. 

Partknifar  Characters,  I.  In  the  aspect  of  the  surface  of 
the  mineral,  three  things  claim  attention.  1.  The  shape  of 
the  mineral.  2.  The  kind  of  s?^r/«cc.  3.  The  Zz^s^re  of  the 
surface,  which  is  either  splendent,  shining,  glistening,  glim- 
mering, or  dull.  II.  When  a  mineral  is  broken,  the  new 
surface  exposed  is  called  the  fracture.  Three  things  claim 
attention:  1.  The  lustre  of  the  fracture.  2.  The  kind  of 
fracture.  3.  The  shape  of  the  fragments.  III.  Distinct 
concretions  are  distinct  masses,  which  may  be  separated  from 
each  other,  without  breaking  through  the  solid  part  of  the 
mineral,  by  natural  seams.     Three  particulars    in    respect  to 


50  THE    ARTIST    AND 

them  are,  i  Their  shape.  2.  Their  surface,  3.  Thch' 
lustre,  IV.  Under  the  head  of  general  aspect,  three  parti- 
culars are  comprehended.  1.  The  transparency,  2.  The 
streak,  3.  The  soiling,  or  stain  left  when  ruhbcd.  V.  Min- 
erals are  either,  1.  Hard,  2,  Semi-hard,  or  3.  Soft,  VI. 
With  respect  to  tenacity,  minerals  are,  1.  BrittU.^  when  on 
being  cut  with  a  knife  the  particles  fl}'  away  with  a  noise.  2. 
Sectile,  when  the  particles  do  not  fly  off  but  remain.  3. 
Ductile,  when  the  mineral  can  be  cut  into  slices.  VII.  By 
frangibility  is  meant  the  resistance  which  minerals  make 
when  we  attempt  to  break  them.  The  degrees  are  five,  1. 
Vej-y  tough,  2,'  Tough,  3,  Moderately  tough,  4.  Fra- 
gile, 5.  Very  fragile,  VIIL  With  respect  \o  flexibility, 
somi?  are,  \,  Elastic,  Others,  2.  Common,  Others,  3.  In- 
fexible,  IX»  Some  minevnh  ad hei'c  to  the  tongue,  1,  Very 
strongly.  2.  Others,  moderately,  3,  Others,  slightly,  4. 
And  others,  vei-y  slightly,  X.  Some  minerals  give  a  ringing 
sound,  others  a  grating  sound,  and  others  a  creaking  sound, 
as  tin.  With  respect  to  electricity,  some  minerals  become 
electric  when  heated,  others  when  rubbed,  others  cannot  be 
rendered  electric.  The  electricity  of  some  is  positive,  of  oth- 
ers negative, 

CLASSTFfCATION  OF   MINERALS. 

Minerals  are  usually  arranged  under  four  classes  ;  earthy, 
saline,  inflammable  and  metalic.  The  earthy  contain  all  such 
as  derive  their  qualities  from  1he  earths  ;  and  they  are  divided 
into  genera,  according  to  the  particular  earth,  which  pre- 
dominates in  each,  or  more  properly  into,  families,  according 
to  their  resemblance,  in  external  characters,  as  the  diamond 
family,  the  ruby  family,  tale  family,  and  others.  The  dia- 
mond, of  which  there  is  only  a  single  species,  is  the  hardest 
and  most  beautiful  of  all  the  mineral  productions.  When 
heated  to  the  temperature  of  melting  copper,  and  exposed  to 
a  current  of  air,  it  is  gradually  but  completely  combustible. 
It  is  wholly  converted  into  carbonic  acid,  and  therefore  con- 
sists of  pure  carbon.  By  means  of  diamond  power,  this  sub- 
stance can  be  cut  and  polished  on  a  wheel,  in  the  same  way  as 
other  gems  are  wrought  by  emery.  It  is  manufactured"  by 
jewellers  into  brilliants  and  rose  diamonds;  employed  by 
glaziers  for  cutting  glass,  by  lapidaries  for  cutting  and  engra- 
ving on  the  hardest  gems,  and  in  the  finer  kinds  of  clock  work 


TRADESMAN  S    GUIDE.  51 

The  ruby  family  is  composed  of  seven  species.  They  are  ' 
all  extremely  hard,  and  several  of  them  highly  valued  on  ac- 
count of  their  beauty.  The  saline  minerals  comprehend  all 
the  combinations  of  alkalies  with  acids,  which  exist  in  the 
mineral  kingdom ;  such  as  salt  petre  or  nitrate  of  potash, 
common  rock  salt,  or  muriate  of  soda,  and  sal  ammoniac,  or 
the  muriate  of  ammonia. 

The  salt  springs  in  some  parts  of  the  United  States,  owe 
their  origin  to  beds  of  fossil  salt.  The  rain  water  which  pen- 
etrates to  their  surface,  effects  the  solution  of  a  certain  por- 
tion of^  them,  with  which  it  comes  in  contact,  and  thus  bo- 
comes  in  some  cases,  it  is  said,  ten  times  Salter  than  the  water 
of  the  sea.  The  wjlammable  minerals,  comprehend  all  com- 
bustible bodies,  except  metals  and  the  diamond,  and  include 
sulphur,  resins,  bitumens,  and  graphite.  Among  the  bitumen 
are  found  the  several  varieties  of  mineral  coal,  that  are  used 
for  fuel,  gas  lights,  S^c, 

The  metalic  minerals  comprehend  all  the  mineral  bodies 
that  are  composed  either  entirely  of  metals^  or  of  which  me- 
tals constitute  the  most  considerable  aud  important  part.  It 
is  from  the  minerals  of  this  class  that  all  metals  are  extracted. 
The  ores  are  found  in  a  native  state,  either  simple,  consisting 
of  only  one  substance,  or  compound,  when  composed  of  two 
or  more  substances.  Of  the  metals,  the  first  is  jjlatina^ 
which  is  the  heaviest.  Platina  is  found  among  the  gold  ores 
of  South  America,  in  the  form  of  small  grains  or  scales.  Its 
colour  is  between  steel  grey  and  silver  white,  and  its  ductility 
and  malleability  is  very  great.  Gold  is  never  found  in  a  min- 
eralized state,  but  it  occurs  native  in  many  part^  of  the  world 
generally  alloyed  with  a  little  silver  or  copper,  and  common- 
ly in  the  form  of  grains.  It  is  the  heaviest  metal  of  all  me- 
tals except  platina,  and  although  its  tenacity  is  such  that  a 
wire  of  one  tenth  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  will  support  a 
weight  of  five  hundred  pounds  without  breaking,  yet  it  pos- 
sesses less  tenacity  than  iron,  copper,  platina  or  silver.  It 
is  ductile  and  malleable  beyond  any  known  limits.  The 
gold  beaters  extend  it  by  hammering  a  number  of  thin  rolled 
plates  between  skins  or  animal  membranes,  upon  blocks  of 
marble  fixed  in  wooden  frames,  A  grain  of  gold  has  been 
extended  to  more  than  forty  two  square  inches  of  leaf,  and  an 
ounce,  wliich  in  the  form  of  a  cube,  is  not  half  an  inch  either 
high,  broad,  or  long,  is  beaten  under  the  hammer  into  a  siir*. 


52  THE    ARTIST    AND 

face  of  146  1-2  square  feet.  There  arc  gold  leaves,  not 
thicker  in  some  parts,  than  the  three  hundred  and  sixty  thou- 
sandth par#of  an  inch  ;  hut  on  wire  used  by  lace  makers  it  is 
still  thinner.  An  ingot  of  silver,  usually  about  thirty  pounds 
weight,  is  rounded  into  an  inch  and  a  half  in  diameter,  and 
22  inches  long.  Tvro  ounces  of  gold  leaf  are  sufficient  to 
cover  this  cylinder,  and  frequently  effected  with  a  little  more 
than  one.  The  ingot  is  repeated  drawn  through  the  holes  of 
several  irons,  each  smaller  than  the  other,  till  it  becomes  finer 
than  a  hair;  and  yet  the  gold  covers  it,  and  does  not  leave 
the  minutest  part  of  the  silver  bare,  eyen  to  the  microscope. 
It  has  been  calculated  that  it  w^ould  take  14  millions  of  filings 
of  gold,  such  as  are  on  some  gilt  wire,  to  make  up  the  thick- 
ness of  one  inch.  The  ductility  of  it  is  such,  that  one  ounce 
is  sufficient  to  gild  a  silver  wire  more  than  thirteen  hundred 
miles  long. 

Gold  may  be  dissolved  in  nitro-muriatic  acid  and  it  thus 
becomes  muriate  of  gold,  which  is  obtained  in  small  crystals, 
and  is  very  soluble  in  water.  If  vvhite  satin  ribbon,  or  silk, 
be  moistened  with  a  diluted  solution  of  gold,  and,  while  moist 
exposed  to  hydrogen,  or  sulphuiic  acid  gas,  the  metal  will 
be  immediately  reduced  and  the  silk  become  gilt  with  a  re- 
gular coat  of  gold.  The  potters  dissolve  gold  to  be  applied 
to  the  common  porcelain  ;  and  it  is  used  in  a  state  of  solution  , 
for  staining  ivory  and  ornamental  feathers.  Jt  gives  a  beau- 
tiful purple  red ;  even  marble  may  be  stained  with  it. 

Silver,  is  the  most  brilliant  of  metals.  You  may  know 
when  silver  is  pure,  by  heating  it  in  a  common  fire,  or  in  the 
flame  of  a  candle;  if  it  is  alloyed  it  will  become  tarnished  ; 
but  if  it  be  pure  silver,  it  will  remain  perfectly  white.  It  is 
exceedingly  ductile,  of  great  malleability  and  tecacitj'. 

Of  the  salts  of  silver,  the  nitrate  is  best  known,  and  when 
melted  and  run  into  moulds,  it  forms  the  lunar  caustic,  of  the 
apothecary. 

Mercury,  in  the  temperature  of  our  atmosphere,  is  a  white 
fluid  metal,  having  the  appearance  of  melted  silver.  When 
submitted  to  a  sufficient  degree  of  cold  it  is  similar  in  appear- 
ance  to  other  metals,  and  may  be  beaten  into  plates;  at  the 
poles  it  would  probably  be  ahvays  solid. 

The  quicksilver  mine  of  Guailea  Velica,  in  Peru,  is  170 
fathoms  in  circumference,  and  480  deep.  In  this  profound 
nbyss  are   seen  streets,  squares  and  a  chapel :  thousands  of 


TRAl>ESMAx\'s    GUIDE.  5 J 

BSmbeaux  are  continually  burning  to  enlighten  it.  Those 
who  work  in  th^  mine  are  generally  afllicted  with  convulsions. 
JXctwithstanding  this  the  unfortunate  victims  of  insatiable 
avarice  are  crowded  together,  and  plunged  naked  into  these 
abysses.  Tyranny  has  invented  this  refinement  in  cruelty, 
to  render  it  im])ossible  for  any  thing  to  escape  its  restless  vi- 
gilance. 

Copper^  is  the  most  ductile  of  all  the  metals  except  gold. 
The  salts  of  copper  are  numerous  and  much  used  in  the  arts 
connected  with  chemistry.  All  the  salts  are  poisonous  ;  there- 
fore, great  care  should  be  taken  not  to  taste  wantonly  the 
solutions. 

Lead,  is  malleable  and  ductile,  but  possesses  wQry  litlc  ten- 
acity. It  may  be  mixed  with  gold  and  silver  in  a  moderate 
heat;  but  when  the  heat  is  much  increased,  the  lead  rises  to 
the  surface,  combined  with  all  heterogeneous  matters.  The 
ore  of  lead  is  so  poisonous,  that  the  steam  arising  from  the 
furnaces  where  it  is  worked,  infects  the  grass,  in  all  the 
neighboring  places,  and  kills  the  animals  which  feed  on  it. 
Culinary  vessels,  lined  wiih  a  mixture  of  tin  and  lead,  which 
is  the  usuhI  tinning,  are  apt  to  communicate  to  acid  food,  per- 
nicious qualities,  and  require  to  be  used  with  great  caution. 
The  same  may  be  said  of  liquors,  and  other  acid  substances 
kept  in  glazed  ware,  and  oi  wines  adulterated  with  litharge, 
and  such  other  preparations  of  lead  as  are  sometimes  used, 
for  the  purpose  of  rendering  them  sweet. 

Iron,  If  utility  were  made  the  standard  of  estir»ation, 
iron  would  hold  the  first  place  in  the  class  of  metals,  aiid 
would  be  counted  more  valuable  than  gold,  as  it  appears  in- 
dispensably necessary  to  the  carrying  on  of  every  manufac- 
ture. There  has  never  been  an  instance  of  a  nation,  ac- 
quainted with  the  art  of  manufacturing  iron,  which  did  not  in 
time  attain  to  a  degree  of  civilisation,  greatly  beyond  the  in- 
habitants of  those  countrif^s  where  this  metal  was  wanting,  or 
its  use  unknown.  It  is  plentifully  and  universally  diffused 
throughout  nature,  pervading  almost  every  thing,  and  is  the 
chief  cause  of  colour  in  earths  and  stones.  It  may  be  detcct- 
eb  in  plants  and  animal  fluids. 

Tin,  must  have  been  known  very  early,  as  it  is  mentioned 
by  Homer,  and  also  in  ihe  books  of  Moses.  Tin  entes  into 
combination  with  many  of  the  metals,  and  forms  alloys  with 
them,  some  of  which  are  of  ^reat  importance.     It  is  not  very 

5* 


54  •  TKC    AllTlST    ANI> 

ductile,  but  so  malleable,  that  it  may  bo  beaten  into  leaves 
thinner  than  paper.*  Tin  foil,  as  it  is  usually  termed,  is  about 
one  thousandth  part  of  an  inch  thick.  It  is  employed  to  give 
brightness  to  several  articles  ;  used  in  forming  reds  and  scar- 
lets. Substances  which  produced  to  the  ancients  only  faint 
and  fleeting  colours,  give  us  such  as  are  brilliant  and  durable, 
by  the  use  of  a  solution  of  this  metal, 

Zinc^  is  one  of  the  most  abundant  metals  in  nature,  except 
iron.  It  is  used  in  China  for  the  current  coin,  and  for  that 
purpose  it  is  employed  in  its  utmost  purity.  Until  recently 
it  was  used  in  Wales  for  mending  roads.  When  zinc  is  heat- 
^.'d,  it  readily  attracts  oxygen  ;  and  at  a  white  heat  the  absorb- 
tion  of  oxygen  is  so  rapid  and  violent,  that  the  oxide  imme- 
diately sublimes,  and  for  this  reason  it  has  acquired  the  name 
of  flowers  of  zinc.  Combined  with  copper  and  tin,  the  mix- 
tures constitute  some  of  the  most  uscfid  compound  metals.  It 
is  used  in  medicine,  is  the  base  of  white  vitriol^  and  its  carbo- 
nate or  oxide  may  be  advantageously  substituted  for  white  lead 
in  painting. 

Manganese^  is  a  brilliant  metal,  of  a  darkish  white  colour, 
inclining  to  grey,  of  considerable  hardness,  and  of  difficult 
fusibility.  When  exposed  to  the  air  it  absorbs  oxygen  with 
rapidity^  and  fails  into  powder.  Its  oxides  are  used  in  pre- 
paring the  bleaching  liquor,  in  purifying  glass,  and  in  glazing 
black  earthen  ware.  By  the  application  of  a  red  heat  the 
black  oxide  produces  oxygen  gas  in  great  abundance. 

Antlmoni/,  is  a  brilliant,  brittle  metal,  of  a  silvery  colour, 
wdiich  has  not  much  tenacity,  and  entirely  destitute  of  duc- 
tility. It  is  wholly  volatilized  by  heat  ;  is  susceptible  of  vit- 
rification- Its  oxides  are  emploj^ed  in  medicine,  and  in  col- 
ouring glass- 

Arsejiic,  is  generally  found  in  combination  with  sulphur, 
oxygen  and  many  of  the  metals.  Its  colour  is  bluish,  or 
greenish  white,  becoming  on  exposure  to  the  air,  dark,  almost 
black  ;  it  is  extremely  brittle,  and  the  softest  of  all  metals  ; 
and  is  one  of  the  most  active  of  mineral  poisons.  Beautiful 
shades  of  different  colours  may  be  given  to  different  substances 
by  solutions  of  arsenic  ;  so  that  the  substances  which  are  most 
injurious  to  the  animal  economy,  appear  to  be  endowed  with 
properties  for  embellishing  the  w^orks  of  creation,  and  by  im- 
parting colour  to  other  bodies,  is  make  to  minister  in  various 
ways  to  our  gratification.       How  diversified   arc  the   means 


tradesman's  guide.  55 

which  the  Creator  has  adopted  for  the  promotion  of  his  hqn- 
evolelit  designs  ! 

CHAPTER  XVL 

The  art  of  assaying  Ores^—Fluxes — in  the  humid  way — in 
the  soft  luay — by  cupellation — to  assay  plated  metals — par- 
ting of  gold  and  silver — by  aqua  fortis-^^hy  cementation-— 
dry  parting — to  determine  the  quality  of  gold — to  obtain 
silver  pure  from  alloy — weight  of  metals — specific  grav- 
ity of  bodies. 

Before  metallic  ores  are  worked  in  the  large  way,  we 
should  know  what  sort  of  metal,  and  what  portion  of  it,  is  to 
be  found  in  a  determined  quantity  of  the  ore,  in  order  to  as- 
certain whether  it  will  be  profitable  to  extract  largely,  and  in 
what  manner  the  process  is  to  be  performed. 

The  assaying  may  be  performed  in  the  dry  or  moist  way; 
the  first  is  the  most  ancient,  and  in  many  respects  the  most 
advantageous,  and  consequently  continues  to  be  mostly 
used.  Assays  are  made  cither  in  crucibles  with  the  blast 
of  the  bellows,  or  in  tests,  under  a  muffle.  The  assay 
weiglits  are  always  imaginary.  Sometimes  an  ounce  repre- 
sents an  hundred  weight  on  the  large  scale,  and  is  subdivided 
in  the  same  number  of  parts,  as  that  hundred  weight  is  in  the 
great;  so  that  the  contents  of  the  ore  obtained  by  the  assa}^ 
shall  accurately  determine  by  such  relative  proj)ortions,  the 
quantity  to  be  expected  from  any  weight  of  the  ore  on  a  larger 
scale.  In  the  lotting  of  the  ore,  care  should  be  taken  to  have 
small  portions,  from  dilTerent  specimens,  which  should  be 
pulverized  and  well  mixed  in  an  iron  or  brass  mortar.  The 
proper  quantity  of  the  ore  is  now  taken,  and  if  it  contains  ei- 
ther sulphur  or  arsenic,  *it  -is  put  into  a  crucible  or  test  and 
exposed  to  a  moderate  degree  of  heat,  till  no  vapour  arises 
from  it  ;  to  assist  this  volatilization,  some  add  a  small  quan- 
tity of  powdered  charcoal. 

Fluxes.  To  assist  the  fusion  of  the  ores,  and  to  convert 
the  extraneous  matters  connected  with  them  into  scoria,  as- 
sayers  use  diflerent  kinds  of  fluxes.  The  most  usual  and  ef- 
ficacious materials  for  the  composition  are  borax,  tartar,  ni- 
tre, sal  ammoniac,  common  salt,  glass,  flour-spar,  charcoal 
powder,  pitch,  lime,  litharge,  <^c.  in  different  proportions. 

Crude  of  White  Flux.  This  consists  of  one  part  of  nitre 
and  two  of  tartar,  well. mixed. 


56  THE    ARTIST    AND 

,Blach  Flux,  The  above  crude  fiiix  detonates  by  meatis 
of  kindled  charcoal  ;  and  if  it  be  effectod  in  a  mortar  slightly 
covered,  the  smoke  that  rises  unitca  with  the  alkalized  nitre 
und  the  tartar,  and  renders  it  black. 

Cornish  Reducing  Flux,  Ten  ounces  of  tartar,  three  oz. 
and  six  drachms  of  nitre,  three  ounces  and  one  drachm  of  bo- 
rax ;   well  mixed. 

Cornish  Refining  Flux,  Defflagrate,  then  ])ulverize,  two 
parts  of  nitre,  and  one  part  of  tartar. 

In  working  at  large,  such  expensive  means  cannot  be*ap- 
plicd  to  effect  our  purpose,  as  the  inferior  metals  would  be 
too  much  enhanced  in  value  ;  consequently,  where  the  object 
is  the  production  of  metals  in  the  great  way,  in  smelting 
works,  cheaper  additions  are  used  ;  such  as  lime  stone,  felted- 
spar,  flour-spar,  quartz,  sand,  slate,  and  slugs,  which  are  to 
be  chosen  according  to  the  different  views  of  the  operator. 
The  iron  ores  on  account  of  the  argillaceous  earth  they  con- 
tain, require  calcareous  additions,  aud  the  copper  ones,  ra- 
ther slugs,  or  vitrescent  stones,  than  calcareous  earth. 

Humid  assQTj  of  Metallic  Ores.  The  mode  of  assaying 
ores  for  their  particular  metals  by  the  (\vy  way,  is  deficient, 
so  far  as  i elates  to  pointing  out  the  different  substances  con- 
nected with  them,  because  they  are  always  destroyed  by  the 
process  for  obtaining  the  assay  metal.  The  assa}'^  by  the 
moigt  way  is  more  correct,  because  the  different  substances 
can  be  accurately  ascertained.  The  late  celebrated  Bergman 
first  communicated  this  method.  It  depends  u[)on  a  knowl- 
edge of  the  chemical  affinities  of  diflerent  bodies  for  each 
otl^er;  and  must  be  varied  according  to  the  nature  of  the  ore 
— it  is  very  extensive  in  its  application,  and  requires  great 
patience  and  address  in  its  execution.  To  describe  the  treat- 
ment of  each  variety  of  metallic  ores  would  take  too  much  of 
our  room  ;  but  to  give  a  general  idea,  we  shall  describe  the 
procedure,  both  in  the  dry  and  humid  way,  on  one  species  of 
■iill  the  different  ores. 

To  assay  Iron  ores.  No.  1.  The  ore  must  be  roasted  till 
the  vapour  ceases  to  rise.  Take  two  assay  quintals  of  it,  and 
triturate  them  with  one  of  flour-spar;  three-fourths  of  a 
tfuintal  of  powdered  charcoal,  and  four  quintals  decrepitated 
sea-salt  ;  this  mixture  is  to  be  put  into  a  crucible,  and  the 
crucible  itself  exposed  to  a  violent  fire  for  an  hour,  and  when 
it  is  cool,  broken,     if  the  operation   be  well  conducted,  the 


tiiadesjMan's  guide.  b7 

iron  will  be  found  at  the  bottom  of  the  crucible,  to  which 
must  be  added  those  metallic  particles,  vvliich  may  adhere  to 
the  scoria.  The  metallic  particles  so  adhering  may  be  sepa- 
rated by  pulverizing  it  in  a  paper,  and  then  attracting  them 
with  a  magnet. 

No.  2.  If  the  ore  should  be  in  a  calciform  state,  mixed 
with  earths,  the  roasting  of  it  previous  to  assaying,  if  not  det- 
rimental, is  at  least  superfluous;  if  the  earths  should  be  of 
the  argillaceous  and  silicious  kind,  to  half  a  quintal  of  them, 
add  of  dry  quicklime  and  flour-spar,  of  each  one-fourth  of  a 
quintal,  reduced  to  powder,  and  mix  them  with  one-fourth  of 
a  quintal  of  powdered  charcoal,  covering  the  whole  with  one 
ounce  of  decrepitated  common  salt  ;  and  expose  the  luted 
crucible  to  a  strong  forge  fire  for  an  hour  and  a  quarter,  then 
let  it  gradually  cool,  and  let  the  regulus  be  struck  off  and 
weighed.  If  the  ore  contain  calcareous  earth  there  will  be 
no  occasion  to  add  quicklime;  the  preparations  of  the  ingre- 
dients may  be  as  tbllows  :  viz.  one  assay  quintal  of  ore,  one 
of  decrepidated  sea-salt,  one  half  of  powdered  charcoal  ;  and 
one  of  flour-spar,  and  the  process  conducted  as  above. 

There  is  a  great  difference  in  the  reguli  of  iron  ;  when  the  cold  reg- 
ulus is  struck  with  a  hammer,  and  breaks,  the  iron  is  called  cold  short; 
when  struck  red  hot,  it  is  called  red  short,  but  if  it  resist  the  hammer, 
both  in  its  cold  and  ignited  state,  it  is  good  iron. 

Humid  assay  of  Iron  Ore,  To  assay  the  calciform  ores, 
which  do  not  contain  much  earthy  or  stony  matter,  they  must 
be  reduced  to  a  fine  powder  ;  dissolved  in  marine  acid,  and 
precipitated  with  the  Prussian  alkali.  A  determinate  quan- 
tity of  the  alkali  must  be  previously  tried,  to  ascertain  the 
portion  of  iron  which  it  will  precipitate,  and  the  estimate 
made  accordingly.  If  the  iron  contains  a  considerable  j^or- 
tion  of  zinc  or  manganese,  the  precipitate  must  be  calcined 
to  redness,  and  the  calx  of  the  zinc;  when  this  is  separated, 
the  calx  should  again  be  treated  either  with  nitrous  acid,  with 
the  addition  of  sugar,  or  with  the  acetous  acid,  which  will 
dissolve  the  manganese,  if  any  ;  the  remaining  calx  of  iron 
may  then  be  dissolved  by  the  marine  acid,  and  precipitated 
by  the  mineral  alkali,  or  it  may  be  further  calcined,  and  then 
weighed. 

Zinc  Ores.  Take  the  assay  weight  of  roasted  ore,  and 
mix  it  well  with  one-eighth  part  of  charcoal  dust,  put  it  into 
a  strong  luted  earthen  retort,  to  vyhich  must  be  fitted  a  recoil 


58  THE    ARTIST    AND 

vcr  ;  place  the  retort  in  a  furnace  and  raise  the  fire,  and  con- 
tinue it  in  a  violent  heat  for  two  hours  ;  then  cool  gradually, 
and  the  zinc  will  be  found  hanging  to  the  neck  of  the  retort 
in  its  metallic  form. 

In  the  humid  way.  Distil  vitriolic  acid  over  calamine  to 
dryness  ;  the  residium  must  be  lixiviated  in  hot  water  ;  what 
remains  undissolved  is  silicious  earths  ;  to  the  solution  add 
caustic  volatile  alkali,  which  precipitates  the  iron  and  argil, 
but  keeps  the  zinc  in  solution.  The  precipitate  must  be  re- 
dissolved  in  vitriolic  acid,  and  the  iron  and  argil  separated. 

Tin  Ores,  Mix  a  quintal  of  tin  ore,  previously  washed 
and  pulverized,  roast  till  no  arsenical  vapours  arise,  %vith  half 
a  quintal  of  calcined  borax,  and  the  same  quantity  of  pitch, 
pulverized  ;  put  the  whole  into  a  crucible  moistened  with 
charcoal  dust  and  water,  and  the  crucible  placed  in  an  air 
furnace.  After  the  pitch  is  burnt,  give  a  violent  heat  for 
a  quarter  of  an  hour;  and  on  withdrawing  the  crucible,  the 
regulus  will  be  found  at  the  bottom. 

If  the  ore  be  not  well  washed  from  earthy  matters,  a  larger  quan- 
tity of  borax  will  be  requisite,  witli  some  powdered  glass;  and  if  the 
ore  contains  iron,  some  alkaline  salts  may  be  added. 

In  the  humid  loay.  Let  the  tin  ore  be  well  separated  from 
its  stony  matrix,  by  vv^ell  washing,  and  reduced  to  the  most 
subtile  powder  ;  digest  in  concentrated  oil  of  vitriol,  in  a 
strong  heat  for  several  hours;  when  cooled,  add  a  small  por- 
tion of  concentrated  marine  acid,  and  let  it  stand  one  or  two 
hours  ;  then  add  water;  and  when  the  solution  is  clear,  pour 
it  off  and  precipitate  it  by  fixed  alkali. 

One  hundred  grains  of  this  precipitate,  well  wished  and  dried,  are 
equivalent  to  one  hundred  of  tin  in  its  reguline  state,  if  the  precipitate 
consists  of  pure  tin  ;  but  if  it  contain  copper  or  iron,  it  must  be  calcined 
in  a  red  heat  for  an  hour,  and  then  digested  in  nitrous  acid,  which  will 
take  up  the  copper  ;  and  afterwards  in  marine  acid,  which  will  separate 
the  iron. 

Lead  Ores.  As  most  of  the  leads  ores  contain  either  sul- 
phur or  arsenic,  they  should  be  well  roasted.  Take  a  quintal 
of  roasted  ore,  and  the  same  quantity  of  calcined  borax;  half 
a  quintal  of  ^\\g  pCwdered  glass  ;  a  quarter  of  a  quintal  of 
pitch,  and  as  much  clear  iron  filings.  Lino  the  crucible  with 
wet  charcoal  dust,  and  put  the  mixture  into  the  crucible  ; 
place  it  before  the  bellows  of  a  forge  fire.  When  it  is  red 
hot,  raise  the  fire  for  twenty  minutes,  withdraw  the  crucible; 
whv?n  cold,  break  it. 


tuadesman's  en  or!.  5i7 

In  the  humid  w ay,.  Dissolve  the  ore  by  boiling  it  iii  dilu- 
ted nitrous  acid  ;  the  sulphur,  insoluble  stony  parts,  and  calx 
of  iron  will  remain.  The  iron  may  be  separated  by  digestion 
in  caustic  fixed  alkali.  The  nitrous  solution  contains  the  lead 
and  silver,  which  should  be  precipitated  by  the  mineral  fixed 
alkali,  and  the  precipitate  well  washed  in  cold  water,  dried, 
and  weighed.  Digest  it  in  caustic  volatile  alkali,  which  will 
take  up  the  calx  of  silver  ;  the  residuum  being  again  dried 
and  weighed,  gives  the  proportion  of  the  calx  of  lead,  132 
grains  of  which,  are  equal  to  100  of  leid  in  its  metallic  state. 
The  diflerence  of  weight  before  and  after  the  application  of 
the  volatile  alkali,  gives  the  quantity  of  silver  ;  129  grains  of 
which  are  equal  to  lOQ  of  silver  in  the  metallic  state. 

Copper  Ores.  Take  an  exact  ounce  troy  of  the  ore  pre- 
viously pulverized,  and  calcine  it  well;  stir  it  all  the  time  with 
an  iron  rod,  without  removing  it  from  the  crucible  :  after  the 
calcination  add  an  equal  quantity  of  borax  ;  half  the  quantity 
of  fusible  glass,  one-fourth  the  quantity  of  pitch,  and  a  littler 
charcoal  dust  ;  rub  the  inner  surface  of  the  crucible  with  a 
paste  composed  of  charcoal  dust,  a  little  fine  powdered  clay 
and  water  ;  cover  the  mass  with  common  salt,  and  put  a  lid 
on  the  crucible,  which  place  in  a  furnace;  raise  the  fire  grad- 
ually, till  it  burns  briskly,  and  the  crucible  kept  in  it  for  half 
an  hour  ;  stir  the  metal  often  with  an  iron  rod  ,  and  when 
the  scoria  adhering  to  the  rod  appears  clear,  take  the  crucible 
out  and  suffer  it  to  cool,  when  it  must  be  broken,  and  the  re- 
gulus  separted  and  weighed  ;  this  is  called  black  copper,  to 
refine  which,  equal  parts  of  common  salt  and  nitre  are  to  be 
well  mixed  together.  The  black  copper  is  brought  into  fusion, 
and  a  teaspoonful  of  flux  is  thrown  on  it,  which  repeat  three 
or  four  times  ;  then  pour  the  metal  into  an  ingot  mould-,  and 
the  button  is  found  to  be  fine  copper. 

In  the  humid  icay.  JMake  a  solution  of  vitreous  copper  ore, 
in  five  times  its  weight  of  concentrated  vitreous  acid,  and  boil 
it  to  dryness  ;  add  as  much  water  as  will  dissolve  the  vitriol 
thus  formed  ;  to  this  solution  add  a  clean  bar  of  iron,  which 
will  precipitate  the  whole  of  the  copper  in  its  metallic  form. 
If  the  solution  be  contaminated  with  iron,  the  copper  must  be 
redissolvcd  in  the  same  manner,and  precipitated  again.  The 
sulphur  may  be  separated  by  filtration. 

Bismuth  Ores.  If  it  be  minerali7ed  by  sulphur,  or  sulphur 
and  iron,  a  previous  roasting  will  be  necessary.     The  strong 


60  THE    ARTIST    AND 

ores  require  no  roasting  only  to  be  reduced  to  fine  powder* 
Take  the  assay  weight  and  mix  it  with  halt*  the  quantity  of 
calcined  borax,  and  the  same  of  pounded  glass  ;  line  the  cru- 
cible with  charcoal  ;  melt  it  as  quickly  as  possible;  when  well 
done,  take  put  the  crucible,  and  let  it  cool  gradually.  The 
regulus  w^ill  be  found  at  the  bottom. 

In  the  humid  way.  Bismuth  is  easily  soluble  in  nitrous 
acid,  or  aqua-regia.  The  solution  is  colourless,  and  is  pre- 
cipitable  by  the  addition  of  pure  water  ;  118  gi'ains  of  the 
precipitate  from  nitrous  acid,  well  washed  and  dried,  are 
equal  to  100  of  bismuth  in  its  metallic  form. 

Antimonial  Ores,  Bore  a  number  of  small  holes  in  the 
bottom  of  a  small  crucible,  place  it  in  another,  a  size  larger, 
lute  them  \V*ell  together  ;  then  put  the  proper  quantity  of  ore 
in  small  lumps  in  the  upper  crucible,  lute  thereon  a  cover  ; 
place  the  vessels  on  a  hearth  ;  surround  them  with  stones  six 
inches  distant  ;  fill  with  ashes  the  intermediate  space,  that 
the  under  crucible  may  be  covered  with  them  ;  but  upon  the 
upper,  charcofil  n)ust  be  laid  :  the  whole  made  red  hot  by 
the  assistance  of  the  hand  bellows.  The  antimony  runs  tliro' 
the  holes  of  the  upper  vessel,  being  easy  effusion,  into  the 
other,  where  it  is  collected. 

Humid  assay  of  arseniatcd  antimony.  Dissolved  the  ore 
in  aqua-regia,  both  the  regulus  and  the  arsenic  remain  in  solu- 
tion ;  the  sulphur  is  separated  by  filtration.  If  the  solution 
be  boiled  with  twice  its  weight  of  strong  nitrous  acid  ;  the 
regulus  of  antimony  will  he  precipitated,  and  the  arsenic  con- 
verted into  an  acid,  which  may  be  obtained  by  evaporation  to 
dryness. 

Manganese  Ore,  To  obtain  the  regulus,  mix  the  calx  or 
ore  of  manganese  with  pitch,  made  into  a  ball  ;  put  it  into  a 
crucible,  lined  with  powdered  charcoal,  one-tenth  of  an  inch 
on  the  sides,  and  one-fourth  at  the  bottom;  then  fill  the  empty 
space  with  charcoal  dust  ;  cover  the  crucible  with  another 
inverted  and  luted  on,  and  expose  it  to  the  strongest  heat  of 
a  forge  for  an  hour  or  more. 

In  the  humid  way.  Roast  the  ore  well  to  dephlogistigate 
the  calx  of  manganese  and  iron,  if  any,  and  then  treat  with 
nitrous  acid  to  dissolve  the  earths.  Treat  the  residuum  with 
nitrous  acid  and  sugar,  when  a  colourless  solution  of  manganese 
is  procured,  and  also  of  the  iron,  if  any.  Precipitate  with 
Prussian  alkali,  digest  the  precipitate  in  pure  water;  the  Prus- 


irii ADrs MA N^«  guide.  6i. 

slate  of  manganese  will  be  dissolved,  whilst  the  PrUsiiate  of 
iron  will  remain  undissolved. 

Arsenical  Ores,  Made  by  sublimation  in  close  vessels* 
Beat  the  ore  into  small  pieces  ;  put  them  into  a  matrass, 
which  place  in  a  sand  pot,  with  a  proper  degree  of  heat  ;  the 
arsenic  sublimes,  and  adheres  to  the  upper  part  of  the  vessel; 
collect  it  carefully,  and  ascertain  its  weight.  A  single  subli- 
mation will  not  be  sufficient  ;  sometimes,  as  in  manj^  cases, 
the  arsenic  will  melt  with  the  ore,  and  prevent  its  total  vola- 
tilization ;  in  which  case,  perform  the  first  sublimation  with 
a  moderate  heat;  than  bruise  the  remainder  again,  and  expose 
it  to  a  strong  heat. 

In  the  humid  way.  Digest  the  ore  in  marine  acid,  add  the 
nitrous  by  degrees,  to  help  the  solution.  The  sulphur  will 
be  found  on  the  filter;  the  arsenic  will  remain  in  the  solution, 
and  may  be  precipitated  in  its  metallic  form  by  zinc,  adding 
spirits  of  wine  to  the  solution. 

Nickel  Ore,  Roast  the  ores  well,  to  expel  the  sulphur  and 
arsenic  ;  the  greener  the  calx  proves  during  this  torrefaction, 
the  more  it  abounds  in  the  nickel  ;  but  the  redder  it  is,  the 
more  iron  it  contains.  Fuse  in  an  open  crucible,  a  proper 
quantity,  with  twice  or  thrice  its  weight  of  black  flux,  the 
whole  covered  with  coraiaion  salt.  Expose  the  crucible  to 
the  strongest  heat  of  a  iorg^.  fire  ;  make  the  fusion  complete, 
and  it  will  produce  a  regulus,  though  not  pure.  It  contains  a 
portion  of  arsenic,  cobalt,  and  iron.  Deprive  the  first  by 
fresh  calcination,  adding  powdered  charcoal  ;  the  second,  by 
scorification  but  it    is  difficult  to  free  it   entirely   from   iron. 

In  the  humid  way.  By  solution  in  nitj  ous  acid,  it  is  freed 
from  its  sulphur  ;  and  by  adding  water  to  the  solution,  bis- 
muth, if  any,  may  be  precipitated  ;  silver,  also,  if  contained 
in  it,  by  the  marine  acid  ;   and  copper,  when  any,  by  iron. 

To  separate  cobalt  from  nickel,  when  the  cobalt  is  in  considerable 
quantity,  drop  a  saturated  solution  of  the  roasted  ore  in  nitrous  acid  into 
liquid  volatile  alkali  ;  the  cobaltic  part  is  instantly  redissclved,  and  as* 
sumes  a  garnet  colour,  when  filtered,  a  grey  powder  remains  on  the  fil- 
ter, which  is  the  nickel.  The  cobalt  may  be  precipitated  from  the  volatile 
alkali,  by  any  acid. 

Cobalt  Ores.     Free  them  as  much  as  possible  from   earthy 
matters,  by  washing,  and  from  sulphur  and  arsenic  by  roasting, 
When   prepared  mix  the  ore  with  three   parts  of  black  flux 
and  a  little  decrepitated  sea  salt  ;  put  tho  mixture  in  a  liue^ 


65^  fii%    ARTIST  AS'^ 

crucible,  cover  it,  and  place  it  in  a  forge  fire,or  hot  furrtace  ^ 
for  it  is  difficult  of  fusion.  When  well  fused,  a  metallic  re- 
gulus  will  be  found  at  the  bottom,  covered  with  a  scoria^  of  » 
deep  blue  colour  :  as  ahuost  all  cobalt  ores  contain  bismuth,, 
this  is  reduced  by  the  same  operation  as  the  reguius  of  cobalt; 
they  are  incapable  of  chemically  uniting  together,  and  are  al- 
ways found  distinct  from  each  other  in  the  crucible.  The 
reguius  of  bismuth  having  a  greater  specitie  gravity,  is  always- 
at  the  bottom,  and  may  be  separated  by  a  blow  with  a  ham- 
mer. 

In  the  humid  way.  Make  a  selutron  of  the  ore  in  nitrous 
acid,  or  aqua-regia,  and  evaporate  to  dryness  ;  the  residuum, 
treated  with  the  acetous  acid  will  yield  to  it  the  cobaltic  part; 
the  arsenic  should  be  first  precipitated,  by  the  addition  of 
water. 

Mercurial  Ores,  The  calciform  ores  of  mercury  are  easily 
reduced  without  any  addition.  Put  into  the  retort  a  qunitaf 
of  ore,  and  a  receiver  luted  on,  containing  some  water — place 
the  retort  in  a  sand  bath,  s^ive  a  sufficient  degree  of  heat  to 
force  over  the  mercury  which  is  condensed  in  the  water  of 
the  receiver. 

Sulphurated  Mercurial  Ores,  They  are  assayed  as  above^ 
by  distillation  ;  only,  these  ores  require  an  equal  weight  of 
rjean  iron  filings  to  be  mixed  with  them  ;  to  disengage  the 
sulphur,  while  the  heat  volatilizes  the  mercury,  and  forces  it 
into  the  receiver.  These  ores  should  be  fried  for  cinnabar, 
to  know  wheiher  it  will  answer  the  purpose  of  extracting  it 
from  them  ;  for  this,  take  a  determinate  quantity  finely  pow- 
dered, put  it  into  a  glass  vessel,  expose  to  a  gentle  heat  at 
first,  gradually  increased  till  nothing  more  is  sublimed.  By 
the  quantity  thus  obtained,  we  may  know  whether  the  process 
will  answer. 

Sometimes  th(^  cinnabar  is  not  of  so  lively  a  colour,  as  tiiat  which  is 
used  in  commerce  ;  it  may  be  refined  by  a  second  sublimation,  and  if 
then  too  dark,  it  may  be  brightened  by  the  addition  of  mercury,  and 
sublimed  again. 

Humid  assay  of  Cinnabar,  Dissolve  the  stonv  matrix  in 
nitrous  acid,  the  cinnabar  being  disengaged,  should  be  boiled 
in  ei^ht  or  ten  times  its  weight  of  aqua-regia,  composed  of 
three  part^  nitrous,  and  one  of  marine  acid.  The  mercury 
may  be  precipitated  in  its  running  form  by  zinc. 

Silver   Ore,     Take  the  assay  quantity  finely  pulverized; 


toast  it  svell  in  a  proper  degree  of  iieat ;  stir  it  ofteu  with  an 
iron  rod;  tlien  add  abovjt  double  the  quantity  of  granulated 
•lead,  put  it  in  a  covered  crucible,  place  it  in  a  furnace,  raise 
the  fire  gently  at  first,  gradually  increasing  it,  till  the  metal 
begifls  to  work.  If  it  appears  too  thick,  add  a  little  moro 
iead  ;  if  it  should  boil  tot)  rapid,  diminish  the  fire.  By  de- 
grees the  surface  will  he  covercJ  with  a  jwass  of  scoria  ;  then 
carefLilly  stir  it  with  an  iron  hook  heated,  especially  towards 
th-e  border  lest  ixny  of  the  ore  should  remain  undissolved  ; 
and  if  what  is  adhei^nt  to  the  hook,  when  raised  from  the 
crucible,  melts  quickly  again,  and  the  extremity  of  the  hook, 
^lifter  it  is  grown  cold,  is  covered  with  a  tiliin,  shi«ing,  smooth 
•crfest,  the  scarification  is  perfect ;  but,  on  the  contrary^  if 
while  stirring  it,  any  considerable  clamminess  is  perceived  in 
the  scorici,  and  when  it  adheres  to  the  hook,  though  red  hot, 
and  appears  unequally  ting^>d,  and  seems  dusty,  or  rough, 
with  grains  interspersed  here  and  there,  the  scorificatioji  its 
"incomplete  ;  in  consequence  of  which,  the  fii^e  shonld  be  in- 
creased a  little,  and  what  adheres  to  the  hook  should  be^ntly 
beaten  off,  and  returned  with  a  small  ladle  into  the  crucible. 
When  the  scorification  is  perfect,  the  metal  should  be  poured 
into  a  cone,  previously  rubbed  with  a  little  tallow,  and  when 
it  becomes  cold,  the  scoria  may  be  separated  by  a  few  strokes 
of  a  hammer- 

in  the  humid  way.  Boil  vitreous  silver  ore  in  diluted  ni- 
trous acid,  using  about  twents'-five  times  its  weight,  until  the 
sulphur  is  quite  exhausted.  Precipitate  the  silver  from  the 
solution  by  marine  acid,  or  common  salt  ;  one  hundred  grains 
of  this  precipitate,  contains  seventy-five  of  real  silver;  if  it 
contains  any  gold,  it  will  remain  undissolved.  Fixed  alkalies 
IDrecipitate  the  earthy  matters,  and  the  Prussian  alkali  will 
iihow  if  any  other  metal  is  contained  in  the  solution. 

JSy  cuptllation.  Take  the  assay  quantity  of  ore,  roast  and 
grind  it  with  an  equal  portion  of  litharge,  divide  it  into  two 
or  three  parts,  and  wrap  each  up  in  a  small  piece  of  paper  ; 
put  a  cupel  previously  seasoned  under  a  muffle,  with  about 
six  times  the  quantity  of  lead  upon  it.  When  the  lead  be- 
gins to  work,  carefully  put  one  of  the  papers  upon  it,  and  af- 
ier  this  is  absorbed,  put  on  a  second,  and  so  on  till  the  whole 
!S  introduced;  then  raise  the  fire,  and  as  the  scoria  is  formed 
it  will  be  taken  up  by  the  cupel,  and  at  last  the  silver  will 
Xfrnvdin  nlonc.     This*^  willl^e  the  produce  of  the  assay,  unless* 


64  THl    Atitint  ANi 

the  lead  contains  a  small  quantity  of  silver  which  may  be  dis* 
covered  by  putting  an  equal  quantity  of  the  same  lead  on  an- 
other cupel,  and  working  it  off  at  the  same  time  ;  if  any  silver 
be  pfodu-ced  it  must  be  deducted  from  the  assay. 

To  assay  the  value  of  Silver,  Te  ascertain  the  purity  of 
silver,  mix  it  with  a  quantity  of  lead  propartionaie  to  the 
supposed  portion  of  alloy  5  test  this  mixture^  and  afterwards 
weigh  the  remaining  button  of  silver*  This  is  the  same  pro- 
cess as  refining  silver  by  cupellatioHv 

Suppose  the  mass  of  silver  to  be  exaniined,  consists  of* 
twelve  equal  parts,  called  pennyweights  ;  so  that  if  an  itirgoi 
weights  an  ounce,  each  of  the  parts  will  be  one-twelfth  of  ari 
ounce.  Thus,  if  the  mass  of  silver  be  pure,  it  is  called  sil- 
ver of  twelve  pennyweights;  if  it  contains  one-twelfth  part 
of  its  weight  of  allo3%  it  is  called  silver  of  eleven  penny- 
weights ;  if  two-twelfihs  alloy,  it  is  called  ten  pennyweights; 
which  parts  of  pure  silver  are  called  fine  pennyweights.  As- 
sayers  give  the  name  pennyweights,  to  a  weight  equal  to 
twenty  real  grains,  which  must  not  be  confounded  with  the 
ideal  weights.  Assay er's  grains  are  called  fine.  An  ingot  of 
fine  silver,  or  silver  of  twelve  pennyweights,  contains,  then 
two  hundred  and  eighty-eight  fine  grains ;  if  this  ingot  con* 
tains  one-two  hundred  eighty-eighth  of  alloy,  it  is  silver  of 
eleven  penny-weights,  twenty-three  grains;  if  four-two  hun- 
dred eighty-eights  of  alloy,  eleven  pennyweights,  twenty 
grains,  &c.  A  certain  real  weight  must  be  taken  to  repre- 
sent the  assay  weights  :  for  example,  thirty-six  real  grains 
repiesent  twelve  fine  pennyweights,  this  subdivided  into  a 
number  of  other  smaller  weights,  represent  fractions  of  fine 
pennyweights  and  grains.  Thus,  eighteen  real  grains  repre- 
sent six  fine  pennyweights,  three  real  grains,  one  line  penny- 
weight, or  twenty-four  grains;  a  real  grain  and  a  half,  repre- 
sents twelve  fine  grains  :  one-thirty  second  of  a  real  grain, 
represents  a  quarter  of  a  fine  grain,  which  is  only  one-seven 
hundred  and  fifty-second  part  of  a  mass  of  twelve  penny 
weights. 

Double  assay  of  Silver.  The  silver  for  the  assay,  should 
be  taken  from  opposite  sides  of  the  ingot,  and  tried  on  a 
touchstone.  Assayers  know  very  nearly  the  value  of  silver 
by  the  look  of  the  ingot  ;  much  better,  by  the  test  of  the 
touchstone.  The  quantity  of  lead  to  be  added  is  regulated 
by  the  portion  of  alloy,  which  is  in  general,  copper :  heat  the 
€apel  r^  hot  for  half  an  hour,  before  any  metal  is  put  upou 


u,  which  expels  all  moisture.  When  it  is  ahiiost  white  by 
heat,  put  i«  the  lead,  increase  the  heat  till  the  lead  becomes 
red  hot,  smoking  and  agitated  by  a  motion  of  all  its  parts, 
called  its  circulation.  Then,  put  the  silver  on  the  cupel, 
nnd  continue  the  fire,  till  the  silver  enters  tlie  lead.  When 
the  mass  <;irculates  well,  diminish  the  heat  by  closing-  more 
or  less  the  door  of  the  assay  furnace.  Regulate  the  heat, 
that  the  metal  on  its  surface  may  appear  convex  and  ardent, 
while  the  cupel  is  less  red^  that  the  smoke  shall  rise  to  the 
roof  of  the  muffle,  that  undulations  shall  he  made  in  all  di- 
rections, and  that  the  middle  of  the  metal  shall  appear  smooth, 
with  a  small  circle  of  litharge,  which  is  continually  imbibed 
by  the  cupeL  When  the  lead  and  alloy  is  entirely  absorbed 
by  the  cupel,  the  silver  becomes  bright  anci  shining,  when  it 
is  said  io  lighten  ;  when,  if  the  operation  has  beea  well  per* 
formed,  the  silver  will  be  covered  with  rainbow  colours, 
which  quickly  undulate  and  cross  each  other^  and  then  the 
button  becomes  fixed    and  solid. 

Tke  diminution  of  weight  shows  the  quantity  of  alW.  As  all  lead 
^contains  ;a  spjall  portion  of  silver,  an  equal  weight  with  that  assay,  iS 
tested  off,  and  the  prodiict  deducted  from  the  assay  weight.  This  por- 
tion is  called  the  witness. 

To  assay  plated  metals.  Take  a  detcrniinate  quantity  of 
the  plated  metal:  put  it  into  an  earthen  vessel,  with  a  suffi- 
cient quantity  of  the  above  menstruum,  and  place  it  in  a  gen- 
tle heat.  When  the  silver  is  stripped,  it  must  be  collected 
with  common  salt ;  the  calx  tested  with  lead,  and  the  esti- 
mate made  according  to  the  prcduct  of  the  silven 

Of'es  and  Earths  containing  Gold,  The  general  method 
is  by  amalgamationi  Take  a  proper  quantity,  reduce  it  to 
powder,  add  about  one-tenth  of  its  weight  of  pure  quicksil- 
ver, and  triturate  the  whole  in  an  iron  mortari  The  attrac* 
tion  which  subsists  between  the  gold  and  quicksilve,  quickly 
unites  them  in  the  form  of  an  amalgam,  which  is  pressed 
through  chamois  leather ;  the  gold  is  easily  separated  froiil 
this  amalgam  by  exposure  to  a  [)roper  degree  of  heat,  which 
evaporates  the  quicksilv  r  and  leaves  the  gold. 

This  evaporation  should  bo  made  with  luted  v^^ssels  ;  and  this  is  the 
foundalion  of  all  operations  by  wh^vili  gold  is  obtained  from  ihe  rich 
mines  of  Peru. 

2.  Heat  red  hot,  a  quantity  of  gold  sand,  quench  it  in  wa- 
ter;  repeat  t^%o  ct  three  tiraes,  and  the  colour  of  the  sand  will 


6$  THE    ARTIST   AX& 

become  a  reddish  brown.  Now  mix  it  witli  twice  its  weight 
of  litharge,  and  revive  the  litharge  into  lead,  by  adding  a  small 
portion  of  charcoal  dust,  exposing  it  to  a  proper  degree  of 
heat ;  when  the  lead  revives,  the  gold  is  separated  from  the 
sand,  and  the  freeing  of  the  gold  from  the  lead  must  after- 
wards be  performed  by  cuppellation. 

Metallic  ores  containing  gold  are  sometimes  assayed  as  follows  : — - 
mix  two  parts  of  the  ore,  well  ponnded  and  washed,  with  one  and  a  half 
of  litharge,  and  three  of  glass:  cover  the  whole  with  common  salt; 
melt  it  in  ti  smith's  lorge,  in  a  covered  crucible  *,  then  open  the  crucible, 
put  a  nail  into  H,  and  fcontinue  to  do  so  till  the  iron  i»  no  longer  at- 
tacked. The  lead  is  thus  piecipstated  which  contains  the  gold,  and  is 
then  separated  by  cuppellation. 

Humid  assay  of  G^ld  mixed  toith  martial  pyrites  Ore 
dissolved  in  twelve  times  Its  weight  of  diluted  nitrOus  acid, 
gradually  added  :  place  it  in  a  propWr  degree  of  heat  ;  the 
soluble  parts  are  taken  up,  and  leaves  the  gold  untouched^ 
with  the  insoluble  matrix,  from  which  it  is  separated  by  aqua- 
regia.  The  gold  is  again  separated  from  the  aqua-regia  by 
pour-ng  ether  u}3on  it  ;  the  ether  takes  up  the  gold,  and  by 
being  burnt  off,  leaves  it  in  its  metallic  state.  The  solution 
may  contain  iron,  copper,  manganese,  Calcareous  earth,  or  ar- 
gil; if  evaporated  to  dryness,  and  the  residuum  heated  to  redness 
for  half  an  hour,  volatile  alkali  will  extract  the  copper  ;  de- 
phlogisticated  niirous  acid,  the  earths  ;  acetous  acid,  the  man- 
ganese ;  and  marine  acid,  the  calx  of  iron.  The  sulphur 
floats  on  the  first  solution,  from  which  it  is  separated  by  fiU 
tration. 

Parting  of  Gold  and  Silver.  Gold  and  silver  equally  re- 
sisting the  action  of  fire  and  lead,  must  therefore  be  separated 
by  other  means,  which  is  effected  by  different  menstrua.  Ni- 
trous acid,  marine  acid,  and  sulphur,  which  cannot  attack 
gold^  operate  upon  silver,  and  these  are  the  principal  agents 
employed  in  the  process  o( parting.  Parting  by  nitrous  acid 
is  the  most  convenient  ;  this  is  called  simple  partings  and  is 
generally  the  method  preferred  by  goldsmiths*  That  made 
by  the  marine  acid  is  by  cementation,  and  called  concentrated 
parting;  that  by  sulphur,  is  made  by  fusion,  and  called  di-y 
parting. 

Parting  by  Aqua-Fortis.  The  following  directions  are 
to  be  regarded  ;  first,  must  be  in  a  proper  proportion,  viz. 
three  parts  of  silver  to  one  of  gold,  thouglj  a  mass  of  silver 
eoDtaining  two  parts  of  lilver  to  one  of  gold  tnay  be  parted. 


TRAi)£SMAN's    GCIDL.  6/ 

The  quality  of  the  metal  is  determined  by  assayers,  who  make 
a  comparison  upon  a  touchstone,  between  it  and  needles  com- 
posed of  gold  and  silver  in  graduated  proportions,  and  pro- 
perly marked,  which  are  called  j^roo/  needles.  If  the  silver 
is  not  to  the  gold,  as  three  to  one,  the  mass  is  improper  for 
tne  operation,  unless  more  silver  is  added  ;  besides,  the  aqua- 
fortis must  be  very  pure,  containing  neither  vitriolic  or  marine 
ncid.  Granulate  the  metal  previous  to  parting,  by  melting  it 
in  a  crucible  ;  then  pour  it  into  a  vessel  of  water,  giving  the 
water  a  rapid  circular  motion  with  a  stick.  The  vessels  used 
are  called  parting  glasses,  free  from  flaws,  and  well  annealed. 
The  glasses  are  apt  to  crack  on  exposure  to  cold,  Or  when 
even  touched  by  the  hand.  The  bottoms  are  secured  by  some 
bperators,  by  a  coatmg  made  of  new  slacked  lime,  with  beer 
and  white  of  eggs  spread  on  a  cloth,  and  wrapped  round  the 
feottom,  over  which  they  apply  a  composition  of  clay  and 
hairv  The  glasses  are  placed  in  vessels  containine:  water, 
supported  by  trivets,  with  a  fire  under  them:  thus,  if  a  glass 
breaks,  the  contents  are  caught  in  the  vessel  of  water.  If  the 
heat  communicated  to  the  water  is  too  great,  regulate  it  by 
pouring  cold  water  carefully  down  the  side  of  ihe  vessel  into 
a  parting  glass  fifieen  inches  high,  and  ten  or  twelve  inches 
wide  at  the  bottom,  placed  in  a  copper  pan  twelve  inches  wide 
at  bottom,  fifteen  inches  wide  at  top,  and  ten  inches  high  ;  as- 
sayers  generally  operate  with  about  eighty  ounces  of  metal, 
\vith  twice  as  much  aqua-fortis. 

The  aque-fortis  should  be  so  strong  as  to  act  sensibly  on 
silver,  when  cold,  but  not  violently.  Apply  but  little  heat  at 
first,  as  the  liquor  is  apt  to  swell  and  rise,  over  the  vessel  t 
when  the  acid  is  nearly  saturated^  increase  the  heat*  When 
the  solution  ceases  (which  is  known  by  the  effervescence  dis- 
continuing) pour  the  liquor  off;  if  any  grains  appear  entire, 
add  more  aqu'n-fortis^  till  all  the  silver  is  dissolved.  If  the 
operation  is  performed  slowly,  the  remaining  gold  will  have 
distinct  masses.  The  gold  appears  black  after  parting ;  its 
parts  have  no  adhesion  together  ;  because  the  silver  dissolved 
from  it  has  left  many  interstices  :  to  give  them  more  solidity, 
and  improve  their  colour,  thoy  are  put  into  a  test  under  a 
mu^e,  and  made  red  hot  ;  after  which  they  contract  and  be- 
come more  solid,  and  the  gold  resumes  its  colour  and  lustre. 
It  is  then  called  grain  gold.     If  the  operation  has  been  has- 


68  tim    AtiTist    A^0 

tily  performed,   the  gold  will  have  the  appearance  of  black 
raud  or  powder,  which  must  be  melted  afier  well  washin"-* 

Recover  the  silver  by  precipitating  it  from  aqiia-fortis  by  means  of 
pure  ^A)pper.  No  precipitation  will  take  place,  if  the  solution  is  per- 
fectly saturated,  till  a  few  drops  of  aqua-tortis  are  added.  Wash  the 
precipitate  of  silver  well  with  boiling  water,  fuse  with  niire  and  lest  off 
with  lead. 

Parting  bij  Cementation,  Bricks  powdered  and  sifted, 
four  parts  ;  one  part  green  vitriol,  calcined  till  it  becomes  redj 
and  one  part  of  common  salt,  made  into  a  fine  paste  with  a  little 
water. 

Reduce  the  gold  to  be  cemented  into  plates  as  thin  as  mo- 
Tiey.  Put  at  the  bottom  of  the  cenrienling  pot,  ^l  stratum  of 
the  above  paste,  half  an  inch  thick  ;  cover  with  plates  of  gold, 
and  so  the  strata  are  placed  alternately  :  cover  the  whole  with 
a  lid,  which  is  luted  with  a  mixture  of  clay  and  sand*  Place 
the  pot  in  a  furnace  or  ovcji,  heat  gradually^  till  it  becomes 
red  hot ;  keep  it  in  the  oven  twenty-four  hours  ;  the  heat 
must  not  melt  the  gold  ;  then  suffer  the  crucible  to  cool  ;  se- 
parate carefully  the  gold  from  the  cement,  and  boil  at  differ- 
ent times  in  a  large  quantit}^  of  pure  water.  Then  assay  upon 
a  touchstone  or  otherwise  ;  if  not  sufficiently  pure,  cement  a 
second  time* 

In  this  process  tlic  vitriolic  acid  of  the  bricks,  and  the  dalcined  vitriol^ 
decomposes  the  common  salt,  during  the  cementation,  by  unifingto  its 
alkaline  base,  while  the  marine  acid  becomes  concentrated  by  the  heat  ; 
and  dissolves  the  silver  alloyed  with  the  jrold.  This  is  .1  very  trouble- 
some process,  though  it  succeeds,  when  the  portion  of  silver  is  sosmallj 
that  it  would  be  defended  from  the  action  of  aqua-forlis  by  the  super- 
abundant gold;  but  is  little  used,  except  \o  extract  silver,  or  base  metals, 
from  the  sUriace  of  gold,  and  thus  giving  to  an  alloyed  metal  the  colour 
and  appearance  of  pure  gold. 

Dry  Parting.  As  the  dry  parting  is  ever  troublesome  as 
well  as  expensive,  it  ought  not  to  be  undertaken,  but  on  a 
considerable  quantity  of  silver  alloyed  with  gold.  Granulate 
the  metal;  from  one-eighth  to  one-fifth  (as  it  is  rich  or  poor 
in  gold)  reserve  ;  mingle  well  the  rest  with  an  eighth  of  pow- 
dered sulphur  ;  put  into  a  crucible  ;  keep  a  gentle  fire,  that 
the  silver,  before  melting,  may  be  thoroughly  penetrated  by 
the  sulphur;  the  sulphur  will  dissipate,  if  the  fire  is  hastily 
urged.  If  to  sulphuretted  silver  in  fusion  pure  silver  is  added, 
the  latter  falls  to  the  bottom,  and  forms  there  a  distinct  fluid, 
not  miscible  with  the  other.    The  particles  of  gold  havirg  no 


TRAtrESMAN  S    GLIHS. 

tllfinhy  with  the  sulphuretted  silver,  are  joined  to  the  pure 
silver  whenever  they  come  in  contact,  and  are  thus  transferred 
from  the  former  into  the  latter,  more  or  less  perfectly,  as  the 
pure  silver  is  more  or  less  thoroughly  diffused  through  the  mix- 
ture. For  this  use  a  part  of  the  granulated  silver  is  reserved* 
Bring  the  sulphuretted  mass  into  fusion,  keep  melting  for 
•nearly  an  hour  in  a  covered  crucible,  throw  in  one-third  of 
the  reserved  grains,  which,  when  melted,  stir  the  vvhole  well, 
that  the  fresh  silver  may  be  distributed  through  the  mixed,  to 
-collect  the  gold  from  it,  which  is  performed  by  a  wooden  rod  ; 
which  repeat,  till  the  whole  reserved  n)etal  is  introduced. 
The  sulphuretted  silver  appears  in  fusion  of  a  dark  brown  co* 
lour;  after  it  has  been  in  fusion  for  some  time,  a  part  of  the 
sulphur  having  escaped  from  the  top,  the  surface  becomes 
white,  and  some  bright  drops  of  silver,  about  the  size  of  a  pea, 
are  perceived  on  it.  When  this  takes  place,  the  fire  must  be 
immediately  discontinued,  or  more  and  more  ot  the  silver, 
thus  losing  its  sulphur,  would  subside  and  mingle  with  the 
part  at  the  bottom,  (perhaps  as  much  as  was  unsulphuretted 
from  the  mass,)  by  a  chisel  or  hammer,  or  more  perfectly  by 
placing  the  whole  mass  with  its  bottom  upwards  in  a  crucible, 
the  sulphuretted  part  quickly  melts,  leaving  unmelted  that 
which  contains  the  gold.  The  sulphuretted  silver  is  assayed 
by  keeping  a  portion  of  it  in  fusion,  till  the  sulphur  is  dissi 
pated,  and  then  by  dissolving  it  in  aqua-fortis. 

If  it  should  still  be  found  to  contain  gold,  it  must  be  subjected  to  the 
same  treatment  as  before.  The  gold  thus  collected  may  be  concentra- 
ted into  a  smaller  part,  by  repeating  the  whole  process,  when  it  may  be 
parted  by  aquafortis  without  too  much  expense. 

To  determine  the  quantity  of  Gold,  If  its  specific  gravity 
is  17,157,  it  is  lawful  coin.  The  specific  quality  of  pure  gold 
is  19,3.  Copper,  silver,  and  most  other  metals  which  are  al- 
loyed with  gold,  may  be  easily  separated  from  gold  by  nitric 
acid  :  for  if  the  alloy  be  in  fine  filings,  the  nitric  acid  will  dis- 
solve the  other  metals,  and  leave  the  gold  in  a  black  powder. 
This  powder  may  be  separated  and  melted  down  in  a  pure 
mass  ;  but  the  common  method  adopted  by  artists  is,  to  melt 
the  alloy  with  sulphuret  of  antimony.  The  other  metals  be- 
come suiphurets,  and  the  gold  will  unite  with  the  antimony, 
and  all  fall  to  the  bottom  of  the  crucible.  After  cooling  it 
may  be  separated.  Now  melt  the  alloy  of  gold  and  antimony, 
boil  it  at  a  white  heat,  and  the  antimony  will  become  vola- 
tilized and  fly  off. 


/U  THE    ARTIST    XKT) 

Tir  obtain  Silver  pure  from  AlloTf.  Put  some  nitric  acid 
HI  a  wine  glass  diluted  with  an  equal  bulk  of  water  ;  drop  into 
it  a  six  cent  piece,  and  let  it  remain  till  action  ceases.  Now 
take  out  the  undissolved  silver,  and  put  in  a  plate,  or  a  coat 
of  perfectly  clean  bright  copper.  The  silver  will  be  precipi- 
tated after  a  short  time.  Wash  the  powder  several  times; 
and  put  a  little  liquid  ammonia  into  the  \vater  for  the  first 
washings.  Now  melt  down  the  powder  into  a  solid  mass, 
which  will  be   pure  silver. 

Silver  coin  is  alloyed  with   copper  as  12    13  to  1. 

Weight  of  metals,  Platina  is  twenty-three  times  heavier 
than  water.  Gold,  nineteen;  silver,  eleven;  quicksilver, 
fourteen  ;  copper,  nine  ;  iron,  eight ;  tin,  seven  ;  lead,  eleven; 
nickel,  nine  ;   zinc,  seven. 

Method  of  ascertaining  the  specific  gravity  of  bodies. — 
The  instrument  generally  used  for  obtaining  the  specific  gra- 
vities, is  called  the  hydrostatical  balance;  it  docs  not  differ 
much  from  the  common  balance^  The  way  to  find  the  speci- 
fic gravity  of  a  solid  heavier  than  water,  as  a  piece  of  metal  is 
this  :  weigh  the  bod}^  first  in  air,  in  the  usual  way,  then  v-eigh 
it  when  it  is  plunged  in  water,  and  observe  how  much  it  loses 
of  its  weight  in  this  fluid,  and  dividing  the  former  weight  by 
the  loss  sustained,  the  quotient  is  the  specific  jjfravity  of  the 
body,  compared  with  that  of  water.  A  piece  of  gold  may  be 
tried  by  weighing  i(  first  in  air,  and  then  in  water,  and,  if  up- 
on dividing  the  weight  in  air,  by  the  loss  in  water,  the  quo- 
tient comes  to  be  about  seventeen,  the  gold  is  good  ;  if  eigh- 
teen, or  nearly  nineteen,  the  gold  is  very  fine  ;  if  less  than 
seventeen,  it  is  too  much  alloyed  with  other  metal.  The 
same  principle  is  universal.  Hence  we  seethe  reason  why 
boats  or  other  vessels  float  on  water;  they  sink  just  so  low, 
that  the  weight  of  the  vessel,  with  its  contents,  is  equal  to  the 
quantity  of  water  which  it  displaces. 

The  method  of  aseertaininff  the  specific  gravity  of  bodies,  was  disco- 
vered by  Archimedes.  Hiero,  king  of  Sicily,  havins:, given  a  workman 
a  quantity  of  pure  gold,  to  make  a  crown,  sdspected  that  the  artist  had 
kept  part  of  the  gold,  and  adulterated  the  crown  with  a  hase  metal. 
The  king  applies  to  Archimedes,  to  discover  the  fraud.  The  philoso- 
pher long  studied  in  vain,  but  at  length  he  accidentally  hit  upon  a 
method  of  verifying  the  king's  suspicion.  Going  one  day  into  a  bath, 
be  took  notice  that  the  water  rose  in  the  bath,  and  immediately  reflec' 
fced  that  any  body  ot  equal  bulk  with  himself,  would  have  raised  the 
water  jus:  as  much;  though  a  body  of  equal  weight,  but  not  of  equal 


bulk,  would  not  raise  it  so  much.  From  this  idea  he  conceived  a  mode 
of  finding  out  what  he  so  much  wished,  and  was  so  transported  witii 
joy,  that  he  ran  out  of  the  balli  crying  out  in  the  Greek  tongue,  "1 
have  found  it,  T  have  found  it."  As  gold  was  the  heaviest  of  all  metals 
then  known,  he  therefore  desired  a  mass  of  pure  gold,  equally  heavy 
with  the  crown  when  weighed  in  air,  should  be  weighed  against  it  in 
water,  conjecturing  that  if  the  crown  was  not  alloyed  it  v/ould  counter- 
poise the  mas3  of  gold  when  they  were  both  immersed  in  water,  as  well 
as  it  did  when  they  were  weighed  in  air.  On  making  trial,  the  mass  of 
gold  weighed  much  heavier  m  water  than  the  crown  did,  nor  was  this 
all;  when  the  mass  and  erown  were  immersed  {separately  in  the  same 
vessel  of  water,  the  crown  raised  the  water  much  higher  than  the  mass 
did,  which  showed  it  was  alloyed  with  some  other  lighter  metal  which 
increased  its  bulk. 

On  this  principle  is  founded  the  doctrine  of  the  specific  gravities  of 
bodies. 

Half  of  the  civilized  employments  of  man,  consists  in  work-' 
ing  the  metals,  and  minerals  ;  civilization  depends  so  much 
on  the  discovery  of  ;he  useful  metals,  that  little  progress  can 
be  made  from  a  savage  state,  without  the  useful  trade  of  a 
blacksmith. 

To  avoid  the  inconveniences  of  exchanging  or  bartering, 
men,  in  earlier  ages  fixed  on  metals  ;  as  on  gold,  silver,  cop- 
per or  iron,  for  a  medium  of  value,  so  that  if  one  man  had 
too  much  corn  and  wanted  wine,  he  was  obliged  to  give  corn 
for  wine,  hut  he  might  sell  his  corn  for  metal,  and  buy  the 
wine  with  the  metal,  at  his  convenience.  Hence  the  origin 
of  money;  as  it  was  found  inconvenient  to  weigh  metal  in 
every  transaction,  (as  Abraliam  did  when  he  bought  the  bu- 
rying place  for  Sarah,)  stamps  were  put  on  pieces  of  metal  to 
indicate  that  they  might  be  safely  received  for  a  settled  weight 
or  value. 

Viewing  the  metals  in  ordinar}^  use,  we  consider  them  com- 
mon productions;  but  no  art  is  so  curious  as  that  of  extract- 
ing metals  from  the  earth,  or  ore,  in  which  they  are  buried  or 
concealed  ;  and  no  discovery  or  invention  was  ever  more 
wonderful.  Workers  of  metal  imitate  nature,  when  they  beat 
and  wash  their  ores.  No  one  ou  looking  at  most  of  the  me- 
talic  ores,  would  suspect  them  to  contain  metals,  as  they  are 
apparently  the  roughest,  coaisest,  and  least  desirable  stones 
on  earth.  Research  is  on  the  wing  of  activity,  and  discove- 
ries of  minerals  of  the  greatest  utility  are  daily  making.  We 
are  willing  to  believe  there  are  still  in  reserve^  beneath  the 
surface  of  the  earth,  in  our  own  country,  golden  treasures 
for  the  enterprising  ;  if  not  near  our  most  frequent  walks,  yet 


72  TJin     ARTiST    -AM1> 

in  very  many  places  which  have  never  experienced  the 
probing  eflects  of  a  crowbar,  or  the  pressure  of  the  foot  of 
man. 

CHAPTER  XVII. 
The  art  of  Worhing  Metals — Compounds  of  Metals — llse^ 
ful  Alloys — Conversion  oj  Iron  into  Steel — to  colour  Me^ 
tats — to  burn  Metals — to  refine  pewter — Bonders — bronze 
— of  temjjoring  edge  tools — test  for  metals — to  tin  iron  and' 
copper  vessels. 

Method  of  reducing  Iron  Ore  into  malleable  Iron,  We- 
proceed  by  stamping,  washing.  Sec.  the  calcine  and  materials,, 
to  separate  the  ore  from  oxtraneons  matter;  then  fusing  the- 
prepared  ore  in  an  open  furnace,  and  instead  of  cashing  it,  tO' 
suffer  it  to  remain  at  the  bottom  of  the  furnace  till  'it  becomes^ 
cold. 

New  method  of  shingling  and  manufacturing  Iron,  The 
ore  being  fused  in  a  reverberating  furnace,  is  conveyed^ 
whilst  fluid,  into  an  air  furnace,  where  it  is  exposed  to  a 
strong  heat,  till* a  bluish  flame  is  observed  on  the  surface;  it 
is  then  agitated  on  the  surface,  till  it  looses  its  fusibility,  and 
is  collected  into  lumps  called  loops.  These  loops  are  then 
put  into  another  air  furnace,  brought  to  a  white  or  welding 
heat,  and  tnen  shingled  into  half -blooms  or  slabs.  They  are 
again  exposed  to  the  air  furnace,  and  the  half-blooms  taken 
out  and  forged  into  anconies,  bars,  half -fats,  and  rods  for 
wire ;  While  the  slabs  are  passed,  when  of  a  welding  heat,. 
through  the  grooved  rollers.  In  this  way  of  proceeding,  it 
matters  not,  whether  the  iron  is  prepared  from  cold  or  hot 
short  metal,  nor  is  there  any  occasion  for  the  use  of  finery, 
charcoal,  coke,  chafery,  or  hollow  fire,  or  any  blast  by  beU 
ows,  or  otherwise  :  or  the  use  effluxes  in  any  part  of  the 
process.  ' 

To  weld  Iron  ;  an  improved  method.  This  consists  in  the 
skilful  bundling  of  the  iron  to  be  welded  ;  in  the  use  of  an  ex- 
traordinary large  forge  hammer  ;  in  employing  a  balling fur^ 
nacc,  instead  of  a  hollow-fire  or  chafery  \  and  in  passing  the 
it  on,  reduced  to  a  melting  heat,  through  grooved  mill-rollers 
of  diflerent  shapes  and  sizes,  as  required. 

Common  hardening.  Iron  by  being  heated  red  hot,  and 
plunged  into  cold  water,  acquires  a  great  degree  of  hardness. 
This  proceeds  from  the  coldness  of  the  water  which  contracts 
the  particles  of  the  iron  into  less  space. 


€ase  hardening.  Is  a  superficial  conversion  of  iron  into 
steel,  by  cementation.  It  is  performed  on  small  pieces  of 
iron,  by  enclosing  them  in  an  iron  box,  containing  burnt  lea- 
ther,  bone  dust,  or  any  other  carbonic  material,  and  exposing 
them  for  some  time  to  a  red  heat.  The  surface  of  the  iron 
thus  becomes  perfectly  metalized.  Iron  thus  treated  is  sus- 
ceptible of  the  finest  polish. 

To  convert  Iron  into  Steel  hy  Cementation.  The  iron  is 
formed  into  bars  of  convenient  size,  and  then  placed  in  a  ce- 
menting furnace,  with  a  sufficient  quantity  of  cement  which 
is  composed  of  coals  of  animal  or  vegetable  substances,  mixed 
with  calcined  bones,  &c.  The  following  are  very  excellent 
cements;  1.  One  part  of  powdered  charcoal,  one  half  a  part 
of  wood  ashes,  well  mixed  together.  2.  Two  parts  charcoal 
moderately  powdered,  one  part  of  bones,  horn,  hair  or  skins 
of  animals,  burnt  in  close  vessels  to  blackness  and  powdered; 
and  half  a  part  of  wood  ashes  ;  mix  them  well  together. — 
The  bars  of  iron  to  be  converted  into  steel,  are  placed  upon 
a  stratum  of  cement,  and  covered  all  over  with  the  same; 
and  the  vessel  which  contains  them,  closely  luted,  must  be 
exposed  to  a  red  heat  for  eight  or  ten  hours,  when  the  iron 
will  be  converted  into  steel. 

Steel  is  prepared  from  bar  iron  by  fusion  ;  which  consists  in  plung- 
inof  a  bar  into  melted  iron,  and  keeping  it  there,  for  some  time,  by 
which  process  it  is  converted  into  good  steel.  All  iron  which  becomes 
harder  by  suddenly  quenching  in  cold  water,  is  called  steel;  and  that 
steel  which  in  quenching  acquires  the  gr  latest  degree  of  hardness  in 
the  lowest  degree  of  heal,  and  retains  the  greatest  strengtli  in  and  after 
induration,  ouglit  to  be  considered  as  the  best. 

Jnproved  process  of  hardening  Steel.  Articles  manufac- 
tured of  steel,  for  the  purpose  of  cutting,  are,  almost  without 
an  exception  hardened  from  the  anvil  ;  in  other  words,  they 
are  taken  from  the  forger  to  the  hardener,  withot  undurgoing 
any  intermediate  process;  and  such  is  the  accustomed  routine, 
that  the  mischief  arising  has  escaped  observation.  The  act 
of  forging  produces  a.  strong  scale  or  coating,  which  is  spread 
over  the  whole  of  the  blade  ;  and  to  make  the  evil  still  more 
formidable  this  scale  or  coating  is  unequal  in  substance,  vary- 
ing in  proportion  to  the  degree  of  heat  communicated  to  the 
steel  in  forging  ;  it  is,  partially,  almost  impenetrable  to  the 
action  of  water  when  immersed  for  the  purpose  of  hardening. 
Hence  it  is  that  different  degrees  of  hardness  prevail  in  every 
razor  manufactured  ;  this  is  evidently  a  postive  defect  ;  and 

7 


74  THE    AKTIST    ANI» 

SO  long  as  it  conlhuies  to  exist,  great  difference  of  tempera- 
ture must  exist  likewise.      RasoF  bkde^  iio^t  imfreqtiently  ex- 
hibit the  fact  here  stated  in  a   very  striking  manner  ;  what 
are   termed  clouds,   or  parts  of  unequal   polish,  derive   their 
origin  from  this  cause  }  and   clearly  and  distinctly,    or  rather 
disiinctly,  though  not  ctearty  show  how  far  this  partial  coat- 
ing has   extended,   and   when  the  action  of  water   has   beei* 
yielded  to,  and  when  resisted.     It  cannot  be  matter  of  aston-- 
ishraent^  that  so  few  improvements  have  been  made   in  the 
hardening  of  steel,  when  the  evil  here  complained  of,  so  un-^ 
iversaily  obtains,  as  almost  to  warrant  the  supposition  that  ha 
attempt  has  ever  been    made  to  remove  it.        The  remedy, 
however,  is  ea&y  and  simple  in  the  e.^tremeV  a^d  so  evidently 
efficient  ill  its   application,  that    it  cannot  but  excite  surprise, 
that  in  the  present  highly  improved  state  of  our  manufactures,' 
such  a  communication  sliould  be  made  as  a  discovery  entirelv' 
new.     Instead,  therefore,  of  the  customary  mode  of  harden- 
ing the    blade  from    the  anvil,   let  it   be  passed  immediately 
from  the  hands  of  the  forger  to  the  grinder  ;  a  slight  applica- 
tion of  the  stone  will  remove  the  whole  of  the  scale  or  coat- 
ing and  the  razor  will  then  be  properly  prepared  to  undergo 
the  operation  of  hardening  with  advantage.     It  will  be  easfw 
ascertamed,  that   steel  in   this  state,  heat»   in  the  fire  with 
o^reater  regularity,  and  that  when  immersed,  the  obstacles  be- 
i.!2;  removed  to  the  immediate  action  of  the  water  on  the  body 
of  the  steel     the  latter   becomes  equally   hard,  from  one  ex- 
tremity to  the  other.      To  this  may  be  added,  that  asthc  hm^ 
est  possible  heaiaticJncJi  steel  becomes  hard,  is  induhitahhf 
the  hes^.Xho  mode  hero  recommended  will  be  found  the  only 
one   by  which  the, process  of  hardening  can  be  effected  with 
a  less  partion  of  fire  than  is  or  can  be  required  in  any  other 
way.      These  observations  are  decisive,   and  will  in  all  pro- 
bab.li  y   tend  to  establish   in  general  use,  what  cannot  but  be 
regarded  as  a  very    important  improvement  in  the  manufac- 
turing of  edged  steel  instruments. 

Englisk  Cast  Steel  The  finest  kind  of  steel,  called  Bn^- 
hsh  cast  steels,  prepared  by  breaking  to  pieces  blistred  7iJ\ 
and  then  melting  u  in  a  crucible  with  a  flux  composed  of  car- 
bonaceous and  vitnfiable  ingredients.  The  vitr  fiab  e Tn^re 
dient  IS  used  on\y  inasmuch  as  a  fusible  body,  which  flows 
over  the  surface  of  the  metal  in  the  crucible,  and  prevents  the 
access  of  the  oxygen  of  the  atmostphere.  Broken  Iss  is 
sometimes  used  for  this  purpose.  ^ 


^kADKSMAN's    GUIDE.  75 

When  thoroughly  fuserl  it  is  cast  into  Ingots,  which  by  gen 
mc  heating  and  careful  hanniieriiig,  are  tilled  imo  bars.  By 
this  process  the  stee!  becomes  more  highly  carbunized  in  pro- 
portioH  1o  the  quantity  fo  flux,  and  in  cotiscquence  is  moro 
bnitk*  and  fnsible  than  before.  Hence,  it  surpasses  all  other 
«teei  i«  uniformity  of  texture,  hardness^  and  closooess  of  grain, 
and  is  the  manorial  employed  in  all  the  finest  articles  of  English 
cutlery. 

To  make  edge  tools  from  Cast  Steel  and  iron.  This  me- 
thod -consists  in  fixing  a  clieaii  piece  of  wrought  iron,  brought 
to  a  welding  »beat,  m  tlie  centro  o^^l  mould,  and  tht?n  pouring 
i-m  Rjoltedl  st^el,  so  as  entirely  to  envelop  tlie  iion  ;  and  thea 
forging  lite  mass  into  the  shape  required. 

To  coioiir  Steel  Blue.  The  steel  laast  be  finely  polished 
«OTi  Its  surface,  and  then  exposed  to  aii  uniform  degree  of  heat. 
There  are  three  ways  of  colouring:  first,  by  a  flaaie  produc- 
ing no  so^t^  as  spirit  of  wine  ;  secondly^  by  a  hot  plate  of 
iron  ;   and  thirdly,  i)y  wood  ashes. 

As  a  very  reguJar  degree  of  1i«at  Is  iae<^ossaiy,  wood  aslies 
for  fire  work  bears  the  preferenee^  The  work  caust  be 
covered  over  with  them,  and  carefully  watched  ;  when  the 
cwlotir  is  sufljciently  ^heightened,  the  work  is  perfect.  This 
colour  is  occasionally  taken  off  witli  a  very  diluted  fliarine 
acid. 

Useful  alloy  of  Gold  and  Platinum,  S^even  and  a  half  dr* 
pure  gold,  and  half  dr,  platlcum.  The  platinum  must  he  added 
when  tlie  gold  is  prefectly  melted.  The  two  me^ls  will  com- 
bine intimateh-,  forming  an  allo^  rather  whiter  thian  pure 
gold,  but  remarkabl}^  ductile  and  elastic  ,  it  is  abo  less  por^ 
ishable  ihaa  pure  gold,  or  jcwoller's  gold,  but  juore  readily 
fusilile  than  that  metaL 

These  qualities  must  render  tliis  alloy  an  object  of  great 
interest  to  v*^orkers  in  isetals.  For  springs  when  steel  camiot 
1)0  used.  It  will  profe  exceedingly  advantageous. 

It  is  a  curious  circumstance,  that  the  alloy  of  gold  and  pla- 
fina  Is  soluble  in  nitric  acid,  which  does  not  act  on  eithei  of 
the  metals  in  a  separate  state.  It  Is  Tomarkible,  too,  thai  the 
alloy  has  very  nearly  the  color  of  platinuni,  even  when  com- 
posed of  eleven  parts  of  gold  to  one  of  tiie  former  metal. 

Ring  Gold.  Six  dwts.  twelve  grs.  Spanish  copper,  three 
dvvts.  sixteen  grs.    fine  silver^  and  o»e  ounces  five  dwts.  gold 


76  THfi    XfLtUr   ANi? 

Tombacic;     Sixteen  lbs;  copper,  one  lli.  tin,  and  one  pound 

^^ed  Tomback.  Five  and  a  half  pounds  copper,  %nd  half 
a  pound  zinc.  The  copper  must  be  fused  in  a  crucible  be-^ 
fore  the  zinc  is  added.  This  alloy  is  of  a  reddish  colour  and 
possesses  more  lustre  and  is  of  greater  durability  than  cop- 
per. 

White  Tomback.  Copper  and  arsenic  put  together  in  a 
crucible,  and  melted,  covering  the  surface  with  muriate  of 
soda,  to  prevent  oxydation,  will  form  a  white  bright  alloy.. 

Gun  Metal,  1.  One  hundred  twelve  pounds  Bristol  brass, 
fourteen  pounds  blocktin.  2.  ISine  parts  copper,  and  one 
part  tin.  The  above  compounds  are  those  used  in  the  raan^ 
ufacture  of  small  and  great  brass  guns,  swivels,  &c. 

Specula  of  Telescopes.  Seven  pounds  copper,  and  when 
fused,  add  three  pounds  of  zinc,  and  four  lbs.  of  tin.  These 
metals  will  combine  and  form  a  beautiful  alloy  of  great  lus- 
tre, and  of  a  light  yellow  colour,  fitted  to  be  made  into  spe- 
cula for  telescopes.  Some  use  only  copper  and  grain  tin  in 
the  proportion  of  two  lbs.  to  14  2-2  oz. 

To  distinguish  Steel  from  Iron,  Let  fall  one  drop  of  ni- 
tric acid  upon  a  piece  of  polished  iron,  and  aaother  upon  a 
piece  of  polished  steel.  The  acid  on  the  iron  will  b/e  lira-pkl 
or  whitish,  that  on  the  steel  will  become  dark,  brown  or 
black. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  polish  the  iron  or  steel  to  try  its  hard- 
ening qualities — if  a  spot  on  a  coarse  bar  of  iron  or  steel  be 
filed  bright  it  will  be  sufficient. 

Compounds  of  3Ietals,  lour  ounces  of  bismuth  ;  two  oz. 
and  a  half  lead  ;  and  one  ounce  and  a  half  tin.  Put  the  bis- 
niuth  into  a  crucible,  and  when  it  is  melted,  add  the  lead  and 
tin.  This  will  form  an  alloy  fusible  at  the  temperature  of 
boiling  water. 

2.  Zinc,  bismuth,  lead  ;  of  each  one  ounce. 

This  alloy  is  so  very  fusible,  that  it  will  remain  in  a  state 
of  fusion  if  put  on  a  sheet  of  paper  and  held  over  the  flame 
of  a  candle  or  lamp. 

3,  Lead,  three  parts  ;  tin,  two  parts  ;  bismuth,  five  parts  • 
Will  farm  an  alloy  fusible  at  197  deg.  Fahrenheit,  peculiarly 
applicable. to  casting,  or  the  taking  of  impressions  from  gems, 
seals,  &<?.  In  making  casts  with  this  and  similar  alloys,  it  is 
Ticcessary  to  use  the  metal  at  as  low  a  temperature  as  possi^ 


TTIABESIVIAN  S    GUIDE.  77 

h)e  ;  ollierwise  the  water  adliering  to  the  things  from  which 
the  -casts  are  to  be  taken,  forms  vapour,  and  produces  bub- 
IjIcs.  The  fused  metal  should  be  poured  into  a  teacup,  and 
billowed  to  cxjol,  till  just  ready  to  st*t  ai  the  edges,  when  it 
3nust  be  poured  into  the  mould.  In  taking  impressions  from 
gems,  seals,  &r,  the  fused  alloy  should  be  placed  on  paper  or 
pasteboard,  and  stirred  about  till  it  has,  by  cooling,  attained 
the  censistence  of  paste,  at  which  moment  the  die,  gem,  or 
:seal  should  be  stamped  on  it,  and  a  very  sharp  impressioa 
wiTi  be  obtained, 

JJatk  Mctal^  is  a  mixture  of  four  ounces  and  a  half  of  zinc, 
;ynd  one  ;pound  of  brass, 

Brass^  is  composed  of  4  1-2  pounds  copper:  1  1-2  pounds 
of  zinc 

Brass  that  is  to  be  cast  into  plates  from  which  pans  and 
kettles  are  to  he  made  and. wire  i«  to  "be  drawn,  must,  instea-d 
of  using  the  zinc  in  a  pure  state,  he  composed  of  fifty*-six 
pounds  of  the  finest  calamine,  or  ore  of  sine  ;  and  thirty-four 
pounds  of  copper.  Old  brass  which  has  been  frequenfly  ex- 
posed to  the  action  of  fire,  when  mixed  with  copper  and  cal- 
amine, renders  the  brass  fa'^  more  ductile,  and  fitter  for  ma- 
king fine  wire,  than  it  would  be  without  it  ;  but  the  German 
brass,  particularly  that  of  Nuremburgh,  is,  wiien  drawn  into 
ivire,  said  to  be  far  preferable  to  any  made  in  England,  for 
i'UG  strinirs  of  musical  inslraments. 

Pinchbeck.  Three  ounces  of  pure  copper,  and  one  ounce 
of  zinc.  The  zinc  must  not  be  added  till  the  copper  is  in  a 
state  of  fusion.  Some  use  only  half  this  quantity  of  zinc,  in 
which  proportion  the  alloy  is  more  easily  worked,  especially 
in  the  making  of  jewelry. 

2.  One  ounce  of  brass  :  and  two  ounces  of  copper,  fused 
logetli<^r  under  a  coat  of  charcoal  dust, 

^Prince's  Mttal.  1.  Tliree  ounces  of  copper,  and  one  oz. 
of  zinc;   or  8  oz.  of  brass,  and  1  of  zinc. 

2.  Four  oz.  of  copper,  and  2  oz.  of  zinc.  In  this  last  the 
copper  must  be  fused  before  the  zinc  is  added ;  when  they 
have  combined,  a  very  beautiful  and  useful  alloy  is  formed 
called  Prince  Rupert's  Metal. 

Bell  Metal      Six  parts  of  copper  and  two  parts  of  tin. 
These  preparations  are  the  most  approved  for  bells,  thro'- 
ought  Europe  and  in  China.      In  the  union  of  the  two  metals 
the  combination  is  so  complete,  that  the  specific  gravity  of  the 


fS  THE    AKTIST    Ai\t> 

alloy  IS  greater  than  that  of  thetvvo  metals  in  an  imcombinetl 
state. 

2.  Ten  parts  of  copper,  and  two  parts  of  tin.  It  may  in 
general  be  observed,  that  a  less  proportion  of  tin  is  used  for 
making  churchbells,  than  clockbells  ;  and  that  a  little  zinc  is 
added  for  the  bells  of  repeating  watches,  and  other  small 
bells. 

Tutania,  or  Britannia  3fetaL  Four  oz.  of  plate  brass, 
and  four  oz.  of  tin  ;  when  in  fusion,  add  four  ounces  bismuth 
and  four  ounces  regulus  of  antimony.  This  is  the  composi- 
tion, or  hardening  that  is  to  be  added  at  discretion,  to  melted 
tin,  until  it  has  acquired  the  requisite  degree  of  colour  and 
hardness. 

2.  Melt  together,  two  pounds  of  plate  brass  ;  two  pounds 
of  tin  ;  two  |:KJiTnds  of  bismuth  ;  two  pounds  of  regulus  of  an- 
timony ;  two  pounds  of  a  mixture  of  copper  and  arsenic,  ei- 
ther by  cementation  or  melting.  This  composition  is  to  be 
added  to  melted  tin. 

3.  One  pound  copper,  1  do.  tin,  and  2  do.  regulus  of  an- 
timoiv.       "  '     *'•  without  a  little  bismuth, 

4.  of  shrufT  brass  ;   2  lbs.  regulus  of  antimony  ; 

Two  drachms  of  copper  ;   one  oz.  re- 
guiiu  Oi  ;ii){i;nuiiy  ;   and  twelve  oz.  of  tin. 

Spanish  Tatania.  Eight  ounces  scrap  iron,  or  steel ;  one 
pound  anrimony  ;  and  three  ounces  nitre.  The  iron  or  steel 
must  be  heated  to  a  white  he"at,  and  the  antimony  and  nitre 
must  be  added  in  small  portions.  Melt  and  harden  1  pound 
tin  vviih  2  oz.  of  this  compound. 

2.  Melt  together  4  ^z.  antimony,  1  oz.  of  arsenic  and  2  lbs. 
tin.  The  first  of  these  Spanish  alloys  would  be  a  beautiful 
metal,  if  arsenic  were  added. 

Engcstroom.  Tutania.  Four  parts  copper,  eight  parts  regu- 
lus of  antimony,  and  one  part  bismuth:  when  added  to  one 
hundred  parts  fo  in.  this  compound  will  be  ready  for  use. 

^  Queen's  Metal  Four  ai.d  a  half  pounds  tin,'^half  a  pound 
bismuth,  half  a  pound  antimony,  half  a  pound  lead.  This  al- 
loy is  used  for  making  tea-pots  and  other  vessels  which  are 
required  to  imitate  silver.      It  retains  its  lustre  to  the  last. 

2.  One  hundred  ])ounds  tin,  8  pounds  regulus  of  antimony, 
1  pound  bismuth,  and  4  do.  copper. 

White  Metal  Ten  oz.  leixd,  6  oz.  bismuth,  and  4  drachms 
regulus  of  antimony. 


tradesman's  glide.  79 

3.  Two  pounds  regulus  of  antimony  ;  8  oz.  of  brass  ;  and 
10  oz.  tin. 

Common  Hard  White  Mctah  One  pound  brass,  1  1-2 
oz,  zinc,  and  half  an  ounce  of  tin. 

Metal  for  Tinning,  To  one  pound  malleable  iron,  at 
white  beat,  add  five  ounces  regulus  of  antimony  ;  and  twen- 
ty-four pounds  of  the  purest  Molucca  tin.  This  alloy  pol- 
ishes without  the  blue  tint,  and  is  free  from  lead  or  arsenic. 

Metal  for  Flute  Key  Valves.  Four  ounces  lead,  and  two 
ounces  antimony,  fused  in  a  crucible  and  cast  into  a  bar.  It 
is  used  by  flute  manufacturers  (when  turned  into  small  but- 
tons in  a  lathe)  for  making  valves  to  stop  the  key  holes  of 
flutes. 

To  Burii  Metals.  Procure  a  glass  jar,  such  as  is  generally 
used  for  deftlagrating  the  gases,  and  fill  it  with  oxymuriatic 
acid  gas.  If  nickel,  arsenic,  or  bismuth  in  powder,  be  thrown 
into  this  gas,  and  the  temperature  of  the  atmosphere  be  not 
lower  than  70  deg.  the  metal  will  inflame,  and  continue  to 
burn  with  the  most  brilliant  combustion. 

Prepare  a  jar  of  chlorine,  (oxymuriatic  gas)  and  suspend 
in  it  a  piece  of  copper  foil  ;  it  will  immediately  infla«ne,  and 
afford  a  very  striking  spectacle.  When  subsided,  it  will  form 
a  substance  exactly  similar  to  the  native  muriate  of  copper, 
brought  from  Peru. 

2.  Make  a  hole  in  tlie  side  of  a  large  piece  of  charcoal; 
put  into  it  some  iron  filings,  iron  wire,  zinc  shavings,  lead  sha- 
vings, -^c;  fill  a  glass-holder  with  oxygen,  provided  with  a 
tin  or  lead  tube,  terminating  in  a  pipe  stem  ;  hold  the  char- 
coal in  a  suitable  ])osition  to  receive  the  current  of  oxygen 
upon  the  metals.  Lot  an  assistant  hold  the  flame  of  a  candle 
between  the  metals  and  the  pipe,  till  the  current  of  oxygen 
drives  the  flame  into  the  coal  ;  then  remove  the  candle  and 
continue  the  current  of  oxygen,  enlarging  or  contracting  it  at 
pleasure,  by  turning  the  stop.  The  ir.etals  will  burn  very 
brilliantly;  each  exhibiting  its  own  peculiar  flame. 

3.  CJoil  up  a  piece  of  fine  iron  wire  about  the  size  of  sow- 
ing thread  ;  wind  it  spirally  and  closely  around  a  pipe  stem  ; 
let  the  coil  be  three  or  four  inches  long  ;  the  upper  end  fitted 
into  a  cork,  which  suits  the  mouth  of  an  eight  ounce  phial. 
Fill  the  phial  nearly  with  oxygen,  leaving  water  in  it  to  cover 
the  bottom  an  inch  thick,  in  order  to  defend  it  from  being 
broken  with  the  globules  of  hot  oxide  of  iron  which  fall  upon 


So  THE    ARTIST    AND 

it :  set  tlie  phial  on  the  tahle,  well  stopped  with  another 
cork :  now  tie  a  small  knot  of  silk  thread  on  the  lower  end 
of  the  coil  ;  hold  a  piece  of  brimstone  in  a  candle  till  it  melts 
a  small  spot  ;  blow  out  the  blaze  of  brimstone,  and  dip  in  the 
knot  of  thread.  Be  certain  that  the  thread  and  melted  brim- 
stone which  adheres  to  it,  do  not  exceed  in  size  a  large  pin 
head.  Now  pull  out  the  cork;  hold  the  thumb  over  the 
mouth,  and  let  an  assistant  steady  the  phial;  light  the  brim- 
stone match  ;  put  the  coil  of  wire  quickly  into  the  phial,  fit- 
ting in  the  cork  to  which  it  is  attached  :  the  metal  will  soon 
send  off  brilliant  sparks,  and  make  a  Jjeautiful  exhibition. 

4.  If  a  piece  of  wire,  about  twice  as  large  as  the  wire  of 
the  coil,  be  flittened  with  a  hammer,  and  fitted  into  the  cork, 
so  as  to  extend  down  through  the  centre  of  the  coil,  and  set 
on  fire  at  the  same  time,  in  the  same  manner  with  the  coil, 
it  will  present  a  very  curious  appearance  :  the  cential  wire 
will  burn  with  a  large  globular  flame,  while  a  smaller  globu- 
lar flame  will  perform  evolutions  around,  it,  resembling  the 
motion  of  a  planet  while  revolving  around  the  sun. 

We  arc  tauf^ht  by  the  forecroing  experiment,  if  the  oxytron  of  the  air 
was  not  reduced  in  power  by  hydrogen,  iron  itself  would  noJ;  resist 
combustion. 

To  Refine  Pewter,  Take  fine  pewter,  melt  it  in  a  cruci- 
ble. When  done,  proje'^^t  over  it  at  several  times  some  nitre, 
till  3^ou  see  it  calcined.  Then  pound  it  into  powder,  and 
mix  it  with  an  equal  quantity  of  charcoal  pulverized  very  fine. 
If  in  this  condition  you  melt  it  again,  it  will  resurhe^its  form 
of  pewter,  only  refined  in  a  much  superior  degree. 

Common  Pcicter,  Seven  pounds  tin,  one  pound  lead,  six 
oz.  copper,  and  two  oz.  zinc.  The  copper  must  be  fu&ed  be- 
fore the  other  ingredients  are  added. 

Best  Pewter,  One  hundred  parts  tin,  and  17  parts  rogu-^. 
Jus   of  antimony. 

Hard  Pewter.  Twelve  pounds  tin,  1  do.  regulus  of  aR=ti- 
niony,  and  four  ounces  copper. 

Common  Solder.  Two  pounds  lead,  and  one  pound  tin. 
The  lead  must  bo  melted  before  the  tin  is  added. 

This  alloy,  when  heated  by  a  hot  iron,  and  applied  to  tinned  iron 
with  powdered  ro^iii,  acts  as  a  cement  or  solder  ;  it  is  also  used  to  join 
leaden  pipes. 

Soft  Solder,     Two  pounds  tin,  and  one  pound  lead. 
Solder   far  Steel   Joints.      Nineteen    pennyweights  fine 


tradesman's  ouide.  si 

silver,  one  pennyweight  copper,  and  two  pennyweights  brass, 
melted  together  under  a  coat  of  charcoal  dust. 

This  solder  has  several  advantagres  over  the  usual  zinc  solder,  or 
brass,  when  employed  in  soldering  cast  steel,  &c.  as  it  fuses  with  le»s 
heat,  and  its  whiteness  has  a  better  appearance  than  brass. 

Silver  Solder  for  Jewellers,  Nineteen  pennyweights  of 
fine  silver,  one  pennyweight  copper,  and  ten  pennyweights 
brass. 

Silver  Solder  for  Plating.  Ten  pennyweights  brass, 
and  one  ounce  pure  silver. 

Gold  Solder.  Twelve  pennyweights  pure  golJ,  two  dwts. 
pure  silver,  and  four  dwls.  copper. 

Brass  Solder  for  Iron.  Thin  plates  of  brass  are  to  be 
melted  between  the  pieces  that  are  to  be  joined.  If  the  work 
be  very  fine,  as  when  leaves  of  a  broken  saw  are  to  be  bra- 
zed together,  cover  it  with  pulverized  borax,  melted  with  wa- 
ter, that  it  may  incorporate  with  the  brass  powder,  which  is 
added  to  it;  the  piece  must  then  be  exposed  to  the  fire, 
without  touching  the  coals,  and  heat  it  till  the  brass  is  seen 
to  run. 

Bronze.  Seven  pounds  pure  copper,  three  pounds  zinc, 
and  two  pounds  tin.  The  copper  must  be  fused  before  the 
other  ingredients  are  added.  These  metals, when  combined, 
form  the  bronze  so  much  used,  both  in  ancient  and  modern 
times. 

3IocIc  Platina.  Melt  toget!:er,eight  ounces  brass,  and  five 
ounces  zinc. 

Poioder  Gold.  Verdigris,  eight  ounces,  tutty,  four  ounces, 
borax,  nitre,  of  each  two  ounces,  corrosive  sublimate,  two 
drachms,  made  into  a  paste  with  oil,  and  melted  together  : 
used  in  japan  work,  as  a  gold  colour. 

True  Gold  Powder.  Grain  gold,  one  ounce,  quicksilver 
nearly  boiling,  six  ounces  ;  rub  together  ;  then  either  distil  off 
the  quicksilver,  or  corrode  it  away  with  spirits  of  nitre,  and 
heat  the  black  powder  that  is  left  red  hot. 

2.  Grain  gold,  one  ounces,  dissolve  in  a  mixture  of  spirit  of 
nitre,  sixteen  ounces,  with  common  salt,  four  ounces  ;  add  to 
the  clear  solution,  green  vitriol,  four  ounces  ;  dissolve  in 
water  ;   wash  the  precipitate,  and  heat  it  red  hot. 

3.  Dissolve  gold  in  aqua-rcgia,  and  draw  off  the  acid  by 
distillation  ;   used  in  painting,  gilding,  S^c, 


82  THE    ARTIST    AND 

Tutenag,  Bisnuitii,  one  pound,  tin,  two  pounds  ;  melt  to- 
gether :    used  for  buttons  and  vessels. 

Tin  and  Copper,  Scrape  a  piece  of  copper  well  with  a 
knife,  and  rub  it  over  witU  sal  ammoniac;  then  heat  the  cop- 
per over  clean  coals,  which  will  not  emit  any  smoke  ;  at  the 
same  time  rubbing  it  ever  with  rosin.  While  hot  and  thus 
cleansed  with  the  sal  ammoniac  and  rosin,  rub  tin  upon  it  in 
its  solid  state,  which  being  melted  to  the  heat  of  the  copper, 
wiii  adhere  to  it,  giving  it  a  silvery  white  surface. 

Copper  vesse?  are  tinnetl  inside  by  a  similar  process;  and  any  ingen- 
ious p-eraon  may  repair  theiri  in  this  way  when  the  tin  has  r.ubbed  off. 

31ethi)d  oj  tempering  edge  tools  that  are  of  too  brittle  a 
qualiti/.  Plunge  them  into  boiling  fat  for  two  hours,  then 
take  them  out,  and  let  them  cool  gradually.  They  will  retain 
their  hardness  without  being  brittle. 

Transmutation  of  Iron  into  the  finest  German  SteeL  Take 
clean  soot,  one  pound,  oak  wood  ashes,  twelve  ounces,  and 
four  ounces  of  pounded  garlics.  Boil  all  together  in  twelve 
pounds  common  water,  till  reduced  to  four  pounds.  Strain 
this,  and  dip  in  it  the  iron  pigs,  which  you  will  afterwards 
stratify  with  the  following  cement,  viz  :  Take  burnt  wood 
coals,  otherwise  called  coke^,  and  quick  lime  of  each  three 
pounds,  soot  dried  and  calcinated  in  an  iron  pan,  one  pound, 
decripitate  salt,  four  ounces.  Make  of  this  and  your  iron 
several  beds  alternately,  one  over  another  ;  and  having  well 
luted  the  vessel  in  which  you  shall  have  made  those  beds  of 
iron  and  cement,  give  them  a  reverberating  (ire,  for  three 
times  twenty-four  hours,  and  the  operation  is  done. 

Of  Zinc  or  Speller,  and  its  various  uses.  Zinc  combined 
with  gold  ill  equal  proportions,  forms  a  hard  white  compound 
metal,  that  admits  of  a  fine  pc)lish,  and  may  be  advantageously 
manufactured  into  specula  for  optic-al  instruments. 

Zinc  and  tin  melted  together  form  a  kind  of  pewter. 

Spelter  and  copper  readily  unite  in  the  fire,  provided  the 
combustion  of  the  former  be  carefully  prevented  during  the 
process;  In  this  state  it  forms  a  metal  distinquished  by  the 
name  of  yellow  copper  ;  but  which  is  divided  into  several 
sorts  according  to  the  respective  proportions  contained  in  the 
alloy.  Thus  three  parts  of  copper  and  one  of  zinc,  constitute 
brass,  five  or  six  of  coj)per  and  one  of  zinc,  form  pinch- 
back.  Tombac  is  composed  of  a  still  larger  proportion  of 
copper  than  pinchback;  is  of  a  deep  red,  and  bears  the  name 


TRADESMAN'S    OUfDE^  B3 

t)f  sit  invciltor*    Prince's  metal  requires  a  still  larger  propor- 
tion of  zinc  than  either  of  the  preceding  compositions. 

Test  for  Metals.  Let  a  stream  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen 
gas  pass  into  a  phial  of  liquid  ammonia  ;  the  best  mcihod  is 
to  put  the  ammonia  into  a  broad  mouthed  phial,  filling  it  about 
half  full  ;  turn  the  phial  in  an  oblique  position,  and  extend 
the  beak  of  the  retort  to  the  bottom  of  it.  Wet  tow  may  be 
wound  about  the  neck  of  the  retort  when  it  enters  the  mouth 
of  the  phial  to  prevent  the  escape  of  the  gas  ;  or  if  a  little 
does  escape  it  is  immaterial,  for  we  should  become  sufficien- 
tly acquainted  with  this  gas  to  detect  it  by  its  smell  ;  now 
pour  some  of  the  liquid  into  a  solution  of  copperas  and  ano- 
ther of  blue  vitriol. 

For  many  metals  this  is  a  perfect  test;  precipitates  all  me- 
tallic solutions  with  such  different  colours,  when  applied  as  a 
test,  that,  with  collateral  tests,  almost  any  metal  may  be  de- 
tected. 

To  give  tools  such  a  temper  as  icill  enable  ill  em  to  sate  mar" 
hle»  Make  the  tool  hot  in  the  fire,  and  when  red  cherry  col- 
our, take  it  off  from  the  fire,  rub  it  with  a  piece  of  candle, 
and  steep  it  immediately  in  good  strong  vinegar,  in  which 
some  soot  must  be  diluted. 

The  transmutation  of  Iron  into  Damask  Steel,  You  must 
at  first  j3urge  it  of  ifs  usual  britllencss  ;  and  after  having  re- 
duced it  into  filings,  make  it  red  hot  in  to  crucible  ;  steep  it 
several  times  in  oil  of  olives,  in  which  you  shall  have  before 
thrown  melted  lead.  Take  care  to  cover  the  vessel  in  which 
the  oil  is  contained,  ever\^  time  you  throw  the  steel  into  it,  fi-r 
fear  the  oil  should  catch  fire. 

To  lohitcn  Brass,  Barss,  copper,  iron,  or  steel  may  be 
easily  whitened,  by  meaus  of  the  Cornwall  tin,  or  pewter, 
prepared  with  sublimate,  proceeding  as  follows  :  Take  Corn- 
wall pewter,  about  one  pound,  add  to  it  half  that  quantity  of 
sublimate.  Set  it  on  a  strong  fire  and  sublime.  Throvi^  away 
the  first  water  ;  the  second  is  good,  which  you  know  by  its 
white  colour.  Now  if  you  make  a  piece  of  copper,  brass, 
steel  or  iron,  it  is  not  material  which,  red  hot  and  steep  it  in 
that  water  it  will  become  as  white  as  silver. 

To  calcine  Peivter,  and  render  it  as  white  and  as  hard  as 
silver.  Melt  well  pour  pewter  in  a  crucible,  so  that  it  may 
)e  very  fine  and  clear  ;  your  it  afterwards  into  a  very  sirong 
I'inegar,  then  into  mercurial  water  ;  repeat  that  operation  as 


84  THE    ARTIST    AND 

many  time^  as  you  please,  you  v/ill  each  time  give  it  an  ad- 
ditional degree  of  luirdness  and  whiteness  drawing  near  to 
silver,  so  much  that  it  will  at  last  he  very  difficult  to  distinguish 
from  silver. 

2^0  render  Iron  as  white  and  as  beauti/ul  as  Silver,  Take 
ammoniac  salt  in  powder,  and  mix  it  with  an  equal  quantity 
of  quicklime.  Put  them  all  together  in  cold  water  and  mix 
well  ;  when  done,  any  iron  piece  which  you  shall  have  made 
hot,  will  if  you  steep  it  in  that  prepared  water,  become  as 
white  as  silver. 

To  prevent  Iron  from  rusting.  Warm  your  iron  till  you 
cannot  touch  it  without  burning  yourself.  Then  rub  it  with 
new  and  clean  while  wax.  Put  it  again  to  the  fire  till  it  has 
soaked  in  the  wax.  When  done,  rub  it  over  with  a  piece  of 
serge,  and  the   iron  will  never  rust. 

To  Soften  Iron  and  harden  it  more  than  it  was  before. 
Make  a  little  chink  lengthways  in  an  iron  bar,  in  which  pour 
melted  lead.  Then  make  it  evaporate  by  a  strong  fire,  as 
that  of  copelling  ;  renew  this  operation  four  or  five  times, 
and  the  bar  will  become  very  soft.  You  harden  it  afterwards 
by  steeping  it,  when  red  hot,  in  mere  forge  water,  and  it  will 
be  of  so  good  a  temper  as  to  be  fit  for  lancets,  razors  and 
knives,  with  which  you  will  be  able  to  cut  other  iron  without 
its  splitting  or  denting. 

It  has  been  found  by  experience  that  an  armour  can  never 
be  good  proof  against  fire  arms,  if  it  has  not  first  been  soften- 
ed with  oils,  gums,  wax,  and  other  increative  things,  and  af- 
terwards hardened  by  steeping  them  several  times  over  in 
binding  waters. 

2^0  preserve  the  brightness  of  Arms,  Rub  them  with  harts 
marrow,  or  else  dissolve  some  alum  powder,  with  the  strong- 
est vinegar  you  can  find,  and  rub  your  arms  with  it.  By  this 
means  they  keep  for  ever  bright. 

Tin  alloijcd  ivith  Copper.  Scour  a  very  thin  slip  of  iron 
bright,  which  while  doing,  dip  it  several  times  in  very  dilute 
sulphuric  acid  ;  bend  one  end  of  it  so  that  it  will  fit  the  bot- 
tom of  a  crucible.  Melt  some  tin  in  the  crucible  and  dip  the 
bent  end  of  the  slip  of  iron  into  it ;  the  tin  will  combine  with 
the  surface  of  the  iron,  and  if  very  thin  will  penetrate  entire- 
\y  through  it. 

On  this  principle  sheet  tin  is  manufactured. 

Chinese    Sheet  Lead.      The    operation   is  carried  on  by 


tradesman's  guide.  85 

^^Be^^he  one  is  seated  on  the  floor,  with  a  large  flat 
slonc  before  him,  and  with  a  moveable  fiat  stone  standing  at 
his  side.  His  fellow  workman  stands  by  his  side  with  a  crucible 
filled  with  melted  lead  ;  and  having  poured  a  certain  quantity 
upon  the  stone  the  other  lifts  ilie  moveable  stone,  and  dash- 
ing it  on  the  fluid  lead,  presses  it  out  into  a  flat  and  thin  plate 
which  he  instantly  removes  from  the  stone.  A  second  quan- 
tity of  lead  is  poured  in  a  similar  manner,  and  a  similar  plate 
formed,  the  process  being  carried  on  v;ith  singular  rapidity. 
The  rough  edges  of  the  plates  are  then  cut  off,  and  are  sol- 
dered togethter  for  use. 

This  mehod  has  been  applied  with  great  i?uccess  to  the 
formation  of  thin  plates  of  zinc,  for  galvanic  pui  poses. 

To  cover  bars  of  Copjjer,  ^"c,  with  Gold^  so  as  to  be  roU 
led  out  into  sheets.  Prepare  ingots  or  pieces  of  copper  or 
brass  in  convenient  lengths  and  sizes — clean  them  from  im- 
purity, making  their  surfaces  level :  now  prepare  plates  of 
pure  gold,  or  gold  mixed  wilh  a  portion  of  alloy,  of  llie  same 
size  of  the  ingots  of  metal,  and  of  suitable  thickness.  Having 
placed  a  piece  of  gold  upon  an  ingot  intended  to  be  plated^ 
hammer  and  compress  them  together,  so  that  they  may  have 
their  surfaces  as  nearly  equal  to  each  other  as  possible  :  now 
bind  them  together  with  wire,  in  order  to  keep  them  in  the 
same  position  during  the  process  required  to  attach  them  ; 
now  take  silver  filings,  and  mix  with  borax,  to  assist  the  fu- 
sion of  silver;  lay  the  mixture  upon  the  i^Age  of  the  plate  of 
gold,  and  next  to  the  ingot  of  metal.  Having  thus  prepared 
the  two  bodiesj  place  them  on  a  fire  in  a  stove  or  furnace^ 
and  let  them  remain  until  the  silver  and  borax  placed  along  the 
edges  of  the  metals  melt,  and  until  the  adhesion  of  the  gold 
with  the  metal  is  perfect  ;  then  take  the  ingot  carefully  out 
of  the  stove,  and  by  this  process  it  is  plated  with  gold,  and 
prepared  ready  for  rolling  into  sheets. 

To  plate  Iron,  1.  Polish  the  surface  very  clean  and  level 
with«a  burnisher  ;  and  afterwards  by  exposing  it  to  a  blueing 
heat,  a  silver  leaf  is  properly  placed,  and  carefully  burnished 
down.  This  is  repeated  till  a  sufficient  number  of  leaves  are 
applied  to  give  the  silver  a  proper  body. 

2.  By  the  use  of  solder  :  slips  of  thin  solder  are  placed  be- 
tween the  iron  and  silver,  with  a  little  flux,  and  secured  to- 
gether by  binding  wire.  It  is  then  placed  in  a  clean  vessel, 
and  continued  in  it  till  the  solder  melts  ;  when  it  is  taken  out 
and  o*^  coolin<^  i'^^  found  to  adhere  firmlv.  8 


8G  I'HE    ARTIST    AND 

3.  By  tinning  the  iron  first,  and  uniting  the  silver  by  thtJ 
intermediate  slips  of  rolled  tin,  brought  into  fusion  in  a  gen- 
tie  heat. 

To  Tin  Copper  and  Brass.  Boil  six  pounds  cream  tartar 
four  gallons  water,  and  eight  pounds  grain  tin,  or  tin  sha- 
vings. After  they  have  boiled  a  sufficient  time,  the  substance 
to  be  tinned  is  put  therein,  and  the  boiling  continued,  when 
the  tin  is  precipitated  in  its  metalic  form. 

To  Tin  Iron  and  Copper  Vessels.  The  iron  to  be  tinned 
must  be  previously  steeped  in  acid  materials,  such  as  sour 
whey,  distiller's  wash,  ^c.  then  scoured  and  dipped  in  melt- 
ed tin,  having  been  first  rubbed  over  with  a  solution  of  sal 
ammoniac.  The  surface  of  the  tin  is  prevented  from  calcin- 
ing, by  covering  it  with  a  coat  of  fat.  Copper  vessels  must 
be  well  cleansed  ;  and  then  a  sufficient  quantity  of  tin,  with 
sal  ammoniac,  is  put  therein,  and  brought  into  fusion,  and  the 
copper  vessel  moved  about.  A  \h\\e  resin  is  sometimes  ad- 
ded. The  sal  ammoniac  prevents  the  copper  from  scalding, 
and  causes  the  tin  to  be  fixed  wherever  it  touches.  Lately, 
zinc  has  been  proposed  for  lining  vessels,  instead  of  tin,  to 
ayoid   the   consequences  which  are  unjustly  apprehended. 

White  Metal.  Ten  oz.  lead,  six  oz.  bismuth,  and  foui'oz. 
regulus  of  antimony. 

2.  Two  lbs.  regulus  of  antimony,  eight  oz.  brass,  and  ten 
oz.  tin. 

Common  hard  White  Metal.  Eight  oz.  copper,  and  half 
an  oz.  neutral  arsenical  salt,  fused  together,  under  a  flux  com- 
posed of  calcined  borax,  charcoal  dust,  and  fine  powdered 
glass. 

Manheim  Gold.  Three  and  a  half  oz.  copper,  one  and  a 
half  oz.  brass,  and  fifteen  grs.  pure  tin. 

Imitation  of  Silver.  Three  fourths  oz.  tin,  and  one  lb 
copper,  will  make  a  pale  b:!ll  metal  which  will  roll  and  ring 
very  near  to  Stirling  silver.  / 

Yelloio  dipping  Metal.  Two  parts  CheSdle  brass?  one 
part  copper,  with  a  little  Bristol  old  brass,  and  one-fourth  of 
an  ox.  of  tin  to  every  pound  of  copper.  This  ylloy  is  almost 
of  the  colour  of  gold  coin.  Cheadle  brass  is  the  darkest,,  and 
gives  the  metal  a  greenish  hue.  Old  Bristol  brass,  is  pale 
and  yellow. 

Common  Jeioelry.  Three  parts  copper,  one  part  Bristol 
old  brass,  and  four  oz.  of  tin    to  every  i)ound  of  copper. 


TRADESMAN  S    GUIDE.  $7 

If  this  alloy  is  for  fine  polishing,  the  tin  may  be  omitted 
and  a  mixture  of  lead  and  antimony  substituted.  Paler  pol- 
ishing metal,  by  reducing  the  copper  to  two,  or   to  one  part. 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 

Glass — Discovery — Process  of  Manufacture — Gilding — 
Silvering — To  separate  Gold  Jrom  gilt  Copper  or  Silver 
' — Oil'gilding  on  Wood — To  gild  by  burnishing — By 
Amalgamation — To  siver  by  heat — In  the  cold  way — 2'o 
plate  Looking' Glasses — Gold  and  Silver  Inks — To  pre- 
pare metallic  Trees — To  whiten  Foils — To  colour  Foils — 
To  give  Foils  a  lustre  like  Diamonds — Laquers, 

It  is  controverted  among  naturalists,  to  what  class  of  bo- 
dies glass  should  be  referred  ;  some  make  it  a  concrete  juice, 
others  a  stone,  and  others  again  rank  it  among  semi-metals  ; 
but  Dr.  Merret  observes,  that  these  are  all  natural  produc- 
tions ;  whereas  glass  is  a  factitious  compound,  produced  by 
fire,  and  never  found  in  the  earth,  but  only  the  sand  and 
stones  that  form  it ;  but  metals  are  perfectly  formed  by  na- 
ture into  certain  species,  and  fire  only  produces  them  by  its 
faculty  of  separating  heterogeneous,  and  uniting  homogene- 
ous bodies  ;  whereas  it  produces  glass  by  uniting  heterogene- 
ous matters,  viz.  salt  and  sand,  of  which  it  evidently  con- 
sists. The  chief  characters  or  properties  of  glass  are,  that  it 
fuses  in  a  vehement  fire  ;  when  fused,  adheres  to  iron  ;  does 
not  waste  in  the  fire,  is  ductile,  but  not  malleable  ;  and  while 
red  hot  can  be  cast  into  any  shape.  It  is  friable  when  cold  ; 
diaphanous,  either  hot  or  cold  ;  flexible  and  elastic  ;  disun- 
ited and  broke  by  cold  and  moisture,  and  especially  by 
saline  liquors  ;  is  only  cut  b}'^  the  diamond  or  emery  ;  acid 
or  other  juices  extract  no  quality  from  it ;  it  does  not  wear 
by  the  longest  use,  nor  will  any  liquor  make  it  musty,  change 
its  colour,  or  rust ;  it  softens  metals  and  makes  them  fusible  ; 
receives  all  metallic  colours  externally  and  internally  ;  will 
not  calcine,  and  may  be  cemented  like  stones  and  metals.  It 
is  said  100  weight  of  sand  in  the  composition  yields  150  of 
glass.  The  salt  is  procured  from  the  ashes  of  a  water  plant 
called  kali. 

There  are  many  other  plants  besides  kali,  which  produces 
a  salt  fit  for  glass.  The  sand  or  stones  is  the  second  ingre- 
dient, and  what  gives  it  the  body  ;  they  must  be  such  as  will 
fuse  J  the  whitest   are   the  best  ^  conse(^uently,  crystals  fira 


88  THE    ARTIST    AND 

preferred  to  all  others.  Sometimes  manufacturers  use  a  sort 
of  pebble  resembling  white  marble.  Flints  make  a  pure  crys- 
taline  metal.  When  stones  cannot  be  had  conveniently,  sand 
is  used.  The  glass  houses  in  England  are  furnished  with  a 
fine  white  sand,  as  is  frequently  used  for  sand  boxes,  with  a 
coarser  kind  for  green  glass.  For  crystal  glass,  200  pounds 
sand  or  stone  are  mixed,  finely  pulverized,  with  130  of  salt  ; 
they  are  then  calcined  in  a  reverberatory  furnace  for  several 
hours.  When  the  process  is  completed,  it  is  called  frit  or 
ballitq.  This  frit  is  sot  off  in  melting  pots  in  the  working 
furnace,  with  some  manganese  added,  which  destroys  the 
greenish  cast  natural  to  all  glasSi  While  it  is  in  fusion  the 
workman  mixes  tbe  metal  well  together  ;  skimming  off  the 
sand,  over  which  is  a  white  salt,  called  sandiver,  which,  if 
suffered  to  remain,  would  render  the  glass  brittle  and  unfit  to 
work.  When  the  vitrification  is  completed,  and  the  metal 
sufficiently  clear,  it  is  formed  into  the  articles  required,  by 
dipping  a  hollow  iron  into  the  melting  pot,  with  which  a  suf- 
licient  quantity  is  taken  out  for  the  intended  work  :  while  red 
hot,  it  is  rolled  on  a  marble  to  unite  its  parts  more  firmly, 
then  blowing  moderately,  swells  it,  repeating  it  until  of  suf- 
ficient size,  then  the  artist,  by  whirling  it  about,  lengthens  and 
cools  the  glass  ;  moulds  it  in  the  stamp  irons,  and  flats  the 
bottom,  by  pressing  it  on  the  marble  ;  after  which  it  is  fash- 
ioned as  occasion  requires,  after  being  broken  from  the  blowr 
ing  iron.  As  the  workman  finishes  them,  another  takes  them 
up  with  an  iron  fork,  and  places  them  in  a  tower  over  the 
melting  furnace  to  anneal,  where,  cifter  remaining  some  time, 
they  are  put  into  pans,  which  are  gradually  withdrawn  to 
cool.  There  is  scarcely  a  branch  of  manufacture,  which  de- 
serves more  attention  than  that  of  glass  ;  and  although  the 
an  has  excited  the  astonishment  of  the  world,  still  it  is  highly 
probable,  that  in  order  to.  bring  it  to  the  highest  state  of  per- 
fection, there  is  abundant  room  for  much  improvement. 

Pliny  relates  that  *' glass  was  first  discovered  by  accident 
in  Syria,  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  Belus,  by  certain  merchants 
driven  thither  by  the  fortune  of  the  sea,  and  obliged  to  conti- 
nue there,  and  dress  their  victuals  by  making  a  fire  on  the 
ground,  where  there  was  an  abundance  of  the  herb  kali  :  the 
plant  burning  to  ashes,  its  salt  incorporating  with  the  sand  and 
stones,  became  vitrified." 

Some  writers  assert  that  the  discovery  of  glass  is  as  ancient 


tradesman's  guide.  89 

as  the  art  of  pottery  or  making  brick  ;  for  that  a  kiln  of  brick 
cannot  be  burnt,  or  a  batcli  of  pottery  made,  but  some  of  the 
brick  or  ware  will  be  at  least  superficially  turned  to  glass  ;  so 
that  it  must  have  been  known  at  the  building  of  Babel,  and 
likewise  b}-  the  Egyptians,  among  whcm  the  Israelites  were 
many  years  employed  in  making  bricks.  Of  this  kind,  no 
doubt,  was  that  fossil  glass,  mentioned  by  Ferrant,  Imperat. 
to  be  found  under- ground  in  many  places,  where  there  great 
fires  had  been. 

A  writer  of  eminence,  makes  a  distinction  between  glass 
contained  in  its  own  mine  or  stone,  and  true  glass  that  is  ex- 
tracted from  the  same  ;  that  the  latter  is  more  artificial  than 
a  metal  is,  when  extracted  from  the  ore  ;  and  as  to  the  for- 
mer, he  urges,  that  as  metal,  by  having  its  existence  in  the 
ore,  so  glass,  by  having  it  in  the  stone  out  of  which  it  is  pro- 
duced, is  a  natural  production.  After  what  has  been  advan- 
ced, the  supposition  arises,  if  glass  is  procured  from  stone 
alone,  the  weight  of  the  metal  must  be  less  than  the  substance 
from  which  it  is  extracted,  whereas  it  far  exceeds,  as  ICO 
pounds  of  sand  yield  150  pounds  of  glass.  Considering  also, 
that  the  salts  made  use  of  are  of  the  most  fixed  kind,  there- 
fore we  cannot  suppose  them  to  be  carried  off  by  the  fire  ; 
besides,  as  a  proof,  in  the  coarser  glasses  one  may  discern,  or 
even  pick  out  pieces  of  salt,  furnishing  a  test  by  the  taste. 
Flint,  sand  and  stone  afford  different  species  of  glass,  and  the 
ashes,  as  they  are  variable  in  quality,  will  proportionately  al- 
ter the  glass.  A  fixed  alkaline  salt,  sharp  and  well  purified, 
mixed  with  a  pure  calx  of  flint,  yields  a  glass  clearer  than 
amber  itself.  Our  representation  of  the  manufacture  of  glass, 
no  doubt,  is  imperfect,  though  we  are  flattered  it  may  not  be 
wholly  uninteresting. 

Grecian  Gilding.  Equal  parts  of  sal  ammoniac  and  cor- 
rosive sublimate  are  dissolved  in  spirit  of  nitre,  and  a  solution 
of  gold  made  with  this  menstruum.  The  silver  is  brushed 
over  with  it,  which  is  turned  black,  but  on  exposure  to  a  red 
heat,  it  assumes  the  colour  of  gold. 

Gilding  MetaL  Four  parts  copper,  one  part  Bristol  old 
brass,  and  four  oz.  of  tin,  to  every  pound  of  copper. 

J'o  dissolve  Gold  in  Aqua-Regia.  Take  an  aqua-regia, 
composed  of  two  parts  of  nitrous  acid,  and  one  of  marine  acid, 
or  of  one  part  of  sal  ammoniac  and  four  parts  of  aqua-fortis  ; 
let  the  gold  be  granulated,  put  into  a  sufficient  quantity  of 


90  t'HE    AttTIST    AND 

this  menstruum,  and  expose  to  a  moderate  degree  of  heaf. 
During  the  solution  an  effervescorice  takes  place,  and  it  ac- 
quires a  beatiful  yellow  colour,  which  becomes  more  and 
more  intense,  till  it  has  a  golden  or  even  orange  colour. 
When  the  menstruum  is  saturated,  it  is  very  clear  and  trans- 
parent. 

To  gild  Iron  or  Steel  icitli  a  solution  of  Gold,  Make  a 
solution  of  eight  ounces  of  nitre  and  common  salt,  with  live 
ounces  crude  alum,  in  a  sufficient  quantity  of  water  ;  dissolve 
half  an  ounce  of  gold,  thinly  plated  and  cut;  and  afterwards 
evaporate  the  dryness,  digest  the  residuum  in  rectified  spirit 
of  wine  or  ether,  which  will  perfectly  abstract  the  gold.  The 
iron  is  brushed  over  with  this  solution,  and  becomes  immedi- 
ately gilt. 

2.  Pour  into  a  ratiirated  solution  of  muriate  of  gold  (that 
is,  wheQ  there  is  no  excess  of  acid)  about  twice  as  much  sul- 
phuric ether  :  now  brush  upon  a  clear  polished  surface  of  iron 
or  steel  some  of  this  liquid.  The  ether  will  soon  evaporate, 
und  leave  the  gold  covering  the  surface.  To  gild  silver  or 
copper,  heat  gold  and  mercury  together  in  a  crucible,  one 
part  of  gold  to  about  eight  of  mercury,  until  they  are  com- 
pletely alloyed  :  then  throw  the  hot  alloy  into  cold  water.  Hav- 
ing w*et  the  silver  or  copper  with  diluted  nitric  acid,  brush  on 
the  alloy  with  a  fine  brush  (a  wire  brush  is  best)  as  uniformly 
<is  possible.  Then  drive  off  the  mercury  with  heat,  placing 
the  gilded  metal  over  the  hot  coals  :  afterwards  the  surface 
must  be  polished  with  a  burnisher.  The  only  objection  made 
lo  this  method  by  artists  is,  that  it  is  very  difficult  to  lay  on 
the  alloy  evenly.  But  old  artists  learn  to  brush  over  the  bare 
spots  while  it  is  heating,  being  careful  to  avoid  inhaling  the 
mercurial  fumes. 

This  method  of  gilding  iron  is  undoubtedly  very  perfect  ; 
but  it  is  desirable  some  better  method  should  be  discovered 
for  gilding  the  other  metals. 

To  coat  Copper  with  Silver.  Take  a  few  grains  of  silver 
'  in  powder  as  precipitated  by  copper  in  a  preceding  experi- 
ment, after  it  is  washed  and  before  melting;  about  an  equal 
weight  of  alum  or  a  little  more  ;  six  times  as  much  table  salt  ; 
also  six  times  as  much  tartrite  of  potash  ;  pulverize  all  these 
articles  and  rub  them  well  together  ;  rub  the  clean  bright 
surface  of  a  piece  of  copper  with  this  powder,  and  it  will  be 
silvered. 


tradesman's  OL'IDE.  91 

This  silvering  is  not  very  durable,  though  it  may  be  easily 
renewed.  Plating  copper  is  much  preferable.  This  is  done 
by  brazing  on  a  thin  bar  of  silver  upon  a  thick  bar  of  copper. 
Then  both  are  rolled  out  into  the  proper  thickness  for  use. 

To  gild  hy  dissolving  Gold  in  Aqua-Regia.  Fine  linen 
rags  are  soaked  in  a  saturated  solution  of  gold  in  aqua-regia, 
gently  dried,  and  afterwards  burnt  to  tinder.  The  substance 
to  be  gilt  must  be  well  polished  ;  a  piece  of  cork  is  first  dip- 
ped into  a  solution  of  conmion  salt  in  water,  and  afterwards 
into  the  tinder,  whioh  is  well  rubbed  on  the  surface  of  the 
metal  to  be  gilt,  and  the  gold  appears  in  all  its  metallic  lustre. 

To  gild  Ivory ^  Silk,  S^c,  with  Hydrogen  Gas,  immerse 
a  piece  of  white  silk  or  ivory  into  a  solution  of  nitro-muriate 
of  gold,  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of  the  acid,  three  of  dis- 
tilled water  ;  whilst  the  substance  to  be  gilded  is  still  wet, 
immerse  it  in  a  jar  of  hydrogen  gas  ;  it  will  soon  be  covered 
by  a  complete  coat  of  gold.  The  foregoing  experiment  may 
be  advantageously  varied  as  follows  :  Paint  flowers  or  other 
i>rnaments  with  a  very  fine  camel's  hair  pencil,  dipped  in  the 
above  mentioned  solution,  on  pieces  of  si!k,  satin,  &c.  hold 
them  over  a  Florence  flask,  from  which  hydrogen  gas  is  evol- 
ved, during  the  composition  of  the  water  by  sulphuric  acid 
and  iron  filings.  The  painted  flowers,  in  a  few  minutes,  will 
shine  in  all  the  splendour  of  the  purest  gold,  which  will  not 
tarnish  on  exposure  to  the  air  or  in  washing. 

Oil  gilding  on  Wood,  Cover  and  prime  the  wood  with 
two  or  three  coatings  of  boiled  linseed  oil  and  carbonate  of 
lead,  in  order  to  fill  up  the  pores,  and  conceal  the  irregulari- 
ties of  the  surface  occasioued  by  the  veins  in  the  wood.  When 
dry,  lay  on  a  thin  coat  of  gold  size,  which  is  prepared  by 
grinding  some  of  the  red  oxide  of  lead  with  the  thickest  dry- 
ing oil  procurable,  and  mixed  previously  to  using  with  a  little 
13)1  of  turpentine,  till  brought  to  a  proper  consistence.  If  the 
gold  size  is  good,  it  will  dry  in  twelve  hours,  more  or  less. 
Tlien  spread  a  leaf  of  gold  on  a  cushion,  formed  by  a  few 
folds  of  flannel,  secured  on  a  piece  of  wood,  eight  inches 
sqaaare,  by  a  tight  covering  of  leather,  and  cut  into  strips  of 
a  proper  size  by  a  bluntpallet  knife  ;  then  take  each  strip 
upon  the  point  of  a  fine  brush,  and  apply  it  to  the  part  inten- 
ded to  be  gilded,  which  gently  press  down  with  a  ball  of  soft 
cotton  ;   in  a  few  minutes  sweep  away  the  loose  particks  with 


92  THE    ARTIST  AND 

a  large  camePs  hair  brush.     In  a  day  or  two  the  size  will  be 
completely  dried,  and  tho  operation  finished. 

To  gild  hij  Burnishing,  This  operation  h  chiefly  perfor- 
med on  picture  frames,  mouldings,  &c.  Cover  the  surface 
to  be  gilt  corefidly  with  a  strong  size,  made  by  boiling  down 
pieces  of  white  leather,  or  clippings  of  parchment,  till  they 
become  a  stiff  jelly  ;  this  coating  being  dry,  eight  or  ten  more 
must  be  applied,  consisting  of  the  same  size,  mixed  with  fine 
plaster  of  Paris,  or  washed  chalk.  When  a  sufficient  num- 
ber of  layers  are  put  on,  as  the  nature  af  the  work  requires, 
and  become  quite  dry,  apply  a  moderately  thich-  layer,  com- 
posed of  size  and  armeniabole  or  yellow  oxide  of  lead.  While 
this  last  is  yet  moist,  put  on  the  gold  leaf  in  the  usual  man- 
ner ;  pressing  it  with  ihe  cotton  ball  ;  and  before  the  size  is 
become  perfectly  dry,  the  parts  intended  to  be  most  brilliant, 
should  be  carefully  burnished  by  an  agate  or  dog's  tooth  fixed 
\n  a  handle. 

It  is  sometimes  common,  in  order  to  save  labour,  but  a  bad  practice, 
slightly  to  burnish  the  bailliant  parts,  and  to  deaden  the  rest,  by  draw- 
ing a  brush  over  them  dipped  in  size.  This  kind  of  gilding  can  only  be 
applied  on  in-doorvvork,  as  rain,  or  even  a  considerable  degree  of  damp- 
ness will  occasion  the  gold  to  peel  off.  When  dirty,  it  may  be  cleansed 
by  a  soft  brush,  with  hot  spirit  of  wine,  or  oil  of  turpentine. 

To  Dye  in  Gold,  Silver  3Iedals  through.  Take  some  salt 
petre,  pour  over  it  a  sufficient  quantity  of  oil  of  vitriol,  to 
swim  over.  When  the  ebulitions  arising  from  that  mixture 
shall  be  ended,  distil  to  dryness — there  remains  a  white  salr^ 
Dissolve  in  what  quantity  of  warm  water  you  think  proper,. 
or  may  be  in  need  of,  which  you  know  when  you  see  the  wa^ 
ter  can  dissolve  no  more  of  it — put  into  this  a  drachm  of  calx 
or  magister  of  gold.  Then  put  in  digestion,  in  it,  laminas  cat 
small  and  thin,  for  twenty-four  hours,  over  a  very  gentle  ftre.. 
At  the  end  of  that  time,  you  will  find  them  thoroughiy  dyed 
gold  colour,  inside  and  out. 

Silvering  Powder.  Silver  dust  from  fifteen;  to  twenty 
grains,  cream  tartar,  common  salt,  each  two  drachms,  alum 
half  a  drachm. 

2.  Silver  dust,  half  an  ounce,  common  salt,  sal  ammoniac, 
of  each  two  ounces,  corrosive  sublimate,  one  drachm;  make 
into  a  paste  with  water,  used  to  silver  copper,  which  is  to  be 
cleaned  by  boiling  with  argol  and  alum,  then  rub  it  with  eithet 
of  these  powders,  and  polish  with  soft  leather. 


tradesmen's  guide*  93 

To  gild  Copper^  ^'c.  by  Amalgamation,  Immerse  a  very 
clean  bright  piece  of  copper  in  a  diluted  solution  of  nitrate  of 
mercury.  By  the  affinity  of  copper  for  the  nitric  acid,  the 
mercury  will  be  precipitated  ;  now  spread  the  amalgam  of 
gold  rather  thinly  over  the  coat  of  copper  just  given  to  the 
mercury.  This  coat  unites  with  the  amalgam,  but  will  re- 
main on  the  copper.  Now  place  (he  piece  thus  operated 
upon,  in  a  clean  oven  or  furnace,  where  there  is  no  smok«. 
If  the  heat  is  a  little  greater  than  600  deg.  the  mercury  of  the 
Amalgam  will  be  volatilized,  and  the  copper  will  be  beauti- 
fully gilt. 

In  the  large  way  of  gilding,  the  furnaces  are  so  constructed,  that  the 
volatilized  mercury  is  again  condensed,  and  preserved  for  further  use, 
so  that  there  is  no  loss  in  the  operation.  There  is  also  a  cgntrivance 
by  which  the  volatile  particles  of  mercury  are  prevented  from  injuring 
the  gilders. 

Tq  Gild  Steel,  Pour  some  of  the  etherial  solution  of  gold 
into  a  wine  glass,  and  slip  therein  the  blade  of  a  new  pen- 
knife, lancet  or  razor  ;  withdraw  the  instrument  and  allow  the 
ether  to  evaporate.  The  blace  will  be  found  to  be  covered 
with  a  very  thin  coat  of  gold.  A  clean  rag,  or  a  small  piece 
of  very  dry  sponge  may  be  dipped  in  the  ether,  and  used  to 
moisten  the  blade,  and  used  with  the  same  result.  In  this 
case  there  is  no  occasion  to  pour  tbe  liquid  into  a  glass,  which 
would  lose  by  evaporation;  but  the  rag  or  sponge  may  moist- 
ened with  it  by  applying  either  to  the  mouth  of  the  phial. 
This  coating  of  gold  will  remain  in  the  steel  for  a  great  length 
of  time,  and  will  preserve  it  from  rusting.  This  is  the  way 
in  which  swords  and  other  cutlery  are  ornamented.  Lancets 
too  are  in  this  way  gilded  with  great  advantage,  to  secure 
them  from  rust. 

To  heighten  the  color  of  Yellow  Gold,  Six  ounces  salt- 
petre, two  ounces  copperas,  one  ounce  white  vitriol  and  one 
ounce  alum.  If  it  be  wanted  redder,  a  small  portion  of  blue 
vitriol  must  be  added.  These  are  to  be  well  mixed  and  dis- 
solved in  water  as  the  colour  is  wanted. 

To  heighieen  the  colour  of  Green  Gold.  One  ounce  ten 
pennyweights  saltpetre,  one  oz.  four  pennyweights  sal  ammo- 
niac, one  oz.  four  pennyweights  Roman  vitriol,  and  eighteen 
pennyweights  verdigris.  Mix  them  well  together,  and  dis- 
solve a  portion  in  watei,  as  occasion  requires.  The  work 
must  then  be  dipped  in  these  compositions,  applied  to  a  pro^ 


94  THE    ARTIST    AND 

per  heat  to  burn  them  off,  and  then  quenched  in  water  or 
vinegar. 

To  heighten  the  colour  of  Red  Gold.  Four  oz.  yellow 
melted  wax  ;  add  1  1-2  oz.  red  ochre,  in  fine  powder,  1  i-2 
oz.  verdigris,  calcined  till  it  yields  no  fumes,  and  half  an  oz. 
calcined  borax.  It  is  necessary  to  calcine  the  verdigris,  or 
else,  by  the  heat  applied  in  burning  the  wax,  the  vinegar  be- 
comes so  concentrated  as  to  corrode  the  surfaces  and  make  it 
appear  speckled. 

To  separate  Gold  from  gilt  Copper  or  Silver,  Apply  a 
solution  of  borax,  in  water,  to  the  gilt  surface  with  a  fine 
bi  ush,  and  sprinkle  over  it  some  fine  powdered  sulphur.  Make 
the  piece  red  hot,  and  quench  it  in  water.  The  gold  may 
be  easily  wiped  off  with  a  scratch  brush,  and  recovered  by 
testing  it  with  lead.  Gold  is  taken  from  the  surface  of  the 
silver,  by  spreading  it  over  a  paste,  made  of  powdered  sal 
ammoniac,  with  aqua-fortis,  and  heating  it  till  the  matter 
smokes,  and  is  nearly  dry,  when  the  gold  may  be  separated 
by  rubbing  it  with  a  scratch  brush. 

To  Silver  with  Heat,  Dissolve  an  ounce  of  pure  silver 
in  aqua-fortis,  and  prec'pitate  it  with  common  salt ;  to  which 
add  one  pound  of  sal  ammoniac,  sandiver,  and  white  vitriol, 
and  one  ounce  of  sublimate.  2.  Dissolve  an  ounce  of  pure 
silver  in  aqua-fortis,  precipitate  it  with  common  salt,  and  add 
after  washing,  six  oz.  common  salt,  three  oz.  each  of  sandiver 
and  white  vitriol,  and  one  fourth  of  an  ounce  of  sublimate. 
These  are  to  be  ground  into  a  paste  upon  a  fine  stone  witli  a 
muller ;  the  substance  to  be  .*jilvered  must  be  rubbed  over 
with  a  sufficient  quantity  of  the  ..paste,  and  exposed  to  a  pro- 
per degree  of  heat.  When  tlie  silver  runs,  it  is  taken  from 
the  fire,  and  dipped  into  a  weak  spirit  of  salt  to  clean  it. 

Silvering  on  Gilt  work  hy  Amalgamation,  Silver  will  not 
attach  itself  to  any  metal  by  amalgamation,  unless  it  be  first 
gilt ;  the  process  is  the  same  as  gilding  in  colours,  only  no 
acid  should  be  used. 

To  Silver  in  the  Cold  Way,  Two  drachms  tartar,  two 
drachms  common  salt,  one-half  drachm  alum  and  20  grains 
silver,  precipitated  from  the  nitrous  acid  by  copper.  Make 
them  luto  a  paste  with  a  little  water.  This  is  to  be  rubbed 
on  the  surface  to  be  silvered  with  a  cork,  dec.  2.  Dissolve 
pure  silver  in  aqua-fortis,  and  precipitate  the  silver  with  com- 
mon salt ;  make  this  precipitate  into  a  paste,  by  adding  a  liu 
I^t  more  salt  and  cream  of  tartar, 


TnAbESMAN's    GUIDE.  95 

jTo  Silver  Copper  Ingots,  The  surface  of  the  copper  oil 
which  thife  silver  is  to  be  fixed  must  be  made  flat  by  fuiling, 
and  siiould  be  left  rough.  The  silver  is  first  annealed,  and 
aftei  wards  pickled  in  weak  spirit  of  salt  ;  it  is  planished,  and 
then  scraped  on  the  surface  to  be  fitted  on  the  copper.  These 
prepared  surfaces  are  anointed  with  a  solution  of  borax,  or 
strewed  with  fine  powdered  boiax  itself,  and  then  confined  in 
contact  with  each  other,^  by  binding  wire.  When  they  are 
exposed  to  a  sufl^cient  degree  of  beat,  the  flux  causes  the  sur- 
faces to  fuse  at  the  same  time;  and  after  they  become  cold, 
they  are  found  finely  united.  Com:)ear  may  likewise  be  pla- 
ted by  heating  it,  and  burnishing  leaf  silver  upon  it;  so  riiay 
iron  and  brass. 

The  principal  difficulties  in  plating  copper  are  to  Brihg  the  surfaces^ 
of  the  copper  and  silver  into  fasion  at  the  same  time,  and  to  prevent' 
the  copper  from  scaling  ;  for  which  purpose  fluxes  arc  used. 

To  separate  Silver  from  Plated  Copper,  This  process  iff 
applied  to  recover  the  silver  from  the  plated  metal,  which  has' 
been  rolled  down  for  buttons,  toys,  ^'c.  without  destroying 
any  large  proportion  of  the  copper.  For  this  purpose  a  men- 
struum is  composed  of  three  pounds  oil  vitriol,  one  and  a 
half  ounces  nitre,  and  a  pound  of  water.  The  plated  metal 
is  boiled  in  it,  till  the  silver  is  dissolved,  and  then  the  silver 
is  dissolved,  and  then  the  .silver  is  recovered  by  throwing 
commali  salt  into  the  solution.'  ' 

Amalgam  of  Gold  in  the  large  way.  A  quaiUity  of  quick- 
silver is  put  into  a  crucible  or  iron  ladle  which  is  lined  with 
clay,  and  exposed  to  heat  till  it  begirYB-  to  smoke.  The  gold' 
Iti  be  mixed  should  be  previously  granulafed,- anid  heated  red 
hot  ,  when  it  should  be  added  to  the  quicksilver,  and  stirred' 
;about  with  an  iron  rod,  till  it  is  perfectly  dissolved.  J'f  there 
sliould  be  any  supeifluous  mercury,  it  may  be  separated  by 
pa^ssiDg  U  through  clean  soft  leather,  and  the  remaining  amal- 
gam will  have  the  consistence  of  butter,  and  contain  about 
three  parts  of  mercury  to  one  of  gold. 

To  gild  by  Amalgamation.  The  metal  to  bu  gilt  is  to  be 
previously  cleansed  on  its  surface,by  boiling  in  a  weak  pickle, 
\vh\ch  is  a  very  dilute  nitrous  acid.  A  quantity  of  aqua-fortis 
\%  poqrcd  into  an  earthen  vessel,  and  quicksilver  put  therein, 
when  a  sufiicient  quantity  of  mercury  is  dissolved,  the  articles 
to  be  gilt  are  put  into  the  solution,  and  stirred  about  with  a 
brush  till  they  become  white.      This  is  called  quicking  ;  but 


96  THE    ARTIST    AND 

as  during  quicken  by  this  mode,  a  noxious  vapour  continually 
arises,  which  proves  very  injurious  to  the  health  of  the  work- 
men, tliey  have  adopted  another  method,  by  which  they  in  a 
great  measure,  avoid  that  danger.  They  now  dissolve  the 
quicksilver  in  a  bottle  containing  aqua-fortis,  and  leave  it  in 
the  open  air  during  the  solution,  so  that  the  noxious  vapours 
escape  into  the  air.  Then  a  little  of  this  solution  is  poured 
into  a  basin,  and  with  a  brush  dipped  therein,  they  stroke 
over  the  surface  of  the  metal  to  be  gilt,  which  immediately 
becomes  quickened.  The  amalgam  is  now  applied  by  one  of 
the  following  methods: 

1.  By  proportioning  it  fo  the  quantity  of  articles  to  be  gilt, 
and  putting  them  into  a  white  heat  iogether,  working  them 
about  with  a  soft  brush,  till  the  amalgam  is  uniformly  spread. 
Or,  2.  By  applying  a  portion  of  the  amalgam  upon  one  part, 
and  spreading  it  on  the  surface,  if  flat,  by  working  it 
about  with  a  harder  brush.  The  work  thus  managed  is  put 
into  a  pan,  and  exposed  to  a  gentle  degree  of  heat  ;  when  it 
becomes  hot,  it  is  frequently  put  into  a  heat  and  worked  about 
with  a  painter's  lafge  brush,  to  prevent  an  irregular  dissipation 
of  the  mercury,  till,  at  last,  the  quicksilver  is  entirely  dissi- 
pated, by  a  repetition  of  heat,  and  the  gold  is  attached  to  the 
surface  of  the  metal.  This  gilt  surface  is  well  cleansed  by  a 
wire  drush,  and  the  artists  heighten  the  colour  of  the  gold  by 
the  application  of  various  compositions  ;  this  part  of  the  pro- 
cess is  called  colouring. 

To  Gild  Glass  and  Procelain.  Drinking  and  other  glas- 
ses are  sometimes  gilt  on  their  edges.  This  is  doiiOj  either 
by  an  adhesive  varnish,  or  by  heat.  The  varnish  -is  prepared 
by  dissolving  in  boiled  linseed  oil  an  equal  weight,  either  of 
copal  or  amber.  This  is  to  be  diluted  by  a  proper  quantity 
of  oil  of  turpentine,  so  as  to  be  applied  as  thin  as  possible  to 
the  part  of  the  glass,  intended  to  be  gilt.  When  this  is  done 
which  will  be  in  about  twentN'-four  hours,  the  glass  must  be 
placed  in  a  stove,  till  so  warm  as  almost  to  burn  the  fingers 
when  handled*  At  this  temperature  the  varnish  will  become 
adhesive,  and  a  piece  of  leaf  gold  applied  in  the  usual  way, 
will  immediately  stick.  Sweep  off  the  superfluous  portions 
of  the  leaf,  and  when  quite  cold  it  may  be  burnished,  taking 
care  to  interpose  a  piece  of  very  thin  paper,  between  the  gold 
and  burnisher.  If  the  varnish  is  very  good,  this  is  the  best 
method  of  gilding  glass,  as  the  gold  is  thus  fixed  on  more 
evenly. 


tradesman's  guide.  97 

Si  often  happens  that  the  varnish  is  hut  incirfferent,  rxhd 
*hat  by  repeated  washing  the  gold  wears  off:  on  this  account 
<he  practice  of  hurning  it,  is  sonietimes  had  recourse  to. 
For  this  purpose,  some  gold  powder  is  ground  with  borax, 
-and  applied  to  clean  glass,  by  a  camel's  hair  pencil;  when 
-quite  dry,  the  glass  is  put  into  a  stove  heated  to  about  the 
temperature  of  an  annealing  oven  :  the  gum  burns  off,  and 
the  borax,  by  vitrifying,  cements  the  gold  with  great  firmness 
4o  the  glass;  when  it  maybe  burnished.  Porcelain  and 
otlier  wares  may  "be  platinized,  silvered,  tinned,  and  bronzed, 
in  a  simi-lar  manner.       ,  ' 

To  Gild  Leather*  Dust  the  leather  over  with  Very  fine 
powderod  yellow  resin  or  mastic  gum.  The  iron  tools 
should  he  arranged  (if  letters  alphabetically)  on  b  rack  be* 
fore  a  clear  fire  ;  to  be  wtll  heated  v/ithout  becoming  red 
hot.  Each  letter  or  stamp  must  b6  tried  as  to  its  ireat,  ba 
the  raw  side  of  a  piece  of  waste  leatlier.  Now,  press  the 
*dt)'i  downward  on  the  leaf,  if  it  has  acquired  a  proper  heat; 
which  wiU  become  indented  and  show  the  figure  imprinted 
on  it-^the  next  letter  is  taken  and  stamped  in  like  manner  ; 
^ind  «o  on  with  the  others  :  the  stiperfitjous  gold  may  be  rub- 
.  bed  off  by  a  •cloth.  The  cloth  shomd  be  slightly  greased,  to 
retain  the  gold  wiped  off.  The  cloth  will  soon  become  satu- 
rated with  gold,  and  is  generally  sold  to  refiners  to  recover 
ihe  gold.  Some  afford  as  much  gold  by  burning  as  to  bo 
worth  a  guinea  and  a  half. 

f/old  powder  for  Gilding.  Gold  powder  ma}'  he  prepared 
an  tiiree  different  ways  :  1.  Put  into  an  earthen  mortar  some 
gold  leaf,  with  a  little  honey,  or  thick  gum  water,  and  grind 
the  .mixture  till  the  gold  is  reduced  to  extremely  minute  par- 
ticles. \Vhon  this  is  done,  a  little  warm  water  \Vill  wash  out 
the  honey  or  gum  leaving  the  gold  behind  in  a  pulverulent 
state. 

2.  Dissolve  puro  gold,  (or  the  leaf,)  in  nitro-murlatic  acid, 
nnd  then  precipitate  it  by  a  piece  of  copper,  or  by  a  solution 
of  sulphate  of  iron.  Tho  precipitate,  (if  by  copper,)  must 
he  digested  in  distilled  vinegar,  and  then  washed,  (by  pour- 
ing water  over  it  repeatedly,)  and  dried.  This  precipitate 
will  be  in  the  form  of  a  very  fine  powder;  it  works  better, 
and  is  more  easily  burnished  than  gold  loaf  ground  with  honey 
as  above. 

S.  Or  the  best  method  is,  by  heating  a  prepared  amalgam 
9 


98  TilE    AllTIST    xiNtT^ 

of  gold,  in  an  open  clean  crucible,  and  continuing  the  strong 
heat  until  the  whole  of  tiie  mercury  is  evaporated;  at  the  same 
time  constantly  stirring  the  amalgam  with  a  glass  rod.  When 
the  mercury  has  completely  left  the  gold,  the  remaining  pow- 
der is  to  be  ground  in  a  wedgewood  mortar,  with  a  little 
water,  and  afterwards  dried.  It  is  then  fit  for  use.  Although 
the  last  mode  of  operating  has  been  here  given,  the  operator 
'cannot  be  too  much  reminded  of  the  danger  attending  the 
sublimation  of  mercury.  In  the  small  way  here  described  it 
is  impossible  to  operate  without  danger;  it  is  therefore  better 
to  prepare  it  according  to  the  former  directions,  than  to  risk 
the  health  by  the  latter. 

To  Gild  Writings^  Drawings^  S^c.  Letters  written  on 
vellum  or  paper  are  gilded  in  three  ways;  for  the  first,  mix 
size  with  the  ink,  and  the  letters  are  written  as  usual;  when 
dry  a  slight  degree  of  stickiness  is  produced,  by  breathing  on 
them;  then  apply  the  gold  leaf,  making  a  little  pressure,  that 
it  may  adhere  with  firmness.  The  second  method  is,  some 
white  lead  or  chalk  is  ground  up  with  strong  sizcj  and  the  let- 
ters are  made  by  this  means  with  a  brush;  when  dry, the  gold 
leaf  may  be  laid  on,  and  afterwards  burnished.  The  last  pro- 
cess is  to  mix  up  some  gold  powder  with  size,  and  to  form  the 
letters  by  means  of  a  brush.  It  is  supposed  this  last  method 
was  used  by  the  monks  in  illuminating  their  missals,  psalters^ 
and  rubrics. 

To  Gild  on  the  Edges  of  Paper,  Leaves  of  books  and 
letter  paper  should  be  gilded  while  in  a  horizontal  position  in 
the  book  binder's  press.  Apply  a  composition  formed  of 
four  parts  of  Armenian  bole,  and  one  of  candied  sugar,  ground 
to  a  proper  consistence  in  water,  and  laid  on  by  a  brush  with 
the  white  of  an  egg.  When  nearly  dry,  smooth  the  coating 
by  a  burnisher;  which  is  generally  a  crooked  piece  of  agate, 
very  smooth,  and  fixed  in  a  handle.  Then  slightly  moisten 
it  by  a  sponge  dipped  in  clean  water,  and  squeezed  in  the 
band.  Take  up  the  leaf  on  a  piece  of  cotton,  from  the  lea- 
ther cushion,  and  apply  it  to  the  moistened  surface.  When 
dry,  burnish  it  by  rubbing  over  it  the  agate  repeatedly  from 
end  to  end,  taking  care  not  to.  wound  the  surface  by  the  point 
of  the  burnisher.  A  piece  of  silk  or  India  paper  is  usually 
interposed   between  the  gold  and  burnisher. 

To    Gild  in  Colours.      The   principal   colours  of  gold   for 
gilding  are  red,  green,  and  yellow.     These  should  be  kjpt  in 


TRADESMAN  S    GUIDE.  99 

dijTerent  amalgams.  The  part  which  is  to  remain  of  the  first 
colour  is  to  be  stopped  off  with  a  composition  of  chalk  and 
glue;  the  variety  required  is  produced  by  gilding'  the  unstop- 
•ped  parts  with  the  proper  amalgam,  according  to  the  asual 
mode  of  gilding.  Sometimes  the  amalgam  is  applied  to  tho 
surface  to  be  gilt  without  any  quicking,  by  spreading  it  with 
aqua-fortis  i  but  this  depends  on  the  same  principle  as  a  pre- 
vious quicking. 

To  Plate  Loolciiig' glasses.  On  tin  foil  fitly  disposed  on 
a  flat  table,  mercury  is  to  be  rubbed  with  a  hare's  foot;  it 
soon  unites  itself  with  the  tin.  A  plate  of  glass  is  then  cau- 
tiously to  be  slid  upon  the  tin  leaf,  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
sweep  off  the  redundant  mercury,  not  incorporated  with  the 
tin.  Lead  weights  are  then  placed  on  the  glass,  and  in  a  lit- 
tle time,  the  quicksilver  tin  foil,  adheres  so  firmly  to  the  glass, 
that  the  weights  may  be  removed  without  danger  of  its  falling 
off.  About  two  ounces  of  mercury  is  sufficient  for  covering- 
three  square  feet  of  glass.  The  glass  should  be  perfectly 
clean:  the  least  dirt  or  dust  on  the  surface  will  prevent  the 
adhesion  of  the  amalgam. 

Put  a  drop  of  mercury  into  a  wine  glass,  and  drop  into  it 
small  pieces  of  tin  foil,  which  will  become  liquified  ajid  unito 
with  the  mercury.  Continue  these  additions  until  the  amal-- 
gam  contains  about  half  as  much  tin  as  mercury.  Next  spread 
a  small  piece  of  tin  foil  very  evenly  on  rhe  fabe  of  a  smooth- 
ing iron  or  a  piece  of  polished  marble;  pour  the  amalgam  uporr 
it  and  rub  it  over  the  tin  foil  with  the  finger  for  about  ivvo 
minutes.  Now  press  upon  it  a  piece  of  dry  clean  glass;  press 
it  down  with  such  force  as  to  press  out  all  the  uncombined 
mercury;  lay  a  weight  upon  the  glass  and  leave  it  half  an 
hour,  when  it  may  be  taken  up,  and  it  will  be  found  to  be  u 
mirror. 

All  looking  glasses  are  made  in  this  way,  upon  a  large  scale; 
the  slab  is  placed  in  an  inclined  position,  so  that  the  excess  of 
mercury  runs,  and  is  saved  for  the  next,  &c. 

To  silver  Glass  Globes.  One  ounce  clean  lead,  one  ounce 
fine  tin,  one  ounce  bismuth,  and  ten  OHnces  of  quicksilver. 
Put  the  tin  and  lead  into  the  ladle  first;  when  melted,  add  the 
bismuth.  Skim  off  the  dross,  remove  the  ladle  froni  the  fire, 
and  before  it  sets,  add  the  quicksilver;  stir  the  whole  care- 
fully together,  taking  care  not  to  breathe  over  it  as  the  fumes 
of  the  mercury   are  very  pernicious.       Pour  this  through  ari 


I^Q  THE    ARTIfT    AXi^ 

©arthen  pipe,  inta  the  glcis&  glabo,  which-  turn  rep(3atcjry 
round.  2.  Two  pai'ts  mercury,  one  part  tin,  one  part  lead^, 
and  one  part  bismuth;  or  four  ounces  of  quicksilver  and  tin. 
foil.  The  quantity  fo  tm  foil  to  be  added^  is  so^  much:  as  will^ 
become  barely  fluid  when  mixed.  Lot  the  globe  be  cleaii' 
and  warm,  and  ii>ject  the  quicksilver  hy  means  of  a  pipe  a& 
the  aperture,  turning  it  about  till  it  is  silvere<]  al  o\^en  Lei 
ihe  reuKiinder  run  out,  and  hang  the  globe  up.. 

A  Gold  coloured  Ink.  Pulveriae  verv  fine  one  ounce  of 
orpino,  and  a-s  much  crystal:  put  this  powder  in.  fkve  or  six 
whites  of  eggs,,  well  beaten^  then  turned  into  water^  Mix  all 
well,  and  it  will  be  prepared  to  write  or  painty  producing  it 
gold  colour. 

A  Silver  coloured  Ink,  Finest  of  pewtei,  one  ounce,, 
quicksilver,  two  ounces.  They  should  be  mixed  until  qnit& 
fluid.  Then  grind  it  on  porphyry  with  some  gum  water,,  wdieit 
it  is  fit  to  use.  The  writing  will  appear  as  if  it  had  beeit 
done  w^ith  silver. 

To  prepare  the  SHver  Tree.  Pour  into  ai  glass  globe  or 
decanter,,  four  drachms  nitrate  of  silver^  disso-lved  in  a  pooantl 
or  more  of  distilled  water,  and  lay  the  vessel  on  the  chimuey^ 
piece  ;  or  v*?here  it  may  not  be  disturbed  Now  pour  in  tour 
drachms  of  mercurv.  The  silver  will  become  precipitated'  in? 
the  most  beautifnl  arborescent  form  ;  resembling  real  vegeta- 
tion . 

To  prepare  the  Tin  Tree,  Into  a  vessel  similar  to  that 
used  in  the  last  exporim.ent,  with  the  same  quantity  of  water 
put  inth  ree  drachms  of  muriate  of  tin,,  adding,  ten  drops  nitric 
acid.  Shake  the  vessel  until  the  silt  be  com.pletely  dissolved^ 
Replace  the  zinc  (which  must  be  cleared  of  the  effects  of  the 
former  experiment,)  as  before,  and  set  the  whole  apide  to  pre- 
cipitate without  disturb^mce^  In  a  few  hours  the  eftects  wiU 
be  similar  to  the  last,  only  that  the  tioe  will  iuivo  more  lustre. 
In  tbeso  experiments  it  is  surprising  to  observe  the  lamina? 
shootout  as  it  were  from  nothing;  but  this  phenomenon 
seems  to  proceed  from  a  galvanic  action  of  the  metals  and  ihe 
water. 

To  prepare  the  Lead  Tree.  Put  one  half  an  ounce  of  the 
superacetate  of  lead  in  powder,iiUo  a  clear  glass  globe  or  de- 
canter, filled  to  the  bottom  of  the  neck,  with  distilled  water, 
and  ten  drops  nitric  acid,  and  shake  the  mixture  well.  Pre- 
pare  a  rod  of  zjinc  with    a  hammer  and   file,  a  quarter  of  ivcv 


"TftAbESMAN's    GUIDE.  10 1 

inch  thick  and  one  inch  long.  Form  notches  in  each  side 
for  a  thread,  by  which  it  is  to  be  suspended;  tie  the  thread 
so  that  the  knot  nviy  be  uppermost,  when  the  metal  hangs 
quite  perpendicular.  When  tied,  pass  the  two  ends  of  the 
thread  through  a  perforation  in  the  cork  and  let  them  be  again 
tied  over  a  small  splinter  of  wood,  which  may  pass  between 
them  and  the  cork.  When  the  string  is  tied,  let  the  length 
between  the  cork  and  zinc  be'  such  that  the  zinc  may 
be  at  equal  distances  from  the  side,  bottom  and  top  of  the  ves- 
sel when  immersed  in  it.  Now  put  the  vessel  in  a  place 
where  it  may  be  undisturbed  ;  introduce  the  zinc,  at  the  same 
time  fitting  in  the  cork.  The  zinc  will  assume  the  form  of  a 
tree  or  bush,  whose  leaves  and  branches  are  laminal,  or  plates 
of  a  metallic  lustre. 

Glazing  the  Clay  Cake,  Lay  a  sun  dried  plastic  or  re- 
fractory clay  cake  obliquely  across  a  crucible  of  such  a  length 
as  to  go  entirely  into  the  crucible,  but  not  let  it  reach  the 
bottom-  Heat  the  crucible  until  the  clay  cake  is  at  a  white 
heat,  then  throw  a  little  common  salt,  (muriate  of  soda)  into 
the  crucible  and  continue  to  raise  the  heat.  On  taking  out 
the  clay  cake,  its  surface  will  be  found  covered  with  a  glaz- 
ing, made  of  the  soda  and  alumine  tused  together.  Dip  a 
dried  cake  into  mortar,  sufficiently  diluted  with  water  to  be- 
come a  free  liquid,  which  is  made  of  marled  clay.  Then  heat 
it  as  before,  and  it  will  become  glazed.  Upon  this  principle 
potter  bakers  glnze  their  wares. 

To  prepare  Copper  Foils.  When  coloured  foils  are  wan- 
ted, copper  may  therefore  be  best  used,  and  may  be  prepared 
for  the  purpose  as  follows.  Take  copper  plates,  beaten  to  a 
proper  thickness,  and  pass  them  between  a  pair  of  fine  steel 
rollers,  very  close  set,  and  draw  them  as  thin  as  is  possible 
to  retain  a  proper  tenacity.  Polish  them  with  very  fine  whi- 
ting or  rotten  stone,  till  they  shine,  and  have  as  much  bright- 
iiess  as  can  be  given  them,  and  they  will  then  be  fit  to  re- 
ceive the  colour/ 

To  wkitcT^  Foils,  When  the  yellow,  or  rather  orange  col- 
our of  tW  groutid  would  be  injurious  to  the  effect,  as  in  the 
case  offurple  or  crimson  red,  the  foils  should  be  whitened, 
which  may  be  done  in  the  following  manner. 

Take  a  small  quantity  of  silver  and  dissolve  m  aqua-fort  is-, 
then  put  bits  of  copper  into  the  solution,  and  precipitate  the 
silver  ;  which  being  done,  the  fluid    must  be  pourod  off,  and 

9* 


102  TlIE    ARTIST    AN1> 

fresh  water  added  to  it,  to  wa&b  away  all  the  remain^ei"  of  tfie 
first  fluid  ;  after  which  the  silver  must  be  dried,'  and  equal 
weight  of  cream  of  tartar  and  common  salt  must  then  be 
'ground   with  it,   till  the  whole  is  reduced  to  a  fine  powder  ; 

:nd  with  this  mixture  the  foils,  being  first  slightly  moistened, 
must  be  rubbed  by  the  finger  or  a  bit  of  linen  rag,  till  they  be 
of  the  degree  of  whiteness  desired  ;  after  which,  if  it  appear 
to  be  wanting,  the  polish  must  be  refreshed*  Tin  foils  ara 
only  used  in  the  case  of  colourless  stones,  when  quicksilver  Is 
employed  ;  and  they  may  be  drawn  out  hy  the  same  rollers^ 
but  need  not  be  further  polished,  so  that  the  effect  is  produced 
by  other  means  in  this  case. 

Foils  for   Crystals^  Pebbles,  or  Paste,  to  give    the  lustre 
nf  Diamonch,    The  manner  of  preparing  foils  to  give  colour- 
less stones  the  greatest  degree  of  play,  and  lustre,    is  by  rais- 
ing so  high  a  polish  or  smoothness  on  the  surface,  as  to  give 
them  the  effect  of  a  n»irror,  which  can  only  be  done,  in  a  per- 
fect manner,    by  the  use  of  quicksilver,    applied  in  the  same 
HP-  -1  wiy  ;is  in  the  case  of  locjking-glass'^s.      The   method 
V     :     I  ake  leaves  of  tin,  prepared  in  the  same  man- 
.    vjivering  lo.>king-glassesy  and  cut   them  into  small 
\i  or.-,  o;  such  size  as  to  cover  the   surface   of  the  sockets  of 

he  Siuiies  that  are  to  be  set.  Lay  three  of  these,  then,  one 
Uj)on  anoiher,  and  hjiving  moistened  the  inside  of  the  socket 
with  this  gum  water,  and  sulFored  it  to  become  figain  so  dry, 
that  only  a  slight  stickiness  remains,  put  the  three  pieces  of 
le.jves,  lying  on  each  other,  into  it,  and  ad-.ipt  them  to  the 
surfl^ce  m  as  even  a  manner  as  possible.  When  this  is  done, 
heat  the  socket,  and  fill  it  with  warm  quicksilver,  which  must 
be  suffered  to  continue  in  it  three  or  four  minutes  and  then' 
gently  poured  out.  Then  thrust  the  stone  into  the  socket, 
which  must  be  closed  with  it,  care  having  been  taken  to  give 
such  room  for  it,  that  it  may  enter  without  stripping  off  the 
tin  and  quicksilver  from  any  part  of  the  surface.  The  work 
should  be  woll  closed  round  the  stone  to  prevent  the  tin  and 
quicksilver  contained  in  the  socket  from  being  shaken  out  by 
any  violence. 

The  Instro  of  stones,  set  in  this  way,  will  continue  lonn-or,  thnn  wlicn 
liey  are  sot  in  the  common  way,  as  the  cavity,  round  thelii  being  f^Hed, 
there  vvill  be  no  passao-e  found  for  moisture,  which  is  so  injurious  to  the 
wear  ot  stones  treated  m  any  other  way.  This  kind  of  foil  rives  .some 
lustre. 


TilAr)KSMA^^s  Gvwv:.  103 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

Art  of  engraving — etching — directions— rto  make  blue  letters 
on  Sword  Blades — to  detect  false  gems. 

Engraving  is  the  art  of  cutting  metals  and  precious  stones» 
and  representing  on  them  whatever  device  the  artist  pleases? 
and  that  great  numbers  of  an  impression  from  the  same 
ejigraving  raa}^  be  taken,  in  a  short  time,  and  at  a  small 
price. 

The  French  divide  the  art  Into  several  branches,  accor- 
ding to  the  different  materials  wrought  upon,  and  the  manner 
of  execution.  ^ 

Among  us,  the  first  method  is  distinguished,  as  cutting  in 
wood;  that  on  metals,  with  aqua-fortis,  is  named  etching; 
that  by  the  knife,  burnisher,  or  scraper,  mezzotinto  ;  that  on 
stones,  carving,  or  stone  cutting  ;  and  that  performed  wilh  a 
graver  on  metals  or  precious  stones,  which  we  shall  now  at- 
tempt more  immediately  to  illustrate.  The  principle  on 
which  this  art  is  gounded,  are  the  same  with  those  of  paint- 
ing, viz.  design,  which  an  engraver  ought  to  make  his  pecu- 
liar study,  for  without  that  he  will  neither  be  able  to  imitate 
the  performances  of  the  greatest  masters  in  painting,  or  de- 
sign any  thing  beautiful  of  his  own.  In  imitating  the  paint- 
ings of  eminent  masters,  the  engraver  should  studiously  con- 
form himself  to  the  taste  and  beauty  of  the  copy,  in  order  to 
preserve  that  elegance  of  character  which  distinguishes  the 
style  of  one  master  from  another;  and  in  doing  which  to  any 
tolerable  degree  of  perfection,  it  is  necessary  that  an  engra- 
ver should  understand  perspective,  and  architecture.  The 
former  enables  him  with  ease  to  throw  backwards,  by  the 
natural  degradations  of  strong  and  faint,  the  figures  and  other 
objects  of  the  picture,  or  design  he  would  execute  ;  the  lat- 
ter will  capacitate  him  to  preserve  the  due  proportion  of  its 
order.  To  execute  in  this  art,  as  well  as  every  other,  the 
materials  which  aroused  should  be  duly  regarded.  The  best 
workmen  prefer  t]ie  red  copper,  which  is  the  toughest.  His 
plates  should  be  well  polished  when  he  commences  to  trace 
any  thing  on  them  ;  his  graver  should  be  of  the  purest  steel, 
well  tempered  and  never  blunt. 

In  conducting  the  strokes  of  the  graver,  care  ought  always 

to  be  taken  that  they  flow  freely  and  naturally.      The  graver 

-should  be  conducted  according  to  the  varioi)^  risings  and  cavi- 


104  THE    ARTIST    AND 

ties  of  the  muscles,  wliich  in  some  measure  depends  upon  a 
knowledge  in  anatomy,  as  well  as  design.  In  sculpture  the 
work  should  never  be  made  dark  ;  as  statues,  &c.  are  com- 
monly mads  of  wliite  marble,  or  stone,  the  colour  reflecting 
on  all  sides,  does  not  produce  dark  shades.  In  regard  to 
drapery  of  every  kind,  if  the  diversity  of  stuffs  can  be  repre- 
sented, it  generally  adds  to  the  beauty  of  the  piece;  when 
there  is  a  necessity  of  crossing  the  strokes,  it  must  be  obser- 
ved that  the  first  should  be  finer  than  the  second  and  the 
third  than  the  second  which  makes  the  work  appear  more 
soft  and  mellow.  Stuffs  that  have  a  lustre  should  be  imitated' 
by  striking  with  stronger  and  straighter  strokes  than  others; 
being  generally  silk,  producing  flat  and  broken  folds,  should 
be  expre3s;jd  by  one  or  two  strokes,  as  their  colours  vary, 
with  liner  ones  between  them.  Velvet  and  plush  are  repre- 
sented in  the  same  manner,  by  fine  strokes  between  others, 
with  this  difierence  ;  the  first  strokes  should  be  much  stron- 
ger than  for  stuffs,  and  the  finer  ones  proportionate.  Metals 
or  vessels  of  gold  and  copper,  or  armour  of  polished  steel, 
are  to  be  engraved  with  fine  strokes,  between  the  strong 
ones,  it  being  the  opposition  of  light  and  shade,  that  occa- 
sions the  lustre.  With  respect  to  architecture,  perspective 
shows  us  the  strokes  which  form  receding  objects  tend  to  the 
point  of  view;  when  the  piece  is  to  contain  entire  columns, 
they  are  to  be  represented  by  perpendicular  lines;  for  in 
crossing  them  according  to  their  roundness,  those  strokes 
which  are  near  their  capitals,  being  opposed  to  those  near 
their  base,  produce  a  disagreeable  effect;  unless  supposed 
to  be  at  a  great  distance,  which  renders  the  object  near 
parallel. 

For  landscapes,  the  practicers  of  etching  may  form  the  out- 
lines by  it,  particularly  of  the  leaves  of  trees,  whicli  is  more 
expeditious  than  engraving,  and  does  as  w^ell.  In  this  case, 
care  should  be  taken  in  finishing  it  well  with  the  graver,  that 
the  etching  be  imperceptible,  because  it  has  not  the  softness 
of  engraving.  In  representing  steep  objects,  the  first  strokes 
should  be  frequently  interrupted  and  broken  off,  the  second 
straight,  cutting  the  others  with  acute  angles,  accompanied 
with  long  points.  To  represent  rocks,  the  second  strokes 
should  not  form  the  angles  so  acute  as  in  representing  other 
objects.  Objects  receding  towards  the  horizon  should  be 
touched  very  lightly,  and  charged    with  little  shad  e,  though 


r 


TRAF)KS.MAiS^;S    «UIDE>  105 


tho  mass  should  appear  dark,  as  from  some  shade  supposed 
to  {jroceed  froin  the  clouds  intercepting  the  rays  of  the  sun, 
Cahns  are  represented  by  straight  strokes,  running  parallel 
with  the  horizon,  with  finer  ones  between  them,  and  are  to  be 
omitted  in  same  places,  to  make  their  shining  rejection  which 
proceeds  from  the  water.  By  the  second  strokes  also,  made 
mare  or  less  strong,  and  sametin>es  by  perpendicular  ones, 
the  forms  of  objects,  cither  reflected  on  the  surface  of  the 
water,  or  advaned  at  a  distance  on  its  banks,  are  reJ)re-^ 
sen  ted. 

The  wavx's  of  the  sea,  are  represented  by  strokes,  bending 
according  to  the  agitation  of  the  water,  with  finer  ones  be- 
tween thorn,  cutting  them  with  very  acute  angles.  To  repre- 
sent water  falling  with  rapidity  from  jocks  or  precipices, 
n^ust  be  expressed  by  first  strokes  according  to  the  nature  of 
their  fall,  with  finer  ones  between  them,  leaving  the  lights 
formed  by  the  beams  of  the  sun,  falling  directly  on  them  very 
bright,  and  the  more  so  as  they  approach  the  fore  part  of  the 
piece.  When  the  clouds  appear  thick  and  agitated,  the  gra* 
ver  should  be  turned  about  according  to  their  form  and  agita- 
tion ;  and  if  they  produce  dark  shades,  which  require  double 
strokes,  ilie  second  should  cut  the  first  in  more  acute  angles; 
than  in  figures.  Flat  clouds,  losing  themselves  insensibly 
with  the  sky,  must  be  formed  by  strokes  parallel  with  the 
horizon,  waved  a  little,  as  they  appear  more  or  less  thick.  A 
calm  serene  sky  should  be  expressed  by  parallel  strokes  very 
straight  without  any  winding.  Though  all  the  parts  of  n 
piece  of  engraving  may  be  executed  apcording  to  the  rules  of 
art,  yet,  unless  there  be  a  general  proportion  and  harmony 
diffused  throughout  it  will  not  appear  beautiful.  The  princi^ 
pal  objects  of  a  ])iece  should  be  wholly  sketched  out  before 
any  part  of  them  are  finished.  Engraving  seems  to  be  iu 
one  respect,  the  same  in  relation  to  printing,  as  painting  is  to 
hantl  writing;  this  art  being  capable  of  multiplying  copies 
ad  infinitum. 

No  art,  perhaps,  can  have  a  happier  or  more  influential 
tendency  to  the  advancement  of  virtue,  religion  and  industry; 
nothing  has  a  more  familiar  efficacy  to  form  an  universal  good 
taste  than  prints,  though  it  may  be  prostituted  to  the  vilest, 
most  debauched  and  detestable  purposes.  .When  this  admi- 
rable art  is  thus  abused,  \yo  see  no  reason  why  the  authors, 
SihuLild  ^ot  ho  as  liable  to  punishment  by  the  laws,  as  othe^s^ 


106  THE    ARTIST    AND 


m 


who  are    the  promoters  and  perpetrators  of  vicq  and    imrno- 
rality. 

As  this  art  is  applicable  to  most  others,  so,  to  arrive  at  any 
excellence  in  it,  requires  a  knowledge    in  various   other  arts, 
as  geometry,  perspective,  anatomy,  drawing,  painting,  sculp- 
ture, and  above  all  things,  designing.     What  is  ordinarily  cal- 
led   genius,  is   certainly  an    innate  discernment,  and  a  strong 
impulse  and  propensity  to  excel  in  any  peculiar  art;   without 
which,  nature  soems  to  be  unnaturally  constrained  ;   and  when 
that  is  the  case,    the    performances   of  such  persons  will  also 
appear  forced,  uncouth,  and  unnatural  also,  like  the  disposi- 
tion of  the  performer  ;   for  as  some  poet  says,— 
No  art  without  a  genius  can  prevail, 
And  parts  without  the  help  of  an  will  fail. 
When  Marius,  being  driven  from  Rome  by  Sylla,  and  was 
a   prisoner  at  Minturnae,   a  soldier  was  sent   to    murder  him. 
Upon  his  coming  into  the  room  with  his  sword  drawn  for  the 
purpose,  Marius  said  aloud,  "durst  thou,  man,  kill  Caius  Ma- 
rius?"  which  so  terrified  the  ruffian  that    he    retired  without 
effecting  his  purpose.   *'  This  story,  or  one  glance  of  the  eyo 
upon    his    statue    that  I   have  seen,"  says  an  English  writer, 
"  gives  me  a  greater  idea  of  him  than  all  Plutarch  has  wrote." 
And    further  remarks,   *'  the    Odyssey  cannot  give  a  greater 
idea  of  Ulysses,  than  a   drawing   I   have  of  Polydore,  when 
he  is   discovering  himself  to  Penelope    and  Telemachus,   by 
bending  the  bow.      And  I  conceive  as  highly  of  St.  Paul,  by 
once  walking    through    the   gallery  of  Raphael  at   Hampton 
Court,  as  by  reading  the  whole  book  of  the  Acts  of  the  Apos- 
tles, though  written  by  divine  inspiration.      Finally,  in  regard 
to  history,  nothing  can  be  more  useful  than  an  attempt  to  ex- 
cel in  this  art,    in    order  to  fix  in   remembrance    memorable 
events.      And  as  it  is  considered   to  be  but  in  its   infanc}',  it 
is  to  be  greatly  desired,    that  every  meritorious  performance, 
made  in  this  country,  will  meet  with   public  encouragement, 
not  only  for  the  honour  of  the   nation,  and  rising  artists,  but 
for  the  benefit  of  traffic;  so  that,   instead    of  importing  im- 
mense quantities  of  foreign    prints,  we  may  not   only  supply 
ourselves,  but  become  exporters  of  a  commodity  that  is  uni- 
versally vendible. 

Floric  Acid,  with  which  etchings  of  any  device,  name  or 
stanza,  <$^c,  on  glass,  common  flint,  cornelian,  S^c.  can  be 
performed.       Put  into  the   etching  box    a    tea    spoonful  of 


tradesman's  guide.  107 

coarsely  pulverized  flour-spar,  and  set  the  box  into  a  pan  of 
coals,  placed  on  bricks  upon  a  table  ;  pour  in  strong  sulphu- 
ric acid,  sufficiently  to  moisten  or  moderately  wet  it ;  the 
acid  will  immediately  rise  up  out  of  the  cup,  which  may  be 
known  by  its  attracting  so  much  vapour  from  the  air  as  to  ex- 
hibit the  appearance  of  common  steam.  As  soon  as  it  be- 
gins to  appear,  which  will  be  in  a  few  seconds,  lay  over  the 
cup  a  piece  of  common  window  glass,  large  enough  to  cover 
its  mouth,  which  had  been  previously  waxed  and  written  up- 
on ;  let  an  assistant  immediately  apply  snow,  ice,  or  cold  wa- 
ter to  the  upper  side  of  the  glass,  in  order  to  keep  it  so  cool 
as  to  prevent  the  wax  which  is  on  the  under  side  from  melt- 
ing ;  take  off  the  glass  in  ten  seconds,  and  apply  another  and 
so  on  ;  two  or  three  may  be  applied  before  the  ilour-spar  and 
sulphuric  acid  are  renewed.  The  writing  made  in  wax  will 
appear  beautifully  etched  upon  the  glass,  on  scraping  off  the 
wax.  The  best  method  of  preparing  the  glass  is  to  warm,  or 
rather  heat  moderately,  the  face  of  a  smoothing  iron  or  piece 
of  polished  marble;  so  that  white  wax  or  \ery  tine  beeswax 
will  melt  on  being  applied  to  it.  La}^  the  glass  flint  upon  the 
melted  wax,  and  on  sliding  it  off  it  will  be  \ciy  evenly  waxed; 
a  dozen  pieces  may  be  prepared  in  succession;  tlie  writing 
may  bema^e  with  the  end  of  a  hard  stick,  6lc,  Care  must  be 
taken  to  lay  the  glass  perfectly  bare  through  all  the  strokes, 
or  tiiere  will  be  interruptions  in  the  etching. 

A  Wax  to  ley  on  Iron  and  Sfccl.  Take  the  bulk  of  a  nut 
of  white  wax,  melt  it,  and  add  t^io  size  of  a  musket  ball  of 
ceruse  of  Venice.  When  both  are  incorporated,  form  this 
composition  into  small  sticks.  With  them  rub  your  piece  of 
iron  or  steel,  after  having  previously  warmed  it  sufficiently  to 
melt  the  w^ax,  which  spread  well  over  it  with  a  feather.  When 
the  wax  is  cold,  trace  whatever  you  will  on  it,  and  pass  after- 
wards on  the  lines  you  have  drawn,  the  following  water. 

A  Mordant  Water  to  engrave  on  Steel.  Take  thestrong- 
est  verjuice  you  can  find;  alum  in  powder,  and  a  little  dried 
salt,  pulverized:  mix  until  perfcctl}^  dissolved;  then  pass  some 
of  that  water  on  the  lines  of  your  drawing,  repeatingthe  same 
till  it  is  engraved.  Or  else  take  verdigris,  strong  vinegar, 
ammoniac  and  common  salts,  and  copperas,  equal  parts.  Set 
the  couipound  a  bojling  for  a  quarter  of  an  hour;  then  strain 
it  through  a  raf,  and  run  some  of  that  water  on  your  plate. 
In  about  half  an  hour  afterwards  it  will  he  perfectly  engra- 
ved. 


108  THE    AtlTIST    AKi) 

See  Collect's  varnish,  which  is  an  admirable  coniposhion  tci 
lay  on  the  plate  you  propose  to  engrave. 

To  engrave  with  aqua-fortis,  so  that  the  tcork  may  on'pear 
'tike  basso  relievo.  Take  equal  parts  of  vermilion  and  black 
lead,  two  or  three  grains  of  mastic  in  dro})S,  mix  and  grind 
them  on  niarble,  with  linseed  oil:  then  put  the  composition 
into  a  shell  :  then  cut  some  soft  quills,  and  let  your  steel  or 
iron  be  well  polished  ;  try  first  whether  your  colour  runs  suf- 
ficiently with  your  pens  ;  and  if  it  should  not,  you  must  add 
h  little  more  oil  to  it,  so  as  to  have  your  pen  Inark  freely,  as 
if  you  intended  writing  with  ink  on  paper:  then  rub  well 
your  plate  of  steel  wiih  wood  ashes;  to  clean  it  ;  after  which 
vvipe  it  v/ith  a  ch^ah  rag,  atid  draw  your  design  upon  it  wiili 
your  pen,  prepared  as  before:  If  you  wish  to  draw  birds. or 
other  animals,  you  must  only  draw  the  outlines  of  them  with 
your  pen,  tliert  fill  up  the  inside  of  those  lines  with  a  hair  pen- 
cil; that  is,  you  must  coter  all  the  space  contained  between 
the  first  outlines  drtiwn  with  the  pen,  the  same  colour,  which 
you  must  lay  with  a  brush  to  preserve  all  that  part  against 
the  mordacity  of  the  aqua-^fortis.  When  that  is  done,  let 
your  work  dry  for  a  day  or  \\\0;  and  when  dried,  take  some 
fire  made  with  charcoal  into  a  chafing  dish,  and  bakn  over  it 
your  colour  by  degrees,  till  it  becomes  quite  brown.  Take 
care  notwithstanding,  not  to  burn  it;  for  fear  you  should  scale 
i^,  when  yoh  come  to  scratch;  with  the  point  of  a  needle, 
those  etchings  or  places  which  you  wish  to  engrave  with  the. 
aqua-fortis. 

Aqua-Fortis  for  Engraving.  Take  verdigris,  alum,  rom. 
vitriol,  and  comnlon  salt,  each,  three  ounces,  pounded  finely; 
jnit  little  more  than  a  quart  of  water  into  a  new  pipkin,  and 
the  articles  mentioned;  infuse  two  hours;  then  place  them 
bvei  a  charcoal  fire,  and  wheti  the  \Vater  has  in  some  degree 
bvaporated,  take  the  pipkin  from  the  fire,  let  it  cool  so  as  to 
bear  your  hand  without  scalding.  Then  take  an  earthen  cup, 
and  pour  over  the  work  intended  to  be  engraven,  the  liquid; 
find  continue  to  do  $6  for  nearly  three  quarters  of  an  hour 
Then  pour  on  it  clean  water,  to  %tash  off  every  impuritv. 
Tr;y  the  debth  of  the  lines  of  your  engraving  with  a  needle, 
and  if  not  sufllciently  prepared,  the  process  of  wetting  it  with 
the  mixture,  must  be  again  repeated;  care  should  be  taken, 
iiiat    tlie    liquid  is  not   too  warm,  as  it  will  spoil  the  work. 

To  engrave  on  Brass  or  Copper  tvith  Aqua-Fortis,     Ad«'' 


iRADESMAX  S    GUTDE.  109 

»uore  mastic  in  drops  to  your  colour,  and  bake  the  plate  until 
it  becomes  nearly  black;  if  a  flat  work,  raise  round  it  a  bor- 
der of  wax,  to  prevent  the  M.qua-fortis  from  running  off,  which 
is  to  be'  a  separating  aqua-fortis,  with  which,  cover  the  plate 
to  the  thickness  or  a  crown;  after  it  has  been  thus  covered 
for  a  little  while,  it  becomes  green;  then  threw  it  away,  and 
pour  in  its  place  some  clear  water,  now  examine  the  lines; 
if  not  of  sufficient  depth,  put  on  some   more  aqua-fortis. 

To  engrave  prints  by  Aqua-Fortis,  Grind  some  ceruse 
with  clear  water;  size  with  isinglass.  Lay  this  on  the  plate- 
with  a  coarse  brush,  or  pencil.  When  dry,  draw  on  it  your 
design.  Or,  if  you  wish  to  counterproof  a  copperplate  print,, 
blacken  the  back  of  the  print,  and  place  that  part  on  the  plate,, 
prepared  as  before;  go  over  all  the  strokes  of  the  print,  witli 
a  smooth  ivory  or  wooden  point,  which  stamps  the  back  of 
the  print, in  all  those  places,  on  the  plate;  then  go  over  the 
black  strokes  on  the  plate,  with  a  pen  and  ink;  afterwards 
take  a  steel  point,  very  fine  and  well  tampered,  etch  the  plate 
with  it,  in  fullov\ing  all  the  strokes  marked  on  it,  and  pour 
aqua-fortis  as  heretofore  directed. 

Directions  to  he  observed  in  engraving  with  Aqua-Fortis^ 
The  plate  must  be  well  polished  and  perfectly  clean;  warm  it 
over  a  chafing  dish,  in  which  there  is  a  charcoal  fire.  While 
over  the  fire,  cover  it  with  varnish?  then  blacken  it  with  the 
smoke  of  a  candle;  then  chalk  your  design.  The  artists  gen- 
erally prefer  drawing  the  outlines  of  their  work,  tliat  the  spirit 
and  beauty  of  the  design  may  be  preserved.  And  for  this 
purpose  aqua-fortis  is  often  employed  to  sketch  lightly  the 
outlines  of  the  figuers,  and  to  have  them  more  correct.  Jt 
is  necessary  to  touch  a  little  occasionally  with  the  graver, 
certain  parts  where  the  aqua-fortis  has  not  eaten  in  sufficiently. 
In  putting  the  aqua-fortis  on  the  plate,  care  should  be  taken, 
that  it  does  not  eat  too  much:  to  prevent  which,  oil  and  tal- 
low mixed,  must  be  dropped  on  the  work  from  the  blaze  of  a 
candle.  The  artist  should  have  a  framed  wooden  board, 
overlaid  with  wax,  on  which  the  plate  should  be  fixed  a  little 
slanting,  that  the  aqua-fortis  may  pass  over,  and  run  into 
pan  placed  there  to  receive  it. 

Thus  covering  at  several  times,  and  as  much  as  is  neces- 
sary, such  places  of  the  plate,  as  should  not  be  kept  so  strong 
as  others^  rendering  the  figures  which  are  forward  in  the  pic- 

XO 


110  THE    ARTfST    AND 

ture,  coiiStaiuly  every  time,  washed  with  the  aqaa-fortis  whicb 
eats  in  them,  till  they  are  sufficiently  engraved,  and  accord- 
ing to  the  strength  which  is  necessary  to  give  them. 

To  engrave  ou  wood,  prepare  a  board,  of  the  size  and 
thickness  wanted,  and  polish  it  on  the  side  to  be  engraved. 
Pear  tree  or  box-wood  is  generally  preferred.  Draw  first 
your  design,  as  you  wish  to  have  it  appear  after  printing.  Care 
should  be  taken,  that  all  the  strokes  of  the  drawing  should 
touch  well,  and  stick  on  the  wood  ;  and  when  the  paper  is 
very  dry,  (which  is  pasted  on  the  board,  by  its  right  side,  with 
a  paste  made  of  good  flour,  water,  and  a  little  vinegar^  in 
case  there  is  wanting  a  talent,  of  drawing  extemporaneously,) 
wet  it  gently,  and  with  the  top  of  your  finger,  rub  it  off  by 
degrees,  leaving  only  the  strokes  of  the  drawing  on  the  board, 
as  if  it  had  been  drawn  with  pen  and  ink.  These  strokes  or 
lines  show  all  that  are  to  be  spared  or  preserved  ;  the  rest 
should  be  cut  off,  and  sunk  down  with  delicacy,  by  means  of 
a  sharp  and  well  pointed  penknife,  small  chisel,  &c.  accord- 
ing to  the  size  and  delicacy  of  the  work. 

To  engrave  on  Copper  with  the  graver.  The  plate  should 
be  red  copper,  well  polished  ;  then  draw  your  design  on  it 
with  either  the  black  lead  stone,  or  a  steel  point.  When  that 
is  done,  you  must  be  furnished  with  a  sharp  and  well  temper- 
ed graver  to  cut,  in  order  to  give  more  or  less  strength  to 
certain  parts,  (as  has  heretofore  been  observed,)  according  to 
the  subject;  a  tool  of  six  inches  in  length  is  necessary,  one 
end  of  which,  is  called  a  scraper^  is  made  in  the  form  of  a 
triangle,  sharp  on  each  edge,  for  the  purpose  of  scraping  on 
the  copper,  when  necessary  ;  the  other  end  is  called  a  bur- 
nisher, nearly  the  shape  of  a  fowl's  heart,  a  little  prolonged 
by  the  point,  round  and  slender.  This  serves  to  polish  the 
copper,  to  mend  the  faults,  and  soften  the  strokes.  In  order 
to  form  a  better  judgment  of  your  work,  you  must  occasion- 
ally, make  use  of  a  stump,  made  with  the  piece  of  an  old  hat 
rolled  up  and  blackened,  to  rub  the  plate,  which  fills  the 
strokes  with  black,  and  which  enables  you  to  discover  imper- 
fections. A  leather  cushion  is  also  necessary  to  be  provided 
with,  to  lay  the  plate  on  while  engraving. 

-Etching  may  be  performed  by  dipping  a  clean  copper  cent  into  mel- 
ted white  wax.  On  taking  it  out,  the  wax  will  imnfediately  harden 
upon  It.  Mark  out  ihe  form  of  a  letter  or  figure  upon  it.  Then  im- 
merse the  cent  in  nitiic  atid,  and  let  it  remain  fifteen  minutes.    Now 


fRADESIWUVN^S    GUIDE.  Ill 

lake  it  0ut,  scrape  off  the  wax,  aad  wash  the  whole  clean,  and  the  let- 
ter will  be  etched  upon  the  cent. 

On  this  principle  the  etching  upon  razors,  sword  blades,  &c.  is  pet- 
formed.  Arsists  have  various  methods  for  preparing  compositions  lor 
applying  to  the  metals  before  the  acid  is  apphed  ;  they*  generally  make  ' 
use  of  something  tor  writing  the  letters,  which  will  flow  from  the  pen 
like  ink.  Then  tli^y  surroand  the  whole  space  to  be  acted  upon,  by  an 
•edging  to  confine  the  acid,  and  pour  on  the  acid,  instead  of  immersing 
the  metal  in  it,  as  is  more  partieularly  described  in  this  chapter.  This 
is  called  etching  in  basso-relievo. 

To  make  Blue  Letters  on  Sword  Blades,  Take  a  well 
:polished  sword  blade  emd  hold  it  over  a  charcoal  fire>  till  it 
is  blue,  then  with  oil  colour^  write  such  letters,  (or  make  such 
figures)  as  you  wish  should  appear  and  remain,  and  let  them 
dry  ;  then  warm  some  strong  vinegar,  and  pour  all  over  tho 
blade,  which  will  infallibly  take  off  the  blue  coloiir.  After 
this  process,  a  little  common  warm  water  will  take  off  the 
oil  colour,  and  the  letters  or  figures  will  appear  and  remain 
of  a  curious  and  indelible  blue;  the  same  may  be  done  on 
any  polished  steeL 

CHAPTER  XX. 

Sculpture — the  jjrocess  of  casting  in  Plaster — Composition 
of  Ancient  Statutes — Printing — Printers  types. 

To  ascertain  when  the  art  of  sculpture  was  first  practised 
and  by  what  nation,  is  beyond  human  research  ;  we  may 
safely  conjecture,  however  that  it  was  one  of  the  original 
propensities  of  man.  This  will  still  appear  in  the  ardent  and 
irresistible  impulse  of  youth  to  make  representations  of  ob- 
jects in  wood  ;  and  the  attempts  of  savages  to  embody  their 
conceptions  of  their  idols  ;  a  command  from  the  Author  of 
our  being,  was  necessary  to  prevent  the  ancient  Israelites 
from  making  graven  intages:  and  the  inhabitants  of  the  rest 
of  the  earth  possessed  similar  propensities.  The  descriptions 
in  the  Scriptures  demonstrate  that  the  art  had  been  brought 
to  great  perfection  at  the  period  of  which  they  treat.  It  is 
necessary  to  make  a  distinction  between  carving  and  sculp- 
ture; the  former  belongs  exclusively  to  wood,  and  the  latter 
to  stone  or  raarbel.  The  acknowledged  masters  of  this  sub- 
lime art  were  the  ancient  Greeks.  Such  have  been  the  excel- 
hence  and  correctness  of  their  imitations  of  nature,  and  the 
refined  elegance  of  their  taste,  that  many  of  their  works  are 
meutioned,  as  efforts  never  to  be  exceeded  or  perhaps  imita- 


ii2  tilE    ARTIST    ANXI 

ted*  Statuary  is  a  branch  of  sculpture^  employed  in  the  ma* 
king  of  statues.  The  term  is  also  used  for  the  artificer  him- 
self. Phidias  was  the  greatest  statuary  among  the  ancients, 
and  Michael  Ahgelo,  among  the  moderns.  Statutes  are  not 
only  formed  with  the  chisel  from  marble,  and  carved  in  wood 
but  they  are  cast  in  plaster  of  Paris,  or  other  matters  of  the 
same  nature,  and  in  several  metals,  as  lead,  brass,  silver,  and 
gold. 

The  process  of  Casting  in  Plaster  of  Paris.  Mix  the 
plaster  with  water,  and  stir  it  until  it  attains  a  proper  con- 
sistence; then  pour  on  any  figure,  for  instance,  a  human 
hand  or  foot,  previously  oiled  in  the  slightest  manner  possible 
which  prevents  the  adhesion  of  the  plaster  ;  in  a  few  minutes 
the  plaster  will  be  dry  to  the  hardness  of  soft  stone,  taking 
the  exact  impression  of  every  part,  even  the  minutest  pores  of 
the  skin.  This  impression  is  called  the  mould.  When  ta- 
ken from  the  figure  that  produced  it,  and  slightly  oiled,  plas- 
ter mixed  with  water  as  before,  may  bo  poured  into  it,  \>here 
it  must  remain  until  hardened  ;  if  it  be  then  taken  from  the 
mould,  it  will  be  an  exact  image  of  the  original  figure.  When 
the  figure  is  flat,  having  no  hollows,  or  high  projections,  it 
may  be  moulded  in  one  piece,  but  when  its  surface  is  varied, 
it  must  be  moulded  in  many  pieces  fitted  together,  and  held 
in  one  or  more  outside  or  containing  piece. 

This  useful  art  supplies  the  painter  £nd   sculptor  with  exact  repre- 
sentations from  nature,  and  multiplies  models  of  all  kinds.     It  is  prac- 
.  ticed  in  snch  perfection,  that  casts  of  the  antique  statutes  are  made  so 
precisely  like  the  originals  in  proportion,   outline,  and  surface,  that  no 
difftrence  is  discoverable,  excepting  in  colour,  and  materials. 

Composition  of  Ancient  Statues,  According  to  Pliny,  the 
metal  used  by  the  Romans,  for  their  statues,  and  for  the 
plates  on  which  they  engraved  inscriptions,  w^as  composed  in 
the  following  manner.  They  first  melted  a  quantity  of  cop- 
per, into  which  they  put  one-third  of  its  weight  of  old  copper 
which  had  been  long  in  use — to  every  hundred  lbs.  weight 
of  this  mixture,  they  added  twelve  and  a  half  lbs.  of  alloy 
composed  of  equal  parts  of  lead  and  tin. 

3Ietallic  Casts  from  Engravings  on  Copper,  A  most  im- 
portant discovery  has  lately  been  made,  which  promises  to 
be  of  considerable  utility  in  the  fine  arts  ;  some  beautiful 
specimens  ofmetalic  plates  of  a  peculiar  composition,  have 
latelj^  appeared— under  the  name  of  "  cast  engravings."  This 


TRADESMAN*'*    GUIDE.  US 

invention  consists  in  taking  moulds  from  every  kind  of  en* 
gravings,  with  lime,  mezzotinto,  or  aqua-tinta,  and  pouring 
on^this  motiid  an  alloy,  in  a  state  of  fusion,  capable  of  taking 
the  finest  impression.  The  obvious  utility  of  this  invention, 
i.s  applicable  to  engravings,  which  meet  with  a  ready  sale, 
and  of  which  great  numbers  are  required,  will  be  incalcula- 
ble, as  it  will  wholly  prevent  the  expense  of  retracing,  which 
forms  so  prominent  a  charge  in  all  works  of  an  extended  sale. 
No  sooner  is  one  cast  worn  out  than  another  may  be  imme- 
diately procured  from  the  original  plate,  so  that  every  im- 
pression will  be  a  proof.  Thus  the  works  of  our  most  cele- 
brated artists,  may  be  hamded  down,  ad  infinitum,  for  the 
improvement  and  delight  of  future  ages  and  will  afford  at  the 
same  time^  the  greatest  satisfaction  to  every  lover  of  the  fine 
arts.. 

The  art  of  Printing,  deserves  to  bo  co'nsiclered  with  atteni^ 
tion  and  respect.  From  the  ingenuity  of  its  contrivance,  it 
has  ever  excited  mechanical  curiosity  ;  from  its  intimate  con- 
nexion with  learning,  it  has  justly  claimed  historical  notice; 
and  from  itSweJit-ensive  influence  on  m6rality,  politics,  and  re- 
ligion, is  now  become  a  very  important  speculation.  Coin- 
ing and  taking  impressions  in  wax,  are  of  great  antiquity,  and 
tlie  principle  is  precisely  that  of  printing.  The  application 
of  this  principle  to  the  multiplication  of  books,  constituted 
the  discovery  of  the  art  of  printing.  The  Chinese  have  for 
many  ages,  printed  with  blocks,  or  whole  pages  eugraved  on 
wood.  But  the  application  of 'single  Tetters  or  moveable 
types  forms  the  merit  of  the  European  art.  The  honor  of 
giving'rise  to  this  method  has  been  claimed  by  the  cities  of 
Harlaem,  Ment?/,  and  Strasburg ;  and  to  each  of  these  it  may 
be  ascribed  in  some  degree,  as  printers  resident  in  each,  made 
successive  improvemeh.s  in  the  art*  It  is  recorded  by  a  re* 
putable  author,  that  Laurens  Faustus,  of  Harlaem,  walking  in 
a  wood  near  that  city,  cut  some  letters  upon  the  rind  of  a 
beech  tree,  which  for  fjincy^s  sake,  being  impressed  upon  pa- 
per he  printed  one  or  two  lines  for  his  grandchildren  ;  and 
having  thus  succeeded,  he  invented  a  more  glutinous  ink  be- 
cause he  found  that  the  common  ink  sunk  and  spread  ;  and 
then  formed  whole  pages'of  wood,  with  letters  cut  upon  them 
and,  (as  nothing  is  complete,  in  its  first  invention,)  the  back- 
sides of  the  pages  were  pasted  together,  that  they  might  have 
the  appearance  of  manuscripts,   written  on  both  sides  of  the 

*10 


114  THE    ARTIST    AND 

paper.  These  beechen  letters,  he  afterwards  exchan^^ed  fof 
leaden  ones,  and  these  agjain  for  tin  and  lead,  as  a  flexiblej 
and  more  solid  and  durable  substance.  He  died  in  1440,  and 
by  some,  his  first  attempt  is  supposed  to  have  been  made 
about  1430,  but  by  others,  as  early  as  1423. 

From  this  period,  printing  has  made  a  rapid  progress  in 
most  of  the  principal  towns  of  Europe,  superceded  the  trade 
t)f  copying,  which,  till  that  time,  was  very  considerable,  and 
Avas  in  many  places  considered  as  a  species  of  magic.  In 
1490,  it  reached  Constantinople,  and  was  extended  by  the 
middle  of  the  following  century  to  Africa  and  America. 

During  the  period  since  its  invention,  what  has  not  the  art 
of  printing  effected  ?  It  has  blunted  the  edge  of  persecution's 
sword,  laid  open  to  man  his  own  heart,  struck  the  sceptre 
from  the  hand  of  tyranny,  and  awakened  from  its  slumbers, 
a  spirit  of  knowledge,  cullivatlon  and  liberty.  It  has  gone 
forth  like  an  angel,  scattering  blessings  in  its  path,  solacing 
the  wounded  mind,  and  silently  pointing  out  the  triumphs  of 
morality  and  the  truths  of  revelation  to  the  gaze  of  those, 
whom  the  want  of  precept  or  good  example  had  debased,  and 
whom  ignorance  had  made  sceptic-al. 

The  fourth  centennial  anniversary  of  the  invention  of  printing,  was 
observed  at  Harlaem  in  Holland,  on  the  10th  and  11th  July,  1823,  with 
great  rejoicing  and  a  splendid  festival. 

Prinfer^s  Types.  Ten  pounds  of  lead,  and  two  pounds  of 
antimony.  The  antimony  must  be  thrown  into  the  crucible, 
when  the  lead  is  in  a  state  of  fusion.  The  antimony  gives  a 
hardness  to  the  lead,  without  which,  the  type  would  speedily 
fee  rendered  useless,  in  a  printing  press.  Different  propor- 
tions of  lead;  copper,  brass  and  antimony,  frequently  consti- 
tute this  metal.  Every  artist  has  his  own  proportions,  so 
that  the  same  composition  cannot  be  obtained  from  different 
foundries;  each  boasts  of  the  superiority  of  his  own  mix- 
ture. 

Small  Types  and  Stereotype  Plates,  Nine  pounds  of 
lead,  and  when  melted,  hdd  two  pounds  of  antimoriyj  and  one 
pound  of  bismuth. 

This  alloy  expands  as  it  cools,  and  is  therefore,  well  suited 
for  the  formation  of  small  printing  types  (particularly,  when 
many  are  cast  together,  to  form  stereotype  plates,)  as  the 
whole  pf  the  mould  is  accurately  filled  with  alloy ;  conse- 
quently, there  can  be  no    blemish    in    the  letters.     2.   Eight 


TKADESMAN^S  GLIDE.  115 

parts  of  lead,  two  parts  of  antimony,  and  one-third  part  of 
tin.  For  the  manufacture  of  stereotype  plates,  plaster  of 
Par»s,  of  the  consistence  of  a  batter  pudding  before  baking,  is 
poured  over  the  letter-press  page  and  worked  into  the  inter- 
stices of  the  types,  with  a  brush.  It  is  then  collected  from 
the  sideSj  by  a  slip  of  iron  or  wood,  so  as  to  lie  smooth  and 
compact.  In  about  two  minutes,  tbe  whole  mass,  is  harden- 
ed into  a  solid  cake.  This  cake,  which  is  to  serve  as  the  ma- 
trix of  the  stereotype  plate,  is  now  put  upon  a  rack  in  an 
oven,  where  it  ujidergocs  great  hea^,  so  as  to  drive  ofl'the  su- 
perfluous moisture.  When  ready  for  use,  these  moulds,  ac- 
cording to  their  size,  are  placed  in  flat  cast  iron  pots,  and  are 
covered  over  with  another  piece  of  cast  iron,  perforated  at 
each  end,  to  admit  the  metalic  composition  intended  for  thd 
preparation  of  stereotype  plates.  The  flat  cast  iron  pots 
are  now  fastened  in  a  crane,  which  carries  them  steadil}^  to 
the  metalic  bath,  or  melting  pot,  where  they  are  immersed, 
and  kept  for  a  considerable  time,  until  all  the  pores  and  cre- 
vices of  the  mould  are  completely  and  accurately  filled. 
When  this  has  taken  place,  the  pots  are  elevated  from  the 
bath,  by  working  the  crane,  and  are  placed  over  a  water 
trough,  to  cool  gradually!  When  cold,  the  whole  is  turned 
but  of  the  pots,  and  the  piaster  being, separated,  by  hammer- 
ing, and  washing,  the  plates  are  ready  for  use,  having  recei- 
ved the  most  exact  and  perfect  impression. 

CHAPTER  XXI. 

Painting-^—historical — landscape  or  portrait — cartoon  of  Ra-^ 
pliael — of  Paul  preaching  at  Athens — as  applied  to  pur- 
poses   of    building — practical   operations — distemper ,    or 
'  painting  in  water  colours— 171  oil — colouring  prints-^mix^ 
ing  colours. 

The  art  of  painting  gives  the  most  direct  and  expressive 
representation  of  objects;  and  it  was  doubtless,  for  this  rea- 
son employed  by  many  nations,  before  the  art  of  WritiPig  was 
invented,  to  communicate  their  thoughts,  and  to  convey  in- 
telligence to  distant  places.  The  pencil  may  be  said  to  write 
a  universal  language;  for  every  one  can  instantly  understand 
the  meaning  of  a  painter,  provided  he  be  fa'thful  to  the  rules 
of  his  art.  His  skill  enables  him  to  display  the  various  scenes 
of  nature  at  one  view;  and  by  his  delineation  of  the  striking 
effects  of  passion,   he  instantaneously  effects  the  soul  of 


116  Tiili    AlcTiST    AND 

spectator.  Silent  and  uniform  as  is  the  adddress  wliicli  a 
good  picture  makes  to  us,  yet  it  penetrates  so  deeply  into  our 
affections,  as  to  appear  to  exceed  the  power  of  eloquence. 
Painting  is  the  most  imitative  of  all  the  arts.  It  gives  to  us 
the  very  forms  of  those,  whose  works  of  genius  and  virtue, 
have  commanded  or  won  our  admiration^  and  transmits  them 
from  age  to  age,  as  if  not  life  merely,  but  immortality  flowed 
in  the  colours  of  the  artist's  pencil;  or  to  speak  of  its  still  hap- 
pier use,  it  preserves  to  us  the  lineaments  of  those  whom  we 
love,  when  separated  from  us  cither  by  distance  or  the  tomb. 
How  many  of  the  feelings^  which  we  should  most  regret  to 
lose,  would  be  lost,  but  for  this  delightful  art, — -feelings  that 
ennoble,  b}^  giving  us  the  wish  to  imitate  what  was  noble  in 
the  moral  hero  or  sage,  on  w^hom  we  gaze,  or  that  comfort  li^ 
by  the  imaginary  presence  of  those  whose  affection  is  the  only 
thing  dearer  to  us,  than  even  our  admiration  of  heroism  or 
wisdom.  The  value  of  painting  vi^ill,  indeed,  be  best  felt  by 
those  who  have  lost  by  death  a  parent  or  much  loved  friend i 
and  who  feel  that  they  should  not  have  lost  every  things  if 
some  pictured  memorial  had  still  remained. 

Paintings,  in  regard  to  their  subjects,  are  caUed  historical, 
landscape  or  portrait;  and  in  regard  to  the  painters,  they  are 
divided  into  schools  or  countries;  as  the  Italian,  German; 
French,  English,  and  other  schools.  Each  of  the  schools  has 
treated  the  practice  of  painting  in  its  peculiar  manner,  and 
each  with  exquisite  beauty  and  admirable  effect.  The  great 
component  parts  of  painting  are,  invention,  or  the  power  of 
conceiving  the  materials  prooer  to  be  introduced  into  a  picture; 
composition,  or  the  power  of  arranging  them;  design,  or  the 
power  of  delineating  them;  the  management  of  lights  and 
shades;  and  the  colourivUg.  Invention  consists  principally  in 
three  things,  the  choice  of  a  subject  properly  within  the  scope 
of  the  art;  the  seizure  of  the  most  striking  and  energetic  mo- 
ment of  time  for  representation,  and  the  discovery  and  selec- 
tion of  such  objects,  and  suchprobable  incidental  circumstances, 
as,  combined  together,  may  best  teffd  to  devolope  the  storyj 
or  augment  the  interest  of  the  piece.  In  this  part  of  the  art, 
there  is  a  cartoon  of  Raphadl^  which  furnishes  an  example  of 
genius  and  sagacity.  It  represents  the  inhabitants  of  Lrstra 
about  to  offer  sacrifice  to  Paul  and  Barnabas.  It  was  neces- 
sary to  let  us  into  all  the  cause  and  hurry  before  US;  accor- 
dingly, the  cripple,  whom  they  had  miraculously  healed,  ap- 


tradesman's  guide.  117 

pears  in  the  crowd:  observes  the  meaus  which  the  painter  has 
used  to  distinguish  this  object,  and  of  course  to  open  the  sub* 
ject  of  his  piece.  His  crutches,  now  useless,  are  thrown  to 
the  ground;  his  attitude  is  that  of  one  accustomed  to  such 
support  and  still  doubtful  of  his  limbs:  the  eagerness,  the  im- 
petuosity, with  which  he  solicits  his  benefactors  to  accept  the 
honours  destined  for  them,  points  out  his  gratitude  and  the 
occasion  of  it.  During  the  time  he  is  thus  busied,  an  elderly 
citizen  of  some  consequence,  by  his  appearance,  draws  near^ 
and  lifting  up  the  corner  of  his  vest,  surveys  with  astonish- 
ment, the  limb  newly  restored;  whilst  a  man  cf  middle  age, 
and  a  youth,  looking  over  the  shoulder  of  the  cripple,  are  in- 
tent on  the  same  object.  The  wit  of  man  coald  not  devise 
means  more  certain  of  the  end  proposed.  In  the  cartoon  of 
Paul  preaching-at  Athei.s,  the  elevated  situation,  and  energe- 
tic action  of  the  apostle,  instantly  denote  him  the  hero  of  the 
piece,  whilst  the  attentive  but  astonished  circl-e  gathered 
iiround  him,  receive  as  it  were,  light  from  him,  their  centre, 
and  unequivocally  declare  him  the  resistless  organ  of  divine 
truth. 

Painting,  as  applied  to  purpose  of  building,  is  the  applica- 
tion of  artificial  colours,  compounded  either  with  oil  or  water, 
in  embellishing  and  preserving  wood,  &c.  This  branch  of 
painting  is  termed  economical^  and  applies  more  immediately 
to  the  power  which  oil  and  varnishes  possess  of  preventing 
the  action  of  the  atmosphere  upon  wood,  iron  and  stucco,  by 
interposing  an  artificial  surface.  But  it  is  here  intended  to 
use  the  term  more  generally,  in  allusion  to  the  decorative 
part,  and  as  is  employed  by  the  architect,  throughout  every 
part  of  his  work.  In  every  branch  of  painting  in  oil,  the 
general  processes  are  very  similar,  and  with  such  variation 
only,  as  readily  occur  to  the  workiuan. 

The  first  coatings,  or  layers,  if  on  wood  or  iron,  ought  al- 
ways to  be  of  white  lead  of  the  best  qualit}^  previously  ground 
very  fine  in  nut  or  linseed  oil,  either  over  a  stone,  with,  a 
muUer,  or  passed  through  a  mill.  If  used  on  shutters,  doors, 
or  wainscoting,  made  of  fir  or  deal,  it  is  very  requisite  to  des- 
troy the  effects  of  the  knots;  which  generall}^  are  so  com- 
pletely saturated  with  turpentine,  as  to  render  it  perhaps,  one 
of  the  most  dilFiculr,  processes  in  this  business.  The  best  mode, 
ill  common  cases,  is,  to  pass  a  brush  over  the  knots,  with 
lead  ground  in  water,  bound  by  a  size  made  of  parchment  ov 


118  THK    ARTIST  AND 

glue;  when  that  is  dry,  paint  the  knots  with  white  lead  ground 
in  oil,  to  which  add  .^some  powerful  drier,  as  red  lead,  or 
litharge  of  lead;  about  one  fourth  part  of  the  latter.  These 
must  be  laid  ver}^  smoothlj^  in  the  direction  of  the  grain  of 
the  wood.  When  the  last  coat  is  dry,  smooth  it  with  pumice 
stone,  or  give  it  the  first  coat  of  paint,  prepared  with  nut  or 
linseed  oil;  when  dry,  all  nail  holes  or  other  irregularities 
roust  be  stopped  with  a  composition  of  oil  and  Spanish  White. 
The  work  must  then  be  again  painted  with  white  lead  and 
oil,  somewhat  diluted  with  the  essence  of  turpentine,  which 
process  should  be  repeated  not  less  than  three  or  four  times^ 
if  a  plain  white  or  stone  colour  is  intended;  and  if  the  latter 
colour,  a  small  quantitj^  of  ivory  or  lamp  black  sliould  be  ad- 
ded. But  if  the  work  is  to  be  finished  of  any  other  colour^ 
either  grey,  green,  &c.  it  will  be  requisite  to  "provide  for  such 
color,  after  the  third  operation,  particularly  if  it  is  to  be 
finished  flat,  or  as  the  painters  style  it,  dead  white,  fawn, 
grey,  &:c.  To  finish  a  work  flatted  or  dead,  which  is  prefer- 
able mode  for  all  superior  works,  one  coat  of  the  flatted 
colour,  or  colour  mixed  with  a  considerable  quantity  of  tur- 
pentine will  be  found' sufficient,  although  it  will  be  frequently 
requisite  to  give  large  surfaces  two  coats  of  the  flatting  colour, 
For  stucco  it  will  be  almost  a  general  rule.  In  all  these 
operations,  some  sort  of  drier  is  necessary;  a,  very  general 
and  useful  one  is  made,  by  grinding  in  linseed,  (or,  perhcps, 
preparde  oils  boiled,  are  JDetter,)  about  two  parts  of  the  best 
white  copperas,  well  dried  with  one  part  of  litharge. 

The  best  drier  for  all  fine  whites,  and  other  delicate  tintSj 
is  sugar  of  lead,  ground  in  nut  oil :  about  the  size  of  a  walnut 
will  be  sufficient  for  20  lbs.  of  colour,  when  the  basis  is  white 
lead.  Painter's  utensils  should  be  always  kept  very  clean. 
If  the  colour  should  beconie  foul,  it  must  be  passed  through 
a  fine  sieve  or  canvass,  and  the  surface  of. the  work  carefully 
rubbed  down  with  sand  paper  or  pumice  stone.  The  latter 
should  be  ground  in  water,  if  the  paint  is  tender.  In  general 
cases,  perhaps  two  or  three  years  are  not  too  long  to  suffer  " 
stucco  to  remain  unpainted.  When  it  is  on  battened  work  it  : 
may  be  painted  much  sooner  than  when  prepared  on  brick. 
For  priming  and  laying  on  the  first  coat  on  stucco,  take  lin- 
seed or  nut  oil,  boiled  with  driers  as  before  mentioned  ;  ta- 
king care  in  all  cases  not  to  lay  on  so  much,  as  to  render  the 
surface  rough,  and  no   more  than   the  stucco  will  absorb.     It 


TRADESMEN  S    GUIDE.  119 

should  be  covered  with  three  or  four  coats  of  white  lead,  pre- 
pared as  described  for  painting  on  wainscoting,  letting  each 
coat  dry  hard.  If  it  is  wished  to  give  the  work  a  grey  tint, 
light  green,  ifec.  about  tho  third  coat  prepare  the  ground  for 
such  tint,  by  a  slight  advance  towards  it.  Grey  is  made  with 
white  lead,  Prussian  blue,  ivory  black,  and  lake  ;  sage  green, 
pea  and  sea  greei^s,  with  white,  Prussian  blue,  and  fine  yel- 
low ;  apricot  and  peach,  with  lake,  white,  and  Chinese  ver- 
milion :  fine  yellow  fawn  colour,  with  burnt  terra  sienna,  or 
umber  and  wliite  ;  and  olive  greens  with  fine  Prussian  blues 
and  Oxfordshire  ochre. 

Distemper,  or  painting  in  water  colour,  mixed  with  size, 
stucco  or  plaster,  if  not  sufficiiently  dry  to  receive  oil,  may 
have  a  coating  in  water  colours,  of  any  given  tint  required. 
Straw  colours  may  be  made  with  French  white  and  ceruse, 
or  white  lead  and  massicot,  or  Dutch  pink.  Greys  full,  with 
some  whites  and  refiner's  yerditure.  An  inferior  grey  may 
be  made  with  blue  black,  or  bone  black  and  indigo;  pea 
greens,  with  French  green,  Olympian  green,  Sfc.  Fawn 
colour  with  burnt  terra  de  sienna,  or  burnt  umber  and  white, 
and  so  of  any  intermediate  tint.  Grind  all  the  colours  very 
fine,  and  mix  with  whiting  aad  a  size  made  with  parchment, 
or  some  similar  substance.  Less  than  two  coats  will  not  be 
sufficient  to  cover  the  plaster,  and  present  a  uniform  appear- 
ance. If  it  should  be  desirable  to  have  the  stucco  painted  in 
oil,  the  whole  of  the  water  colour  should  be  removed,  which 
which  can  bo  easily  done  by  washing,  and  when  quite  dry, 
proceed  with  it  after  the  directions  given  in  paining  on  stucco. 
If  old  plastering  has  become  disfigured  by  stains,  or  other 
blemishes,  and  if  it  is  desirable  to  paint  in  distemper,  in  this 
case,  it  is  advisable  to  give  the  old  plastering,  when  properly 
cleaned  and  prepared,  one  coat  at  least,  of  white  lead  ground 
in  oil,  and  used  with  spirits  of  turpentine,  which  will  gen- 
erally fix  old  stains,  and  when  quite  dry,  will  take  water 
colours  very  kindly. 

.Directions  for  Painting  in  oil  on  Canvass,  After  your 
cloth  is  nailed  on  the  frame,  pass  over  it  a  coat  of  size;  when 
dry,  rub  it  over  with  a  pounce  stone,  to  eat  off  all  the  knobs: 
the  first  size  is  intended  to^»,lay  down  all  the  threads,  and  fill 
up  all  the  small  holes,  to  prevent  the  colour  from  passing 
through.  When  the  cloth  is  dry  lay  on  a  coat  of  simple 
colour,  which  may  not  destroy  the  others;  for  example,  brown 


I. 


120  THE    ARTIST  AND 

red,  which  is  a  natural  earth,  full  of  substance  and  lasting.  If 
mixed  with  a  little  white  lead  it  will  dry  sooner.  In  grinding 
this  colour,  use  nut  or  linseed  oil,  and  it  should  be  prepared 
to  lay  on  as  thin  as  possible.  When  this  colour  is  dry,  rub  it 
again  with  the  pounce  stone,  which  renders  it  smoother:  la}"" 
another  coat  of  w^hito  lead  and  charcoal  black,  to  rende^  the 
ground  grejish,  having  care  in  putting  on  as  little  colour  as 
possible,  to  prevenrthe  cloth  from  cracking,  and  for  the  bet- 
ter preservation  of  the  colours  to  be  laid  afterwards.  We 
will  observe,  that  if  there  was  no  ground  laid  on  the  canvass 
of  a  picture,  previous  to  painting  it,  and  if  painted  directly 
on  the  bare  cloth  without  any  preparation,  the  colours  wou  Id 
appear  much  more  to  their  advantage,  and  preserve  their 
brightness  much  longer.  Some  of  the  first  mastess  impreg- 
nate their  canvass  with  water  colours  only,  and  paint  after- 
wards in  oil  over  the  ground.  This  method  renders  pieces 
more  lively  and  bright,  because  the  ground  in  water  colours 
draws  and  soaks  the  oil  trom  the  colours,  rendering  them  finer; 
whereas,  on  the  contrary,  oil  is  the  cause  of  this  dulness,  by 
its  detention  in  their  colours.  It  is  desirable  therefoie,  to 
use  as  little  oil  as  possible;  and  in  order  to  keep  tlie  colours 
stiff,  mix  with  them  a  little  of  the  oil  of  spike,  which  will 
evaporate  very  soon,  but  renders  them  more  fluid  and  trac- 
table in  working.  We  cannot  recommend  too  much  care  in 
keeping  the  colours  (for  the  least  tint  might  destro}^  the  best 
design)  unmixed,  either  with  brush  or  pencil.  When  there 
is  occasion  to  give  more  strength  to  some  parts  of  the  pic- 
ture, let  it  be  well  dried  before  it  is  interrutped  again.  The 
custom  prevails  of  grounding  the  canvass  with  oil  colours; 
but  when  the  canvass  is  good  and  very  fine,  the  less  colour 
which  can  be  laid  on  for  that  purpose  is  preferable.  Care  is 
also  requisite,  that  the  colours  and  oils  are  good.  The  lead 
which  some  painters  use  to  dry  the  sooner,  soon  destroys 
their  brightness  and  beauty.  In  short,  he  shows  his  judg- 
ment in  painting,  who  is  not  hasty  in  laying  his  colours,  but 
lays  them  thick  eno"gh,  and  covers,  at  several  times  his  car- 
nations, which,  in  terms  of  art  is  called  empater. 

Directions  for  Colouring  Prints.  All  the  colours  used  for 
this  purpose  are  ground  with  gum  water,  excepting  calcined 
green.     For  complexions,  a  mixture  of  white  and  vermilion. 

For  the  lips,  lake  and  vermilion. 

For  the  shades,  white  and  vermilion,  and  considerable  um- 
ber. 


TRADESMAN  S    GUIDE.  121 

For  the  hair,  white  with  very  little  umber;  if  a  carroty  co- 
lour, yellow  ochre  and  brown  red  ;  the  shade  with  bistre  and 
lake,  mixed  together;  if  light,  mix  black,  white,  and  umber 
together. 

For  the  clothes,  if  linen,  white  lead  and  a  little  blue  ;  if 
stuff's,  white  lead  alone,  and  the  shades  with  a  grey  colour^ 
made  by  means  of  a  mixture  of  black  and  white  lead  togeth- 
er. If  a  white  cloth,  a  mixture  of  white  and  umber  together, 
and  shade  with  a  compound  of  umber  and  black.  If  a  red 
cloth,  use  vermilion  in  the  lighter  parts  of  the  folds  ;  lake 
and  vermilion,  for  the  clear  shades  ;  lake  alone  laid  on  the 
vermilion,  will  form  the  dark  shades. 

Directions  for  mixing  of  Colours,  Pale  yellow  for'lights^ 
— white  massicot.  The  chiaro  ascuro,  with  the  massicot  and 
umber.     The  dark  shade,  with  umber  alone. 

Orange.  Black  lead,  for  the  lights;  shade  with  the  lake. 
The  lake  is  used  very  clear  for  the  lights,  m  drapery,  and 
thicker  for  the  shades. 

Purple.  Blue,  white,  and  lake,  for  lights;  blue,  and  lake, 
onb^  for  the  clear  shades;  and  indigo  and  blue  for  the  darker 
ones.  The  pale  blue  is  used  for  the  lights  ;  and  for  the  clear 
shades,  a  little  thicker;  but  for  the  darker  shades,  rnix  the  in- 
digo and  blue  together. 

The  gold  like  yellow  is  made  with  yellow  massicot  for  the 
lights— clear  shades,  a  mixture  of  black  lead  and  massicot — 
dark  shade,  lake,  yellow  ochre,  and  a  very  little  black  lead: 
and  darkest  of  all,  cologne  earth  and  lake. 

The  green  is  of  two  sorts.  The  first — massicot  and  blue, 
or  blue  and  white;  for  the  shade,  make  the  blue  predominate 
in  the  mixture.  The  other  is  made  with  calcined  green,  and 
their  shades  may  he  formed  by  the  addition  of  indigo. 

For  trees,  mix  green  and  umber  together.  The  grounds 
are  made  in  the  same  way.  For  the  distance,  mix  blue  and 
green  together.  Mountains  are  always  made  with  blue.  The 
skies  are  made  with  blue,  but  add  a  little  3'ellow  when  you 
come  near  the  mountains,  and  to  make  the  transition  between 
that  and  the  blue,  mix  a  little  lake  and  blue  together  to  soft- 
en it. 

Clouds  are  made  with  purple  ;  if  they  be  obscure,  mix 
lake  and  indigo  together.  Stones  are  made  with  white  and 
yellow  mixed  together;  and  their  shades  with  black. 

11 


122  THE    ARTIST    AND 


CHAPTER    XXII. 


Paints — Cosmetics — to  imitate  Marble — to  dye  Bones — Co- 
lours for  show  Bottles — -for  Maps — to  imitate  Ebony — to 
imitate  Gold,  Silver ,  or  Copper — to  ivhiten  Bones — Co- 
louring principles  of  Blood — Metalic  Watering, 

Patent  Yellow.  Pulverise  common  table  salt  very  finely; 
put  it  into  Wedgwood's  mortar;  add  to  it  twice  as  much  red 
lead,  pulverised  :  rub  them  well  together  first ;  then  add  wa- 
ter a  very  little  at  a  time,  and  C(^tinue  rubbing  until  a  paste 
is  formed.  The  muriate  of  lead  will  now  be  formed,  and 
the  soda  disengaged  ;  pour  in  a  large  quantity  of  water  and 
wash  it  several  times  ;  the  soda  will  v  ash  out  and  leave  a 
white  mass  ;  dry  this  mass  and  then  melt  it  in  a  crucible,  and 
a  beautiful  substance  will  be  formed,  called  patent  yellow^ 
which  is  one  of  the  most  durable   pigments. 

2.  Common  salt  100  lbs.  litharge  400  lbs.  ground  together 
with  water;  keep  for  some  time  in  a  gentle  heat,  water  being 
added  to  supply  the  loss  by  evaporation,  the  natron  then  wash- 
ed out  with  more  water,  and  the  white  residuum  heated  till  it 
acquires  a  fine  yellow  colour. 

Flake  White,  Made  by  suspending  rolls  of  thin  sheet 
lead  over  vinegar  in  close  vessels;  the  evaporation  from  the 
vinegar  being  kept  up  by  the  vessels  being  placed  in  a  heap^ 
of  manure,  or  a  steam  bath. 

2.  By  dissolving  litharge  in  diluted  nitrous  acid,  and  adding 
prepared  chal^  to  the  solution;  astringent,  cooling;  used 
externally  :   also  employed  as  paint,  mixed  with  nut  oil. 

Protoxid  of  Lead,  Melt  some  lead  in  a  ladle,  and  scrape- 
off  the  pellicle  which  forms  on  its  surface  several  times,  or 
until  a  sufficient  quantity  is  obtained;  part  of  this  \$  oxidated 
and  part  is  not ;  now  put  this  into  a  ladle  by  itself:  and  expose 
It  to  a  low  red  heat,  continuallj^  stirring  it  with  a  rod  until  it 
becomes  of  a  yellow  colour. 

This  is  the  massicot  used  in  the  arts;  also  for  setting  a  fine 
edge  to  razors,  for  polishing  burnishers,  &,c. 

Red  Lead,  Put  some  massicot mXo  a  ladle  ;  cover  it  over 
loosely  with  an  earthen  or  iron  plate,  and  raise  the  heat ; 
raise  up  one  side  of  the  plate,  and  stir  it  often,  until  it  be- 
comes of  a  bright  red  ;  care  must  be  taken  not  to  raise  the 
heat  so  high  as  to  drive  off  the  oxygen,  previously  acquired  ; 


TRADESMAN'S    GUIDE.  12^ 

thereby  briuging  it  again  to  a  state  of  pure  melted  lead ;  it 
is  very  difficult  to  succeed  in  this  operation  with  small  quan- 
tities. 

This  is  the  rec?  Zeari  used  by  painters;  and  it  is  on  this 
principle,  but  with  a  different  apparatus,  the  lead  of  the  shops 
is  manufactured  ;  but  it  is  generally  very  impure. 

Florence  Lake,  Pearl  ashes  one  ounce  four  drachms,  wa- 
ter a  sufficient  quantity,  dissolve ;  alum  two  ounces  four 
drachms,  water,  q.  p.  dissolve;  filter  both  solutions  and  add  the 
first  to  the  alum  solution  while  warm  ;  strain  :  mix  the  sedi* 
ment  upon  the  strained  with  the  first  coarse  residuum  obtain- 
ed in  boiling  cochineal  with  alum,  for  making  carmine,  and 
dry  it. 

Common  Lake,  Make  a  magestery  of  alum,  as  in  making 
Florence  lake  ;  boil  one  ounce  four  drachms  Brazil  dust  in 
three  pints  of  water,  strain  ;  add  the  magestery,  or  sediment 
of  alum,  to  the  strained  liquor;  stir  it  well ;  let  it  settle,  and 
dry  the  sediment  in   small  lumps. 

Fine  Madder  Lake,  Dutch  grappe  madder  (that  is,  mad- 
der root  ground  between  two  mill  stones,  a  small  distance 
apart  as  in  grinding  pearl  or  French  barley,  so  that  only  the 
bark,  which  contains  the  moist  colour  is  reduced  to  powder, 
and  the  central  woody  part  of  the  wood  left)  two  ounces,  tie 
it  up  in  a  cloth,  beat  it  up  in  a  pint  of  water  in  a  stone 
mortar,  repeat  it  with  fresh  water  :  in  general  five  points  will 
take  out  all  the  colour  ;  boil,  add  one  ounce  of  alum,  dissol- 
ved in  a  pint  of  water,  then  add  one  ounce  and  a  half  of 
oil  of  tartar  ;  wash  the  sediment,  and  dry; — produces  half  an 
ounce. 

Rose  Pink,  Whiting  coloured  with  a  decoction  of  Brazil 
wood  and  alum. 

Dutch  Pink,  Whiting  coloured  with  a  decoction  of  birch 
leaves,  dyer's  weed,  or  French  berries,  with  alum. 

Stone  Blue,     Starch  coloured  with  indigo. 

Litharge,  Put  some  red  lead  into  a  ladle  and  heat  it  un- 
ti^l  it  is  partly  melted,  so  that  it  begins  to  be  agglutinated  in  a 
kind  of  scales.  Jf  not  so  bright  a  red  it  is  a  more  durable 
colour. 

White  Lead,  Make  nitrate  of  lead  as  before  directed,  and 
dissolve  it  in  water  in  a  wine  glass;  pour  into  it  a  solution  of 
pearlash  and  a  white  insoluble  precipitate  will  fall  down.  Let 
the  liquid  be  poured  off,   and  tbe   powder  washed  several 


124  ?rHE    ARTIST   AN© 

times.     This  is  the  wliite  lead  of  painters  in  its  purest  state. 

It  is  generally  made  by  applying  the  vapour  of  vinegar  to 
sheet  lead,  and  contains  some  acetate  of  lead  and  other  im- 
purities. 

Sugar  of  Lead,  Put  some  white  lead  into  .a  Florence 
flask;  put  in  about  ten  times  as  much  good  sharp  vinegar(dis- 
tilled  vinegar  is  best;)  shake  up  several  times  and  let  it  stand 
until  the  vinegar  tastes  sweet.  Add  more  vinegar,  and  con- 
tinue adding  by  littles,  until-  it  will  remain  sour;  evaporate 
and  crystallize  in  the  usual  way.  This  is  the  acetate  or  sugar 
of  lead  used  in  medicire. 

White  Vitriol,  Pour  diluted  sulphuric  acid  upon  zinc; 
leaving  the  zinc  in  excess:  after  the  action  ceases,  pour  off  the 
clear  liquids,  which  is  the  white  vitriol  in  solution.  If  this 
bo  eva  jorated  slowly,  crystals  will  be  formed. 

By  a  similar  process  the  vitriol  of  the  shops  is  manufac- 
tured. 

Chrome,  Chrome  is  found  in  the  state  of  an  acid,  coni- 
"bined  with  iron,  called  chromate  of  iron,  it  is  sometimes 
found  in  granular  lime  rocks.  When  chromate  of  iron  is 
pulverized  and  mixed  with  nitrate  of  potish  and  heated  to 
redness,  a  double  decomposition  takes  place,  and  the  chrom- 
ate of  potash  is  produced. 

Dissolve  chromate  of  potash  in  pure  water,  pour  some  of 
it  in  a  solution  of  sugar  of  lead,  and  the  beautiful  yellow  pig- 
ment, chromate  of  lead,  will  be  precipitated;  pour  it  into  nit- 
rate of  mercury,  cinnabar  red  is  produced;  into  nitrate  of 
silver,  and  common  red  is  produced. 

The  chromate  of  lead  is  now  in  general  use  as  a  yellow 
paint;  a  very  sniall  quantity  mixed  with  white  lead,  gives  the 
whole  a  beautiful  3'ellow  colour. 

Almond  Bloom,  Brazil  dust  one  ounce,  water  three  pints, 
boil,  strain;  add  of  isinglass,  six  drachms;  (or  cochineal,  two 
drachm?;)  alum  one  ounce;  borax  three  drachms;  boil  again, 
and  strain  through  a  fine  cloth;   used  as  a  liquid  cosmetic. 

Blue  Vitriol,  Boil  copper  filings  in  sulphuric  acid,  and 
the  salt  will  be  formed  in  the  liquid  state:  this  may  be  evap- 
orated in  the  usual  way. 

On  this  principle  the  blue  vitriol  of  the  shops  is  made, 
though  the  operation  is  not  similar;  the  native  sulphuret  is 
heated  and  exposed  to  air  and  moisture,  and  thereby  ihe 
peroxyde  is  obtained;  then  the  salt  is  readily  formed  by 
|30uriiig  sulphuric  acid  upon  it. 


rRADtSMAN  s   auiDE.  123 

Verdigris,       Cover  a  gallipot   of  boiling  vinegar  with   a 
piece  of  polished  sheet  copper;   after  a  short  time  it  will  ber| 
covered  with  a  thin  crust  of  verdigris*     Upon  this  principle, 
though  with   a  very  different   apparatus,  the  verdigris  of  the 
shops  is  made. 

Colours  for  Show  Bottles.  Yellow.  Dissolve  iron  in  spti 
of  salt,  and  dilute. 

Red.  Spts.  of  hartshorn  q.  p.  dilute  with  water  and  tinge 
with  cochineal. 

2.  Dissolve  sal.  ammoniac  in  water  and  tinge  with  cochin-^ 
eal. 

Blue.  Blue  Vitriol  and  alum,  of  each  2  ozi  water  24  ozi 
spts.  of  vitriol  q.  p. 

2.   Blue  vitriol,  4  oz. Water  36  oz. 

Green.  Rough  verdigris  3  oz*  dissolve  in  spts.  vitriol,  and 
add  48  oz.  water. 

Add  distilled  verdigris  and  blue  vitriol  to  a  strong  decoc- 
tion of  turmeric. 

Purple.  Verdigris  two  drachms;  spts.  hartshorn  4  oz*  water 
18  oz. 

2.  Sugar  of  lead  one  ounce;  cochineal  one  scruple^  water 
q.  p. 

3.  Add  a  little  spirits  hartshorn  to  an  infusion  of  log- 
Wood. 

Wash  Colours  for  Maps  or  Writing.  Yellow*  Gam- 
boge dissolved  in  water  ^.  p*  French  berries  steeped  in  wa- 
ter, the  liquid   strained,  and  gum  Arabic  added. 

2.  Red.      Brazil  dust  steeped  in  vinegar    and  alum  added* 
Litmus  dissolved  in   water,  and  spirits  of  wine  added* 

3.  Cochineal  steeped  in  water,  strained,  and  guiii  added* 

4.  Blue.   Saxon  blue  diluted  with  water  q.  p. 

Litmus  rendered  blue  by  adding  distilled  vinegar  to  its  so* 
lution. 

5.  Green.  Distilled  verdigris  dissolved  »n  Waterj  and  gum 
added. 

6.  Sap  green  dissolved  in  water,  and  alum  added* 
Litmus   rendered  green   by   adding  kali  ppm.  to  its   solu-* 

tion. 

English  Verdigris.  Blue  vitriol  24  lbs.  white  vitriol  16 
lbs.  sugar  of  lead  12  lbs.  alum  2  lbs.  all  coarsely  powdered^ 
put  in  a  pot  over  the  fire  and  stirred  till  they  are  united  into 
a  mass. 

*ll 


126  THE    ARTIST    AND  >   •-  i. 

Venetian  Ceruss.     Flake  white,  cawk  equal  parts. 
Hamburg    White    Lead.       Flake    white    100   lbs.    cawk 
200  lbs. 

Best  Dutch  White  Lead.  Flake  White  100  lbs.  cawk 
700  lbs. 

English  White  Lead.  Flake  White  reduced  in  price  by 
chalk,  inferior  to  the  preceding. 

Rouge.  French  chalk  ppd.  4  oz.  ol.  amygd.  2  drachms, 
carmine  one  drachm. 

2.  Safflower,  previously  w'ashed  in  water,  until  it  no  lon- 
ger gives  out  any  colour,  and  dried,  4  drachms,  kali  pp.  one 
drachm,  water  one  pint ;  infuse,  strain  ;  add  French  chalk,: 
scraped  fine  with  Dutch  rushes  four  ounces,  and  precipitate 
the  colour  upon  it  with  lemon  juice  a  sufficient  quantity. 

Cologne  Earth,  Umber.  Black  or  blackish  brown,  mixed 
with  brownish  red,  fine  grained,  earthy,  smooth  to  the  touch, 
becomes  polished  by  scraping,  very  light,  burns  with  a  disa- 
greeable smell  found  near  Cologne  ;  used  in  painting  both  in 
waier  colours  or  in  oil,  used  also  in  Holland,  to  render  snuff 
fine  and  smooth  :  wcry  different  from  the  brown  ochre — which 
is  also  called  umber^  and  is  not  combustible. 

Carmine.  Boil  one  ounce  uf  cochiiieal,  finely  powdered, 
in  twelve  or  fourteen  pounds  of  rain  or  distilled  water,  in  a 
tinned  copper  vessel,  for  three  minutes,  then  add  twenty-five 
grains  of  alum  and  continue  the  boiling  for  two  minutes, 
then  add  twenty-five  grains  of  alum  and  continue  the  boiling 
for  two  minutes  longer,  and  let  it  cool;  draw  off  the  clear 
liquor  as  soon  as  it  is  only  blood  warm,  very  carefully,  into 
shallow  vessels,  and  put  them  by,  laying  a  sheet  of  paper  over 
them  to  keep  out  the  dust  for  a  couple  of  days,  by  which  time 
the  carmine  will  have  settled.  In  case  the  carmine  does  not 
settle  properly,  a  ^ew  drops  of  a  solution  of  tin,  i.  e.  dyer's 
spirit,  or  a  solution  of  green  vitriol  will  throw  it  down  imme- 
diately :  the  water  being  then  da-nvn  off,  the  carmine  is  dried 
in  a  warm  stove.  The  first  coarse  sediment  serves  to  make 
Florence  lake  ;  the  water  drawn  off  is  liquid  rouge*" 

2.  Boil  12  oz.  of  Cochineal  powdered,  six  drachms  of  alum 
in  30  lbs.  of  water,  strain  the  decoction^  add  half  an  ounce  of 
dyer's  spirit,  and  after  the  carmine  has  sai'tied,  decant  the 
liquid  and  dry  the  carmine--yiekl3  about  one  and  a  half 
ounces,  used  as  a  paint  by  the  iiidics  and  by  miniature  pain- 
ters, '^        ■  ■  '         * 


I'UADESMAjN  S    GUIDE.  127 

•Whit'mg,  Prepared  from  the  soft  variety  of  chalk,  by 
diffusion  in  water,  letting  the  water  settle  for  two  hours,  that 
the  im}3urities  and  coarser  particles  aiay  subside  ;  then  draw- 
ing off  the  still  milky  water,  letting  it  deposite  the  finer  sed- 
iment; is  much  finer  than  the  prepared  chalk  of  the  apothe- 
caries;  but  is  principally  used  as  a  cheap  paint. 

Ultramarine  Blue,  Lapis  lazuli — one  pound  is  heated  to 
redness,  quenched  in  water,  and  ground  to  fine  powder  :  to 
this  is  added  yellow  resin  six  ounces.;  turpentine,  beeswax, 
linseed  oil,  of  each  two  ounces,  previously  melted  together, 
and  the  whole  made  into  a  mass  :  this  is  kneaded  in  success- 
ive portions  of  warm  water,  which  it  colours  blue,  and  from 
whence  it  is  deposited  by  standing,  and  sorted  according  to 
its  qualities.      It  is  a  fine  blue  colour  in  oil. 

Naples  Yelloio.  Lead,  one  pound  and  a  half;  crude  anti- 
mony, one  pound  ;  alum  and  common  salr,  of  each  one  ounce, 
calcined  together. 

2i  Flake  white,  twelve  ounces;  diaphoretic  antimony,  two 
ounces  ;  calcined  alum,  half  an  oz,  sal  ammoniac,  one  ounce;^ 
calcine  in^a  covered  crucible  with  a  moderate  heat  for  three 
hours,  so  that  at  the  end  of  that  time  it  raaV  be  barely  red 
hot:  with  a  large  portion  of  diaphoretic  antimony  and  sal  am- 
jnoniac,  it  verges  to  a  gold  colour. 

Schcele\'i  Green,  Precipitate  a  solution  of  two  pounds  of 
blue  vitriol  iij  a  sufficient  quantity  of  cold  water,  by  a  sohi-' 
tion  of  eleven  ouuces  of  white  arsenic,  and  two  ounces  of  kali 
ppm.  in  two  gallons  Q^  boiling  water,  and  wash  the  precipi- 
tate— used  as  a  paint. 

Verditer  Blue,  Made  by  the  refiners  from  the  solution  of 
copper  obtained  in  precipitating  silver  from  nitric  acid,  by 
heating  it  in  copper  pans  ;  this  solution  they  lieat  and  pour 
upon  whiting  moistened  with  water,  stirring  the  mixture 
every  day,  till  the  liquor  loses?  its  colour,  when  it  is  poured 
off,  and  a  fresh  portion  of  the  solution  poured  on  until  the 
proper  colour  is  obtained  :— an  uncertain  process  ;  the  col- 
our sometimes  turning  out  a  dirty  green,  instead  oT  a  fine 
blue. 

French  Verdigris.  Bkie  vitriol,  twenty-four  ounces,  dis- 
solved in  a  sufficient  quantity  of  water;  sugar  of  lead,  thirty 
ounces  and  a  half,  also  dissolved  in  Vv^atcr  ;  mix  the  solution  ; 
filter,  and  crystallize  by  evaporation.  It  yields  about  ten 
ounces  of  crystals; — a  superior  paint  to    common   veroigris, 


128  THE    ARTIST    AND 

and  certainly  ought  to  be  used  in  medicine,  instead  of  the 
common. 

Pearl  powder,  Magestry  of  bismiuh  ;  French  chalk,  scra- 
ped fine  by  Dutdi  fushes  ;  of  each  a  sufficient  quantity — 
cosmetic. 

Smalt — powder  Blue,  Is  made  from  roasted  cobalt,  mel- 
ted Willi  twice  or  thrice  its  weight  of  sand,  and  an  equal 
weight  of  potash  :  the  glass  is  poured  out  into  cold  water, 
ground  to  powder,  washed  over,  and  sorted  by  its  fineness 
and  the  richness  of  its  colour.  Jt  is  used  in  painting  and 
getting  up  linen. 

Blaekman's  oil  colour  Cakes,  Grind  the  colours  first  with 
oil  of  turpentine  and  a  varnish  made  of  gum  mastic  in  pow- 
der, four  ounces,  dissolved  without  heat  in  a  pint  of  oil  of 
turpentine  :  let  them  dry  ;  then  boat  a  grinding  stone  by  put- 
ling  a  charcoal  fire  under  it;  grind  the  colours  upon  it,  and 
add  an  ointment,  made  by  adding  melted  spermaceti,  3  lbs. 
to  a  pint  of  poppy  oil  ;  take  a  piece  of  the  proper  size,  make 
it  into  a  ball;  put  this  into  a  mould  and  press  it.  When 
these  cakes  are  used,  rub  them  down  with  poppy  oil,  or  oil 
of  turpentine. 

J3roivn  Red.  By  rccalcining  green  vitriol,  previously  cal- 
cined to  whiteness,  b}'  an  intense  heat  until  it  becomes  very 
red,  and  washing  the  residuum. 

Blackmail' s  Colours  in  Bladders,  Are  prepared  with  the 
spermaceti  mixture,  like  his  oil  colour  cakes,  but  the  propor- 
tion of  oil  is  larger. 

Kemp^s  White,  for  Water  Colours,  Cockscomb  spar,  q. 
p.  spirits  of  salt,  a  sufficient  quantity;  dissolve — add  carbo- 
nate of  ammonia  to  precipitate  the  white;  and  dry  in  cakes 
for  use. 

Crayons,  Spermaceti,  threvi  ounces,  boiling  water,  one 
pint ;  add  bone  ashes  finely  ground,  one  pound,  colouring 
matter,  as  ochre,  &c.  q.  p.  roll  out  the  paste,  and  when  half 
dry,  cut  it  in  pipes. 

2.  Pipe  clay,  coloured  with  ochre,  &c.  q.  p. — make  it  a 
paste  with  ale  wort.  £ 

English  Verdigris,  Blue  vitriol,  24  pounds,  white  vitriol, 
IG  pounds,  sugar  of  lead,  12  pounds,  alum,  2  lbs.,  all  coarsely 
powdered,  put  into  a  pot  over  the  fire  and  stirred  till  they  are 
united  into  a  mass. 

Vanhcrman's  Fish  Oil  Paints.   The  oil  for  grindincr  white 


i^'Radesman's  guide.  129 

is  made  by  putting  litharge,  and  white  vitriol,  of  each  twelve 
pounds,  into  32  gallons  vinegar,  adding  after  some  time,  a  ton 
of  whale,  seal  or  cod  oil  ;  the  next  day  the  clear  part  is  poured 
off,  and  32  gallons  of  linseed  oil,  and  two  gallons  of  oil  of 
turpentine,  are  added* 

2.  The  sediment,  left  when  the  clear  oil  is  poured  off,  mixed 
with  half  its  quantity  of  lime  water,  is  also  used  under  ihe 
name  of  prepared  residue  oil,  for  common  colours. 

3.  Pale  Green.  Six  gaHons  of  lime  water,  whiting,  and 
road  dust,  of  each  one  hundred  weight,  thirty  pounds  of  blue 
black,  24  pounds  of  yeHow  ochre,  wf^t  blue  (previously  ground 
in  prepared  residue  oil)  twenty  pounds;  thin  with  a  quart  ppd. 
residue  oil  to  each  8  pounds,  and  the  same  quantity  linseed 
oil. 

4.  Bright  Green,  100  lbs.  yellow  ochre,  150  lbs.  of  road 
dust,  100  lbs.  of  wet  blue,  10  lbs.  blue  black,  6  galls,  lime 
water,  4  galls,  ppd.  residue  and  linseed  oil,  seven  and  a  half 
galls,  of  each. 

5.  Lead  Colour,  100  lbs.  whiting,  5  lbs.  blue  black,  28 
lbs.  white  lead,  ground  in  oil,  56  lbs,  road  dust,  5  galls,  lime 
water,  2  1-2  galls,  ppd.  residue  oil. 

6.  Broion  Red,  8  galls,  lime  water,  100  lbs.  Spanish 
brown,  200  lbs.  dust,  4  galls,  ppd.  fish  t)ii,  ppd.  residue  and 
linseed   oil,  of  each  four  gallons, 

7.  Yellow,  Put  in  yellow  ochre,  instead  of  Spanish 
brown,  as  in  the  last. 

8.  Black.  Put  in  lamp  black  or  blue  black, 

9.  Stone  Colour.  4  galls,  lime  water.  100  lbs.  whiting, 
28  lbs.  white  lead,  ground  in  oil,  56  lbs.  road  dust,  2  galls, 
ppd.  fish  oil,  ppd.  residue,  and  linseed  oil,  of  each,  3  1-2  gal- 
lons. 

The  cheapness  of  these  paints,  and  the  hardness  and  durability  given 
to  them  by  the  road  dust,  or  ground  gravel,  has  brought  theni  into 
great  use,  for  common  out  door  painting. 

Prussian  Blue.  Red  argol  and  salt  petre  of  each  two  lbs. 
throw  the  powder  by  degrees  into  a  red  hot  crucible  ;  dry- 
bullock's  blood  over  t"M  fire,  and  mix  three  pounds  of  this 
dry  blood  with  the  prepared  salt,  and  calcine  it  in  a  crucible, 
till  it  no  longer  emits  a  flame;  then  dissolve  6  lbs.  of  common 
alum  in  26  lbs.  of  water,  and  strain  the  solution;  dissolve 
also  ^12  oz.  of  dried  green  vitriol  in  2  lbs.  water,  and  strain 
while  hot;  mix  the  two  solutions  together,  while  boiling  hot; 


130  THE    ARTIST    AND 

'dissolve  the  alkaline  salt,  calcined  with  blood,  in  27  lbs.  of 
Vater,  and  filter  through  paper,  supported  upon  linen  ;  mix 
this  with  liie  other  solution,  and  strain  through  linen  ;  put  the 
sediment  left  upon  linen,  while  moist,  into  an  earthen  pan, 
and  add  one  pound  and  a  half  of  spirit  of  salt, — stir  the  mass 
and  when  the  effervescence  is  over,  dilute  with  plenty  of  wa- 
ter, and  strain  again — lastly,  dry  the  sediment* 

2.  Mix  one  pound  of  kali  ppd.  with  two  pounds  dried  blood 
put  it  into  a  crucible,  or  long  pot,  and  keep  it  in  a. red  heat 
till  it  no  longer  flames  or  smokes,  then  take  out  a  small  por- 
tion, dissolve  it  in  water,  and  observe  its  colour  and  effects 
upon  a  solution  of  silver  in  aqua-fortis,  for  when  sufficiently 
<;alcined,  it  will  neither  look  yellowish,  nor  precipitate  silver 
of  a  brownish  or  blackish  colour.  It  is  then  to  be  taken  out 
of  th3  fire  ;  and  when  cool,  dissolved  in  a  pint  and  a  half  of 
water.  Take  green  vitriol,  one  part,  common  alum,  one  to 
three  parts;  mix,  and  dissolve  them  in  a  good  quantity  of 
water,  by  boiling,  and  filter  while  hot :  precipitate  this  solu- 
tion by  adding  a  sufficient  quantit}^  of  the  solution  of  ppd. 
alkali ;  and  filter — the  precipitate  will  be  darker  the  less  alum 
is  added,  but  it  will  be  greener  from  the  greater  admixture  of 
the  oxide  of  iron,  which  is  precipitated,  and  which  must  be 
got  rid  of,  by  addirtg  while  moist,  spirit  of  salt,  diluting  the 
mixture  with  water,  and  straining. 

3.  Precipitate  a  solution  of  green  vitriol,  with  a  solution  of 
ppd.  alkali,  and  purify  the  precipitate  with  spirits  of  salt — 
precipitate  a  solution  of  common  alum,  w^th  a  solution  of 
kali  ppd. — mix  the  two  sediments  together,  while  diflfused  in 
warm  water;  strain  and  dry. 

Vermilion,  Cinnabar,  Put  quicksilver  in  a  glazed  dish, 
set  it  on  a  sand  bath,  let  it  be  well  surrounded  with  sand 
every  way  ;  pour  some  melted  brimstone  over  it,  and  with 
an  iron  spatula  keep  constantly  stirring  till  the  whole  is  con- 
verted into  a  black  powder.  With  this  powder  fill  the  quar- 
ter part  of  a  retort,  with  a  short  and  wide  neck.  Place  it 
first  on  a  fire  of  cinders, — increase  it  by  degrees,  and  con-  | 
tinue-  it  for  ten  hours  ;  after  which,  make  a  blasting  one 
twelve  hours.  ^ 

By  the  first  fire  there  will  arise  a  black  flame — hy  the  second,  a  yel- , 
low, — and  by  the  last,  a  red.     As  soon  as  this  is  the  case  let  the  vessel 
cool,  and  you  will  find  in  the  receiver,  and  in  the  neck  of  the  retort,  a 
very  fine  cinnabar,     Borne,  instead  of  a  glass  retort,  use  an  earthen, 
&T  stone. 


TRADESMAN'S    GITIDE.  131 

A  Fine  Azure.  Boil  and  skim  well,  sixteen  pounds  of 
chamber  lye  ;  then,  add  one  pound  jGine  shellac,  and  five 
ounces  of  alum,  in  powder.  Boil  all  together,  till  you  ob- 
serve the  chamber  lye  is  well  changed  with  the  colour,  which 
is  determined  by  steeping  a  white  rag  in  it — if  the  colour 
does  not  please,  boil  it  longer,  undergoing  a  repetition  until 
satisfied.  Now,  put  the  liquor  into  a  flannel  bag — without 
suffering  what  runs  into  the  pan  under,  to  settle  ;  re-pour  it 
into  the  bag,  and  continue  the  process,  till  the  liquor  is  quite 
clear  and  not  tinged  ;  then  with  a  wooden  spatula  take  off 
the  lake,  which  is  in  the  form  of  curd  ;  make  it  into  small 
cakes,  and  dry  them  in  a  shade  on  new  tiles  ;  then  they  are 
in  a  state  to  be  kept  for  use. 

To  Marble  Wood,  Give  it  a  coat  of  blacking  varnish  '^ 
repeat  it  as  many  times  as  you  think  necessary ;  then  polish 
it. 

2.  Dilute  some  white  varnish,  lay  it  on  the  black  ground ^ 
tracing  with  it,  such  imitations  as  you  like  ;  when  dry,  rub  it 
lightly  with  rushes,  then  wipe  it,  and  give  a  last  coat  of 
transparent  white  varnish,  when  dry,  polish  it. 

To  imitate  White  Marble.  Break  and  calcine  the  finest 
white  marble,  grind  it  fine  and  dilute  it  with  size;  lay  two 
coats  of  this  on  the  wood,  which,  when  dry,  polish  and 
varnish  as  before  directed. 

To  imitate  Black  Marble.  Burn  lamp  black  in  a  ladle, 
red  hot,  then  grind  it  with  brandy.  For  the  bulk  of 
an  egg  of  black,  put  the  size  of  a  pea  in  lead,  in  drops, 
as  much  of  tallow,  and  the  same  quantity  of  soap — grind 
and  mix  ;  then  dilute  it  with  a  very  weak  size  water.  Give 
four  coats  of  this,  and  then  polish. 

To  make  Lamp  Black  for  limning.  Burn  some  nut  shells 
in  an  iron  pan,  and  throw  them  into  another  full  of  water  ; 
then  grind  them  on  marble  with  either  oil  or  varnish. 

Blue.  Whiting  ground  with  verdigris  will  make  a  very 
good  blue. 

A  Fine  Grten.  Grind  verdigris  with  vinegar,  and  a  very 
small  quantity  of  tartar  ;  then  add  a  little  quicklime  and  sap 
green,  which  grind  with  the  rest,  and  put  it  into  shells  for 
keeping.     If  it  becomes  too  hard,  dilute  it  with  vinegar. 

2.  Grind  on  a  marble  stone,  verdigris,  and  a  third  as  much 
of  tartar,  with  white  wine  vinegar. 

Saj)  green.     Express  the  blackberry  juice,  when  full  ripe; 


13t  THE    ARTIST    AM* 

add  some  alum  to  it ;  put  it  in  a  bladder,  and  hang  it  in  some 
place  to  dry. 

To  make  Lake,  Take  three  parts  of  an  ounce  of  Brazil 
wood,  a  pint  of  clear  water,  one  and  a  half  drachms  alum^ 
eighteen  grains  salt  of  tartar  ;  the  bulk  of  two  filberts  of 
mineral  crystal;  tiiree  quarters  of  a  pound  of  the  whitest 
sound  fish  bones,  rasped  ;  mix,  boil  till  reduced  to  one  third; 
strain  three  times  through  a  coarse  cloth  ;  then  set  it  in  the 
sun  under  cover  to  dry. 

A  Liquid  Lake,  On  a  quantity  of  alum  and  cochineal 
pounded  and  boiled  together,  pour  drops  of  oil  of  tartar, 
until  it  becomes  a  fine  colour. 

A  Good  Azure,  Two  ounces  of  quicksilver;  sulphur  and 
sal  ammoniiic,  of  each  one  ounce:  grind  all  together,  and  put 
it  to  digest  in  a.  matrass  over  a  slow  heat;  increase  the  fire  a 
little;  and  when  you  see  a_n  azured  fume  arising,  take  the  ma- 
trass ott'.  When  cool,  as  beautiful  an  azure, is  produced  as 
ultramarine. 

To  dj/e  Bones  black.  Litharge  and  quicklime,  of  each  six 
ounces;  boil  in  common  water,  with  the  bone^;  stirring  them 
till  the  water  begins  to  boil;  then  take  it  from  the  fire,  and 
continue  stirring  the  mixture  till  the  water  is  cold,  when  the 
bones  will  become  dyed  black. 

To  Dj/e  Bones  green.  Pound  well  together  in  a  quart  of 
strong  vinegar,  th;  ee  ounces  of  verdigris,  as  much  of  brass 
filings  and  a  handful  of  rue.  When  done  put  all  in  a  glass 
vessel  along  with  t'ne  bones  you  wish  to  dye,  and  stop  it  v/elL 
Place  this  in  a  cold  cellar;  in  a  fortnight,  the  bones  will  be 
dyed  green. 

To  dye  Bones  and  Ivory  a  fine  red.  Boil  scarlet  flocks 
in  clear  witer,  assisted  with  pearlashes  to  draw  the  colour; 
then  clarify  it  with  alum,  and  strain  the  tincture  through  a 
piece  of  linen.  To  dye  bones  or  ivory  in  red,  you  must  first 
rub  them  with  aqua  fortis  and  then  immediately  with  the 
tincture. 

2\)  whiten  Bones,  Put  a  handful  of  bran  and  quick  lime 
together  into  a  new  pipkin,  with  sufficient  quantity  of  water, 
and  boil  it.  Boil  the  bones  in  this  until  freed  from  greasy 
particles. 

To  Dye  Wood  red.  Soak  chopped  Brazil  wood  in  oil  of 
tartar;  (or  boil  it  in  common  water  ;)  give  the  wood  a  coat 
of  yellow,  made    of  saffron,   diluted   in    water;  when    dry, 


TRADESMAN  .S    GUIDE.  133 

give  it  several  coats  of  the  first  preparation,  till  the  hue  be- 
comes pleasing.  When  dry  hurnish  it,  and  lay  on  a  coat  of 
drying  varnish  with  the  palm  of  your  Jiand.  If  a  very  deep 
red  Is  wanted,  boil  the  brazil  wood  in  water,  by  adding  a 
small  quantity  of  alum  or  quick  lime. 

To  Dyt  Wood  White  and  to  produce  a  fine  Polish.  Fi- 
ned English  white  chalk  ground  in  subtile  powder  on  marble; 
then  let  it  dry  ;  set  it  in  a  pipkin  on  the  fire,  with  a  weak  si- 
zed water,  haviiig  great  care  not  to  let  it  turn  brown, — when 
hor,  give  lirst  a  coat  of  size  to  your  wood  ;  let  it  dry  ;  then 
give  one  or  two  coats  of  the  white  over  it.  These  being  dry 
also,  polish  with  the  rushes,  and  burnish. 

To  Dye  in  Polished  Black,  Grind  lamp  black  on  marble 
with  gum  water  ;  then  put  it  into  a  pipkin,  and  with  a  brush 
give  the  wood  a  coat  of  this  ;   when  dry,  polish. 

To  imitate  Ebony.  Infuse  nut  galls  in  vinegar,  in  which 
you  have  soaked  rusty  nails  :  rub  the  wood  with  this,  let  it 
dry,  polish  and  burnish. 

To  imitate  Gol^l,  Silver^  or  Copper.  Rock  crystal  pul- 
verised \eYy  fmcj  put  into  water,  warm  it  in  a  new  pipkin, 
with  a  little  size  ;  then  give  a  coat  of  it  on  the  wood  with  a 
brush.  When  dry,  rub  a  piece  of  gold,  silver,  or  copper  on 
the  wood  thus  prepared,  and  it  will  assume  the  colour  of  the 
metnl  which  you  rub  it  with  ;   after  which  burnish. 

Ivory  Black.  Is  made  by  burning  ivory  till  it  is  qvite  black, 
which  is  usually  done  between  tv/o  crucibles,  well  luted  to- 
gether ;   used  either  as  an  oil  or  water  colour. 

Bone  lUack.  From  bones  burnt  in  the  same  manner,  as 
ivory  black;   used  by  painters,  4'c.      Burnt  cork  is  also  used. 

Of  the  Colouring  principle  of  Blood.  After  having  drain- 
ed the  clots  of  blood  through  a  hair  sieve,  tincture  it  in  an 
eartherr  vessel, with  four  parts  of  sulphuric  acid,  previously 
diluted  with  eight  parts  of  water,  and  heat  the  mixture  at  70" 
(cent. — 158  deg.  Fahrenheit.)  for  five  or  six  hours  :  fdter  the 
liquor  while  hot,  which  contains  the  colouring  principles  of 
the  i)lood,  albumen,  and  probably  some  fibrin  ;  wash  the  resi- 
duum with  water,  equal  in  quantity  to  that  c  f  the  acid  em- 
ployed ;  evaporate  the  solutions  to  one  half  their  bulk,  then 
pour  in  ammonia  sufficient  to  leave  only  a  slight  excess  of 
acid  ;  stir  it,  and  we  obtain  a  deposite  of  a  purple  red  colour, 
principally  consisting  of  tlie  colouring  matter,  and  coniaining 
neither  afbumen,  nor  fibrin  ;  wash  this  deposite  until  the  wa- 

12 


ter  contains  no  more  sulphuric  acid,  or  does  not  precipitate 
any  longer  the  nitrate  of  barytes  :  it  is  then  put  on  a  filiery 
and  dropped  on  blotting  paper,  from  whicli  it  is  taken  b}^ 
means  of  an  ivory  knife  and  dried  on  a  capsule. 

Frepared  Ox  GalL  The  fresh  gall  is  left  for  the  night  to 
settle  ;^  the  clear  fluid  poured  olT,  and  evaporated  in  a  water 
bath,  to  a  proper  consistence  ;  used  by  painters  in  water  col- 
ours, and  thus  enables  them  to  ibrm  an  even  siarface  of  colour;, 
and  also  instead  of  soap  to  wash  greasy  cloth. 

Cobalt^  is  sold  in  liie  shops  in  the  state  of  an  imperfect 
oxide,  called  zaffre.      The  pure  metal  is  reddish  grey. 

Mix  finely  pulverized  flint  and  borax,  and  put  in  a  small 
c[uantity  of  zaifre.  Melt  this  mixture  with  pretty  strong  heat 
in  a  crucible,  and  a  strong  blue  glass  will  be  produced.  Or, 
put  a  little  zaifre  in  borax  alone,  or  in  pearlash,  and  melt  the 
mixture. 

The  smalt  sold  in  shops  in  powder  is  merely  pulverized  glass  propa"^" 
red  as  above. 

Metallic  Waterinrr,  or  for  Blanc  Moire,  This  article  of 
Parisian  invention,  which  is  much  employed  to  cover  cabinet 
ornamental  work,  dressing  boxes,  telescopes,  &:c.  is  prepared' 
as  follows  :  dilute  sulphuric  acid,  with  from  7  to  9  parts  of 
w-ater  ;  then  dip  a  spoijge  or  rag  into  it,  and  wash  the  surface^ 
of  a  sheet  of  tin  ;  this  will  speedily  exhibit  the  appearance  of 
crystallization,  which  is  the  moire.  Tliis  effect  is  not  easily- 
produced  upon  every  sort  of  sheet  tin  ;  for  if  much  hardened 
by  hammering  and  rolling,  then  tbe  moire  cannot  be  efl'ected 
until  the  sheet  has  been  heated  so  as  to  produce  an  incipient 
fusion  on  the  surtace,  after  which  the  acid  will  act  upon  it, 
and  produce  an  incipient  fusion  on  the  surface,  after  which 
the  acid  will  act  upon  it,  and  produce  the  moire.  Almost  any- 
acid  will  do  as  well  as  the  sulphuric,  and  it  is  said  the  nitric 
acid,  dissolved  in  a  suflicient  quantity  of  water,  ar.swers  bet- 
ter than  any  other.  The  moire  can  be  much  improved  by 
employing  the  blow-pipe,  to  form  small  and  beautiful  specks 
on  the  surface  of  the  tin,  previous  to  the  application  of  the 
acid.  When  the  moire  has  been  formed,  the  plate  is  to  be 
varnis!)ed  and  polished,  the  varnish  being  tinted  with  any  gla- 
zing colour,  and  thus  the  red,  green,  yellow,  anxl  pearl  col- 
oured moires  are  manufactured. 

Zaffrc.  One  part  of  roasted  cobalt,  ground  with  two  or 
three  parts  of  very  pure  quartzose    sand  ;   is  either  in  a  cake 


Grades TvIan's  guide.  135 

^.i  Induced  to  powder  :  used  as  a  blue  c(dour  fur  painting 
glass. 

Purple  Frecipitate  ;  Cassin''s  Pinyh,  Solution  of  gold  in 
aquFi-regia,  1  oz.  distilled  water,  1  1-2  lb.  ;  hang  it  in  the  li- 
<|uid  s1'i])s  of  tin, 

2.  By  precipitating  t!ie  diluted  solution  of  gold,  by  dyer's 
spirit,  will  communicate  a  purple  colour  to  glass,  when  melted 
in  an  open  vessel.  In  a  close  vessel  the  glass  receives  no  co- 
lour, 

CHAPTER  XXIIi. 

Varnishes— to  give  a  Drying  Quality  to  Oils— Oils^ Japans 
Bronzing  I Aqaor-r-Invisihle  Inks. 

To  mahc  White  Copal  Varnish,  1.  White  oxide  of  lead, 
•<!eru3ed,  Spanish  white,  white  clay.  Such  of  these  substan- 
ces as  are  preferred  ought  to  be  carefully  dried.  Ceruse  and 
clays  obstinately  retain  a  great  deal  of  humidity,  which  would 
oppose  their  adhesion  to  drying  oil  or  varnish.  The  ce- 
ment then  crumbles  under  the  fingers,  and  does  not  assume  a 

2  On  16  ounces  melted  copal,  pour  4,  6,  or  8  ounces  of 
linseed  oil,  boiled  and  quite  free  from  grease  ;  when  we  I 
mixed  by  repeated  stirrings,  and  after  they  are  pretty  cool, 
pour  on  16  ounces  of  the  essence  of  Venice  turpentine.  I  ass 
the  varnish  through  a  cloth. 

Amber  Varnish,  is  made  in  the  same  way. 

Black,  Lampblack  made  of  burnt  vine  twigs  and  b  ack 
r.f  peach  stones.  The  lampblack  must  be  carefully  washed 
and  afterwards  dried.     Washing  carries  off  a  great  many  of 

Yellow.  Yellow  oxide  of  lead  of  Naples  and  Montpelier, 
both  reduced  to  impalpable  powder.  1  hese  yellows  arc  hurt 
by  Ihe  contact  of  iron  and  stool  ;  in  n.ix.ng  them  up,  there- 
fore, a  horn  .patula,  with  a  gloss  mortar  and  pestle  mast  be 
employed.  Gum  gutta;,  yellow  ochre,  or  Dutch  p.nk,  accor- 
ding to  the  nature  and  tone  of  the  colour  to^be  imitated. 

Blue  lndi<.o,  Prussian  blue,  blue  verd.ture  and  ultra- 
marine.'    All  these  substances  must  be  very  much  divided. 

Green  Vordi<rris,  crystalized  verdigris,  compound  green, 
^a  mixture  orbiue''and  yellow.)  The  first  two  require  a  mix- 
tuw'  of  «'!'te  "in  proper  proportions,  from  a  fourth  to  two- 


116  THE    ARTIST    AKD 

thirds,  according  to  the  tint  intended  to  bo  given.  The  white 
used  for  this  purpose  is  the  ceruse,  or  tlie  white  oxide  of  leadj 
or  Spanish  white,  which  is  loss  solid. 

Bed.  Red  sulphuretted  oxide  of  mercury,  (cinnabar  ver- 
niJion,)  red  oxide  of  loiid,  (minium)  different  red  ochres,  or 
Prussiati  reds,  fyiz, 

Pui pU:  (^oo'biiieai,  carmme,  and  carminated  lakes,  whb 
ceiMse,  and  hoiled  oil. 

Brick.      Dragon's  blood. 

Chamois  Colour.  Dragon's  blood,  with  a  paste  c^Tiposed 
of  flowers  of  zinc;  or,  what  is  still  better,  a  little  re(  vermil- 
ion. 

Violet.  Red  sulphuretted  oxide  of  mercury,  nir<ed  with 
lampblack,  washed  very  dry,  or  with  the  black  of  burrt  vine 
twigs  ;  and  to  render  it  more  mellow,  a  proper  mixt^/e  of  red, 
blue  and  white. 

Pearl  Grey.  White  and  black,  white  and  blue  ;  for  exam- 
ple, ceruse  and  lampblack  ;   ceruse  and  indigo. 

Flaxen  Grey.  Ceruse,  which  Forms  the  ground  of  the 
paste,  mixed  with  a  small  quantity  of  Cologne  earth,  as  much 
English  red.  or  carrainated  lake,  which  is  not  so  durable,  and 
a  particle  of  Prussiate  of  iron.     (Prussian  blue.) 

For  Violins,  ^c.  To  a  gallon  of  rectified  spirit  of  wine, 
add  six  ounces  of  gum  salidarac,  three  ounces  of  gum  mastic, 
and  half  a  pint  turpentine  varnish.  Put  the  whole  into  a  tin 
can,  which  keep  in  a  warm  place,  frequently  shaking  it,  for 
twelve  days,  until  it  is  dissolved.  Then  strain  and  keep  it 
for  use. 

To  make  a  colourless  Copal  Varnish.  In  selecting  such 
pieces  as  are  good,  as  all  copal  is  not  fit  for  this  purpose,  each 
piece  must  be  taken  separately  ; — let  fall  on  it,  a  drop  of  pure 
essential  oil  of  rosemary,  not  altered  by  keeping.  The  pieces 
which  soften  at  the  part  that  imbibes  the  oil  are  good  :  reduce 
them  to  powder,  which  sift  through  a  very  fine  hair  sieve,  and 
put  it  into  a  glass,  on  the  bottom  of  which  it  must  not  lie  more 
than  a  finger's  breadth  thick.  Pour  upon  it  essence  of  rose- 
mary to  a  similar  height;  stir  the  whole  for  a  few  minutes, 
when  the  copal  will  dissolve  into  a  viscous  fluid  ;  let  it  stand 
for  two  hours,  then  pour  on  to  it  gently,  two  or  three  drops 
of  very  pure  alcohol,  which  distribute  ovei  the  oily  mass  by 
inclining  the  bottle  in  different  directions  with  a  very  gentle 
motion  :  repeat  this  operation  by  little  and    little  till  the  in- 


tradesman's  guide.  iSf 

^;orporatlon  is  eiTected,  and  the  varnish  reduced  to  a  proper 
degrno  of  flaidit}:.  It  must  then  be  left  to  stand  a  few  days, 
and  when  verj  clear,  be  decanted  off. 

This  varnish  thus  made  without  heat,  may  be  applied  witli  oqual  suc- 
cess, to  pasteboard,  v/ood,  an  1  mefals,  atid  takes  a  belter  polish  than  any 
Qther.  It  may  be  used  on  painiin^^,  the  beauty  of  which  it  greatly 
heightens. 

Gold  coloured  Copal  Varnish.  One  ounce  copal  in  pow- 
der, two  ounces  essential  oil  of  lavender,  and  six  ounces  es* 
sence  of  turpentine.  Put  the  oil  of  lavender  into  a  matrass 
of  proper  size,  placed  on  a  sand  bath,  heated  by  a  lamp,  or 
over  a  moderate  coal  fire  ;  add  to  the  oil  while  very  warm, 
and  at  several  times,  the  copul  powder,  stir  the  mixture  with 
a  stick  of  whit-e  wood,  roujided  at  the  end  ;  whenr  the  copal 
has  entirely  disappeared,  add  at  three  different  times,  the  es- 
sence almost  in  a  stare  of  ebullition,  and  keep  continually 
stirring  the  mixture.  When  the  solution  is  completed,  the  re* 
suit  will  be  a  varnish  of  gold  colour,  exceedingly  durable 
and  brilliant,  but  less  drying  th-ni  the  preceding. 

2.  To  obtain  this  varnish  colourless,  it  will  be  proper  to 
rectify  the  essence  of  the  shops, which  is  often  highly  coloured, 
and  to  give  it  the  necessary  density  by  exposure  to  xha  sun  in 
bottles  closed  with  cork  stoppers,  leaving  an  interval  of  some 
inches  between  the  stopper  and  the  surface  of  the  liquid  ;  a 
few  months  are  thus  suOicient  to  communicate  to  it  the  re- 
quired qualities;  besides,  the  essence  of  the  shops  is  rarely 
possessed  of  that  state  of  consistence,  without  having  at  the 
same  time  a  strong  amber  colour. 

The  varnish  resulting  fiorri  the  solution  of  copnl  in  nil  of  turpentine 
broucrht  to  such  a  state  as  to  produce  a  niaxiiTjum  of  solution,  is  tx- 
ceedmgly  durable  and  brilliant.  It  resists  the  shock  of  hard  bodies 
much*  belter  than  the  enan-iel  of  tova,  which  oft^n  becomes  scratchf^d  and 
Whitened  by  the  impression  ot  repeated  friction  ;  it  is  appfied^with 
greater  success  to  philosophical  instruments;  and  the  paintings  with 
which  vessels  and  other  utensils  of  metal  are  decorated. 

2:  Four  ounces  copal,  and  one  ounce  clear  turpentine.  Put 
tiie  copal,  coarsely  pulvi^rized,  inio  a  varnish  pof,  and  give  it 
the  form  of  a  pyramid,  which  must  be  covered  with  turpen- 
tine. Shut  the  vessel  closely,  atid  placing  it  over  a  gentle 
fire,  increase  the  heat  gradually,  that  it  m^y  not  attack  tha 
copal  ;  as  soon  as  the  matter  is  well  liquified,  pour  it  upon  a 
plate  of  copper,  and  when  it  ^'as  resumed  its  consistence  re- 
duce it  to  posvdcr.     Put  half  an  ounce  of  this  powder  into  a 


1S8  ^HJS    ARTIST    AM? 

matrass  with  four  ounces  of  the  essence  of  turpentine,  an3 
stir  the  mixture  till  the  solid  matter  is  entirely  dissolved. 

Camphorated  Copal  Varnish^  is  designed  for  articles 
which  require  durability,  pliableness,  and  transparency.  Two 
ounces  pulverized  copal,  six  ounces  essential  oil  of  lavender, 
one-eighth  of  an  ounce  camphor,  and  essence  of  turpentine, 
a  sufficient  quantity,  according  to  the  consistence  required  to 
be  given  to  the  varnish.  Put  into  a  phial  of  thin  glass,  or  in- 
to a  small  matrass,  the  oil  of  lavender  and  the  camphor,  and 
place  the  mixture  on  a  moderately  open  fire,  to  bring  tnem  to 
a  slight  state  of  ebullition  ;  then  add  the  copal  powder  in 
small  quantities,  which  must  be  renewed  as  they  disappear  in 
the  liquid.  Favour  the  solution  by  continually  stirring  it  with 
a  stick  of  white  wood  ;  and  when  the  copal  is  incorporated 
with  the  oil,  add  the  turpentine  boiling  ;  but  care  must  be  ta- 
ken to  pour  in,  at  first,  only  a  small  portion. 

This  varnish  is  little  coloured,  and  by  rest  it  acquires  a  transparency 
which,  united  to  the  solidity  observed  in  almost  every  kind  of  copal  var- 
nish, renders  it  fit  to  be  applied  with  great  success  in  mnny  cases,  and 
particularly  in  the  invention  substituting  varnished  metallic  gauze,  used 
for  the  cabin  windows  of  ships,  as  presenting  more  resistance  to  the 
concussion  of  air,  during  the  firing  of  guns,  in  the  room  of  Muscovy 
tale,  a  kmd  of  mica,  in  large  laminae. 

Fat  Amber  or  Copal  Varnish.  Four  ounces  of  amber  or 
copal  of  one  fusion,  fourteen  ounces  essence  of  turpentine, 
and  ten  ounces  of  drying  linseed  oil.  Put  the  whole  into  a 
pretty  large  matrass,  and  expose  to  the  heat  of  balneum  mariae, 
or  move  it  over  the  surface  of  an  uncovered  chafiing  dishj  but 
without  flame,  and  at  the  distance  from  it  to  two  or  three  in- 
ches. When  the  solution  is  completed;  add  still  a  little  copal 
or  amber  to  saturate  the  liquid:  then  pour  the  whole  on  a  filter 
prepared  with  cotton;  and  leave  it  to  charify  by  rest.  If  the 
varnish  is  too  thick,  add  a  little  warm  essence  to  prevent  the 
separation  of  any  of  the  amber. 

This  varnish  is  coloured,  but  far  less  so  than  those  com- 
posed by  the  usual  methods.  When  spread  over  white  wood, 
without  any  preparation,  it  forms  a  solid  glazing,  and  com- 
municates a  slight  tint  to  the  wood. 

If  it  be  required  to  change  this  varnish  with  more  copal,  or 
prepared  amber,  the  liquid  must  be  composed  of  two  parts 
of  essence  for  one  of  oil. 

Compound  Elastic  Varnish,  Thirt^^-two  ounces  of  pure 
alcohol,  six  ounces  of  purified  mastic,  three  ounces  of  gum 


tradesman's  guide.  139 

satidarac,    ounces   of  very  clear  Venice  turpentine,  and  four 
ounces  of  glass,  coarsely  pounded. 

Reduce  the  mastic  and  sandarac  of  fine  powder;  mix  with 
white  glas-s,  from  which  the  finest  parts  have  been  separated 
by  a  hair  sieve;  put  all  the  ingredients,  with  alcohol,  into  a 
short  necked  matrass,  adapted  to  a  stick  of  white  wood  rounded 
at  tlie  end,  the  length  proportioned  to  the  height  of  the  iria- 
trass,  that  it  may  be  put  in  motion.  Expose  the  matrass  in 
a  vessel  filled  with  water,  made  at  firct  a  little  warm,  and 
which  must  afterwards  be  maintained  in  a  state  of  ebullition 
for  one  or  two  hours.  The  matrass  may  be  nriade  fast  to  a 
Ting  of  sttaw. 

When  the  solution  is  sufficiently  extended,  add  the  turpen- 
tine, which  must  be  kept  separately  in  a  phial,  or  pot,  and 
which  must  be  molted,  by  immersing  it  in  a  balnuem  mariae 
for  a  moment;  the  matrass  must  be  still  left  in  the  water  for 
half  an  hour,  when  it  may  be  taken  off,  and  the  varnish  stir- 
i-od  till  somewhat  cool.  Next  day  draw  off  and  filtei  through 
cotton.  By  these  means  it  will  become  exceedingly  limpid. 
The  addition  of  glass  may  appear  extraordinary;  but  it  divides 
the  parts  of  the  mixture,  which  has  been  made  with  the  dry 
ingredients,  and  the  same  quality  is  retained  wlien  placed  over 
the  fire.  It  obviates  with  success  two  inconveniences  very 
troublesome  to  tliose  who  compose  varnishes.  First,  by 
dividing  the  matters,  it  facilitate-s  the  action  of  the  alcohol, 
and  in  the  second,  its  weight,  which  surpasses  that  of  resins; 
prevents  these  resins  from  adhering  to  the  bottom  of  the  ma- 
trass, and  also  the  coloration  acquired  by  the  varnish,  where 
a  sand  bath  is  employed,  as  is  commonly  the  case.  The  ap- 
plication of  this  varnish  is  suited  to  articles  belonging  to  the 
toilette',  such  as  dressing  boxes,  cut  paper  work,  &c.  The 
following  possesses  the  same  brilliancy  and  lustre,  but  have 
more  solidity,  and  are  very  drying. 

Camphorated  Mastic  Varnish  for  Paintings.  Twelve 
ounces  mastic,  cleaned  and  washed,  one  and  a  half  ounces 
pure  turpentine,  and  a  half  ounce  of  camphor,  five  ounces 
white  glass,  pounded,  and  thirty-six  ounces  ethereous  essence 
of  turpentine.  Make  it  according  to  the  method  indicated 
for  that  of  the  first  genus.  The  camphor  is  employed  in 
pieces;  the  turpentine  added,  when  the  solution  of  resin  is 
completed.  If  the  varnish  is  to  be  applied  to  old  paintings, 
or  those  which  have  been   already  varnished,  the  turpentine 


14b  't'i'it.  AiiTiJit  kisb 

may  be  suppressed,  as  it  is  recommended  lierc,  only  in  case^ 
of  a  first  application  to  paintings,  and  just  freed  from"  white 
of  egg  varnish.  The  ethereoas  essence  recommended,  is  that 
distilled  slowly,  without  any  intermediate  substance,  according 
to  the  second  process  ahead}-  given  for  its  rectification. 

The  question  by  able  masters  has  never  yet  been  determined  respect- 
ing the  kind  of  varnish  proper  to  be  employed  for  paintings.  Some 
artists  have  paid  particular  attention  to  this  object,  an«S  make  a  mystery 
of  the  means  they  employ.  The  real  end  may  be  obtained  by  giving 
the  varnisli,  d'^slined  for  painting,  pliability  and  softness,  without  being 
too  solicitous  iu  regard  to  what  may  add  to  its  consistence  or  durability. 
The  latter  quality  is  particularly  requisite  in  those  which  are  to  be 
applied  to  articles  much  exposed  to  friction,  as  boxes,  furniture,  ifec. 

To  make  Painter'' s  Cream.  Painters  who  have  long  in- 
tervals between  their  periods  of  labour,  are  accustomed  to 
cover  the  parts  they  have  painted  with  a  preparation  which 
preserves  the  freshness  of  the  colours,  and  which  they  can 
remove  when  they  resume  their  work.  The  preparation  is  as 
follows: 

Three  ounces  very  clean  nut  oil,  half  on  ounce  mastic  in 
tears,  pulverized,  and  one-third  of  an  ounce  sril  saturni,  in 
powder.  Dissolve  the  mastic  oil  over  a  gentle  fire,  and  pour 
the  mixture  into  a  marble  mortar,  over  the  pounded  salt  of 
lead;  stir  it  with  a  wooden  pestle,  arid  add  water  in  small 
quantities,  till  the  matter  assumes  the  appearance  and  consis- 
tence of  cream,  and  refuses  to  admit  more  water. 

Sandarac  Varnish.  Eight  ounces  gum  sandarac,  two  ounces 
pounded  mastic,  four  ounces  clear  turpentine,  four  ounces 
pounded  glass,  and  tiiirty-iv.o  ounces  alcohol;  mix  and  dis- 
solve as  before. 

Compound  Sandarac  Varnish.  Three  ounces  pounded 
copal,  of  an  amber  colour;  once  liquified,  six  ounces  gum 
Scindarac,  three  ounces  mastic,  cleaned,  two  and  a  half  ounces 
clear  turpentine,  four  ounces  pounded  glass,  and  thirty-twd 
oUncGS  pure  alcohol.  Mix  these  ingredients,  pursuing  the 
same  method  as  above. 

This  varnish  is  destined  for  articles  subject  to  friction,  such  as  furni- 
ture, chairs,  fan  sticks,  mouldings,  <^c.  and  even  metals,  to  which  it  may 
be  applied  with  success.     The  sandarac  gives  it  groat  durability. 

CtLiiiphoraied  Sandarac  Varnish  for  Cut  Paper  Work, 
Dressing  Boxes,  ^c.  1.  Six  ounces  sandarac,  four  ounces 
gum  elemi,  one  ounce  gum  anima,  half  an  ounce  camphor, 
four   ounces  pounded   glass   and   thirty-two   ounces  alcohoL 


tradesman's  guibe.  141 

Make  the  varnish  according  to  directions  alroady  given.  The 
soft  resins  must  be  pounded  with  the  dry  bodies;  camphor  to 
he  added  in  small  j)ieces. 

2.  Six  ounces  gallipot  or  white  incense,  two  ounces  gum  ani- 
ma,  two  ounces  pounded  glass,  and  thirty-two  ounces  alcohol. 
Make  the  varnish  with  the  precautions  indicated  for  the  com- 
pound mastic  varnish.  The  two  last  varnishes  are  to  be  used 
for  ceilings  and  w^ainscoats,  coloured  or  otherwise  :  they  ma}' 
be  employed  as  a  covering  to  parts  painted  with  strong  col- 
ours. 

Spirituous  Sandarac  Varnish  for  Wainscoiting,  Small  Ar- 
tides  of  Furniture^  Balustrades^  and  Inside  Railing,  Six 
ounces  of  gum  sandarac,  two  ounces  of  shell-lac,  four  ounces 
of  colophonium  or  resin,  four  ounces  white  pounded  glass, 
four  ounces  of  clear  turpentine  and  thirty-two  ounces  of  pure 
alcohol.  Dissolve  the  varnish  as  before  directed  for  com- 
pound mastic  varnisli.  This  varnish  is  sufficiently  durable  to 
be  applied  to  articles  destined  to  daily  and  continual  use. — 
Those  composed  with  c(  pal,  in  these  cases  ought  to  be  pre- 
ferred. 

2.  There  is  another  composition,  which  without  forming 
part  of  the  compound  varnishes  is  employed  with  success  for 
giving  a  polish  and  lustre  to  furniture  made  of  wood  :  wax 
forms  the  basis  of  it.  Many  cabinet  makers  are  contented  to 
wax  common  furniture.  This  covering  by  means  of  repeated 
friction,,  soon  acquires  a  polish  and  transparency  which  re- 
sembles those  of  varnish.  Waxing  seems  to  possess  quali- 
ties peculiar  to  itself:  but  like  varnish  is  attended  with  in- 
conveniences as  well  as  advantages.  Varnish  supplies  better 
the  part  of  glazing ;  it  gives  a  lustre  to  the  wood  which  it 
covers,  and  heightens  the  colours  of  that  destined  in  particu- 
lar, for  delicate  articles.  These  real  and  valuable  advantages 
are  counterbalanced  by  its  want  of  consistence  ;  it  yields  too 
easily  on  the  shrinking  or  sw:)lling  of  the  wood,  and  rises  in 
scales  or  slits,  on  being  exposed  to  the  slightest  shock.  These 
accidents  can  be  repaired  only  by  a  new  strata  of  varnish. 
Waxing  stands  shocks,  but  has  not  the  property  of  giving 
lustre  to  the  bodies  on  which  it  is  applied,  in  the  same  de- 
gree as  varnish,  and  of  heightening  their  tints*.  The  lustre  it 
communicates  is  dull,  but  the  inconvenience  is  compensated, 
by  the  f^icility  which  any  accident  that  may  have  altered  its 
polish  can  be  repaired,  by  rubbing  it  with  a  piece  of  fine  cork. 


142  IHE    AJR.T1ST  ANO 

The  application  of  wax  under  some  circumstances,  tliereiijre 
ought  to  be  preferred  to  that  of  varnish.  This  seems  to  ht 
the  case  in  particular  with  tables,  exposed  to  daily  use,  and 
all  articles  subject  to  constant  employment.  The  stratum  of 
wax  should  be  made  as  thin  as.  possible,  that  the  veins  of  the 
wood  may  be  more  apparent  ;  therefore  the  following  process 
may  be  acceptable  to  the  reader.  Melt  over  a  moderate  fire, 
in  a  very  clean  vessel,  tw^o  ounces  of  white  or  yellow  wax  ; 
when  liquified,  add  four  ounces  good  essence  of  turpentine  ; 
stir  the  whole,  until  entirely  cool,  and  a  kind  of  pomade  is 
produced,  which  must  be  rubbed  over  furniture  according  to 
the  usual  method.  The  essence  of  turpentine  is  soon  dissi- 
pated, but  the  wax  by  which  its  mixture  is  reduced  to  a  state 
of  very  great  division,  may  be  extended  with  more  ease,  and 
in  a  more  uniform  manner.  The  essence  soon  penetrates  the 
pores  of  the  wood,  calls  forth  the  colour  of  it,  causes  the  wax 
to  adhere  better,  and  the  lustre  which  then  results  is  equal  to 
that  of  varnish. 

Coloured  Varnish  for  Violin,  and  other  stringed  Instrn- 
ments,  also  for  Plumb  Tree,  Mahogani/  and  Rose  Wood. — 
Four  ounces  of  gum  sandarac,  two  ounces  of  seed-lac,  two 
ounces  of  mastic,  one  ounce  of  Benjamin  in  tears,  four  oun- 
ces of  pounded  glass,  two  ounces  of  Venice  turpentine,  and 
thirty-two 'ounces  of  pure  alcohol. 

The   gum  sandarac  and  seed  lac  render  this  varnish  durable  ;  it  may 
be  coloured  with  a  Utile  dragon's  blood  or  saffron. 

Fat  Varnish  of  a  Gold  Colour.  Eight  ounces  of  amber, 
two  ounces  of  gum  lac,  eight  ounces  of  drying  linseed  oil, 
and  sixteen  ounces  essence  of  turpentine.  Dissolve  separ- 
ately the  gum  lac,  and  then  add  the  amber,  prepared  and  pul- 
verized with  the  linseed  oil  and  essence  very  warm.  When 
the  mixture  has  lost  part  of  its  heat,  mix  in  relative  propor- 
tions, tinctures  of  arnotto,  terra  merita,  gum  guttse  and  dra- 
gon's blood.  This  varnish  when  applied  to  white  metals, 
gives  them  a  gold  colour. 

Fat  Turpentine,  or  Gold  Varnish,  being  a  mordant  to 
gold  and  dark  colours.  Sixteen  ounces  boiled  linseed  oil, 
eight  ounces  Venice  turpentine,  and  five  ounces  Naples  yel- 
low. Heat  the  oil  with  the  turpentine,  and  mix  the  Naples 
yellow  pulverized.  Naples  yellow  is  an  oxide  of  lead ;  it  is 
substituted  here  for  resins  on  account  of  its  drying  qualities. 


TnADllSMAN  S    GUIDE.  14S 

&ncl  in  particular,  of  its  color,  which  resembles  thatjuf  gold  j 
great  use  is  made  of  the  varnish  in  applying  gold  leaf. 

The  yellow  may  be  omitted  when  this  species  of  varnish  is  to  be  solid 
and  used  on  coloured  coverings  ;  in  this  ease  an  ounce  of  litharge  to 
each  [)ound  cf  composition  may  be  substituted,  without  this  mixture 
doing  an  injury  to  the  colour  of  wJiich  it  is  to  constitute  the  ground. 

Turner^s  Varnish  for  Boxwood.  Five  ounces  seed-lac, 
two  ounces  gum  sandarac,  one  ounce  and  a  half  gum  elemi, 
two  ounces  Venice  turpentine,  live  ounces  pounded  glass,  and 
twenly-four  ounces  pure  alcohol.  The  artists  of  St.  Claude 
do  not  all  employ  this  formula,  which  requried  to  be  corrected 
on  account  of  its  too  great  dryness,  which  is  here  lessened 
by  the  turpentine  and  elemi. 

This  composition  is  secured  from  cracking,  which  disfigures  these 
boxes  after  having  been  used  for  eome  months. 

2.  Other  turners  use  gum  lac  united  to  a  little  elemi  and 
turpentine  digested  some  months  in  pure  alcohol  exposed  to 
the  sun.  Jn  pursuing  this  method,  substitute  for  the  sandarac, 
the  same  quantity  of  gum  lac  reduced  to  powder,  and  not  to 
add  the  turpentine  to  the  alcohol  (which  ought  to  be  very 
pure)  till  towards  the  end  of  the  fusion.  Solar  iufusion  re- 
quires care  and  attention;  vessels  of  sufficient  size  to  allow 
the  spirituous  vapours  to  circulate  freely,  ought  to  be  em- 
ployed, because  it  is^  necessary  that  the  vessel  should  be 
closely  shut.  Without  this  precaution  the  spirits -would  be- 
come weakened,  and  abandon  the  resin  which  they  laid  hold 
of  during  the  first  days  of  exposure.  This  perfect  obiiura- 
tion  will  not  admit  of  the  vessels  being  too  full.  In  general, 
the  varnishes  applied  to  articles  which  may  be  put  in  the 
lathe  acquire  a  great  deal  of  brilliancy  by  polishing  ;  a  piece 
of  woollen  clotli  is  suificient  for  the  operation.  If  turpentine 
predominates  too  much  in  these  compositions,  the  polish  does 
not  retain  its  lustre,  because  the  heat  of  the  hands  is  capable 
of  softening  the  surface  of  the  varnish,  and  in  this  state  it 
readily  tarnishes. 

To  varnish  Dressing  Boxes.  The  most  of  spirit  of  wine 
varnishes  aro  destined  for  covering  preliminary  preparations, 
which  have  a  certain  degree  of  lustre.  They  consist  of 
cement  coloured  or  otherwise,  charged  with  landscapes  and 
figures  cut  into  paper,  which  produces  an  effect  under  the 
transparent  varnish;   most  of  the    dressing  boxes,  and   other 


144  THE    ARTIST    AND 

small  articles  of  the  same  kind,  are  covered  with  this  partic" 
ular  coispositon,  which,  in  general,  consists  of  three  or  four 
coatings  of  Spanish  white,  poured  in  water  and  mixed  with 
parchment  glue.  The  first  coating  is  smoothed  with  pumice 
stone,  and  then  polished  with  a  piece  of  new  linen  and  water. 
The  coating  in  this  state  is  fit  to  receive  the  destined  colour, 
after  it  has  been  ground  with  water.  The  cut  figures  with 
which  it  is' to  be  embellished,  are  then  applied,  and  a  coating 
of  gum,  or  fish  glue  is  spread  over  them,  to  prevent  the  var- 
nish from  penetrating  to  the  preparation,  and  from  spoiling 
the  figures.  The  operation  is  finished  by  applying  three  or 
four  coatings^  of  varnish,  which,  when  dry  are  polished  with 
tripoli  and  water  by  means  of  a  piece  of  cloth.  A  lustre  is 
then  given  to  the  surface,  with  starcii  and  a  bit  of  doe  skin,  or 
very  soft  cloth. 

Gallipot  Varnish.  Twelve  ounces  gallipot  or  white  in- 
cense; five  ounces  glass  pounde.J,  two  ounces  Venice  turpen- 
tine, and  thirty-two  ounces  essence  of  turpentine.  Make 
the  varnish  afler  the  white  incense  has  been  pounded  with 
glass.  Some  recommend  mastic  or  sandeirac  in  the  room  of 
gallipot;  but  it  is  neither  more  beautiful  nor  durable;  when 
the  colour  is  ground  with  the  preceding  varnish  and  mixed  up 
with  the  latter,  which,  if  too  thick,  is  thinned  with  a  little 
essence,  and  which  if  applied  immediately,  without  any  siz« 
ing  to  boxes  and  other  articles,  the  coatings  acquire  sufficient 
strength  to  resist  the  blows  of  a  mallet.  But  if  the  varnish 
be  applied  to  a  sized  colour,  it  must  be  covered  with  a  var- 
nish of  the  first  or  second  genus. 

Mastic  Gallipot  Varnish,  for  Grinding  Colours,  Four 
ounces  new  gallipot  or  white  incense,  two  ounc  es  mastic,  six 
ounces  Venice  turpentine,  four  ounces  pounded  glass,  and 
thirty-two  ounces  essence  turpentine.  With  the  precautions 
already  indicated,  add  prepared  nut  oil,  or  linseed  oil,  two 
ounces.  The  matteis  ground  with  this  varnish  dry  more 
slowly  ;  they  are  then  mixed  up  with  the  following  varnish,  if 
it  be  for  common  painting,  or  with  particular  varnishes  des- 
tined for  colours  and  for  grounds. 

Mordant  Varnish  for  Gilding.  One  ounce  mastic,  one 
ounce  gum  sandarac,  half  an  ounce  gum  gutt.se,  quarter  of  an 
ounce  turpentine,  and  six  ounces  essence  turpentine.  Some 
artists  who  make  use  of  mordants,  substitute  for  the  turpen- 
tine, an  ounce  of  the  essence  of  lavender,  which  renders  this 


imposition  less  drying.  In  general  the  composition  of 
Vjiordants  admits  of  niod'fications,  according  to  the  work 
lor  which  they  are  destined.  Ti)e  application  of  tliem^ 
however,  is  chiefl3'^'Confit)ed  to  gohi  When  it  is  i'equired  to 
fill  up  ade-sigij  with  gohi  leaf  on  any  ground  whatever,  the 
■composition  which  is  to  scr^e  as  tlie  tneims  of  union  between 
the  m0tal  and  the  ground;  ouglit  neitlrer  to  be  too  thick  or 
fluid  ;  because  both  these  circumstances  Ate  equally  injurious 
to  delfcacy  in  the  strokes  ;  it  will  be  reqosite,  also.,  that  the 
composition  should  not  dry  till  the  artist  has  completed  his 
clesign. 

Other  Mordants.  1.  Some  prepare  their  mordants  wilh 
Jew's  pitch  and  drying  oil  dilated  with  essence  of  turpentine. 
They  employ  it  for gHding  pale  gold,  or  for  bronzing.  Oth* 
ers.  imitate  the  Chinese,  and  mix  with  their  mordants  colours 
proper  for  assisting  the  tone  which  tliey  are  desirous  of  giv- 
ing to  the  gold,  such  as  yellow,  red,  <fcc.  Others  employ  fat 
Taroish,  to  which  they  add  a  little  red  oxide  of  lead.  Others 
use  thick  glue,  in  which  they  dissolve  a  little  honey.  This 
fe-what  they  call  baitnzc.  When  the3^  wish  to  heighten  the 
colour  of  the  gold,  this  glue  is  employed,  to  which  the  gold 
l^af  adheres  extremely  well. 

2.  The  qualities  of  the  following  are  fit  for  any  kind  of 
application,  and  particularly  to  n>etals.  Expose  boiled  oil 
to  a  strMjg  heat  ^n  a  pan  ;  when  a  black  Smoke  is  disengacred 
fi-ora  it,  set  it  on  fire,  and  extinguish  it  in  a  foAV  minutes  arrer, 
by  putting  on  the  ccfver  of  the  pan.  Then  pour  the  matter 
slill  w^rm,^  into  a  heated  bottle,  and  add  to  it  a  little  essence 
of  turpentine. 

•  This  mordant  dries  vory  spoedily  ;  it  has  l)ody,  and  adheres  to.  and 
strongly  retains^  gold  leaf,  when  applied  to  wood,  mt.-tal,  and  other  sub^ 
stances. 

Varnish  for  Pails  and  other  coarse  Wood  work.  Take 
any  quantity  of  tar,  ^ind  grind  it  with  as  much  Spanish  brown 
as  it  will  bear,  without  rendering  it  too  thick  \q  \u  used  as  a 
paint  or  varnish,  and  then  spread  it  on  the  pails,  or  other 
wood,soo  .  as  coTivenient,  fnr  v  quickly  hardens  by-keeDincr. 
This  mixture  should  be  laid  on  by  >  large  brush,  the  \vo'rk  tr> 
be  kept  free  fri)m  diisr^'nn  1  insfcis  ;,s  possible,  till  the  varnish 
is  perfectly  dry.  On  woodJt  w-ll  h  ».ve  -x  very  •^rood  gloss,  is 
an  excellent  preservative  against  moijiture,  or:  which  account, 

13 


14G  THE    ARTIST    ANB 

as  well  as  its  being  cheaper,  it  is  far  preferable  to  painting*, 
not  only  for  pails,  but  for  weather-boarding  and  all  other 
kinds  of  wood  work  for  gross  purposes. 

When  the  glossy  brown  colour  is  not  liked,  the  work  may  be  made 
of  a  greyish  brown,  by  mixing  a  small  proportion  of  white  lead,  or 
whiting  and  ivory  black,  with  the  Spanish  brown. 

A  Black  Varnish  for* old  Straw  or  Chip  Hats.  Half  aril 
ounce  of  the  best  black  sealing  wax,  two  ounces  of  rectified 
spirits  of  wine.  Powder  the  wax,  put  it  with  the  spirits  into 
a  four  ounce  phial;  digest  them  in  a  sand  heat,  or  near  the 
fire  till  the  wax  is  dissolved ;  lay  it  on  warm  with  a  fine  soft 
hair  brush,  before  a  fire  or  in  the  sun.  It  produces  a  stiff- 
ness to  old  straw  hats,  and  gives  a  beautiful  gloss,  and  resists 
wet.  •  * 

To  make  Varnish  for  Colored  Drawings.  One  ounce 
Canada  balsam,  two  ounces  spirits  of  turpentine:  mix  them 
together.  Before  th's  compositon  is  applied,  the  drawing  or 
print  should  be  sized  w\i\\  a  solution  of  isinglass  in  water  ; 
and  when  dry,  apply  the  varnish  with  a  camel's  hair  brush. 

To  make  a  Varnish  for  Wood  lohich  resists  the  action  of 
boiling  water.  One  and  a  half  pounds  of  linseed  oil,  boil 
it  in  a  red  copper  vessel,  not  tinned.  Suspend  over  it  in  a 
small  linen  bag,  five  ounces  litharge,  and  three  ounces  pul- 
verized minium,  taking  care  that  the  bag  does  not  touch  the 
bottom  of  th<:!  vessel ;  continue  the  ebullition  till  the  oil  ac- 
quires a  dark  borwn  colour,  then  take  away  the  bag  and  sub- 
stitute another  in  its  place,  containing  a  clove  or  garlic  ;  con- 
tinue the  ebidliiion,  and  renew  the  clove  or  garlic  sev.en  or 
eight  times,  or  rather  put  them  all  in  at  once.  Then  throw 
into  the  vessel  a  pound  of  yellow  amber,  when  it  is  melted  in 
the  following  manner  ;  add  to  the  pound  of  amber,  well  pul- 
verized, two  ounces  linseed  oil ;  place  the  whole  on  a  strong 
fire.  When  the  fusion  is  complete,  pour  it  boiling  into  the 
prepared  linseed  oil,  and  continue  to  leave  it  boiling  for  two 
or  three  minutes,  stirring  the  whole  up  well.  It  is  then  left 
to  settle  ;  the  composition  is  decanted  and  preserved,  when 
it  becomes  cold,  in  well  corked  bottles.  After  polishing 
the  wood  on  which  this  varnish  is  to  be  applied,  give  the 
wot>d  the  colour  required.  When  the  colour  is  perfectly  dry, 
apply  the  varnish  with  a  fine  sponge;  repeat  three  or  four 
'  times,  taking  care  the  preceding  coat  is  well  dried. 


tradesman's  guide.  147 

To  varnish  Drawing  and  Card  Work,  Boil  some  clean 
parebraent  cuttings  in  water,  in  a  glazed  pipkin,  till  they  pro- 
duce a  very  clear  size.  Strain  it  and  keep  it  for  use.  Give 
the  work  two  coats  of  the  size,  passing  the  brush  quicklj'  over 
the  work,  not  to  disturb  the  colours. 

A  Composition  for  making  Coloured  Drawings  and  Prints 
Tcsemhh  Paintings  in  Oil,  One  ounce  Canada  balsam,  two 
ounces  spirits  of  turpeutine  ;  mix  together.  Before  the  com- 
position is  applied,  the  drawing  or  print  should  be  sized  with 
a  solution  of  isinglass  in  water.  When  dry,  apply  the  varnish 
with  a  camel's  hair  brush. 

To  varnish  Harps  and  Dulcimers,  Prepare  the  work 
with  size  and  red  ochre,  then  take  ochre,  burnt  umber,  and 
red  lead,  well  ground,  and  mix  up  a  dark  brown  colour  in  tur- 
pentine varnish,  adding  so  much  oil  of  turpentine  that  the 
brush  may  just  be  able  to  pass  over  the  work  fair  and  even. 
While  yet  wet,  take  a  muslin  sieve,  and  sift  as  much  Dutch 
metal,  previously  powdered  upon  it,  as  is  requisite  to  produce 
the  effect,  after  which  varnish,  and  polish  it. 

To  varnish  Glass.  Pulverize  a  quantity  of  gum  adragant; 
let  it  dissolve  for  twenty-four  hours  in  the  white  of  eggs  beat 
up  ;  then  rub  it  gently  on  the  glass  with  a  brush. 

To  varnish  Balloons,  Dissolve  elastic  gum,  cut  small,  in 
five  times  its  weight  of  rectified  essential  oil  of  turpentine,  by 
keeping  them  together;  then  boil  one  ounce  of  this  solution 
in  eight  ounces  drying  linseed  oil  for  a  iew  minutes  ;  strain 
the  solution  and  use  it  warm.  The  elastic  resin,  knov/n  by 
the-  name  of  India  rubber  has  been  much  extolled  for  a  var- 
nish. The  foregoing  method  as  practised  by  M.  Blanchard 
may  not  prove  unacceptable. 

To  varnish  rarificd  Air  Balloons,  M.  Cavall®,  recora- 
rnends  first  to  soak  the  cloth  in  a  solution  of  sal  ammonia  and 
common  size,  using  one  pound  of  each  to  every  pound  of  wa- 
ter :  and  when  quite  dr^^,  to  paint  over  the  inside  with  some 
earthy  colour,  and  strong  size  or  glue,  when  this'  paint  has 
dried  thoroughly,  it  will  then  be  proper  to  cover  it  with  oily 
varnish,  which  might  dry  before  it  could  penetrate  quite 
through  the  cloth.  Simple  drying  linseed  oil  will  answer  the 
purpose  as  well  as  any,  provided  it  be  not  ver}^  fluid. 

To  paint  Sail  Cloth,  S^^c,  so  as  to  he  pliant,  durable,  and 
impervious  to  water.  Grind  ninety-six  pounds  English  ochre, 
with  boiled  oil,  add  sixteen  pounds  black  paint,  which  mix- 


1-4 S  THE    ARTIST    ^'.il- 

tare  forms  an  indiftereat  black.  A  pound  of  yellow  f^ap, 
dissolved  in  six  pints  of  water  over  the  firo,  is  mixed  while, 
hot  \vith  the  paint.  This  composition  is  then  laid  upon  the 
canvass,  (vvixhout  being  v/etted,  as  in  the  usual  way,)  as  stiff 
as  can  be  conveniently  done  with  the  brush,  so  as  to  form  a 
smooth  surface  ;  the  next  day,  or  still  better,  on  the  second 
dtiy,  a  second  eoat  of  ocbre  and  black,  (without  any,  or  but 
a  very  snrall  portion  of  soap,)  is  laid  on  and  allowing  this 
coat  an  intermediate  day  for  drying  the  canvass  is  then  finished, 
with  black  paint  as  usual.  Three  d>rys  is  allowed  for  it  to 
dry  and  harden  ;  it  will  not  stick  together  when  taken  down, 
uml  folded  in  cloth,  containing  sixty  or  seventy  yards  each  ; 
and  canvass  finished  entirely  with  the  composition,  leaving  it 
to  dry  one  day  between  each  coat,  will  not  stick  together  if 
laid  in  quantities.  It  has  been  ascertained  from  actual  trials, 
ihat  the  solution  of  yellow  soap  is  a  preservative  to  red,  yel- 
low and  black  paints,  when  ground  in  oil  and  put  into  casks^ 
as  they  acquire  no  improper  baroness  and  dry  in  a  remarka-- 
ble  manner  when  laid  on  with  a  brush,  without  the  use  of  tha 
usual  drying  articles. 

it  is  surprising  that  the  fidnptlon  of  soap,  which  is  so  well  known  to 
be  miscible  with  oily  substances,  or.  at  least,  the  alkali  of  which  it  is:*' 
composed,  has  not  been  brought  inta  use,  in  the  couJposition  of  all 
colours- 

Colouring  Compositions  for  rendering  Limn  and  ClotJk 
tmptnetrablt  to  water.  Begin  by  v/ashing  the  stuff  with  hot 
water,  then  dry  and  rub  it  hetween  the  hands  until  it  becomes, 
perfectly  supple  ;  afterv/irds  spread  it  out,  by  drawing  it  into- 
a  framed  and  give  it  with  the  aid  of  a  brush,  a  first  eoat,  com- 
posed of  a  mixture  of  eight  quarts  of  boiling  linseed  oilj  cal- 
cined amber  and  acetate  of  lead  seven  and  a  half  grammes, 
to  which  add  ninety  grammes  o^f  lampblack.  Use  the  same 
ingredients  for  the  second  coat,  except  the  calx  cf  lead.  This 
coat  will  give  a  few  hours,  according  to  the  season,  after- 
wards take  a  dry  plasterer's  brush  and  rub  the  stuff  strongly 
with  it,  when  the  hair,  by  this  operation  will  become  extremely 
smooth.  The  third  and  last  coat  will  give  a  perfect  and  dura- 
ble jet  black.  Or  rather  take  twelv<squarts  boiling  linseed 
oil,  thirty  grammes  of  amber,  fifteen  gran;mes  of  acetate  of 
lead,  seven  and  a  half  sulphate  of  zinc,  fifteen  Prussian  blue, 
and  120  grammes  cf  lampblack.  These  coats  are  used  &*i 
<Ji!5cretion  as  is  done  with  paintbg.. 


tradesman's  guide,  149 

To  thicken  Linen  Cloth  for  Screens  and  Bed  Testers, 
Grind  whiting  with  zinc  ;  to  prevent  cracking,  add  a  little 
honey;  then  take  a  soft  brush  and  lay  it  upon  the  cloth  ;  re- 
peat this  two  or  three  times,  but  letting  it  dry  between  the 
layings  ;  and  for  the  last  laying  smooth  it  over  with  Spanish 
white,  ground  with  linseed  oil,  the  oil  being  first  heated,  and 
mixed  with  a  small. quantity  of  litharge,  the  better  to  endure 
the  weather,  and  to  be  more  lasting. 

Common  Wax  or  Varnished  Cloth.  Common  canvass  of 
an  open  and  coarse  texture,  is  stretched  on  frames,  placed 
under  sheds,  with  the  sides  open,  to  afford  a  free  passage  to 
the  external  air.  The  cloth  is  fastened  to  these  irames,  by 
hooks,  which  catch  the  edge*  of  the  cloth,  and  by  strong  pack- 
threads passing  through  holes  at  the  other  extremity  of  the 
hooks,  which  are  tied  round  moveable  pegs  at  the  lower  edgo 
of  the  frame.  The  mechanism  by  which  the  strings  of  a 
violin  are  stretched  or  unstretched  will  give  an  idea  of  the 
arrangement  of  the  pegs  emploved  for  extending  the  cloth  in 
this  apparatus.  By  this  means  the  cloth  can  be  easily  stretch- 
ed or  relaxed,  when  the  oily  varnish  has  exercised  an  action 
on  its  texture  in  tho  course  of  the  operation.  The  whole  be- 
ing thus  arranged,  a  liquid  paste  made  with  drying  oil,  which 
may  be  varied  at  pleasure,  is  applied  to  the  cloth. 

To  make  liquid  Paste  and  Drying  Oil.  Mix  Spanish 
white,  or  tobacco  pipe  clay  with  water,  and  leave  at  rest  for 
some  hours.^  to  separate  the  aigillaceous  parts  and  to  produce 
a  sediment.  Stir  the  sediment  with  a  broom,  to  complete 
the  division  of  earth.  After  it  has  rested  some  seconds,  de- 
cant the  turbid  water  ijito  an  earthen  or  wooden  vessel.  By 
this  process  the  earth  will  bo  separated  from  the  sand  and 
other  foreign  bodies,  which  are  precipitated,  and  which  must 
be  thrown  awciy.  If  washed  by  the  same  process  on  a  largo 
scale,  it  is  divided  by  kneading  it.  The  supernatant  water  is 
thrown  aside,  and  the  sedimeiit  placed  in  sieves  on  pieces  of 
cloth,  where  it  drains  ;  it  is  then  mixed  up  with  oil  rendered 
drying,  by  a  large  dose  of  litharge,  about  a  foui  th  of  the 
weight  of  the  oil.  The  consistence  of  thin  paste  being  given 
to  the  mixture,  it  is  spread  oyer  the  cloth,  by  means  of  an 
iron  spatula,  the  length  of  which  is  equal  to  the  breadth  of 
the  cloth.  The  spatula  performs  the  part  cf  a  knife,  and 
pushes  forward  the  excess  of  matter,  above  the  quantity  suf- 
ficient to    cover  the  cloth.       The   inequalities  of  the   cloth 


t5&  -TKE    ARTU'I-    ^S# 

pioduced  by  its  coarseness,  are  smootlied  down  by  pumice 
stone.  The  stone  is  reduced  to  powder,  and  rubbed  over  tiity 
cloth  vrith  a  piece  ol  soft  sorgo  or  cork  dipped  in  water.  The 
rloth  must  then  be  well  waslied  in  water  to  clean  it;  and  af- 

1  it   is  dried  a  vari.ish  of  gum    lac  tlissolved   in  linseed    oil 

lied  with  turpentine  must  be  applied   to  it.      This  prepara- 

;)  produces  yellowish  varnished  clotb.  When  wanted 
uuck,  mix  lampblack  with  the  Spanish  white,  or  tobacco  pip« 
ciay,  which  forms  the  basis  of  the  liquid  paste  ;  various  shades 
may  be  obtained  according  to  the  quantity  of  the  lampblack 
which  is  added.  Umber,  Cologne  eaith,  &c.  may  be  used  to 
vary  the  tints,  without  causing  any  addition  to  the  expense. 

To  prepare  fine  I^iirited   Varnished  Cloth..      The  process 
•  ove  described  may  s^rve  to  give  some  idea  of  that  employed 

.  making  fine   cloths  ot   ilje  same  kind,   decorated  vvith   a 

jjoured  impression.       The  manufactories  of  German>  have 

varnished  cloths  embellished    with  large  and  small   subjects^ 

figures  and  landscapes,,  well  executed,  and  which  are  destined 

lor  covering  furnitine  subject  to  d^dly  use. 

This  process,  which  is  only  an  improvement  of  the  former, 
:*equires  a  finer  paste,   and  cluii]    .f  a  mure  delicate  texture : 
le  stratum  of  pas n*  is  appiic-  ime  manner,  and  when. 

.>y   and  polished,  ihe  cioiii  ;5    ^  .-  ^'^u  the  frame,  and  re- 

moved to  the  painter's  table,   v^'iiv  .11  of  the  colourist 

'nd  designer  is  displayed  under  a  c. ,.:..^  forms,  and  as  that 

I  printed  cottons,  exhibits  a  richress  of  tints  and  a  distribu^ 
don  of  subjects,  which  discover  taste,  and  ensure  a  ready  sale 
for  the  aiticle  manufactured.  The  processes,  however,  era- 
ployed  in  these  two  arts,  to  extract  the  colouring  parts,  are 
not  the  same.  In  the  art  of  coiton  printing,  the  colours  are 
extracted  by  the  bath,  as  in  that  of  dying.  In  printing  var- 
nished cloths,  the  colouring  parts  are  the  result  of  the  union 
of  drying  oil,  mixed  with  varnish;  and  the  different  colours 
employed  in  oil  painting  and  painting  in  varnish.  The  var- 
nish applied  to  common  oil  cloth  is  composed  of  gum  lac  and 
drying  linseed  oil ;  but  that  destined  for  printed  varnished 
cloths  requiies  some  choice,  both  in  regard  to  the  oil  and  the 
resinous  niatter  which  gives  it  consistence.  Prepared  oil  of 
pinks  and  copal  form  a  varnish  very  little  coloured,  pliable, 
and  solid. 

To  prepare  Varnished  Silk.      1.   Varnished  silk   for   um- 
brellas, S^c  is  prepared  in  the  same  manner  as  the  cloths  al- 


T!tA]&E«MAN*S    ««rlD£.  151 

reaily  described  ;  but  with  some  variation  in  the  paste  or  var- 
nish. 

The  cloth  is  placed  on  a  frame  as  before  described  ;  a  soft 
paste  composed  of  linseed  oil,  boiled  with  a  fourth  part  litharge; 
tobacco  pipe  day,  dried  and  sifted  through  a  silk  sieve,  six- 
teen parts,  litharge,  ground  on  porphyry  with  water,  dried 
and  sified  in  the  same  manner,  three  purts,  and  lampblack,, 
one  part.  This  paste  is  then  spread  in  an  uniform  manner 
over  the  surface  of  the  silk  by  means  of  a  long  knife,  having 
a  handle  at  the  extremity.  In  summer,  twenty-four  hours 
are  sufficient  for  its  desiccation.  When  dry,  the  knots  pro- 
duced by  the  inequalities  of  the  silk,  are  smoothed  by  a  pum- 
ice stone.  This  operation  is  performed  with  water,  When 
finished,  the  surface;  of  the  silk  is  \\  ashed;  when  dry,  fat 
copal  varnish  is  applied. 

If  it  is  intended  to  polish  the  varnish,  apply  a  second  stra- 
tum ;  after  uhich  polish  it  with  a  ball  of  cloth  and  yery  fine 
Tripoli.  The  varnished  silk,  thus  made,  is  very  black,  ex- 
ceedingly pliabiC,  and  has  a  fine  polish. 

2.  A  kind  of  varnished  silk  which  has  only  a  yellowish 
colour,  and  which  suffers  the  texture  of  the  stuff  to  appear,  is 
prepared  with  a  mixture  of  three  parts  boiled*  «>il  of  pinks, 
and  one  part  fat  copal  varnish,  which  is  extended  with  a 
coarse  brush  or  a  kniie.  Two  strata  are  sufficient  when  oil 
has  been  freed  from  its  greasy  particles  over  a  slow  fire,  or 
when  boiled  with  a  fourth  part  of  its  weight  uf  litharge. 

The  inequalities  are  removed  by  pumice  stone  and  water, 
after  which  the  copal  varnish  is  applied. 

To  recot>e7'  Varnish.  Clean  off  the  filth  with  a  lye  made 
of  potash,  and  the  asiies  of  lees  of  wine  ;  then  take  forty-eight 
ounces  of  potash,  and  sixteen  of  the  above  mentioned  ashes, 
and  put  them  into  six  Quarts  of  water,  and  this  completes  the 

To  polish  Varnish.  This  is  efiected  with  pumice  stone 
and  Tripoli  earth.  Reduce  the  pumice  stone  to  an  impalpa- 
ble powder,  and  put  it  upon  a  piece  of  serge  moistened  with 
water  ;  with  this  rub  lightly  and  equall}?  the  varnished  sub- 
stances. The  Tripoli  must  also  be  reduced  to  a  fine  powder,^ 
and  put  upon  ^a  clean  woollen  cloth,  moistened  with  olive  oil, 
vvith  which  the  polishing  is  to  be  performed.  The  varnislv 
then  is  to  be  wiped  off  wiih  soft  linen,  and  when  quite  dry^ 
cleansed  with  starch,  or  Spanish  white,  and  rubbed  vvith  the 
palm  of  the  hand. 


152  THE    ARTIST    AND 

Amber  Varnish  with  Essence  Turpentine,  Six  or  seven 
ounces  of  liquefied  amber,  aod  separated  from  the  oily  por- 
tions which  alter  its  consistence.  Reduce  the  amber  to  pow- 
der, and  if  the  operation  of  pounding  forms  it  into  a  paste, 
break  it  with  your  fingers  ;  then  mix  it  with  the  essence,  and 
heat  the  whole  in  a  balneum  mariee.  It  will  speedily  dis- 
solve, and  the  essence  will  take  up,  at  least,  a  fourth  part  of 
its  weight  of  the  prepared  amber.  When  one  coating  of  it  is 
applied  to  white  smooth  wood,  but  without  any  preparation, 
it  forms  a  very  pure  and  durable  glazing,  which  speedily  dries, 
but  slower  than  copal  varnish. 

Ethereal  Copal  Varnish,  Half  an  ounce  of  ambery  copal 
and  two  ounces  of  ethsrr  Reduce  the  copal  to  a  very  fine 
powder,  and  introduce  it  by  small  portions  into  the  flask 
which  contains  the  ether  ;  close  the  flask  with  a  glass  or  cork 
stopper,  and  having  shaken  the  mixture  fcr  half  an  hour,  let 
it  rest  till  the  next  morning.  In  shaking  the  flask,  if  the 
sides  become  covered  with  small  undulations,  and  if  the  liquor 
be  not  exceedingly  clear,  the  solution  is  not  complete.  In 
this  case,  add  a  little  ether,  and  leave  the  mixture  at  rest. 
The  varnish  is  of  a  light  lemon  colour.^  The  largest  quantity 
of  copal  united  to  ether,  may  be  a  fourth,  and  at  least  a  fifth. 
The  use  of  copal  varnish  made  with  ether,  seems,  by  the  ex- 
pense attending  it,  to  be  confined  to  repairing  those  accidents 
which  frequently  happen  to  the  enamel  of  toys,  as  it  will  sup- 
ply the  place  of  glass  to  the  coloured  varnishes,  employed  for 
mending  fractures,  or  to  restoring  the  smooth  surface  of  paint- 
ings which  have  been  cracked  and  shattered.  The  great 
volatility  of  etlier,  and  in  particular  its  higli  price,  do  not  al- 
low the  application  of  this  varnish  to^be  recommended,  but 
for  the  purpose  here  i^idicated.  It  has  been  applied  to  wood 
with  complete  success,  and  the  glazing  it  produced,  united 
lustre  to  solidity.  In  consequence  of  the  too  speedy  evap- 
oration of  the  liquid,  it  often  boils  under  the  brush.  Its 
evaporation,  however,  may  be  retarded,  by  spreading  over 
the  wood  a  slight  stratum  of  essential  oil  of  rosemary  or  lav- 
ender, or  even  of  turpentine,  which  may  afterwards  be  re- 
moved by  a  piece  of  linen  rag;  wha't  remains  is  suflicient  to 
retard  the   ether. 

Turpentine  Copal  Varnish,     One  and  a  half  ounces  copal, . 
of  an  amber  colour,  and  in  powder,  and  eight  ounces   of  the 
best  oil  of  turpentine.       Expose   the   essence   to    a  balneum 


TRADESMAN*    GUTDl?.  15$^ 

inarise,  in  a  wide  mouthed  matrass,  with  a  short  neck;  as 
soon  as  the  water  of  the  bath  begins  to  boil,  throw  into  the 
essence  a  large  pinch  of  copal  powder,  and  keep  the  matrass 
in  a  circular  motion.  W^hen  the  powder  is  incorporated  witit. 
the  essence,  add  new  doses  of  it ;  and  continue  in  this  man- 
ner till  you  observe  there  is  formed  an  insoluble  deposite. 
Then  take  the  matrass  from  the  bath,  and  leave  it  at  rest  for 
some  dajs.  Draw  off  the  clear  varnish,  and  filter  it  through 
cotton.  At  the  moment  when  the  portion  of  the  copal  is 
thrown  into  the  essence,  if  the  powder  precipitates  itself  un- 
der the  form  of  lumps,  it  is  needless  to  proceed  any  further. 
This  effect  arises  from  two  causes  ;  either  the  essence  does 
not  contain  the  proper  degree  of  concentration,  or  it  has  not 
been  sufficiently  deprived  of  water.  Exposure  to  the  sun, 
employing  the  same  matrass  to  which  a  cork  stopper  ought  to 
be  added,  will  give  it  the  quallities  requisite  for  tlie  solution 
of  the  copal.  This  effect  will  be  announced  by  the  disap- 
pearance of  the  portion  of  copal  already  put  into  it. 

*2.  Three  ounces  of  copal  liquefied,  and  twenty  ounces  es- 
sence of  turpentine.  Place  the  matrass  containing  ihe  oil  in 
a  balneum  marise,  and  when  thp  water  boils,  add  the  pulver- 
ized copal  in  small  doses.  Keep  stirring  the  mixture,  and  add 
no  more  copal  till  the  former  is  incorporated  with  the  oik  If 
the  O'l,  in  consequence  of  its  particular  disposition  can  take 
Hip  three  ounces  of  it,  add  a  little  more;  but  stop  if  the  liquid 
becomes  nebidous,  then  leave  the  varnish  at  rest.  If  it  he 
too  thick,  dilute  it  with  a  little  warm  essence  after  having 
heated  it  in  the  balneum  marise.  When  cold,  filter  it  through 
cotton,  and  preserve  it  in  a  bottle.  This  varnish  has  a  good 
consistence,  and  is  as  free  from  colour  as  the  best  alcohol 
varnish.  When  extended  in  one  stratum  over  smooth  wood, 
which  has  undergone  no  preparation,  it  forms  a  very  brilliant 
glazing,  which,  in  the  course  of  two  days,  in  summer,  acquires 
all  the  solidity  that  may  be  required. 

The  facility  which  attends  the  preparation  of  this  varnish,  by  the 
new  method  here  indicated,  will  admit  of  its  being  applied  to  all  col- 
oured grounds  which  require  solidity,  pure  whites  alone  exc«pted;  pain- 
ted boxes,  therefore,  and  all  small  articles,  coloured  or  otherwise,  when-, 
ever  it  is  required  to  make  the  veins  appear  in  all  the  richness  of  their 
tones,  call  ior  the  application  of  this  varnish,  which  produces  a  most 
beautiful  effect,  and  wMch  is  more  durable  than  turpentine  varnishca 
with  other  r»;sinous  substances. 

VarnUh  for  Wff^tch  Cases  in  irriif citron  of  Tortoise.  Shelh 


154  THE    ARTIST    ANIX 

Six  ounces  copal,  of  an  amber  colour,  one  and  a  half  ounces 
Venice  turpentine,  twenty-four  ounces  piepared  linseed  oil, 
and  six  ounces  essence  of  turpentine.  It  is  customary  to 
place  the  turpentine  over  the  copal,  reduced  to  small  frag- 
ments, in  the  bottom  of  an  earthen  or  metal  vessel,  or  in  a 
matrass  exposed  to  such  a  heat  as  to  liquefy  the  copal ;  but  it 
is  more  advantageous  to  liquefy  the  latter  alone,  to  add  the 
oil  in  a  state  of  ebullition,  then  the  turpentine  liquefied,  and 
in  the  last  place*  the  essence.  If  the  varnish  is  too  thick, 
some  essence  may  be  added.  The  latter  liquor  is  a  regula- 
tor for  the  consistence  in  the  hands  of  an  artist. 

Kesinous  Drying  Oil,  Ten  pounds  of  drying  nut  oil,  if 
the  paint  is  destined  for  external,  or  ten  pounds  drying  lin- 
seed oil,  if  for  internal  articles.  Three  pounds  of  resin,  and 
six  ounces  of  turpentine.  Cause  the  resin  to  dissolve  in  the 
oil  by  means  of  a  gentle  heat.  When  dissolved  and  incorpo- 
rated with  the  oil,  add  the  turpentine;  leave  the  varnish  at 
rest,  by  which  means  it  will  often  deposit  portions  of  resin 
and  other  impurities;  and  then  preserve  it  in  wide  mouthed 
bottles.  It  must  be  used  fresh  ;  when  suffered  to  grow  old, 
it  abandons  some  of  its  resin.  If  this  resinous  oil  assumes  too 
much  consistence,  dilute  it  with  a  little  essence,  if  intended 
for  articles  sheltered  from  the  sun,  or  with  oil  of  poppies. 

In  Switzerland,  where  the  princifial  part  of  the  mason's  work  consists 
of  stones  subject  to  crumble  to  pieces,  it  is  often  found  necessary  to 
give  them  a  coating  of  oil  paint,  to  stop  the  effect  of  this  decomposi-^ 
tion.  This  painting  has  a  great  deal  of  lustre,  and  when  the  last  cotat- 
ing  is  applied  with  resinous  oil,  it  has  the  effect  of  varnish.  To  give  it 
more  durability,  the  first  ought  to  be  applied  exceedingly  warm,  and 
with  plain  oil,  or  oil  very  little  charged  with  the  grey  colour  which  is 
added  to  fat  copal  varnish  and  the  varnish  to  watch  cases,  &c. 

Fat  Copal  VaniisTil  Sixteen  ounces  picked  copal,  eight 
ounces  prepared  linseed  oil,  or  oil  of  poppies,  and  sixteen 
ounces  turpentine.  Liquefy  the  copal  in  a  matrass  over  a 
common  fire,  and  then  add  the  linseed  oil,  or  oil  of  poppies, 
in  a  state  of  ebullition  ;  when  these  matters  are  incorporated, 
take  the  matrass  from  the  fire.,  stir  the  matter  till  the  greatest 
heat  has  subsided,-  and  thou  add  the  essence  of  turpentine 
when  warm.  Strain  the  whole,  while  still  warm,  through  a 
piece  of  linen,  and  put  the  varnish  into  a  ^ wide  mouthed  bot- 
tle. Time  contributes  towards  iis  clarification;  and  in  this 
fanner  it  acquires  a  better  quality. 

To  give  a  drying  quality  to  Fat  Oil.     Eight   pounds  nut 


155 

or  Unseed  oil,  one  ounce  white  lead,  slightly  calcined,  one 
ounce  yellow  acetate  of  lead,  (sal  saturni)  also  calcined,  one 
ounce  sulphate  of  zinc,  (white  vitfiol)  twelve  ounces  vitreous 
oxide  of  lead,  (litharge)  and  a  head  of  garlic  or  a  small  onion* 
When  the  dry  substances  are  pulverized,  mix  them  with  the 
garlic  and  oil,  over  a  fire  capable  of  maintaining  the  oil  in  a 
slight  state  of  ebullition  ;  continue  it  until  the  oil  ceases  to 
throw  up  scum,  till  it  assumes  a  reddish  colour,  and  till  the 
head  of  the  garlic  becomes  brown.  A  pellicle  will  then  be 
soon  formed  on  the  oil,  which  indicates  that  the  operation  is 
completed.  Take  the  vessel  from  the  fire,  and  the  pellicle, 
being  precipitated  by  rest,  will  carry  with  it  all  the  unctuous 
parts  which  rendered  the  oil  fat.  When  the  oil  becomes 
clear,  separate  it  from  the  deposite,  and  put  it  into  wide 
mouthed  bottles,  where  it  will  completely  clarify  itself  in  time 
and  improve  in  quality. 

2.  One  and  a  half  ounces  vitreous  oxide  of  lead,  3-8  of  an 
ounce  sulphate  of  zinc,  and  sixteen  ounces  linseed  or  nut  oiL 
This  operation  must  be  conducted  as  in  the  preceding  case; 
The  choice  of  the  oil  is  not  a  matter  of  indifference.  If  it  be 
destined  for  painting  articles  exposed  to  the  impression  of  the 
external  air,  or  for  more  delicate  painting,  nut  oil  or  poppy 
oil  will  be  required.  Linseed  oil  is  used  for  coarse  painting, 
and  that  sheltered  from  the  effects  of  the  rain  and  the  suni 
A  little  negligence  in  the  management  of  the  fire,  has  often 
an  influence  on  the  colour  of  the  oil,  to  which  a  drying  qtial- 
jty  is  communicated  ;  in  this  case  it  is  not  proper  for  delicate 
pairitingi 

This  inconvenience  may  be  avoided  by  tying  up  the  drying 
matters  in  a  small  bag  :  but  the  dose  of  litharge  must  then  be 
doubled.  The  bag  must  then  be  suspended  by  a  piece  of 
packthread;  fastened  to  a  stick,  which  is  made  to  rest  on  the 
edge  of  the  vessel  in  such  a  manner  as  to  keep  the  bag  at 
the  distance  of  an  inch  from  the  bottom  of  the  vessel.  A  pel- 
licle will  be  formed,  as  in  the  first  operation,  but  it  will  be 
slower  in  making  its  appearance. 

3.  A  drying  quality  may  be  communicated  to  oil  by  treat- 
ing, in  a  heat  caoable  of  maintaing  a  slight  ebullition,  linseed 
or  nut  oil,  to  each  pound  of  which  is  added  three  ounces  of 
vitreous  oxide  of  lead,  reduced  to  fine  powder.  The  prepa- 
ration of  floor  cloth,  and  all  paintings  of  large  figures  or  or- 
naments, in  v,hich  argillaceous  colours,  such  as  yellow  and 


l56  THE    Am  1ST    AND 

red  boles,  Dutch  pink,  &c,  are  employed,  require  this  khid. 
of  preparation,  that  the  desiccation  niay  not  be  too  slow  ;  but 
painting  for  which  metallic'oxides  are  used,  such  as  prepara- 
tions of  lead,  copper,  &c.  require  orfiy  the  doses  before  indi- 
cated ;  because  these  oxides  contain  a  trreat  deal  of  oxygen, 
and  the  oil  by  their  contact,  acquires  more  of  a  drying  qual- 
ity. 

4.  Two  pounds  of  out  oil,  three  pounds  common  water,  and 
two  ounces  sulphate  of  zinc.  Mix  these  matters  and  subject 
t4iem  to  a  slight  ebullition,  until  little  water  remains.  Decant 
the  oil,  which  will  pass  over  with  a  small  quantity  Ot  water, 
'And  separate  the  latter,  by  a  funnel.  The  oil  remains  nebu- 
l-ous  for  some  time,  after  which  it  becomes  clear,  and  seems 
to  be  very  little  coloured,  ^ 

5.  Six  pounds  nut  or  linseed  oil,  four  pounds  common  wa- 
ter, one  ounce  sulphate  of  zinc  and  one  head  of  garlic  or 
a  small  onion.  Mix  these  matters  in  a  common  iron  or  cop- 
per pan,  then  place  them  over  the' fire,  and  maintain  the  mix- 
ture in  a  state  of  ebullition  during  the  wliole  day  ;  boiling 
water  must  be  added  from  time  to  time,  to  make  up  the  loss 
from  that  by  evaporation.  The  garlic  will  assume  a  brown 
appearance,  Take  the  pan  from  the  fire,  and  having  suffered 
a  deposite  to  be  formed,  decant  the  oil,  which  will  clarify  it- 
self in  the  vessels  ;  by  this  process  the  drying  oil  is  rendered 
somewiiat  more  coloured  ;  it  is  reserved  for  delicate  col- 
ours. 

To  give  a  drying  quality  to  Poppy  Oil,  Three  pounds 
of  pure  water,  one  ounce  of  sulphate  of  zinc,  two  pounds  oil 
of  pinks,  or  poppy  oil.  ExpsRse  this  mixture  in  an  earthen 
vessel,  capable  of  standing  the  fire,  to  a  degree  of  heat  suffi- 
cient to  maintain  it  in  a  slight  state  of  ebullition.  When  one 
half  or  two-thirds  of  tlie  vvater  has  evaporated,  pour  the  whole 
into  a  large  glass  bottle  or  jar,  and  let  it  rest,  till  the  oil  be- 
comes clear.  Decant  the  clearest  part  by  means  of  a  glass 
fwnnel,  the  beak  of  which  is  stopped  with  a  piece  of  cork. 
When  the  separation  of  th^  oil  from  the  water  is  completely 
effected,  remove  the  cork  stopper,  arid  supply  its  place  by  the 
fore  finger,  which  must  be  applied  in  such  a  manner  as  to  suf- 
fer the  water  to  escape^  and  to  reta-in  only  the  oil.  Poppy 
oil  when  prepared  in  this  manner,  becomes  after  some  weeks 
iexceedingly  limpid  and  colourless. 

To  make  Varnish  for  Silk,  ^c.     To   one  quart  of  cold 


ntAOESMAN  a    OlUlDE.  IjJ 

drawn  linseed  oil,  poured  oiT  from  the  lees,  (produced  on  the 
addition  of  unslacked  lime,  on  which  tliO  oil  has  stood  eight 
or  ten  days  at  the  least,  in  order  to  communicate  a  drying 
quality,  or  brown  umber  burnt  and  powdered  which  will  have 
the  like  effect,)  and  half  an  ounce  of  litharge  ;  boil  them  for 
Jhalf  an  hour,  then  add  half  an  ounce  copal  varnish.  -While 
the  ingredients  aie  on  the  firq  in  a  copper , vessel^  put  in  on,e 
ounce  Chios  turpentine,  or  common  resin,  and_  a  few  drops 
neat's  foot  oil,  and  stir  the  whole  with  a  knife  ;  when  cool,  it 
is  ready  for  lise.  The  neat's  foot  oil  prevents  the  varnish 
from  being  sticky  or  adhesive,  and  may  be  put  into  linseed 
oil  at  the  same  time  with  the  lime,  or  burnt  umber.  Resin  o^ 
Chios,  turpentino  may  be  added,  till  the  varnish  has  attained 
the  d^i^red  thickness. 

The  longer  the  raw  linseed  oil  remains  o  i  the  unslacked  lime  or  um- 
ber, the  sooner  will  iJie  nil  dry  aller  it  is  used;  if  some  monhts  so  much 
the  better  ;  such  varnish  wilf  set,  that  is  to  say  not  run,  but  keep  its 
place  on  the  silk  in  four  hours;  the  stick  may  then  be  turned,  and  vat- 
jiished  on  the  other  sid^i. 

7^0  make  pliable  Varnish  for  Umbrellas.  Takoany  quan- 
tity of  caoutchouc,"  as  ten  or  iwelve  ouncf>Sy  cut  into  small 
bits,  and  put  into  a  ladle,  such  as  plumbers,  glaziers,  &c.  melt 
their  lead  in,  over  a  common  pit  coal  or  other  fire,  which 
must  bo  gentle,  glovving,=  and  without  smoke.  When  the  la- 
dle is  hot,  ptit  a  single  bit  into  it;  if  black  smoke  issues,  it 
ivill  flauio  and  disappear,  or  it  will  evaporate  without  flame  ; 
the  ladle  is  then  too  hot.  When  the  the  ladle  is  less  hot,  put 
in  a  second  bit,  wliich  will  produce  a  white  smoke  ;  this  white 
smoke  will  continQe  during  the  operation^  and  evaporate  the 
caoutchouc  ;  therefore,  no  time  is  to  be  lost,  but  little  bits 
are  to  be  put  in,  a  few  at  a  lime,  till  the  whole  are  melted  ; 
it  sliould  be  continually  and  gently  stirred  with  an  iron  or 
brass  spoon.  The  instant  the  smoke  changes  from  white  to 
black,  take  off  the  ladle,  or  the  whole  will  break  out  into  a 
'violent  flame,  or  be  spoiled,  or  lost.  Care  must  be  taken' 
Uiat  no  water  is  added,  a  i'e\v  dro^s  of  which,  on  account  of 
its  expansibility,  makes  it  boll  over  furiously  and  with  a  great 
noise  ;  at  this  period  of  the  process,  one  quart  of  the  best 
drying  oil  is  to  be  put  into  the  melted  caatchoue,  and  stirred 
till  hot,  and  the  whole  poured  into  a  glazed  vessel  througli  a 
coarse  gauze,  or  wire  sieve,  V/hen  settled  and  clear,  which 
will  be  ill  d  lev/  miuutes,  it  is  fit  for  use.     The  ^^ilk  should  ai- 

14 


158  THE    ARTIST  AND 

ways  be  stretched  horizontally  by  pins  or  tenter  liooks  on 
frames,  and  the  varnish  poured  oii  cold  in  hot  weather,  and 
hot  if  cold  weather.  Tlu)  art  of  laying  it  on  properly,  con- 
sists in  making  no  intense  motion  in  the  varnish^  which  would 
create  minute  bubbles,  therefore,  brushes  of  every  kind  are 
improper,  as  each  bubble  breaks  in  drying,  and  forms  a  small^ 
hole;  through  which  the  air  will  transpire^  This  varnish  is 
pliant^  unadhesive^  and  unalterable  by  weather. 

Transparent  Japan  for  Tin  Ware,  Oil  of  turpentinej 
eight  ounces,  oil  of  iavenderj  six  ounces  copal,  two  ounces, 
camphor j  one  drachm. 

Drying  Oil,  Linseed  oil,  two  pints,  litharge  or  cerusej 
one  ounce  ;  dissolve  with  heat  ;  added  to  paints  to  make 
them  dry  sooner. 

Le  Blond's  Varnish  for  Prints,  Balsam  copaiva  fdur 
pounds,  copal  in  powder,  one  pound ;  add  by  single  ounces 
every  day  to  the  balsam,  keeping  it  in  a  warm  place,  or  in  the 
sun,  stirring  it  frequently  ;  when  all  is  dissolvedj  add  Chios 
turpentine,  q.  p% 

Sheldrake's  Copal  Varnish,  Oil  turpentine,  ret.  vdri^ 
one  pint,  sal  ammoniac  two  ounces  :  mix  ;  add  copal  in  small 
pieces,  two  ounces  ;  stop  the  vessel  with  a  cork  cut  in  grooves  ; 
bring  it  quickly  to  boil,  that  the  bubbles  may  be  counted  as 
they  rise  ;  and  keep  it  at  that ;  if  the  least  stoppage  or  over^ 
heating  takes  place,  it  is  in  vain  to  proceed.  Tben  leave  the 
Vessel  till  quite  cold,  before  you  open  it  ;  otherwise  the  var- 
nish will  be  thrown  out  with  violence. 

Sheldrake'' s  Oil  for  Painting,  Niit  or  pbppy  oil,  one 
pint,  boil  ;  add  ceruse,  two  ounces,  when  dissolved,  add  a  pint 
of  copal  varnish,  previousl}'^  vvarmedj  and  stir  it  till  the  oil  of 
turpentine  is  evaporated;  gives  more  brightness  than  com- 
mon drying  oil,  but  less  than  varnish  only;  loses  its  dry 
quality  in  time,  therefore,  only  so  much  as  is  sufficient  for 
a  month  or  six  weeks'  consumption  should  be  prepared  at, 
once. 

Varnish  to  be  laid  on  Gilding  and  Silvering*  Grind  ver^ 
digris,  on  marble  with  common  water^  in  which  saffron  has 
been  infused  for  eight  hours. 

A  Common  Varnish,  Sandarac  eight  ounces,  tereb.  Venit; 
six  ounces,  spirits  wine,  rectified,  two  pints. 

White  Varnish,  Gum  juniper,  one  pound,  Strasburg 
turpentine,  six  ounces,  spirits  wine,  rectified,  two  pints,  used 
upon  paper,  wood,  and  linen. 


TRADESMAN  S    GUIDE.  159 

White  Hard  VarnisJu  Mastic,  four  ounces,  gum  juniper,. 
ter«b.  Venit.  of  each  three  ounces  (t«  prevent  the  gums 
forming  an  impenetrable  mass,)  add  four  ounces  pounded 
glass, spirits  wine  rectified,  two  pints, used  upon  cards,  sheaths, 
&>c. 

White  Polishing  Varnish,  Mastic  in  tears,  two  ounces,, 
gum  juniper,  eight  ounces^  gum  elemi,  one  ounce,  tereb.  ar- 
gent, four  ounces,  spirits  wine  rectified,  two  pints  ;  used  upon 
metals,  polished  with  pumice  stone. 

Transparent  Copal  Varnish,  Spirits  wine  fully  charged 
with  camphor,  four  ounces,  copal  in  fine  powder,  one  ounce  ; 
dissolve,  filter;  add  the  filtered  liquor  to  spirit^  of  wine,  one 
part,  in  which  gum  elemi  one  ounce,  has  been  previously  dis- 
solved. 

2.  Spirits  wine  rectified,  one  pint,  camphor,  half  an  ounces 
dissolve  ;  pour  it  upon  copal  in  small  pieces,^  four  ounces  5 
heat  it  so  that  the  bubbles  which  rise  may  be  counted  ;  when 
cold,,  pour  it  off  and  add  more  spirts  to  the  residuum  i  used  for 
pictures. 

3.  Copal,  melted  and  poured  into  water,  three  ounces, 
gum  sandarac  six  ounces,  mastic  three  ounces,  terib.  argent. 
two  ounces  and  a  half,  pounded  glass,  four  ounces,  spirits  wine 
rectified,  two  pints  ;  used  for  metals,  chairs,  &c. 

Soft  Brilliant  Varnish,  Gum  sandarac,  six  ounces,  gum 
elemi,  four  ounces,  camphor,  four  drachms,  spirits  wine  recti- 
fied, two  pints ;  used  upon  wood  work  and  pasteboard. 

Reddish  Varnish.  Gum  sandarac,  eight  ounces,  lava  in 
tabulis,  two  ounces^  resina  nigri,  four  ounces,  tereb.  Venit.. 
six  ounces,  spirits  wine  rectified,  two  pints  ;  used  on  wood 
and  metals. 

Red  Varnish,  Sandarac,  four  ounces,  seed-lac,  two  oun- 
ces, mastic,  choice  Benjamin,  of  each  one  ounce;  turpentine 
two  ounces,  spirits  wine  rectified  two  pints  ;  used  for  violins 
and  cabinet  work. 

Nut  Oil,  From  the  kernel  of  the  hazel  nut,,  very  fine  ; 
substituted  for  oil  of  Benjamin,  as  it  will  keep  better  than  that 
of  almonds  ;  it  has  been  proposed  in  the  college  lists,  to  he 
substituted  for  that  oil,  being  nearly  equal  to  it  ;  is  drank  with 
tea  in  China,  probably  in  lieu  of  cream  ;  used  by  painters  as 
a  superior  article  for  their  colours. 

Hemp  Oil,.  From  hemp  seed,,  used  by  painters  as  a  dry* 
ing  oil. 


lOO  TilE    ARTIST    AND 

Walnut  Oil.  Makes  good  plasters,  but  will  not  keep  ; 
used  by  painters  ;  is  Tory  drying  ;  they  yield  about  half  their 
weight  oT  oik 

Picture  Varnish.  Mastic  twelve  ounces,  Venit.  turpen- 
tine, two  ounces  four  drachms,  camphor,  thirty  grains,  pound- 
ed glass,  four  ounces,  oil  turpentine,  three  pints  and  a  half; 
pour  oil  the  clear ;   used  to  od  paintings.  ^ 

Gold  Varnish  for  Leather »  Tunieri^^,  gamboge,  of  each 
one  scruple  and  a  half,  oil  turpentine  two  pints  ;  add  seed- 
lac,  gum  sandarac,  of  each  four  ounces,  dragon's  blood  four 
drachms,  Venit.  turpentine,  two  ounces,  pounded  glass,  four 
ounces  ;   pour  off  the  cleai-. 

Copal  Varnish.  Oil  turpentine,  thickened  by  keeping, 
eight  ounces,  copal,  two  ounces  and  a  half. 

2.  Oil  turpentine,  six  ounces,  oil  lavender,  two  ounces, 
copal,  one  ounce. 

Common  Tttrjjcntine  Varnish.  Resin  flav.  three  pounds, 
eight  ounces,  oil  terebinth,  one  gallon. 

Varnish  for  Coloured  Drawings.  Canada  balsam,  one 
ounce,  oil  turpentine  two  ounces:  size  the  drawing iirst  with 
a  jelly  of  isinglass,  and  when  dry,  apply  the  varnish  ;  which 
will  make  them  resemble  oil, paintings. 

Black  Japan  Leather.  Boiled  Tmseed  oil,  one  gallon, 
burnt  umber  eight  ounces,  asphalrum,  three  ounces,  boil  and 
add  oil  terebinth,  q.  s. 

This  varnish  perhaps  is  the  best  in  use  for  iron — for  wliich  purpose 
the  oil  should  be  reduced  by  boiling  with  a  well  directed  heat,  one  half. 
The  umber  should  be  finely  pulverised  on  porphyry  (a  kind  of  red  and 
white  marble,  such  as  painters  generally  use)  and  put  into  the  oil,  before 
boiling-  and  add  the  oriier  ingredients,  when  nearly  cool,  after  boiling — 
when  asphaltum  (or  mineral  tar)  cannot  be  procured,  for  one  gallon  of 
linseed",  put  into  the  spirits  of  turpentine,  a  paper  of  lampblack  which 
after  having  stood  a  few  hours  should  be  strained  througii  coarse  flan- 
nel and  tiien  blended,  with  the  oil  after  having  been  boiled  and  cooled, 
as  before  directed — for  a  polishing  varnish  ndd  to  the  oil,  when  at  its 
boiling  point  a  quarter  of  a  pound  of  Gum  Shellac — tliis  also  furnishes 
a  brilliant  coating  for  iron — particularly  for  rough  castings  ;  but  the  as- 
phaltum, renders  it  more  durable  ;  in  boiling  oil  in  Gvary  case  great 
care  is  requsite  to  prevent  its  burning;  and  in  general  varnishes 
would  be  infinitely  better,  to  boil  the  oil  to  the  consistence  of  one  half 
or  nearly. 

Scouring  Drops.  Oil  torebintln  sentcd  with  essence  le- 
mon. 

Furnitiirc  Oil,      Oil  lini,  coloured  witli  rad  anchus.T, 


TRADESMAN'S    GUIDE,  iGl 

Furniture  Varnish,  White  wax,  eight  ounces,  oil  tere- 
binth, one  pint. 

Bronzing  Liquor,  It  is  blue  vitriol,  dissolved  in  water  ; 
used  to  bronze  tea  urns,  &c.  the  surface  being  previously 
well  cleaned. 

Blrie  or  Green  Sympathetic  Ink,  Drop  a  tea  spoonful  of 
zafire  into  a  third  of  a  wine  glass  of  nitro-niuriatic  acid. 
After  standing  awhile,  write  on  paper;  die  writing  will  be 
blue,  unless  there  is  a  little  iron  in  the  zafire,  which  will  give 
it  a  green  hue.  If  a  little  common  salt  in  solution  had  been 
added,  the  writing  would  disappear  on  removing  from  the 
fire. 

Invisible  Inlc.  Whittle  off  a  little  bisraulh  into  a  w^ine 
glass.  Drop  in  a  little  common  jiitric  acid  diluted  with  hnlf 
as  much  water.  Violent  action  will  commence ;  when  it 
ceases  the  nitrate  will  be  formed  in  the  liquid  state.  Dip  a 
clean  pen  into  it  and  write  as  with  ink  ;  hold  the  paper  near, 
a  fire,  but  not  so  near  as  to  heat  it,  the  letters  will  become 
invisible;  now  dip  it  into  water  or  hold  it  in  a  steam  over 
boiling  water,  and  on  taking  it  out,  the  letters  will  become 
visible,  and  appear  as  if  written  with  pale  ink. 

After  a  short  time  the  writing  will  disappear  and  leave  not 
a  vestige  to  prove  a  forgotten  promise. 

CalloVs  Varnish,  Two  ounces  finest  linseed  oil,  Benja- 
min in  drops,  two  drachm^:,  white  wax  the  bulk  of  a  filbert, 
boil  all  together,  till  it  is  reduoed  to  one-third,  stirring  it  con- 
stantly. When  done,  put  it  into  a  large  mouthed  phial.  Warm 
the  plate  intended  to  be  engraven,  and  for  which  this  varnish 
is  designed,  and  with  the  finger  pT>ss  it  over  ho  place,  leav- 
ing it  slightly  coated,  and  smooth;  after  which  smoke  tlie 
plate  on  the  varnished  side,  with  a  candle,  until  it  is  black  in 
every  part.  Place  the  plate  over  a  chafing  dish,  with  char- 
coal fire,  and  when  it  has  done  filming,  the  varnish  has  be- 
come sufiiciently  hardened,  when  it  is  prepared  to  chalk, 
draw  and  etch,  whatever  is  desired.  This  varnish  was  used 
by  Callot,  to  engrave  his  most  admired  subjects. 

To  colour  Foils.  For  colouring  foils  two  methods  have 
b^een  invented.  The  first  by  tinging  the  surface  of  the  cop- 
per with  the  colour  required,  by  means  of  smoks,  the  other 
by  staining  or  painting  it  with  some  pigment,  or  other  colour- 
ing substance.  The  colours  used  for  painting  foils  may  be 
tempered  with  either  oil,  water  rendered  duly  viscid  by  gum 

*14 


XG2  THE    ARTIST    AXf> 

Arabic,  size,  or  vanish.  If  deep  colours  are  wanted,  oil  is 
most  proper,  as  some  pigments  become  wholly  transparent  in 
it,  as  lake  or  Prussian  blue;  the  yellow  and  green  may  be  laid 
on  in  varnish,  as  these  colours  may  be  had  in  perfection,  from 
a  tinge  wholly  dissolved  in  spirit  of  wine,  in  the  same  manner 
as  in  the  case  of  lacquers ;  and  the  most  beautiful  green  is  to 
be  produced  by  distilled  verdigris,  which  is  apt  to  lose  its  col- 
our and  turn  black  with  oil.  In  common  cases,  any  of  the 
colours  may  be  laid  on  with  the  least  trouble,  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  glazing  colours  used  in  miniature  painting.    * 

Ruby  Colours.  For  red,  where  the  ruby  is  to  be  imitated, 
a  little  lake  is  used  with  isinglass  size  ;  carmine,  or  shell-lac 
varnish,  should  be  used  if  the  glass  or  paste,  is  of  a  full  crim- 
son, verging  towards  the  purple  ;  but  if  the  glass  incline  to  the 
scarlet  or  orange,  very  bright  lake,  that  is,  not  purple,  may 
be  used  alone  in  oil. 

Garnet  Red.  Dragon's  blood  dissolved  in  seed-lac  var- 
nish, may  be  used  ;  for  the  vinegar  garnet,  the  orange  lake 
tempered  with  shell-lac  varnish  will  be  found  excellent. 

Amethyst.  Lake,  with  a  little  Prussian  blue,  used  with  oil,, 
and  thinly  spread  on  the  foil. 

Blue.  When  a  deep  colour  or  the  eflcct  of  the  sapphire  is 
wanted,  Prussian  blue,  that  is  not  too  deep,  used  in  oil,  and 
spread  more  or  less  thinly  on  the  foil,  according  to  the  light- 
ness or  deepness  of  the  colour  required. 

Eagle  Marine.  Common  verdigris,  with  a  little  Prussian 
blue,  tempered  in  shall-lac  varnish. 

Yellow.  Colour  the  foil  with  a  yellow  lacquer;  if  a  full 
yellow  is  desired,  lay  it  on  as  for  other  purposes.  For  the 
slighter  colour  of  topazes,  the  burnish  and  foil  itself  will  be 
sufficiently  strong  without  any  addition. 

Green.  If  a  deep  hue  is  required,  the  cr^^stals  of  verdigris, 
tempered  in  shell-lac  should  be  used.  But  if  the  emerald  is 
to  be  imitated,  a  little  yellow  lacquer  should  be  added,  to  pro- 
duce a  truer  green,  less  verging  to  the  blue. 

Other  Colours.  Stones  of  more  diluted  colour,  such  as 
the  amethyst,  topaz,  vinegar  garnet,  &c.  maybe  v^^y  cheaply 
imitated  by  transparent  white  glass  or  paste,  even  without 
foils.  This  is  done  by  tempering  the  colours  above  enume- 
rated with  turpentine  and  mastic,  and  painting  the  socket  in^ 
which  the  counterfeit  stone  is  to  be  set  with  the  mixture,  the- 
socket  and  sione  being  previously  heated.      The  stone  should' 


thadesman's  guide.  163 

immediately  set,  and  the  socket  closed  upon  it  before  the 
mixture  cools  and  grows  hard.  The  orange  lake  was  inven- 
ted for  this  purpose.  The  colour  it  produces  is  that  of  the 
vinegar  garnet,  and  has  been  used  with  great  success  by  a 
manufacturer.  The  colour  before  directed  to  be  used  in  oil 
should  be  extremely  well  ground  in  oil  of  turpentine,  asd  tem- 
pered witb  old  nut  or  poppy  oil ;  or,  if  time  can  be  givt3n  to 
dry,  with  strongfat  oil  diluted  with  spirits  of  turpentine,  which 
gives  a  fine  ])olish  of  itself.  The  colours  used  in  varnish,, 
should  also  be  well  ground  and  mixed — when  dragon's  blood 
in  the  seed-lac  varnish  and  the  lacquer,  the  foils  should  be 
warmed  before  they  are  laid  out.  All  the  mixtures  should 
be  laid  on  the  foil  with  a  broad  soft  brush,  passed  from  one 
end  to  the  other  ;  no  part  crossed  or  gone  over  twice,  or  at 
least,  until  the  first  coat  is  dry.  When  the  colours  are  not 
strong  enough  another  coat  may  be  given. 

Lacquer  for  Brass.  Six  ounces  of  seed-lac,  two  ounces  of 
amber  or  copal,  ground  on  porphyry  forty  grains  dragon's 
blood,  thirty  giains  extract  of  red  sandal  wood,  obtained  b}' 
water,  thirty-six  grains  oriential  safiron,  four  ounces  pounded 
glass,  and  forty  ounces  very  pure  alcohol. 

To  apply  this  varnish  to  articles  or  ornaments  of  brass,.cx- 
pose  them  to  a- gentle  heat,  and  dip  them  into  varnish.  Two 
or  three  coatings  maybe  applied  in  this  manner,  if  necessary.. 
The  varnish  is  durable,  and  has  a  beautiful  colour.  Articles 
varnished  in  this  manner,  may  be  cleaned  with  water,  and  a 
bit  of  dry  rag. 

Lacquer  for  PMlosopliical  Lisfrumcnts.  Tbis  lacquer  is 
destined  to  cliange,  or  to  modify  the  colour  of  those  bodies 
to  which  it  is  applied.  Three-fourths  of  an  cunco  of  gum 
guttse,  two  ounces  of  gum  sandarac,  two  ounces  of  gum  elemiy 
one  ounce  of  dragon's  blood,  opt.  one  ounce  of  seed  lac, 
three-fourths  of  an  otmce  terra  merita,  two  grains  oriental 
saffron,  three  ounces  of  pounded  glass,  and  twenty  ounces  of 
pure  alcohol.  The  tincture  of  saffron  and  terra  merita,  is  . 
first  obtained  by  infusing  them  in  alcohol  for*  twenty-four 
hours,  or  exposing  them  to  the  heat  of  the  sun  in  summer. 
The  tincture  must  be  strained  throught  a  piece  of  clean  linen 
cloth,  and  ought  to  be  strongly  squeezed.  This  tincture  is 
poured  over  the  articles  v\hich  do  not  compose  tincture,  all 
pounded  and  mixed  with  the  glass.  The  varnish  is  then  made 
according  to  the  directions  before  given.     It  may  be  applied 


l64  THE    ARTIST  AND 

with  great  advantage  to  philosophical  instruments:  the  use  of 
it  might  be  extended  also,  to  various,  or  moulded  articles  with 
which  furniture  is  ornamented.  If  the  drcigon's  blood  be  of 
the  best  quality,  it  may  give  too  high  a  colour ;  in  this  case 
the  dose  may  be  lessened  at  pleasure,  as  well  as  that  of  the 
other  colouring  matters. 

It  is  with  similar  varnish  that  the  artists  of  Geneva,  give  a  golden 
orange  colour,  produced  by  certain  compositions,  the  preparation  of 
which  has  no  relation  to  that  of  varnish,  and  which  has  been  success- 
fully imitated  by  s'ajine  mixtures,  in  whicli  orpiment  is  a  principal  in- 
gredient. The  nails  are  heated  before  they  are  immersed  in  the  var- 
nish, and  they  are  then  spread  out  on  sheets  of  dry  paper. 

Gold  Coloured  Lacquer  J  or  Brass  Watch  Cases,  Watch 
Keys,  S^c,  Six  ounces  of  seed-lac,  two  ounces  of  amber,  two 
ounces  of  gum  guttae,  twenty-four  grains  extract  of  red  san- 
dal wood  in  water,  sixty  grains  of  dragon's  blood,  thirty-six 
grains  of  oriental  saffron,  four  ounces  of  pounded  glass  and 
thirty-six  ounces  of  pure  alcohol,  grind  the  three  first  articles 
and  the  dragon's  blood  on  a  piece  of  porphyry  ;  then  mix 
them  with  the  pounded  glass,  and  add  the  alcohol,  after  for- 
ming it  with  an  infusion  of  the  saffron,  and  the  extract  of  the 
sandal  wood.  The  varnish  must  be  completed  as  before. 
The  metal  articles  destined  to  be  covered  by  this  varnish,  are 
heated,  and  those  which  will  admit  of  it  are  immersed  in 
packets.  The  tint  of  the  varnish  may  be  varied,  by  modify- 
ing the  doses  o(  the  colouring  substances. 

Lacquer  of  a  less  drying  quality.  Four  ounces  of  seed- 
lac,  four  ounces  of  sandarac  or  mastic,  one-half  an  ounce  of 
dragon's  blood,  thirty-six  grains  of  terra  merita,  thirt\^-six 
grains  of  gum  guttse,  three  ounces  of  pounded  glass,  two  oun- 
ces of  clear  turpentine,  thirty-two  ounces  of  essence  of  tur- 
pentine. 

Extract  by  infusion  the  tincture  of  the  colouring  substances, 
and  then  add  the  resinous  bodies  according  to  the  directions 
for  compound  mastic  varnish.  Lacquer  or  varnishes  of  this 
kind  are  called  changing,  because,  when  applied  to  metals, 
such  as  copper,  brass,  or  hammered  tin,  or  to  wooden  boxes 
and  other  furniture,  they  communicata  to  them  a  more  agree- 
able colour.  Besides,  by  their  contact  with  the  common 
metals,  they  acquire  a  lustre  which  approaches  that  of  the 
precious  metals,  and  to  which,  in  consequence  of  peculiar 
intrinsic  qualities  or  certain  laws  of  convention,  a  much  greater 


TRADESMAN'S    GUIDE.  l55 

value  is  atlaclK^d.  It  is  by  means  of  these  changing  varnishes, 
that  artists  .re  able  to  communicate  to  their  leaves  of  silver 
and  copper,  those  shining  colours' observed  in  foils.  The 
product  of  industry  becomes  a  source  of  prosperity  to  the 
manufacturers  of  buttons  and  works  formed  with  foils,  which 
in  the  hands  of  the  jeweller,  contributes  with  so  much  success 
to  produce  that  reflection  of  the  rays  of  the  light,  which 
doubles  the  lustre  and  sparkling  quantity  of  precious  stones. 

It  is  to  varnish  of  this  kind  that  we  are  indebted  for  the 
manufacture  of  gilt  leather,  which,  taking  refuge  in  England, 
has  given  place  to  that  of  papier  mache,  which  is  eraplo^'ed 
for  the  decoration  of  palaces,  theatres,  &c. 

In  the  last  place  it  is  by  the  effect  of  a  foreign  tint  obtained 
from  the  colouring  part  of  saffron,  that  the  scales  of  silver 
disseminated  in  confection  de  hyacynth^  reflect  a  beautiful 
gold  colour.  The  colours  transmitted  by  different  colouring 
substences,  require  tones  suited  to  the  objects  for  which  they 
are  destined.  The  artist  has  it  in  his  own  power  to  vary 
them  at  pleasure.  The  addition  of  arnotto  to  the  mixture  of 
dragon's  blood,  saffron,  &c.  or  some  changes  in  the  doses  of 
the  mode  intended  to  be  made  in  colours.  It  is  therefore 
impossible  to  give  limited  formulae. 

To  made  Lacquer  of  various  Tints,  Four  ounces  gum 
guttse  in  thirty-two  ounces  of  essence  of  turpentine,  one  ounce 
arnotto,  and  four  ounces  dragon's  blood  ;  also  in  separate 
doses  of  essence. 

These  infusions  may  be  easily  made  in  the  sun.  After  fif- 
teen days  exposure,  pour  a  certain  quantity  of  these  liquors 
into  a  flask,  and  by  varying  the  doses,  different  shades  of  col- 
ours will  be  obtained.  These  infusions  may  also  be  employed 
for  changing  alcoholic  varnishes  ;  but  in  this  case,  the  use  of 
saffron,  as  well  as  that  of  red  sandal  wood,  which  does  not 
succeed  with  essence,  will  soon  give  the  tone  necessary  for 
imitating,  with  other  tinctures,  the  colour  of  gold. 

To  brotcn  Gun  Barrels.  After  the  barrel  is  finished,  rub 
it  over  with  eiqua-fortis,  or  spirit  of  salt  diluted  with  water, 
then  lay  it  by  for  a  \veek,  till  a  complete  coat  of  rust  is  for- 
med. A  little  oil  is  then  to  he  applied,  and  after  rubbing  the 
surface  dry,  polish  it  with  a  hard  brush  and  a  little  beeswax. 


16G  THE    ARTIST    AN1> 

CHAPTER  XXIX. 

(jslue^  JPastes,   Sfc. 

Glue  is  made  in  Europe,  of  ears,  feet,  trimmings,  sinews 
and  scrap'uigs  of  the  skins  of  oxen,,  calves,  she«p,  &.c^  old 
leather,  and  fresh  or  raw  hides  mixed  and  manufactured  to- 
gether; and  this  mixture  is  said  to  yield  one  third  of  its 
weight  in  good  strong  glue.  The  best  glue  is  from  the  hides 
of  old  animals;  whole  skins  are  seldom  used,  unless  they  are 
injured  by  the  worm,  rotted^  or  otherwise  rendered  unfit  to 
make  leather;  but  the  smallest  pieces  are  saved  for  tbat  pur* 
pose.  In  making  glue  of  fresh  pieces  of  skin,  let  them  be 
steeped  in  water  for  two  or  three  days  ;  dried  hides  may  re* 
quire  longer  time  ;  and  bits  of  leather  much  longer.  While 
soaking  they  should  be  stirred  occasionally,  then  put  them  ta 
drain  in  hand  barrows,  with  grated  bottoms,  or  in  boxes  with 
sloping  sides  and  grated  bottoms;  when  drained  let  them  be 
well  washed  in  several  waters.  The  ears  and  other  dirty- 
parts  should  be  steeped  and  washed  by  themselves;  after 
they  are  washed  clean,  put  them  in  a  weak  limewater,  in  iran 
hooped  tubs.  Leather  will  require  to  be  kept  in  weak  lime- 
water  a  considerable  time,  and  a  little  fresh  lime  should  be 
added  occasionally;  alumed  skins,  tallowed,  greasy,  bl'ood}^ 
or  hairy  skins,  should  be  put  into  a  stronger  limewater,  and 
kept  longer  in  it.  They  sometimes  require  to  be  taken  out,^ 
so  as  to  permit  the  lime  to  dry  on  them,  and  to  remain  for  a 
considerable  time;  after  which  the^^  must  be  soaked  and  well 
stirred;  then  press  them  out  as  dry  as  possible,  and  put  them 
in  a  copper  kettle  for  boiling,  at  the  bottom  of  which  kettle 
should  be  a  wooden  grate.  The  copper  should  be  filled  with 
the  material  pressed  close,  and  as  much  water  poured  on  as 
will  run  among  the  pieces:  make  a  moderate  fire,  which  in* 
crease  by  degrees  till  it  boils.  As  the  materials  melt  into 
glue,  some  decrease  the  fire  without  stirring  them,,  others  stir- 
them  as  they  dissolve.  When  the  glue,  on  cooling,,  forms  a 
pretty  thick  jelly,  it  is  done  :  after  this  a  box  is  made  with 
wooden  gratings  for  the  bottom  ;  the  inside  of  the  grating 
bottom  is  to  be  lined  with  horsehair  cloth,  and  the  box  to  be 
placed  over  a  large  tub.  The  glue  is  to  be  passed  through 
the  horsehair  cloth,  or  strainer,  quickly,  while  it  is  very  hot. 
The  dregs  are  left  to  drain  some  time,  and  are  called  by  the 
workmen  glue-dreg  ;  they  make  an  excellent  fuel  mixed  with. 


i'L\DESMAN^S    GUIDE.  l67 

wood.  The  room  should  be  kept  warm  while  the  glue  is  set- 
tling. In  the  tubs  there  should  be  cocks  to  draw  off  the  hot 
liquid  glue :  the  first  glue  will  be  the  brightes4j  but  the  last 
will  be  equally  good.  Through  the  cocks  it  must  run  into 
flat  moulds,  previously  wet.  When  cool,  cut  it  out  with  a  wet 
kuife  into  squares,  and  hang-  it  on  a  line  to  dry  and  harden  iti 
a  draught  of  air;— ^some  place  It  on  a  net  hung  on  four  posis^ 
turning  it  oceasionally  :  ten  days  of  dry  weather,  or  fifteen 
'days  of  wet  (under  cover)  are  required  in  Europe,  but  less 
time  in  America.  To  polish  the  cakesj  wet  them  and  rub 
theni  with  new  lime;  The  best  glue  has  few  dark  spots,  and 
no  bad  smell ;  and  shines  When  broken.  To  try  glue,  put  it 
into  cool  water  for  three  or  four  days,  where  it  must  not  dis- 
solve, but  when  dried  niust  preserve  its  weight: 

The  time  of  boiling  is  from  twelve  to  fifteen  hours,  accord- 
ing to  the  fire.     Violent  heat  is  to  be  avoided. 

2.  If  bones  are  digested  for  seven  or  eight  days,  with  weak 
hydrochloric  acid-,  this  acid  dissolves  all  the  salts  that  enter 
into  their  composition  ;  the  bones  are  softened,  become  very 
flexible-j  and  at  length  contain  only  animal  matter.  If,  in  this 
state,  they  are  put  for  some  moments  into  boiling  water,  and 
after  wiping  them  dry  ihey  are  subjected  to  a  stream  of  cold 
and  fresh  water,  they  may  be  regarded  as  pure  gelatin,  or  at 
least,  as  a  substance,  which,  being  dissolved  in  boiling  watery 
aflbrds  the  handsomest  size: 

In  order  to  prepare  glue  from  the  clippings  of  skins  of 
J3archment,  or  gloves;  from  the  hoofs,  the  ears  of  oxenj 
'horses,  sheep,  calves,  »!tc.  after  taking  off  the  hair  and  remo- 
ving the  fat  from  these  substances,  we  boil  them  for  a  long 
time  in  a  large  quantity  of  water  ;  the  scum  is  separated,  ii^ 
formalit)n  being  favoured  by  adding  a  little  alum  or  lime  ;  the 
liquor  iS  Strained',  and  suffered  to  rest ;  it  is  then  poured  offj 
and  skimmed  again-,  ahd  then  heated  to  concentrate  it.  When 
^sufficiently  so,  it  is  poiired  into  moulds  previously  wetted-, 
twJiere,  by  cooling,  it  forms  into  soft  plates  ;  which  at  the  end 
;®f  twenty-four  hours,  are  cut  into  tablets,  and  dried  in  a  warm 
and  airy  situation. 

A  very  strong  Glue,  Soak  the  finest  isinglass  twenty-four 
hours  in  spirits  of  wine  or  strong  brandy,  then  boil  all  very 
gently  together,  continually  stirring  it,  that  it  may  not  burn, 
nntil  it  becomes  one  liquor.  Then  strain  it  while  hot  through 
a  coarse  linen  cloth  into  a  vessel,  when  it  should  be  close 
stopped  ;  a  gentle  \iQ'Ai  will  me  It  this  glue  to  use. 


lOS  TilE    ART f ST    AND 

A  Parchment  Glue,  Put  two  or  tnree  pounds  of  scrapings 
or  cuttings  of  parchment  into  a  bucket  of  water,  boil  the 
whole  till  it  be  reduced  to  half,  pass  it  through  an  open  linen, 
and  then  let  the  liqaor  cool,  when  it  will  be  a  parchment 
glue. 

A  Strong  Paste.  Common  paste  is  made  of  wheat  flour 
boiled  in  water,  till  it  be  of  a  viscid  consistence,  but  when 
used  by  book  binders  and  paper  hangers,  it  is  requisite  to 
mix  a  fourth,  fifth,  or  sixth  of  the  weight  of  flour  of  powdered 
resin  or  rosin;  and  when  it  is  wanted  still  more  tenacious, 
gum  Arabic,  or  any  kind  of  size  may  be  added.  In  order  to 
prevent  the  paste  used  in  papering  rooms,  <^'c.  from  being 
gnawed  by  rats  ^-c.  powdered  glass  is  sometimes  mixed  with 
it ;  but  the  most  eflectual  and  easy  pemody,  is  to  dissolve  a 
little  sublimate  say  one  drachm  to  a  water,  which  not  only 
})revents  rats  and  mice,  but  all  kinds  of  vermin  being  trouble- 
some. 

Of  Fibrin.  If  blood  is  agitated  with  a  handful  of  rods, 
immediately  after  having  been  drawn  from  the  veins,  the  fibrin 
adheres  to  them;  it  is  then  only  necessary  to  wash  it  repeat- 
edly, in  order  to  discolour  it  and  obtain  it  pure. 

Liquid  Albumen.  This  constitutes  the  white  of  the  egg; 
in  truth  this  last,  besides  albumen,  contains  several  salts,  and 
some  sub-carbonate  of  soda,  of  which  it  is  impossible  to  divest 
it. 

Solid  Albumen^  Pour  alcohol  on  the  white  of  an  Q.gg^  dis- 
solved in  water,  and  flltered  ;  the  albumen  immediately  pre- 
cipitates, and  is  to  be  washed. 

Fish  Glue — Isinglass.^  To  procure  this,  the  inner  mem- 
brane of  the  swimming  bladders  of  some  kinds  of  sturgeon 
are  washed  ;  they  are  then  slightly  dried  and  rolled  and  af- 
terwards dried  in  the  air.  An  inferior  kind  is  prepared  by 
digesting  in  boiling  water,  the  head,  the  tail,  and  tbe  jaws  of 
certain  whales,  and  almost  all  flsh  without  scales. 

Potatoe  Starch — common  Arrow  Root:  may  bo  made 
from  frozen  potatoes  in  as  large  a  quantity  and  as  good,  as 
those  which  have  not  been  spoiled  by  the  frost ;  very  white,, 
crimp  to  the  fingers,  and  colours  them  ;  friable,  heavy,  sink- 
ing in  water;  when  hejd  to  the  light,  it  has  shining  particles 
in  it:  dissolves  in  boiling  water  as  easily  as  the  true  arrow 
root:   100  pounds  of  potatoes  yield  10  pounds  of  starch. 


tradesman's  guide.  '  IGO 


CHAPTER  XXV. 


Thejirt  of  Dying — Cotton — Linen— -Wool — Silk—WooU 
len  Goods — Mordimts — Ejfects  of  Sal:ts  on  Mordants — to 
render  Colours  holding— ^Bolutiopo  of  Tin  in  Aqua-Ilegia 
— Muriate  of  Tin— ^Acetate-  of  Alumine — Effects  of  va- 
rious  Wat/irs  on  different  Colours— to  Re-dye  or  change 
Colours^ — Drying  Bath — Sulphate  of  Arsenic — to  Dye 
Compound  Colours — to  Dye  Straw  and  Chip  Bonnets — 
Basis  for  many  Colours. 

Dying  is  a  chomical  process,  and  consists  in  combining  a 
ocjrtain  colouring  matter  with  fibres  of  cloth.  The  facility 
with  which  cloth  imbibes  a  dye,  depends  upon  two  circum- 
stances; the  union  of  the  cloth  and  the  dy^stuff  or  dying 
niateriai,  «ind  the  Ouid  in  which  it  is  dissolved*  Wool  unites 
with  almost  all  colouring  matters,  silk  in  the  next  degree,  cot- 
ton considerably  less,  and  linen  the  least  of  all.  To  dye  cot- 
ton or  linen,  the  dyestuff  or  colouring  material,  should,  in 
many  cases,  be  dissolved  in  a  substance  for  which  it  ha^  a 
weaker  connexion,  than  with  the  solvent  employed  in  the  dy- 
ing of  w/)ol  or  silk;  Thus  vve  may  use  th-e  colour  called  ox- 
ide of  iron,  dissolved  In  sulphuric  acid,  to  die  wool;  but  to 
dye  cotton  and  linen,  it  is  necessary  to  dissolve  it  in  acetous 
acid.  Were  it  possible  to  procure  a  sufficient  number  of  col- 
ouring substances,  biiving  a  strong  affinity  for  cloths,  to  an- 
swer all  the  purpose  the  art  of  dying  would  be  extremely  sim- 
ple and  easy.  Bit  this  is  by  no  nieans  the  case.  This  difTi- 
€ul;y  has,  however^  been  obviated  by  a  very  ingenious  con- 
trivance. Some  other  substance  is  employed  which  strongly 
unites  with  the  cloth,  and  the  colouring  matter.  This  sub- 
stance, therefore,  is  previously  combined  with  i\\e  cloth,  which 
is  then  dipped  into  a  solution  containing  the  colour.  The 
!col(5Llr  then  combines  v/ith  the  intermediate  substances,  which 
being  firmly  combined  with  the  cloth,  secures  the  permanence 
ofthedve.  Substances  employed  for  this  purpose  are  de- 
nominated mordants. 

The  method  of  colouring  a  scarlet  dye,  was  discovered  by 
Cornelius  Drebble,  a  citizen  of  Alemaar,  a  man  extremely 
well  skilled  in  chemistry.  Among  other  ex|)Griments,  he  left 
an  account  of  one,  concerning  the  method  of  dying  wool  with 
a  brightflamc  colour;  which  his  son-in-law  Kufflaar,  after- 
wards put  in  practice,  and  by  v/hich  means^he  iDade  a  fortune. 


170  THE    ARTIST    AxND. 

Spirit  of  nitre  has  been  found  to  improve  the  rich  coh)ur  of 
cochineal,  into  the  brightness  of  burning  fire;  hut  its  acrimony 
corrodes  and  damages  the  wool,  which  is  prevented  by  dul- 
cifying it  wi.h  tin,  after  which,  it  neither  hurts  wood  or  silk. 
Chemistry  is  likewise  obvious  in  another  point  of  view.  "  I 
once  showed,'*  says  the  learned  Boe.rhaave,  "  colours  which 
I  had  prepared  from  solutions  of  copper,  to  some  skilful  mas- 
ter dyers,  who  were  surprised  with  the  beauty  of  them,  and 
would  have  given  any  money  to  have  been  able  to  give  col- 
ours of  such  brightness  to  their  siulTs,  &lc.  ;  and  no  wonder, 
since  the  blue,  violet  and  green  of  copper,  which  may  be  raised 
and  weakened  at  pleasure,  afford  such  a  variety,  that  a  person 
who  can  dye  silk,  woollen,  cotton  or  linen  cloths  therewith 
will  gain  an  immense  estate."  It  has  been  said  by  a  Spanish 
patriot,  that  '*  good  dyers  in  silk  and  wool  are  few  every 
where,  and  it  should  be  considered,"  in  regard  to  this  art,. 
**  we  depend  upon  it  as  one  of  the  most  essential  recommen- 
dations  of  our  manufactured  goods,  and  what  procnres  them 
the  readiest  sale,  both  at  home  and  abroad  ;  for  it  will  turn  to 
small  account  that  the  materials  are  good,  and  well  wrought 
up,  unless  the  mixture  and  colours  be  answerable  and  grate- 
ful to  the  eye  of  the  purchaser. 

The  most  important  part  of  dying  is  the  choice  and  appli- 
cation of  7??orr/rt?tf5;  as  upon  them  the  permanency  of  almost 
every  dye  depends.  Mordants  must  be  previously  dissolved 
in  some  liquid,  which  has  a  weaker  union  with  the  m<jrdant 
than  the  cloth  has;  and  the  cloth  must  then  be  steeped  in 
this  solution,  so  as  to  saturaie  iisdf  with  the  mordant.  The 
most  important  and  most  generally  u.sed  mordant  is  alumine  ; 
it  is  used  in  the  state  of  common  alum,  in  which  it  is  combined 
with  sulphuric  acid,  or  in  that  state  called  acetate  of  alumine. 
Alum  to  make  a  mordant  is  dissolved  in  water,  and  very 
frequently,  a  quantity  of  tartrite  of  potash  is  dissolved  with  it. 
Into  this  solution  the  woollen  cloth  is  put  and  kept  till  it  has 
absorbed  as  much  alumine  as  necessary.  It  is  then  taken  out, 
washed  and  dried. 

Acetate  of  Alumine,  is  prepared  as  a  mordant  by  pouring 
pcetate  of  lead  into  a  solution  of  ahim,  (see  page  37,  acetate 
of  alumine.)  This  mordant  is  emplo^M^d  for  cotton  and  linen. 
It  answers  much  better  for  these  than  alum;  the  stuff  is  more 
easily  saturated  with  alumine,  and  takes  in  consequence,  a 
richer  and  more  permanent  colour.      The  white  oxide  of  tin 


tradesman's  GUIDC.  l?l 

has  enabled  the  moderns  greatly  to  surpass  many  of  the 
ancients,  in  the  (ineness  of  their  colours  ;  and  even  to  equal 
the  famous  Tyrian  purple;  and  by  means  of  its  scailet,  the 
briglitness  of  all  cohujrs  is  produced.  It  is  the  white  oxide 
of  tin  alone  that  is  the  real  mo/dant.  Tin  is  used  as  a  mor- 
dant in  three  states:  dissolved  in  nitro-muriatic  acid,  in  ace- 
tous acid,  and  in  a  mixture  of  sulphuric  and  muriatic  acids  ; 
but  nitro-rauriate  of  tin  is  the  common  mordant  used  by  dy- 
ers. It  is  prepared  by  dissolving  tin  in  diluted  nitric  acid,  to 
which  a  certain  proportion  of  common  salt,  or  sal  a  nmoniac 
is  added.  When  the  nitro-muriate  of  tin  is  to  be  used  as  a 
mordant,  it  is  dissolved  in  a  large  quantity  of  water,  and  the 
cloth  is  dipped  in  the  solution,  and  allowed  to  remain  until 
sufficiently  saturated.  It  is  then  taken  out,  washed  and  dried. 
Tartar  is  usually  dissolved  in  water,  along  with  the  nitro- 
muriate. 

Red  Oxide  of  Iron,  is  also  used  as  as  a  mordant  in  dying ; 
it  has  a  very  strong  affinity  for  all  kinds  of  cloth,  of  w^hich 
the  permanency  of  red  iron  spots,  or  iron  moulds  on  linen  and 
€Otton  is  a  sufficient  proof.  As  a  mordant  it  is  used  in  two 
states  ;  in  that  of  sulphate  of  iron,  or  copperas,  and  that  of 
acetate  of  iron.  The  first,  or  copperas,  is  commonly  used 
f(ir  wool.  The  copperas  is  dissolved  in  water,  and  the  cloth 
dipped  into  it.  It  may  be  used,  also  for  cotton,  but  in  most 
cases  acetate  of  iron  is  preferred,  which  is  prepared  by  dis- 
solving iron  or  its  oxide  in  vinegar,  sour  beer,  or  pyrolignc- 
ous  acid,  and  the  longer  it  is  kept  the  better.  Tan  is  very 
frequently  employ.edas  a  mordant.  An  infusion  of  nutgalls,  ur 
of  sumack,  or  any  other  substances  containing  tan,  is  made  in 
water  ;  and  the  cloth  is  dipped  in  this  infusion,  and  allowed 
to  remain  till  it  has  absorbed  a  sufficient  quantity.  Tan  is 
also  employed  along  with  other  mordants,  to  produce  a  com- 
pound mordant.  Oil  is  also  used  for  the  same  purpose,  in 
dying  cotton  and  linen.  The  mordants  with  which  it  is  most 
frequently  combined,  are  alumine  and  oxide  of  iron.  Besides 
these  mordants,  there  are  several  other  substances  frequently 
used  as  auxiliaries,  either  to  facilitate  the  combination  of  the 
mordant  with  the  cloth,  or  to  alter  the  shade  of  colour  ;  the 
chief  of  these  are,  tartar,  acetate  of  lead,  common  salt,  sal 
ammoniac,  sulphur  of  copper,  &:c.  Mordants  not  only  len- 
der the  dye  perfect,  but  also  have  considerable  influence  on 
the  colour  produced.     The  same  colouring  matter  produces 


172  THE    ARTrST    AND 

vcr}'' diffcront  dyes,  according  as  the  mordant  is  changed.  Sup- 
pose, for  instance,  that  the  colouring  matter  is  cochineal ;  if 
we  use  the  aluminous  mordant,  the  cloth  will  acquire  a  crim- 
son colour  ;  but  the  oxide  ol  iron  produces,  with  it,  a  black. 
In  dying  then,  it  is  not  only  necessary  to  produce  a  mordant, 
and  a  colouring  matter  of  such  a  nature,  that  when  combined 
together,  they  shall  produce  the  wished  for  colour  in  perfec- 
tion. But  we  must  procure  a  mordant  and  a,  colouring  mat- 
ter, of  such  a  nature,  that  when  combined  together,  they 
should  possess  the  wished  for  colour  ;  even  a  great  variety  of 
colours  may  be  produced  v/ith  a  s-iugle  dye  stuff,  provided  we 
change  the  mordmit  sufficiently. 

To  determine  the  effects  of  various  salts  or  mordants  ont 
colours:  1.  The  dye,  of  Madder,  For  a  madder  red  on 
woollens,,  the|best  quantity  of  inadder  is  one  half,  for  the  wool- 
lens that  are  to  be  dyed  ;  the  best  proportion  of  salts  to  be 
used  in  'iiwe  parts  of  alum  and  one  of  red  tarta/,  for  sixteen 
parts  of  the  stuff.  A  variation  in  the  proportions  of  the  salts 
wholly  alters  the  colour  that  the  madder  naturally  gives,  li 
the  alum  is'lessened,  and  the  tartar  increased,  the  dyes  prove 
a  red  cinnamon.  If  the  alum  be  entirely  omitted,  the  red 
wholly  disappears,  and  a  durable  tawny  cinnamon  is  produ- 
ced. If  woollens  are  boiled  in  we^  pearlash  and  water,  the 
greater  part  of  the  colour  is  destroyed.  A  solution  of  soap 
discharges  a  part  of  tlie  calour,  and  leaves  the  remaining  more 
beautiful.  Volatile  alkalies  lieighten  the  red  colour  of  the 
madder,  bi>t  they  make  the  dye  fugitive. 

2.  The  Dye  of  Logwood,  Volatile  alkaline  salts  of  acids 
incline  this  to  purple  ;  the  vegetable  and  nitrous  acids,  ren-. 
der  it  pale  ;  the  vitriolic  and  ntarino  acids  deepen  it. 

3.  Lime  Water.  In  dying  browns  or  blacks,  especially 
bro\yns,  lime  water  is  found  to  be  a  very  good  corrective,  as 
also,  an  alternative  when  the  goods  havie  not  come  to  the 
shades  required  ;  but  practice  alone  can  shew  its  utility  ;  it 
answers  well  for  either  woollens,  silks,  or  cottons. 

4..  To  render  Colours  holding.  Brown  or  blues,  or  shades 
from  them,  require  no  preparation  to  make  them  receive  the 
dye,  and  hold  it  fast  when  they  have  received  it.  Alum  and 
tartar,  boiled  together,  whei]  cold,  form  a  mastic,  within  the 
pores  of  the  substance,  that  serves  to  retain  the  dye,  and  re- 
tlect  the  colour  in  a  manner  transpaiently.  Almost  all  browns 
are  deemed  fast  and  holding  colours,  without  any  preparation^ 


tradesman'*  guide.  i/'ij 

the  (lying  materials  containing  in  themselves  a  sufficient  de- 
gree of  astringent  quality  to  retain  iheir  own  colours.  Many 
reds,  are  also,  equally  holding,  but  none  more  so  than  those 
made  with  madder  on  woollens  prepared  with  alum  and  tar- 
tar. A  ver}^  fast  red  is  also  made  with  brazil  wood,  by  boil- 
ing the  woollen  in  alum  and  tartar,  an  J  suffering^he  cloth  to 
remain  several  days  in  a  bag,  kept  moist  by  the  preparation 
liquor.  The  cause  of  the  solidity  of  the  colour  from  Brazil 
wood,  dyed  after  this  method,  arises  from  the  alum  and  tar- 
tar masticating  itself  within  the  pores  of  the  wool  in  quite  a 
solid  state. 

There  is  not  a  drug  used  in  the  whole  ait  of  dying,  but  may  be  made 
a  permanent  dya,  by  lindin:;-  out  a  salt  or  solution  of  some  metal,  tliat, 
when  once  dissolved  by  acidS;  or  bv  boiling  water,  will  neither  be  atlec- 
ted  by  the  air,  nor  be  dissolved  by  moisture.  Such  are  alum  and  tar- 
tar, the  solution  of  tin,  &c.  But  thfse  salts  and  solutions  do  not  an- 
swer with  all  ingredients  that  are  used  in  dying. 

To  Dye  Wool  and  Woollen  Cloths  of  a  Blue  Colour, — 
One  part  of  indigo  in  four  parts  concentrated  sulphuric  acid, 
dissolved  ;  then  add  one  part  of  dry  carbonate  of  potash,  and 
dilute  with  eight  times  its  weight  q{  water.  The  cloth  must 
be  boiled  for  an  hour  in  a  solution,  containing  five  parts  of 
alum,  and  three  of  tartar,  for  every  thirty-two  parts  of  cloth, 
then  throw  it  into  a  water  bath,  previously  piepared,  contain- 
ing a  greater  cfr  smaller  proportion  of  diluted  sulphate  of  in- 
digo, according  to  the  shade  vvhich  the  cloth  is  inten- 
ded to  receive.  Boil  it  in  the  bath  until  the  colour  desi- 
red is  obtained.  The  only  colouring  matters  ensployed  in 
dying  blue  are  indigo  and  woad.  Indigo  has  a  very  strong 
alBnity  for  wool,  silk,  cotton  and  linen.  Every  cloth,  there- 
fore may  be  dyed  wilh  it  without  the  assistance  of  any  mor- 
dant whatever.  The  colour  thus  induced  is  very  permanent. 
But  indigo  can  only  be  applied  to  cloth  in  a  state  of  solution, 
and  the  only  known  solvent  is  sulphuric  acid,  The  sulphate 
of  indigo  is  often  used  to  dye  v/ool  and  silk  blue,  and  is  known 
by  the  name  of  Saxon  blue. 

It  is  not  the  orly  solution  of  that  pigment  employed  in  dy- 
ing. By  far  the  most  commoii  method  is,  to  deprive  the  in- 
digo of  its  blue  colour,  and  reduce  it  to  green,  and  then  to  dis- 
solve it  in  water  by  means  of  alkalies.  Two  different  meth- 
ods are  employed  fgr  this^  purpose.  The  i  rst,  is,  to  mix  the 
indigo  in  a  solution  of  grocii  oxide  of  iron  and  diricrcnt  mc- 
'      *I5 


174 


THE    AUTIST    ,\Si 


tallic  sulphurels.  If,  therefore,  indigo  lime,  and  green  sul-* 
phate  of  iron  are  mixed  together  in  water,  the  indigo  gradu- 
ally loses  its  blue  colour,  becomes  green,  and  is  dissolved^ 
The  second  method  is,  to  mix  the  indigo,  in  water,  with  cer- 
tain vegetable  substances,  which  readily  undergo  fermenta- 
tion;  the  indigo  is  dissolved  by  means  of  quicklime  or  alka- 
li, whch  is  added  to  the  solution.  The  first  of  these  meth- 
ods is  usually  followed  in  dying  cotton  and  linen  ;  the  second 
in  dying  silk  and  woollen.  In  the  dying  of  wool,  woad  and 
bran  are  commonly  emploved,  as  vogetabho  ferments,^  and 
lime  as  the  solvent  of  the  green  base  of  the  indigo  ;  and  by 
following  the  common  process,  indigo  may  be  extracted  from 
it.  .In  the  usual  state  of  woad,  when  purchased  by  the  dyer, 
the  indigo  which  it  contains,  Is  probably  not  far  from  the 
state  of  green  poUen.  .Its  quantity  in  woad  is  but  small,  and 
it  is  mixed  with  a  great  proportion  of  other  vegetable  matter 
When  the  cloth  is  first  taken  out  of  the  vat,  it  is  of  a  green 
colour,  but  it  soon  becomes  blue.  It  ought  to  be  carefully 
washed  to  carry  off  the  uncombined  particles.  Tbis  solution 
of  indigo  is  liable  to  two  inconveniences  :  1st,  It  is  some- 
times apt  to  run  too  fast,  into  the  putrid  fermentation  ;  this 
may  be  known  by  the  putrid  vapours  which  it  exhales,  and  by 
the  disappearing  of  the  green  colour.  In  this  state  it  would 
soon  destroy  the  indigo  altogether.  The  inconvenience  is 
remedied  by  adding  more  lime,  which  has  the  property  of 
moderating  the  putrescent  tendency.  2Q\y,  Sometimes  the 
fermentation  goes  on  too  languidly.  This  defect  is  remedied 
by  adding  more  bran  or  v/oad,  in  order  to  diminish  the  pro- 
portion of  thick  lime. 

To  make  Chemic  Blue  and  Green.  Chemic,  for  light 
blues  and  greens  on  silk,  cotton,  or  woollen,  and  for  cleaning 
and  whitening  cotton,  is  made  as  follows.  One  pound  of  the 
best  oil  of  vitriol,  poured  on  one  ounce  of  the  best  indigo, 
well  pounded  and  sifted;  add  to  this,  after  it  has  been  well 
stirred,  a  small  lump  of  common  pearlasfi,  as  big  as  a  pea,  or 
from  that  to  double  the  quantity.  When  the  fermentation 
which  is  produced,  ceases,  put  it  it  into  a  bottle  tightly  coik- 
ed,  and  it  may  be  used  the  next  day.  Observe,  if  more  than 
the  quantity  prescribed  of  pearlash  shoukl  be  used,  it  will 
deaden  and  sully  the  colour.  Chemic  for  green  as  above  for 
blue,  is  made  by  only  adding  one-fourth  more  of  the  oil  (  f 
vitriol. 


TRADESMAN'S    GUlDHr  175 

To  make  a  Solution  of  Tin  in  Aqua'Ilegia,  Eight  oun- 
ces filtered  river  water,  and  eight  ounces  double  aqua-fortis  ; 
mix;  add  gradually  half  an  ounce  of  sal  ammoniac,  dissolved, 
piece  by  piece,  and  two  drachms  saltpetre.  Then  take  one 
ounce  of  refined  block  tin  ;  put  it  into  an  iron  pan,  and  set 
it  over  the  fire :  when  melted,  hold  it  four  or  five  feet  over 
the  vessel,  and  drop  it  into  water,  so  as  to  let  it  fall  to  pie- 
ces. Then  put  a  small  piece  of  this  granulated  tin  into  the 
above  aqua-regia,  and  _\yhen  the  last  piece  disappears,  add 
more  gradually  till  the  whole  is  mixed  ;  mind  and  keep  it 
firmly  corked.  Wben  finished  it  will  produce  a  most  excel- 
lent yellow,  though  should  it  fail  in  that  respect,  it  will  not 
be  the  worse  for  use  ;  keep  it  cool,  as  heat  will  injure  it,  and 
even  spoil  it. 

To  make  Muriate  of  Tin,  Take  eight  ounces  muriatic 
acid,  and  dissolve  in  it,  by  slow  degrees,  half  an  ounce  gran- 
ulated tin  ;  when  this  is  done,  pour  of  the  clear  liquid  into  a 
bottle,  and  weaken  it  if  required,  with  pure  river  water. 

To  determine  the  effect  of  various  Waters  on  different 
Colours,  Snow  water  contains  a  little  muriate  of  lime,  and 
some  slight  traces  of  nitrate  of  lime;  rain  water  has  the 
same  salts  in  a  larger  quantity,  and  also  carbonate  of  lime, 
muriate  of  lime,  muriate  of  soda,  or  carbonate  of  sojda.  River 
water  has  the  same  substances,  but  in  less  abundance.  Well 
water  contains  sulphate  of  lime,  or  nitrate  of  potash,  besides 
the  above  menlinncd  salts.  Should  the  water  contain  a  salt 
or  a  mineral  acid,  in  the  first  instance  no  acid  will  be  required 
TO  neutralize  it  ;  or  in  the  second,  an  alkali.  Thus  waters  of 
any  quality  may  be  saturated  by  their  opposites,  and  rendered 
neutral. 

To  discharge  colours.  The  dyers  generally  put  all  col- 
oured silks  which  are  to  be  discharged,  into  a  copper,  in 
which  half  a  pound  or  a  pound  of  white  soap  is  dissolved. 
They  are  then  boiled  off,  and  when  the  copper  begins  to  be 
too  full  of  colour,  the  silks  are  taken  out  and  rinsed  in  warm 
water.  In  the  interim  a  fresh  solution  of  soap  is  to  be 
added  to  the  copper,  and  then  proceed  as  before  till  all  the 
colours  are  discharged.  For  those  colours  which  are  wanted 
to  be  effectually  discharged,  such  as  greys,  cinnamon,  &c, 
when  soap  does  not  do,  tartar  must  be  used.  For  slate  coU 
ours,  greenish  dreibs,  olive  drab,  &:c.  oil  of  vitriol,  in  warm 
'^vatcr   must    be   used  ;  if  other  colours,  rock  alum   must    be 


176  Tilli    ARTIST    ANt>       x 

boiled  in  the  copper,  then  cooled  down,  and  the  silks  entered 
and  boiled  off,  recollecting  to  r^nse  them  before  they  are 
again  dyed.  A  small  quantity  of  muriaic  acid,  diluted  in 
warm  water,  must  be  used  to  discharged  some  fast  colours; 
the  goods  must  be  afterwards  well  rinsed  in  warm  and  cold 
water  to  prevent  any  injury  to  the  stalk. 

To  discharge  Cinnamons,  Greens,  ^'c.  when  dyed  too 
fully,  take  some  tartar  pounded  in  a  mortar,  sift  it  into  a 
bucket,  then  pour  over  it  some  boiling  water.  The  silks, 
&c.  may  then  be  run  through  the  clearest  of  this  liquor, 
which  will  discharge  the  colour,  but  if  the  dye  does  not  take 
on  agam  evenly,  more  tartar  ma}^  be  added,  and  the  goods 
run  through  as  before. 

Tg  Re-Dye,  or  change  the  colour  of  Garments,  S^c,  de- 
pends upon  the  ingredients  by  which  they  have  been  dyed. 
Sometimes  when  these  have  been  well  cleansed,  more  dye 
stuff  must  be  added,  which  will  afford  the  colour  intended, 
and  sometimes  the  colour  already  on  the  cloth  must  be  dis- 
charged and  the  articles  re-dyed. 

Every  colour  in  nature  will  dye  black,  whether  blue,  yellow,  brown, 
or  red  ;  and  black  will  always  dye  black  again.  All  colours  will  take 
the  same  colour  again,  which  they  already  possess;  and  blues  can  be 
ina<ic  green  or  black  ;  green  inay  be  made  brown  and  brown  green; 
and  every  colour  on  re>dying  will  take  a  darker  hue  than  at  first.  Yel- 
lows, browns,  and  blues  are  not  easily  disengaged ;  maroons,  reds,  of 
some  kinds,  olives,  »l^c.  may  be  discharged. 

Olive  Greys,  S^c,  are  discharged  by  putting  in  two  or  three 
table  spoonfuls  more  or  less,  of  oil  of  vitriol,  then  put  in  the 
garments,  &c.  and  boil,  and  it  will  become  white.  If  chemic 
green,  either  alum,  pearlash,  or  soap,  will  discharge  it  off  to 
the  yellow  ;  this  yellow  may  be  mostly  boiled  off  with  soap, 
if  it  has  received  a  preparation  for  taking  the  chemic  blue. 
Muriatic  acid  used  at  hard  heat,  will  discharge  most  colours. 
A  black  may  be  dyed  maroon,  claret  green,  or  a  dark  brown, 
but  ^reen  is  the  principal  colour  into  which  black  is  changed. 

To  alum  Silks.  Silks  should  be  alumed,  when  cold,  for 
when  they  are  alumed  hot,  they  ar3  deprived  of  a  great  part 
of  their  lustre.  The  alum  liquor  should  always  be  strong 
for  silks,  as  they  take  the  dye  more  readily  afterwards. 

To  dye  Silks  Blue.  Silk  is  dyed  light  blue,  by  a  ferment 
of  six  parts,  six  of  indigo,  six  of  potash,  and  one  of  madder. 
For  a  dark  blue,  it  must  previously  receive  what  is  called  a 


tradesman's  guii>e.  177 

ground  colour ;  a  red  die  stufT,  called  archil,  is  used  for  this 
purpose. 

To  dye  Cotton  and  Linen  Blue,  Take  a  solution  of  one 
part  indigo,  one  part  green  sulphate  of  iron,  and  two  parts 
quicklime. 

Yellow  Dyes,  Oxide  of  tin  is  sonietinies  used  when  very 
fine  voUows  are  wanting.  Tan  is  often  employed  as  subsidia- 
ry to  alumine,  and  in  order  to  fix  it  more  copiously  on  cottor^ 
and  linen.  Tartar  is  also  used  as  an  auxiliary,  to  brighten 
tlfe  colour  ;  and  muriate  of  soda,  sulphate  of  lime  and  even 
the  sulphate  of  iron,  to  render  the  shade  deeper.  The  yel- 
low dye,  by  moans  of  fustic  is  more  permanent,  but  not  so 
bcauliful  as  that  given  by  weld  or  quercitron.  As  it  is  per<» 
raanent,  and  not  much  injured  by  acids,  it  is  often  used  in 
dying  compound  colours,  where  a  yellow  is  required.  The 
mordant  is  alumine.  When  it  is  oxide  of  iron,  fustic  dies  a 
good  permanent  drab  colour.  Weld  and  quercitron  hark 
yield  nearly'the  same  colour  ;  but  the  bark  yields  colouring 
matter  in  greater  abundance,  and  is  cheaper  than  weld.  Tho 
method  of  using  each  of  these  dye  stuffs  is  nearly  the  same. 

Yellow  colouring  matters  have  too  weak  an  affinity  for  cloth,  to  pro** 
duce  permanent  colours  without  the  use  of  mordants.  Cloth,  therefore,, 
butore  it  is  dyed  yellow,  is  always  prepared  by  soaking  it  in  alumine. 

To  Dye  Woollens  Yellow,  Let  them  be  boiled  for  an  hour 
or  more,  with  one  sixth  of  its  weight  of  alum,  dissolved  in  a 
sufficient  quantity  of  water  as  a  mordant.  Then  plunge  it 
without  rinsing,  into  a  bath  of  Wtirm  water,  containing  asi 
much  quercitron  bark  as  equals  the  weight  of  the  alum  em- 
ployed as  a  mordant.  The  cloth  Is' to  be  turned  through  tho 
boiling  liquid,  till  it  has  acquired  the  intended  colour.  Then 
a  quantity  of  clean  powdered  chalk,  equal  to  the  hundredth 
part  of  the  weight  of  the  cloth^  is  to  be  stirred  in,  and  the 
operation  of  dying  contined  for  eight  or  ten  minutes  longer. 
This  method  produces  a  pretty  deep  and  lively  yellow.  For  a 
very  bright  orange,  or  golden  yellow,  it  is  necessary  to  use 
the  oxide  of  tin  as  a  mordant.  For  producing  bright  golden 
yellows,  some  alum  must  be  used  along  with  the  tin.  To 
give  the  yellow  a  delicate  green  shade,  tartar  must  be  added 
in  dif/erent  proportions,  according  to  the  shade, 

To  dye  Silks  Yellow,  They  maybe  dyed  different  sliades 
pf  yellow^  either  by  weld  or  quercitron  bark,  but  the  last  i^ 


17S  THE    ARTIST    AND 

the  cheapest.  The  propoi:tion  is  fronrone  to  two  parts  of 
bark,  to  twelve  parts  of  silk,  according  to  the  shade.  Tie 
the  bark  up  in  a  bag,  and  put  it  iritu  the  dying  vessel  while 
the  water  is  cold.  When  it  acquires  the  heat  of  about  100^ 
the  silk  having  been  previously  alumed,  should  be  dipped  in, 
and  continued,  till  it  assumes  the  wished  for  colour.  When 
the  shade  is  required  to  be  deep,  a  little  chalk,  or  pearlash 
should  be  added  towards  the  end  of  the  operation. 

To  dye  Linens  and  Cottons  Yellow,  The  mordant  should 
be  acetate  of  alumine,  prepared  by  dissolving  one  part  of  ace- 
tate of  lead,  and  three  parts  of  alum,  in  a  sufficient  quantity 
of  water.  Heat  the  solution  to  the  temperature  of  100*^, 
soak  the  cloth  in  it  for  two  hours  ;  then  wring  out  and  dry  it. 
This  may  be  again  repeated,  and  if  the  shade  of  yellow  is  re- 
quired to  be  very  bright  and  durable,  the  alternate  wetting 
with  limestone  and  soaking  in  the  mordant  may  be  repeated 
three  or  four  times. 

The  drying  bath  is  prepared  by  putting  twelve  or  eighieen 
parts  of  quercitron  bark,  (according  to  the  depth  of  the  shade 
required)  tied  up  in  a  bag,  into  a  sufficient  quantity  of  cold 
water.  Into  this  bath  the  cloth  is  to  be  put,  and  turned  in  it 
for  an  hour,  while  its  temperature  is  gradually  raised  to  about 
120*^.  It  is  then  to  be  brought  to  a  boiling  heat,  and  the 
cloth  allowed  to  remain  in  it  for  only  a  iew  minutes.  If  kept 
long  at  a  boiling  heat,  the  yellow  acquires  a  shade  of  brown. 

To  fix  a  fine  Mineral  Colour  on  Wool,  Silk,  Cotton,  S^c, 
Mix  one  lb.  sulphur,  two  lbs.  white  oxide  of  arsenic,  and  five 
parts  pearlash  ;  and  melt  in  a  crucible  at  a  little  short  of  red 
heat.  The  result  is  a  yellow  mass,  to  be  dissolved  in  hot  water, 
and  the  liquor  filtrated,  to  separate  from  a  sediment  formed 
cheifly  of  metallic  arsenic,  in  shining  plates,  and  in  a  small 
part  of  a  chocolate  coloured  matter,  which  appears  to  be  a 
sub-sulphuric  acid,  which  produces  a  llacculent  precipitate  of 
a  most  brilliant  yellow  colour.  This  precipitate,  washed  upon 
a  cloth  filter,  dissolves  with  the  utmost  ease  in  liquid  ammonia, 
giving  a  yellow  solution,  which  colour  is  to  be  removed  by  an 
excess  of  the  same  alkali.  • 

To  prepare  the  Sulphurat  of  Arsenic,  This  produces  a 
very  brilliant  and  permanent  yellow.  Dip  into  a  solution  of 
this  more  or  less  dilated,  according  to  th(^  depth  of  tint  re- 
quired, wool,  silk,  cotton  or  linen.  All  metallic  utensils 
must  be  carefully  avoided,     When  the  stuffs  come  out  of  this 


TRADESMAN  S    GUIDE  179 

bath,  they  are  colourless,  but  they  insensibly  take  on  a  yel- 
low hue  as  the  ammonia  evaporates.  They  are  to  be  exposed, 
as  equally  as  possible  to  a  current  of  open  air;  and  when  the 
colour  is  well  come  out,  and  no  longer  heightens,  the}-  are  to 
be  washed  and  dried.  Wool  should  be  fulled  in  the  ammon- 
iacal  solution,  and  should  remain  in  it,  until  it  is  thoroughly 
soaked  ;  then  very  slightly  and  uniformly  pressed,  or  else 
merely  set  to  to  drain  of  itself.  Silk,  cotton,  hemp,  and  flax, 
are  only  to  be  dipped  in  the  dying  liquid,  which  they  easily 
take.  They  must  be  then  well  pressed.  The  sulphuiot 
arsenic  will  give  every  imaginable  tint  to  stuffs,  from  the  deep 
golden  yellow,  which  has  the  invariable  .advantage  of  never 
fading,  of  lasting  even  longer  than  the  stuffs  themselves,  and 
of  resisting  all  re-agents,  except  alkalies.  Hence  it  is  pecu- 
liarly fitted  for  costly  tapestry,  velvets  and  other  articles  of 
furniture  which  are  not  in  danger  of  bemg  washed  with  alka- 
lyes  or  soap  ;  and  to  which  the  durability  of  colour  is  a  most 
importrnt  object.  It  may  also  be  used  with  advantage  in 
paper  staining. 

To  dye  Woollens  Red,  Crimson  and  Scarlet,  Coarse 
w^ooilen  stuffs  are  dyed  red  with  madder,  or  archill  ;  but  fine 
cloth  is  almost  exclusively  dyed  with  cochineal,  though  the 
colour  it  receives  from  kermes  is  more  durable.  Brazil  wood 
is  scarcely  used,  excepting  as  an  auxiliary,  because  the  colour 
which  it  imparts  to  the  wool  is  not  permanent.  Wool  is  dyed 
crimson,  by  first  imprecrnating  it  with  aiumine,  by  means  of 
an  alum  bath,  and  then  boiling  in  a  decoction  of  cochineal, 
till  it  has  acquired  ihe  wished  for  colour.  The  crimson  will 
be  finer  if  the  tin  mordant  is  substituted  lor  alum  ;  indeed,,  it 
is  usual  with  dyers  to  add  a  little  nitro-muriate  of  tin,  when 
they  want  fine  crimsons  ;  the  addition  of  archil  and  potash  to 
the  cochineal  .both  render  the  crimson  darker,  and  gives  it 
the  more  bloom.  '  But  the  bloom  very  soon  vanishes.  For 
the  paler  crimsons,  only  one  half  of  the  cochineal  is  withdrawn, 
and  madder  substituted  in  its  place.  Wool  may  be  dyed  scar-;^ 
let,  by  first  boiling  it  in  a  solution  of  murio-sulphate  of  tin, 
then  dying  it  pale  yellow  with  queacitron  bark,  and  afterwards- 
crimson  with  cochineal,  for  scarlet  is  a  compound  colour,  con- 
sisting of  crimson  mixed  with  a  little  yellow. 

To  carry  the  Colour  into  the  body  of  the  Cloth.  Make 
the  moistened  cloth  pass  through  between  rollers  placed  within 
and  at  the  bottom  of  the  dye  vat,  so  that  the  web,  passi-ng 


iso 


THE    ARTIST    AND 


From  one  windlass  through  the  dye  vat,  and  being  strongly 
compressed  by  the  rollers  in  its  passage  to  another  windlass, 
all  the  remaining  water  is  drawn  out,  and  is  replaced  by  the 
colouring  liquid,  so  as  to  receive  colour  to  its  very  centre. 
The  winding  should  be  Continued  backwards  and  forwards 
from  one  windlass  to  the  other,  and  through  the  rolling  press, 
till  the  dye  is  of  sufficient  intensity. 

To  di/e  Silks  Red,  Crimson,  ^c.  Silk  is  usually  dyed  red 
with  cochineal,  or  carthamus,  and  sometimes  with  Brazil  wood. 
Kermes  does  not  answer  for  silk.  Madder  is  scarcely  ever 
used  for  that  purpose,  because  it  does  not  yield  a  colour 
bright  enough.  Archil  is  employed  to  give  silk  a  bloom;  but 
it  is  scarcely  ever  used  by  itself,  unless  when  the  colour  wan- 
ted is  lilac.  Silk  may  be  dyed  crimson  by  steeping  it  in  a 
solution  of  alum,  and  then  dying  it  in  the  usual  way,  in  cochi- 
neal bath.  The  colours  knovvn  by  the  name  of  poppy,  cherr}^ 
rose,  and  flesh  colour  are  given  to  siiks  by  nieans  of  cartha- 
mus. The  process  consists  merely  in  keeping  the  silk,  as  long 
as  it  extracts  any  colour  in  an  alkaline  solution  of  carihamus, 
into  which  as  much  lemon  juice  as  gives  it  a  fine  cherry  red 
colour,  has  been  poured.  Silk  cannot  be  dyed  a  full  scarlet ; 
but  a  colour  approaching  to  scarlet  niay  be  given  to  it,  by  first 
impregnating  the  stuff  with  mUrio-sulphate  of  tin,  and  after- 
guards dying  it  in  a  bath,  composed  of  four  parts  of  cochineal, 
and  four  parts  of  quercitron  bark.  To  give  the  colour  more 
body,  both  the  mordant  and  the  dye  may  be  repeated.  A  col- 
our approaching  scarlet  may  be  given  to  silk,  by  first  dying  it 
in  crimson,  then  dying  it  wilh  carthanins;  and  lastly,  yellow 
without  heat. 

To  df/e  Linens  and  Cottons  Red,  ^c.  Cotton  and  linen 
are  dyed  red  with  madder.  The  process  was  borrowed  from 
the  east ;  hence  the  colour  is  often  called  Adrianople,  or  Tur- 
key red.  The  cloth  is  first  im{)regnated  with  oil,  then  with 
galls,  and  lastly  with  alum.  It  is  then  boiled  for  an  hour  in 
a  decoction  of  madder,  which  is  commonly  mixed  wilh  a 
quantity  of  blood.  After  the  cloth  is  dyed,  it  is  plunged  into 
a  soda  lye,  in  order  to  heighten  the  colour.  The  red  giyeni 
by  this  process  is  very  jjermanent,  and  when  properly  con- 
ducted, it  is  •exceedingly  beautiful.  The  whole  difficulty 
consists  in  the  application  of  the  mordant,  which  is  by  far  tlie 
most  complicated  in  the  whole  art  ofdyine.  Cotton  may  I) 
dyed   scarlet,  by  means  of  murio-sulphate   of  tin,  cochineal . 


^tid   quercitron  bark,  used  ai  for  silk,   but  the  colour  is  tOQ 
■fadJHg  to  be  of  any  value. 

Black  Dye.  The  substapxes  employed  to  give  a  black 
colour  to  cloth,  ar«  red  ox^'de  of  iron,  attd  ta»u  Tliese  two 
^ubsiances  have  a  strung  affinity  fen-  each  other,  and  when 
corabiried,  assume  a  deep  black  colour,  not  liable  to  be  de- 
stroyed by  the  action  of  air  or  light.  Logwood  is  usually 
'employed  as  an  auxiHary,  because  it  communicates  lustre,  and 
adds  considerably  te  the  fulness  of  the  black.  The  decoc* 
tion  is  at  lirst  a  fine  rod,  borderirig  on  violet ;  b«t  if  Xah  to 
Itself,  it  gradually  assumes  a  black  colour.  Acids  give  it  a 
deep  red  colour,  alkalies,  a  deep  violet,  inclining  to  brown  ; 
sulphate  of  iron  renders  it  as  black  as  ink,  and  occasions  a 
precipitate  of  the  same  colour,  cloth  before  it  receves  black 
colour,  is  usually  dieiJ  blue;  this  renders  the  colour  much  ful- 
ler atid  finer  than  it  would  otherwise  be.  If  the  cloth  is 
coarse,  the  blue  dye  may  bie  too  expensivt>  ;  in  that  case,  u 
l^rown  coi(  ur  is  grven,  by  means  of  walnut  peels. 

To  dye  Woollens  Black.  Wool  is  dyed  black  by  the  fol* 
lowing  process.  It  is  boiled  for  two  hours  in  a  decoction  of 
iiut^alls,  and  afterwards  kept,  for  two  hours  more,  in  a  bath, 
compose.!  .'f  logwood  and  sulphate  of  iron  ;  kept  during  the 
whole  time, 'at  a  scalding  heat,  but  not  boiling.  During  tho 
operation,  it  must  be  frequently  exposed  to  the  air;  because 
the  green  oxide  of  irotr^  of  which  the  sulphate  is  composed, 
must  be  converted  into  red  oxide,  by  absorbing  oxygen,  be- 
fore the  cloth  can  acquire  a  proper  colour.  The  common 
proportions,  are  five  parts  gnljs,  (we  sulphate  of  iron,  and  30 
of  logwood  for  every  iCO  of  cloth.  A  little  acetate  of  copper 
is  commonly  added  to  \\'\^  sulphate  of  iron,  because  it  is 
thought  to  improve  the  colour. 

To  Dye  Silks  Black,  Silk  is  dyed  nearly  in  the  same  man- 
ner.  It  is  capable  of  combining  with  a  great  deal  of  (an  ;  tho 
quantity  is  varied  at  ti.e  pleasure  of  the  artist,  by  allowing  the 
silk  to  remain  a  longer  or  a  shorter  time  in  th»-  decoction. 

To  Dye  Cottons  and  Linens  Black.  The  cloth  previ- 
ously (}iyed  bine,  is  steeped  f<.r  twvrity-four  hr,u]s  in  a  de((  c- 
tion  of  nutgalls.  '  A  bath  is  prepared,  containini;j  acetate  of 
iron,  formed  by  saturating  acetous  acid  with  brown  oxide  of 
iron  ;  into  this  bath  the  cloth  is  put,  in  small  quantities  at  a 
time,  wrought  with  the  hand  for  a  quarter  of  an  hour  ;  then 
wrung  out  and  dyed  again;  wrought  in  a  fresli  quantity  of  the 

16 


152  THE    ARTIST    AKP 

bath,  and  afterwards  airod.  These  alternate  processes  ari 
repeated  till  the  colour  wanted  is  given  ;  a  decoction  of  aider 
bark  is  usually  mixed  with  the  liquor  containing  the  nut- 
galls. 

To  Dye  Wool^  S^c,  Brown,  Brown  or  Hiwn  colour,  though 
in  fact,  a  compound,  is  usually  ranked  among  the  simplo  col- 
ours, because  it  is  applied  to  cloth  b>  a  single  pr(»cess.  Va- 
rious substances  are  used  for  brown  dyes.  Walnut  peels,  of 
the  green  covering  of  the  walnut,  when  first  separated,  are 
white  internally,  but  soon  assume  a  brown,  or  even  a  black 
colour,  on  exposuri3  to  the  air.  They  readily  yield  their  co- 
louring matter  to  water.  They  are  usually  kept  in  large  casks, 
covered  with  water^  for  above  a  year  before  they  are  used. 
To  die  wool  brown  with  them,  nothing  more  is  necessary, 
than  to  steep  the  cloth  in  a  decoction  of  them,  till  it  has  ac- 
quired the  wished  for  coL'ur.  The  depth  of  the  shade  is  pro- 
portioned t<^>  the  strength  of  the  decoction.  The  root  of  the 
walnut  tree  contains  the  same  colouring  matter,  but  in  a  smal- 
ler quantity.  The  bai  k  of  the  birch  also,  and  many  other 
trees,  may  be  used  fur  the  san  e  purpose. 

To  Dye  Compound  Colours,  Compound  colours  are  pro- 
duced by  mixing:  together  two  sim|)le  ones;  or  which  is  the 
same  thing  by  dying  cloth  first  of  the  simple  colour,  and  then 
by  another.  These  colours  vary  to  infinity,  according  to  the 
proportions  of  the  ingredients  employed.  From  blue,  red 
and  yellow,  red  (dives,  and  greenish  greys  are  made. 

From  bluCj  red  and  h\'o\vn,  olives  are  made  from  the  light- 
est to  the  daikest  shides  ;  and  by  giving  a  greater  shade  of 
red,  the  slated  and  lavender  greys  are  made. 

From  blue,  red  and  blncU,  greys  of  all  shades  are  made, 
such  as  sage,  pigeon,  slate  and  lead  greys. 

From  yellow,  blue  and  brown,  are  made  olives  of  all  kindsi 

From  brown,  blue  and  black,  are  pioduced  broicn  olivesi 
and  their  shades. 

From  red,  \ellow  and  brown^  are  derived  the  orange^  gold 
colour,  dead  carnations,  crnnamon,  fawn  and  tobacco,  by 
using  two  or  three  of  the  colours  required.  " 

From  yellow,  red  and  \}]^Q\i,  browns  of  every  shade  are 
made. 

From  blue  and  yellow,  greens  of  all  shades. 

From  red  and  blue,  purples  of  alj  kinds  are  foimed. 

To  Dye  different  shades  of  Green,     Wool,  silk  and  linen 


are  usually  dyed  green,  by  giving  tliem  first  a  blue  colour  ;  and 
afiorvvcuds  dying  ihem  yellow;  when  ihe  ycll(AV  is  first  given 
several  inconveniences  ibliovv  i  the  yellow  panly  separates 
again  in  ibe  blue  vat,  and  communicaies  a  green  colour  to  it, 
then  rendering  it  useless  for  every  other  purpose,  except  dy- 
ing green.  Any  of  the  usual  processes  fnr  dying  blue  and 
3'ellovv  may  be  followed^  taking  care  to  proportion  the  depth 
of  th«  shades  to  that  of  the  green  required.  VVhen  sulphate 
of  indigo  is  employed,  it  is  usual  to  mix  all  the  ingredients 
together,  and  to  dye  the  cloth  at  once  ;  this  produces  what  is 
known  by  the  name  of  Saxon,  or  English  green. 

To  Dye  Violet^  Purple  and  Lilac.  Wool  is  generally  first 
died  blue,  and  afterwards  scarlet,  in  the  usual  manner.  By 
means  of  c(fchineal  mixed  with  sulphate  of  indigo,  the  pro- 
cess may  be  performed  at  once. 

Silk  is  first  died  crimson  b^  means  of  cochineal,  and  then 
dipped  into  the  indigo  vat.  Cotton  and  linen  are  first  died 
blue,  and  then  dipped  in  a  decoction  of  logwood,  but  a  more 
permanent  colour  is  given  by  means  of  oxide  of  iron. 

To  Dye  OUve^  Orangs^  and  Cinnamon.  When  blue  is 
combined  with  red  and  yellow  on  cloth,  tiie  resulting  colour 
is  olive.  Wool  may  be  dyed  orange,  by  first  dying  it  scarlet, 
and  then  yellow.  When  it  is  dyed  first  with  madder,  the  re- 
sult is  a  cinnamon  colo.ur.  Silk  is  dyed  orange  by  means  of 
carthamus  ;  a  cinnamon  colour  by  logwood^  Brazil  wood,  and 
ifustic,  mixed  together.  Cotton  and  linen  receive  a  cinnamon 
colour  by  means  of  weld  and  madder;  and  an  olive  colour 
i)y  being  passed  through  a  blue,  yellow,  and  then  a  madder 
bath. 

To  Dye  Grey,  Drab,  and  dark  Brown.  If  cloth  is  pre- 
viously combined  with  brown  oxide  of  iron,  and  afterwards 
dyed  yellow  with  quercitron  bark,  the  result  will  be  a  drab  of 
.different  shades,  according  to  the  portion  of  mordant  employ- 
ed. When  the  proportion  is  small,  the  colour  inclines  to  ol- 
ive, or  yellow  ;  on  the  contrary,  the  drab  may  be  deepened, 
jor  saddened  as  the  dyers  term  it,  by  mixing  a  little  sumach 
with  the  bark. 

To  DyA  Olives,  Bottle  Greens,  Purples,  Browns,  Cinna- 
mons, or  Snuffs.  Take  common  iron  liquor^  or  alum  dissol- 
ved in  it,  a  quantity  of  each  according  to  the  shade  wanted, 
made  into  a  paste  or  liquid  by  adding  flour,  gum,  glue,  lin- 
;seedj  or  one   or  more   of  them.     Then  put  the  compQsition 


J$4  THE    AKTt«T    .H:^S^ 

into  a  tab  connected  with  a  machine  used  for  sucli  purposes 
take  theni  from  the  machine,  and  hang  them  up  in  a  very 
cool  room:  where  they  shoiiid  remain  until  dry.  Take  €ow\v 
m.anure,  put  it  into  a  large  copper  of  hot  water,  and  mix  well 
together  ;  through  which  pass  tlve  cloth,  until  thoroughly  sof- 
tened. After  this  process,  cleanse  the  goi)ds  *  then  take  a 
liquor  made  of  madder,,  logwood,  sumach,,  fustic,  Brazil  wood^ 
quercitron  bark,,  peach,  or  other  woods,,  to  produce  the  colour 
wanted,  or  more  of  them ;  ai>d  if  necessary  dilute  this  liquor 
with  water,  according  to  the  shade  or  fulness  of  the  colour 
wanted  to  be  died.  Then  work  the  goods  through  this  H~ 
quor ;  after  which  pass  them  through  eold  or  warm  water, 
according  to  colour,  the  proper  application  of  wjiich  is  well 
known  to  dyers,  adding  a  little  alum,  copperas,  or  Roman 
vitriol,  or  two  or  more  of  them  first  dissolved  in  water.  Then* 
wash  them  off  in  warm  water,  and  dry  them.  But  if  the  co- 
lour is  not  sufficiently  full,  repeat  the  same  operation  till  it  is. 
brought  to  the  colour  required. 

To  Dife  a  Black  upon  Cotton,  Line^ty  and  mixed  Go&ds,  is 
effected  by  tar  and  iron  liquar  of  the  best  quality,  adding  ta 
each  gallon  of  the  mixture,  a  pound  of  fine  flour.  Some  take 
common  iron  liquor,  and  add  three  quarters  of  fine  flour,  and 
by  boiling,  briHrg  it  to  the  consistence  of  a  thin  paste,  or  in- 
stead of  flour,  add  glue  or  linseed,  or  gum,  or  all  of  them 
mixed  together,  and  brought  to  a  proper  thickness.  The  rest 
of  the    process   is    conducted  in  a  similar  manner  to  the  last. 

To  Dye  Crimson,  Red,  Orange,  or  Yell&w,  Take  red  li* 
quor,  such  as  is  generally  made  from  alum,  and  dilute  it  with* 
water  according  to  the  strength  or  shade  of  colour  wanted  to 
dye,  bringing  it  to  the  consistency  of  a  paste  or  liquid,  as  be- 
fore described  ;  then  pass  the  cloth  through  the  machine^ 
which,  being  dried  in  a  cool  room,  pass  it  through  the  opera- 
tion as  described  in  the  article  on  olives,  bottle  greens,  &c<^ 
then  take  a  quantity  of  liquor  made  of  cochineal,  madder,, 
peach  wood,  Brazil,  logwood,,  woad,  fustic,,  sumach,  or  any 
two  or  more  of  them,  proportioned  in  strength,  to  the  shade 
or  colour  wanted  to  dye,  and  work  the  goods  through  this  li 
quor,  till  they  are  brought  to  the  shade  of  colour  required  ; 
then  wash  them  iu  cold  or  warm  water  and  dry  them. 

2^0  Dyt  Cottony  Wool^and  Silk  with  Prus&ian  Blue,  Im- 
jneisethe  cotton  iix  a  large  tub  of  water  slightly  acidulated 
nkni  charged  with  Frus&iatc  of  potashc.     These  sorts  qC  stw?* 


dyed  in  Prussian  blue,  and  then  In  olire  transformed  into 
green,  are  particularly  sought  after  in  trade.  By  processes 
analogous  to  those  employed  for  common  stuffs,  tho  inventor 
has  obtained  the  same  shades  and  colours,  on  samples  of  silk, 
and  for  many  years  he  has  succeeded  in  fixing  Prussian  bluo 
on  wool ;  and  in  producing  on  cloth  the  same  shades,  as  on 
cotton  and  silk. 

To  precipitate  Acetates  of  Lead  and  Copper  on  IVoof^ 
Silk,  and  Cotton,  Soak  tlie  stuff  to  be  dyed,  in  a  solution  of 
acetate,  or  rather  sub-acetate,  of  lead,  wring  it  when  taken 
out  of  the  bath,  dry  in  the  shade  ;  then  wash  it  and  immerso 
it  in  water  charged  with  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gns.  Thi> 
process  produces  in  a  tew  minutes,  rich  and  well  laid  sliade.*, 
which  vary  from  the  clear  vigone  colour,  to  the  deep  brown, 
according  to  the  force  of  the  mordant,  and  the  number  of  iho 
immersions  of  the  stuffs  in  the  two  bathing  vessels.  From 
the  order  of  affinities,  it  is  the  wool  which  takes  colour  tlit*! 
best,  afterwards  the  silk,  then  the  cotton,  and  lastly  the  thrca  i 
which  appears  little  apt  to  combine  with  the  mord<<nt.  Thi 
different  colours  above  indicated  resist  the  air  well,  likcwisti 
feeble  acids,  alkalies,  and  boiling  soap,  which  modify  their 
shades  in  an  imperceptible  manner,  and  these  shades  are  so 
striking,  that  it  will  appear  difficult  to  obtain  th'em  in  any 
other  way* 

This  new  kind  of  dye  is  very  economical ;  the  sulphuretted  hydrogen 
gas  is  obtained  Irom  a  mixture  of  two  parts  of  iron  filings  and  one  of 
brifBst-tme,  inelted  in  a  pot  ,*  the  brimstone  is  bruised,  introduot'd  into  a* 
matras3,  and  the  gas  is  removed  by  stilphuric  acid,  extended  in  water  to 
a  mild  heat.     The  gas  absorbs  abundantly  in  cold  water. 

To  Dye  Cotton  Cloth  Black,  Take  a  quantity  of  INIo- 
laoca  nuts,  and  boil  them  in  water,  in  close  earthen  vessels, 
with  the  leaves  of  the  tiee.  During  the  boiling,  a  whitish 
substance,  formed  from  the  mucilage  and  oil  of  the  nuts,  will 
rise  to  the  surface;  this  must  be  taken  off  and  preserved. 
The  cloth  intended  to  be  black  mu^t  be  printed  witii  this 
scum,  and  then  died,  after  which,  let  \\  bo  passed  throug'i 
lime-water,  when  the  painted  figure?  wiU  be  changed  to  a  fii-l 
and  permanent  black. 

To  Di/e  Wool  a  permanent  Blue  Colour,  Take  four 
ounces  of  tlie  best  indigo,  reduce  it  to  a  fine  powder  and  add 
twelve  pounds  of  wool,  in  tho  grease;  put  the  wliole  inti)  a 
copncr  largo  enough  to  contain  all  the  wool  to  bo  died.     As 


1B6  the  ^KTliT    /i^^' 

soon  as  the  requisite  colour  is  abtained^  let  the  wool  be  well 
washed  ami  dried^  The  liquor  remaining,  niay  be  agajn  used^ 
to  produce  lighter  blues.:  The  eolour  will  be  very  beauiiful, 
and  permaneiit  as  ihe  tinest  blue  produced  by  woad  }  and  the 
wool,,  by  this  raethod  will  lose  less  in  wei^dit,  than  if  it  had 
been  previously  secured. 

To  produce  Ike  Swiss  deep  and  pah  Med  iopieal  Mordants 
When  the  cloth  b«s  b(^en  fioed  by  stepping  and  beiiing  in  soap 
and  water,  from  ibe  pt^ste  used  by  the  weaver,  aiui  any  other 
innpurities  it  may  h'ive  acquired,.  in>mers^'  it  thoroughly,  or  a* 
it  is  called,  tramp  or  pad  it  m  a  solution  ©f  any  alkali^  an(J 
wil  or  grease,  forming  an  imperfect  soap  dissolved  in  water,  or 
in  a;  solution  of  soda  and  gallipoli  oil,  jn  the  proportion  of 
one  gallon  of  oil  to  twenty  gallons  of  soda  lees,  at  the  strength 
of  four  degrees  and  a  half,^  then  dry  the  cloth  in  the  stove^, 
and  repeat  the  process  several  times,  which  may  be  varied  at 
pleasure,  according  to  the  lustie  and  durability  of  the  colour 
wanted,,  stove  drying  the  cloth  between  every  immersion.  To 
the  above  solutions  a  little  sheep's  manure  for  the  first  three 
imn>ersions;  after  the  cloth  has  been  immersed  in  these  11- 
quoi  ji,  steep  it  in  a  quantity  of  water,,  for  twelve  hours,  at 
1 10  deg*  Fahrenlieit  ;^  the  chnh  being  again  stove  dried  isv 
immersed  in  a  solution  of  alkali  and  oil,  or  grease,  or  boiled 
in  perfect  soap  dissolved  ;  which  process  ntust  [be  repeated^ 
according  to  the  brilliancy  of  the  colours  wanted  ;  stone  dry- 
ing as  before  between  every  immersion  ;  these  are  called  the 
white  liquors.  Steep  the  cloth  for  twelve  hours,  cit  12'">  deg, 
Fahrenheit,  which  forms  what  is  called  the  white  stee-n,  The 
doth  being  now  thorougliiy  washed  ir.  cold  water,  and  dried., 
is  ready  to  rnceive,  firsr,  the  pink  mordant,  comf^oscd  as  fol-^ 
lows  :  equal  quantities  by  measuremeni  of  a  decoction  of 
galls,  at  the  stren-gJi  of  four  to  si:<,  and  a  solution  of  aUfrn  at 
one  half. degree,  the  alum  being  previously  saturated  with 
whTtening,  or  any  o  her  alkali,  in  the  proportion  of  one  ounce 
to  the  pound  weight  of  alum  ;  mix  thein  together,  and  raise 
the  ten)f)erat  ire  to  140  deg.  of  Fahrenheit,  or  as  hot  as  can 
be  handled.  By  immersion,  as  formerly  mentioned  in  this 
mixtuie,  niie  clo.h  when  died  and  cleared,  exhibits  a  beauti- 
ful pink,  equal,  if  n(;t  superior  to  that  produced  by  cochi- 
rieal. 

To  dye  Silks  and  Safins  Brown,   in  the  small  way.     Fill 
tlic  copper  with    river  water  ;   when  it  gently  boil*,  put  in  a 


quarter  of  a  pound  of  chipped  fustic,  two  ounces  of  madder, 
one  ounce  of  sumach,  and  half  an  ounce  of  camwood,  but  if  it 
is  not  required  to  be  so  red,  the  camwood  may  be  omitted. 
These  should  boil  at  least,  from  half  an  hour  to  two  hours, 
that  the  ingredients  may  be  well  incorporated.  The  copper 
must  then  be  cooled  down  by  pouring  in  cold  water;  the 
goods  may  then  be  put  in  and  simmered  gently  from  half  to 
an  hour.  - 

If  this  colour  should  aj>pear  to  want  darkening,  it  may  be  done  by 
takinir  out  the  goods  ;  and  adding  a  small  quantity  of  old  black  iiq,uor  > 
a  small  piece  of  green  copperas  may  be  used  ;  ri»se  in  two  or  three 
waters,  and  hang  up  to  dry. 

To  dyt  Silk  Faton  Colour  Drabs.  Boil  one  ounce  fustic^ 
half  an  ounce  of  alder  bark,  and  two  drachms  of  archil.  From 
one  to  four  drachms  of  the  best  madder  must  be  added  to 
a  very  small  quantity  of  old  black  liquor,  if  it  required 
darker. 

2^0  die  a  Silk  Shawl  Scarlet,  Dissolve  two  ounces  of 
white  soap  in  boiling  water,  handle  tire  shawl  through  the 
liquor,  rubbing  such  places  with  the  hands  as  may  appear 
dirty.  A  second  or  third  liquor  may  be  used,  if  required  ; 
after  which  rinse  out  the  shawl  in  warm  water.  Then  take 
half  an  ounce  of  the  best  Spaniirh  arnotto,  dissolve  it  in  hot 
water;  pour  the  solution  into  a  pan  of  warm  water,  handle 
the  shawl  in  it  a  quarter  of  an  hour,  then  rinse  it  in  clean 
water.  In  the  meanwhile  dissolve  a  piece  of  alum,  of  the 
size  of  a  horse  bean  in  warm  water,  let  the  shawl  remain  in 
this  half  an  hour,  then  rinse  it  in  clean  water.  Now  boil  a 
quarter  of  an  ounce  of  the  best  cochineal  for  twenty  minutes, 
^lip  it  out  of  the  copper  into  a  pan,  let  the  shawl  remain  in 
this  from  twenty  minutes  to  half  an  hour,  when  it  will  become 
a  blood  red  ;  then  take  it  out  and  add  to  the  liquor  in  the 
pan,  a  quart  more  out  of  tiie  copper,  if  there  is  as  much  re- 
maining, and  about  half  a  small  wine  glass  full  of  the  solution 
of  tin  ;   w.hen  cold,  rinse  it  out  slightly  in  cold  water. 

To  dye  a  Silk  Shawl  Crimson,  Take  about  a  table- 
spoonful  of  cudbear,  put  it  into  a,  small  pan,  pour  boiling  wa- 
ter upon  it,  stir  and  let  it  stand  a  few  minutes,  then  put  in  the 
silk,  and  turn  it  over  a  short  time,  ahd  when  the  colour  is  full 
enough,  take  it  out;  but  if  it  should  require  more  violet  or 
crimson,  add  a  spoonful  or  two  oi  purple  archil  to  some  warm 
water,  and  dry  it  within  doors.  To  finish,  it  must  be  calen» 
do/cd,  and  then  pressed. 


ISg  TK£    ARTIST    AND 

To  di/e  thick  Silks,  Satins,  Silk  Stockings,  ^c,  Plesh 
Colour.  Wash  the  stockings  clean  in  soap  and  water,  and 
rinse  in  hot  'vatcr ;  if  they  should  not  appear  perfectly  clear, 
cut  half  an  ounce  of  white  soap  into  slices,  put  it  into  a  sauce 
pan  half  full  of  boiling  water;  when  it  is  dissolved,  cool  the 
water  in  the  pan,  then  put  in  stockings,  and  simmer  twenty 
minutes,  when  they  should  be  rinsed  in  hot  water;  in  the  in- 
terim pour  three  table  spoonfuls  of  purple  archil  into  a  wash 
basin  half  full  of  hot  water  ;  dye  the  stockings  in  this  liquor, 
and  when  nearly  of  the  shade  of  half  violet  or  lilac,  slightly 
rinse  them  in  cold  water;  when  dry,  hang  them  up  in  a  close 
room,  in  which  sulphur  is  burnt ;  when  they  are  evenly 
bleached  to  the  shade  required,  finish  by  rubbing  the  right 
side  with  a  flannel.  Some  prefer  calendering  them  afterwards. 
Satins  and  silks  are  done  in  the  same  way. 

To  dye  Silk  Stockings  Black,  These  are  dyed  like  other 
silks,  excepting  they  must  be  steeped  a  day  or  two  in  black 
liquor,  before  they  are  put  into  the  black  silk  dye.  At  fii'st 
they  will  look  like  an  iron  grey,  but  to  finish  and  black  them, 
they  must  be  put  on  wooden  legs,  laid  on  a  table  and  rubbed 
with  the  oily  rubber  or  flannel,  upon  which  is  oil  of  olives. 
For  each  pair  it  will  require  half  a  tablespoonful  of  oil,  and 
half  an  hour's  rubbing,  to  finish  them  well. 

To  dye  Straw  and  Chip  Bonnets  Black.  Chip  hats  are 
stained  black  in  various  ways.  1st.  By  being  boiled  in  strong 
logwood  liquor  three  or  four  hour's  ;  they  must  be  often  taken 
out  to  cool  in  the  air,  and  occasiouc^lly  a  small  quantity  of 
copperas  must  be  added.  The  bonnets  may  be  kept  in  the 
vessel  containing  the  liquor  one  night,  and  in  the  morning 
dried  in  the  air,  and  brushed  with  a  soft  brush.  Lastly,  a 
sponge  is  dipped  in  oil,  and  squeezed  almost  to  dryness;  with 
this  rub  them  all  over.  Some  boil  them  on  logwood,  and  in- 
stead of  -copperas,  use  steel  filings  steeped  in  vinegar  ;  when 
they  are  finished  as  above. 

To  dye  Black  Cloth  Qreen^  Clean  tiie  cloth  well  with 
bullock's  gall  and  water  ;*  rinse  in  warm  water;  make  a  cop- 
per full  of  river  water  boiling  hot,  and  take  from  one  to  one 
pound  and  a  half  of  fustic  ;  add  to  the  water,  and  boil  twenty 
minutes  ;  put  in  a  lump  of  alum  of  the  size  of  a  walnut  ;  when 
dissolved,  put  in  the  article  to  be  dyed,  and  boil  twenty  min- 
utes ;  then  take  it  out,  and  add  a  small  wine  glass  three  parts 
full  of  chemic  blue,  and  boil  again  from  half  to  an- hour,  when 


TRADESMAN'S    GlBiD£.  M$i 

the  cloth  will  become  a  beautiful  green  ;  than  wash  out  and 
dry. 

Saxon  Blue,  ScoWs  Liquid  Blue,  Indigo,  one  pound,  oil 
of  vitriol  four  pounds — dissolve  by  keeping  the  botte  in  boil- 
ing water  ;   then  add  twelve  pounds  of  water,  or  q.  p. 

Art  excellent  dye,  the  basis  of  many  colours,  A  decoctioa 
of  the  seeds  of  red  Trefoil  is  mixed  with  different  mineral 
substances;  the  dyos  produced  are  very  beautiful,  and  of  a 
great  variety.  Among  them  are  ytjllow  and  green  of  differ- 
ent shades,  as  aUo  citron  and. orange  colours.  These  dyes 
are  well  adapted  to  woollen  and  cotton  manufactures:  they 
resist  the  action  of  the  substances,  with  which  trials  arq^ 
usually  made,  much  better  than  the  common  dyes. 

Pink  Dye,  Tie  saiflower  in  a  bag  and  wash  it  in  water, 
until  it  no  longer  colours  the  water  ;  then  dry  it  :-^of  this 
take  two  drachms,  salt  of  tartar,  eighteen  grains,  spirijrs  of 
wine,  seven  drachms  ;  digest  for  two  hours,  add  two  ounces 
of  distilled  water,  digest  for  two  hours  moie,  and  add  a  suf- 
ficient quantity  of  distilled  vinegar  or  lemon  juice,  to  render 
it  a  fine  rose  cojuur,  used  as  a  cosmetic  and  to  make  French. 
rouge. 

Nankeen  Dye.  Arnotto,  prepared  kali,  of  each  equal 
parts,  boiled  in  water; — -the  proportion  of  the  kali  is  altered 
as  the  colour  is  required  to  be  deeper  or  lighter  ;  used  to  res-? 
tore  the  colour  of  faded  naniceen. 

Scarlet  Colour — Muriate  of  Tin,  Prepare  the  nitro- 
muriatic  acid  by  mixing  one  part  of  muriatic  acid  with  two  of 
nitric  acid,  and  put  a  veiy  small  quantity  into  a  Florence  flask. 
Drop  tin  into  it  b}'^  small  quantities,  that  it  may  not  become, 
too  hot  by  the  rapid  union  of  the  tin  and  acid.  Aftei  the 
acid  is  saturated,  dissolve  some  of  it  in  water.  Dissolve  in 
water  in  a  wine-glass,  a  single  cochineal  insect  of  the  shops, 
and  drop  in  a  little  muriate  of  tin,  and  it  will  become  a  bright 
scarlet. 

CHAPTER  XXVI.    . 

The    art   of  Calico  printing ^  to   prepare  dying  materials — 
Litmus — Saffron — Woad — -Indigo — Potatoe   tops,  Sfc, 

This  art  consists  in  dyinsf  cloth  with  certain  colours  and 
figures  upon  a  ground  of  a  different  hue  :  the  colours,  whet\ 
thf^v  will  not  ta{<,€    hold   of  the  cloth  readily,  being  fixed  Xf\ 


190  THE    AUtlST    AN£> 

them  by  means  of  mordants,  as  a  preparation  of  alum  made 
by  dissolving  three  pounds  alum  and  one  pound  of  acetate  of 
lead,  in  eight  pounds  of  warm  water.  There  are  added  at 
the  same  time,  two  ounces  of  potash,  and  two  ounces  of  chalk. 
Acetate  of  iron,  is  also  a  mordant  in  frequent  use;  but  the 
simple  mixture  of  alum  and  aceiate  of  lead,  is  tbund  lo  an- 
swer best  as  a  mordant.  The  mordants  are  applied  to  the 
cloth,  either  with  a  penci',  or  by  means  of  blocks,  on  which 
the  pattern,  according  to  which  the  cotton  is  to  be  printed  is 
applied,  is  cut.  As  they  are  applied  to  only  particular  parts 
of  the  cloth,  care  must  be  taken  that  none  of 'them  spread  to 
the  "part  of  the  cloth  which  is  to  be  left  white,  and  that  they 
do  not  interfere  with  another,  when  several  are  applied  ;  it 
is  necessary,  therefore,  that  the  mordants  should  be  of  such  a 
degree  of  consistence,  that  they  will  not  spread  beyond  those 
parts  of  the  doth,  on  which  they  are  applied.  Tlfis  is  done 
by  thickening  them  with  flour  or  starch,  when  they  are  to  be 
put  on  with  the  pencil.  The  thickening  should  never  be 
greater  than  is  sufficient  to  prevent  the  spreading  of  the  mor- 
dants ;  when  carried  too  far,  the  cotton  is  apt  not  to  be  suffi- 
ciently saturated  with  the  mordants,  and  of  course  the  dye 
takes  but  imperfectly.  In  order  that  the  parts  of  the -cloth 
impregnated  With  mordants  may  be  distinguished  by  their 
colour,  it  is  usual  to  tinge  them  with  some  colouring  matter. 
A  decoction  of  Brazil  wood  is  generally  used  for  this  pur- 
pose. After  the  mordants  have  been  applied,  the  cloth  must 
be  completely  dried.  It  is  proper  for  this  }mrpose  to  employ 
heat,  which  will  contribute  towards  the  separation  of  the 
acetous  acid  fiom  its  base,  and  tov\ards  its  evaporation  ;  by 
which  means  the  mordant  will  combine  in  a  greater  propor- 
tion, and  more  intimately  with  the  cloth.  When  the  cloth  is 
sufficiently  dried,  it  is  to  be  washed_with  warm  water  and 
cowdung,  till  the  flour  or  gum  employed  to  thirken  the  mor- 
dants which  are  uncombined  with  the  clotli,  are  removed. 
After  this  the  cloth  is  to  be  thoroughly  rinsed  in  clear  water. 
Indigo  not  requij^ing  any  mordant  is  commonly  appl'ed  at 
once,  either  by  a  block  or  pencil.  It  is  prepared  by  boiling 
it  with  potash,  made  caustic  by  quicklime  and  orpiment ;  the 
solution  is  afterwards  thickened  with  gum.  It  must  be  care- 
full}^  secluded  from  the  air,  otherwise  the  indigo  would  soon 
become  regenerated,  thus  rendering  the  solution  useless. 
Some  have  used  coarse  brown  sugar  instead  of  orpiment,     It 


TnADESMAN's    GUIDE.  t^t 

is  equally  efficacious  in  deconiposiug  the  indigo,  and  render- 
ing it  soluble,  while  it  likewise  serves  all  ihe  purposes  of 
gum. 

To  paint  Yellow,  For  yellow,  the  block  is  besmeared 
wilh  acetate  of  alumine.  The  cloth  after  receiving  this  mor- 
dant, is  dyed  wilh  quercitron  bark,  and  is  then  bleached. 

Nankeen  Yellow,  is  one  of  the  most  common  colours  on 
prints,  is  a  kind  of  nankeen  yellow,  of  various  shades  down 
to  a  deep  ye]h)wish  brown  or  drab.  It  is  usually  in  stripfs 
or  spots.  To.  produce  it,  besmear  a  block,  cut  into  the  figure 
of  a  print,  with  acetate  of  iron,  thickened  with  gum  or  flour  ; 
and  apply  to  the  cotton,  which  after  being  dried  and  cleansed 
in  the  usual  manner;  is  plunged  into  a  potash  lye.  The 
quantity  of  acetate  of  iron  is  always  proportioned  to  the 
depth  of  the  shade. 

Red^  is  communicated  by  the  same  process,  only  madder 
is  substituted  for  the  bark. 

Blue,  The  fine  light  blues  which  appear  so  frequently  on 
printed  cottons,  are  produced  'by  applyiiig  to  the  cloth  a  block 
besmeared  wilh  a  composition,  consisting  partly  of  wax,  which 
covers  all  those  parts  of  the  cloth  whicFi  remain  white.  The 
cloih  is  then  dyed  in  a  cold  indigo  vat  ;  and  after  it  is  dry, 
the  w<\x  composition  is  removed  by  hot  water. 

Lilac  and  Brown-.  Lilac,  fleece  brown,  and  blackish  brown^ 
are  given  by  means  of  acetate. ol  iron  ;  the  quantity  of  which 
is  always  proportioned  to  the  deptlf  of  shade.  For  very  deep 
clours  a  little  sumach  is  added.  The  cotton  is  afterwards 
dyed  in  the  usual  manner  with  madder,  and  then  bleached. 

Green,  To  twelve  quarts  of  muriatic  acid,  add  by  degrees 
one  quRrt  of  nitrous  ac-id  ;  saturate  the.whv->le  with  grain  tin, 
and  boil  it  in  a  proper  vessel,  till  two  thirds  are  evaporated. 
To  prepare  the  indiiro  for  mixhig  with  the  sidution,  take  nine 
pounds  of  indigo,  half  a  pound  of  orange  orpiment,  and  grind 
it  in  about  four  quarts  of  water  ;  mix  it  well  with  the  indigo, 
and  grind  the  whole  in  the  usual  way. 

To  mix  the  solution  of  Tin  with  prepared  Indigo.  Take 
two  gallons  of  the  indiy;o  prepared  as  nbove,  then  stir  inio  it 
by  degrees,  one  gallon  of  the  solution  of  tin,  neutralized  by 
as  much  caustic  alkali  as  can  be  added  "without  precipitating 
the  tin  from  the  acids.  Tor  a  lighter  shade  of  gieen,  less 
indigo  will  be  nrressary.  The  goods  are  to  be  dipped  in  the 
way  of  dipping  China  blues  ;  they  must  not  however  be  al- 


1&5  tttE    AltTIST    AND 

lowed  to  drain,  but  moved  from  one  vat  to  another  as  quickly 
as  possible.  They  are  to  be  cleansed  In  the  usual  way:  in  a 
sour  vat  of  about  one  himdred  and  fifty  gallons  oi  water  to 
one  gallon  of  sulphm^ic  acid  ;  they  are  then  to  be  v\  ell  wash- 
ed in  decoctions  of  weld,  and  oiher  yellow  colouring  drugs, 
then  branned  or  bleahced  till  they  become  white  in  those  parts 
which  are  required   colourless. 

To  print  D(we  Colour  and  Drab,  Dove  colour  and  drab 
are  given  by  acetate  of  iron,  and  quercitron  bark,  the  cloth 
is  afterwards  prepared  in  the  usual  manner. 

To  print  diferent  Colours,  When  dift'.'rent  colours  are 
to  appear  in  ihe  same  print,  a  greater  number  of  operations 
are  necessary.  Two  or  more  blocks  are  employed  :  upoii 
each  of  which,  that  part  of  the- print  only  is  cut,  which  is  to 
be  of  some  particular  colour.  These  are  besmeared  with 
ditferent  mordants,  and  a])plied  to  the  cloth,  which  is  after- 
wards dyed  as  usual.  Let  us  suppose  for  instance,  that  those 
blocks  are  apphed  to  cotton,  one  with  acetate  of  alumine, 
another  with  acetate  of  iron,  a,  third  with  a  mixture  of  those 
two  mordants,  and  that  the  cotton  is  then  dyed  with  quercit- 
ron bark,  and  bleached.  The  parts  imjiregnated  with  the 
mordants,  would  have  the  following  colours  : 
Acetate  of  alumine,  Yelh  w. 

'*  iron,  Olive,  drab,  dove. 

The  mixture,  Olive  green,  olive. 

If  the  part  of  the  yellow  is  covered  over  With  ihe  indigd 
liquor,  applied  with  a  pencil,  it  will  be  converted  into  green. 
By  the  same  liquid,  blue  ma}-  be  given  to  such  parts  of  the 
print  as  require  it.  If  the  cotton  is  dyed  with  madder,  in- 
stead of  quercitron  bark  ;  the  print  will  exhibit  the  following 
colours: 

Acetate  of  alumine^  Red. 

*'  iron,  Brown,  black. 

The  mixture,  Purplj. 

When  a  grt^ater  number  of  colours  are  to  appear  ;  for  in- 
stance, when  those  communicated  by  bark,  and  those  by  mad- 
der are  wanted  at  the  same  time,  mordants  for  parts  of  the 
pattern  are  to  be  applied,  the  cotton  then  is  to  be  dyed  in  the 
madder  bath,  arid  bleached  ;  then  the  rest  of  the  mordants, 
to  fill  up  the  patterns,  are  added,  and  the  cloth  is  again  dj'ed 
with  quercitron  bark,  and  bleachedi 

The  second  dying  does  not  so  much  affect  the  madder  col- 


TRADESMAN'S    ^VIBE,  IQS 

ours  ;  because  the  mortlants,  which  render  them  permanent, 
are  aheady  saturated.  The  yeHovv  tinge  is  already  removed, 
by  the  subsequent  bleaching.  Sometimes  a  new  mordant  is 
applied  to  some  of  the  madder  colours,  in  consequence  of 
which,  they  receive  a  new  permanent  colour  from  the  bark. 
After  the  list  bleaching,  new  coh>urs  may  be  added,  by  means 
of  the  indigo  liquor.  The  following  table  will  give  an  idea 
of  the  colours  which  may  be  given  to  cotton  by  these  pro- 
cesses. 

I.  Madder  Dye,     Acetate  of  alumine,  Red^ 

**  iron.  Brown,  black. 

**  diluted.  Lilac. 

Both  mixed,  Purple^ 

il;  Black  Dye     Acetate  of  alumine.  Yellow. 

**  iron,  Dove,  drab. 

Lilac  and  acetate  of  alum.   Olive. 
Red  and  acetate  of  alum.    Orange. 
IIL  Indigo  Dye,   Indigo,  Blue. 

indigf)  and  yellow;  Green. 

To  prepare  a  Substitute  for  Gum:,  used  in  Calico  Print- 
ing, Collect  half  a  ton  weight  of  pelis  or  skiris,  or  pieces  of 
rabbit  or  sheep  skirs,  and  boil  them  for  seven  or  eight  hours, 
in  350  gallons  of  water,  or  uhtil  it  becomes  a  stbng  size. 
Then  draw  it  off,  and  when  cold  weigh  it.  Warm  it  again, 
and  to  every  hundred  weight,  add  the  strongest  svVeetwort, 
that  can  be  made  from  malt,  or  twenty  pounds  weight  of  su- 
gar. When  incorporated,  take  it  off,  and  put  it  into  a  cask, 
for  use.  This  substitute  for  gum  may  be  used  by  calico  prin- 
ters in  mixing  up  nearly  all  kinos  of  colours.  By  using  ctnly 
a  sixth  part  of  gum  with  it,  it  will  also  improve  tl-e  gum,  and 
be  a  saving  of  200  per  cent,  and  without  gum,  of  400  per 
cent.  It  will  also  improve  and  preserve  the  paste  so  much 
used  by  i>' inters. 

To  prepare  Arnotto  for  Dying,  Arnotto  is  a  colouring 
fecula  of  a  resinous  nature,  extracted  from  the  seeds  of  a  tree 
very  common  in  the  West  In^iies,  and  which  in  height  never 
excee.l«  fifteen  feet.  The  Indians  employ  two  processes 
to  obtain  the  red  fecula  of  these  seeds.  They  first 
pound  them,  and  mix  them  with  a  certain  quantity  of  water, 
which  in  the  course  of  five  or  six  days,  favours  the  progress 
of  fermentation.  The  liquid  then  becomes  charged  with  the 
colouring  part,  and   the   superfluous  moisture  is    afterwards 

17 


194  THE    ARTIST    AND 

separated  by  slow  evaporation  over  the  fire,  or  by  the  heat  or 
the  sun.  The  second  process  consists  in  rubbing  the  seeds 
between  the  hands  in  a  vessel  filled  with  water.  The  colour- 
ing part  is  precipitated,  and  forms  itself  into  a  mass  like  a 
cake  of  wax  ;  but  if  the  red  fecula,  thus  detached,  is  much 
more  beautiful  than  in  the  first  process,  it  is  less  in  quantity. 
Besides  as  the  splendour  of  it  is  too  bright,  the  Indians  are 
accustomed  to  weaken  it  b}  a  mixture  of  red  sandal  wood. 

The  natives  of  the  East  India  islands  used  formerly  to  employ  ar« 
notto  for  painting  their  bodies,  &c.  At  present  in  Europe  it  is  only 
employed  to  give  the  first  tints  to  woollen  stuffs,  intended  to  be  dyed 
Ved,  blue,  yellow,  green,  &c.  In  the  art  of  the  varnisher,  it  forms  part 
of  the  composition  of  changing  varnishes,  to  give  a  gold  colour  to  the 
metals  on  which  these  varnishes  are  applied, 

To  prepare  Dying  3Iaterials,  S^c.  Arnotto  ought  to  be  chosen  ' 
of  a    flame   colour,  brighter  in  the  interior    part   than  on  the 
outside  ;  soft  to  the  touch,  and  of  a  good   consistence.      The 
paste  of  arnotto   becomes    soft  in  Europe  ;  and  it  loses  some 
of  its  odour,  which  approaches  near  to  that  of  violets. 

Of  Lifmus,  The  Cape  de  Verd  islands  produce  a  kind 
of  lichen  or  moss^  which  yields  a  violet  colouring  part,  when 
exposed  to  the  contact  of  ammonia  disengaged  from  urine,  in 
a  state  of  putrefiction,  by  a  mixture  of  lime.  When  the 
processes  are  finished,  it  is  known  by  the  name  of  litmus. 
This  article  is  prepared  on  a  large  scale  at  London,  Paris, 
and  Lyons.  Li  the  latter  city;  another  kind  of  lichen,  which 
grows  on  the  rocks  is  prepared. 

The  ammonia  joins  the  resinous  part  of  the  plant,  developes  its  colour- 
ing part,  and  combines  with  it.  In  this  state  the  lichen  forms  a  paste  of 
a  violet  red  colour,  interspersed  with  whitish  spots,  which  give  it  a 
marbled  appearance.  Litmus  is  employed  in  dying,  to  communicate  a 
violet  colour  to  silk  and  woollen. 

Of  Saffron.  The  flowers  of  this  plant  contain  two  col" 
curing  parts^  one  soluble  in  water,  which  is  thrown  away  ; 
the  other  soluble  in  alkaline  liquors.  The  latter  colouring 
parts  becomes  the  basis  of  various  beautiful  shades  of  cherry 
colour,  rose  colour,  &,c.  It  is  employed  for  dying  feathers, 
and  constitutes  the  vegetable  red,  or  Spanish  vermillion,  em- 
ployed by  ladies  to  heighten  their  complexion.  Carthamus 
cannot  furnish  its  resinous  colouring  part,  provided  with  all 
its  qualities,^  until  it  has  been  deprived  of  that  which  is  soluble 
in  water.  For  this  purpose,  the  dried  flowers  of  the  cartha- 
mus are  enclosed  in  a  lined  bag,  and  the  bag  is  placed  iu  a 


TRADESMAN'S    GUIDE  195 

stream  of  running  water.  A  man  with  wooden  shoes  gets 
upon  the  bag  every  eight  or  ten  hours,  and  treads  it  on  the 
bank  until  the  water  expressed  from  it  is  "colourless.  These 
moist  flowers,  after  being  strongly  squeezed  in  the  bag,  are 
spread  out  on  a  piece  of  canvass,  extended  on  a  frame,  })laced 
over  a  wooden  box,  and  covered  with  five  or  six  per  cent,  of 
their  weight  of^carbonate  of  soda.  Pure  wa.or  ijs  then  poured 
over  them  ;  and  this  process  is  repeated  several  times,  that 
the  alkali  may  have  leisure  to  become  charged  with  the  coU 
ouring  part,  which  it  dissolves.  The  liquor  when  filtered  is 
a  dirty  red,  and  almost  brown  colour.  The  cclouring  part 
thus  held  in  solution,  cann'Jt  be  employed  for  colouring  bodies 
until  it  is  free  ;  and  to  set  it  at  liberty,  tha  soda  must  be 
brought  into  contact  with  a  body  which  has  more  aflinity  for 
it. 

It  is  on  tJiis  precipitation,  by  an  intermediate  substance,  that  the 
process  for  making  Spanish  vermilion  is  founded,  as  well  as  all  the  re-- 
suits  arising  from  the  direct  application  of  this  xolou'-ing  part  in  tha 
art  of  dying. 

Of  Woad.  The  preparation  for  colouring  is  effected  from 
the  leaves  of  the  plant,  by  grinding  them  to  a  paste,  of  which 
balls  are  made,  placed  in  heaps,  and  occasionally  sprinkled 
with  water  to  promote  the  fermention  ;  when  this  is  finished^ 
the  woad  is  allowed  to  fall  into  a  coarse  powder  ;  used  as  a 
blue  dye  stuff. 

Of  Indigo.  This  dye  is  derived  from  the  leaves  of  the 
young  shrjots  of  several  species  of  the  plant,  by  soaking  them 
either  in  cold  water,  or  still  better,  in  water  kept  warm,  and 
at  about  I6O0  Fahrenheit,  till  the  liquor  becomes  a  deep  green; 
it  is  then  drawn  off,  and  the  blue  sediment  dried,  and  formed 
into  lumps. 

Of  Potatoe  Tops,  ^c.  Cut  off  the  tops  when  they  are  in 
flower,  and  extract  the  juice,  by  bruising  and  pressing  them. 
Linen  or  woollen  imbued  in  this  liquor  forty-eight  hours, 
will,  take  a  brilliant,  solid  and  permanent  yellow.  If  the  cloth 
be  afterwards  plunged  in  a  blue  dye,  in  will  acquire  a  beauti- 
ful permanent  green  colour.  As  to  the  mode  of  execution, 
it  should  pass  through  the  hands  of  a  chemist  or  skilful  dyer, 
to  derive  all  the  advantages  it  is  capable  of  furnishing.  To 
prepare  cotton  and  linen  to  receive  certain  colours,  particu- 
larly the  red  madder,  and  cross  wort,  the  article  of  sheep's 
manure  is  made  ijse  of,  as  it  forms,  by  impregnating  the  stuffs 


196  THE    ARTUT    AN'D 

with  an  animal  mucilage,  of  which  it  contains  a  large  quantity, 
and  thus  assimilating  them  to  wool  and  sdk. 

T'o  Print  Carpets,  These  carpels  are  made  of  knitted 
wool,  by  means  of  a  machine  ;  they  are  afterwards  pressed 
and  receive  all  the  colours  and  designs  wished  for.  These 
designs  printed  on  the  tissue,  by  means  of  wooden  boards, 
are  extremely  neat  ;  the  colours  are  very  brilliant,  and  resist 
rubbing  extremely  well,  provided  they  traverse  the  tissue  from 
one  part  lo  another.  They  are  warm,  and  have  ihe  advan- 
tage of  being  cheaper  than  others.  They  are  also  as  durable, 
and  are  not  crossed  by  seams  disagreeable  to  the  eye, 

CHAPTER  XXVIl. 

Bleaching — by  Oxy muriatic  Acid — bleach  field  m  Ireland 
— improved  bleaching  Liquur-^by  Alkalized  Steam— to 
bltacfk  Wool,  Cotton  and  Straw — to  whiten  Wax — of 
purifying  Tallow — imitation  of  Wax    Candles — to    extin- 

guish     Vegetable    colours bleaching     Salts bleaching 

JAquid, 

The  mode  of  bleaching  which  least  injures  the  texture  of 
the  cloth  formed  »  f  vegetable  substnnces,  is  that  efft^cted  by 
merely  eAposing  it  in  a  moistened  slate  to  the  atmosphere, 
having  been  steeped  in  a  sol  jtion  of  potash  or  soda,  but  the 
length  of  time  and  other  inconveniences  attending  this  pro- 
cess, led  to  more  active  chemical , processes.  Ir  is  by  the 
combination  of  oxygen  with  rhe  colouring  matter  of  the  cloth, 
that  it  is  deprived  of  its  hue,  and  the  dittVrent  processes  em- 
ployed must  be  adapted  to  prepare  it  for  this  combination, 
and, render  it  as  perfect  as  possible,  without  destroying  its  tex- 
ture, an  effect  which,  however,  must  necessarily  ensue  in  a 
greater  or  less  degree,  Irom  the  union  of  oxygen  with  all 
bodies. 

To  bleach  linen,  &c.  by  oxymuriatic  acid,  it  is  necessary  to 
ascertain  its  streni^th,  in  which  a  solution  of  indigo  in  the  acid 
is  jempl(»yed.  The  colour  of  this  is  destroyed  by  the  oxy- 
genated muriatic  acid  ;  according  to  the  quantity  of  it  that  can 
be  discoloured  by  a  given  quantity  of  the  liquor  its  strength 
is  known.  In  this  country,  machinery  is  employed  for  rin- 
sing and  beating;  the  appr^ratus  must  be  arranged  acc^rdiner 
fo  the  objects  to  be  b'eriched  ;  the  skeins  of  threjid  must  h<^ 
suspended  in  the  tub  destined  for  them,  and  the  cloth  must 


197 

be  rolled  upon  reels  in  the  ppparatus.  When  every  thing 
is  thus  disposed,  the  tubs  are  tilled  wiih  oxygenated  muriatic 
acid  ;  by  introducinu  a  iVuinel,  which  descends  to  the  bottom 
ot  ilie  tub,  in  order  to  prevem  the  dispersion  of  gas.  The 
cloili  is  wuinuhcn  ihe  frame  work,  on  which  the  skeins  are 
suspended,  is  turned  several  times,  until  it  is  judged,  by 
taking  out  a  small  quantity  of  the  liquor  from  time  to  time, 
and  trying  it  by  the  test  of -the  solution  of  indigo,  that  it  is 
sufficienilN   exhaus  ed. 

The  weakened  liquor  is  then  drawn  off,  nnd  may  be  again 
used  for  a  new  saturation.  In  bleaching  wiih  the  oxvmuriate 
of  hme,  a  large  quantity  of  lime  is  cotnbined  with  the  oxy- 
muriatic  acid  gas,  to  effect  which,  the  lime  is  mechanically 
suspended  in  water,  into  which  the  gas  is  made  to  pass,  and 
agitated  ;  so  as  to  present  fresh  matter  to  the  gas.  By  this 
means  the  oxymuriate  of  lime  is  formed  in  a  very  convenient 
manner  ;  it  is  dissolved  in  water,  and  used  as  a  bleaching 
liquor.  This  liquor  is  preferable  to  the  oxygenated  muriatic 
acid  and  potash. 

At  the  great  bleach  field  in  Ireland,  four  lyes  of  potash 
are  applied  alternately,  with  four  weeks  exposure  on  the 
grass,  two  immersions  in  the  oxymuriate  of  lime,  a  lye  of 
potnsh  between  the  two,  and  the  exposure  of  a  week  on  the 
grass,  between  each  lye  and  the  immersion.  During  sumtner 
two  lyes  and  fifteen  days  exposure  are  sufficient  to  prepare 
cloth  for  the  oxygenated*  muriate  ;  the  three  alternate  lyes, 
with  immersions  in  the  liquor,  will  be  sufficient  to  complete 
the  I  leaching  ;  nothing  then  will  be  necessary,  but  to  wind 
the  cloih  through  the  sulphuric  acid.  4^ 

The  oxygenatrd  muriatic  gas  may  also  be  combined  with  lime  in  a 
dry  state,  or  the  water  may  be  evaporated,  when  it  is  employed  for 
the  formation  of  oxyinu?iales,  whiclj  may  then  be  very  conveniently 
transported  to  any  «;istance  without  injury    tO  its  detersive  power. 

To  prepare  the  stilphale  of  lime,  take  suljjhwror  brimstone 
in  fine  powder,  four  pounds  ;  lime  well  slacked  and  sifted, 
twenty  pounds  ;  water  sixteen  gallons  ;  these  are  to  be  well 
mixed,  and  boiled  for  half  an  hour  in  an  iron  vessel,  siiring 
them  briskly  from  time  to  time.  Soon  after  the  agitation  of 
the  boiling  is  over,  the  solution  of  the  sulphuret  of  lioie  clears, 
and  n)ay  btj  drawn  off  free  from  the  insoluble  matter,  which 
is  considerable,  and  which  rests  upon  the  bottom  of  the  boil- 
er.    The    liquor  in  this  state,  is  nearly  the  colour    of  small 


1^^  THE    ARTIST    AN0 

beer,  but  not  so  transparent.  Sixteen  gallons  of  fresh  water 
are  afterwards  poured  on  the  insoluble  dregs  in  the  boiler,  in 
order  to  separate  the  whole  of  the  sulphuret  from  them. 
When  this  clears,  being  previously  agitated,  it  is  drawn  off 
and  mixed  with  the  first  liquor.  Thirtj^-three  gallons  more 
of  water  may  be  added  to  the  liquor,  thus  reducing  it  to  a 
proper  standard  for  steeping  the  cloth  ;  and  which  furnishes 
sixty  gallons  of  liquor  fiom  four  pounds  of  brimstone,  mak- 
ing allowance  for  evaporation.  When  linen  is  freed  from 
the  weaver's  dressing,  it  is  to  be  steeped  in  the  solution  of 
sulphuret  of  lime  (prepared  as  above)  for  about  twelve  or 
more  hours,  and  then  washed  and  dried.  This  process  is. to 
be  repeated  six  times,  that  is,  by  six  alternate  immersions  in 
each  liquor,  which  has  been  found  to  whiten  the  linen. 

Steam  has  lately  been  employed  with  great  success.  The 
process  was  brought  from  tht?  Levant.  Chapel  first  make  it 
known  to  the  public.  The  cloth  is  first  immersed  in  a  slight 
alkaline  caustic  liquor,  and  placed  in  a  chamber  constructed 
over  a  boiler,  into  which  is  put  the  alkaline  lye,  which  is  to 
be  raised  into  steam,  after  the  fire  has  been  lighted,  and  the 
cloth  has  remained  exposed  to  the  action  of  the  steam  for  a 
sufficient  length  of  time,  it  is  taken  out  and  immersed  in  the 
oxygenated  muriate  of  lime,  and  then  exposed  for  two  or  three 
days  on  the  grass.  This  operation,  which  is  very  expeditious, 
will  be  sufficient  for  cotton  ;  but  if  linen  clotlf  should  retain  a 
yellow  tint,  a  second  alkaline  caustic  vapour  hath,  and  two  or 
three  days  on  the  grass,  will  be  sufficient  to  give  it  the  neces- 
sar}'  whiteness. 

To  bleach  by  alkalized  steam,  the  high  temperature  swells 
up  tne  fibies  of  the  cloth  ;  the  pure  alkali  which  rises  with 
the  elastic  fluid,  seizes  with  avidity  on  the  colouring  matter  ; 
and  seldom  does  the  tisssue  of  the  flax  or  hemp  resist  the  pen- 
etrating effect  of  this  vapour  bath. 

The  alkali  appears  to  have  a  much  livelier  and  more  cau- 
stic action,  when  it  is  combined  with  caloric,  than  in  ordinary 
lyes,  where  the  temperature  never  rises  above  162''  Fahren- 
heit. By  making  the  cloth  pass  through  the  lye  of  oxygen- 
ated muriate  of  lime,  an  union  is  eflected  between  the  solution 
and. the  carbon,  arising  from  the  extractomucous  matter  of 
the  fl'jx  ;  carbonic  acid  is  formed  ;  the  water,  even,  in  which 
this  new  compound  is  diluted,  concurs  to  promote  the  com- 
bination ;  if  the  cloth  is  then  exposed  on  the  grass,  the  car- 
boaic  dcid  is  dissijiated,  and  the  cloth  is  bleached. 


TRADESMAN  S    GUIDE:.  199 

To  Bleach  Cotton,  Tho  first  operation  consist  in  scour- 
ing it  in  a  slight  alkaline  solution  ;  or  what  is  better,  hy  ex- 
posure to  steam.  It  is  then  put  into  a  basket,  and  rinsed  in 
running  water.  The  immersion  of  cotton  in  an  alkaline  lye, 
however  it  ma}^  be  rinsed,  always  leaves  with  it  an  earthy 
deposite.  It  is  well  known  that  cotton  bears  the  action  of 
acids  better  then  hemp  or  flax,;  that  time  is  even  necessary 
before  the  action  of  then  can  be  prejudicial  to  it,  and  by  ta- 
king advantage  of  this  valuable  property  in  regard  to  bleach- 
ing, means  have  been  found  to  free  it  from  the  earthy  depo- 
site, by  pressing  down  the  cotton  in  a  very  weak  solution  of 
sulphuric  acid,  and  afterwards  removing  the  acid  by  washing, 
lest  too  long  remaining  in  it  should  destory  the  cotton. 

To  extinguish  Vegetable  Colours.  Obtain  chlorine  as  fol- 
lows: fill  a  strong  quart  decanter  one  third  full  of  water,  put 
in  a  pulverized  mixture,  consisting  of  half  a  gill  of  red  lead, 
and  a  gill  of  common  table  salt,  well  rubbed  together;  shake 
it  up,  then  put  in  two  thirds  of  a  wine  glass  af  sulphuric  acid  ; 
put  in  the  ground  stopper  loosely  ;  shake  the  decanter  half  a 
minute;  the  atmospheric  air  and^ome  gas  will  escape  ;  now 
fix  your  stopper  perfectly  tight,  then  plunge **the  decanter  into 
a  lub  or  cistern  of  cold  water,  keeping  the  mouth  a  little 
above  the  water;  briskly  agitate  it,  keeping  it  under  the  wa- 
ter, once  each  iiinute  for  fifteen  minutes.  Now  take  it  out 
and  let  the  excess  of  red  lead  and  salt  settle  ;  a  yellowish 
green  liquid  is  produced,  nearly  pure,  but  containing  some 
muriatic  acid  ;  pour  a  little  into  a  wine  glass,  and  it  is  ready 
for  use  to  wash  out  writing  from  paper,  or  extinguish  the  co- 
lour from  calico.. 

The  liquid  chlorine  obtained  in  this  way,  should  be  kept  in 
a  dark  and  coo!  place.  It  is  used  for  taking  spots  out  of  lin- 
en, 6i,c,  It  has  been  used  for  fraudulent  purpose,  to  oblite- 
rate   writing,  that  something  difierent  might  be  substituted. 

Bleaching  Liquid — Eau  cle  Javelle.  Common  salt,  two 
pounds;  manganese,  one  pound;  water,  two  pounds;  put 
into  a  retort ;  and  add  graduaUy,  oil  of  vitri(  1,  two  pounds  : 
pass  the  vapour  through  a  solution  of  prepared  kali,  four  oun- 
ces, in  twenty-nine  ounces  of  water,  applyin^.^  heat  towards 
the  last.  Specific  gravitv  is  1,087.  Stimulant,  antisypilitic  ; 
used  to  bleach  linen  and  take  out  spots,  and  to  clean  books 
from  what  has  been  scribbled  on  their  margins. 


200  tHE   iHTIiT   ASP 

To  Bleach  WooL  The  first  kind  of  bleaching  to  which 
wool  is  subjected,  is  to  free  it  tVoiii  grease.  This  operation 
is  called  scouring.  In  nianiitkciories  it  is  generally  perfor- 
med by  ainraoniacal  lyf,  I'oj  nied  of  five  measures  of  river 
water,  and  one  of  stale  urine  ;  the  wool  is  immniersed  for 
about  twenty  nunutes,  in  a  ba.h  of  this  mixture,  healed  to 
fifty-six  degrees  ;  it  is  then  taken  out,  suliered  to  draiu,  and 
then  rinsed  in  running  waier;  ihis  minipuldiion  softens  ihe 
wool,  and  gives  ir  the  first  degree  of  whitei-ess  ;  it  is  then 
rej)edied  a  second,  and  even  a  third  time,  after  wiiich  the 
wool  is  fit  to  be  employed.  In  some  plnces  scouring  is  per- 
formed with  water  slighily  impregnated  w  th  soap;  and,  in- 
deed, for  valuable  articles,  this  process  is  preferable,  but  too 
expensive  for  articles  of  less  value.  Sulphurous  acid  gass 
uniios  very  easily  with  water,  and  in  this  conbinaticm  it  may 
be  employed  for  bleaching  wool  or  silk. 

The  most  economical  way  of  preparing  sulphurous  acid,  is 
by  decomposing  the  acid,  by  the  mixture  of  an}'  combustible 
matter,  capable  of  taking  from  it  any  part  of  its  oxygen. 
When  the  cnemist  is  desirous  to  have  it  in  great  purity,  it  is 
obtained  by  means  of  metallic  substances,  and  particularly  by 
mercury,  but  lor  the  purpose  of  which  we- are  treating,  where 
great  economy  is  required  we  should  recommend  most  com- 
mon substances.  Take  chopped  straw,  or  saw  dust,  and  in- 
troduce it  into  a  matrass  ;  pour  over  it  sulphuric  acid,  a[)ply- 
ing  at  the  same  time  heat,  and  there  will  be  disengaged  sul- 
phurous acid  gas,  whicli  may  be  combined  with  water  in  an 
apparatus.  The  pieces  are  rolled  upon  reels,  and  are  drawn 
through  the  acid  by  turning  ihem  until  sufficiently  whise. 
They  are  then  taken  out  and  left  to  drain  on  a  bench  covered 
with  cloth,  lest  they  should  be  stained  in  consequence  of  the 
decomposition  of  the  wo«d  by  the  sulphurous  acid  ;  ;hey  are 
then  washed  in  river  water,  and  Spanish  while  is  employed, 
if  it  should  be  judged  necessary.  This  operation  is  performed 
by  passing  the  pieces  through  a  tub  of  clean  water,  in  which 
about  eight  pounds  of  Spanish  whiie  has  been  dissolved.  To 
obtain  a  fine  whiteness,  the  stuffs  are  generally  twice  sul- 
phured. According  to  this  process,  one  immersion,  and  r'^el- 
ing  two  or  three  hours,  are  sufficient.  Azuring  or  bluing  is 
performed  by  throwing  into  the  Spanish  white  liquor,  a  solu- 
tion of  one  part  Prussian  blue  to  four  hundred  of  water  ;  shak- 
ing the  cloth  in  the  liquid  and  reeling  rapidly.     The  opera- 


201 

tlon  is  terminated  by  a  slight  washing  with  soap,  to  give  soft- 
ness and  pliability  lo  ihes.uOs. 

A  preparation  ot"  an  imj)r(jved  bleaching  liquor  is  pre[)ared 
as  fullows:  by  a  dissolution  in  water  of  the  oxygenated  muri- 
ates of  calcareous  earths,  barytes,  s  rontiies,  or  magnesia. 
The  earth  should  be  prepaied  in  the  dry  way,  by  bringing 
them  in  a  solid  form,  in  powder,  or  in  paste,  in  contact  with 
the  oxygenated  muriatic  acid  gas.  So  prepared,  dissolve 
them  in  water,  and  apply  them  to  the  substances  required  to 
bo  i-leached.  By  this  mode,  colours  may  be  removed  from 
linen,  cotton,  \egetable  and  other  substances. 

Bieaclnnif  Salts,  used  in  Manufactorus.  Pass  into  water, 
in  which  finely  pulver.zed  and  newly  slacked  lime  is  suspen- 
ded by  coniinuitl  agitation — a  stream  of  oxymuriatic  acid  gas 
will  come  over.  Jn  the  large  way,  a  dry  powder  ot  newly 
slacked  lin)e  is  agitated  in  a  strong  cask,  which  is  absorbed 
by  lime.  Some  prefer  passing  the  gas  into  hogsheads  of  wa- 
ter, in  whicli  the  lime  is  suspended  by  agitatton  ;  for  an  ex- 
periment it  may  be  pressed  from  a  bladder  may  be  held  in 
the  hand,  and  the  receiver  shaken  continually. 

To  bleach  Straw,  S^c.  Cover  the  bottom  of  a  small  plate 
a  quarter  ot  an  inch  deep  with  water,  put  a  small  piece  of 
common  brimstone  upon  a  sheet  iron  beiich  set  in  the  plate, 
which  is  sufficiently  heated  to  inflame  the  brimstome,  and 
shut  it  over  a  tubulated  bell  glass,  or  a  tumbler  with  a  hole  in 
the  bottom.  This  vessel  must  be  of  a  size  just  to  shut  down 
within  the  rim  of  the  plate.  At  first  take  the  stopper  out  and 
raise  the  bell  glass  a  litile  above  the  water,  to  give  passage 
to  a  current  of  air.  Regulate  this  by  the  progress  of  the 
burning  sulphur.  After  the  bell  glass  appears  well  filled  with 
a  white  vapour,  shut  it  down  close  and  tighten  the  stopper. 
The  water  in  the  plate  will  absorb  the  sulphurous  acid  gas  in 
about  five  minutes.  Pour  part  of  this  water  into  wine  glasses, 
and  you  will  perceive  the  nauseous,  sulphurous,  astringent 
taste,  peculiar  to  this  acid.  In  the  mean  time  wet  several 
substances,  coloured  with  vegetable  colouring  matter,  and  it 
will  extinguish  many  of  them  if  not  all.  A  yellow  straw 
braid  becomes  whitened  in  it  ;  and  some  colours  on  calico 
will  be  extinir^ished.  The  liquid  sulphurous  acid  loses  this 
property  by  keepings. 

It  is  used  by  milliners  both  in  the  liquid  and  in  the  gaseous 
gtate  for  bleaching  straw  bonnets.     If  the  old  straw  braid  is 


202  THU   ARTIST    ANI» 

soaked  a  while  in  water  and  then  suspended  inside  of  a  hogs- 
head or  barrel  without  a  head,  and  brimstone  is  inflated  at  the 
bottom  of  a  cask,  and  suffered  to  commence  burning  thro- 
oughly,  then  the  top  covered  over,  the  straw  will  soon  be- 
come whitened  by  the  action  of  this  acid. 

To  Whiten  Wax.  Melt  it  in  a  pipkin  withqut  boiling. 
Then  take  a  wooden  pestle,  which  steep  in  the  wax  two  in-, 
ches  deep  and  plunge  immediately  in.  cold  water,  to  loosen 
the  wax  from  it,  which  will  come  off  like  sheet  of  paper. 
When  you  have  got  all  of  your  wax  out  of  the  pipkin,  and 
make  into  flakes,  put  it  on  a  clean  towel,  and  expose  it  in 
air,  on  rhe  grass,  till  it  is  white.  Then  melt  it  and  strain  it 
through  a  muslin,  to  take  all  the  dust  out  of  it,  if  there  be 
any. 

Method  of  purifying  Tallow  to  make  Candles.  Take  five 
eights  of  tallow  and  three  eights  of  mutton  suet ;  melt  them 
in  a  copper  caldron  with  half  a  pound  of  grease  ;  as  soon  a& 
they  are  melted,  mix  eight  ounces  of  brandy,  one  salts  of  tar- 
tar, one  cream  of  tartar,  one  sal  ammtmiac,  antl  two  nf  pure 
dry  potash  :  throw  the  mixture  into  the  caldron  and  make 
the  ingredients  boil  a  quarter  of  an  hour;  then  let  the  whole 
cool.  The  next  day  the  tallow  will  be  found  upon  the  sur- 
face of  the  water  in  a  pure  cake.  Take  it  out  and  expose  it 
to  the  action  of  the  air,  on  canvass  for  several  days.  It  will 
become  white,  and  almost  as  hard  as  wax.  The  dew  is  very 
favourable  to  bleaching  ;  make  your  wick  of  fine  even  cotton, 
give  them  a  coat  of  welted  wax;  then  cast  your  mould  can- 
dles. They  will  have  much  the  appearance  of  wax,  and  one 
of  six  to  the  pound,  will  burn  fourteen  hours  and  never  run. 

To  make  Mutton  Suet  Candles  in  imitation  of  Wax  Can^ 
dies.  1.  Throw  quicklime  in  melred  mutton  suet;  the  lime 
will  fall  to  the  bottom,  and  carr3^  with  it  every  impurity,  so  as 
to  leave  it  pure  and  fine  as  wax  itself. 

2.  Now  if  with  one  part  of  that  suet  you  mix  three  of  real 
wax,  you  will  bo  unable  to  distinguish  the  mixture  ;  even  in 
the  casting  and  moulding  wax  figures  or  ornaments, 

CHAPTER  xxvirr. 

jpistillation — to  produce  Inflammnhle  Spirits — of  Malt — of 
Hops — of  water  for  Bretciiig — Brewing  Vessels — what  is 
procured  hy  distillation — Bodies  proper  for  distillation. 

Pjr  tb§  distillation  of  spirits  is  to  be  understood  the  art  by 


TIIADESMAN'S    GUIDI!.  ^03 

which  all  iDfiamniable  spirits,  brandies,  rum,  arracs,  and  the 
like,  are  procured  frum  vegetable  substances,  by  the  means  of 
a  previous  fermentation,  and  a  subsequent  treatment  of  the 
fermented  liquor  by  the  alembic  or  hot  still,  with  its  proper 
worm  and  refrigeratory.  But  as  it  is  impossible  to  extract 
vinous  spirits  from  any  vegetable  subject  without  fermenta- 
tion, and  previous  to  this,  brewing  is  often  necessary,  it  will 
be  requisite  to  consider  these  operations. 

To  extract  spirits  is  to  cause  such  an  action  by  heat,  as  to 
cause  them  to  ascend  in  vapour  from  the  bodies  which  detain 
them.  If  this  heat  be  natural  to  bodies,  "so  that  the  opera- 
tion be  made  without  any  adventitious  means,  it  is  called  fer- 
mentation, which  will  be  hereafter  explained  ;  if  it  be  pro* 
duci&d  by  fire  or  other  heating  power  in  which  the  alembic  is 
placed,  it  is' called  digestion,  or  distillation;  digestion,  if  the 
heat  only  prepares  the  materials  for  distillation  of  their  spirits  ; 
and  g'isiillation  when  the  action  is  of  sufficient  efficacy  to 
cause  them  to  ascend  in  vapour  and  distil.  This  heat  is  that 
which  puts  the  insensible  parts  of  a  body,  whatever  it  be,  into 
motion,  divides  them,  and  causes  a  pai^sage  for  the  spirits  en- 
closed herein,  by  disengaging  them  from  the  phlegm,  and  the 
earthy  particles  by  which  they  are  enclosed.  Distillation 
considered  in  this  point  is  not  unwr,rthy  the  attention  and 
countenance  of  the  learned.  This  art  is  of  infinite  extent: 
whatever  the  whole  earth  produces,  flowers,  fruits,  seeds, 
spices,  aromatic  and  vulnerary  plants,  odoriferous  drugs,  &c. 
aVe  its  objects,  and  come  under  its  cognizance  ;  but  "it  is  gen- 
arally  confined  to  liquids  of  taste  and  smell;  and  to  the  sim- 
ple and  spirituous  waters  of  aromatic  and  vulnerary  plants  t 
with  regard  to  its  utility,  we  shall  omit  saying  any  thing  here, 
as  sufficient  proofs  of  it  will  be  given  in  somie  of  the  articles 
respecting  it. 

Of  Bj'ewing  in  order  to  the  Production  of  InHammahle 
Spirits,  By  brewing  is  meant  the  extracting  a  tincture  from 
some  vegetable  substance,  or  dissolving  it  in  hot  water,  by 
which  means  it  becomes  proper  for  a  vinous  fermentation  ;  a 
solution  or  fermentable  tincture  of  this  kind  may  be  procured^ 
with  proper  management,  from  any  vegetable  substance,  but 
the  more  readily  and  totally  it  dissolves  in  the  fluid,  the  bet- 
ter it  is  fitted  for  fermentation,  and  the  larger  its  produce  of 
spirits.  All  inspissated  vegetable  juices  therefore,  as  sugary 
honey,  treacle,  manna,  &c.  are  very   proper  for  this  use,  as 


204  tHK    ABTIiT    A^M 

they  totally  dissolve  in  water,  forming  a  clear  and  uniform  so* 
latiou ;  but  malt,  from  its  cheapness,  is  generally  preferred 
in  England  ;  though  it  but  imperfectly  dissolves  in  hot  water* 
The  worst  sort  is  commonly  chosen  for  this  purpose,  and  the 
tinciure  wiih(»ut  the  addition  of  hops,  or  the  trouble  of  boil- 
ing ii,  is  directly  cooled  and  fermenied.  Bui  in  order  to 
brew  with  malt  to  the  greatest  advcoiiage,  the  three  followmg 
particulars  should  be  Carefully  attended  to:  li  The  subject 
should  be  well  prepared,  that  is,  it  should  be  justly  malted 
and  well  ground  :  for  if  it  be  too  little  malted,  it  will  prove 
hard  and  flinty,  and  consequently,  only  a  small  part  of  it  dis- 
solve in  the  water,  and  on  the  other  hand,  if  too  much  malted 
a  great  part  of  the  finer  particles  or  fermentable  matter  will 
be  lost  in  the  operation.  With  regard  to  grinding,  the  malt 
should  be  reduced  to  a  kind  of  coarse  meal,  for  experience 
has  shown,  that  by  this  means  the  whole  substance  of  the  malt 
may,  through  the  whole  process,  continue  mixed  with  the 
tincture,  and  be  distilled  with  it  ;  where'jy  a  larger  quantity 
of  spirit  will  be  obtained,  and  also  great  part  of  the  trouble, 
time  and  expense  in  brewing  saved.  This  secret  depends 
upon  thoroughly  mixing  or  briskly  agitating  the  meal,  first  in 
cold  water,  and  then  in  hot,  and  repeating  the  agitation  after 
the  fermentation  is  finished,  when  the  thick  turbid  wash  must 
be  immediately  committed  to  the  still.  And  thus  the  two 
operations  of  brewing  and  fermenting  may  very  commodiously 
be  reducid  to  one,  to  the  great  advantage  of  the  distiller. 
The  second  particular  to  be  attended  to,  is  that  the  water  be 
good,  and  properly  applied.  Rain  water  is  the  best  adapted 
to  brewing,  for  it  not  only  extracts  this  tincture  of  the  mah 
bette^r  than  any  other,  but  it  also  abounds  in  fermentable  parts 
whereb3'  the  operation  is  quickened,  and  the  yield  of  the 
s})irit  increased.  The  next  to  that  of  rain,  is  the  water  of 
rivers  and  Inkes,  particularly  such  as  wash  any  large  tract  of  a 
fertile  country,  or  receive  the  sullage  of  populous  towns.  But 
what  ever  water  is  used,  it  must  stand  in  a  hot  state  upon  the 
prepared  malt,  especially  if  judicious  distillers,  should  always 
take  care  to  have  their  wash  sufficiently  dilluted,  they  would 
find  their  spirits  the   purer  for  it. 

With  regard  to  the  fire,  it  may  be  easily  kept  regular,  by  a 
constant  attendance,  and  observing:  never  to  stir  it  hastily,  or 
throw  on  fresh  fuel  ;  and  the  stirring  the  liquor  in  the  still  is 
to  be  effected  by  means  of  a  paddle,  or  bar  kept  in  the  liquor, 


llii  it  just  begins  to  boil,  which  is  the  time    for  luting  on    the 
(lead,  and  alicr  which  there  is  no  great  danger,  but  from  the 
niiprojjer  mnnageiiient  of  the  fire  ;  this  is  the  common  way  • 
biii  u  js  iio  eysj  niaitei-  to  hit  the  exact  lime  ;  and  liie  doing  of 
1,  ejNj^r    loo  laie  or  to  soon,  is  attended    with  great    incon- 
vtii:t.nce,  so  ihat    sev^'ral    have    discovered    other   methods, 
^oiiie  put  more  solid  bodies  into  the  stdl,  with  ihe  wash;  oth*- 
ers  place  some  proper  matter  at  the    bottom  and  sides  of  the 
still,  which  are  ihe  phices  where  the  fire  acts   with  tlie  great- 
est  lor<:e.      The  use  of  the  paddle,  would  however,  answer 
belter  than  either  of  tiiese    methods,  could    it    be  continued 
during  tiie  who^e  time  the  still  is  working;  and    this  may  be 
done  by   tiie  following   method  ;  let  a  short  tube  of  iron    or 
copper  be  soldered  in  the   centre  of  the  still  "head,  and  let  a 
cross  bar  be  placed    below  in  the  same    head,  with  a  hole   in 
the  middle  corresponding  to  that  at  the   top;   through   both 
ihese^    let    an     iron     pipe    be    carr/ed    down     in    the    still, 
and  let    an    iron   rot!    be    passed  ihrougii    this,  with   wooden 
sweeps  at  its  end  ;   this   rod  may  he  continually  worked  by  a 
vviendi  at  the  stll  he«d,aud  ihe^vveeps  will  continually  keep 
the  bottom  and  sides  scraped  dean,  the  intei  slices  of  the  tube 
being  ail  the   time   w^H    crammed  with  tow,  to  prevent    any 
evaporation  of  the   spirit.      The  same  efiect  may  in   a   great 
measure  be  produce/^  by  Jf  less  laborious  method,  namely,  by 
?.lacin<r  a  parcel  o^' cylindrical  siicks  lengthwise,  so  as  to  cov- 
er ihetwh<de    I'ottom  of  the  still,  or  by  throwing^  in  a    loose 
pat  eel  of  faggot  sticks  at  a  venture,  for  the  action  of  the  fire 
below  moving  the    liquor,  at  the  same    time  gives  motion   to 
ihe  siicKs,  making  them  act  continually  like  a  parcel  of  stir- 
rers upon    the    bottom  and    sides  of  the  still,  which  might   if 
iiepessary   be  furnished   with    buttons    and   loops,  to  prevent 
ihern  froi^i  starting.      Some  also  use  a  parcel  of  fine  hay  laid 
upon  t^je  loose  slides,  and  secured  down  by  two    cross  poles, 
Ink]  from  side  to  sidcj  and  in  tlie  same  manner  fastened  down 
w'f  b  l(K»ps.      Care  is  to  be  taken  in  this  case  not  to  press  the 
iiay  against  the  sides  of  the  still,  for  that  would  scratch  nearly 
rts  soon  as  the  wash   itself;   but  the  sticks   never  will ;   these 
Hre    simple    but    effectual    contrivances,  and  in  point  of  ele- 
gance, they  may  be  improved  at  leisure. 

There  is  another  inconvenince  attending  the  distillation  of 
malt  spirit,  which  is,  when  all  the  bottoms  or  gross  mealy  fe- 
culence is  put  into  the  still  along  with  the  liquor,  th«  thinner 

IS 


206  THE    AKIIST    AJ<f0 

part  of  th©  wubli   going  off  in  the  form    of  spirit,   the  mealy 
mass  grov/s  by  degrees,  more  and   more   stiff,  so  as  to  scorch 
towards  the  latter  part  of  the  operation  ;  the  best  method  of 
remedying  this,  is  to  have  a  pipe,  with  a  stop  cock,  leading 
from  the  upper  part  of  the  worm    tub  into  the    still,  so  that 
upon  a  half  or  a  quarter  turn,  it  may  continuall}'  supply  a  lit- 
tle stream  of  hot  water,  in  the  same  proportion  as  the  spirit 
luns  off,  by  which  means  the  danger  of  scorching  is  avoided, 
and  the  operation  at  the  same  time,  not  in  the  least  retarded. 
In  Holland,  the  malt  distillers  work  all  their  wash  thick, 
with  the  whole  body  of  meal  among  it,  yet  they  are  so  care- 
ful in  keeping  their  stills  clean,  and  so  regular  and  nice  in  the 
management  of  their  fires,  that  though  they  use  no  artifice  at 
all  on  this  head,  only  to  charge  the  still,  while  it  is  hot   and 
moist,  they  very  rarely  have  the  misfortune  to  scorch,  except 
now  and  then  in  the  depth  of  winter.     When  such   an  acci- 
dent has  once  happened  in  a  still,  they  are    very   careful  to 
scrape,  scrub  and  scour  off  the  remains    of  the  burnt  matter, 
otherwise  they  find  the  same  accident  liable  to  happen   again 
in  the  same  place.     But  beyond  all  other  methods  in  use  oa 
this   occasion,  would  be  the   working  the  stills,  not  by  a  dry 
heat,  but  in  a  balneum  mariae,  which  mig\it  be    possibly  con- 
trived by  the  basin  being  large  and  capable  of  working  a  great 
many  stills  at  once,  so  as  to.be  extremely   worth  ihe  proprie- 
tor's attention  in   all    respects.     Another  requisite  tc  be  ob- 
served is,  that  tli^   water  in  the  worm  tub  be  kept  cool-   this 
may  be  effected  by  placing  in  the  middle  of  the  tub  a  wood- 
en pipe  or  gutter,  about  three  inches  square  w'l^hin,  reachinp; 
from  the  top  nearly  to  the  bottom.      By  this  contrivance  cold 
water  may,  as  of  en  as  necessary,  be  conveyed  to  the  bottom 
of  the  w^arm  tub,  and  the  hot  water  at  the  top   forced  either 
over  the  sides  of  the  tub,  or,  what  is  better,  through  a  leaden 
pipe   of  a  moderate   size,  called  a  waste  pipe,  so-ldered    into 
the  top  of  the  tub,  and  extendc^d  to  the  gutter  formed  to  tarry 
away  the  water. 

Tg  choose  good  Malt.  Malt  is  chosen  by  its  sweet  smell 
mellow  taste,  full  flower,  round  body  and  thin  skin  ;  there  ar6 
two  sorts  in  general  use,  the  pale  and  the  brown.  The  for- 
mer is  more  generally  used  in  gentlemen's  houses  and  private 
families,  the  latter  in  public  brew  houses,  as  seeming  to  go 
further,  and  make  the  liquor  higher  coloured.  Others  again 
mix  one  tiiird  brovv'n  with  tvVo  thirds  pale  ;  but  this   depends 


upon  the  liking  of  the  drinkers.  The  sweetest  rnalt  is  that 
which  is  dried  with  coak  or  cindejs.  In  grinding  it,  see  that 
the  mill  be  clean  from  dust,  cobwebs,  &,c.  Set  it  so  as  to 
crush  every  grain,  without  grinding  it  to  powder  ;  lor  you  had 
better  have  some  small  grains  slip  through  untouched,  than  to 
have  the  whole  ground  too  small,  which  will  cause  it  to  take 
together,  so  that  you  cannot  get  the  goodness  out  of  it. 

Hops.  Hops  are  chosen  by  their  bright  green  colour, 
sweet  smell  and  clamminess  when  rubbed  between  tlie  hands. 

Water  for  Brewing,  Water  out  of  rivers  or  rivulets  is 
best,  except  polluted  by  the  melting  of  snow  or  land  water 
from  clay  on  ploughed  lands.  Snow  water  will  take  near 
one-fifth  part  more  of  malt  to  make  the  beer  good.  If  you 
have  no  river  water,  a  pond  that  has  a  bottom  not  over  mud- 
d}^,  and  is  fed  by  a  spring,  will  do  ;  for  the  sun  will  soften 
and  rarify  it.  Very  hard  water  drawn  from  a  deep  well  into 
a  M  ide  cistern  or  reservoir,  and  exposed  to  the  air  or  sun,  in 
two  or  three  days  has  been  brewed  with  success,  by  the  addi- 
tion of  malt.  Rain  water  comes  next  to  river  for  brewing; 
In  short,  all  water  that  will  raise  a  lather  with  soap,  is  good 
for  brewing. 

Breioing  Vessels.  To  a  copper  that  holds  thirty-six  gal- 
lons, the  mash  tun  ought  to  be  at  least  large  enough  to  con- 
tain six  bushels  of  malt,  and  the  copper  of  liquor,  and  room 
for  mashing  or  stirring  it.  The  under  back  coolers  and 
working  tuns,  may  be  rather  fitted  to  the  convenience  of  the 
room,  than  to  a  particular  size,  for  if  one  vessel  be  not  suffi- 
cient to  hold  3^our  liquor,  you  may  take  a  second. 

Of  what  is  procured  hy  Distillation.  By  d  is!  illation  aie 
procured  spirits,  essence,  simple  waters,  and  phlegm.  Spirits 
are  very  difficult  to  be  defined.  We  consider  them  as  the 
most  subtile  and  volatile  parts  of  a  body.  All  bodies,  with- 
out exception  have  more  or  less  spirits.  These  parts  are  an 
ignited  substance,  and  consequently  by  their  own  nature  dis- 
posed to  violent  motion.  These  volatile  particles  are  more 
or  less  disposed  to  separate  themselves  as  the  b;>dies  are  more 
or  less  porous,  or  abound  with  a  greater  or  1(  s  quantity  of 
oil.  By  the  term  essence,  we  understand  the  oleaginous 
parts  of  a  body.  An  essential  oil  is  found  in  all  bodie>,  bemg 
one  of  their  constituent  principles.  We  have  observed  in  all 
distillations,-spirits  of  wine  excepted,  a  soft  unctuous  sub- 
stance floating   on    the  phlegm ;  find  this    substance    is  oil, 


20$  THK    ARTfSrT    ji2Hi^ 

wMeh  w^  call  essence,  and  tbis  is  what  wo  endeavour  to  e%-^- 
tract.  Simple  waters  are  those  distilled  from  plants,  flow- 
ers, &.C.  without  {he  lielp  of  water,  brrtiidy,  or  spirits  of  wine. 
These  waters  are  commonly  odoriferous,  containing  the  odour 
of  the  body  from  whence  it  is  extracted,  and  even  exceeds  in 
smull  the  body  ilseif.  Phlegm  is  the  aqueous  particles  of 
bodies,  but  whether  an  active  or  passive  principle,  we  shrdi 
leave  to  the  decision  of  chemists.  It  is  of  the  l;»st  impor- 
tance to  a  distillei"  to  be  well  acquaimed  with  its  nature. 
Many  mistaking  for  phlegm,  several  white  and  coloured 
draps^  which  first  fall  into  the  receiver,  when  the  still  begins; 
to  ;york,  Thesp  however  are  often  the  most  spirituous  par- 
ticles of  the  matter  in  (be  alembic,  and  consequently  ought  lo< 
be  preserved.  What  has  given  occasion  to  this  nustake,  is 
some  huriiidity  reipaining^  in  the  head,  &.c.  of  the  alembic 
And  had  it  been  thorougly  wiped,,  the  first  drops  would  hav© 
been  equally  bright  with  any,  during  the  whole  operation. 

The  followiifi'  remark  deserves  attention.     In  bodies  that 
have   been    digested,  the    spirits    ascend    first.      Whereas    in 
charges    not  digested,  the  phlegm  ascends  before  the   spirits. 
Tho  reason  of  this  is  very  plain  aud  natural.      In  s;ibstances 
previously    digested,  the  action   of  fire   no  sooner  causes  the 
matter  in  the  alembic  to  boil,  than  the  spirits,  being  (he  in(»si: 
volatile  parts,  detach  themselves,  and  ascend  into  the  brad  of 
the  alembic.      But  when  the  matt6)r  to  be  distilled  has  noi  un- 
dergone a  proj)cr  digestion,  the  spirits  being  entangled  in  tl>e 
phlegm,  are  less  disposed  to  ascei>d  till  the  phlegm  itself  sep- 
arates and  gives  them  room  to  fly  upwards.      The  phlegm  be-. 
ing  aqueous,  rises  iiist — this  is   more  particularly   observable 
in  spices.  ^  We  are,  however,   inclined  to   believe,  that  wei  e 
the  operation  performed  in  an  alembic,  when  the  bead  was  at 
a  great  distance  from  the  surface   of  the  charge,  they  would 
not  ascend  high  enough  to  come  over  the  helm,  but  h\\  back 
again  by  their  own  gravity,  and  by  that  m^eaus  leave  the  spT- 
rits  at  liberty  to  ascend.      But  in   Vfie  common   refrigeratory 
alembic   this   always   happens.      If   this    observation    he-  not 
readily   admitted,' we  appeal   to  experience,  which  we  desire 
mfjy  be  the  test  of  every  thing  we  advance.     Another  obser-^ 
yation  which  has  verified  the  above  assertion  by  innum/^rable 
instances  is,  that  when  we  have   not   time  snflicient   to  d'^'ye^t 
the  substances,  we  should  bruise  them  in  a  monap  ;   biH  nor- 
withstanding  th.  trituration,  the  phlejjm  will  first  come  m^x 


«nd  afteiMvarcIs  the  spirits.  But  we  desire  to  he  unJ  stood, 
lJi.it  we  S|itMk  here  ouiy  (if  tiie  volatile  pariS  of  me  pla'its, 
not  dr«t\va  wiih  vini»us  spirits,  but  cuiua.ned  ia  a  biiiipie  wa- 
ter. 

Another  remark  we  mlist  add,  and  which  we  hope  will  be 
Hcceptable  i<;  ihe  curious^  as  ii  lias  iu>i  yei  been  niude  public, 
though  doubtless  the  observation  has  ot'ieu  occurred  to  oth- 
ers ;  it  is  this  :  that  in  mixed  charges,  consisting  of  flowers, 
fruits,  and  aromatic  planis  put  into  ihi)  alembic,  wiihout  any 
previous  digestion,  the  spirits  of"  the  ilowers  ascend  first;  and 
notwithstanding  ihe  mixture,  they  con;racied  nothing  of  the 
smell  or  taste  of  the  fruits  and  plants.  i\ext  after  the  spirits 
of  (he  flowers,  those  oi  the  fruits  ascend,  not  in  the  least  im- 
pregnated vvidi  the  smell  or  taste  of  either  of  the  flowers  or 
plants.  And  in  the  last  place  the  spirits  of  the  plants  distil 
no  less  neat  than  the  f'rmer.  Sliotdd  this  appear  strange  to 
any  one,  experience  vrill  convince  him  ol  the  truth.  Another 
observation  we  have  made  on  aromatic  herbs,  is,  thai  whether 
they  are  or  are  not  digested,  or  if  the  spirits  or  phlegm  as- 
cend first,  the  spirits  contain  very  little  ui'  the  taste  or  smell 
of  the  plants  from  whence  they  were  extracted  ;  and  we  have 
always  been  obliged  to  put  to  these  spirits  a  greater  or  less 
quantity  of  the  phlegm,  in  order  to  give  the  spirits  wo  had 
drawn,  the  taste  of  an  aromatic  odowr  of  X^^^  plants,  the 
phlegm  craitaining  the  greatest  quaiftity  of  >oth.  This  ob- 
servation we  insert  as  ol  giejt  o^^e  to  tho^  who  practice  dis- 
tiilation. 

A<  the  term  digestion  oftnn  occ-^»s  m  this  essay,  we  can- 
not avoid  p<.iniing  out  its  adv^t-^g^-S  and  even  show  the 
n«^cessit\  of  using  it  in  sev-^^*  circumstances.  Siibstances 
are  said'to  be  in  d  gestio-  vvhen  they  are  infused  m  a  men- 
stiuum  over  a  very  slo-^  fi'^.  This  preparation  is  often  ne- 
cessary in  distillati^-N  f<^*-  it  tends  to  open  the  bodies,  and 
thereby  free  th^^  spirits  fr*mi  their  coutinements,  whereby 
they  are  bei>''*'  ^"^bled  to  ascend.  Cold  digestions  are  the 
best  •'  xhf^^G  ^'^f^^  t^y  ^'''^9  01  in  hot  materials,  diminish  the 
quali'/  of  the  goods,  or  some  part,  as  the  most  volatile  will 
^  lost.  In  order  t(/  procure  essences,  the  llodies  must  be 
prepared  by  digestion.  It  is  e\cn  of  absoluionccessity  for 
extracting:  the  spirits  and  essences  of  s()ices. 

Ihtflic^  proper  fov  Distillation.  I'h.s  article  ;il.  ne  might 
make  a  volume,  were  a  particular  enumeration  of  all  iiB  part*  . 

IS* 


210  -  T*J*    ARTliT   AI«I* 

made  ;  but  as  it  has  been  already  observedy  we  shall  confuie 
ourselves  to  the  distillation  of  simple  and  compound  waters- 
If  we  acquit   ourselves  to  the  satisfaction  ofi  the  public^^we 
shall  enjoy  the  pleasure  of  having  treated  on  one  part  entirely 
new  :   and  the  only  one,  indeed  that  has  be«n  overlooked. 
The  bodies  proper  for  distillation,  are  flowers,  fruits,  s«eds, 
spices  and  aromatic  plants.     By  distillation  and  digestion,  we 
extract  the  colour  and  smell  of  flowers,  in  simple  waters  and 
essences.    We  extract  from  iruits,  at  least  from  some,  colour^ 
taste,  &c.     From  aromatic  plants  the  distiller  draws  spirits, 
essences,  simple  and    compound  waters.      From    spices  are 
procured  essences,  or  in  the  language  of  the  chemist,  oils 
and  perfumes,  and  also  pure  spirits.     From  seeds  or  berries 
are  drav/n  simple    waters,  pure    spirits,  and  from  some,  as 
those  of  anise,  fennel  and  juniper,  oil.     The  colour  of  flow- 
ers is   extracted   by  infusion    and   likewise   by   digestion    in 
brandy  or  spirits  of  wine  ;   the  smell   is  extracted  by  distilla- 
tion; the  simple  water  with  brandy  or  spirits  of  wine.   What 
is  extracted  of  the  colour  of  flowers  by  infusion  in  water,  by 
a  gentle  heat  or  by  digestion  in  brandy  or  spirits  of  wine,  is 
called,  in  the  distiller's  phrase,  tincture  of  flowers.      The  co- 
lour of  fruits  is  extracted  in  the  same  manner,  either  by   in- 
fusion or  digestion,  their  taste   is  also  procured  by  the  same 
processes.      But  let  it  be  observed  that  the  time  of  these  ope- 
rations must  be  ignited;  for  otherv/ise  the  fruit,  after  fermen- 
tation, would  render?  it  acid.     The  taste  is  also  extracted  by 
the  alembic,  pure  spirV.s,  odours,  simple  waters,  but  these  re- 
quire different  methods  ol  distillation.     The  first  by  water  or 
brandy  only,  the  second  by  rectified"  spirit,  which  will  give 
them  the  greatest  excellency  thcy  are  capable  of  receiving. 

The  plants  themselves  with  the.,  flowers  may  also  be  dis- 
tilled, which  is  stdl  better.  From  slices  are  drawn  spirits 
and  oily  or  spirituous  quintescences.  't'^e  spirits  are  drawn 
by  brandy,  or  spiiits  of  wine,  with  very  little  water  •  the  oils 
are  distilled  per  descensum:  and  the  spirituous  quintesences 
by  pounding  the  spices,  and  after  infusing  them  in  spirits  of 
wine,  decanting  it  gently  by  inclination.  From  soeti«  are 
extracted  simple  waters,  spirits  and  oils.  Very  few  of  t\n> 
first  and  last  spirits  being  what  is  generally  extracted  from 
seeds  and  berries.  Some  distillers,  through  a  notion  of  fru- 
gality, distil  seeds  with  water,  but  their  liquors  are  not  to  be 
ompared  with  those  which  are  distilled  with  spirits.     When 


eiuiDE.  211 

oils  are  drawn  from  seed,  the  operation  is  performed  either 
by  the  balneum  raariee,  or  vapour  bath. 

CHAPTER  XXIX 
Fermentation — Rectification — Filtration. 

Fermentation.  The  tincture,  or  the  wash,  as  distillers  call 
it,  being  prepared  , as  you  will  find  described  under  the  head 
of  Brewing  in  order  to  Ihe  production  of  inflammable  spirits, 
it  is  next  to  be  fermented  ;  for  without  the  operation  no  vinous 
spirit  can  be  produced.  By  fermentation  is  meant  that  intes- 
tine motion  performed  by  the  instiumental  efficacy  of  water, 
whereby  the  salt,  oil,  and  earth  of  a  fermentable  subject  are 
separated,  attenuated,  transposed,  and  again  collected,  and 
reconiposed  in  a  particular  manner.  The  doctrine  of  fermen- 
tation is  of  the  greatest  use,  and  should  be  well  understood  by 
every  distiller,  as  it  is  the  very  basis  of  the  art,  and  perhaps, 
if  more  attended  to,  a  much  purer  spirit,  as  well  as  a  greater 
quantity  of  it  might  be  procured,  from  the  same  materials  than 
at  present.  We  shall  therefore  lay  down  a  concise  theory  of 
fermentation,  before  we  proceed  to  deliver  the  practice. 

Every  fermentable  subject  is  composed  of  salt,  oil,  and  a* 
subtile  earth  ;  but  tliese  particles  are  so  small,  that  when 
asunder,  they  are  imperceptible  to  the  senses  ;  and  therefore, 
when  mixed  with  an  aqueous  fluid,  they  leave  it  transparent ; 
neither  have  fermentable  bodied  an}'  taste,  except  thai  of 
sweetness.  These  particles  are  composed  of  salt,  oil  and 
earth,  intimately  mixed  in  an  actual  cohesion,  connexion  and 
union  ;  and  therefoie,  when  any  one  of  these  principles  too 
much  abounds  in  any  subject,  so  that  an  intimate  union  is  pre- 
vented, the  whole  efficacy  of  the  fermentation  is  either  stopped 
or  impaired,  or  at  least  limited  to  one  certain  species.  This 
equal  connexion  of  salt,  oil  and  earth,  into  a  single  compound 
particle,  forms  a  corpuscle,  soluble  in  water  ;  or  to  speak 
more  philosophically,  this  compound  corpuscle  is,  by  means 
of  its  saline  particles,  connected  with  the  aqueous  corpuscles, 
and  moved  up  and  down  with  them.  But  when  these  corpus- 
cles are  not  thus  connected  with  the  water,  a  number  of  them 
join  together,  and  form  either  a  gross  or  a  loose  chafiy  and 
spungy  matter.  When  these  compound  particles  are  diluted 
with  a  small  quantity  of  aqueous  fluid,  they  feel  slippery, 
clammy,  and  unctuous  to  the  touch,  and  eflect  the  taste  with 
a  kind  of  rosy  sweetness,  and  when  a  pr  oper  quantity  of  the 


212  THE    ARTIST    AND 

fluid  is  added,  a  commotion  is  pieseiilly  excited,  and  afiei- 
wards  a  subti'e  sepaiaiion  (irst  begins  in  il»e  wliuie  substance, 
for  before  the  a«ldition  of  water,  the  subjoci  ni-^y  lejnam  in 
dry,  solid,  and  large  pieces,  as  in  malt,  sugar,  6lc.  which  be- 
ing 1  educed  to  p.>wder,  each  grain  theieot  is  an  agreemeni  of 
many  compound  corpuscles;  then  being  put  into  water,  dis- 
solve and  separately  float  therein,  till  ai  length  ibe^  become 
sc  small  as  lo  be  invisible,  and  only  ihicken  the  consisience 
of  the  liquor. 

These  corpuscles  being  thus  separated  fr«'m  one  another, 
there  next  ensues  a  sepaiati<jn  of  their  compt/nent  panicles; 
tiiai  is,  ihe  salt,  the  oil  and  the  earth  are  divided  by  the  in- 
terposition of  aqueous  panicles.  The  first  commouon  is  no 
more  than  a  ba/e  solution  ;  for  the  saline  particles  being 
easily  dissolvable  in  v  ater,  they  are  immediately  laid  hold  of 
by  the  aqueous  particles,  and  cairied  about  with  them.  But 
the  succeeding  separation  or  fermentative  motion  is  a  very 
difl'erent  thing;  for  by  this,  the  saline  particles  are  divided 
from  those  of  oil  and  earth,  parti;/  by  the  impulse  of  the  others 
in  their  motion,  and  partly  by  the  force  ol"  ihe  aqueous  parti- 
cles, which  arenow  continually  meeting  and  dashing  against 
them.  This  motion  is  performed  by  the  water,  as  a  fluid  or 
aggregate  of  an  infinite  number  of  particles  in  actual  and  per- 
petual motion,  their  smallnesstjeing  proporiionable  to  that  of 
the  fermenting  corpuscles,  and  tlieir  moiion,  or  constant  sus- 
cepiibiliiy  of  motion,  by  the  w.irmih  and  motion  of  the  air, 
disposing  ■  them  to  move  other  subiile  moveable  corpuscles 
also.  The  certain  agreement  of  figure  or  size,  between  the 
aqueous  particles,  and  those  of  the  suit  in  the  fermentable 
subject,  tends  greatly  to  increase  this  commotion  :  for  by  this 
means  they  hve  readily  and  very  closely  connected*togeiher  ; 
and  move  tdmost  like  one  and  the  same  compound  corpuscle, 
while  the  water  is  not  at  all  disposed  to  cohere  immediately 
with  either  the  oil  or  earth  ;  and  thus  an  equal  concussion  is 
excited  in  the  compound  corpuscles  of  the  fermentable  subject 
which  concussion  at  length  strikes  out  the  saline  particles, 
loosens  the  others,  and  finally  produces  a  separation  of  the 
original  connexion  of  the  subject. 

An  aqueous  fluid,  therefore,  is  the  true,  and  indet'd  the 
only  instrument  for  procuring  a  fermentable  motion  in  iwse 
eompound  corpuscles  of  the  subject,  for  were  an  oil;  fluid 
poured  upon  any  fermentable  subject,  no  vinous  fermer  *ation 


traije5man'«  guide.  213 

would  ensue  ;  as  the  o\]  could  neither  give  a  sufficient  impulse 
on  I  he  compound  corpuscles  which  are  grosser  than  its  own 
constituent  pinicles^  nor  divide  th^  o:ly  or  saline  particles  of 
iheisubject,  i'roni  their  connexion  wiih  the  oihers,  winch  de- 
tain, and'as  it  were,  ej[iveh)}.e  or  defend  ihem  fi  am  its  action. 
Tiie  conipound  corpuscles  of  the  fermentable  subject  being 
aOVcted  by  the  perpetual  motion  of  the  particles  ot  the  aque- 
ous fluid,  a  proper  degree  of  motion  is  necessary,  or  that  I'ne 
particles  move  wfh  a  proper  degree  of  velocity,, which  de- 
pends on  tvxternal  heat.  A  considerable  degiee  of  cold,  in- 
deed, will  not  absolutely  prevent'  fermentation,  though  it  will 
retard  it  ;  and  a  boiling  heat  will  prevent  it  still  more.  A 
tepid  or  middle  degree  of  heat,  between  freezing  and  boiling 
is  therefore  the  most  proper  for  promoting  and  quickening  the 
operatioi'.  The  admission  of  air,  also,  though  not  of  abso- 
lute necessity,  3ret  greatly  promotes  and  quickens  the  action, 
as  being  a  capital  instruntent  in  putting  in  a  proper  degrew  of 
motion  the  oily  particles  of  the  subject  ;  but  whilst  the  air 
thus  contributes  to  hasten  the  eflect,  it  causes  at  the  same 
time  by  its  act'vity,  simie  remarkable  alterations  in  the  oily 
particles  ;  for  it  not  only  moves  but  absolutely  dissolves  and 
displaces  them  from  their  original  connexions  ;  and  thus  car- 
ries them,  off  itself  from  the  wliole  mass.  And,  therefore, 
t''.ou(;h  the-  consideration  of  the  a^r  does  not  so  properly 
belong  to  fermentation  in  general,  yet  it  does  in  particular 
cases  ;  as  having  an  accidental  power  to  alter  every  species 
of  this  operation,  consequently  its  agency  ought  to  be  well 
understood,  either  to  procure  alterations  at  pleasure,  In  the 
fermejiting  mass,  or  to  p.eve,nt  or  correct  impending  dangers. 
The  oily  particles  thus  separated  and  dissolved  by  the  air,  are 
also  elastic,  though  th*^'^;^  probably  derive  that  jjroperty  from 
thf^ir  in*erc(M?rse  with  he  air  itselt/and  these  bein^  rendered 
ex  remely  minute.  When,  thf-ref  re,  an  aqueous  fluid  is  ad-» 
ded  to  a  fermentable  subject,  exposed  to  a  ten>perate  heat,  a 
fetment?itive  strusfgle  immediately  arises,  the  saline  part  of 
the  compound  particles  beinsf  dissolved  by  the  continual  in- 
testine motion  of  the  water,  and  carried  up  and  down  with  it 
in  all  directions,  amidst  an  infinite  number  of  other  particles, 
i}\  well  fermentable  as  aq«veous  ones,  whence  by  this  collision 
nnd  attritinji,  the  saline  particles  are  dissolved  and  sef)arated 
fr  >m  their  connexi-on  with  the  oily  and  earthy.  And  as  the 
pily  particles  are  the  most  subtile  and  elastic,  they  would   by 


214  THE    ARTIST    AND 

this  means,  be  thrown  up  to  the  surface  of  the  liquor,  and 
carried  off  by  the  air,  were  they  not  closely  connected  with 
the  earthy  ones,  whose  gravity  prevents  their  evaporation, 
and  by  coming  in  contact  with  others  t>f  the  same  kind,  form 
aggregations,  and  sink  down  with  the  oily  particles  to  the  bot- 
tom. ; 

But  before  these  can  form  a  bulk  too  large  to  be  supported  > 
by  the  water,  many  of  the  oily  particles  are,  by  their  frequent 
collisions  with  the  aqueous  fluid,  separated  from  the  earthy 
ones,  and  by  degrees  more  strongly  connected  again  with  the 
saline  ones  ;  whilst  on  the  other  hand,  the  same  saline  parti- 
cles imbibe  some  of  the  earthy  ones,  winch  being  left  single 
upon  their  separation  from  the  oily  particles,  float  about  sep- 
arately in  the  fluid.  And  hence  proceed  the  several  different 
consequences  of  fermentation  ;  namely,  1.  From  the  separa- 
tion of  the  saline  particles  of  the  fermentable  subject,  pro- 
ceeds the  tart,  saline  or  acid  taste  of  the  liquor  which  is  more 
sensible  at  first,  before  the  liquor  is  duly  composed  and  set- 
tled, or  the  due  arrangement  and  connexion  of  the  saline  par- 
ticles with  those  of  the  oily  and  earthy  kinds,  completed  ; 
after  which  the  liquor  becomes  milder,  softer  or  less  pungent. 
2.  From  the  oily  particles  being  set  at  liberty,  proceeds  the 
strong  smell  of  the  liquor,  and  the  head  or  shining  skin  upon 
the  surface.  3.  The  earthy  particles  collecting  together  in 
clusters,  cause  the  fluid  to  appear  turbid,  and  afterwards  a 
visible,  earthy  or  clay  like  matter,  to  be  precipitated;  and 
some  of  the  earthy  parts  in  their  motion,  arriving  at  the  head 
or  oily  skin  on  the  surface  cause  it  to  thicken,  and  afterwards 
taking  it  down  along  with  it,  thus  constitute  the  lees  which 
abound  in  oil.  4.  From  this  new  stiuggle  or  collision,  whiv^h 
is  productive  both  of  solution  and  a  new  connexion  in  the  sa- 
line and  earthly  corpuscles,  proceeds  the  ebullition  in  fermen- 
tation ;  and  lastly,  by  the  same  repeated  coalition  of  the  oily 
with  the  aqueous  and  saline  particles,  the  inflammable  spirit 
is  produced. 

Having  thus  laid  down  a  consise  theory  of  fermentation, 
we  shall  now  proceed  to  the  practice.  The  wash  being 
brought  to  a  tepid  or  luke-warm  state  in  the  backs,  a  proper 
quantity  of  a  good  conditioned  ferment  is  added  ;  but  if  the 
ferment  be  soiled,  it  should  be  previously  broke  into  small 
pieces,  and  gently  thinned,  either  with  the  hand,  wisp,  &;.c.  in 
a  little  of  the  tepid  liquo.-.     A  complete  and  uniform  solution, 


tradesivian's  guide.  215 

should  not  be  attempted,  because  that  would  greatly  weaken 
the  power  of  the  ferment,  or  destroy  its  future  efficacy.  The 
whole  intended  quantity  being  thus  loosely  mixed  with  a  mod- 
erate portion  of  the  liquor,  and  kept  in  a  tepid  state,  either  by 
setting  it  near  tlte  fire  or  otherwise,  and  free  from  the  too  rude 
commerce  of  the  external  air,  more  of  the  insensibly  warm 
liquor  ought  to' be  added  at  proper  intervals,  till  at  length  the 
whole  quantity  is  properly  set  to  working  together,  and  thus  by 
dividing  the  business  into  parts,  it  may  much  more  speedily  and 
effectually  be  performed,  than  by  attempting  it  all  at  once. — 
The  whole  quantity  of  liquor  being  thus  set  at  work,  secured 
in  a  proper  degree  of  warmth,  and  defended  from  a  too  free 
intercourse  of  the  external  air,  nature  itself,  as  it  were,  finish- 
es the  process,  and  renders  the  liquor  fit  for  the  still.  By 
ferments  is  meant  anv  substance,  which  being  added  to  any 
rightly  disposed  fermentable  liquor,  will  cause  it  to  ferment 
much. sooner  and  twister,  than  it  would  of  itself,  and  conse- 
quently render  the  operation  shorter,  in  contradiction  to  those 
abusively  called  so,  which  only  corrects  some  fault  in  the  li- 
quor, or  gives  it  some  flavour.  Hence,  we  see,  that  the  prin- 
ciple use  of  ferments  is  to  save  time,  and  make  despatch  in 
business,  whilst  they  only  occasionally,  and  as  it  were  by  ac- 
cident give  a  flavour  and  increase  the  quantity  of  spirits. — 
And  accordingly,  every  fermentable  spirit  may  without  the 
tiddition  of  any  ferment,  by  a  proper  management  of  heat 
alone,  be  brought  to  ferment,  and  even  more  perfectly,  though 
much  slower  than  with  their  assistance.  These  ferments  are 
in  general  the  flowers  and  faeces  v)f  all  fermentable  1  quors, 
generated  and  thrown  to  the  surface,  or  deposited  at  the  hot* 
tom,  either  during  the  act  of  fermentation  or  after  the  opera- 
tion is  finished.  Two  of  these  are  procurable  in  large  quan- 
tities, and  at  a  small  expense:  beer  yeast  and  wine  It^es;  a 
prudent  and  artificial  manngement,  or  use  of  which  might  ren- 
der the  business  of  distillation,  much  more  certain  and  ad- 
vantageous. It  has  been  esteemed  very  difficult  and  a  great 
discouragement  in  the  business  of  distillation,  to  procure  a 
sufficient  stock  of  these  materials,  and  preserve  them  at  all 
times  ready  for  use.  Tlio  whole  secret  consists  in  dexterous- 
ly freeing  the  matter  from  its  superfluous  moisture  ;  because 
in  its  fluid  state,  it.  is  subject  to  a  further  fermentation,  which 
is  productive  of  corruption,  in  which  state  it  becomes  intol- 
erably foetid  and  cadaverous.     The  method  of  exposing  it  to 


2lS  TK£    ARTIJIT  ANtt  ^ 

the  air  till  it  has  acquired  a  proper  consistence,  is  subject  td 
great  incoiivenieuce> ;  and  so  pecuhar  and  Citiefui  manage- 
meui  IS  necessJiiy,  that  it  rarely  succeeds.  The  best  way 
theiet'ore,  is  ro  press  ii  \evy  sK)\v!y  and  gra  u'filiy,  m  a  iliick, 
ch>se  and  suong  canvas  b,\j^,  alie.  ;he  manner  oi  #ine  lees, 
by  the  toil  press,  till  ii  beconuf.s  a  kind  ol  tr.ke ,  tvhah  .hi.'ugn 
sojt.  Will  easily  snap,  oi  break  beiWt^en  ihe  hn^eis,  Benig 
reduced  to  that  consistence,  and  closely  packed  Uj  in  a  light 
cask,  it  will  remain  a  long  time  uncorrupied,  preserve  iis  IVa- 
grancy,  and  consecpienlly  fit  to  be  used  for  fernieniing  the  hn- 
est  liquor. 

The  same  method   is  also  practicable  and  to  the  Srime  ad- 
vantage, in  the  flowers  of  yeast  or  wi   e,  which  may   be  thus 
commodiously  imported  fr«.m   abroad;  or   if  these  cannot  be 
procured,  others  of  equal  efficacy  m  ly  be  procured  from  fresh 
wine  lees,  by  barely  mixing  and  stirring  Ihem  into   a  proper 
warm    liquor,  when   the   liglitei    and  more  volatile  and  active 
pans  of  the  lees  will  be  thrown  to  the  surface,  and  may  easdy 
be  taken  off  and  preserved    by  tlie  above  mentioned  iileihod, 
in  an}'  desired  q!lanlit3^      And  hence,  by  a  \ery  easy  process 
an  inexhaustible  supjjiy  of   the  most   useful  fermetits  may  be 
readily  and  successively  [)rocured,  so  as  to  prevent  for  the  fu- 
ture, all  occasion    of  complaint  for.  the  want   of  ihem,  in   the 
distiller's    busii^ess.      Experience    has   denionstratecJ,   tiiat  all 
ferments  abound   much    moie   in   ess(mtialsj    ih  iri    die   liquor 
which   produced   them  ;   and    consequently,   they  retani    in   )\ 
wry  high  degree,  the  sniell  an  I  fl  jvoiir  of  the  subject.      li  is 
therefore  requisite,  before  the  fernient  is  jipplied,  to  consid'M 
what  flavour  is  introduced,  or  whit  s[)ecies  of  fernun:  is  mosi 
proper   for  the   liquor.      The   alteraion   tims   c  nise<l   by  fei- 
menis,  is  so  considerable  as  to  render  jiny  nest  ral  fermentable 
liquor   of  the  same   flivo'.r  of  that  whirh  yields  the  ferment; 
This  observation  is  of  much  greater  mt^ineut  than  will  readily 
be  conceived,  for  a  new  scene  is  hereby  opened,'  both  in   the 
business  of  distillation,  and  others  depending  upon  fermenta- 
tion.     It   miist,  however,  be    observed,    that    its  beitefii  does 
not   extend  to  malt    treated   in  the  common  method  ;   nor    to 
any  other  subject  but  what  afl'ords  a  spirit  tolerably  pure  and 
tasteless.      For  othei  wise,  instead  of  producing  a  simple,  pure 
and  uniform  flavour,  it  causes  a  compound,  mixed  and  unnat- 
ural one*      How  far  the  fine  distiller  may  profit  by  it,  well  de- 
serves his  attention,  and  whether  our  native  cider  spirit,  crab 


?pi  ;r,  &r.  wliicli  hive  very  little  flavour  of  their  own,   naay 

iKii  by  liiis  iiriihr*',  ix*  b rough i  net*l\,  il  iilj;  tni.iiel}',  iuio. 
»Im*  s.alc  t)t'  siiiue  h;r<iiL-n  b.^vijies,  su  ii.giiiy  «'s.<»eji)eJ,  is  re- 
toinuiHi.iied  tii  ex>  4M:i^j5i<.e„  li  js  Cinuinuu  vv.ih  disiiliers,  i'\ 
or  ler^o  iiicrease  ibe  qn  Miuiy  of  spirir,  u*  give  it  a  parncular 
li  ivour,  1(1  imjirovo  us  viiu»sity,  to  adJ  seveml  things  to  tiie 
iiqu<»r  uujing  lUa  lime  a  is  iu  a  siase  of  feriiieiilaiiun,  and 
thiise  addiiions  may  properiy  be  reduced  to  s  liis,  acids,  aro-  - 
nutics,  and  oils. 

All  rich  vege  able  jukes,  as  Ireaclf,  honey,  d:c.  which 
cither  want  a  natural  acid,  have  been  deprived  of  it,  or  con» 
tain  it  in  loo  small  a  quantity,  will  he  greatly  improved  by 
adding  at  the  beginning  of  the  operation,  a  small  quantity  of 
tlip  vegetable  or  [itie  mineral  acid; ,  as  oil  of  sulphur,  gloubers, 
5t)ir»t  of  salt,  juice  ofT'mon,  oj  an  aqueous  soluiion  of  titrtar. 
These  addiiions  will  either  g!ve<or  greatly  improve  ihe  vin» 
ous  acidi'V  of  ilie  subjen,  bur  not  incre:)si-  the  quantity  of  ihft 
spirits;  that  intenion  beinij  |>erformed  by  ammaiics  aud  oil^ 
All  pungent  aronui  ics  have  a  surprising  quthiy  iA^  inci-casing 
the  quantity  of  the  spirit*!,  as  well  as  in  altering  or  improving 
the  fljvoiir;  but  ilieii  use  tequi»es  that  il)e  fermentation 
shuiild  be  performed  in  close  vessels,  pnl  if  a  large  qunatity 
be  in!end**d  to  b«  added,  care  musi  hi-  taken  not  to  do  it  nil 
at  once,  lest  »he  ollincss  «)f  the  inL^redieiits  sbnull  check  Uio 
o  eratioji.  But  if  she  flivjurbc^  tlu*  pfinrij^d  in.enion,  they 
siio  dd  not  be  athled  till  the  r.peiaiion  is  e.early  finished.  Af^ 
ter  the  sanu»  matrsier  a  very  consid<'r;'ble  quhnniy  of  nnv  €?s# 
sen  id  vegetable  oil  may  be"coi»\eru*d  inro  a  surj  risintrly  large 
quantity  of  infinnmnble  sjdrits  5  bur  irre;jt  chution  is  here 
a's*  necessary,  not  to  e'rr.p  it  too  f -s  ,  '>r  :idd  too  1  .r<:e  a 
quintity  at  a  lirno,  which  would  rb.nq)  lie  fc  rnentat  ot  ,  it 
beine  the  surest  n^eihOd  of  rheckinis  or  uyuWy  s;<  Pp  u^j:  ill's 
operation  at  any  fH-inl  of  lime  requre  '.  Tlu'  bcs  m-  hod 
therefore,  of  arfdiofif  the  oil  so  -is  to  :<v.)id  riM  iiH-on.en  ences, 
is  to  rid)  the  oil  in  a  mL»rrar  with  sntr»r,  whiih  the  .-hemistSL 
call  mak'nir  hm  (da?^accharum,  by  which  me  ins  the  tenacity 
of  the  oil  will  !)e  destroyed;  Mud  t'^e  whole  read  ly  mix  wiih 
the  I'quor,  and  iramodiarely  fermen?  iviih  it.  The  distiller 
wotdd  do  well  (o  ctmsidor  th»«se  observ«tious  attentively,  as 
he  may  thence  iorm  an  advint  i^eous  method  of  increasing 
the  quantity  of  spirits,  and  at  the  s  -me  time  ixreitly  improve 
their  nualitv  and  flavour.     But  in  order  to  put  these  observa- 

19 


^iB  THE    ARTIST   Afitf 

tions  in  practice,  particular  regard  must  be  had  to  the  con* 
taining  vessel  in  which  the  fermentation  is  performed,  the  ex- 
clusion of  the  air,  and  the  degree  of  the  external  heat  or 
cold.  With  regard  to  the  containing  vessel,  its  purity,  and 
the  provision  for  rendering  it  occasionally  close,  are  chiefly 
to  be  considered.  In  cleansing  it,  no  soap  or  other  unctuous- 
body  should  be  used,  for  fear  of  checking  the  fermentation  j 
and  for  the  same  reason,  all  strowg  alkaline  lixivium  &hould 
be  avoided.  Limewaier,  or  a  turbid  solution  of  quicklime 
may  be  employed  lor  ibib  pisrpose,  without  producing  any  ill 
effect :  it  will  also  be  of  great  service  in  destroying  a  prevail- 
ing acetous  salt,  which  is  apt  to  generate  in  the  vessels  when 
the  warm  air  has  free  access  to  them ;  and  lends  to  prevent 
the  order  of  fermentation,  and  instead  of  a  wine  or  wash, 
produce  a  vinegar.  Special  care  must  also  be  had  that  »a 
remains  of  yeast,  or  cadaverous  remains  of  former  fermented 
matters  hang  about  the  vessels;  which  would  infect  whatever 
should  be  afterwards  put  into  them,  and  cannot,  without  the 
utmost  difficulty,  be  perfectly  sweetened  and  cured.  The 
occasional  closeness  of  the  vessels  may,  in  the  large  way,  be- 
provided  for  by  covers  properly  adapted  ;  and  in  the  small 
way,  by  valves  placed  in  light  casks.  These  valves  will  oc- 
casionally give  the  necessary  vent  to  preserve  the  vessel,  dur- 
ing the  height  of  the  fermentation  ;  the  vessel  otherwise  re- 
maining perfectly  clcjse,  and  impervious  to  the  air.  It  is  a 
mistake  of  a  very  prejudicial  nature  in  the  business  of  for-^ 
mentation,  to  suppose  that  there  is  an  absolute  necessity  for 
a  free  admission  of  the  external  air:  the  express  contrary  i& 
the  truth,  and  very  great  advantages  w^ill  be  found  by  practis- 
ing according  to  this  supposition.  A  constant  influx  of  the 
external  air,  if  it  does  not  carry  off  some  part  of  the  spirit 
already  generated,  yet  certainly  catches  up  and  dissipates  the 
fine  subtile  or  oleaginous  and  saline  particles,  whereof  the 
spirit  is  made,  and  thus  considerably  lessens  the  quantity.  By 
a  close  fermentation,  this  inconveniance  is  avoided  ;  all  air 
except  that  included  in  the  vessel,  being  excluded.  Th© 
whole  secret  consists  in  leaving  a  moderate  space  for  the  air 
at  the  top  of  th-e  vessel  unpossessed  by  the  liquor  ;  when  the 
liquor  is  once  fairly  at  work,  to  bung  it  down  close,  and  thus 
suffered  to  finish  the  fermentatton  without  opening  or  giving 
it  any  more  vent  than  that  afforded  it  by  a  proper  vahe 
placed  in  the  cask,  which  however,  is  not  of  absolute  nece&* 


TRkDBSMAN's    GUIDE.  2l9 

lity,  when  the  empty  space,  or  rather  that  possessed  by  the 
air,  is  about  one  tenth  of  the  guage  ;  the  artificial  air,  gener- 
ated in  the  operation,  being  then  seldom  sufficient  to  open  a 
strong  valve,  or  at  most  not  to  endanger  the  cask.  This 
method  may  be  practised  to  great  advantage  by  those  whose 
business  is  not  very  large  ;  but  it  requires  too  much  time  to 
be  used  by  the  large  dealers,  who  are  in  a  manner  forced  to 
admit  the  fr«e  air,  and  thus  sustain  a  considerable  loss  in 
their  quantity  of  spirits,  that  the  fermentation  may  be  finish- 
ed in  the  small  time  allowed  for  that  purpose.  It  may  how- 
ever be  said,  that  the  silent,  slow,  and  almost  imperceptible 
vinous  fermentation,  is  universally  the  most  perfect  and  ad- 
vantageous. During  the  whole  course  of  this  operation, 
the  vessel  should  bo  kept  from  all  external  cold,  or 
coKsiderable  heat,  in  an  equal,  uniform,  and  moderate  tem- 
perature. In  the  winter,  stove  rooms,  such  as  are  common 
^n  Germany  would  be  very  convenient  for  this  purpose,  the 
vessel  being. placed  at  a  proper  distance  from  the  stove  ;  but 
at  other  seasons  no  particular  apparatus  is  necessary  in  Eng- 
land, or  even  in  the  central  part  of  the  United  States,  if  the 
place  allowed  for  the  business  be  but  well  defended  from  the 
summer's  heat  and  the  ill  effects  of  cold,  bleak,  northern 
winds.  The  operation  is  known  to  be  perfect  when  the  his- 
sing, or  small  bubbling  noise  can  be  no  longer  heard  upon  ap- 
plying th«  ear  to  the  vessel;  and  also,  by  the  liquor  itself 
appearing  clear  to  the  eye,  and  having  a  pungent  sharpness 
on  the  tongue.  And  that  it  may  fully  obtain  these  proper- 
lies  and  be  well  fitted  to  yield  a  pure  and  perfectly  vinous 
spirit  by  distillation,  it  should  be  suffered  to  stand  at  rest  in 
a  somewhat  cooler  place,  it  practicable,  than  that  in  which  it 
was  fermented,  till  it  has  thoroughly  deposited,  and  cleansed 
itself  of  the  gross-lee,  and  become  perfectly  transparent,  vin- 
ous and  fragrant,  in  which  state  it  should  be  committed  to  the- 
still ;  and  the  spirits  obtained  will  not  only  exceed  that  ob- 
tained in  the  common  way  in  quantity,  but  also  in  fragrance, 
pungency  and  vinosity. 

Rectification.  The  principal  business  is  to  separate  the 
spirit  from  the  essential  oil  the'spirit  contains.  Care  should 
be  taken  in  the  first  distillation;  the  spirit,  especially  raaljt 
spirit  should  be  drawn  by  a  gentle  fire,  which  will  keep  a 
great  part  of  the  essentiaroil  from  mixing  with  the  spirit,  as  it 
if  abundayitly  proved  eesier  to  keep  asunder  then  to  separate 


when  mixod,  as  this  is  almost  impossible.  To  draw  low  wine*^ 
the  best  method  of  separaiing  the  oil  tiom  the  spirit  is  b\  ic- 
disijil  tiou  ami  p<'ic«4aiFJij,  To  n^euiy  low  wines,  \Uvy 
should  be  put  into  a  uii^i  bi>d>',  or  aleiiibic,  ijnd  geuily  disiilhd 
ill  balneum  maiia^ ;  by  this  wjeans  boih  iha  oil  diui  ibe  pliii»giii 
will  reniain  in  the  bod  y\  but  ilihe  spirii  sliould  be  found  afier 
this  operation,  to  conuun  so-nie  of  the  eysential  oil,  it  must  be 
let  down  with  fair  water  and  re-disuih.'d  m  the  same  nmnner* 
And  thus  it  may  be  brought  to  any  degree  of  purity,  especi- 
ally if  ii?  working,  the  spirit  be  suifered  t{»  foil  into  a  proper 
qnamhy  of  the  beiueum  mariae.  -  But  it  must  be  remembeted, 
that  it  is  much  b)CF<;  difiicuU  to  cleanse  akobol  or  proof  spirit^ 
than  low  wines,  because  ihe  mVia  more  intimately  mixed  witU 
the  two  former  than  wiib  il>e  latter;  this  oil  may  however  be 
separated  from  proof  spkit,  &,c.  by  \he  method  already  pro- 
posed, esp(?cially  if  it  be  previoasly  fihrated  through  paper,, 
thick  ilcinnel,  sand,  stone,  &c.  Bui  this  method,  though  it 
etiectually  answers  ilie  intenuon,  is  generally  rejected  by  dis* 
tillers,  because  of  the  slowness  of  the  operation,  and  others 
sobstFluted  in  its  stend  ;  (hiiugb  iEistead  of  freeing  the  spirit 
from  the  oil,  they  only  abolish  the  natural  flavour  of  the  spirit,, 
and  make  a  more  intim.ue  mixture  betwt-en  the  particles  of 
the  spirit  and  ihose  of  ihe  essesuial  oiL  Ii  is  impossible  to 
ennmerare  ail  llie  melKuis  practised  by  distillers,  as  filmost 
♦•very  one  pretends,  to  have  a  secret  nostrum  for  this  purpose*. 
The  principal  nieiliods  In  use  for  reciifying  mail  spirits  ara 
however  re(  i  c  bje  to  th:ce,  hi  n  <  ly,  \\  nijid  c  Iki  lli  e  s;  Is, 
by  acid  spirits  mixed  wi;h  alk'dine  silfs,  arifl  by  sal  m^  bodies 
and  favouring  addiiiofrs.  'I  he  method  of  reclihing  by  alka- 
line salts  is  thus  peri^>rme^d.  To  every  piece  ol  proof  spirit 
add  fourteen  pounds  dry  sjflt  of  tartar,  fixed  nitre,  or  calc  ned 
tartar;  lute  on  the  bead,  and  disil  by  a  genile  heat,  but  he 
careful  to  lenve  o!U  the  fju'ns.  By  this  n.'eihod  a  large  pro- 
portitjn  of  the  fojid  oil  ^^'11  be  left  in  the  still,  and  what  conies, 
over  with  the  spirit  will  be  jjreatly  attennaied.  But  this  oter- 
ati(;n  is  generrilly  perfotrnedin  a  very  ditFerent  n^arner  ;  for 
instecid  of  disnlln  u  .be  spirit  in  a  genie  and  e<|tid)le  m'umer, 
the  siill  is  worked  in  i:s  tuUfirce  ;  by  whhh  means  (he  oil^ 
which  sh<  nid  h  .ve  rem-'.ined  j»i  the  still,  is  driven  over  and 
intimrstJ  ly  mixed  w  iih  ihe  sr.irit.  jvfid  consequer.il v  'he  wholfv 
operation  frastrated,  and  the  spirit  rendered  \nuvh  huder  ta 
cltmso  than  it  was  before.     But  «vcn  when  the  ©peratie^i  h 


TR\13E!5MAN's    guide,  5^1 

performed  according  to  the  rules  of  art,  it  is  far  from  being 
perfect,  for  it  is  well  known  that  part  of  the  fixed  salts  become 
volatile  in  the  operation,  passes  over  the  helm,  and  intimately 
mixes  with  the  ^*ssential  oil  still  contained  in  the  spirits  ;  by 
this  means  the  oil  becomes  more  perfectly  united  with  the 
^spirits,  and  consequently  much  harder  to  be  separated  by 
repented  distillations:  nor  is  this  all  ;  for  the  still  being  worked 
in  its  full  force,  the  bitter  oil  of  the  malt  formed  into  a  kind 
of  liquid  soap  in  the  still,  by  means  of  the  alkaline  salt,  is 
brought  over  th^  helm  with  the  faints  and  suffered  to  mix  with 
the  spirit,  whereby  it  is  rendered  almost  as  nauseous  and  ill 
tasted  as  before  the  operation.  Besides,  if  this  operation 
Avere  performed  in  its  utmost  perfection,  it  would  never 
•answer  the  intention,  for  the  alkaline  salts  destroys  the  viilo^ 
sity  ef  the  spirit,  and  consequently  depri\es  It  of  one  of  ^^^ 
most  valuable  properties.  Our  divStillers  are  well  acquainted 
with  this  defect  in  the  operation,  and  endeavour  to  supply  h 
by  an  addition  of  acids.  This  is  what  we  call  the  second 
mcthed  by  alkalies  and  acids. 

The  operation  of  rectifying  by  the  method  of  fixed  alkalies 
and  acids  is  the  same  as  that  above  described  :  the  spirit  is 
diawn  over  from  fixed  alkalies  as  before,  but  in  order  to  mor- 
tify the  alkali  in  the  spirit,  and  restore  its  vinosity,  a  proper 
quantity  of  some  acid  spirit  is  added.  Various  kinds  of  acids  ~ 
are  used  on  this  occasion,  but  principally  those  of  the  mineral 
kind,  because  of  their  cheapness  ;  as  the  oil  of  vitriol,  spirit  of 
nitre,  oil  of  sulphur,  &c.  We  would  however  caution  younn- dis- 
tillers from  being  too  busy  with  these  corrosive  acids.  The 
sulphurous  spirit  of  vitriol,  dulcified  spirit  of  nitre,  or  Mr. 
Boyle's  acid  spirit  of  wine  will  rectified  well  much  better 
answer  their  purpose. 

The  third  method  of  rectification,  is  that  by  saline  bodies 
and  flavouring  ingredients.  There  is  no  difference  in  the 
operation,  between  this  and  the  two  foregoing  methods :  fixed 
alkaline  salts,  common  salt  depreciated,  or  dried  calcined 
vitriol,  sandiver,  alum,  &c.  is  put  into  the  still  with  the  low 
wines  and  the  spirit  drawn  off  as  before.  When  the  quantity 
is  drawn  off,  tlie  flavouring  ingredients  are  added  to  give  the 
spirit  the  flavour  intended.  But  as  the  spirit  is  not  by  this 
means  rendered  sufliciently  pure,  the  disagreeable  flavour  of 
the  spirit  generally  overpowers  that  of  the  ingredients,  where- 
by the  whole   intention  is  either  destrovcd,   or  a  compound 

*J9 


222  TiiZ  ARtj^a'  a:W 

flavour  produced,  very  d)fR^rt?nt  fnm  that  inti^nderf*  S^  ta^ 
(iistiliprs,  insiead  ui  hikaiint^  aai.s^  u^e  qiiukliiie  lu  ifcin^.iii 
thvAv  mall  ypliiN  :  ihis  nigrediiMii  clcaii>es  and  cepi.lt^ottiales^ 
tl«e  S|:iiii  coiisldeiably  ;  i  ii«  Hke  iha  rcciified  troiii  ail  aika- 
line  sals,  It  reqinrrs  nn  alkaliiif  d;spi  sil:t;u,  and  alst)  a  iiklor- 
ous  flavour.  Acitls,  ihereiui^',  are  a^  »(  c'e;ssHry  tu  bt-  m  xed 
wi  li  those  spiiils  rtc  itied  wiih  an  alkahiie  sah.  ll  clialk^ 
calcined  and  well  purified  btnies  oi  au  mals<  &c.  were  used 
instead  of  quii  klinie,  ihe  spirii  v^auhJ  have  much  less  alk.Uhue 
or  nidorour  flavour  ;  and  eiRsetyietuly,  iLe  flavouring  iDgied- 
ients  might  be  added  to  it  wnh  mo5e  j.uccess  ih.in  can  be  ex- 
pected from  a  spirit  lecijiied  from  uikah»io  sahs.  Bu*  perhaps 
if  neutral  sahs  were  ua^t'd  insiead  oi  liie  alkaline  ones,  ih« 
spirit  might  be  rendered  pure  wiihout  contraGting  an  alkaline 
flavour.  Soluble  tartar  might  be  used  ihv  this  purpose,  though 
the  spirit  acquires  as  little  saj.onaceous  flavour. 

Dr.  Cox  has  mentioned  another  method  for  this  purpose, 
namely,  to  deprive  the  volatile  salis  of  tlieir  oil,  by  rendering 
them  neutral  with  spirit  of  salt,  and  aiteru'ards  sublimirra  them 
wiih  sahs  of  tartar.  Tlie  acid  nr^y  le  varied  il  the  spiiit  of 
salt  should  not  be  found  so  well  adapted  to  the  purpose  as 
could  be  wi.shed  ;  but  fine  dry  suj^ar  seems  the  best  adapted 
to  the  purpose  of  rectifying  these  spirits;  as  it  readily  unite* 
with  the  essential  oil,  detains  and  lixes  it,  without  impartincy 
any  urinous,  alkaline  or  other  nauseous  flavour  to  the  spirits 
rectified  upon. 

We  shall  conclude  this  article  v/ith  remarking  that  there  is 
no  other  method  of  rect  fving  to  perfection,  b(?sides  what  i* 
flrst  laid  down,  viz.  by  gentle  distillation  :  but  then  it  must  be 
remembered,  that  tlie  whole  process  must  be  of  a  piece,  viz, 
that  the  first  distillation  from  the  wash  must  be  preformed  in 
a  gentle  manner,  for  otherwise  ilie  essential  oil  will  be  so  in- 
timately blended  w-ith  the  sj>irit  as  not  to  be  easily  separated 
by  re-distillation,  xlnother  good  property  attending  this  me- 
thod is  its  universality  ;  all  kind  of  spirits,  from  whatever  in- 
gredients oxtrActed,  require  rectification  ;  and  this  h  adapted 
to  all  kinds. 

Of  Filtratio'n,  Filn*ation  consistr,  in  passhig  liquors  through 
a  porous  s!]bstanr(-  in  order  to  free  then)  from  those  partic'es 
which  obscure  their  brightness.  Noihing  is  finer  than  a  li- 
quor newly  distilled,  but  the  syrup  and  colouring  particles, 
render  it  thick  and    opaqiie  :  in    order  therefore    to  restore 


tli^ic  hiiglitns^s  they  are  liljare  I,  wliirh  is  done  by  prissirif'^ 
ill  Ml  !i.i>j^'i  sii!  :,■  pipiT,  fij.h,  &,c.  All  lie  alien,  lull  of 
Uio  <i  st.||«T  III  inJni  uy  Uj>tt.M,i.»iis,  ci.niu  .ilwiys  piexeiit 
s  MUH  ,iq  ur'oJis  pniicles  t'oiii  rin  iij  w.Ji  ihi'  T»j>iri  s,  ei;iu-i  in 
tlie  beg,ii;iiUg  i*f  ihe  pro  ess,  m  iiuse  c  »ii)v>osi,i  ns  wlieie 
tiiey  msccikI  liisi,  or  ai  (he  cunciusioii  when  ihe\  use  I  as;  ;  as 
ll  is  is  rtliiiosi  Uiiavuidiilile,  so*  li  is  s(>iiie«ini  ;s  ih  resNruy. 

Ill  HiNiillin^^  (J.)\vers,  u  aroni  tiic  pi  iiis,  fiesh  j^alheied,  ii.e 
phh^gni  r;ses  fi:sc  ;  ^md  ili.s  pan  caiuioi  be  lakeii  oui  <  f  ihe 
rerejve.,  Usilioui  depriving  ihe  spinis  of  a  ci»iK«.i.  erable  pari 
of  heir  fr  «^r;inc\ . 

1)1  distill  114  sp  ces,  th"ir  odour  he'ns:  more  entangled,  will 
remain  m  ihe  alembic,  till  part  «.f  the  phlegm  is  drawn  off, 
B  11  when  insieid  of  these  o^uhstances  ilieir  quin;essence  is 
used,  the  necessity  ceases.  But  ;he  phle«j;m  ctminioidy  cau- 
sing a  cloudiness  ii«  the  liquor,  it  may  be  rendered  tolerably 
fine  by  pouring  it  gf*n:ly  off  b^  inchnajion,  without  the  irou- 
bh  of  filtration  ;  the  aquetjus  parncles,  by  iheir  jiraviiv,  fal- 
linu:  to  the  bottom  ;  but  to  render  it  entirely  briirhi  and  fine, 
ptit  some  cotien  in  a  iunnel,  and  pour  the  liqui  r  through  it, 
by  which  means  the  aqueous  particles  will  be  retained  in  the 
coftfin.  You  must  however  remember  to  cover  ihe  top  of 
the  funnel,  to  preve'it  the  most  volatile  parts  of  the  spirits 
from  evaporating. 

CHAPTER   XXX. 

Colouring  Spirits — Imitation  Spirits — Ari  omcter* 

Colouring  Brandy. — The  art  of  colouring  spirits  owes  its 
rise  to  observations  on  foreign  brandies.  A  piece  of  French 
brandy  that  hiis  acquired  by  age  a  great  degree  of  softness  and 
r»peness,  is  observed  at  the  same  time  10  have  acquired  a  yel- 
lowish brown  C(dour;  and  hence  our  distillers  h..ve  endeav- 
oured to  imitate  this  colour  in  such  spirits  as  are  intended  to 
pass  for  French  brandy,  A  great  variety  of  experiments 
have  been  made  on  "arif)us  substances,  to  discover  a  direct 
and  sure  method  of  imitating  the  colour  to  perfection.  To 
do  this  it  is  necessary  to  know  from  whence  the  French  bran- 
dies themselves  acquire  their  colour,  for,  till  wt^  have  made 
this  discovery,  it  will  be  in  vain  to  attempt  an  invitation  ;  be- 
cause, if  we  should  be  able  to  imitate  exactly  the  colour, 
which  is  indeed  no  difficult  task,  the  &j)irit  will  not  stand  the 
test  of  ditTerent  experiments,  unless  the  colour  ia  both    be 


524  THE    ATlTisT   AND 

proclnc.  id  from  the  same  ingredient.  This  being  undeniably 
the  case,  let  us  try  to  discover  this  might}^  secret,  the  ingredi- 
ent from  whence  the  French  brarKly  acquires  its  colour.  We 
have  already  observed,  that  this  colour  is  ooiy  found  in  such 
brandies  as  have  acquired  a  mellow  ripeness  by  age  ;  it  is 
therefore  not  given  it  by  the  distilh^r,  but  has  gained  it  by  ly- 
ing long  in  the  cask  ;  consequently  the  ingredient  from  whence 
this  colour  is  extracted,  is  no  other  than  the  wood  of  the  cask, 
and  the  brand}^  in  reality  is  become  a  dilute  tincture  of  oak. 
The  common  experiment  used  to  prove  the^genuineness  of 
French  brandy  proves  that  this  opinion  is  well  founded.  The 
experiment  is  this:  they  pour  into  a  glass  of  brjindy  a  few 
drops  of  a  solution  of  calcined  vitriol  of  iron  in  a  diluted 
spirit  of  sulpliur,  or  any  other  mineral  acid,  and  the  whole 
turns  of  a  blue  colour,  in  the  same  manner  as  w^e  make  ink 
of  a  tincture  of  galls  and  vitriol.  Since,  therefore,  the  colour 
of  French  brandies  is  acquired  from  the  oak  of  the  cask,  it  is 
not  difficult  to  imitate  it  to  perfection.  A  small  quantity  of 
the  extract  of  oak  or  the  shaving  of  that  wood,  properly  di- 
gested, will  furnish  us  with  a  tincture  capable  of  giving  the 
spirit  any  degree  of  colour  required  ;  but  it  must  be  remem- 
bered, that  as  the  tincture  is  extracted  from  the  cask  by  the 
brand}^  and  that  this  is  alcohol  and  water,  it  is  necessary  to  use 
both,  in  extracting  the  tincture,  for  each  of  these  menstruums 
dissolve  different  parts  of  the  wood.  Let  therefore,  a  suffi- 
cient quantity  of  oak  shavings  be  digested  in  strong  spirits 
wine  and  also,  at  the  same  time,  other  oak  shavings  be  di- 
gested in  oak,  let  both  be  poured  off  from  the  shavings  into 
diffi3rent  vessels,  and  both  placed  over  a  gantle  fire  till  re- 
duced to  the  consistence  of  treacle.  In  this  condition  let  the 
two  extracts  be  intimately  mixed  together;  which  may  be 
don*e  effectually  by  adding  a  small  quantit;y  of  loaf  sugar,  in 
fine  powder,  and  well  rubbing  the  whole  together.  By  this 
means  a  liquid  essential  (^^tract  of  oak  will  be  procured,  and 
always  ready  to  be  used  as  occasion  shall  require. 

There  are  other  methods  in  use  for  colouring  brandies  ;  but 
the  best  besides  the  extract  of  oak  above  mentioned,  is  burnt 
molasses  and  burnt  sugar.  The  molasses  gives  the  spirits  a 
fjne  colour  nearly  resembling  that  of  French  brandies;  but 
as  its  colour  is  but  dilute,  a  large  quantity  must  be  used  ;  this 
is  not  however  attended  with  any  bad  consequences,  for  not- 
withstanding  the  spirit  is  really  w^eakened  by  this  addition, 


TKADSSMAN^S    OUID£.  225 

though  scarcely  perceivable  proviiied  the  molasses  is  well 
prepared,  yei  ilie  bubbl*^  prout,  die  gener:d  criieriuii  of  spii  lis, 
is  gready  mended,  by  ll>e  teiiacuy  .uipaneti  lo  dn^n  by  ihc 
treacle.  The  spirii  aist»  nccpiiies  iVoin  ihis  u»  XiUte,  a  swi^ei- 
ish  or  lu>c  ous  uis.e  and  a  tuiiie^s  in  Ui^  aiuulli,  lo^it  oX  which 
p:Oj)enies  iend(?r  ii  very  aj;ret.-aljl(?  lo  ibe  paLues  of  the  cmu- 
mon  people,  wb  >  are  n>  (dc\^  ibe  prmcip.d  cuusuniers  of  diese 
spirits.  A  much  sin:dler  quan.ity  o1  burnt  sugar  ihiii  of 
molasses  wdl  be  suflicif-ni  for  colouring  ibc  s  trne  quaniiiy  of 
spirits:  the  taste  is  also  very  ddferent  ;  for,  instead  of  the 
sweetness  imparted  by  the  treacle,  ibe  spirit  acquire^- from  the 
burnt  sugar,  an  agreeable  bitUMness,  and  by  that  means  re- 
commends itself  to  nicer  palates,  which  are  offended  wi.h  a 
bjscious  spirif.  The  burnt  sugar  is  prepare(i  by  dissolving  a 
proper  quantity  of  sugar  in  a  little  vv  it^r,  and  sc<a-ching  it  over 
the  fire  till  it  acquires  a  bl  irk  colour.  Either  of  the  above 
ingredients,  molasses  or  burnt  sugar,  will  nearly  imitate  the 
genuine  colour  of  the  French  branlies,  but  neither  of  them 
will  succeed  wiien  put  to  the  test  o(  liie  viiriolic  solution. 

To  pncnre  a  c:)l'>*jrin'r  inittHr  from  rn">lf»8<f*s — place  the  vossel,  eith- 
er of  tin,  copper,  or  iron  (in  iron  nk'^llel  will  answer)  con'ainin^  the 
mol>i8ses,  ovtir  couls,  wijen  it  sh mid  be  k^pt,  b  •ilintr  until  it  becoiue» 
redu<'ed  by  evaporation  tlir«'e  fotiribs  or  mort* — diinnir  tiw  process  it 
sh mid  n  t  b»*stirre?d,  ofinjrwise  ii  will  nit  become ajuificiunlly  scorchtd 
—a  Vf.vy  material  object. 

Iniiffifhtn  Bran  //.  VV<^  have  o(>s;«rved  in  the  article  on 
rectification,  thai  ihe  conmou  me  hod  of  rec  ifving  spirits 
from  alkdine  s  dts,  destroys  the  r  vinosity,  pnd  '»n  its  stead 
introduces  a  lix'vious  tas  e.  Bui  as  it  is  absoluiely  recessary 
to  restoip,  oral  le^s:  t<»  susiitnte  in  their  ro«m,  some  degaee  of 
vinositv,  several  me  hods  h;tve  b<*en  proposed,  and  a  muhi- 
In  ie  of  experinf^n  s  p«rfi>rmed,  in  order  to  discover  th  s  great 
desideratum  :  bur  none  Inve  succeeded  equ  d  to  the  spiriis  of 
nitre  :  and  accordingly  this  spirif,  eith  t  stronij  or  didcified^ 
has  been  used  by  m')st  distillers,  to  g  v(»  an  agreeable  vino^iy 
to  their  spirits.  Several  dillic  ilfies,  however,  occur  in  ihe 
me  h  »d  of  us'n^it,  the  principd  of  wh"cri  is,  iis  being  apt  to 
qu't  t^e  liqi^r  in  a  s'l  iri  t'me,  an  1  c:»nse'^'jeu  Iv  dei>riving 
the  li-i'i  »r  <»f  thi^  vinosiiy  it  wts  intended  to  ijive.  To  re^ 
m  >ve  this  lifR'tdtv,  an  1  v>reYe  it  the  v!ir»sty  fro  n  quit  tinr  the 
g)  »ds,  he  •!  tb-ifv^  I  s  »i'-ir  of  n'tre,  wTich  is  n>  ach  beru*r  th  an 
Vlje  stronjf  spirits,  should  be  prepared  by  a  previous  digo&liaa^ 


226  THE    ARTIST    AND 

continued  some  time  with  alcohol ;  the  longer  the  digestion  i's^ 
continued,  the  more  intimately  will  they  be  blended,  and  the 
compound  rendered  the  milder  and  softer.  After  a  proper 
digestion,  the  dulcified  spirit  should  be  mixed  with  the  bran- 
dy, by  which  means  the  vinosity  will  be  intimately  blended 
with  the  goods,  and  disposed  not  to  fly  off  for  a  very  consid- 
erable time.  No  general  rule  can  be  given  for  the  quantity 
of  this  mineral  acid  requisite  to  be  employed,  because  differ- 
ent proportions  of  it  are  necessary  in  different  spirits.  It 
should  however,  be  carefully  adverted  to,  that  tho'  a  small 
quantity  of  it  will  undoubtedly  give  an  agreeable  vinosity  re- 
sembling that  naturally  found  in  the  fine  subtile  spirits  drawn 
from  wines,  yet  an  over  large  dose  of  it,  will  not  only  cause 
a  disagreeable  flavour,  but  also  render  the  whole  design  abor- 
tive, by  discovering  the  imposition.  ,  Those  therefore,  who 
endeavor  to  cover  a  foul  taste  in  goods  by  large  doses  of  dul- 
cified spirit  of  nitre,  will  find  themselves  deceived. 

But  the  best,  and  indeed  the  only  method  of  imitating 
French  brandies  to  perfection,  is,  by  an  essential  oil  of  wine  ; 
this  being  the  very  thing  that  gives  the  French  brandies  their 
flavour.  It  must  however,  be  remembered,  that  in  order  to 
use  this  ingredient  to  advantage,  a  pure  tasteless  spirit  must 
be  first  procured  ;  for  it  is  ridiculous  to  expect  that  this  es- 
sential oil  should  be  able  to  give  the  agreeable  flavour  of  the 
French  brandies,  to  our  fulsome  malt  spirit,  already  loaded 
with  its  own  nauseous  oil,  or  strongly  impregnated  with  a  lix- 
ivous  taste  from  the  alkaline  salts,  used  in  rectification.  How 
a  pure  insipid  spirit  may  be  obtained,  will  be  found  in  the 
chapter  on  distillation.  It  only  therefore  remains  to  show 
the  method  of  procuring  the  essential  oil  of  wine,  which  is 
this.  Take  some  cakes  of  dry  wine  lees,  such  as  are  used 
by  hatters,  dissolve  them  in  six  or  eight  times  their  weight  of 
water,  distil  the  liquor  with  a  slow  fire,  and  separate  the  oil 
by  a  separating  glass  ;  reserving  for  the  nicest  uses,  that  only 
which  comes  over  first,  the  succeeding  oil  being  coarser  and 
more  resinous. 

Having  procured  this  fine  oil  of  wine,  it  may  be  mixed 
into  a  quintessence  with  pure  alcohol;  by  which  means  it 
may  be  preserved  a  long  time  fidly  possessed  «f  all  its  flavour 
and  virtues;  but  without  such  management,  it  will  soon  grow 
resinous  and  rancid. 

When  a  fine  essestial  oil  of  wine  is  thus  procured,  2in4 


tradesman's  guide.  227 

also  a  pure  and  insipid  spirit,  French  brandies  may  be  imi- 
tated to  perfection  with  regard  to  the  flavor.  It  must,  how- 
ever, be  remembered,  and  carefully  adverted  to,  that  the  es- 
sential oil  be  drawn  from  the  same  sort  of  lees  as  the  brandy 
to  be  imitated  was  procured  from:  we  mean  in  order  to  imi- 
tate cogniac  brandy,  it  will  be  necessary  to  distil  the  essential 
oil  from  cogniac  lees;  and  the  same  for  any  other  kind  of 
brandy.  For  as  different  brandic  s,  have  different  flavours, 
and  these  flavours  are  owing  entirely  to  the  essential  oil  of 
the  grape,  it  would  be  preposterous  to  endeavor  to  imitate 
the  flavour  of  cogniac  brandy,  with  an  essential  oil  procured 
from  the  lees  of  Bordeaux  wine.  When  the  flavour  of  the 
brandy  is  well  imitated  by  a  proper  dose  of  the  essential  oil, 
and  the  whole  reduced  into  one  simple  and  homegeneous 
fluid,  other  difllculties  are  still  behind  ;  the  flavour,  though 
the  essential  part,  is  not  however  the  only  one;  the  colour, 
the  proof  and  the  softness  must  be  regarded,  before  a  spirit, 
that  perfectl}'  resembles  French  brandy  can  be  procured^ 
Wilh  regard  to  the  proof,  it  may  be  easily  hit,  by  using  a 
spirit  rectified  above  proof;  which  after  being  intimately 
mixed  with  the  essential  oil  of  wine,  may  be  let  down  to  a 
proper  standard  by  fair  water.  The  softness  may  in  a 
great  measure  be  obtained  by  distilling  and  rectifying  the 
spirit  with  a  gentle  fire;  and  what  is  wanting  of  this  crite- 
rion in  the  liquor,  when  first  made,  will  be  supplied  by  time  ; 
for  it  must  be  remembered,  that  it  is  time  alone  that  gives  this 
property  to  the  French  brandies  ;  they  being  at  first  like  our 
spirits,  acrid,  foul  and  fier}^  But  with  regard  to  the  colour, 
a  particular  colour  is  necessary  to  imitate  it  to  perfection  ; 
and  how  that  may  be  done  is  considered  in  the  article  on 
colouring  spirits. 

Our  obspi  vations  respecting  the  methods  of  imitating  spirit,  are  not 
made  with  a  view  to  favour  impositions,  by  palming  them  off  as  real; 
but  we  are  not  sensible  of  the  impropriety  of  selling  them  as  imitatioir 
•pirits. 

We  will  further  suggest  to  those,  who,  in  order  to  reduce 
the  price  of  spirits,  mix  some  of  the  pure  (the  spirit  which 
they  wish  to  imitate)  with  neutral  spirit,  that  quite  an  im- 
provement can  be  made  in  imitating  French  brandies,  by 
adding  a  small  quantity  of  rich  mountain  Malaga  wine,  com- 
monly called  sweet  wine*  The  experiment  will  convince  us 
of  the  fact,  though  we  still  adhere  to   our  flrst   position,  that 


22S  TH«   ARTIST    ANft 

?he  essPnt'uil  oil  nbt\:iic';i  f  om  tho  Icos  of  winr'  *o  be  -ho  best  \ 

subsii.u.ivi  .Ml  V  nil  i.»'i  n.^1*  .  i  he'  .f.ui'i  isi  »il  u  n'let  i  i-a  iu 
rt?i«  li  ks  oil   »|>,  le  ^jj.i  i  , 

St,  Croijc  Uu:it,  F.»i  iiniiailojis  iliar  whioh  ishigli  scenieif, 
svv<»e.  t.*vi»i»r4^d  HiKi  Cv  Idu.Iiss  >li'.iiid  bi'  s^^leced.  This  will 
Wi)rk  up  A  g.  e  r.  q  laiiiiiy  nt"  iitHiiral  spirit  iuJvriniigeously. 

S  .  Crtjsx  ii iiii  of  pririir?  qu  fli  y  is  a  Vfiy  srarce  stdpl  \ 
and  whiMi  obiiined  it  is  ^ciu'ittliy  apprized  v<My  highly — par- 
in-ul  iHy  by  ni«>si  of  ihe  city  draltM?,  who  are  well  acquaiaied 
Willi  is  w»H  ill  for  ihe  j^.ii -puses  hef«'re  meniioued, 

iNuualized  irud  isses  spirii  (roiniiioiily  called  neutralized 
N.  E.  Riiin.)  5iiidi>ubie  ily  funiislies  us  wish  the  besi  body  lor 
i  i)i  aiioas.  VVe  ase  ponvi  iced  ih  it  i>rain  spiri  s  fill  U)  product? 
good  imitanous,  and  ihe  s  ime  objecioiis  arise  agniist  their 
use,  i:i  regiid  to  lU  n,  which  vve  h  iVe  iiheidy  inferred  respeci- 
iiiij  brand 'es — hajgii  we  aie  c<  iifident  a  gre^«i  impioveuienl 
miglii  be  niide  in  rendering  ihem  more  insipid- -and  diat  it 
is  a  subject  of  great  im,;onance  to  the  distdler. 

A'i  the  molasses  spirit  is  in 'nufictured  fom  the  same  in- 
gredient that  produces  the  spii  it  whic  i  we  w  sh  to  imitatej 
and  enter  into  coini>iniiion,  in  order  to  jjive  it  the  favour,  is 
obtained,  and  as  it  is  the  essential  oil,  which  gives  jhe  flav»»ur 
to  all  spirits,  the  dilfere  ice  i hen,  in  these  spirits  must  proceed 
from  the  different  processes  of  m mnfaciure  and  also  the 
quality  of  the  cane  must  be  taken  hito  consideration,  even  as 
we  h.ive  staled  respec  iisg  ihe  ?''Hpe. 

Enough  his  already  been  said,  to  convince  the  rea.ler  quite 
a  diflTerein  (1  ivoured  spirii  must  be  produced,  by  mixing  grain 
spui  s,  w  th  that  ob;  lineil  frt»m  c  »ne,  than  ibt?}'  are  intended 
to  lepreisent,  when  ihey  are  blended  together.  The  best 
neu  ralizel  md  isses  spirit,  can  be  <d)tained  for  ten  cents  p'^r 
erall  Hj  m  ire  ih  in  tint  wliich  is  usu  dly  put  np  for  the  trade. 
It  need  not  be  s  lid  th  U  the  13  )stnn  miiket  furnishes  the  best 
new  rum,  and  that  it  produces  al-Jo  iht/  best  neutralized,  <»f 
any  which  we  have  ever  seen.  It  c  vn  easily  b.*  obtained  at 
60  per  cen?.  above  proof;  there  are  considerable  quantities 
manufaclured  of  a  very  ordinary  quiliiy ;  consequently  much 
rare  is  required  in  selecting  it.  V\\q  purchaser  will  do  well 
to  observe,  that  ihe  best  is  coburless,  and  free  from  a  burnt 
or  smoky  flavour,  which  in  either  case,  readers  the  spirit  unfit 
to  mix. 


tradesman's  guide.  229 

For  a  barrel  of  imitation^  from  one  to  ten  gallons  of  the 
pure,  s-pirits  mixed  with  the  neutralized;  and  of  the  latter  quan- 
tity, but  feVv*  palates  can  detect,  provided  the  goods  aie  of 
The  best  quality. 

When  neutralized  rum  cannot  easily  be  obtained,  neutral- 
ized whiskey  (or  pure  spirits)  are  substituted. 

The  lye  of  walnut,  (or  hickory)  ashes  is  insipid,  and  has 
tae  singular  property  of  neutralizing  spirits.  Spirits  render- 
ea  tasteless  by  this  pjocess  are  not  in  the  least  injured,  but 
rather  acquire  a  degree  of  strength. 

Could  a  discovery  be  made  to  deprive  spirits  of  their  intoxicating 
power,  how  much  of  the  worlds  wretchedness  would  be  alleviated! 

It  is  without  doubt  to  be  considered  as  the  most  wise  ex- 
periment which  can  be  made  to  abstain  entirely  from  using 
ardent  spirits  unless  for  medicinal  purposes.  Who  has  not 
seen,  by  its  too  frequent  use,  the  ntihlest  structure,  body, 
mind  and  all,  swept  by  their  enticing  channels  over  a  fathom- 
less cataract  1  Who  cah  be  so  insensible  to  the  calls  of  human- 
jt}',  amidst  the  scenes  of  misery  which  an  inordinate  love  of 
ardent  spirit  produces,  that  will  not  come  to  the  determina- 
ijon  accompanied  with  a  rigid  adherance,  to  aid  in  paving  the 
way  of  reform  ? 

St,  Vincents  is  next  in  quality  to  St.  Croix,  and  admits  of 
the  same  process  as  described  above,  in  order  to  reduce  the 
price.  However,  it  must  always,  be  considered  that  much 
doper;ds  on  the  quality  of  the  goods  which  you  blend  with 
the  neutralized  spirit ;  much  caie  and  experience  is  required 
to  select  that  which  is  high  scented  and  fjne  flavoured  :  the 
differonco  of  cargoes  in  this  respect,  is  mure  than  v/e  are  gen- 
erally inclined  to  admit* 

Grenada  Rum,  can  be  imitated  very  well,  with  the  neu- 
tralized nxdasses  spirit,  and  a  small  quantity  of  very  high  fla- 
voured Jamaica  spirit.^. 

Jamaica  Spirits,  if  higiily  scented,  are  veryimuch  improv- 
ed by  adding  tlie  neutralized  molasses  spirit;  the  compound 
wo.ild  be  preferred  by  most  palates,  after  acquiring  a  sufii- 
cient   ripeness. 

Neutraliz(.'d  molasses  spirit  of  the  first  quality  will  pass  for  better 
inward  Island  rum.  than  any  rum  of  the  Islands  can,  with  tiic  least 
addition  of  grain  spirit. 

Holland  Gin,  can  be  reduced  in  price,  and  a  very  fair  fla- 

20 


230  THE    ARTIST    ANP 

vour  retained,  by  mixing  it  with  that  which  is  manufacttiredl 
in  our  country  :  some  of  the  American  is  very  nearly  as  good 
as  imported  ;  and  would  he  quite,  if  the  manirfac;urcis  wc-ie 
as  careful  as^tho  H<llcii?ders  iri  manidiicuirng  is  :  .ii.e,  how- 
ever, is  a  very  nccossaiy  qualifiralit)U  lo  recuuiuit-nd  all 
spirijs. 

Ncutraliztd  Mhiskty  mixes  wiih  gin  better  than  any  other 
spirit  ;  and  if  it  most  he  resorted  to,  in  order  to  reduce  the 
price  of  the  Holland  gin,  we  would  recommend  a  very  small 
quantity  of  the  oil  of  juniper,  to  be  added,  (tirst  mixed  with 
high  wines,  and  then  added  to  a  small  quantity  of  gin^  when 
the  wholii  may  be  put  into  the  cask^)  though  we  should  pre- 
fer a  few  fresi)  juniper  berries,  when  they  can  be  easily  ob- 
tained: mash  rlieni  and  digest  in  alcohol  a  short  while,  then 
pour  the  tincture  into  the  cnsk. 

We  have  been  infoinied  that  large  butts  have  been  contriv- 
ed so  as  to  contain  two  or  three  others,  for  the  purpose  of  hold- 
ing dirterent  qualities  of  spirits,  but  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
aj)pear  to  be  drawn  from  only  one  cask.  We  may  therefore 
infer,  that  such  casks  are  sometimes  intended  for  deception, 
and  that  it  is  probable  the  samples  will  not  always  correspond 
with  such  as  are  delivered.  Fron)  this  developement,  we 
may  learn  that  however  **  sharp"  the  retailer  may  be^  ies- 
pectifig  llie  quality  and  prices  of  the  goods  which  he  pur- 
chases, it  is  no  less  for  his  interest,  that  he  also,  becomes  fully 
satistituj  at  the  time  of  deliv(3ry  with  that  which  he  would 
naturally  anticipate^  when  rolled  into  his' own  warehouse. 

It  was  an  old  adai^e,  that  spirits  and  wines,  on  arriving  at 
their  pi  >ce  ol  destimtrtm,  **  had  crossed  many  rivers  and 
brooks,"  particularly  when  transported  into  the  coniiiryi 

Some  have  even  thonglu  that  spirits  Would  not  bear  reduc- 
ing so  much,  wiih  soft  or  country,  as  wi^h  the  city  waier — wh.ch 
they  were  inclinod  to  believe  had  some  peculiar  qualilitations, 
wliu'h  conntrj'  water  did  not  possess* 

There  is  ano'her  sng  il  n  of)eration  which  we  w'll  allude  to, 
thou<ih  it  vvf»nld  ^een),  that  it  njust  be  managed  with  great  ad- 
dress. It  is  said  that  santples  of  spirits  exhibited  in  oroof  glasses, 
appe.ir  to  much  bottf^r  advantaorcj  in  cold.  He.uher,  afie 
having  held  thf*m  sonuninie  in  the  hand — as  the  raloiicor  her« 
leaves  the  hand,  it  is  imparted  to  the  fluid,  producing  a  mojf 
lively  action — (see  also  remarks  on  the  expansion  of  liquidt 
in  the  chapter  on  caloric.j 


'      231 

Ws  should  suppose  the  winter  season  the  most  favourable  for  opera- 
tions of  this  kind,  as  the  fire  is  as  wonderful  attractor  for  the  hands. 

The.  Areomefer\s  in  genc?ral  use,  which  is  made  of  glass  with  a 
round  hollow  body  ending  in  a  long  slonder  ne^ck,  sealed  hn- 
merically  at  the  top,  ii.to  v\hich  ihere  is  first  put  as  much 
<^uicksilver  as  is  sufficieMt  to  koep  it  swimrninii  in  an  exact  po- 
sition;  its  nt^ck  being  divided  into  degrees  the  qu  ility  and 
lightness  of  the  liquor  is  judged  of  U^'  the  depih  of  the  ves- 
sel's  sinking. 

CHAPTBR    XXXr 

To  make  Spirits  of  Wine — Su^ar  Spirits — Cherry  Brandy — 
Apple  and  Raisin  Spirits — Cordials — Wines — Methtglin 

— Mead Ratafias — Creams — Shrubs — Beers Porter 

Noyeaiixs — A rttficial  Watt rs. 

To  ma^:e  Spirits  of  Wine,  It  is  in  England  generally  ob- 
tained, fi(.m  ground  meal,  either  of  wheat,  rye  or  barley,  with 
from  ()ne-;enfh  to  .one-lhird  «  f  the  same,  or  other  grain, 
inalted  and  ground  and  then  called  malt  spirits  ;  or  from  trea- 
cle, and  then  called  molasses  spirits  ;  some  is  made  from 
apples,  or  cider  wash.  The  fermentation  is  carrit^d  on  quicker 
and  farther,- than  in  brewing,  or  making  cider  in  order  that 
i\j\  the  stigfar  in  tiie  wash  may  be  converted  into  spirit  and 
water.  The  infusio  i  of  the  malt  and  meal  is  made  so  strong, 
th It  its  specific  gravity  is  reduced  from  1.083  to  1.14,  where- 
as that  for  .strong  aie,  is  generally  1.06,  and  for  small  beer, 
1.015  to  1.04,  and  is  m  xed  with  a  large  quantity  of  yeast, 
added  by  successive  portions,  until  in  about  ten  days,  the 
specific  gravity  is  reduced  to  1.002,  when  it  is  fit  for  the  still. 
In  general,  a  third  part  is  drawn  off  at  the  first  sliUin<j,  under 
the  name  of  low  wines,  the  specific  gravity  being  about  0.975, 

On  re-dis»illin«i  the  low  wiiuis,  a  fiej  y  spirit,  of  a  m'Iky 
cas',  €f>mes  over  first,  and  is  reiurned  into  the  still  ;  then  fn|- 
lovvs  the  clear  spirit  ;  when  it  begins  to  gr.w  tt)o  wai^-ry,  the 
remaining  spirit  that  comes  over,  as  long  as  it  will  take  fire, 
is  kept  apart,  under  the  name  of  faints,  and  mixed  wish  the 
next  parcel  of  low  wines.  Irjstead  of  these  trials,  the  head 
of  the  still  may  have  a  bulb  of  a  thermometer  inserted  into  it, 
and  by  observing  the  temperature  of  the  steam,  an  accurate 
judgment  may  be  formed  of  tho  strength^of  the  spirit  that  dis- 
tils over. 

It  is  eomputod  that  odo  hundred    gallons  of  raalt,  or  corn 


232  THE   ARTIST   AND 

wash,  will  produce  about  twenty  of  spirit,  contai«ing  about 
half  its  weight  of  water  ;  molasses  wash  twenty-two  gallons, 
cider  wash  fifteen  gallons.  The  best  French  wines  yield 
from  twenty  to  twenty-five  gallons.  The  spirit  thus  obtained 
is  used  for  pharmaceutical  ptjrposes,  mixed  with  water,  to 
separate  the  oil  it  contains,  and  re-distilled  several  times  in 
tall  vesssels,  with  a  ver}'-  gentle  heat  until  its  specific  gravity 
is  reduced  to  0.82;  though  that  usually  sold  is  only  0.837,  at 
60^  Fahrenheit.  By  distilling  spirits  of  wine  with  purified 
pearlashes,  salts  of  tartar,  muriateof  Hme,  or  common  salt,  all 
previously  heated  to  redness,  and  cooled,  its  specific  gravity 
may  be  reduced  still  lower,  even  as  low  as  0,792,  at  68^  Fah. 
but  there  is  reason  to  think  that  it  not  only  parts  with  water» 
but  undergoes  some  change,  or  acquires  some  impregnation, 
by  these  additions,  as  its  taste  is  altered.  The  spirits  of  wine 
from  which  every  particle  of  water  is  separated,  is  called  by 
the  Arabic  name  of  alcohol. 

Sugar  Spirits,  It  is  meant  by  sugar  spirits,  that  extracted 
from  the  washings,  scumming,  dross  and  waste  of  a  sugar 
baker's  house.  These  recrementitions  or  drossy  parts  of  the 
sugar  are  to  be  diluted  with  wator^  in  the  same  manuer  as 
molasses  or  wash,  and  then  distilled  in  the  common  method  ; 
and  if  the  operation  be  carefully  performed,  and  the  spirits 
well  rectified,  it  may  be  mixed  with  foreign  brandies  and  ever* 
arracd  in  a  large  proportion,  to  great  advantage  ;  for  thes<s^ 
spirits  will  be  found  superior  to  that  extracted  from  treacle 
and  consequently  more  proper  for  these  uses. 

Cherry  Brandy,  This  liquor  is  greatly  called  for  in  the  coun 
try,  and  is  made  in  differents  ways.  Some  press  out  the  juice  of 
the  cherries,  and  having  dulcified  it  with  sugar  and  water,  add 
as  much  spirits  to  it  as  the  goods  will  bear,  or  the  price  it  is  in- 
tended to  be  sold  for.  But  the  common  method  is  to  pi.u  th< 
cherries  clean  picked  into  a  cask,  with  a  proper  qunntit}^  <>l 
proof  spirits,  and  after  standing  eisjhteen  or  twenty  days,  the 
goods  are  drawn  ofi"  into  another  cask  fiu  sale  and  about  two- 
thijds  of  the  first  quantity  of  spirit  poured  into  the  cask  upon 
the  cherries.  This  is  sufifered  to  stand  about  a  month  to  ex- 
tract the  whole  virtue  fromtho  cherries,  after  which  it  is  drawn 
off  as  before  ;  and  the  cherries,  pressed  to  take  out  the  spirits 
they  had  absorbed.  The  proportion  of  cherries  is  not  very 
nicely  observed  :  the  general  rule  is  to  let  the  cask  be  about 
half  filled  with  cberric?  anc}  then  filled  up  with  proof  spirits^ 


tradesman's    GUtJDE.  233 

Some  add  to  every  twenty  gallons  of  spirits,  half  an  ounce  of 
cinnannon,  an  ounce  of  cloves,  and  abuut  three  pounds  of 
sugar;  by  which  the  iflavour  of  the  goods  is  considerably  in- 
creased. But  in  order  to  save  expense,  not  n.»ly  the  sj)ices 
and  the  sugar  are  f)mitted,  but  also  a  great  part  of  the  chenies, 
and  the  deficiency  supplied  by  the  juice  of  elder  berries^ 
iometimes  adding  molasses  to  sweeten  instead  of  sugar,  when 
the  elderberries  are  not  made  use  of. 

Raisin  and  Apple  Spirits,  ^c.     By  raisin  spirits  are  to  be 
understood  ihate  xtracted  from  raisins  after  a  proper  fermen- 
tation.    In  order  to  extract  the  spirits,  the  raisins  must  be  in- 
fused in  a  proper  quantity  ^f  water  and  fermnted  in  the  man-« 
ner  described    in   the    article   on   fermentation.       When  the 
lermentaiion  is  completed,  the  whole  is  to  be  thrown  into  the 
still,  and  the  spirits  extracted  by  a  strong  fire.      The  reason 
why  a   strong   fire    is  directed,    is  because    by   that   means   a 
greater  quantity  of  the  essential  oil  will  come  over  the  helm 
with  the  spirits,  which  will  render   it  much  fitter  for  the  dis^^ 
tiller's   purpose  ;   for  these    spirits  are   generally  used   to  mix 
with  common  malt  goods  :   and   it  is  surprising  how  far  it  wiU 
go  in   this  respe^'t ;  ten  gallons  of  it  being  sufficient  to  j^ive  a 
^determining  flavour  and  agreeable  vinosit}^  to  a   whole  piece 
of  malt  spirits.       It  is  therefore  well  worth  the  distiller's  at-^. 
'ientionto  endcavt)ur  at  improving  the  common  method  of  ex-- 
iracting  spirits  from   raisins  ;   and   perhaps   the  following  hint 
merits  atttention.     When   the   fermentation  is  completed  and 
the   still  charged  with  fermented  liquor  as  before  directed,  lot 
the  whole   be  drawn  off  with   as  brisk  a  fire  as  possible  ;   but 
instead  of  the  cask  or  can,  generally    used  by  our  American 
distillers  for  a  receiver,  let  a  large  glass,  called  by  chemists, 
a  separating  glass,  be  placed  under  the  nose  of  the  worm,  and 
a  common  receiver  applied   to  the    spout  of  the   separating 
glass;   by  this  means  the  essential  oil  will  swim  upon  the  top 
of  the  spirits,    or  rather  low  wine,   in  the   separating   glasss, 
and.  mny   easily  be  preserved   at   the  end  of  the   operation. 
The  use  of  this  limpid  is  well  known  to  distiller ^,\  who  have 
made  their  business  u  scientific  study  ;   for  in  this  resides  the 
whole  flavour,  and    consequently   may  be  used  to  the   great- 
est   advantage   in   giving   that   distinguishing   taste    and  true 
vinosity  to  the  common  malt  spirits.     After  the  oil  is  separa- 
ted from  the  low  wine,  the  liquor  may  be  rectified  in  balneum 
raarise,  into  pure  and  almost  tasteless  spirits,  and  therefore 

*20 


234  mtu  autist  A^fD 

well  adapted  to  male  the  finest  compound  cordials,  or  iO 
imitate  or  mix  with  the  finest  French  brandie'-,  ai racks,  <Scc. 
In  ihe  same  manner,  spirits  may  be  obtained  from  cider. 
But  as  its  pasticular  flavour  is  not  so  desirable  as  that  obtained 
from  raisins,  it  should  be  distilled  in  a  more  gentle  way,  and 
carefully  rectified  in  the  manner  shown  in  the  article  on  rec- 
tification, by  which  means,  ver}^  pure  and  almost  tasteless  and 
insipid  spirits  will  be  obtnim  d  which  may  be  used  to  very 
great  advantafje  in  imitating  the  best  brandies  of  France,  t>r  \,k 
making  the  finest  compound  waters  or  cordials. 

Anise  Seed  Cordial,  Take  of  anise  seed  bruised  two 
pounds,  proof  spirit  twelve  and  a  half  jyallons,  water  one  gal- 
lon ;   draw  off  ten  gallons  with  a  moderate  heat. 

This  water  should  never  be  reduced  below  proof,  because 
the  large  quantity  of  oil  with  which  it  is  impregnated,  will 
render  the  goods  milky  and  foul,  when  brought  down  below 
proof.  But  if  there  is  a  necessity  for  this,  their  transparency 
may  be  restored  by  filtration. 

Peppermint  Cordial.  Oil  of  Peppermint  seventy-five 
drops,  sugar  one  ounce,  grind  together  ;  add  spirits  of  wine 
rectified  one  pint;  dilute  with  spirits  ef  wine  rectified  ten. 
pints,  water  ten  gallons,  and  fine  with  alum  three  drachms. 
On  a  similar  principle,  most  cordials  can  be  made,  though 
with  a  little  variation  in  the  formula  in  some  cases.  Tasta 
and  the  habits  of  the  place  are  to  be  consulted.  In  general, 
it  is  advisable  to  filter. 

In  dulcifying  or  sweetening  spirits,  v,  eigh  the  sugar,  and 
dissolve  it  in  one  or  more  cans  of  the  water,  with  which  the 
compound  is  to  be  made  up  ;  bruise  the  sugar,  and  stir  it  well, 
till  all  is  dissolved  ;  then  empty  it  into  the  cask  containing 
the  spirits  ;  mixing  all  together,  by  drawing  off*  several  cans 
by  the  cock,  and  emptying  them  into  the  Cdsk  by  the  bung 
hole.  Now  rummage  all  we-11  together,  till  they  are  per-, 
fectly  compounded.  Spirits  or  compounds  that  are  strong, 
require  no  assistance  in  settling  and  beconiing  clear,  but  those^ 
that  are  weak,  nmst  be  refined  by  the  addition  of  some  other 
substance.  To  every  hogshead  .)f  Geneva  or  other  spirituous 
compound,  put  six  ouncespowdered  alum,  previously  dissolved 
in  three  or  four  gallons  of  the  compounds,  and  stir  all  well  to- 
gether. In  th(^  course  of  twenty-four  hours,  the  whole  will  be 
rendered  completely  clear.  It  is  a  good  paracticeto  leave  the 
bung  holes^f  the  casks(c()ntaining  spirits  or  compounds  new!/ 


tradisman's  qvwu,  235 

made,)  open  for  several  days  ;  this  improves  their  flavour, 
and  renders  them  clear,  sooner  then  they' otherwise  would 
be. 

Table  salt  thrown  into  the  still,  in  the  proportion  of  six 
ounces  to  ten  gallons  of  any  liquid  to  be  distilled,  will  greaily 
intprove  the  flavour,  taste  and  strength  of  the  spirit.  The 
viscid  ni'itter  will  be  fixed  by  the  salt,  whilst  the  volatile  mat- 
tei  ascends  in  a  stole  of  great  purity.  I'he  fl.ivbur  of  malt 
spirits  <s  bii^hly  iiiiproved  by  putting  three  and  a  half  ounces 
fiui^ly  jjowchnid  charcoal,  and  four  and  a  half  ounces  ground 
rice,  into  n  quart  of  spirits,  and  letting  it  stand  fifteen  days, 
(fequen//y  sirring  it  ;  then  let  the  liquor  be  stjained,  and  it 
Will  be  fuun  i  fieorl}  of  the  same  flavour  as  biandy. 

Clove  Cordial.  Cloves,  bruised,  four  pounds,  pimento 
half  a  pound,  proof  spirit  sixteen  gallons. 

Digest  the  mixture  twe4ve  hours  in  a  gentle  heat,  and  then 
draw  olT  fif(een  gallons  with  a  pretty  brisk  fire.  The  water 
may  be  coloured  red  with  tincture  of  cochineal,  or  other  col- 
ouring matter, 

Raisin  Wine,  Raisins  one  hundred  weight,  water  sixteen 
gallons,  soak  for  a  fortniijht,  stirring  every  day  ;  press,  put 
fhe  liquor  xn  a  cask  with  the  bung  loose,  till  it  has  done  his- 
sing ;  than  add  four  pounds  of  brandy  and  bung  up  close. 
Some  use  little  more  than  half,  or  two-thirds  of  this  quantity 
of  raisins. 

Gooseberry  Wine.  Ripe  berries,  brusied,  ten  gallons, 
water  thirty  gallons,  soak  twenty-four  hours,  strain:  to  each 
gallon  add  two  pounds  of  sugar  ruid  ferment. 

2.  Bruised  berries  eighty  pounds,  water  ten  gallons,  soak 
for  a  day,  strain  ;  to  each  gallon  add  six  pounds  of  loaf  sugar, 
and  ferment. 

3.  Juice  ten  gallons,  water  twenty  gallons,  sugar  seventy 
pounds,  ferment. 

4.  Berries  one  hundred  pounds,  brown  sugar  six  pounds 
water  a  sufficient  quantity  to  fill  a  fifteen  gallon  cask  ;  yields 
a  good  3'elh)wish  white,  and  very  tiansparent  wine. 

5.  Gooseberries  forty  p  )unils,  water  four  gallons,  bruise 
together  ;  the  next  day  press  out  the  juice  :  to  every  gallon 
^dd  three  pounds  of  sugar;   ferment. 

Currant  Wine.  Red  currants  seventy  pounds,  bruised  and 
pressed,  brown  sugar  ten  pounds,  water  a  sufficient  quantity 
to  fill  up  a  fifteen  gallon  cask  ;  yields  a  pleasant  red  wine, 
rather  tart,  but  keeping  well. 


236  THE   ARTIST   AND 

2.  White  curraots  one  sieve,  red  currants  one  gallon;  press* 
To  each  gallon  of  juice,  add  three  gallons  of  water;  to  ten 
gallons  of  liquor  add  thirty  pounds  of  sugar  and  ferment;  when 
you  bung  it  up,  add  two  pounds  of  brandy  to  each  ten  gallons 
of  wine. 

3.  Juice  eleven  quarts,  that  is,  the  produce  of  one  sieve, 
sugar  tw»^nty  pounds,  water  a  sufficiest  quantity  to  fill  up  a 
nine  gallon  case;  ferment — and  when  it  has  done  working,  ad»l 
four  pounds  of  brandy  ;  for  a  half  hogshead  use  three  sieves 
of  currenis,  sugar  three-fourths  of  a  hundred  weight,  brandy 
one  gallon. 

Black  Currant  Wine,  Berries  twenty  pounds,  brant ly  two 
to  four  pounds,  water  twelve  to  fourteen  gallons,  yeasi,  two 
spoonfuls,  fermented  for  eight  days,  then  bottled  and  well 
corked  ;  yields  a  pleasant,  rather  vinous,  cooling  liquor  of  a 
purple  colour  ;  or  they  may  be  made  into  wine  like  the  com- 
mon currants;  by  the  first  process  the  wine  is  dark  purple^ 
rather  thick,  but  good, 

English  Sherry,  Loaf  Sugar  thirty-  two  pounds,  sugar 
candy  ten  pounds,  water  sixteen  gallons,  boil  ;  add  pale  al© 
wort,  (as  for  English  Madeira,)  six  gallons,  yeast,  one  poundj 
on  the  third  day  add  ten  pounds  of  stoned  raisins,  and  in  an* 
other  two  or  tlirees  days  one  gallon  of  brandy  ;  bung  it  down 
for  four  months;  drawn  it  offinto  another  cask,  add  one  gaU 
Ion  of  brandy,  and  in  three  months  bottle  it. — imitations  for 
foreign  wines,  f  »r  ihose  Ayho  wish  to  make  a  show  abov€>- 
their  circumstances,  but  far  inferior  to  our  own  fruit  wines. 

Elder  Wine,  Juice  of  the  berries  eight  gallons,  watei 
twelve  gallons,  brown  sugar  sixty  pounds,  dsssolve  by  boiling, 
add  3^east,  and  ferment  ;  then  add  four  pounds  of  brand}',  and 
bung  it  up  for  three  months  :  disagreeable  when  cold,  but  is 
mulleJ  with  allspice  and  drank  wram  in  wintertime  as  a  stim* 
ulant. 

Ginger  Wine,  Bruised  ginger  twelve  pounds,  water  ten 
gallons  ;  boil  for  half  an  hour,  add  twenty -eight  pound  of  sugar, 
boil  till  dissolved,  then  cool,  and  put  the  liquor  along  with 
fourteen  lemons  sliced,  and  three  pounds  of  brandy  ;  add  a 
little  yeast  and  ferment. 

White  Spruce  Beer,  To  ten  gallons  of  water,  put  six 
pounds  of  sugar,  four  ounces  essence  of  spruce,  add  yeast, 
\Tork  as  in  making  beer,  and  bottle  immediately  in  half  pints. 

Mixed  Fruit   Wine,      White    currants   three   sieves,  red 


TRADESMAN'S   GUIDE.  237 

gooseberries  'two  sieves  *,  these  should  yield  forty  pints  of 
juice  ;  to  each  gallon  add  two  gallons  of  water,  sugar  three 
pounds  and  a  half;   ferment. 

?.  White,  red,  and  black  currants,  cherries,  especially 
black  heart,  raspberries-,  of  each,  pounded,  equal  quantities. 
To  each  four  pounds  of  the  bruised  fruit  add  one  gallon  of 
wat'-r,  sreep  for  three  days,  press,  and  to  each  gallon  of  liquor 
add  three  pounds  of  yellow  sugar;  ferment,  and  when  finished 
add  to  each  nine  gallons  two  pints  of  brandy;  if  it  does  not 
find  soon  enough,  add  hdf  an  ounce  of  isinglass,  dissolved  in 
a  pint  of  »*^aler,  to  each  nine  gollons. 

Cherry  Wine.  Cherries  thirty  pounds,  moist  sugar  five 
pounds,  water  a  sufficient  quantity  to  fill  a  seven  gallon  cask ; 
ferment. 

Parsnip  Wine,  may  be  made  by  cutting  the  roots  into 
small,  thin  slices, boiling  them  in  water,  pressing  out  the  liquor, 
and  fermenting  it.  This  wine,  when  made  strong,  is  of  a 
rich  and  excLHent  quality  and  flavour. 

Orange  Wine,  Sugar  twenty  three  pounds  water  ten  gal- 
lons, boil  ;  clarify  with  the  white  of  six  eggs,  pour  the  boiling 
liquor  upon  the  parings  of  one  hundred  ornnges  and  the 
strained  juice  of  these  oranges,  and  six  ounees  of  yeast;  lei  it 
vurk  for  three  or  four  days  then  strain  it  into  into  a  barrel, 
^ung  it  up  loosely  ;  in  a  month  add  four  pounds  of  biandy  ; 
iiul  in  three   months  it  will  be  fit  to  drink. 

Wines,  may  also  be  made  of  blackberries  and  other  Eng- 
lish frnits  upon  the  same' principle.  Those  mentioned  are 
the  methods  generally  eaiployed,  but  most  persons  have  pecu- 
liar ways  of  proceeding,  which  may  intleed  be  varied  to  in- 
finity, and  so  as  to  produce  at  pleasure  a  s\^  eet  or  dry  wine  ;. 
the  sweet  not  being  so  thoroughly  fermented  as  the  dry.  The 
addition  of  brandy  destroys  the  proper  flavour  of  the  wine, 
and  it  is  better  fo  omit  it  entirely  (except  for  elder  and  port 
wine,  whoi^e  flavour  is  so  strong  that  it  cannot  well  be  inju- 
r<Hl)  and  n\  increase  the  strength  by  augmenting  the  rasisn 
or  sugar.  In  general  the  must  for  wines  ought  to  be  made  of 
six  pounds  of  raisins,  or  fi  ur  pounds  of  sugar,  to  the  gallon, 
allowing  for  that  contained  in  the  fruit. 

Southampton  Port,      Cider  thirty   six  gallons,   elder  wine 
eleven  gallons,  biandy  five  gallons,  damson  witie eleven  gal' 
Ions,  M. 
]^n§li$h  Mc^deira.     Pale  malt  gro  nd,  four  bushels,  boiling 


S38  mtit  AnTisi*  Am 

water  forty-four  gallons,  infuse,  strain  ;  of  this  wort,  while 
warm,  take  twenty-four  gallons,  sugar  candy  fourteen  pounds; 
when  dissolved,  add  two  pounds  of  yeast  ;  lerment ;  keep 
skimming  offjhe  yeast;  when  the  feriuentaiion  is  nearly  fin- 
ishedj  add  two  gallons  and  a  half  of  raisin  wine,  brandy,  port 
wine,  of  eachlwo  gallons  ;  bung  it  down  for  six  or  nme  nu/uths, 
A  second   infusion  of  wort  may  be  brewed  i'ur  beer. 

Sweet  Wine,  Sweet  cider  afi^r  fermentation,  if  not  suf- 
ficient luscious,  add  molasses,  s.  q,  a  few  pounds  malaga  rai- 
sins, mashed  and  digested  in  some  of  the  Cider,  and  a  little  li-. 
quorice  root  to  give  it  a  flavour  ;  then,  reduce  with  soft  water 
until  it  suits  the  palate.  Jt  may  be  necessary  to  put  in  a  little 
isinglass  to  render  it  clear.  This. method  of  imitation,  if 
managed  with  care  pioduces  an  excellent  drink,  equal  if  not 
superior  to  that  which  is  inrported. 

English  Champaign,  Raw  sugar  ten  pounds,  loaf  sugar 
twelve  pounds,  water  nine  gallons,  concrete  acid  of  lemon, 
or  crystallized  acid  of  tartar  six  drachms;  dissolve  by  a  gen- 
tle boil  ;  before  it  grows  cold  add  about  one  pound  of  yeast,^ 
and  ferment.  When  the  working  is  nearly  over,  add  perry 
one  gallon,  brandy  three  pounds,  and  bung  it  up  for  three 
months;  then  draw  out  two  pounds  of  the  wine,  dissolve  one 
ounce  of  isinglass  in  it,  pour  it  again  into  the  cask,  and  in  a 
ft)rtnight  bottle  it ;  it  may  be  coloured  pink  by  adding  one 
ounce   of  cochineal  when  first  bunged  up. 

English  Port,  Cider  twenty-four  galh  ns,  juice  oi  vXili^r 
berries  six  gallons,  port  wine  four  gallons,  brandy  one  galhui 
and  a  half,  logwood  one  pound,  isinglass  twelve  ounces,  dis- 
solved ia  a  gallon  of  the  cider  :  bungii  dowi«  ;  in  tno  months 
}i  ;viU  be  fit  to  bottle,  but  should  not  be  drank  till  the  next 
year.  If  a  rough  flavour  is  required,  four  to  six  utinces  of 
i\\i\n\  may  be  ad/led, 

2'o  restore  Wine  fasted  or  tasting  of  the  cask,  Dr  uv  :lie 
wine  entirely  out  of  its  own  lee  and  put  it  in  another  rusk 
over  a  good  lee.  Then  through  thn  buuijf  hole,  h mg  up  a  bag 
wilh  four  ounces  of  laurel  berries  in  powder  and  a  suflicieut 
quantity  of  steel  filings  at  the  bottom  of  ihe  bag,  to  prevent 
lis  swimming  on  the  top  of  the  wine;  and  in  prqportion  as  you 
draw  a  tertain  quantity  of  the  liquor,  let  down  the  bag. 

To  prevent  Wine  from  Pricking,  Put  in  the  cask  half  a 
pound  spirits  of  tartar,  or  when  the  wine  is  new,  throw  in  tWQ 
cupces  of  common  alum  fqr  every  hogssbead? 


^RADBSMAn's   GUIXiK.  239 

To  clarify  Wine  easily.  Put  in  the  cask  one  pound  of 
fine  shot. 

To  correct  a  musty  taste  in  Wine.  Knead  a  dough  of  ihe 
hesi  whirat  Hour,  and  ni;tke  ii  in  llie  f'oini  v\'  a  ruiiiiig  jjin,  or 
a  short  liiick  suck;  Half  hake  it  in  the  oven  and  slick  it  all 
ovor  vviih  cloves;  replace  it  in  the  oven  and  hake  it  quite. 
Suspend  it  in  the  cask  ovei  the  wine  without  touching  it,  and 
let  it  remain  there,  or  else  plunge  it  in  the   winei 

To  correct  a  bitter  or  sour  ta$te  in  Wine.  Doil  a  quart 
of  harley  in  four  quarts  of  vvater  to  the  reduction  of  two. 
Strain  ^'hat  remains  through  a  doth,  and  pour  it  in  the  cask  ; 
stirring  all  together  with  a  stick  without  touching  the  le<\ 

7V?  restore  spoiled  Wine.  Chanje  the  wine  from  its  own 
lee  upon  that  of  good  wine.  Pulverize  three  or  four  nutmegs 
and  as  many  dry  orange  [)ea]s,  and  throw  them  in;  siop  well 
the  hung,  and  let  it  ferment  one  fortnight,  i^  fter  that  term 
is  over  you  will  tind  it  hetter  than  ever.  This  method  has 
gone  through  njany  experiments. 

T'o  prevent  tartness  in  Wi?ie.  Take  in  the  month  of 
March  two  hasinsfull  of  river  sand,  and  after  having  diied  it 
in  the  sun  or  in  the  oven  throw  it  in  the   <  ask. 

Metheglin.  Honey  one  hundred  pounds,  boiling  water  a 
sufficient  qunutity  to  fill  a  half  hogsliead  or  ihirty-tWo  gallon 
cask,  stir  it  well  for  a  day  or  two  ;  add  yeast,  and  feiment. 
Some  boil  the  honey  in  the  water  for  an  hour  or  twoj  but  this 
hinders  its  due  fermentation. 

Mead,  is  made  frorn  the  honey-combs  from  which  honey 
h'cis  been  drained  out,  by  boiling  in  water,  and  then  I'erment- 
ii'.g,  generally  confounded  with  metheglin. 

ixatafia,  dc$  Cerisis.  Morello  cherries  with  their  kernels 
brniserl,  eialu  pounds,  proof  spirits  eight  j)ints ;  digest  for  a 
mon  h  ;  straiji  with  expression  ;  add  sugar  oiie  pound  eight 
ounce. 

Rntnfia  de  Grennbh,  Small  wild  black  cherries  with 
shelr  kernels  bruised,  twelve  pounds,  proof  spirits  six  gallons  ; 
i'igest  for  a  month;  strain  ;  add  sugar  twelve  pounds;  a  little 
cnrcn  peel  may  l>e  fiflded  at  pleasure. 

Ratafia  de  Noyeaux.      Peach  orapri-^ot  kernels,  with  their 

(Is  bruised,  in  rnjmi)er    120,  proof  spirits  four  })ints,  sugar 

!  ounces.  Some  reduce  spirits  of  wine  rectified  to  proof, 
wiih  ibe  juice  of  apricots  or  peaches  to  make  this   liquor. 

C/ireme  de  Noyeau — English.  Bitter  almonds  blanched 
four  ounces,  proof  spirits  two  pints,  sugar  one  pound. 


240  I'HE   ARTIST  ANi) 

Chremc  de  Orange — English,  Oranges  sliced  in  nnmbet* 
thirty-six,  spirits  of  wine  rectified,  two  gallons,  sugar  eighteen 
pounds,  water  four  gallons  four  pints,  tincture  of  saffron  one 
ounce  four  drachms,  orange  flower  water  four  pints  ;  iligest 
for  a  fortnight ;  strain. 

All  the  aforenientioned  liquors  are  stimulerit  and  taken  ad 
libitum  for  pleasure. 

Chreme  des  Barhadoes,  Orange  peels,  lemon  peels j  of 
each  thre6  in  number,  cinnamon  four  ounces,  mace  two 
drachms,  cloves  one  drachm,  rum  eighteen  pints  ;  distil  in 
balneum  marise,  and  add  sugar  p.  aeq. 

Chreme  das  Bnrbadoes — English,  Lemons  sliced  iri  niim- 
ber  twenty-four,  citrons  sliced,  in  number  six,  spirits  wine 
rectified  two  gallons  four  pints,  fiesh  balm  leaves  eight  oun- 
ces, water  three  gallons  four  pints;  digest  for  a  fornight  ; 
strain. 

Brandy  Shrub,  Brandy  nine  pints,  lemon  juice,  orange 
juice,  of  each  one  pint,  orange  peels  four  in  number,  lemon 
peels  two  in  number,  sugar  two  pounds,  water  five  piats. 

The  same  formula  will  answer  for  making  rum  shrud,  using 
rum  instead   of  brandy. 

Rum  Shrub,  Concrete  acid  of  lemons  eight  ounces,  wa- 
ter five  gallons^  raisin  wine  four  gallons^  rum  ten  gallons, 
orange  flower  water  four  pints,  honey  six   pounds. 

B'own  Spruce  Beer,  as  the  white,  using  mohisses  in  lieu 
of  the  sugar.  In  regard  to  the  white  and  brown  sjuuce  and 
ginger  beer  and  the  wines,  it  is  said  the  purer  kinds  are  mix- 
tures of  spirits  of  wine,  water,  and  extractive  matter  :  the 
spirits  may  be  separated  by  careful  distillation,  or  if  the  ex- 
tractive matter  be  first  got  rid  of  by  the  addition  of  extrac- 
tum  saturni  and  filtration,  the  spirits  may  be  separated  by  ad- 
ding very  pure  kali  ppm.  when  it  will  swim  upon  the  liquor; 
the  spirit  constitutes  from  twelve  to  twenty-five  per  renh  of 
the  proper  wines,  and  from  two  to  eight  per  cent,  of  me  malt 
liquors. 

The  fermentation  of  .those  liquors  is  usually  hastened  1 
the  addition  of  yeast,  crude  tartar,  or  bruised  vine  leavt 
but  this  is  seldom  n/3cessary  for  wines,  if  ihe  liquor  be  kfe; 
in  a  proper  warmth  ;   but  malt  liquors  are  more  sluggish. 

If  the  fermentation  is  in  danger  of  proceeding  too  far,  it 
may  be  stopped  by  drawing  off  the  liquor  clear  into  another 
vessel  in  which  some  brimstone  has  been  newly  burned,  or  ia 


Til\i^2S:iI\\'s    GUIDE.  !/ 

f;^c  case  t)f  red  wine,  some  nutmeg  powder  upon  a  lij*. 
^)r  which  has  beep,  washed  with  brandy;   the  sedinu  .: 
the  oid   cask,  may  be    slraiiied  through  flannel  or    pap? 
clenr   und  added   iv   the  other;   instead  of  this  a  par* 
nmy  be  drawn  oi?t  of  th'^  cask  and  some  rags  dipped  in  i 
brirnstoae  and  lighted,  may  be  held  by  a  pair  of  tongs 
bung    hole  slightly  covered^  so  as  to  impregnate  ihr 
v/iih  the  fumes;   about  one  ounce  of  brimstone  to  a  im 
then  returning    what    had    been  drawn  out,   and    bi: 
very  rlose  ;   or  a  small  qnantity  of  oil  of  vitriolniav  v 
«d  in  :   lastly  the  addition  of  black  ttianganese   has  b! 
posed  on  tlieoretical  grounds. 

If  the    iernientatien  has  proceeded  too  far,  and  i  = 
sonr^  the  fermentation  must  be  sto{>ped  as  above.  • 
Unnps  of  clialk,  or  burned  oyster  shells  added-,  to  sa. 
acid  already  geneiTited, 

if  the  lieiuors  dt)   not  become  clear  soon    enough,  ' 
thirty  gallons  dissolve   one  ounce  of  isinglass  in  two 
of  water.      Sirain,  and  mix  this  with  part  of  the  liquc 
h  u  1  to  a  froth,  and  pour  it    into  the  liquor.      Stir   t- 
weli  and  biing  it  up:   instead  of  isinglass  some   use  h;. 
shavings  in  rather  larger  quantities.    Red  wines  are  Ik 
twelve  eg^s  to  the  pipe,    i>eaten  up  to   a  froth,  and 
red  and  mixed  in  with  the  ^\'ine. 

Jf  the  liquor  has  acquired  a  bad  flavour,  t-  = 
let  the  fermentation  go  on,  and  convert  »;     ' 
gar. 

I'^o  make  treacle  Uecr.      Boil  two  quarts   oy   i.  > 
into  one  pound  of  treacle,   stir  ihem    together    ti][    '■: 
well  rnixad  ;   then  put  six  or  eight  quarts  of  cold    waUr  to  \\ 
and  about  a  tea  cU])  full    of  3^east  or  balm  ;.  put  it  in    ■.    cf  • 
cask    or  tub,    cover  it  over  with  a    coarse  cloth  t\>.- ' 
times   double;   it    will   be  fit  to  diink  in    two  ar  f'  / 
The  second  or  third  time  of  making,  the  bottom  ot 
beer  will    do  instead  of  yeast;   if  you  make  a  large  - 
or  intend  it  for  keeping,  you  must  put    in  a   han^^'nil 
and  another  of  malt  for  it  to  feed  on,  and  when   do 
ing,  stop  it  up  close. 

The  above  is  the  best  and  cheapest  way  of  nj 
beer,    though  st;me   people   add    raisins,    bran,    -vo.- 
spices,  such  fruit,  &c.  as    are  "to  season  ;   but  tbpt  is 
you  fancy.      Indeed,  many    pleasant,  cheap,  and    v^^i^ 
"21 


242  Till    AKTIST    ANf5> 

drinks  may  be  made  from  fruits,  &.c.  if  they  are  bruised    anj 
boiled  in  water  b^'fore  the  treacle  is  added, 

London  Porter.  For  five  bar. els :  malt  eight  bus!iels,  a 
sufficient  quantity  of  water,  mash  at  twice:  add  in  the  boiling, 
hops  eight  to  twelve  pounds,  treacle  six  pounds,  liquorice  root 
eight  pounds,  moist  sugar  sixteen  pounds,  one  half  uf  which  is 
usually  made  into  essential  binae  and  the  other  half  into  colour, 
capsicum  four  drachms,  Spanish  liquorice  two  ounces,  linseed 
one  ounce,  cinnamon  two  drachms,  heading  two  drachms; 
cool,  add  one  to  two  gallons  of  yeast  when  it  has  got  a  good 
head,  cleanse  it  with  three  ounces  of  ginger  ;  coculus  indicus 
one  ounce;  then  barrel  and  finish  the  working;  fine  with  isin- 
glass. The  public  brewers  use  a  mixture  of  pale  amber  alone, 
which  is  best  for  private  families. 

Six  pounds  of  sugar  is  esteemed  equal  in  strength,  and  one 
pound  coriander  seed  in  intoxicating  pmver,  to  a  bushel  of 
malt;  the  sugar  employed  is  burnt  to  coloar  the  beer  instead 
of  drown  malt,  and  it  has  been  proposed  to  use  roasted  coflee 
for  the  purpose.  The  other  substances  are  merely  to  flavour 
the  liquor  and  may  be  varied  at  pleasure. 

The  desire  to  evade  the  duty  on  malt  in  Englartd  produced 
the  fllis'covcrj'  of  its  being  necessar}^  to  malt  onl}'  one-third  of 
the  corn,  as  this  proportion  will  convert  iheotherinto  its  own 
nature  during  the  process. 

Artificial  Spa  Water,  Prepared  natron  seven  grains, 
magnesia  alb.  one  scruple,  iron  filings  three  grains,  common 
salt  one  grain,  water  three  pounds,  and  impregnate  it  with  gas 
from  marble  powder  and  oil  of  vitriol,  of  each  ten  scruples, 
sufficiently  diluted  with  water. 

Artificial  Pyrmont  Water,  Epson  salts  fifteen  grains, 
©ommon  salt  five  grains,  magnesia  alb.  three  grains,  iron  filings 
five  grains,  water  three  pounds,  and  impregnate  it  with  the 
gas  from  marble  powder  and  oil  of  vitriol,  of  each  seven 
drachms. 

Artificial  Sheltz  Water,  Common  salt  one  drachm,  ma^-- 
nesia  alb.  one  scruple,  natron  ppm.  fifteen  grains,  chalk  seven 
grains,  water  three  pounds,  and  impregnate"^  with  the  gas  from 
marble  powder  and  oil  of  vitriol  of  each  six  drachms. 

Of  Cherry  tree  Bark.  The  bark  of  black  cherry  tree, 
has  been  used  instead  of  black  cherries  in  the  manufiicfure  of 
cherry  brandy,  steeped  in  water  with  elder  beriies,  sweetened 
\yith  mola«ses,  addhig  a  proper  quantity  of  rum  but  on  acxjount 


tradesman's  euioE.  541 

©f  the  following  conimunication  through  a  revy  respecta- 
ble source,   we  shall  omit  giving  a  particular  formula, 

A  medical  gentleman  says  the  bark  of  this  tree  is  poisonous. 
He  relates  the  case  of  a  young  lad}^,  to  whom  he  was  lately 
called,  and  who  in  consequence  of  drinking  about  half  a  pint 
of  cider,  takon  from  a  closeh^  stopped  bottle,  filled  the  even- 
ing previous  with  cherry  bark  fresh  from  the  tree,  was  seized 
wiih  vertigo,  stupor,  and  syncope,  followed  by  great  difficulty 
of  respiration  and  vomiting.  Similar  effects  were  produced 
in  a  slighter  degee  upon  another  person,  who  took  from  the 
same  bottle  a  small  draugiit  of  cider. 

The  French  chemists  have  recently  ascertained  that  tho 
deleterious  pxinciples  by  the  peach  is  analagous  to  prussic 
acid. 

This  aeid  in  its  concentrated  state,  if  a  feather  be  dipped 
into  it  and  drawn  across  the  eye  of  an  animal  produces  in- 
stant death.  Two  drops,  have  been  known  to  kill  a  vigorous 
dog  in  a  very  few  minutes. 

Of  Adulterated  Wines,  The  Wines  of  Commerce  in  their 
purity,  cannot  be  found  at  the  corners  of  every  street.  Some 
are  in  the  practice  of  mixing  colraenar  with  Sicily  Madeira — 
this  compound  makes  a  very  pleasant  wine.  If  Sicil}^  Ma- 
deira is  put  upon  Maderira  lees,  it  becomes  greatly  improved 
— age,  however,  is  ^  requisite  qualification  to  all  wines. 

We  have  no  particular  formula  fur  compounds,  nor  is  it 
necessary,  since  the  dealer  must  consult  the  taste  of  his  cus- 
tomers; nor  are  we'ableto  point  out  a  particular  methed  where- 
by spurious  wines  can  be  detected  as  a  certain  test,  but  we 
would  recommend  dealers  to  obtain  the  certificates  which 
should  accompany  the  casks,  uhich  may  perhaps  in  time  les- 
sen their  risk. 

We  are  told  that  empty  Rum,  V/ine,  Gin  or  Brandy 
cask,  with  the  original  certificates,  are  considered  very  valua- 
ble by  the  city  dealers-— rum  hhds.  with  the  certificates  have 
frequently  been  sold  at  from  $10  to  $12  each.  Wine  qr, 
casks,  $4  and  $5.  Brandy  pipes  $12  and  $15:  though 
there  is  a  penalty  incurred  by  the  transaction;  and  we  observ- 
ed  a  notice  last  May,  issued  from  the  custom-house,  New- 
York,  tba^  thereafter  the  law  would  be  rigidly  enforc&d, 
[See  laws  rolative  to  spirits^  wines,  teas  &c.] 


THE    AUTT.^T    AKJ^ 

A.  TABl.t: 

'nllng  a  comparative  view  of  the  properties  of  scrffp 
the  most  cdebratcd  Minerals^,  both  in  ymcrica  and « 
-r.pc, numbered  from  1  io  27  inclusive  ;  s^hewing  the 
'}iir  and  qaaufittjt  of  articles  in  four  FintSy  or  115,5 
'C  Inches^  of  the  Water  of  each  Spring — the  quantities 
■rnhis  and  Decimal  Parts  of  a  GrmUyfrom  the  kttcsi 

'horities^ 


'•■'AMKS  OF  SPRIKG^,              No. 

Tem- 

Inches car- 

IweVies 

pera-' 

boQie  acid 

sulpb  ar- 

ture. 

gas. 

retted 
hydro- 

:gen  gas 

^  Congress^ 

1 

50 

171.089 

CotuQibian, 

2 

50 

118. 

W^ashington^ 

S 

48 

12S.5 

Haniilton.^ 

4 

48. 

142. 

-v:ilATOGA 

Flat  R(VGk, 

5 

48 

126.25 

'''ATEaS. 

^  High  Rock, 

6 

'  48 

121.36 

President, 

7 

51 

157.132 

'.  Red   Spring, 

8 

48 

75.25 

Ellis'  Spring,, 

9 

'   47 

112.25 

Taylor's  Wash^ton 

10 

43 

125.5 

f  Ballston  Spa, 

21 

50- 

105. 

J  Low's  Spring,, 

12 

52 

ilO. 

.  LLSTON 

j  Suljjljur, 

13 

52 

72. 

3.5 

i'A?SRS. 

(^  New  Spring, 

34 

50 

159.5 

Saratoga  Sulphur, 

15 

50 

21.75 

5.5. 

r  SaHne  Spa, 

16 

^^^ 

15.18 

ffKLTJEN- 

J  Chalybeate  Spa, 

17 

53^*" 

12. 

irAM. 

1  Montp'r  Wells,  I, 

18 

53 

8.5       ' 

■  -^U]d. 

(;.     .     .         No.  2. 

19 

52 

3.95 

5.S 

^T.'-' 

o:»anv,  Foiihon  Spring, 

20 

51.16 

21| 

,,:.i;MM!,  22f 

elle,  or,  Aken  Wat<?r,  2  'jl43 

. .    .  Well,  England,  24J   74 

King's  Bath,- England,  25Jll6 

seoj^ia — Carlsbad,  26rl65 

rniany — Saltzer  Water^  271 


1:04. 

4. 

some. 
15. 

4. 
20. 
70. 


9.5 
rnuch^ 


TRADEiSMAN's    ttlTIDE. 


34# 


NOTE.  Besides  those  ingredients  mentioned  in  the  table,  the  Saline 
Spa  contains  Carbonate  and  muriate  of  magnesia  12.5  sulphate  ot  soda 
and  magnesia  240.  Ch.ilybvate  Spa,  muriote  of  liine  1.275.  Montp'r 
Well,  No.  I.  muriate  of  limtj  18.  muriate  jof  magnesia  49.122  muriate  of 
magnesia  20,  No  2  muriate  of  lime  12.06  sulphate  of*magiiesia  24,0G. 
muriate  of  ni agnosia  14.5  hydrogen  sulphate  lime  16.375  Germany  Pyr- 
mont  sulphate  of  magnesia  22.28  Harrowgate,  Eng.  muriate  ot^  lime  6.5 
sulphate  of  magnesia  5.25  muriate  of  magnesia  45  5  Bristol  Hot  Well, 
Eng.  muriate  n»agnesia  3.625>  all  of  which  are^  included  in  the  total 
quantity. 


No.  I  Muriate 
of 

Soda. 


Carbon-  iCarbon- 
ate  of  I  ate  of 
Soda.   I  Lime. 


Carbon-lCafbon^l    Sul- 
ate  of  1   ate    of  iphato  of| 
Magne-|    I'-on.       Lime,  j 
sia.  I 


Total  quanti- 
ty- 


3 

4 
5 
6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

K 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 


235.75 

8.25 

89.238 

1.678 

3;084 

100.75 

11.25 

60.5 

0.75 

3.75 

115.75 

8.25 

63.75 

].25 

3. 

134.75 

12.25 

73.75 

3.75 

1.5 

97.4 

5.6 

53.5 

0.75 

3.75 

105. 

9. 

57.5 

0.25 

2.25 

6f.5 

9.5 

53.75 

1.25 

3. 

58.76 

12.24 

48.5 

1.5 

3. 

94. 

5. 

55.25 

3.75 

/ 

156.77 

13.23 

TO. 

2.75 

2.05 

79.5 

4.5 

37.25 

1.25 

3.75 

71. 

5. 

32.25 

0.75 

3. 

32. 

3. 

15. 

2. 

79.25 

6.5 

30.77 

4.25 

3.75 

11.8 

0.7 

16.55 

0.95 

2.5 

2.5 

20. 

1.01 

0.68 

0365 

109.87 

. 

3.575 

42505 

91.625 

9. 

2.875 

33.25 

.688 

5.88 

5.88"' 

17.84 

2.25 

6.24 

17.04 

40.12 

2.24 

34.32 

307.75 

19.25 

2.75 

20. 

48. 

19. 

1 

2. 

6.75 

5.876 

26. 

11.25 

trace. 

15.75 

22.12 

47.04 

16.60 

trace. 

70. 

16. 

1.2. 

20. 

338. 
117. 
192. 
226. 
161. 
174. 
135. 
124, 
158. 
249. 
126. 
112.. 

52.. 
124.52 

30. 
277.5 

9.605 
28S,0S5 
230.25 

32.628 
123.04 
377. 

87. 

23.875 

66. 
251.8 
108, 


21^ 


24&  7-im  AnTrst  M^ 

CHAPTER.  XXXI 

,  Useful  Receipts, 

L^mon  B(cr\  Three  pofuuds  af  Imnp  &tigar^  ten  oturce* 
brui&eci  giftger,  owe  ounce  cream  tartar,  lemons  Bumber  font 
pour  on  iheijv  four  gallons  boiling  water,  add  eight  o»Hces  oC 
jfcasTy  \y^ork  iW  four  days,  then  bottle  in  \vM  pi»ts,  a»d  ti«? 
the  coiks  do\rn, 

2,  Six  pounds  of  moist  sugar,  five  oimces  of  ginger,  \vro 
ounces  of  creanri  tartar,  lemons  number  fotir,  eight  cunces  of 
^CrtSf,  seven  g.illons  oi  water,  work  tv/o  or  three  days,  strain, 
add  one  pound  o^  brandy,  bung  very  close,  and  in  fourteen 
days  bt)-tt}e  it ;  a  cooling  effervescent  drink  in  »umrn«r^ 

T'o  jine  Spirits,  Mix  a  small,  quantity  of  wheat  flour  ii^ 
water,  as  if  for  making  paste,  arad  pour  the  same  hito  tlie  ves-. 
sel.  The  whwle  is  then  tt)  be  welt  roused,  ^wd  in.  a  short  tincie 
the  contents  will  become  bright.. 

Cedraf,  Lemon  peels  in;  number  twelve,  spirits  wfoe  rec-i 
tified  two  gallons;  distil  in  bahieuai  niarise,,  and  add  pimple 
i-yrup  p.  aeq. 

Par/ait  Amour.  ^  The  same  coloured  with  a  little  cocbi-e 
neaL 

Wine  Test,  When,  win^  becomes  partly  aeetoTr^  called 
pricked  wine,  tlie  disagreeable  taste  is  often  corrected  by  sugar 
of  lead;  it  is  then  poisonous,  and  the  fraud  ought  to^be  de-, 
tected.  This  may  be  done  by  dropping  it  into,  a  little  water, 
charged  with  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas  ;  it  will  immediately 
become  a  dark  brown. 

7^0  turn  Wine  into  Vinegar  in  less  than  three  hours,^  Put 
in  the  wine  a  red  beet,  and  it  will  be  quiter  sour  and  true  vine- 
gar in  le$s  then  three  hours, 

JV  restore  such  Wine  to  its  first  taste.  Tyke  off  the  red 
beet  and  in  its  stead  put  a  cabbage  root  into  that  wine,  and 
it  will  return  to  its  primary  taste  in  the  same  space  of  time. 

EscubcB  Usquebaugh,  Saffron  one  ounce,  juniper  berries 
four  drachms,  dates  without  their  kernels,  raisins,  of  each 
three  ounces,  Jujobs  six  ounces,  anise  seed^rnace,  cloves,,  cori- 
ander seed,  of  each  one  drachm,  cinnamon  two  drachms, 
proof  spirits  twelve?  pints,  simple  syrup  six  pounds;  pectoral, 
emnrenagogne. 

Scotch  3famc4ade,  Juice  of  Seville  _oranges  two  pints, 
yellow  honey  two  pounds,  boil  to  a  proper  consistence. 


ssmce  of  Spruce  is  prepared  by  boiling  the  twigs  of 
Scotch  6r  in  water,  and  evaporating  the  decoction  till  it  grows 
thick;   used  to  flavour  treacle  beer  instead  of  hops. 

JEssence  of  Malt  is  prepared  by  infusing  malt  in  water,  first 
boiled,  and  th'?n  cooled  till  it  reflects  the  image  of  a  person's 
face  in  it,  pouring  off  the  infusion,  and  evaporating  it  to  the 
consistence  of  new  honey  \  used  in  sea  voyages  and  places^ 
where  rnnlt  cannot  be  procured  to  make   beer, 

Dover'^$    Sudorific  Powder^     Take  of     ipecacuanha    \fy 

ripwder,  opium  purified,  each  one  part,  sulphate-of  potash 
bht  parts,  triturate  them  together  in  a  fine  pow<lcr. 
FThe  sulphate  of  potash  from  the  grittiness  of  its  crystals^ 
js  perhaps  iDetter  fitted  for  tearing  and  dividing  the  tenacious 
opium  than  any  other  salt  ;  this  seems  to  be  its  only  use  in 
the  preparation.  The  operator  ought  to  he  careful  that  the 
opium  and  ipecacuanha  be  equally  difiiised  through  the  whole 
mass  of  povyder,  otherwise  different  portions  of  the  powder 
must  differ  in  degrees  of  strength. 

This  powder  is  one  of  the  most  certain  sudorifics,  and  as 
such,  was  recommended  by  Dr.  Dover  as  an  efi'ectual  rem- 
edy in  rheumatism.  Modern  practice  confirms  its  reputa-e 
tion,  nototf^ly  in  rheumatism,  but  also  in  dropsy,  and  several 
other  diseases,  where  it  is  often  dificult  by  other  means,  to 
procure  copious  perspiration.  The  dose  is  froqi  two  to  five 
grains,  repeated  according  to  the  patient's  stomach  and 
strength.  It  is  proper  to  avoid  drinking  immediately  after  ta-i 
king  it,  otherwise  it  is  apt  to  be  rejected,  before  any  other 
eft'ect  CAW  be  produced,  Perspiration  should  be  kept  up  by 
diluents. 

Plummer^s  PUls^  These  pills  are  diaphoretic,  altcrativCj 
purgative,  and  beneficial  in  cutaneous  eruptions, 

Take  of  calomel,  sulphate  of  antimony,  of  each  one 
drachm,  gum  gRaiacum  two  drachms,  Mix  them  assiduously 
with  mucilage,  and  divide  into  sixty  pills,  two  pills  forming 
the  dose.      To  be  taken  at  night, 

Earl  Warwick^s  Pouxlers,  Scammonii  two  ounces,  anti-* 
monii    daph.  one  ounce,  crem,    tart,  half  an  ounce. 

Storei/''s  Worm  Cakes,  Calomel,  jalap,  of  each  one 
drachm,  ginger  two  scruples,  sacch  one  ounce,  cinnabar 
anti,  a  sufficient  quantity  to  make  into  cakes^ 

Worm  Cakes.  Scamm.  Allep,  two  ounces,  calomel  ppd, 
three  ounces,  res,  jalap  two  ounces,  crem,  tart,   four  o»unces. 


248  THE    ARTIST    AND 

white  sugar  three  pounds,  mucil.  ^,  trag.  a  sufficient  quantity. 

Witrni  Pills,  C  ilomc'l  oiie  ounce,  -w^xr  two  ounces, 
st\rchoue  o.iuce,  ui  icil.  i^um  traj^.  a  suiTiicent  quantiiy.  la 
m'ik  M\vi  !iu:);lro  1  an  1  f  .rry-eight  p.ll  ;  doio,  number  one 
night  and  ni  irniiii!,  for  ch.ldien. 

Rfjined  Juice  or  Liquorice.  Spanish  liqorice  four  pounds, 
g'lm  Ar  I.  two  pounds,  water  a  suliicient  quantity  ;  dissolve, 
strain:  evaporate  genily  to  a  soft  extract,  roll  in  cylinders, 
cut  into  lengihs,  and  polish,  by  rubbing  them  in  a  box;  ex- 
pectorant in  conghs,  ^-c. 

Pate  (le  licgUsse  Noire.  Refined  liquorice  oight  ounces, 
gum  Arabic  two  pounds,  sugar  one  pound,  water  a  sufficient 
quanrirv;  disssdve  and  eviporate,  till  it  forms  a  very  thick 
syrup,  add  rad.  enulae.  canij).  rad.  irid.  flor.  of  each  half  an 
ounce,  ess.  de  cedrat  a  fovv  drops,  [)ut  into  tin  moulds,  and 
dry  in  a  stove. 

Young'' s  Purging  Drink.  Crystallized  natron  two  and  a 
h:df  drachms,  Ciystals  of  tartar  three  drachms,  water  eight 
ounces,  corked  up  immediately  in  stone  bottles  and  wired  :  a 
pleasant  cooliMg  laxative  in  sunimer. 

Warffs  White  Drops.  Quicksilver  twelve  ounces,  spirits 
nitre  two  pounds ;  dissolved;  add  ammonia,  ppa.  fourteen 
ounces,  evaporate  so  as  to  form  a  light  salt,  which  drain  and 
dissolve  in  rose  water,  three  pounds  and  a  half, 

Greek  Water^  is  prepared  and  used  in  the  same  manner 
for  turning  the  hair  black. 

Some  perhaps  might  give  a  pieference  to  the  following 
pi'eparation.  Quicksilver  four  ounces,  spirits  of  nitre  one 
pound  ;  dissolve  ;  add  ammonia  [)pa.  seven  ounces:  evapo» 
rate  and  crystallize,  then  dissolve  each  pound  of  salt  in  three 
pints  and  a  half  of  rose  water. 

Godfrd/s  Cordial.  Dissolve  half  an  ounce  of  opium,  ono 
drachm  of  sassafras  in  two  ounces  sp'rits  of  wine  :  now  mix 
four  pounds  of  treacle,  \\\\\\  one  gallon  of  boiling  water  and 
when  cold,  mix  both  solutions.  This  is  generally  used  to 
sooth  the  pains  of  children,  Sfc. 

l\,ee''s  Windham  Anti-BiUious  Pills.  Pul.  gamb.  three 
pf'unds,  aloes  soc.  two  pounds^  saporT.  due.  one  pound,  sal. 
nitri  hilf  a  pound,  extra,  of  cow  parsnip  one  pound,  beat 
them  into  mass  with  a  sufficient  quantity  of  spirts  of  wine 
rectified.  ,.^ 

Lee^s  New  London  Pills.    Pulv,  aloes  soc.  twelve  ouircei, 


TRADKSMAn's   G¥II>E.  249 

pulv.  scammon,  A.  six  ounces,  pulv,  gamb.  four  ounces, 
pulv,  jalap  three  ounces,  calomel  pp.  five  ounces,  sapon.  cast. 
one  ounce,  syrup  buckthorn,,  one  ounce,  muc,  gum.  Arabic 
seven  ounces,  in.  ft.  mass  s,  a.  when  incorporated,  divide  t\vo 
drachms  of  the  mass,  into  twenty-four  pills. 

Smithy's  British  Lavender,  OI.  lavend.  Aug.  two  ounces, 
essence  ambergr.  one  ounce,  eau  i!e  luce  one  pint,  spirits  wine 
rect.  two  pints. 

Essence  of  Pej/permint.  Spirits  w^ine  rectified  one  pint, 
put  into  it  kali  pp.  one  ounce,  previously  heated,  decant,  and 
add  ol.  minth.  pip.  half,  «n  ounce,  rnix. 

2.  Ol.  minth.  pip.  one  pound,  spirits  of  wine  rectified 
two  gallons,  colour  with  herb  minth.  pip.  sic.  eight  ounces, 
mix. 

3.  Ol.  minth.  pip.  three  ounces,  sp.  wine  rect.  coloured, 
^ith  spinage  two  pints  ;   mix. 

JlilVs  iialsam  of  Honey,  Bals.  Tolu  one  pound  honey 
one  pound,  sp.  wine  rect.  one  gallon. 

2.  Balsam  Tolu  opt.  two  ounces,  gum  styrax  two  drachms 
ppii  pur.  half  a  drachm,  mell.  opr.  eight  ounces,  sp.  wine  rect. 
two  pints,  pectoral  used  in  coughs  and  colds. 

Forces  Balsam  of  Hoarhound,  tioarhound,  liquorice 
root,  of  each  throve  pounds  eight  ounces,  water  a  swfficient 
quantity  to  strain  six  pints,  infuse  ;  to  the  infusion  add  proof 
spirits  or  brandy  twelve  pints,  camphor  one  ounce  and  two 
drachms  opium  pur.,  Brinjamin  of  each  one  ounce,  dried  squills 
two  ounces,  oil  of  anise  seed  one  ounce,  honey  three  pounds 
and  eight  ounces. 

Stoughton^s  Eiixcr,  Rad.  gentian  two  pounds  four  ounces, 
rad.  serp.  verg.  one  pound,  cort.  aurant.  sic.  one  pound  and 
eight  ounces,  cal,  aromat.  four  ounces,  sp.  wine  rect.  water, 
of  each  six  gallons. 

2.  Rad.  gentian  four  pounds,  cort.  aurant.  two  pounds,  pis. 
aurant.  one  pound,  cocin.  two  drachms,  sem.  cardam.  min. 
one  ounce,  sp.  wine  reel,   eight  gallons. 

Hooper^s  Pills,  Vitriol,  virid.  aquae  of  each  eight  ounces  ; 
dissolve  :  add  aloes  Barb.  tw6  pounds  eight  ounces,  canel-. 
lae  alb.  six  ounces,  gum.  myrrhae  two  ounces,  soponacis  four 
drachms, 

2.  Sal,  martis  two  ounces  pulv,  aloes  c.  canellae  one  pound 
mucilage  gum  tragacantha?,  tinct,  aloes,  of  each  a  sufficient 
quantity,  cut  each  drachm  into  eighteen  pills,  put  forty  in  n. 


250  THE    ARTIST    ANt) 

Matthew'^s  Pills — Starkei/'s  Pills.  Rad.  helleb.  nigri.  rari' 
hell^'b.  alhi.  rnd.  si;lycyrrli.  opii  of  each  two  ounces,  sapon* 
Starken  six  ounces,  ol.  terebiuth.   a  sufficient  quantity. 

2.  R  I'l.  helleb.  ni;^ri.  rid.  glycyrrb.  sapon.  casiill.  rad.  cir- 
cumae,  opii  puriff.  syr.  croci.  of  each  four  ounces,  ol.  tere- 
biriih.  a  sufficient   qu  inrity. 

Barclay''s  Anti- BiUutas  Pills.  Extract  colocynth.  two 
dr. ich.ns,  resin,  jalap  one  drachm,  sapon.  amygdal.  one  drachm 
and  a  hi  If,  gu  liaci  thr<*o  drachm.^,  tart,  eniet.  eight  grains,  ol. 
junip.  ol.  carui,  ol.  rorismar.  of  each  four  gtt.  syr.  spin.  cerv. 
a  s.  q.  m  ike  into  sixty-four  p. lis. 

\Worni  pills.  Calomel  one  ounce,  sugar  two  ounces,  starch 
one  <»unce,  niucil.  tjum  tragi,  a  s.  q.  to  make  two  hundred 
and  f»rty-eight  pills;  dose,  number  one,  night  and  morning 
for  children. 

Kvysp.rs  Pills.  Hydrag.  acetat  four  ounces,  manna  thirty 
ounces,  starch  iwo  ounces,  niucil.  gum  traga.  s.  q.  make  into 
pills  of  six  grains  (?ach  ;  dose,  number  tw'>,  Uv^cte  maneque, 
increasing  the  dose  to  number  twenty-five,  or  more  ;  a  box  of 
1000  or  1200  is  usually  sutrioient. 

I)alby'*s  Carminative.  Tinct.  opii  four  and  a  half  drachms 
tincJ.  assi.  iwo  and  a  half  drachms,  ol.  carui  ihree  scruples, 
ol.  miiith.  pip,  six  scruples,  tinct.  castor,  six  and  a  half 
drachms,  sp.  of  wine  rect.  six  draciims,  put  two  drachms  into 
each  bottle  with  magnesia  one  drachm,  and  fill  up  simple  sy- 
rup and  a  little  sp.  of  wine  rect. 

Botany  Bay  Cement.  Yellow  gum  and  brick  dust  of  each 
p.  aeq.  used  to  ceihent  china  waro.    . 

Afimirahlc  wash  for  the  Hair  1 1  thicken  its  growth^.  Take 
two  ounces  each  of  rosemary,  maiden  hair,  southernwood, 
myrtle  herr'es  and  hazle  bark,  and  burn  them  to  ashes  on  a 
clean  hearth,  or  in  an  oven  ;  with  these  ashes  make  a  strong 
lye,  wiih  which  wash  the  hair  at  the  rools  every  day,  and 
keep  it  cut  short.  This  lixivium,  it  is  said  will  destroy  that 
unsuspected  o'lemy  to  the  hair,  the  worm  at  the  root. 

Easy  and  tfff  c.taal  method  (^  rendering -all  kinds  of  Paper 
fireproof.  This  surprising  eneci  is  })roduced  by  a  simple 
cause.  ft  is  only  necessary  that  the  paper,  whether  plain, 
colijured,  written  [)rinted  or  stained,  should  be  immerseJ  in  a 
strong  solution  of  alum  water,  and  afterwards  thoroughly 
dried,  when  it  will  immediately  become  fire  proof.  The 
^jperiment  may  easily  be  made,  by  holding  n  pi©ce  of  paper 


tradesman's    GUXDl  251 

thus  prepared  over  the  flame  of  a  candle.  SomiB  pjiper,  how- 
pver,  will  re^quire  to  imbibe  more  of  tho  solution  than  it  can 
do  by  a  single  immersion,  in  vvbicli  case  the  dipping  and  dry- 
ing must  be  re'[)eated  till  the  paper  becomes  fully  saturated. 
It  is  asserttd  that  neither  the  colour  nor  quality  of  the  pa- 
per vv.lj  receive  the  least  injury  from  ihis  operation,  but  that 
on  the  contrary  they  will  be  improved. 

An  cxelhnt  Paste  for  stopping  Holes  or  C  tacks  in  Iron 
Culinary  Utensils,  so  as  to  render  them  perfect! if  tight.  To 
six  quarts  of  potter's  clay,  add  one  part  steel  filings,  and  of 
linseed  oil  a  suffjcient  quantity  to  render  the  mixture  of  gla- 
zier's putty  and  fill  the  holes  with  it.  This  will  soon  become 
hard,  and  resist  the  action  both  of  water  and  fire. 

Ean  de  flusson.  Is  probably  a  mixed  tiiiclure  or  wine  of 
henbane  and  colchicum.  A  tincture  of  cclchicum  has  been 
proposed  fnr  it  by  Want;  a  tincture  of  hedge  hyssop  is  said 
to  be  sold  for  it  by  Reece  ;  and  a  wine  of  white  helleb.  pro- 
posed by  Moore,  but  neither  of  them  is  possessed  of  the  same 
characteristics  as  the  Parisian  medicine^ 

Bateman''s  Pectoral  Drops,  Sem.  foenic.  dulc.  two  pounds 
and  eight  ounces,  sem.  ani^e  one  pound,  i)roof  spirits  four 
gallons,  water  a  sufficient  quantity,  distil  ten  gallons,  water  a 
sufficient  quantity,  distil  ten  gidlons,  to  which  add  opiuin  seven 
ounces  and  four  drachms*,  camphor  six  ounces,  kali  ppi  one 
ounce,  coral  rubr.  four   ounces. 

2.  Castor  N.  A.  two  on  rices,  opium,  anisi,  of  each  one 
ounce  y\n{\  four  draclm  s,  camph.  eight  ounces,  sem.  foeu.  dulc. 
two  ounces,  titict.  an^inj.  four  ounces,  proof  spir'ts  ten  pints 
add  rad.  valerian  and  cochineal  in    povvt'er. 

3.  Castor,  camphor,  of  each  four  ounces,  coccin.  one 
ounce,  spirits  of  wine  rectified,  two  gallons,  water  one  gal- 
lon. 

4.  Opii  cam|)h.  of  each  one  pound,  castor,  ol.  anisi,  S/intd. 
rubr.  of  each  four  ouncf*s,  treacle  ten  pounds  spirits  of  wine 
rectified  five  gallons,  water  four  gallons. 

5.  Opii  camph.  of  each  ten  drachms,  coccin.  one  drachm, 
kali  ppt.  [our  scruples,  ol.  foen'c.  dulc.  one  drachm,  (or  seeds 
three  ounces,)  proof  spirits  fourteen  pints.  Winter  two  pints: 
produce  fifteen  pints. 

D.  Castor  one  ounce,  ol.  anisi  one  drachm,  c  mph.  five 
drachms,  coccin.  one  drachm  and  a  half,^  opii  six  drachms, 
proof  spirits  one  gallon. 


Xl^:2  THE    ARTIST    AN1> 

Daffy's  Elixir,  Elixir  Salutis,  Fol.  scnnoe  four  ounceS, 
ras.  iign.  sant.  rad.  enuL-E  sice;  sem.  anisi;  sem.  carui,  sem. 
coriand.  rad.  glycyrrh.  of  each  two  ounces;  raisins  stoned 
eight  ounces,  proof  spirits  six  pounds;  This  is  novV  sold  by 
the  name  of  Dicey's  Daffy; 

2.  Tincture  Senriw,  Tinct.  Sennas,  P,  L.  Fol.  sennas 
one  pound,  sem.  card.  min.  half  an  ounce,  raisins  sixteen 
ounces,  pi*oof  spirits  one  gallon, 

3.  T.  Sennoe,  P,  D,      The  same  but  Dmitting  the    raisins. 

4.  SenncB  Coniposita.  Fol.  sennae  two  ounces,  rad,  jalap 
bne  ounce,  sem.  coriand.  half  an  ounc6,  proof  spirits  threfe 
J)ounds  and  a  half  by  weight,  when  riiade,  add  white  sugdr 
four  ounces. 

5;  Fol.  senna),  rad.  rliei,  sem.  arisi;  of  each  tW'3  pounds, 
bad.  jalap,  sem.  carui,  of  each  one  pound;  sao:,  hub.  eii;lit 
ounces,  proof  spirits  ten  gallons,  brown  su-^  li  tour    pdiinds. 

6.  Hhubarb/East  Imlia,  forty  pounds^  seinia3  fifteen  ])  )n;ujs, 
sant.  subr.  iiv^e  potinds,  sem.  carui,  sem;  anisi,  sem.  coriand. 
of  each  five  pounds,  cineres  Russici  eight  ounces,  spirits  of 
<tine  lectified  ten  gallons  ;  digest  three  days,  then  add  pt-oof 
spirits  dighty  gallons,  treacle  forty-six  pounds. 

7.  Rad.  rhei  fourteen  pounds,  sem.  anis  ten  pounds;  sennffe 
parva?  eight  pounds,  rad.  jalap  four  pounds,  sant.  rubr;  three 
pounds  eight  ounces,  ciner.  Russ.  two  pounds,  spirits  of  wino 
rectified  thirty-eight  gallons,  water  eighteen  gallons. 

8.  Sicinton''s  Daffy.  Rad.  jalap  three  potinds,  fol.  sen  nag 
twelve  ounces,  sem.  coriand.  sem.  anisi;  rad.  glycyrrh.  rad. 
fenulse,  of  each  four  ounces,  spirits  of  wine  rectified,  water, 
of  each  one  gallon. 

9.  Rad.  enulee,  ras.  guaiaci,  sem.  coriand.  rad.  rhei,  rad. 
glycyrrh.  sem.  anisi.  of  each  three  ounces,  raisins  one  pound 
eight  ounces,  proof  spirits  ten  pints. 

10;  Rad.  jalap  three  pounds,  fol.  sennas  one  pound,  sem. 
anisi  six  ounces,  sem.  coriand.  four  ounces,  cort.  aurant  sice, 
two  ounces,  proof  spirits  two  gallons. 

11.  Fol.  senna}  seven  pounds,  rad.  jalap  five  pounds  sem. 
anisi  fourteen  pounds,  sem.  carui  four  pounds,  sem.  foenic. 
dulc.  four  pounds,  brandy  coloured  two  gallons,  spirits  of 
wine  rectified  twen!y-six  gallons,  water  twenty-four  gallons; 
let  it  stand  three  weeks,  strain  washing  oufthe  last  portions 
with  water  two  gallons,  then  add  treacle  twenty-eight  paunds. 
A  common  remedy  in  flatulent  cholic,  and  used  as  a  purge  by 


rPADESMAN^S    efUIDE.  253 

ttjfi^ie  acciiStoraed  to  spirit  drinking;  dose  one,  two  or  three 
taljl^  spoonfuls, 

Anii'Atirition,  Hoj^'s  lard  ton  pounds,  camph.  four  oun« 
ces,  black  lead  a  sutlTiciont  quantity  to  colour  it ;  used  to  rub 
en  iron  to  prevent  rtist,  and  dhninish  friction; 

Isstie  Ftas.  Cera?  fl.  oi?e  pound,  radi  circum.  eight  oun- 
ces, rad,  irid,  fior.  fiMir  ounces,  tereb,  Vonii,  asufficiettt  quan- 
tity, make  into  peas. 

2.  Gerce  flav.  six  ounces,  rad.  irid.  flor.  two  ouncoSy  ver« 
ftiiilion  four  ounces,  tereb.  Xqu,  a  sufficient  quantity,  form 
into  poas. 

S',  Cerse  fl.  six  ounces,  seru^,  ?ens.  rad.  helleb.  albi,  of 
of  each  two  ounces,  canthariduni  one  ounce,  rad.  irid.  flor. 
one  ounce  and  a  half,  tereb.  Ven.  a  sufficient  quantity  ;  this 
kst  is  caustic  and  will  open  issues  of  itself,  the  otiiers  ar0 
used  to  [)v,t  into  issues  tiiat  begin  to  close  up  to  keep  them 
open  ionfrer. 

Issue  Plasters.  Gerse  fl.  half  a  pound,  minii,  tereln 
C[n^,  of  each  four  oumcgs,  cinnab.^  rad.  irid.  flor.  of  each 
one  ounce,  njosch.  four  grains;  melted,  spread  upon  linen, 
polished  with  a  moistened  calendering  glass  rubber,  and  lastly 
cut  inlo  small  sqjiares. 

2,  Diat  hyl.  simpL  one  pc^und,  rad.  iiid.  flor.  one  ounce, 
spread  and  polished. 

3.  Diachyl.  simpl.  two  pounds,  pic.  Burg,  sarcocollae  of 
each  four  ounces,  tereb.  com.  one  ounce,  spre-jd  and  polished. 

Com  Plaster.  Ger^e  fl.  two  pounds,  pic^  Burg*  twelve 
oiunccs,  tereb.  comm.  six  ounces,  jerug,  ppae.  three  ounces, 
spread  on  cloth,  cut  ard  polished. 

Almond  Paste,  Almonds  blanched  four  ounces,  lemon 
juice  two  ounces,  oil  of  almonds  three  ounces,  water  one 
I  lure.  proof  spirits  six  ounces. 

2.  Bitter  almonds  blanched,  one  po!ind,  white  of  four  eggs, 
rose  water,  spirits  of  wine  rectified,  of  each  a  suflicient  quan- 
tity. 

Brown  Almond  Paste.  Bitter  almonds  blanched,  pulp  of 
raisins,  of  each  one  pound,  proof  spirits  a  sufficient  quantity; 
cosmetic,  softens  the  skin  and  prevents  chaps. 

Almond  Paste.  Amygd.  dulc.  decoct,  one  pound,  amygd, 
amar.  decoct,  half  an  OAince,  sugar  one  pound,  aq.  flor.  aurant. 
a  s'lfljcient  quantity  ;  beat  to  a  paste  sufliciently  thick  not  to 
stick  to  the  fingers, 

22 


^54  "  THE    ARTIST  ANi> 

Readif  made  Mustard,  Flour  of  black  mustard  seed  well 
sifted  from  the  bran  three  pounds,  salt  oae  pourul,  p.iake  it  up 
with  currant  wine  and  add  three  or  four  spoonfuls  of  sugar  to 
each  pint. 

Blacking  Paste,  Rape  oil  three  ounces,  oil  vitriol  three 
ounces,  mix,  the  next  day  add  tredcle,  ivory  black,  of  each 
three  pounds,  stone  blue  six  ounces,  vinegar  a  sufficient  quan- 
tity to  form  a  stiiT  paste  ;   this  will  till  one  dozen  un  boxes. 

2.  Rape  oil  three  ounces,  treacle,  brown  sugar,  each  nine 
ounces  ;  mix,  adding  ivory  black  three  pounds,  Hour  paste 
two  ])ounds  ;  when  the  paste  is  quite  smooth  \{\\a  it  to  the 
consistence  of  honey  with  a  suilicient  quantity  of  vinger  :  used 
for  making  blacking  for  leather. 

James^  Analeptic  Pills,  Pll.  Rufi.  one  pound  calc.  anti- 
raonii  lotee  eight  ounces,  gum  guaiaci  eight  ounces,  ni.  and. 
make  thirty-two  pills  frum'oach  drachm. 

2.  Pill  Ruti.  puly.  antimonialis,  gum  guaiaci,  of  each  one 
scruple;   make  into  twenly  pills. 

Anderson'^s  Scotch  Pills,  Aloes  Bbds.  one  pound,  rad. 
helleb.  nigr.  rad.  jalapi  knli  ppi.  of  each  one  ounce,  oil  anise 
four  drachms,' syr.  simp,  a  sufficient  quantit\\ 

2.  Aloes  Bbds.  two  pounds  eight  ounces,  w^ater  eight  oun-^ 
ces  ;  w)ftenj  add  jalap  som.  anisi  pulv.  ebor.  ustri,  of  each 
eight  ounces,  ol.  anisi  one  ounce. 

3.  Aloes  (Bermudas)  one  pound,  rad.  jalap,  flour  sulphur 
ebor.  ustri,  glycyrrh.  of  each  two  ounces,  oil  anise  one  dracb.m, 
gamboge  two  drachms,  sap.  castil.  four  ounces,  syr.  sp.  cervin. 
a  sufficient  quantity. 

Ward^s  Antimonial  Pills.  Glass  of  antimony  finely  levi- 
gated, four  ounces,  dragon's  blood  one  ounce,  mountain  wine  a 
sufficient  quantity,  make  into  pills  of  one  and  a  half  grains 
each. 

Stecr'*s  Opodeldoc.  Sapo  cast,  three  pounds,  spirits  wine 
rectified  three  gallons^  camph.  fourteen  ounces,  oil  rorism. 
three  ounces,  ol.  origani  six  ounces,  aquae  amnion,  pur.  two 
pounds. 

2.  Sap.  alb,  one  pound,  camphor  four  ounces,  oil  rorism. 
four  drachms,  spirits  wine,  rectilied  two  pints. 

3.  Sap.  alb.  one  pound,  camphor  fou)  ounces,  oL  origan, 
ol.  rorism.  of  each  four  drachms,  spirits  wine  rectified  q.  v. 
it  will  bear  near  six  pints. 

4.  Sap.  alb.  three  pounds,  camph,  oil.  rorism.  of  each  six 


tradesman's  «uid6.  255 

ouriCOSj  spir.  am.  camp,  fourteeu  ounces,  spirits  wine  rectified 
four  gallons  and  a  half,  ; 

5.  Slip,  alb.  four  ounces,  caraph,  one  ounce,  o).  rorism.  two 
drachms,  oil  origatii  tiiirty  drops,  spirits  wine  rectified  oc« 
pint,  water  halfa  pint. 

ISquire^'s  Klixir,  Opium  four  ounces,  camphor  one  ounce, 
cocind,  oneuLiHce,  ol.  foeniculidulc.  two  drachms,  tinct,  serpt, 
one  pin4,  spirits  anisi  two  gallons,  water  two  pints,  and  add 
aur.  musiv.  six  ounces. 

2.  K'did.  glycy.  one  pound,  kali  pp,  four  ounces,  cochineal 
one  ounc«,  water  twelve  pints;  hoii  till  reduced  to  one  gal- 
lon, tiien  add  tinct.  opii  twelve  ounces,  camphor  one  ounc«, 
spirits  wine  rectified  four  pints,  aur.  musiv.  twelve  ounces. 

3.  Opii  one  ounce  and  four  drachms,  camph.  oae  ounce, 
coccin.  kali.  pp.  of  each  one  drachm,  burnt  sugar  two  ounces, 
linct.  serpent,  one  pint,  sp.  anisi  two"  gallons,  aur-  musiv. 
cigTit  ounces. 

Ink  Poivder,  Green  vitriol  one  pound  ,  galls  two  pounds, 
gum  Arab,  eight  ounces:  two  ounces  make  a  pint  of  ink. 

Marking  In]:.  Lunur  caust'c  two  drachms, distilled  water 
six  ounces,. dissolve  and*  add  guui  water  two  drachms,  dissolve 
also  natron  ppm.  half  an  ounce  in  water,  four  ouncos,  and 
add  gufii  water  halfan  ounce  ;  v^et  the  linen  on  which  you  in- 
tend to  write  with  tliis  last  solution,  dry  it,  and  then  write 
upon  it  with  the  fust  liquor,  using  a  clean  pen. 

lied  Sealing  Wax,  Gum  lac  t^/o  pounds,  vermilion  four 
ouuces,  ol.  tereb.  ol.  olive,  of  each  eight  ounces,  roll  in  cakes 
and  polish  with  a  tag  till  quite  cold. 

2.  Shell-lac  five  pounds,  resina?  fl.  three  pounds,  ol.  tereb 
one  pound,  vernrlion  twelve  ounces,  chalk  ppd.  four  ounces. 

3.  Resin^e  fl.  six  pounds,  shell-lnc  two  pounds,  t  reb. 
Venit.  two  pounds,  vermilion  eight  ounces. 

4.  Shell-lac,  rasinas  fl.  of  each  four  pounds,  tereb.  Ven.  one 
pound ;   add  vermilion  or  bole  Armen.  ppd.  q,  p. 

Black  Ball.  Beeswax  eight  ounces,  tallow  one  ounce, 
gumArab.  one  ounce,  lampblack  q.  p. 

Cuurt  Plaster^  or  Sticking  Plaster,  Black  silk  is  stained 
and  brushed  over  with  a  soluiion  of  one  ounce  of  isiijolass  in 
twelve  ouiices  of  proof  spirits,  to  which  two  ounces  of  tine, 
^B«n/oiai  is  added,  when  dry  this  is  repeated  five  times  more, 
after  which  two  coats  are  given  it  of  a  solution  of  four  ounces 
pf  ter«b,  Chice,  in  six  ounces  of  tine,  Bunzoini^  wbichxender» 


25&  THE    A1RTIST   A^T» 

it  less  liable  to  crack  ;  but  some  finish  it  with  a  smiple  tine* 
ture  of  black  balsam  of  Peru. 

Lip  Salve,  Cera  alb.  four  Dances  :  ol.  olive  five  ounces  ; 
spermaceti  four  drachms  j  ol.;  laveiid.  ivveri-ty  drops^  rad,  an- 
chiisce  two  oujices. 

2.  Ol.  olive  opt.  two  ounces,,  cera  ^W  spr'^mav-eti.  each 
three  oz..  rad.  anehusa?  six  drachm&j  melt,  strain  ;  add  oL 
lign.  rbod.  thj-ee  drops,. 

3.  OL  amygd,.  six  owices,  speremaceti  three  ounces,  cera 
alb.  nvo  ounces  ;  rad.  anchusse  one  ounce  ;  balsau  Peruv;^ 
two  drachms. 

4.  OL  amygd.  spremaceti,  cera  alb.^  sacch.  canndi  albi,  of 
«ach  p.  asq.  tbis  is  wbite — the  oihers  are  red'. 

OL  Succitti  Reduchtm.  OL  succin.  one  pound,  petrol  bbd. 
two  pounds. 

British  OiL  OL  tereb  eight  ounces,  petrol  bbcL  four  oun-r 
ces,  oL  rorism.  four  dracbms., 

OL  tereb.  five  pounds^  asphalt,  twelve  ounces,  ol.  lateritii 
eight  ounces.. 

OL  tereb.  five  pounds,  jJ.  laterit.  ver.  eight  ounces. 

UuileAntiqve  a  la  Violette.  Oil  of  Ben.  olives,  or  almonds^ 
scented  with  ovia.  in  the  same  manner  as  in  njaking  sesence 
de  jas  amin,  and  then  pressed  out  of  the  wool  or  cotton, 

Ilitils  Antique  au  mdle  jteurs.  Oil  of  Ben.  or  ahuonds, 
mixed  with  ditierent  essences  to  the  fancy  of  the  perfumer. 

CHAPTER  XXXII.. 

Commerce  and  Mannfactiu^es^, 

Commerce  is  the  interchange  of  commodities,  or  th(^  dis- 
posal of  prod[u:e  of  any  kind  for  other  articles,  or  for  some 
representative  of  value  for  which  other  articles  can  be  \\tQ-r 
cured,  with  a  view  of  making  a  profit  by  the  transaction.  The 
terra  is  usually  restricted  to  the  mercantile  imercoure  be- 
twen  difierent  countries.  The  internal  dealings  between  in- 
dividuals of  the  same  country,  either  for  the  supply  of  imme-» 
diate  consumption,  or  for  ear^-ying  on  manufactures,  is  more 
commonly  denominated  trade.  Those  who  engage  their  cap- 
ital in  commerce  or  trac|e,  act  as  agents  between  tho  produc-^ 
ers  and  the  consumers  of  the  fruits  of  the  earth  ;  they  pnr- 
chase  them  of  the  former,  and  sell  them  to  the  latter  ;  and  i 
is  by  the  profits  on  the  salo  that  c  pital  so  ei>iployod  yields  ?, 
^eyenue  or  income,     Comgi^rce  or  t?ade  iacr<?a^c&  the  w??i.th 


yradesman's  guide.  tlof 

of  a  nation  ;  not  by  raising  produce,  like  agriculture,  nor  by 
working  up  raw  materials,  like  manufactures;  but  it  gives  an 
acldiiional  value  to  comiiiudities  by  bringing  ihem  from  places 
where  they  are  plentiful,  to  those  where  they  are  scarce  ; 
and  by  providing  the  means  for  their  more  extended  distribu- 
tion, both  the  agricultural  and  manufacturing  classes  ^re 
incited  to  greater  industry, 

Agrtcuhure,  never  arrives  at  any  considerable,  much  loss 
at  its  highest  degree  of  perfection,  where  it  is  not  connected 
with  trade;  that  is,  where  the  demand  for  the  produce  is  not 
increased  by  the  consumption  of  trading  cities.  Though  it 
should  be  remembered  that  agriculture  is  the  immediate 
source  of  human  provision  :  that  trade  conduces  to  the  pro- 
duction of  provision  only  as  it  prcmoles  agriculture  ;  and  that 
the  whole  system  of  commerce,  vast  and  various  as  it  is,  has' 
no  public  importance  but  its  subserviency  to  this  end. 

The  province  of  a  trader  is  not  so  contemptible  as  some 
would  affect  to  make  it.  Man}^  preler  to  educate  their  chil- 
dren fur  what  arc  called  the  professions,  as  law,  divinity,  and 
physic,  ratber  than  merchandise;  but  if  such  preferment  is 
merely  given,  as  a  most  likely  means  of  acquiring  either  hon- 
our, preferment,  or  riches,  we  will  be  enabled  to  convince 
them  in  this  chapter,  their  estimation  is  made  by  a  wrong 
standard. 

Solon,  a  philosopher  and  ruler  of  Athens  whose  fortune 
having  been  reduced  by  his  fathers,  asHermippus  informs  us, 
in  the  indulgence  of  his  great  and  munificent  spirit,  though 
he  might  have  been  siipported  by  his  friends,  yet  as  he  was 
of  a  fmiily  that  had  long  been  accustomed  to  assist  others,  he 
was  ashamed  to  accept  assistance  and  therefore  engaged  himself 
in  merchandize.  Some  however  have  written  that  this  prefer- 
ment was  merely  to  gratify  his  curiosity,  and  extend  his 
knowledge  rather  than  to  nnxke  a  fortune.  For  he  professed 
his  love  of  wisdom,  and  when  far  advanced  in  years  made 
this  doclaralion,  *'  I  grow  old  in  the  pursuit  of  learning." 
But  that  he  was  not  excessively  attached  to  wealth  we  may 
gather  from  the  following  verses — and  Plutarch  writes, 
*' the  truth  is,  that  Solou  was  never  rich;  it  ma^^  be,  because 
Hg  was  always  honest." 

Tho  man  that  boasts  of  golden  stores, 
Of  grain  that  loads  his  bending  floors, 
Of  fields  with  freshening  herbage  green, 

*22 


Where  bounding  steeds  and  heris  arc  scaa  ^ 
Icall  Dot  happier  than  tl  c  swain 
VVh' se  limbs  are  sound,  whose  faod  is  pluin, 
Whose  joys  a  biooriiing  wife  endears, 
Who»e  iiours  stsiiiihr^g  affdprino^  eheera. 

Pfutarch  furlher  states;  "It  is  evident  jfVom  the  wrhin^^ 
of  this  great  man  tliat  lie  was  u  person  not  only  of  exalted 
virtue,  but  of  a  pleasant  and  agreeabia  temper,  lie  consid- 
ered men  as  men  ;  and  keeping  both  their  capacity  for  vinue^ 
and  their  pnnjeness  to  evil  in  view,  adapted  his  laws  so  as  to 
strengthen  tbe  one,  and  to  check  and  regulate  the  othcn^" 

But  I  hat  Solon  desrred  to  be  rich  appears  from  the  follow- 
ing lines,  found  in  some  of  his  works. 

The  flovsr  of  riehes  I  deske, 

And  fain  would  life's  true  groods  aciqufrG  ;■ 

But  let  me  justiy  tht^ni  attcirj, 

lL.est  vengeance  follow  in  tlieir  train. 

A  good  man  and  indeed  a  valuable  merabrr  of  society^ 
should  neither  set  his  heart  upon  superfiuiiies  nor  reject  whaf 
is  necessary  and  convenient.  And  in  the  times  of  Solon  as 
Uosiod  states^  no  business  was  regarded  as  a  disparagenient, 
neiiher  did  any  trade  cause  a  disadvantageous  distinction^ 
The  profession  of  merchandize  was  honorable,  as  it  brought 
home  the  produce  of  barbarous  crimes,  engaged  the  friendshp, 
of  Kings,  and  opened  a  widt^  field  of  knowledge  and  experi- 
ence. Nay  some  merchants  have  been  founders  of  large 
cities. 

Protus,  for  instance,  who  biiiFt  Marserlles,  for  whom  the 
Gauls  about  the  Rhone  had  the  highest  esteem.  Thales  also 
and  Hippocrates  the  mathematician  are  saf«l  to  have  applied 
themselves  to  commerce  ;  and  the  oil  which  Plato  sold  \iv 
Egypt  defrayed  the  experrces  of  his  travels. 

It  is  related  that  the  interest  which  JE'hales  is  snid  to  have 
taken  in  traffic,  was  to  show  the  ease  with  which  riches  might 
be  acquired,  and  foreseeing  by  his  meteorological  ski-ll,  an 
abundant  crop  of  olives,  he  bought  the  whole  produce  before 
hand  and  made  an  immense  fortune  by  the  speculation. 

It  was  usual  to  trade  into  Egypt  with  iho  oil  of  Grc^ece  and  Judea 
It  is  said  in  the  prophet  Hopea  (XII,  I.)  "  Ephraim  carrieth  oil  into 
Eo-ypt."  This  indef-d  was  the  only  produce  of  Attica^  which  from  ils 
abundance,  S'^'lon  allowed  to  be  exported. 

The  celebrated  Mr.  Locke  ob^jorved,  that  trade  was  a  surer 
and  shorter  way  to  riches  than  any  other.     And  after  rccom- 


ftjenditig  people  to  bring  up  their  children  to  some  trade,  says, 
if  the  misiakeii  pareni,  tVighiened  with  the  lyj^mo  of  trade, 
shall  have  an  aversion  lo  any  thing  of  this  kind  jn  their  chil- 
dren, he  recommends  teachmg  them  merchants'  accounts,  as 
a  science  well  becoming  a.;y   gentleman. 

Lord  Bacon  has  observed,  '*  that  trade  enables  the  subject 
to  live  happily  and  plentifully,  that  the  country  was  much 
enriched  by  the  trade  of  merchandize,"  and  he  stiled  the 
inerchanis  *'  Vena  porta,^''  and  said,  "if  they  flourish  not,  a 
kingdom  mai'  have  good  limbs,  but  will  have  empty  veins,  and 
flourish  litde. 

The  learned  Bishop  of  Cambray,  said  of  the  Phosnicians, 
"trade  which  ihey  carry  to  the  fartherest  quarters  of  the 
earth,  has  so  enriched  them  that  they  surpass  the  most  flour- 
ishing people  in  glory." 

And  again,  instructing  Telemachus,  how  to  establish  a 
flourishing  trade  in  Ithaca,*  '  do  as  those  people,  receive  w^ith 
kindness  and  with  ease  all  strangers  ;  and  never  sufier  your- 
self at  any  time  to  be  overcome  wlih  pride  and  avarice.** 
Make  yourself  beloved  by  all  strangers ;  and  even  bear 
with  slight  inconveniences  from  them ;  keep  a  strict  hand 
over  the  fraud,  negligence,  and  vain  glory  of  the  merchants, 
which  ruins  commerce  in  ruining  the  traders  themselves." 
The  mercantile  station  aflfords  as  large  a  prospect  for  opwdent 
acquisitions,  and  estates  got  by  trade  have,  undoubtedly,  been 
far  more  numerous,  than  those  by  any  other  way  whatever. 
The  reVation  which  the  merchant  stands  in  to  community, 
is  not  inferior  to  any  in  point  of  importance.  Their  zealous 
attachment  to  their  country,  where  they  have  been  protected 
in  their  commerce,  can  be  fully  maintained.  History  fur- 
nishes remarkable  instances  of  this  fact.  We  sh.dl  only 
mention  a  few,  which  are  sufficient  to  endeaf  the  character 
of  a  merchant  to  every  nation. 

Charles  V.  Emperor  of  Germany  having  been  reduced  to 
great  distress  by  the  unhappy  expedition  of  Tunis,  expori 
enci:;d  a  powerful  aid  in  cash  from  the  Fuggers,  a  single  family 
of  merchants  only,  but  at  the  same  time  the  most  opulnnt 
and  distinguished  in  Augsburg.  To  give  a  demonstration  of 
their  zeal  to  the  interests  of  their  country,  and  their  inviola- 
ble attachment  to  his  majesty,  these  merchants  requested  the 
emperor,  one  day  as  he  was  taking  an  airing  by  their  house, 
to  do  them   the  Tionour  to  regale  himself.     When  the  colla- 


260  IPHE    ATITXST    AfCfi 

tlon  was  over,  tbey  desired  his  permission,  lo  burn  a  faggot  of 
cinnamon  in  the  hall,  where  the  entertainment  was  mad^e,  not 
only  with  intent  to  administer  all  they  could  to  his  delight, 
but  to  give  further  proof  of  th«>ir  affection  to  his  person  and 
government,  bound  up  those  bonds  of  security,  which  they 
had  taken  for  their  raone\%  with  the  taggot,  and  set  tire  to 
them  before  his  face. 

James  Coeur,  a  merchant  of  Bourges,  by  the  wisdom  of  his 
counsel,  and  the  certainty  of  his  cash,  liumbled  the  house  of 
Burgundy,  secured  the  crown  of  France  to  the  lawful  heir, 
Charles  VII.  and  by  hira  to  the  branches  of  Valois  and 
Bourbon,  who  succeeded. 

The  merchants  of  St.  Malo,  being  highly  exasperated  at 
the  demand  made  at  the  Congress  of  Gertruydensburg  to 
Lewis  XIV.  to  employ  his  troops  to  compel  his  grandson 
Philip  V.  then  King  of  Spain,  to  abondon  the  crown,  united 
all  their  profits  together,  which  the}'  had  made  in  the  Spanish 
Colonies  of  America,  and  produced  thirty-two  millhons  of 
gold  at  the  foot  of  the  throne  :  and  at  a  tinn?  when  the  finan- 
ces of  France  were  totally  exhausted  by  a  series  of  unsuccess- 
ful events.  This  succour  being  timely  applied,  vigorously 
renewed  the  war,  and  answered  the  wishes  of  the  nation. 

Sir  Thomas  Gresham,  the  founder  of  a  college  in  London, 
for  the  promotion  of  the  liberal  arts,  and  of  the  Royal  Ex- 
change, for  the  convenience  of  the  traders  of  the  metropolis, 
is  another  instance  of  the  ability  of  private  merchants  to  sup- 
port government  under  the  greatest  emergency.  This  worthy 
citizen  of  London  lived  in  the  time  of  Edward  VI.  'who  was 
considerably  indebted  to  the  nierchants  of  Antwerp,  for 
aioney  borrowed  to  supply  the  exigencies  of  the  state.  The 
payment  of  the  interest,  at  that  time,  being  considered  as 
most  likely  to  embarass  the  country,  many  expedients  were 
projected  by  the  king  and  council,  to  discharge  those  debts  : 
wJiich  were,  either  to  transport  so  much  treasure  out  of  the 
country,  as  would  liquidate  them,  or  remit  the  same  by  way 
of  exchange.  The  former  was  impracticable  without  being 
ruinous  to  trade;  and  on  account  of  the  difference  of  ex- 
change, the  latter  appeared  equally  perplexing.  Besides,  the 
creditors  insisted  on  their  money,  or  a  compliance  with  such 
usurious  terms,  as  would  have  brought  the  greatest  indignity 
ttpon  the  nation.  Under  these  circumstances.  Sir  Thomas 
yndertook  the  affair,  and  by  bis  great  knowledge  and  skill  in 


tradesman's  guide.  2dl 

the  exchanges,,exonerated  the  nation  from  the  incumbrance  ;■ 
and  by  which  iiegotiaiit.ns,  the  king  saved  not  less  than  an 
bundled  thousand  jiounds.  By  raising  the  exchange  in  fa- 
vour of  England  at  this  critical  time,  the  price  of  all  foreign 
commodities  fell  proportionably  ;  and  in  a  very  little  while 
between  three  and  lour  hundred  thousand  pounds  sterling 
more  was  saved  to  the  nation.  With  Queen  Elizabeth,  he 
was  in  so  high  esteem,  that  she  kn-ghted  him,  and  honoured 
him  in  every  respect,  and  came  in  person  lo  the  Exchange^ 
which  he  had  erected  for  the  convenience  of  merchants,  and 
the  htiuour  of  the  city  of  London,  and  caused  the  sumo  to 
be  proclaimed  by  heralds  and  a  trumpet,  the  Royal  Exchange^ 
and  Sir  Thomas  was  afterwards  honoured  by  the  appellation 
of  7'oyal  merchant. 

The  building  has  been  described  as  a  stately  pile,  which  was  burnt 
down  in  1666,  but  was  rebuilt,  aud  is  now  represented,  as  built  cf  tho 
most  beautiful  stone,  stupendous  and  elegant  arch  work,  all  ot' the  most 
curious  and  admirable  architeclnre,  tog<;ther  \\n\\  its  high  tow«r  in 
which  are  hung  a  harmonius  chime  of  twelve  bells  rendering  it  the 
noblest  structure  for  a  meeting  place  for  Uierchauls  in  the  world. 

Thomas  Sutton,  Esq.  another  distinguised  EnjiHsh  mer^ 
chant,  and  founder  of  the  Charter  House  in  London,  did  an 
act  of  benevolence  worthy  of  a  great  prince  a  i'ew  years  after 
the  d  jath  t>f  Sir  Thomas  Gresham,  in  being  the  grand  instru- 
ment of  getting  the  Spanish  bills  protested  at  Genoa,  which 
retarded  for  a  whole  year  the  sailing  of  the  Spanish  Armada^ 
designed  to  invade  England  ;  by  which  means  the  plan  was 
defeated.  Thus  we  learn  the  worth  of  some  privat<^  mer- 
chants ;  and  ahhough  great  statesmen,  admirals,  and  genera. s, 
with  the  aid  of  the  public  purse,  and  ten  iho.usands  to  co- 
operate with  them,  ma;-  perform  great  achievements,  yet  w© 
find  that  one  family  of  merchants  has  been  be  support  of  an 
em{)eror  in  great  distress;  ;*noiher  single  nierchant,  gave  the 
crown  to  the  house  of  Bourbon;  that  one  was  the  principal 
came  of  defeating  the  Spanish  Armada;  and  another^  the 
restorer  of  the  public  credit  of  England.  Nor  has  the  secu» 
rit}  of  states  and  empires  been  only  owing  to  the  occasionally 
zealous  exertions  of  the  wisdom  and  power  of  the  merchants, 
but  they  are  in  a  great  measure  the  daily  and  perpetual  sup- 
port of  all  trading  countries. 

For,  as  nations  are  at  present  circumstanced,  those  whicl^ 
ere  so  giutated,  subsisting  chiefly  within  themselves^  withoui 


262  THl    ARTXST    AJfO 

arty  intercourse  or  comiiierce  with  others,  can  never  be  able^ 
to  maintain' so  great  a  sluire  of  power,  as  those  which  carry 
on  an  extended  foreign  traffic.  Domestic  trade,  only  shifting 
property  from  hand  to  hand,  cannot  increase  the  riches  and 
power  of  a  nation  ;  whilst  foreign  trade  under  wise  Uiws  and 
regulations,  bringing  in  a  constant  balance  of  treasure  in  fa- 
vour of  a  nation,  w  ill  proportionably  augment  its  weight  of 
interest,  and  at  length  give  it  the  balance  of  power. 

Our  own  country,  though  in  commercial  infancy  can  boast 
of  many  specimens  of  mercantile  worth.  Who  has  not  heard 
of  the  private  and  public  virtues  which  adorned  the  charac- 
ter of  a  l^hillips,  a  Gray — and  though  it  is  not  fashionable  to 
eulogize  the  living,  still  we  cannot  forbear  adding  a  Gerard. 
Yes,  many,  very  man^r  famines,  many  widows  and  orphans, 
have  so  often  felt  iheir  charities,  that  exclusive  of  the  many 
great  and  important  services  which  they  huve  rendered  their 
country,  tables  of  stone  are  not  needed  to  tell  the  passing 
stranger,  '  the>-  went  about  doing  good.'  Truly,  are  not  such 
men  to  be  estimated  as  the  gold  and  silver,  the  most  intrinsic  if 
not  appreciated  coin  of  any  country — while  it  should  be  de- 
pricated  that  others  perhaps  of  equal  wealth,  like  the  Jew  in 
Shylock — live  only  to  count  their  encreased  gains,  and  throw 
a  deadly  blast,  throughout  every  legion  which  becomes  sub- 
ject to  their  sweeping  a?arice,  or  unhallowed  disposition — 
What  a  fit  subject  f^r  the  artist  pencil ! 

The  merit  of  persons  of  distinguished  character  in  tr^vde, 
cannot,  in  general,  be  measured  by  those  who  ar«  not  well 
acquainted  with  trading  negotiations;  as  they  pass  through 
life  without  much  noise,  the  world  is  little  acquainted  w^ith 
their  important  services  and  utility  to  th«  state. 

Whilst  the  histories  of  great  public  capacities  are-trans- 
mitted to  posterity  with  all  the  pomp  and  magnificence  of  rep- 
resentation :  yet  certainly  that  is  one  of  the  most  profitable 
admonitions,  which  is  drawn  fi'om  the  eminent  virtues  of  niftn, 
who  move  in  a  sphere  nearer  levelled  to  the  common  reach, 
than  that  which  is  derived  fromjhe  splendid  portrait  r>f  the 
transactions  and  victories  of  gy^Qt  s-atesman  and  jomman- 
ders,  which  serve  but  for  the  imitation  of  few,  and  aim  rath- 
■  er  for  osrentation,  than  for  the  true  ins! ruction  of  human 
life.  It  was  from  the  practice  and  example  of  private  con- 
dition, that  we  are  more  naturally  taught  to  excel  in  our  pri- 
yat©  capacities  ;  and,  bad  we  the   genuine  Ijistories  of  many 


omiiient  merchants,  giving  a  lively  idea  of  their  rise  and 
progress  in  business,  aud  of  the  impt^rtant  service  they  have 
bean  lo  their  respective  communities,  they  would  naturally 
incite  the  trading  class  of  Ci)mmLiir!ty  to  emulate  their  accom- 
plishments: and  ihis  v/oiild  prove  a  more  effectual  means  to 
produce  a  race  of  skilful  traders,  tlian  romantic  narratives  of 
a  iaco  oi'  heroes. 

The  philosopher  may  arrive  to  a  high  pitch  of  improve- 
ment in  agriculture,  arts  and  sciences;  the  husbandman,  aj'ti- 
san  and  manufacturer,  may  reduce  this  speculative  knowledge 
to  practical  uses,  with  the  greatest  skill  and  dexterity  on 
their  paris  ;  governments  may  enact  the  wisest  laws,  and 
give  all  desirable  encouragement  to  commence,  yet  what 
will  these  avail  without  the  penetration  and  sagacity  of  th« 
merchant,  to  propagate  the  produce  of  our  lands,  and  the 
labour  of  our  artists  and  manufacturers  into  foreign  coun- 
tries, with  advantage  to  the  state  as  well  as  to  himself? 

Sir  F.  Brewsier^  an  eminent  English  merchant,  observed  , 
*'  we  see  how  all  tiie  arts  and  science  have  improved  in  this 
country,  with  in  the  compass  of  one  century,  but  amongst  them 
all  the  merchant's  part  the  least."  And  further,  that  any 
countryman  but  our  own,  would  be  astonished  to  ob- 
serve more  heads  engaged  in  Westminster  hall,  to  divide  the 
gains  of  the  nation  than  there  are  heads  on  the  Exchange 
to  gather  it.  And  further,  he, says,  *'  I  think  it  a  moral-dis- 
temper that  so  fow  men  of  classical  learning  are  educated  to 
practical  commerce:  for  there  is  scarcely  a  boy,  whom  a 
country  school  master  flatters,  because  he  learns  his  grammar 
well,  whose  kindred  do  not  think  it  a  pity  so  hopeful  a  youth 
should  be  lost  in  trade,  and  that  the  university  is  the  only  fit 
soil  for  him  to  be  planted  in." 

We  do  not  introduce  these  remarks  of  Sir  Francis  as  appli- 
cable to  this  country,  for  v/e  do  rejoice  in  the  belief  that  its 
mercantile  character  is  increasing  in  dignity,  that  young  men 
of  the  most  promising  talents  are  embai  king  in  meichandize, 
and  that  the  feeling  which  hitherto  was  so  unnaturally  excit- 
ed against  it,  has  nearly  subsided. 

Wd  believe  that  there  is  a  dignity  or  as  some  will  have  it 
a  respectability  of  character  to  be  sustained  in  all  professions; 
though — 

'*  It  is  a  matter  of  curious  investigation,  to  examine  the  dis- 
tinctions which  society  has  made,  amongst  the  different  traded 


564  "  THE    ARTIST   A^D 

and  professions.  *  A  saint  in  crape  is  twico  a  saint  in  lavvij^* 
says  Pope  ;  and  yet  he  teils  us,  '  that  hone  r  aiul  shame  from 
no  condition  rise  ,'  the  latter  is  true  by  the  laws  of  nature  ; 
the  former  by  the  usages  of  society. 

Whether  a  lawyer  is  more  respectable  than  a  doctor,  or  a 
merchant  than  a  farmer,  is  a  question  that  has  not  yet  been 
settled  by  her  high  mightiness,  Fashion  ;  but  with  respect  to 
the  different  pursuits  of  trade,  she  has  drawn  the  distinction, 
having  consulted  neither  reason  or  rhyme,  and  governs  solely 
by  her  own  whims.  A  butcher,  for  instance,  is  considered 
as  superior  to  a  baker  ; — and  wliy  1  They  both  cater  for  the 
appetite  of  man:  one  furnishes  the  slaughtered  calf,  and 
the  other  the  generous  grain,  which  alike  support  life  ;  one 
deals  in  fire,  and  the  otlier  in  sword  ;  are  they  not  on  a  part 
A  shoemaker  is  more  respectable  than  a  cobbler; — why  1  one 
makes  your  shoes,  and  the  other  mends  them — they  both  use 
awls  and  waxed  ends;   w'ijei»e  is  the  difference  ] 

"  Is  a  hatter  more  exalted  thin  a  tailor?  The  one  covers 
^  the  dome  of  thought,  the  palace  of  the  soul  1'  his  vocation  is 
certainly  of  the  head  ;  he  surmounts  the  crown  ;  but  then  the 
tailor  adorns  the  graceful  form  and  manly  chest  ;  the  waist- 
coat that  he  makes  covers  the  heart,  the  seat  of  sensation  and 
the  abode  of  passioi].  He  makes  yo'"^!  either  a  gentleman  or 
a  clown,  according  to  his  will.  You  are  at  his  mercy  wiih 
regard  to  the  fit  of  your  habilimonts  and  the  effect  of  your  ap- 
pearance in  Broadway.  Thus  extensive  is  his  power  ;,  and 
is  not  power  respectability  I  A  milliner  is  more  respt-jcted  in 
society  than  a  mantua-maker  ;  the  one  makes  hats  *and  the 
other  dresses.  Why  is  a  female  hatter  greater  than  a  female 
tailor *?  Why  is  a  grocer  considered  inferior  to  a  seller  of  dry 
goods  ?  Is  not  a  bottle  of  mustard  as  respectable  as  a_yard  of 
tape  1  Is  not  a  pound  of  cheese  as  honourable  as  a  paper  of 
pins]  A  bunch  of  onions  as  a  skein  of  thread  !  Is  not  su- 
gar equal  to  broadcloth,  and  molasses  to  ginghams  1  Cer- 
tainly'. 

"Again,  whv  is  a  .saddler  ^iperior  1o  a  shoemaker?  I|g 
covers  the  backs  of  horses,  while  the  latter  covers  the  feet  of 
men.  And  is  not  the  foot  of  lordl>  man  and  lovely  woman, 
an  object  of  greater  moment  than  th^  back  of  Eclipse  himself? 
Howand  why  then  are  these  distinctions  made?  It  is  e^^siev 
to  ask  than  to  answer  the  question  ;  to  do  the  latter,  surpasses 
Qur  wisdom.     i]ut  are  these  distinctions  reasonable  and  uatt? 


TRADESMAN'S    GUIDE.  2^65 

rai  1  No.  Honest  industry  is  alike  respectable  in  every  voca- 
tion. '  The  faithful  mason,  who  piles  one  brick  upon  another^ 
is  the  equal  of  him  who  makes  the  bricks,  or  him  who  burns 
the  lime  which  is  used  in  making  the  mortar;  [and  we  may 
add,  or  him  for  whose  comfort  his  labour  is  destined  to  effect.] 
The  industrious  mechanic  is  the  prop  of  society,  and  so  long 
as  he  labours  diligently  and  honestly  in  his  occupation,  he  is 
entitled  to  respectability  and  he  will  receive  it."  Neverthe- 
less, it  must  be  acknowledged,  and  to  the  degradation  of  hu- 
man nature  be  it  said,  there  are  many  in  all  professions,  dis- 
honouring them  by  the  flattery  of  some,  and  their  own  unnat- 
mal  conceit. 

Channels  and  Progress  of  Trade.  England  possesses 
30,000  miles  of  roads,  nearly  4,000  miles  of  canals,  and  about 
300  miles  of  railways.  France,  which  is  more  than  twice  as 
extensive,  does  not  afford  above  45,000  miles  of  roads,  1500 
miles  of  canals,  114  miles  of  railways^  of  which  latter  78  are 
still  in  a  course  of  completion. 

The  amount  of  Tobacco  imported  into  Great  Britain  the 
last  year  was  33,0000,000,  twenty-two  of  which  was  from 
America,  and  almost  exclusively  in  American  shipping. 

WhaU  Ships.  The  ship  Pacific,  recently  from  the  Pacificj 
has  arrived  at  New  Bedford  with  about  3,000  barrels  of  whale 
oil,  which  is  considered  to  be  the  largest  quantity  of  sperma- 
ceti oil,  ever  obtained  in  a  twenty-six  months  voyage. 

C'Qal.  Thirty-five  thousand  three  hundred  and  sixty-t\ra 
tons  have  been  discharged  at  Philadelphia,  the  present  sea- 
son, brought  down  the  Schuylkill.  The  amount  of  coal  sent 
down  the  Lehigh  is  4,956  tons.  And  it  is  hoped  99,000  ton» 
will  be  received  in  that  city  before  navigation  closes.  Only 
a  few  years  since  we  were  dependent  on  England  for  this  va- 
luable article. 

Tea.  The  first  order  of  the  East  India  Company  to  their 
agents  in  India,  for  the  importation  of  tea,  appears  to  havo 
been  made  1667,  and  is  in  these  words: — "  To  send  home  by 
these  ere  ships,  100  lbs.  weight  of  the  best  Tea  you  can  yet." 
The  quantity  put  up  for  sale  by  the  Company  at  their  quar- 
terly sales  in  June,  1829,  was  7,800,000  lbs.  ;'  and  at  the  pre- 
ceding sales  of  September,  December,  and  March,  7,900,000^ 
800,000,000  and  900,000,000.  The  duty  to  government  the 
last  year  was  £3,283,202-  -considerably  more  than  was  pro- 
duced by  any  other  article  of  consumption  in  England. 

2» 


^66  THE    ARTIST    ANb 

Depression  of  Trade.  The  following  article  extracted  from 
a  Boston  paper  is  worthy  of  lieing  read  with  attention  as  ap- 
plicable to  the  present  times. 

*'  The  truth  unfortunately  is,  we  have  been  Uving  beyond 
our  circumstances.  The  laudable  economy  and  industrious 
liabits  of  our  ancestors,  hare  been  lost  sight  of,  and  we  havo 
yielded  up  to  the  pleasing,  but  dangerous  innovation  of  foreign 
luxuries,  and  their  attendant  habits.  We  must  measure  back 
our  ground.  There  is  no  other  coursp  which  we  can  now 
pursue  with  any  hope  of  success:  The  flame  must  again  be 
kindled  on  the  altar  of  patriotism  ;  and  self  denial  and  rigid 
economy  take  the  place  of  luxury  and  extravagance.  The 
nerves  of  our  eff«minate  young  men  must  be  strengthened  by 
toil,  and  our  females,  instead  of  reclining  on  the  sofa,  and 
humming  over  the  piano,  must  learn  to  direct  their  attention 
to  matters  of  more  importance.  They  must  shake  off,  an  un- 
worthy the  daughters  of  freemen,  the  tinsel  of  fashion,  and 
the  shackle  of  false  refinement,  and  clierish  the  proud  and 
sterling  patriotism  of  their  grand  mothers." 

Manufactures  are  the  arts  by  which  natural  productions  are 
bronght  into  the  state  or  form  in  which  they  are  consu^raed 
or  used.  They  require  in  general  great  expenses  for  their 
first  establishment,  costly  machines  for  shortening  manual  la- 
bour, and  money  and  ciedit  for  purchasing  materials  from  dis- 
tant countries.  There  is  not  a  single  manufacture  in  Great 
Britain  which  does  not  require,  in  some  part  of  its  process, 
productions  from  different  parts  of  the  globe.  It  requires, 
therefore,  ships,  and  a  friendly  intercourse  with  foreign  nations, 
to  transport  commodities  and  exchange  productions.  They 
would  not  be  a  manufacturing,  unless  they  were  a  commercial 
nation.  The  two  sciences  which  most  assist  the  manufactuer, 
are  mechanics  and  chemistry  ;  the  one  for  building  mills, 
%vorking  mines,  and  in  general  for  constructing  machines, 
either  to  shorten  the  labour  of  man  by  performing  it  in  less 
time,  or  to  perform  what  the  strength  of  man  alone  could  not 
accomplish  ;  the  other  for  fusing  and  working  ores,  dying,, 
bleaching,  and  extracting  tho  virtues  of  various  substances  for 
particular  occasions. 

It  must  be  observed  that  though  a  farmer  does  not  sq  fre- 
quently and  rapidly  a^Dass  wealth  as  a  merchant  or  ir/anufac- 
turer,  yet  neither  i.^  he.so  often  ruined.  The  risks  a  jaan  en- 
counters  in  trad^C  are  much  greater  than  in  fannbo?,     Th^ 


tradesman's  guidk.  267 

tnanufacturer  as  well  as  the  raorchant  is  liable  to  severe  losse^i 
arising  from  contingencies  in  trade ;  they  both  must  there- 
fore haT€  a  chance  of  making  proportionably  greater  profits. 
The  chances  of  gain  must  balance  the  chance  of  loss.  If  he 
be  so  skilful  or  so  fortunate  as  to  make  more  than  his  arerage 
share  of  gain,  he  will  accumulate  wealth  with  greater  rapidity 
than  the  farmer  ;  but  should  either  a  deficiency  of  talents  or 
unfortunate  circumstances  occasion  an  uncommon  share  of 
losses,  he  may  become  a  bankrupt.  The  rate  of  profits,  there- 
fore, upon  any  employment  of  capital,  is  proportioned  to  the 
risks  with  which  it  is  attended  ;  but  if  calculated  during  a  suf- 
ficient period  of  time,  and  upon  a  sufficient  number  of  instance* 
to  afford  an  average,  these  different  modes  of  employing  cap- 
ital, will  be  found  to  yield  similar  profits.  It  is  owing  to  this 
that  the  distribution  of  capital  to  the  several  branches  of 
agriculture,  commerce,  and  manufactures,  preserves  a  due 
equilibrium,  which,  though  it  may  be  accidentally  disturbed, 
cannot  whilst  allowed  to  pursue  its  natural  course,  be  perma- 
nently deranged. 

An  abundant  harvest  may  occasionally  raise  the  rate  of 
agricultural  profits,  or  a  very  bad  session  may  reduce  them 
below  their  level. 

The  opening  a  trade  with  a  new  country,  or  the  breaking 
out  of  a  r/ar,  which  impedes  foreign  commerce,  will  effssct  the 
profits  of  the  merchant  and  manufacture  :  but  these  accidents 
disturb  the  equal  rate  of  profits,  as  the  wind  disturbs  the  sea  ; 
and  when  they  cease,  it  returns  to  its  natural  level. 

The  division  of  labour  has  tended  greatly  to  improve  every 
branch  of  manufactures.  Its  utility  is  exemplifiedfin  the  manu-.^ 
facture  of  pins.  If  a  piece  of  metal  wer»  given  to  a  man  to  make  ' 
a  pin,  he  could  scarcely  do  it  in  a  day.  In  pin  manufactories, 
howerer,  each  pin  passes  through  twenty-five  hands  ;  one 
draws  out  the  wire,  another  straightens  it,  another  cuts,  an- 
other points  it,  three  or  fonr  prepare  the  head,  two  or  three 
puis  it  on,  &c.  Twenty-five  persons  thus  make  a  hundred  and 
twenty-five  thousand  pins  in  a  day,  or  fiv©  thousand  to  each 
person.  Labour  likewise  divides  itself  numerously  in  every 
branch  of  the  elegant  and  useful  arts,  as  in  building,  the  arts 
A^onnected  in  furnishing  a  house,  in  branches  connected  with 
the  clothing  of  a  man,  in  the  iron  and  metallic  trades,  and  in 
jponnexion  with  books  and  literature. 

^  pack  of  wool  weighing  240  pounds  employs  200  personal 


!26S  THE    AIITIST   AND 

before  it  is  ready  for  sale,  in  the  form  of  stuflfs,  cloths,  &,c; 
To  be  mude  into  rtockmgs,  it  will  occupy  184  persons  for  a 
week  ;  as  len  cumbers,  one  hunired  spinners,  winders,  &,c. 
sixiy  weavers  or  stocking  makers,  besides  dyers,  pressers,  «&c. 
A  sword  made  of  steel,  the  or'jjjinnl  metal  of  which  was  not 
wonh  a  shilling,  is  sometimes  sold  for  300  guineas  ;  and  a 
watch  chain  has  produced  fifty-guineas,  the  metal  of  which 
before  it  was  wrought,  was  not  worth  three  pence.  So  like- 
wise, a  painting,  not  tw<»  yards  square,  has  been  valued  at  25, 
000  pounds  sterling;  and  a  shawl,  which  contained  but  a  few 
ounces  of  wool,  has  been  said  to  bring  150  guineas.  As  it  is 
with  individuals,  s>»  it  is  with  nations.  What  one  possesses  in 
superfluity,  it  is  desirous  (o  exchanso  for  some  article  it  wants, 
wirh  any  other  naiion  which  possesses  that  superfluity. 

The  Phoenicians,  or  Philistines  were  the  first  people  on 
record,  who  emnl<»yed  ships  lo  carry  the  province  and  manu- 
factures of  one  nation  to  another.  They  were  followed  by 
the  Canliagenians ;  and  these  by  the  Venetians,  Genoese 
and  Hanse  Towns.  The  United  Stares  of  America,  with  the 
advantage  of  the  possession  of  raw  materials  of  every  kind, 
are  rapidly  advancing  in  ihe  manufacturing  system;  having 
numerous  fine  ports  and  ships,  and  a  trade  extended  to  all 
parts  of  the  world,  witli  these  advantages  connected  with  the 
enterprise,  perseverance  and  industry  of  our  merchants,  manu- 
facturers and  mechanics,  who  can  doubt  the  time  is  not  far 
distant,  when  this  country  will  rival  every  other  on  the  whole 
face  of  the  globe  in  commerce  and  manufactures. 

Progress  of  Manufactures, — Lote  discoveries  S^c. 

Flint  Stone  Ware,  The  manufacture  of  this  article  is  very 
extensively  carried  on,  by  Mr.  Hi^nderson  of  Jersey  City, 
opposite  New^York.  It  is  equal  to  the  besit  English  and  Scotch 
stone  ware,  and  will  be  supplied  to  the  trade  at  33  1-3  per. 
ct.  less,   than  like  foreign  articles,  when  imported. 

China  Ware,  Beautifuny  painied  and  enammelled,  is 
now  extensively  manufactured  at  Philadelphia  by  Mr.  Tuc- 
ker^ who  hits  been  struggling  With  many  difllculties  for  a  long 
time,  but  at  length  as  we  are  informed,  basso  far  overcome 
them  as  to  produce  very  superior  articles  at  moderate  prices* 

Iron.  The  quantity  of  this  metal  manufactured  in  Frank- 
lin, Venango  county,  Pa.  in  18?8,  l600  tons,  of  bloom,  200 
ipnsj  of  h^r  iron  lOQ  tons.     The  pig  metal  sold  at  Fittsburgj 


Tradesman's  ouide.  !26f 

Wheeling  and  Steubenville  at  from  35  to  40  dollars  pr.  ton^ 
The  blo*>ms  at  Pittsburg  $100  pr.  ton,  and  the  bar  iron  atjhe 
the  works,  at  from  |125  to  $140  pr.  ton. 

Several  ne'vV  turnaces  are  erecting  it  is  said  m  the  county 
and  the  demand  rapidly   increasing. 

A  Furnace  with  proper  management  will  make  from  800 
to  1000  tons  per  annum,  at  an  expence  of  from  $22  to  $2& 
per  ton,  according  to  the  price  of  provision  ;  and  with  the  ore, 
timber,  6^c,  convenient  and  good  at  about  from  13  to  20 
dollars. 

Under  proper  management  and  good  materials,  a  furnace 
will  clear  at  present  prices,  ten  thousand  dollars  per  annum. 

Lead  and  Silver  Mines.  A  lead,  or  rather  silver  mine  has 
recently  been  discovered  in  the  Town  of  Eaton  in  New 
Hampshire.  A  shaft  has  been  sunk  into  the  mine  50  feet  be- 
low the  surface,  and  a  horizontal  excavation  running  from  the 
bottom  about  50  feet  more,  has  been  made. 

The  ore  already  raised  amounts  to  several  hundred  tons, 
the  expence  of  obtaining  which,  does  not  exceed  3  or  $4000 
and  from  several  analyses  of  different  kinds  of  the  ore,  then 
were  found  to  be  from  90  to  120  ounces  of  pure  silver  to  the 
ton. 

It  is  understood  to  be  owned  principally  b}^  a  company  of 
gentlemen  in  Boston  and  Baltimore. 

Upper  Mississippi  L^ad  Mines,  Congress  seeing  that  im- 
mense quantities  of  lead  were  made  and  could  be  manufac- 
tured In  these  mines,  and  those  below,  sufficient  for  home  con- 
sumption, very  justly  added  to  the  duties  which  had  already 
been  imposed  on  lead,  a  per  centum  amply  sufficient  to  pro- 
hibit any  further  importation.  This  law  passed  in  the  win- 
ter of  1828,  but  took  effect  not  until  the  following  October. 
During  this  interim,  advantages  were  taken  by  the  British 
merchants  and  large  quantities  of  lead  were  imported  into  the 
United  States,  nearly  enough  for  one  year's  supply ;  and 
since  the  law  took  effect,  about  eight  millions  pounds  of  lead 
in  the  ore  have  been  imported  from  the  mines  of  Spain,  and 
smelted  in  the  United  States.  This,  added  to  the  unusual 
quantity  brought  between  the  time  of  the  passing  of  the  law 
above  mentioned,  and  its  taking  effect,  together  with  the  im- 
mense quantity  manufactured  in  our  mines  during  the  same 
period,  every  man  must  perceive  would  fill  our  markets  with 
a  surplus,  which  readily  accounts  for  the  sudden  depreciatioa 

23* 


STO  THE    AllTrsf   AMD 

in  the  price  of  lead.  Instructions  have  been  given  to  th« 
custom  ho^se  officers  in  the  eastern  cities,  to  charge  an  equi- 
valent duty  on  imported  lead  ore.  Hence,  that  mode  of  im- 
porting lead  is  at  an  end  ;  so  we  may  now  safely  calculate 
that  we  can  supply  our  own  country,  at  least,  from  our  own 
mines.  The  diminution  in  our  manufacture  in  consequence 
of  the  low  price  of  lead,  will  no  doubt  before  another  year, 
render  that  article  very  scarce  in  the  eastern  markets.  There 
will  not  during  the  present  year,  be  one  eighth  the  quantity 
made,  that  tliere  \vas  during  the  two  preceding.  Then 
deduct  seven-eights  from  the  quantity  usually  made  at  our 
own  mines,  and  all  that  has  been  in  our  markets  during  the 
last  year  or  two,  and  wo  can  form  some  idea  of  the  future 
state  of  the  market.  The  consumption  of  lead  in  the  United 
States,  according  to  the  best  data  which  has  come  under  our 
observation,  amounts  to  about  26,000,009,  of  which  more 
than  half  of  that  quantity  for  the  last  year  has  been  imported  ; 
and  duiing  the  same  jjeriod  there  were  about  10,000  miners 
in  the  Uoper  Mississippi  actively  engaged  in  the  manufacture 
of  lead.  It  is  not  strange  then,  that  such  extraordinary  exer- 
tions of  our  own  industrious  citizens,  and  the  strong  efforts  of 
foreigners  to  crowd  lead  into  our  maikets,  should  produce  a 
temporary  stagnation  in  this  trade.  But  these  two  powerful 
causes  have  been  removed  ;  and  it  must  and  will  as  suddenly 
rise  as  it  has  fallen,  the  expressed  opinion  of  speculators  to 
the  contrary  notwithstanding. 

JPenhiife  Manufactory.  Mr.  Moses  L.  Morse,  an  ingeni- 
ous mechanic,  and  the  inventor  of  several  valuable  machines, 
has  commenced  the  manufjcture  of  Penfenives  in  Worcester, 
Mass.  and  intends  t3  employ  50  hands,  they  are  well  made, 
with  a  high  polish,  and  ilnless  examined  very  closely,  it  wpuld 
be  diflicnlr  to  distinguish  them  from  the  English  knives 

Ingenious  Discover}/.  A  Mr.  Neilson  of  the  Glasgow  gas 
works,  has  recently  obtained  a  patent  for  an  apparatus,  which 
discharges  air  and  promotes  combustion  in  fire  furnaces,  by 
being  heated  before  it  is  thrown  into  them.  A  series  of  ex- 
periments has  been  going  on  for  sometime  on  founders  cupa- 
los,  and  in  the  blast  furnace  of  Clyde  iron  works,  as  stated  in 
the  Baltimore  Gazette,  where  one  furnace  has  been  blown 
with  great  advantage  by  means  of  heated  aii,  and  where  other 
two  blast  furnace  are  ready  to  be  blown  in  the  same  way. 

It  is  completely  ascertained    that  a  great  saving  of  fuel  is 


'TRADESIMAn's  fiVWE.  f  71 

Accomplished  ,besides,  sanguine  hopes  are  entertained,  that  the 
same  work  will  be  done  with  a  less  quantity  of  air.  This  dis- 
covery will  effect  a  great  revolution  in  the  theory,  as  well  as 
practice  of  combustion. 

Screw  Manufactory.  Mi\  Cobb  of  Albany,  has  recently 
made  great  improvements  in  the  machinery  for  the  manufac  ture 
of  this  important  article.  We  believe  this  gentleman  was  the 
first  who  introduced  the  manufacture  of  wood  screws  into.tliis 
country;  though  it  has  been  claimed  by  a  Mr.  Slowell  of 
Massachusetts.  lie  is  certainly  entitled  to  much  credit  not 
only  as  a  scientific  but  practical  mechanic.  If  improvements 
equally  as  valuable  are  made  in  every  branch  in  this  country; 
our  manufactured  goods  will  be  pieferred,  and  the  English 
manufacturer  will  find  his  articles  no  longer  sought  l^or  in  this 
qnarter  of  the  globe. 

Machinery  for  breaking  and  dressing  Flax  and  Hemp, 
The  following  is  a  description  taken  from  the  Asylum  of  Arts 
in  France,  b}'  a  gentleman  friendly  to  the  agricultural  industry 
of  the  United  States. 

"  This  machine  was  invented  by  a  French  gentleman,  under 
the  offered  bounty  of  Napoleon  of  1,200,000  franks,  about 
the  year  1814,  description  as  follo\^'s  :  50  to  88  pairs  of  fluted 
rollers,  the  top  roller  hiding  them  of  the  bottom,  and  each 
pair  lying  b3^  the  side  of  each  other,  so  closely  as  not  to  receive 
the  Ilax  or  hemp  from  one  pair  to  the  other,  untill  it  passes 
through  the  whole  range.  At  the  end  of  every  bottom  roller, 
there  are  pinion  wheels,  and  wheels  at  right  angles  to  drive 
them,  an-l  the  latter  set  in  motion  by  the  former  given  at  the 
head  of  the  machine.  The  top  rollers  are  lever  weighted  on 
the  bottom  rollers,  and  the  latter  gives  motion  to  the  former, 
by  the  said  motion  at  the  head  of  the  njachine.  The  rollers 
lie  in  a  horizontal  position,  their  ends  leaning  or  resting  in 
stands,  and  their  whole  range  forming  a  level  flat  surface  up- 
on the  top,  as  well  as  the  bottom.  The  niachine  has  two 
openings,  one  for  feeding  and  the  other  for  recieving  the 
hemp  after  dressed,  &C. 

It  is  said  that  the  machine  will  breaii  and  dress  2000  lbs. 
pr.  day  and  will  take  10  hands  to  tend  it  to  advantage." 

AVe  have  a  promise  from  the  same  source,  of  shortly  having 
a  description  of  the  Linen  spinning,  *'  although  complicated 
with  needles  and  rollers,  yet  it  may  answer  on  small  scales." 
^*  Ic  appears"  says  he,  "  has  never  been  effected  to  that  sin  - 


57^  "^HK   AflTiS'T   AN9 

plicilv,  and  fac'lity  of  operation,  as  that  of  cotton,  and  if  evei* 
found  oat  it  uuist  be  by  an  Atiierican,  as  centuries  have  pas- 
sed away  in  Europe  vvi>iiout  the  discovery.**' 

Perpetual  Motion,  A  Mr.  Brigh  ini  has  recently  appeared 
at  Cincinnati,  as  the  discoverer  of  the  perpetual  motion— 
which  is  *'  a  ppndulum  set  in  motion  by  a  magnet,  and  ap- 
pears admirably  calculated  for  clock  work,  and  we  Can  see 
no  cause  why  it  should  not  continue  to  go  so  long  as  the  ma- 
terials of  which  it  is  made  shall  last.  It  is  well  won  by  the 
attention  of  the  carious,  partii  ularly  these  skilled  ui  mechan- 
ics." 

Tarlcey  Red.  The  use  i^f  Turkey  red  in  calico  printing 
has  been  successfully  introdund  at  Lowell.  Tlie  Fiench 
have  hmg  had  an  advantage  of  the  English  in  the  employment 
of  this  c<dour. 

We  should  notice  many  other  important  and  useful  inven- 
tions, if  our  limits  permitted,  which  we  design  to  do  at  some 
future  period  in  another  ed  tion  of  this  work,  not  onl}^  noticing 
every  recent  improvement  in  this  country,  but  also,  in  Europe, 
so  far  as  our  knowledge  nirty  extend. 

On  the  reported  distress  among  the  manufacturers^  we 
think  the  following  remarks  with  some  slight  alterations,  wor- 
thy of  insertion,  from  Nile's  Register: — 

Perhaps  Jhere  is  no  cla's  of  community  more  sinned  against 
than  the  manuficturers.  They  are  represented  as  may  best 
suit  their  enemies — as  overgrown  capitalists,  living  on  the 
labour  of  the  poor,  as  needy  adventurers  who  may  involve 
the  whole  countiy  in  ruin. 

Wln\e  it  must  be  admitted  that  m?iny  branches  of  those 
manufactures  have  not  been  profitablo  far  some  time  past — it 
appears  to  be  manifest  that  the  difficulties  under  which  the 
eastern  manufacturers  have  laboured  wert'  consummat-dd  by  a 
sudden  and  ruinous  contraction  of  the  circulating  medium  in 
that  quarter  ;  for  it  is  no  less  remarkable  than  true,  that  oth- 
ers, less  favourably  circumstanced,  have,  with  apparent  ease, 
resisted  or  repelled  this  pressure,  and  maintained  a  full  ana 
uninterrupted  operation,  in  the  midst  of  sacrifices  of  goods 
by  forced  sales.  But,  if  they  can  "  keep  steady''  a  little 
while,  time  enough  to  permit  the  business  to  settle  down  into 
its  natural  state,  as  it  must,  all  will  be  well,  and  an  enlivening 
circulation  soon  be  felt  and  enjoyed. 

No  one  thinks  of  proclaiming  through  the  land  the  misfor- 


TllADESMAN^S    GUIDE  27S 

tunes  ot  the  merchant,  when  arrested  in  his  business — unlessr 
influenced  with  a  spirit  of  deep  felt  sympathy  and  accommo- 
dation— and  this  is  as  it  should  be — but  on  the  other  band, 
when  the  manufacturer  fails,  all  sorts  of  dogs  of  British  breed 
are  let  loose  upon,  bark  at  him,  and  would  bite  his  heels  if 
they  dared.  Their  noise,  however  adds  to  t'le  difficulties  en- 
countered, and  hence  forced  sales  of  property,  and  the  neces- 
sity of  curtailing  the  progress  of  expenditure.  But  such  things 
have  happened  before.  They  cannot  be  altogether  avoided, 
even  by  the  most  prudent,  and  especially  so  long  as  our  com- 
mercial intercourse  is  so'intimate  with  the  old  world,  particu- 
larly Great  Britain  :  for  a  pressure  in  Laucastershiro  or 
Yorkshire  reaches  the  United  States  almost  as  soon,  and  with 
nearly  the  same  force,  as  it  reaches  the  southern  or  more  nor- 
thern counties  of  thai  small  island  ;  and  our  market  is  made 
the  last  resort  of  desperate  speculators,  insolvent  persons,  or 
for  closing  up  concerns  ;  which  it  is  desired  to  accomplish 
speodily,  though  attended  with  loss.  And  whenever  a  pres- 
sure comes  upon  us,  there  is  a  sudden  reduction  of  the  circu- 
lating medium — the  bank  of  the  United  States  gathers  in  its 
strength,  and  the  state  banks  reserve  their's  for  self  preser- 
vation, and  individuals  whose  credit  was  good  for  thousands 
yesterday,  may  be  unable  to  raise  a  few  hundred  dollars  to- 
morrow ;  and  the  failure  of  one  person  to  fulfil  his  engage- 
ments, proceeds  through  a  community  to  an  incalculable  ex- 
tent— reaching  the  most  wealthy  as  well  as  the  poorest  ot  the 
labouring  classes — though  some  districts  are  more  effected  by 
such  actions  and  reactions  than  others. 

AIJ  manufacturers  at  the  present  time,  arc  effected  in  some 
degree,  by  the  general  dullness  of  business.  We  believe  that 
the  cotton  business  will  very  soon  revive,  and  hope  that  all 
will  be  encouraged  to  hold  their  ground,  notwithstanding  we 
are  informed  many  "  respectable  establishments  have  ceased 
their  usual  business,"  neither  be  alarmed,  though  much  is  said 
*'  of  reduced  prices"  and  "  pinching  times"  and  "  scarcity  of 
money" — for  such  things  have  been  said,  if  not  felt,  before — 
and  unless  it  be  in  the  growth  and  manufacturer  of  wool, 
there  is  good  reason  to  believe  that  the  storm  will  speedily 
pass  over  ;  and  in  respect  to  thos^j  important  branches,  any 
change  \r  th©  present  condition  of  Europe  must  operate  ad- 
vantageously for  them  ;  for  *'  when  things  get  to  their  worst^^ 
\\iey  must  mend,"     Th©  long  continued  state  of  peace  among 


^74  THE   AUTIST   AN1> 

the  nations  with  whom  we  have  the  most  iotimato  cdnnec- 
tions,  after  such  a  long  period  of  war,  has  not  oiiiy  ni^terially 
altered  their  rehiti.>Jis  one  with  ihe  other,  but  placed  the  Uni- 
ted StdtG^  under  new  circumstances,  to  which  Wft  shall  hot  be 
reconciled,  iintd  the  generations  of  inen  who  commenced  bu- 
siness at  the  breaking  out  of  the  French  revolution  shallliave 
ceased  to  influence  the  public  mind. 

A  liitle  while  ago  we  vi^ere  the  merchants  and  carriers  for 
millipns  of  j^ersuns,  whose  own  merchants  now  dio  their  own 
business,  in  their  own  ships,  and  labour  has  necessarily  sought 
new  occupation;^.  These  are  not  adjusted  and  settled  as  they 
will  be  in  due  time  :  and  are  obstructed  too,  by  a  constant  re- 
currence to  opinions  and  rules  of  action  establishid,  when 
nearly  all  Europe  was  in  a  slate  of  w"ar,  entirely  inapplicable 
when  Europe  is  in  a  state  of  peace.  The  want  of  sensibility 
as  to  these  tilings,  has  greatly  contributed  to  bring  aboiit  thosa 
seasons  of  adversity  through  which  we    have  passed. 

The  manufacturers  are  component  parts  of  the  trading  com- 
munity ;  and,  if  the  proportion  which  they  bear  to  the  whole 
of  that  community  were  ascertained,  it  would  not  be  found 
that  failures  among  ihem  are  more  frequent  than  to  other 
classes  of  that  community. — -They  ure  liable  to  th*  tarious 
fortunes  of  all  dealing  men — at  one  period  depressed,  at  and 
another,  prosperous. 

Scarcit^^  and  abundance  effect  them  like  others.  The  ma- 
kers ot  low  priced  cottons  are  embarrassed  just  now,  but  their 
business  will  soon  regulate  itself  and  time  will  provide  a  rem- 
edy. The  wotillen  manufactures  are  reviring.  I  do  not  think 
that  the  tariff  of  1823,  has  been  3-et  fully  tested,  and  th»  sttte 
of  things  in  England  has  tended  to  distract  what  may  ht  called 
its  regular  operation. 

Wo  have  not  yet  got  over  the  heavy  importation  of  1827-' 
S  and  the  very  k/W  price  of  wool  at  present  in  England  influ- 
ences the  price  in  our  market. 

So  long  as  the  effects  of  bankrupts  in  Europe  are  sent  to 
this  country  for  forced  sales,  that  their  accounts  may  be  clo- 
sed, our  markets  must  be  variable,  but  with  increased  Expe- 
rience we  shall  not  be  so  much  t^mbarasscd  by  that  variable- 
ness as  we  have  been. 

Let  not  the  friends  of  American  industry  be  discouraged. 
Let  them  carefully  investigate  the  facts  that  belong  to  their 
^cveral    concerns,    and  prepare  for   the  approaching  conte 


TRADESMAN  S    OUiD»«  275 

(the  opposerg  of  the  tariff.)  My  opinion  is,  that  no  change  of 
the  present  law,  shoald  yet  be  asked  for.  There  are  cer- 
tain things  which  must  "regulate  themselves"  among  ihera^ 
the  grcving  as  well  as  the  spinning  of  cotion. — The  planters 
will  severely  discover  this  at  an  early  day.  Even  the  pre^ 
sent  h)w  prices  cannot  be  paid  on  the  present  price  of  goods 
manufactured  from  it. 

The  fact  tliat  some,  too  many  of  the  manufacturers,  were 
straightened  to  meet  their  obligations,  has  had  a  more  exten- 
ded and  ruinous  tendency  from  an  idea  that  the  protecting 
system  \yould  be  abandoned  at  the  next  sess'^on  of  Congress 
— we  do'  not  believe  in  such  a  result.  We  think  there  is 
force  enough  to  resist  the  rosolulion  to  effect  the  destruction 
of  this  system — but  the  apprehension  of  it  has  been,  and  still 
is  rendering  incalculable  mischief  to  the  United  States. 

CHAPTER  XXXIV 

Laws  Relative  To  Sj?irifs^  Wines,  Teas,  S^c. 

Extracted  from  lugersoVs  Digest. 

25.  Sec.  XLI.  The  surveyor  or  chief  officer  of  inspect 
tion,  shall  give  the  proprietor,  or  consignee,  of  any  distilled 
spirits,  wines  or  teas,or  bis  or  her  agent,  a  particularcertificate, 
which  shall  accompany  each  cask,  chest,  vessel,  or  casej  of 
distilled  spirits,  wines,  or  teas,  wherever  the  same  may  be 
sent  within  the  limits  of  the  United  States,  as  evidence  that 
the  same  has  been  lawfully  imported.     Form  as  foiicws: 

A^o.  District  of ,  Port  of ^. 

I  certify  that  there  was  imported  in  this  district,  on  the 
[here  insert  the  date  of  importation]  by  [here  insert  the  name 
of  the  proprietor,  importer,  or  consignee]  in  the  [here  insert 
the  name  of  tlie  vessel,  the  surname  of  the  master,  and  wheth- 
er a  vessel  of  the  United  States,  or  a  foreign  vessel]  from 
[here  insert  the  place  from  which  imported]  one  [here  insert 
whether  cask,  chest,  vessel  or  case,  by  the  proper  name]  of 
[here  insert  whether  spirits,  wines,  or  teas  and  the  kinds  of 
each]  numbered  and  marked  as  per  margin  ;  [the  marks  of 
the  inspector  to  be  inserted  in  the  margin]  containing  [here 
insert  the  number  of  gallons,  and  rate  of  proof,  of  spirits,  or 
gallons,  if  wines,  or  number  of  pounds  weight  net,  if  teas.] 

A.  13.  Sujy devisor ^ 
Countersigned  by  CD.  Inspector, 


^76  tllE    ARTIST    ANb 

26.  Sec.  XLIII.  The  proprietor,  importer,  or  consignee 
or  his  or  her  agent,  who  may  receive  said  certificate,  shall, 
upon  the  sale  and  delivery  of  any  of  the  said  spirits,  wines^ 
or  teas,  deliver  to  the  purchaser  or  purchasers  thereof,  the 
certificate  or  certificates  which  ought  to  accompany  the  same 
en  pain  of  forfeiting  the  sum  of  fifty  dollars  for  each  cask, 
chest,  vessel  or  case,  with  which  such  certificate  shall  not  be 
delivered  :  and  if  any  casks,  chests,  vessels  or  cases  contain- 
ing distilled  spirits,  wines,  or  teas,  by  the  foregoing  provisions 
ought  to  be  marked  and  accompanied  with  jcertificates,  shalF 
be  found  in  the  possession  of  any  person  unaccompanied  with 
such  marks  and  certificates,  it  shall  be  presumptive  evidence 
that  the  same  are  liable  to  forfeiture  ;  and  it  shall  be  lawful 
for  any  ofiicer  of  the  cust©ms  or  of  inspection  to  seize  thenl 
as  aforesaid  ;  ctnd  if  upon  trial,  the  consequence  of  such  seiz^ 
lire,  the  owner  or  claimant  of  the  spirits,  wines»  or  teas,  seized 
shall  not  prove  that  the  same  were  imported  into  the  United 
States  according  to  law,  and  the  duties  thereupon  paid,  or  se- 
cured^ they  shall  be  adjudged  to  be  forfeited. 

27.  Sec.  XLIV.  On  the  sale  of  any  cask,  chest,  vessel 
or  caso  which  has  been,  or  shall  be  marked  pursuant  to  the 
provisions  aforesaid  as  containing  distilled  spirits,  wines,  or 
teas,  and  which  has  been  emptied  of  its  contents,  and  prior 
tojthe  delivery  thereof  to  the  purchaser,  or  any  removal  thereof, 
the  marks  and  numbers  which  shall  have  been  set  thereon  bj^  or 
«nder  the  direction  of  any  officer  of  inspection,  shall  bejdefaced 
and  obliterated  in  the  presence  of  some  officer  of  inspection  or 
oft  he  customs,  ^\ho  shall,  on  due  notice  being  given,  attend  for 
that  puipose,  at  which  time  the  certificate,  which  ought  to  ac- 
company such  cask,  chest,  vessel,  or  case,  shall  also  be  re- 
turned and  cancelled  ;  and  (*very  person  who  shall  obliterate, 
counterfeit,  alter,  or  deface  any  mark  or  number,  placed  by 
an  officer  of  inspection  upon  any  cask,  vessel,  or  case,  con- 
taining distilled  spirits,  wines,  or  teas,  or  any  certificate  there- 
of ;  or  who  shall  sell,  or  in  any  way  alienate  or  remove  any 
cask,  chest,  vessel,  or  case,  which  has  been  emptied  of  its  con* 
tents,  before  the  marks  and  numbers  se^  thereon,  pursuant  ta 
the  provisions  aforesaid,  shall  have  been  defaced  or  oblitera- 
ted, in  presence  of  an  officer  of  inspection  as  aforesaid  ;  or 
who  shall  neglect  or  refuse  to  deliver  the  certificate  issued  to. 
accompany  the  cask,   chest,   vessel,    or  case,   of  which  th© 


Ht^nvKs  and  numbers  s\r.\]\  have  been  demced  or  obliterated,  in 
^iie  Tiianri^r  aforesnid,  on  being  thereto  required  by  an  oiFicer 
u(  inspection  or  of  the  customs,  shall  for  each  and  every 
such  ofience,  forfeit  and  pa}^  one  hundred  dollars^  witli  costs 
ef  suit, 

124.,  Sec,  XfX.  When  any  gnod?^,  wares  or  merchandize^ 
-j^btill  be  admitted  to  entry  upon  i'lvoice,  the  collector  of  the 
|3orijii  which  the  same  are  entered,  shall  certify  such  invoice 
imder  his  ofiicial  seal;  and  no  other  evidence  of  the  value  of 
such  g<iods,  wares,  or  merchandise,  shall  be  admitted  on  tho 
part  of  tlie  ov»'ners  thereof^  in  any  court  of  the  United  States, 
except  in  corroboration  of  such  invoice* 

125,  Sec,  XX,  An}^  person  or  persons,  who  sliall  coun* 
terfeit  any  certificate  or  attrstation  ni  ide  in  pursuance  of  this 
i?ct,  or  use  such  certificate  or  attestation,  knowing  the  same 
to  L^  co-unterfeit,  shall  upon  CfHiviftion  thereof,  before  any 
■court  of  ih.e  United  States,,  having  cognizance  of  the  same,  be 
adjudged  guilty  cf  felony,  and  be  firjcd  in  a  sum  not  exceed- 
ing ten  thousand  dollars,  and  imnrisor^ed  for  a  term  not  e:*;- 
iceeding  three  years. 

127.  XXII.  The  collector  of  tiie  customs  shall  be  re* 
quired  to  cause  one  package  at  least  out  of  every  invoice,  and 
one  pacl^age  at  least  out  of  eVery  fifty  packages,  of  every  in- 
voice of  goods.,  wares,  or  merchandise,  imported  into  tlieir 
respective  districts,  to  be  opened  and  examined,  and  if  the 
same  be  fountl  not  to  corrc^^pond  witli  the  invoice  thereof,  or 
to  be  false]\^  charged  in  such  invoice,  a  full  inspection  of  all 
such  goods,  wares,  or  merchandise,  as  may  be  included  iii 
tho  same  entry,  shall  be  made  ;  and  if  any  package  is  found 
to  contain  any  article  not  described  in  the  invoice,  the  whole 
package  shall  be  forfeited  ;  and  in  case  such  goods,  v/ares,  or 
merchandize,  shall  be  subject  to  an  ad  valorem  duty,  the  same 
proceedings  slmll  be  had,  and  the  same  penalties  shall  be  in- 
currf'd,  as  in  the  eleventh  section  of  this  act  :  provided  that 
nothing  herein  contained  shall  save  from  forfeiture  any  pack- 
age, having  in  it  any  article  not  described  in  tlie  invoice. 

CHAPTER  XX3LY. 

Credits. 

"None  will  deny,  that-  every  considerable  trader  ought  to 
liave  soRie  stork,  or  cash  capital  of  his  own  ;  the  most  judi- 
cious traders,  like   bankers,  are  always  careful  to  keep  their 


27 o  THE    ARTIST    AN» 

dealinss  within  the  extent  of  their  cnpiuil,  that'no  disappoint^ 
ment  may  jiicapacilate  them  to  support  their  credit.  Yet  tra- 
ders of  worth,  judgment  and  economy,  are  sometimes  under 

•  the  necessity  of  borrowing  mone}^,  to  carry  on  their  business 
to  the  best  advantage  ;  as  when  the  merchant  has  commpdi- 
ties  on  hand,  which  he  wishes  to  keep  for  a  rising  market,  or 
on  account  of  monies  accruing  to  him,  which  he  is  disappoin- 
ted in  receiving.  On  occasions  like  these,  taking  up  money 
at  interest,  is  not  disreputable,  but  a  great  convenience  ;  thus 
enabling  him  to  carry  on  his  business  more  successfully  ;  but 
tlie  borr(Jwer  ouglit  to  be  well  assured,  that  lie  has  sufficient 
effects  within  his  power  to  liquidate  tbe  obligations  in  due 
time.  . 

But,  if  the  trader  borrows  money  to  the  extent  of  his  cre- 
dit, and  launches  out  into  trade,  employing  it  as  his  own, 
such  management  is  extremely  precarious,  and  is  generally  at- 
tended with  the  most  preposterous  consequences  :  for  trade  is 
subject  to  losses  and  disappointments;  and  when  once  a  tra- 
der brii]gs  his  credit  into  doubt,  it  may  and  will  draw  all  his 
creditors,  at  the  same  time,  upon  him;  consequently  render- 
ing him  incapable  of  drawing  in  so  much  of  his  scattered  ef- 
fects as  will  discharge  his  debts,  and  thereby  ruin  his  credit, 
although  he  might  have  believed  he  had  more  than  enough  to 
satisfy  she  whole  world. 

As,  therefore,  a  wise  man  will  trade  so  cautiously,  as  not  to 
hazard  the  loss^of  his  ovvn  proper  estate  at  once,  much  more, 

4  sliould  an  honest  man  be  careful  not  to  involve  the  estates  of 
o:hprs,  in  his  personal  trading  adventures.  But  he  that  knovv's 
he  has  lost  his  own  fortune,  and  endeavours  to  recover  it  by 
trading  with  the  stock  of  other  men,  although  he  may  lie  ac- 
ti'Jted  by  good  motives,  still  cannot  have  a  pretence  to  the 
character  of  beii>g  judici  >us.  The  dealing  for  goods  on  a 
credit,  was,  |)robably,  at  first  introduced,  by  trusting  young 
men  commencing  in  trade,  whose  chief,  and  perhaps  only 
siock,  mjght  be  the  opinion  of  their  capacity,  industry,  and 
hoiiesty:  and  a*s  this  U  continued  to  retailers,  and  those  who 
trade  on  a  small  stock,  it  n:ay  be  reckoned  a  commendable, 
and  useful  practice;  but  whetlier  the  practice  of  this  liberal- 
ity should  be  extended  to  the  wholesale  trader,  in  so  unlimi- 
ted a  manner,  as  is  cusvomary  in  most  of  our  trading  cities,  is 
a  consideration  which   admits    of  great   doubt.      This  maxim 

.  cjay,  however  be  advanced  with  some  confidence,  that  a  nier- 


tradesman's  guide.  279 

fihaut  should  never  purchase  goods  on  short  credit,  with  in- 
tent to  meet  the*  time  of  payment  by  remittances  from  cash 
sales  of  the  same  goods,  as  consequences  might  follow,  not 
on!}'  ruinous  to  those  who  try  the  experinient,  but  injurious  to 
trade  in  several  ways.  Under  such  circumstances,  the  tra- 
der finding  his  expectances  failing,  is  induced  to  oiier  his  ar- 
ticles at  1  educed  prices,  as  a  last  resource  from  impending 
ruin  ;  but  ten  to  one,  and  a  most  fortunate  occurrefice,  if  he 
does  not  find  his  financial  system  on  the  debit  side  of  profit 
and  loss.  There  may  be,  and  certainly  are,  cases  when  a 
merchant  may  be  justified  in  forcing  sales,  though  it  has  ever 
been  found,  as  a  general  principle,  unwise  ;  it  disturbs  the 
whole  Current  of  tr:;.de,  and  drives  it  out  of  its  natural  channel ; 
hundreds  falling  i<Uo  the  stream,  in  this  way,  float  among 
breakers,  lind  finally  split  on  rocks,  or  are  cast  on  quicksands, 
hardly  over  to  be  recovered.  The  fi^rcing  of  trade  produces 
a  general  introduction  of  goods  of  an  ordinary  quality.  Is  it 
not  a  fact,  that  when  one  among  a  number  of  traders,  intro- 
duces a  financial  trade,  his  neighbours  are  induced  to  replen- 
ish their  stock  with  inferior  articles  (in  order  to  retain  their 
customers,)  which  will  afford  them  the  same  profit  at  less  pri- 
ces, as  when  accustomed  to  koep  prime  articles  ;  and  after 
obtaining  the  reputation  of  selling  goods  of  indifferent  quality, 
other  places  leceive  the  trade,  which  otherwise  might  not 
have  been  thus  imprudently  lost  ] 

*'  Ch^ap  Stores"  are  not  always  found  to  have  the  cheap- 
est goods,  if  we  reckon  hy  principles  of  profit  to  the  purcLa- 
ser  ;  for  the  qualities  of  most  goods  correspond  with  the  pri- 
ces, 1 1  is  observable  that  those  merchants  generally  succeed 
the  best,  who  have  the  reputation  of  keeping  prime  articles, 
and  are  not  so  very  tenacious  of  acquiring  the  fame  of  selling 
remarkably  cheap. 

It  is  no  doubt  to  be  considered  an  established  principle 
among  traders,  when  they  have  occasion  to  male  use  of  their 
credit,  it  should  be  for  the  borrowing  of  money,  but  never  for 
the  buying  of  goods;  thus  enabling  thorn  to  purchase  at  the 
best  possible  advantage. 

There  is  another  evil  in  trade,  which  we  have  seen  and 
which  we  believe  deserves  some  consideration.  Some  tradcjrs 
exhibit  a  wonderful  degree  of  diffidence  or  modesty,  fearing 
fo  offend,  in  collecting  their  dues;  particularly,  vihen  thoy 
■^YQ  against  persons  of  acknowledged  responsibility,  who  cer- 


.:^0  TirE   ATlTrST   A!vD" 

tai»ly  ought  to  be  the  most  prompt^  and  willing  as  i lie j  afc, 
most  enabled  to  make  thc^r  payments.  It  eould  be  said 
many,  and  very  many  mcrcbaats  have  suffered  on  tbk  ac- 
eount. 

But  is  It  often  the  case^  that  the  debtor  under  such  ckcum- 
stances  is  UHvyilliug  to  avail  hinaself  of  the  advamage  thus  of- 
tered  I  However  such  customers  ni:iy  cousider  the  subject, 
eertain^ly^  they  are  not  to  be  estioiatcd  among  the  number  ir& 
building  up  a  shopkeeper,  it  is  an  acknovledged  fact,  that 
gentle^aen  of  estates  generally  require  thuse  articles  wkicb 
the  traders  esteem  as  cash  goods ;  that  traders  who  reside  a 
some  distance  from  the  ciiy,  could  have  sold  all  such  got)di; 
wiiich  they  dispose  of  on  a  credit ^07-  casli,  before  ihey  caa 
replenish  ?  We  speak  of  those  who  do  not  keep  heavy  stocks, 
though^  perhaps^  it  might  be  applicable  in  somi^  eases  ;  but  ]» 
it  not  a  matter  worthy  of  examiaatioa,  if  aa  u^nforced  and 
Katusal  business^  effected  with  cash,  or  short. ci edit,  does  not 
produce,  ultimately,  more  actual  gain,  than  that  which  is  mcire 
extended,  and  on  long  and  unlimited  crediti  ?  .  Those  who 
have  been  in  trade  a  great  number  of  years ^  can,  perliaps^ 
answer  the  question  salisfactwily^ 

'^'  H'mts  to  MecTianics. 
Avoid  giving  loBg  credits,  even  to  your  best  customers^.  A 
man  who  can  \y^y  easily,  will  not  thaflk  you  for  the  delay  ; 
and  a  slack,  doubtful p'dy muster  is  not  too  valuable  a  customer 
to  dan  sharpl]^  and  seasouaMi/,  A  fish  may  as  well  attempt 
to  live  without  water,  or  a  man  without  air,  as  a  mechanic 
without  punctuality  and  promptness  in  coUecting  and  paying 
his  debts,  it  is  a  mistaken,  and  ruinous  policy  te  attempt  to 
keep  on  and  get  business  by  delnyiiig  colleetions^  When  yx^u 
lose  a  slack  paymaster  from  your  books^  you  only  lose  the 
chance  of  Iosi?ig  j'our  money — and  there  is  no  man  who  pays 
more  money  to  lawyers  then  he  wko  is  least  prcwi>pt  in  Q0I-* 
lecting  far  himself. 

"  Take  care  how  you  agree  to  pay  money  for  your  stocky 
your  provisions,  your  lent,  or  your  fuel,  and  take  dog  skins 
for  your  work.  One  hand  must  wash  the  other,  as  poor 
Richard  says,  or  both  will  go  to  jail  dirty.  Every  man's  trade 
ought  to  bring  him  money  enough  to  pay  all  demands  against 
him  :  and  no  man  can  stand  it  long,  who  does  not  get  money 
enough  from  his  business  to  pay  the  cash  expenses  of  carry  iug^ 
it  on,*'     Finally,  character  is  «very  thing;  ia  re^i^ecttQ  QjC<^4iU 


m 

Suspicion  of  the  capability  of  a  person  to  fulfil  his  engage- 
ments, is  hardly  less  fatal  than  that  of  female  chastity. 

Advantages  of  Pronqdness,  A  merchant,  whose  policy 
expired  at  12  o'clock,  called  at  the  insurance  office,  at  half 
past  11,  and  obtained  a  renewal  of  it.  Ai2  o'clock  the  same 
day,  4hs  store  and  goods  were  reduced  to  ashes  !  This  cir- 
cnnistanco  occurred  at  the  late  destructive  fire  in  Augusta, 
Geo.  What  would  iiavc.  become  of  that  man's  tortune,  if  he 
had  thought  it  "  would  do  as  well  after  dinner." 

A  gentleman  in  this  state,  n(  t  three  years  sinee,  was  in  the 
practice  of  renewing  his  policy,  as  soon  as  it  had  expited  ; 
but  at  length,  neglecting  it  for  a  fow  days,  his  store  and  val- 
uable contents,  were  destroyed  by  fire.  From  this  circum- 
stance we  are  taught  the  truth  of  the  old  proverb,  that  *'  de- 
lays are  dangerous." 

We  shall  close  this  chapter  with  the  following  Rules,  from 
the  private  papers  ol  Dr.  West,  v/hich  were  according  to  his 
memorandum,  thr«  wn  together  as  general  luay  marks  m  the 
journey  of  life.  They  were  advantageous  to  him,  and  whil* 
they  exhibited  an  honourable  testimony  to  his  moral  worth, 
may  be  useful  to  others. 

Never  to  ridicule  sacred  things,  or  what  others  tnay  es- 
teem such,  however  absurd  they  appear  to  me. 

Never  to  resent  a  supposed  injury  till  I  know  the  views  and 
motives  of  the  author  of  it.  Nor  on  any  occasion  to  retal- 
iate. 

Never  to  judge  a  persons  character  by  external  appearance. 

Alwaj's  to  take  the  place  of  an  absent  person  who  is  cen- 
sured in    company,  so  far  as  triith  and  propriety  will  allow. 

Never  to  think  the  worse  of  another  on  account  of  his  dif- 
fering from  me  in  political  or  religit)u  opinions. 

Never  to  dispute  if  I  ycan  fairly  avoid  it. 

Not  to  dispute  with  a  man  more  than  seventy  years  old; 
nor  with  a  woman  ;   nor  with  an  enthusiast. 

Not  to  efrbct  to  be  witty,  or  to  jest  so  as  to  wound  the  feel- 
ings of  another. 

To  SH}^  as  little  as  possible  of  myself,  arid  those  who  are 
near  to  me. 

To  aim  at  cheerfulness  vvithout  levity. 

Not  to  obtrude  my  advice  unasked. 

Never  to  cpurt  the  favor  of  the  rich,  by  flattering  either 
their  vanity  or  their  vices. 

24* 


2$2  tM£  ARTfSt  AKtf 

To  respect  virtue  though  clatherl  \n  rags. 

To  speak  wirh  calmness  and  doliberation  oit  all  occasion*, 
especially  hi  circumstances  which  tertd  to  iritate. 

Frequeiuly  to  review  my  conduct  and  DOtc  my  failings. 

On  all  occasions  to  hope  in  prospect  the  end  of  lit^  and  .'% 
future  state. 

Not  to  flatter  myself  I  can  act  up  to  those  rvfle^,  howevei 
honestly  I  may  aim  at  it. 

CHAPTER  XXXV. 
Sugar,  Tea,  ^c. 

On  the  quality  of  Sugars,  t^nth  Practical  Rcmai'ks,  Not 
having  authority;  excepting  that  founded  on  our  own  experi- 
ence, we  enter  upon  the  subject  laid  out  for  us  with  some 
diffidence,  as  there  are  [Uiuy  whom  we  consider  our  superi- 
ors ;  however,  \ve  are  willing  to  abide  the  test  on  close  in- 
vestigation. 

Sugars.  Havannas  are  undoubtedly  preferable  to  any 
brought  to  our  market,  and  are  not  only  as  profitable  to  tho 
retailer  but  most  profitable  to  the  consumer.  Either  white 
or  brown  is  from  ten  to  fifteen  per  cent,  sweeter  ;  besides  the 
flavour  approximates  nearer  to  that  of  the  loaf  sugar  of  tho 
shops:  tbey  are  imported  in  boxes,  weighing  from  three  to 
four  hundred  pounds,  {rao,  from  j7;of,  and  perfectly  dr3%  Gen-^ 
erally  every  pound,  throughout  the  chest,  will  correspond 
with  the  sample.  Chests  weighing  four  hundred  pounds, 
have  been  known  to  gain  forty  poiuids ;  usually  twenty-live 
pounds  in  \\\q  tare.  There  is  a  dillerence  in  the  quality  of 
these  sugars,  of  ten  per  cent,  perhaps  more.  Some  of  the 
Brazils  are  veiy  lair  and  profnable.  Refiners  generally  give 
these  sugars  a  prererence. 

Of  the  browns.  Si.  Croix  lead  in  |}rice  in  soirie  of  our 
markets;  they  cerlainly  nre  very  superior  sugars,  very  clean, 
richly  grained,  and  of  a  lively  colour,  hui  wanting  in  that  fine 
flavour  which  distinguishes  the  Havannas.^ 

The  Calcutta  sugars  are  n}ixed  aevantageously  with  the 
ordinary  sugars  of  the  islands.  These  mixtures  require  some 
care,  or  the  improvement  micht  be  called  a  deception.  Some 
of  these  sugars  have  a  very  bad  flavour,  and  should  be  avoid- 
ed by  the  purchaser  :  but  those  of  prime  quality  are  very  fair 
and  saleable  ;  they  are  imported  in  bags  weighing  from  one 
to  two   hundred  pounds.     There  are  many   other  kinds  we 


tradesman's  guide.  183 

siiould  be  glad  to  nptice,  if  our  limi:s  would  would  permit,  but 
we  can  only  indulge  ourselves  in  a  few  brief  reniaiivs. 

The  islands  furnish  su^jrs  of  various  qualities,  precisely  as 
they  do  of  spirits.  We  have  the  best  rum  from  St.  Croix, 
(luiless  Jamaica  may  be  prefered)  so  it  is  with  respect  to  su- 
gars ;  the  difference  probably  arises  in  a  great  measure  on 
account  of  tlie  sweetness  of  the  cane,  and  the  same  infer- 
ence can  be  drawn  in  regard  to  ihe  flavour  of  sugars,  as  will 
be  found  in  the  article  on  flavouring  spirits;  though  much 
undoubtedly  may  be  attributed  to  the  nmnufacturer.  Vast 
quantiTies  of  sugars  are  sent  into  commerce,  nnmercliHntable^ 
or  rather  before  they  have  ripened y  or  bet^n  properly  (Irained, 
This  is  almost  un-versally  tlie  case  with  New-Orleans,  which 
on  opening  appear  very  bright,  but  the  air  soon  decomposes 
it,  and  if  not  of  sufficient  ripeness  or  age,  the  retailer  of 
pounds  generally  finds  it  a  most  unprofitable  article. 

We  can  draw  a  very  fair  conclusion  of  the  ripeness  of  a 
piece  of  goods,  particularly  wlion  it  has  lain  some  time  in  the 
warehouse.  If  we  discovor  moUsses  issuing  from  the  cre- 
vices, between  the  staves  and  about  the  heads,  and  it  is  evi- 
dent mucli  has  been  deposited  on  the  floor  about  the  cask, 
then,  it  is  also  evident  it  will  'fall  short  of  the  custom-house 
weight.  In  every  case  the  draining  head  or  side  should  al- 
ways be  well  probed  indeed  every  part  should  be  carefully 
examined,  or  we  shall  not  be  certa»o  of  its  avera^re  quality, 
^^ucli  experience  and  care  are  required  in«selecting  sugars: 
perhaps  it  may  not  be  unprofitahle  to  ex:am!ui^  ahen  purchas- 
ing, if  the  c  isks  may  not  be  overcharged  wiih  hoops,  thick 
heads,  staves  &:c.  Those  casks  which  contain  the  larg<'St 
quantity,  usually  produce  the  greatest  gain  in  the  tare.  The 
allowances  and  tares  on  sugar  will  be  found  under  their  res- 
pective heads. 

Of  Teas.  Tea  is  distinoruishrd  in  name,  as  it  differs  in 
colour,  flavour  and  size  of  its  leaf;  though  its  quality  is  gen- 
erally recognized  nuder  the  tiile  of  chop. 

It  is  said  the  Chinese  neither  drink  it  in  the  manner  we  do, 
nor  so  stronsf,  but  use  it  only  as  their  common  drink.  It  is 
reckoned  among  them  a  singular^ diluter  and  purifier  of  the 
blood  ;  a  great  strengthener  of  the  brain  and  stomach,  and 
promoter  of  digesiion,  perspiration,  &c.  They  drink  it  in 
great  quantities  in  hi^:di  fevers,  cholics,  &c.  thmk  it  a  sure 
though  slaw  remedy  in  chronic  diseases. 


^64  THE  AUTIST  ANB 

It  is  perhaps  unnecessary  to  remark,  that  there  are  few  at'-* 
tides  in  Ci)miiitfiC3,  more  variable  in  quality  th;in  teas;  ynd 
in  regard  to  which  we  will  only  obscJrve,  (hat  every  cargo 
generally  contains  several  chops,  (qualities,)  and  that  we  have 
frequently  seen  Yoaag  Myson  TtJi,  varying  to  40  per  cent  ; 
consoquenily  no  article  should  be  selected  -.vilh  more  care  : 
but  our  prv^sent  object  is  more  pariicularl}^  to  allude  to  the  sub- 
stitution of  tares  not  according  to  law.  We  have  been  furnisli- 
ed  wiih  abundant  ev5de;jce  that  the  practice  ofreweighing  teas, 
after  \htiy  have  passed  through  tiie  cusiorn  inouse,  is  incorrect, 
and  most  generally,  attended  with  great  loss  1o  the^retailer  of 
pounds.  We  believe  th  it  we  are  perfectly  familliar  with  the 
arguments  adduced  in  favour  of  the  practice,  the  futility  of 
which  we  sliali  now  attempt  to  show  : 

1st  Governinent  regu'ates  commerce;  by  its  officers  the 
duties  on  imported  goo Js  are  secured,  and  at  the  time  of  en- 
try the  actual  or  larsfid  tares  are  determined,  on  all  goods 
subject  tu  be  weighed  and  marked. 

2.  That  the  custom-house  marks  are  the  only  correct  and 
proper  marks,  must  he  obvious  from  the  following  reasons, 
v1z.  in  order  to  secure  the  full  amount  of  duties  ;  and  not- 
withstanding the  willingness  of  the  importer  to  have  his  teas 
marked  less  than  the  boxes  or  chests  contain  (which  we  do 
not  believe,)  none  will  pretend  that  the  custom  officers  do  ac- 
tually GXQm\i\.  a  faw  pounds,  on  every  box  from  duties,  under 
existing  commercial  re'^^ulations,  and  that  too,  as  may  be  sug- 
gested, to  favour  the  importer. 

Again,  we  are  not  led  to  understand  by  the  tariff  that  a 
duly  of  40  cents,  (the  duty  on  Young  Hyson  iea,)sh:dl  be  se- 
cured on  the  boxes  in  which  tea  is  imported  ;  but  that  in  con- 
sequence of  general  average,  (s:ee  note  in  the  table  of  tares 
&.C.  and  also,  laws  &lc.^  some  chests  will  fall  short,  while 
others  will  exceed  the  custom-house  mark  (or  black  mark,  as 
sometimes  called  by  dealers,)on  reweight,  unless  tares  are  sub- 
stituted varying  from  those  estimated  according  to  law  ;  but 
when  teas  are  entered  according  to  invoice,  we  should  sup- 
pose this  variation  would  not  occur,  nor  have  we  reason  to 
believe  it  does,  particularly  when  the  inspector  takes  into  con- 
sideration, the  diflcrence  of  the  catty  pound,  (about  18  oz. 
avoirdupois)  and  our  weight;  for  it  mus:  be  ur.derstood  that 
boxes  or  chests,  independant  of  their  contents  vary  in  weight, 
frequently  from  1  to  8  pounds  ;  thus,  if  one  chest  weighs  18 


aiKilh(3r  22  and  a  third  26,  the  average  weight  is  tWenly-two^ 
and  according  to  the  principles  of  the  custom-house,  (unless 
the  teas  a.e  eniercd  according  to  invoice)  each  ebesi  would 
be  marked,  exclusive  of  the  average  tare,  wbich  is  deduGted > 
(see  form  of  certificate  in  abstiaci  of  Laws,  &:<r,^ 

It  is  said  by  some  that  the  custom-house  tares  are  a  f&iigli 
calculation^  but  is  xhe  systematic  tare,  of  19  lbs.  without  any 
allowance  for  draft,  atier  the  box  or  chest  has  received  aii 
addition  weight  of  hoops  to  be  more  appreciated,  and  this  too, 
on  quarter  chests,  without  distinction — -and  10  lbs,  on  catty 
boxes  ? 

And  would  it  not  be  surprising  to  one,  unacquainted  with 
mercantile  transactions  to  learn  that  a  dealer  had  bought  a 
chest  of  tea,  and  ihat  in  the  same  market,  it  would  not  sell 
for  so  m  mj'  pounds,  if  thrown  into  ihe  commission  merchants 
hands,  as  he  was  ciiarged '?  The  facts  in  regard  to  the  sales 
of  teas  are,  as  we  fearn,  some  country  merchants  buy  iheir  teas 
at  the  black  mark,  or  custom-house  mark,  otheis,  black  teas 
at  the  black  mark,  and  green  teas,  by  having  one  pound  add- 
ed to  ihe  black  mark;  others,  wiLh  an  addition  of  one  pound 
on  both  green  and  black  teas — oihers,  by  rewelght  and  a  de- 
duction of  20  lbs.  on  qr.  chests  and  10  lbs.  on  catty  boxes  oth- 
ers by  reweighi,  (which  by  some  is  suid  to  be  customary)  19 
lbs.  Oil  qr.  chests  without  distinction.  By  this  last  substitu- 
tion, in  some  very  few  instances  the  vendee  will  gain  perhaps 
one  or  two  pouijds,  hue  vvill  generally  loose  from  one  to  10, 
most  frequenily,  four  and  five — ^liut,  we  will  ask,  do  these  de- 
viations occur  when  teas  are  sold  in  lots,  by  the  importer, 
eifher  at  private  or  auctiap  sale  1  a  merchant  in  Boston,  who 
has  been  in  xhei  tea  trade  for  more  than  30  years,  writes — - 
*'  the  trade  have  always  ob  ain«d  their  teas  at  the  black  mark, 
and  I  have  rjot  any  knowledg^o  of  a  deviation  in  other  markets, 
and  indeed,  there  can  be  none,  unless  by  stipulation," 

There  would  be  many  difficulties  unavoidably  arising,  pro* 
vided  taiesare  substituted,  in  every  case  when  sales  are  ef-^ 
fected,  varying  fiom  those  established  by  law,  bolides  the 
prtjbahility  that  a  substitution  would  not  be  as  likely  to  be  so 
correct,  unless  the  goods  are  emptied  from  every  package  in 
order  to  prevent  a  general  average,  which  in  regard  to  teas,  is 
not  desirable,  if  practicable,  some  of  which  we  conceive  ta 
bo  as  follows  % 

li  Snppos^  we  should  re-ship  teas  to  any  port  withirig  the  jiK 


280  THE    ARTIST    AND 

risdictiou  of  the  United  States,  and  either  on  her  passage,  o^ 
at  her  po^-t  of  entry,  the  vessel's  papers  are  demanded  by  the 
revenue  officer,  (for  it  must  be  remembe-ed  the  law  is  expli- 
cit, requiring  the  supercargo  or  master,  not  only  to  produce 
the  certificate  of  his  clearance,  but  a  certificate  of  each  chest 
of  tea,  which  on  failure,  both  the  vessel  and  cargo  are  liable 
at  least  to  be  detained,  if  not  forfeited  ;)  we  are  already  ap- 
prised of  the  difficulties  which  might  arise,  if  not  the  probable 
result,  (provided  the  certificate  of  her  clearance  only  cai»  be 
procured,)  if  it  could  not  be  proved  the  teas  had  been  regu- 
larly entered  at  a  custom-house.  Is  it  not  reasonable  then, 
that  every  purchaser  of  a  chest  of  tea,  should  be  entitled  to  a 
certificate  1 

2  Provided  our  teas  are  insured,  in  case  of  damage  how 
do  we  prove  the  quj^nt^y  shipped  1  We  answer,  if  our  invoice 
of  shipment  is  correct,  we  can  prove  the  quantity  by  the  cus- 
tom-house books,  if  in  no  other  way,  in  case  the  cerificates 
are  lost.  And  on  the  other  hand,  if  our  invoice  show  teas 
of  a  number,  with  a  quantity  which  the  custom-house  books 
do  not  recognize,  the  consequences  which  follow,  might/  at 
least,  give  rise  to  much  litigation. 

All  those  difficulties  are  however,  obviated,  by  a  demand 
made  for  the  certificates  at  the  time  of  the  delivery  of  the 
goods. 

A  certificate  for  each  chest  is  made,  signed  by  the  supervi- 
sor of  the  port  where  it  was  landed,  which  corresponds  witlw 
the  custom-house  brand  on  the  chest,  viz.  the  number  of  pounds 
of  tea,  time  of  entry  &c. 

The  number  of  pounds  the  chest  contains  is  put  on  with  a 
pencil  brush;  though  sometimes  wo.^ave  seen  printed  figures  : 
a  careful  examination  will  discover  to  us  this  mark,  called  by 
dealers  the  black  mark,  unless  rubbed  out,  which  may  some- 
times be  done  through  motives  which  cannot  be  commended. 

From  what  has  been  said,  it  follows,  that  the  substitution 
of  tares  var^'ing  from  those  established  by  law,  cannot  be 
practiced  w^ith  impunity. 

Finally,  we  recommend  country  dealers  to  attend  cargo 
sales  ;  the  advantages  to  be  derived  by  attending  these  sales 
are  unnecessary  to  demonstrate  any  further  than  that  others 
can  become  possessed  of  every  desirable  information  respect^, 
ing  tares,  but  also  the  qualities  and  standard  pricec,  of  aliixost 
every  staple  article. 


pounds { 

Of  Cotton,     This  article  is    siisceprible  of  being  cliargoT 
vvith  a  considerable  per  ^.enturn   of  moisture,    which   without 
close  examination  is  not  easily  derectcd.     It  seems  that  there 
should  be  a  general  test  for  detecting  impositions  of  (his  kind,, 
but  we  are  unable  to  point  it  out  at  the  present  moment. 

U' e  should  be  glad  to  extend  our  remarks  to  various  arti- 
cles m  merchandise,  which  require  much  sagacity  in  purcha- 
sing, besides  those  mentioned  above.  But  we  trust  enough 
bar.  already  been  said  to  draw  the  conclusion,  that  for  the 
sake  of  money .^  many  overienp  the  bounds  of  right,  and  it 
should  seem,  subject  themselves  to  the  loss  of  respect  and 
confidence,  ziotwithstanding  they  may  evade  the   laws  of  tho 


country. 


SOLID  MEASURE  OF  SQUARE  TIMBER. 

By  the  following  table  '.he  solid  conteiUs,  and  the  value  of 
any  piece  or  qnanlity  of  timber,  stone,  &c.  may  be  found  at 
sight,  Irom  six  to  twentj  -five  and  a  hnlf  inches,  the  side  of  the 
squaie,  (»r  one  fourth  of  the  girth,  from  fourteen  to  eighty  feet 
in  length.  It  rises  from  six,  half  an  inch  at  a  time,  to  twenty- 
five  and  a  half  inches,  and  from  fourteen,  one  foot  at  a  time, 
till  it  rises  to  eigh<y. 

The  number  of  inches  which  the  side  of  each  stick  mea- 
sures, are  placed  at  the  top  commencing  next  to  the  left  hand 
coluenn  on  the  hrst  of  each  pa^e.  Th' se  columns  give  the 
contents  of  ea  -h  stick,  and  the  first  column  of  each  page 
wh  ch  runs  fiom  the  top  to  the  bottom,  the  length.  Half  feet 
are  not  reckoned  ;  that  is,  when  a  stick  measures  thirty  cubic 


tilADESMAN^S    «eiDE.  -8'i 

f«set  and  ^ve  inches,  it  is  called  only  thirty  feet ;  if  thirty  £cet 
and  7  inches,  it  is  reckoned  31  feet.  We  believe  this  method 
as  practised  in  all  the  cities  in  the  United  States  and  Canada. 

feet  side  side  side  side  side  side  side  side  side  si(ie  Bide  side  side  sii'e 
in       (j    6  1-2  7  71-2     8    8  1-2     9     ai2  10  10  1-2  11 1 1  12  12  1^2  )-:^ 
tengrt.  in.  inch  iirch  inch  inch  inch  inch  inch  inch  inch  incii  inch  inch  in. 


14 

S 

4 

5 

5 

6 

7  8 

9 

9 

10 

12 

i3  14  15 

15 

4 

4 

5 

6 

6 

7  8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

14  15  16 

16 

4 

5 

5 

6 

7 

8  9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14  16  17 

17 

4 

5 

6 

6 

7 

8  9 

10 

12 

13 

14 

15  17  V6 

18 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9  10 

11 

13 

14 

15 

16  18  19 

19 

5 

6 

6 

7 

8 

9  10 

12 

14 

14 

16 

17  19  21 

20 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10  11 

12 

14 

15 

17 

18  20  22 

21 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10  12 

13 

15 

16 

17 

19  21  23 

22 

5 

6 

7 

8 

10 

11  12 

14 

16 

17 

IS 

20  22  2  1 

23 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11  13 

14 

16 

17 

.19 

21  23  2^> 

24 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

12  13 

15 

17 

18 

20 

22  24  26 

25 

6 

7 

8 

10 

11 

12  14 

15 

17 

19 

21 

23  25  27 

26 

6 

8 

9 

10 

11 

13  14 

16 

18 

20 

22 

24  20  28 

27 

? 

8 

9 

10 

12 

13  15 

17 

19 

20 

22 

25  27  2^; 

28 

7 

8 

9 

11 

12 

14  16 

18 

20 

21 

23 

25  23  30 

29 

7 

9 

10 

11 

^ 

14  IG 

18 

20 

22 

24 

26  29  31 

30 

7 

^ 

10 

U^ 

13 

15  17 

19 

21 

23 

25 

27  30   33 

^1 

8 

9 

><' 

12 

14 

15  17 

19 

21 

23 

26 

23  31  34 

32 

8 

^ 

11 

12 

14 

16  IS 

20 

22 

24 

27 

29  32  35 

33 

s 

10 

11 

13 

14 

16  IS 

20 

23 

25 

27 

30  33   3() 

.-^ 

"8 

10 

11 

13 

15 

17  19 

21 

24 

26 

28 

31  34  37 

9 

10 

12 

13 

15 

17  19 

22 

24 

27 

29 

32   3j    33 

S6 

9 

11 

12 

14 

16 

18  20 

23 

25 

27 

30 

33   36   39 

S7 

9 

11 

12 

14 

16 

18  21 

23 

26 

28 

31 

34  37   40 

38 

9 

11 

V3 

15 

17 

19  21 

24 

27 

29 

32 

3j   38  41 

39 

10 

11 

13 

15 

17 

19  21 

24 

27 

30 

33 

3G  39  42 

40 

10 

12 

13 

15 

18 

20  22 

25 

28 

30 

33 

36  40  43 

41 

10 

12 

14 

16 

18 

21  23 

25 

29 

31 

34 

37  41  44 

42 

10 

12 

14 

16 

^8 

21  23 

26 

29 

32 

3'j 

33  42  45 

43 

11 

13 

14 

17 

19 

21  24 

27 

30 

33 

36 

39  43  4G 

44 

11 

13 

15 

17 

19 

22  25 

27 

30 

34 

37 

40  44  48 

45 

11 

13 

15 

17 

20 

22  25 

28 

31 

35 

38 

41  45  49 

46 

11 

13 

15 

18 

20 

23  26 

29 

32 

3:^ 

38 

42   4G   50 

47 

12 

14 

16 

18 

21 

23  26 

29 

33 

3Q 

39 

13  47  51 

48 

12 

14 

16 

19 

21 

24  27 

30 

33 

37 

40 

44   48  52 

49 

12 

14 

16 

19 

22 

24  27 

30 

34 

38 

41 

45  49  53 

50 

12 

15 

17 

19 

22 

25  28 

31 
2C^ 

34 

3S 

42 

46  50  54 

290  THE    ARTIST    AKD 


6  in. 
6  1-2  in. 

7  in. 
7  1-2  in. 

Bin. 
8  1-2  in. 

.2 

10  in: 
10  1-2  in. 

01 

rH 

•—  1—1 

^          1-4 

r2    "2 

3   IH 

3  3 

3 

fe 

"w   'w 

*M    *OT 

*w   'w 

'S 

"S 

*w   *!« 

'm 

'm 

55   3 

51 

13  15 

17  20 

22  25 

28 

32 

35  39 

43 

47 

51  :55 

52 

13  15 

17  20 

23  26 

29 

32 

36  40 

43 

48 

52  56 

53 

13  16 

18  20 

23  26 

30 

33 

37  41 

44 

49 

53  57 

54 

13  16 

18  21 

24  27 

31 

34 

37   42 

45 

50 

54  58 

55 

14  16 

18  21 

24  27 

31 

34 

38  42 

46 

51 

55  59 

56 

14  16 

19  22 

25  28 

32 

35 

39  43 

47 

52 

56  60 

57 

14  17 

19  22 

25  28 

32 

36 

39  44 

48 

53 

57  62 

58 

14  17 

19  22 

26  29 

33 

36 

40  44 

49 

54 

58  63 

59 

15   17 

20  23 

26  29 

33 

37 

41  45 

49 

55 

59  64 

60 

15    18 

20  23 

26  30 

34 

37 

41  46 

50 

56  60  65 

6l 

15   18 

20  24 

27  30 

34 

38 

42  47 

51 

56 

61  66 

62 

15  18 

21  24 

27  31 

35 

39 

43  47 

52 

58 

62  67 

63 

16  18 

21  24 

28  31 

35 

39 

44  48 

53 

59 

63  68 

64 

16  19 

21  25 

28  32 

36 

40 

44  49 

54 

59 

64  69 

65 

16  19 

22  25 

29  32 

36 

41 

45  50 

54 

60  65  71 

66 

16  19 

22  26 

29  33 

37 

41 

46   51 

55 

61 

66  72 

67 

17  20 

22  26 

SO  33 

37 

42 

46  52 

56 

62 

67  73 

63 

17  20 

23  26 

30  34 

38 

42 

47  52 

57  62 

68  74 

69 

17  20 

23  27 

30  34 

39 

43 

48  53 

58 

63 

69  75 

70 

17  21 

23  27 

31  35 

39 

44 

48  54 

5^  64 

70  76 

71 

18  21 

24  27 

31  35 

40 

44 

49  54 

59 

65 

'Tl  77 

72 

18  21 

24  28 

32  36 

40 

45 

50  55 

60 

66 

72  78 

73 

13  21 

25  28 

32  36 

41 

46 

50  56 

61 

67 

73  79 

74 

IS  22 

25  29 

33   37 

41 

46 

51  57 

62 

68 

74  80 

75 

19  22 

25  29 

33  37 

42 

47 

52  57 

63 

69 

75  81 

76 

19  22 

26  29 

34  38 

43 

47 

53  ^oS 

64 

70 

76  82 

77 

19  23 

26  30 

34  38 

44 

48 

53  59 

64 

71 

77  83 

78 

19  23 

26  30 

34  39 

44 

49 

54  59 

65 

71 

7S  84 

79 

20  2S 

27  31 

35  39 

45 

49 

55  60 

66 

72 

79^86 

80 

20  23 

27  31 

35  40 

4% 

50 

55  61 

67  73  80  87 

tradesman's  guide.  291 


^   S   c      a  a  3       .S       .5       .5 

'^C0C0'^Tj<O»£^«0o     >>•     1^     00     CO     Ci     Ci 


*-    'X3 


O 


14  16  17  19  20  22  23  25  26  28  30  31  33   35  S7 

15  17  19  20  22  23  25  26  28  30  32  34  35   37  39 

16  19  20  22  23. 25  26  28  30  32  34  36  38  40  42 

17  20  21  23  25  26  28  30  32  34  36  38  40  42  45 

18  21  23  24  26  28  30  32  34  36  38  40  43   45   47 

19  22  24  26  27  29  31  34  36  38  40  43  45  47     ^0 

20  23  25  27  29  31  33   35  38  40  42  45  47  50  53 

21  25  26  2S   30  33   35  37  39  42  44  47  50  52  55 

22  26  "i8  30  32  34   36  39   41  44  47  49  52  55   58 

23  27  29  31  33   36   38  41  43  46  49  52  54  57  60 

24  28  30  32  35  37   40  42  45  48  51  54  57  60  63 

25  29  31  34  36' 39  41  44  47  50  53^56  59  62   65 

26  30  33  35  3S   40  43  46  49  52  55  58  62  65  6S 

27  32  34  37  39  42  45  48  51  54  57  6\  64  67     70 

28  33  35  38  41  44  46  50  53  56  60  63  66     70  74 

29  34  36  39  42  45  48  51  55  58  62  65  69  72  76 

30  35  38  41  44  47  50  53  56  .  60  64  67  71  75  79 

31  36  39  42  45  48  51  55  ^%  62  66  70  73  77     ?2 

32  38  40  43  46  50  53  57  60  64  68  .72  76  80  84 

33  39  42  45  48  51  !J'o   58  62  66  70  74  ^8   82   ^7 

34  40  43   40  49  53  b6   60  64  68  72  76  81  85  90 

35  41  44  47  51  54  58  b2  66  70  74  79  ^3      87  92 

36  42  45  49  52  56  60  64  68  72  77  81  85  90  95 

37  43  47  50  54  58  6l  66  70  74  78  83  88  93  97 

38  44  48  '/I  55  59  63  67   72  76  81  85  90  95  100 

39  46  49  53  57  6l  65  69  73  78  83  88  92  98  103 

40  47  50  54  58  62  66  7\   75  80  85  90  95  100  105 

41  48  52  y5  60  64  6S  73  77  82  87  92  97  103  108 

42  49  53  57  61  65  70  74  79  84  89  94  100  105  111 

43  50  54  58  63  67   71  76  81  86  91  97  102  108  113 

44  51  55  60  64  69  73  78  83  88  93  99  104  l>iO  ll6 

45  53  57  61  65  70  75  80  85  90  95  lOi  107  113  119 

46  54  58  62  67  72  76  82  87  92  98  103  109  1^5  /21 

47  55  59  64  68  73  78  83  89  94  103  106  111  J 18  124 

48  56  60  65  70  75  80  8"i  91  96  102  108  114  120  127 

49  57  62  66   71  76  82  87  92  98  104  110  n6  123  129 
;^0  5S  63  68  73  78  83  89  94  100  106  112  119  125  132 


^92^ 


fill.    AUtiSt    A^ff 


^ 


f-4       .S       A 


.5       1-i 


ffJf       ^ 


iM 

S 

'ta 

•s 

'm 

*«o     *w     'm 

*w    *3    *w    'S    '» 

14 

39 

41 

43 

45 

47   49  51 

53  56  58     61  63 

15 

41 

44 

46 

48 

50     52  55 

57  60  62  65  67 

16 

44 

46 

49 

51 

54  56  o9 

61  64  ^6  69  72 

17 

47 

49 

52 

54 

57  60  62 

65     68     71     74     77 

18 

50 

52 

55 

58 

60  63     66 

69     72     75     78     81 

19 

53 

55 

58 

61 

64  67     70 

73     76  7^    82  86 

20 

55 

58 

61 

64 

67     70     73 

76  80  83  87  90 

21 

58 

61 

64 

67 

70  74  77 

80  84  87     91  95 

22 

61 

64 

67 

70 

74  77     81 

84  88  '  91  95  99 

23 

64 

67 

70 

74 

77     81  84 

88  92  96   100  104 

24 

66 

70 

73 

77 

80  84  88 

92  96   100  104  108^ 

25 

69 

73 

76 

80 

84  88   92 

96.100  104  108  115 

26 

72 

76^ 

79 

83 

87  91  95 

99  104  108  113  117 

27 

75 

79 

82 

S6 

91  95     99 

103  108  112  117  122 

28 

78 

81 

86 

90 

94  98  103 

107  112  116  121  126 

29 

80 

84 

89 

93 

97   102  106 

111  116  121  126  131 

SO 

83 

87 

92 

96 

101  105  110 

115  120  125  130  135 

31 

86 

90 

95 

99 

104  109  114 

119  124  129  134  140 

32 

89 

93 

98 

102 

107  112  117 

122  128  133  139  144 

33 

91 

96 

100 

106 

111  116  121 

126  132  137  143  149 

34 

94 

99 

104 

109 

114  119  125 

130  136  141  147  153 

35 

97 

102 

107 

112 

117  123  128 

134  140  146  152  15S 

36 

100 

105 

110 

115 

121  126  132 

138  144  150  156  162 

37 

103 

108 

U3 

119 

124  130  136 

142  148  154   160  167 

38 

105 

111 

116 

122 

127  133  139 

145  152  158  165  171 

39 

108 

114 

119 

125 

131  137  143 

149  156  162  169  176 

40 

111 

116 

122 

128 

134  140  147 

*53  160  166  173  180 

41 

114 

119 

125 

131 

137  144  150 

157  164  171  178  185 

42 

116 

122- 

128 

135 

141  147  154 

161  168  175  182  189 

43 

119 

125 

131 

138 

144  151  158 

165  172  179  186  194 

44  122  128  135  141  148  154  l6l  l68  176  183  191  19S 

45  125  131  138  144  151  158  l65  172  180  187   195  203 

46  128  134  141  147  154  l6l  169  176  184  192  199  207 

47  130  137  144  150  158  165  172  180  188  196  204  212 

48  133  140  147  154  l6l  169  176  184  192  200  208  217 

49  136  143  150  157  164  172  180  188  196  204  212  221 

50  139  146  153  160  168  176  183  192  ^00  208  217  2Z^ 


t'fvADESMAN's  •triDfi.  293 


■    2   -s    ^ 


15  .S 


CO 

CO 

-«< 

-«<« 

1-^ 

CO 

CO 

i> 

i^ 

00 

00 

CT> 

o 

to 

:2 

V 

1 

03 

3 

0) 

3 

r2 

CD 

72 

51  60  64  69  74  79  85  90  96  102  108  115  121  128  I34. 

52  61  66  71  76  81  87  92  98  104  110  117  123  130  I3? 

53  62  67  72  77  82  88  94  100  106  112  119  126  133  140 

54  63  68  73  79  81  90  96  102  108  115  121  128  135  I40 

55  64  69  75  80  86  92  98  104  110  117  124  130  138  145 
^6  66  71  76  82  87  93  99  106  112  119  126  133  140  Us 
^7  67  72  77  83  89  95  101  108  114  121  128  136  143  I50 

58  68  73  79  84  90  97  103  109  116  123  130  138  145  15*^ 

59  69  74  80  86  92  98  105  111  118  125  133  140  148  I56 

60  70  76  81  87  94  100  106  113  120  127  135  142  150  I58 

61  71  77  83  89  95  102  108  115  122  129  137  145  152  IGI 

62  73  78  84  90  97  103  110  117  124  132  139  147  155  16^^ 

63  74  79  86  92  98  105  112  119  126  135  142  150  158  160 

64  75  81  87  93  100  106  114  121  128  136  144  152  160  169 

65  76  82  88  95  101  108  115  123  130  138  146  154  163  171 
m  77  83  90  96  103  110  117  125  132  140  148  157  165  174 

67  78  85  91  98  105  112  119  126  134  142  151  159  168  17^ 

68  80  86  92  99  106  113  121  128  136  144  153  161  170  17^> 

69  8l  87  94  101  108  115  122  130  138  146  155  164  173  182 

70  82  88  95  102  109  117  124  132  140  149  157  166  175  185 

This  table  is  extended  to  sixty  instead  of  eighty  feet  in 
lengthy  as  first  mentioned — a  further  continuation  is  thought 
unnecessary^  , 

Continued  from  page  292. 

51  141  149  156  163  171  179  187  106  204  212  221230 

52  144  152  159  167  175  183  191  199  208  217  225  234 

53  117  154  162  170  178  186  194  203  212  221  230  239 
64  150  157  165  173  181  190  198  207  216  225  234  244 
r^  153  160  168  176  185  193  202  211  220  229  239  248 
t^  ^T?J  TAA  \ll  I^  ^^  '^^  205  215  r^4  283  243  253 
^l  l^  J^o  JS  ^^^  ^^^  ^^  209  219  528  237  247  257 
^  1^1  Itl  IIL  ^^^  ^^^  ^^^4  213  222  232  242  252  262 
^  1^  J^?  T^  \f^  ^^^  ^^^  217  226  236  246  256  26t> 
60  IG6  I/D  184  192  202  211  220  230  240  25y '460  271 


C94  THE    AETIST  AKtf  ■'■  '■  *^ 

CHAPTER  XXXVIIL 

GUNTER^S  RULE. 

Tliis  HkI*  ,  *,!-'  invention  of  Edward  Gunter,  though  incoiH' 
iDOii  use,  siiil  lUoie  arc  not  many  who  have  a  perfect  acquain- 
lance  wiih  it.  It  is,  indeed,  a  ready  reckoner,  as  the  following 
jllustraiioiis  v»  11  e.xemplity.  It  requires  but  little  practice  to 
render  tiju  ii'le  familiar  and  easy  ;  and  truly,  we  recom- 
mend it  as  a  useful  study,  particularly  to  those  who  are  enr 
gait^ed  in  the  mechanic  arts.  It  is  confidently  believed  none 
anions  the  few  v/lio  have  been  taught  this  rule,  have  regret- 
ted the  tin>e  which  has  been  devoted  for  the  purpose. 

Of  the    ■  '  The  first    Line,  marked    S  R  corresponds 

to  the    L  of   natural    Sir.es   of  every   point    of  the 

lariuers  (  .;d  is  numbered  from  the  lefthjind  onward 

)  the  li^l  o  8  inclusive  where    a  brass  pin  is  fixed; 

this  line  can  be  divided  into  halves  and  quarters. 

T/fc  second  line  T  R  corresponds  to  the  Loo^arithms  of 
the  r;in;j;entsof  every  poiiii  of  the  compass. and  is  numbered 
at  \\iv  rig; it  hand  1.  2.  3.  4.  where  a  brass  pin  is  fixed  *,  thence, 
towards  the  left  hand  with  5.  6.  7.  This  line  is  divided  into 
halves  and  qurirters,  like  the  preceding./ 

The  third  line  N  U  M  corresponds  to  the  Logarithms  of 
nunibers,  beginning  at  the  left  hand  wiih  1  ;  thence  onward 
io  the  riglit  hand  are  2  to  9-incIusive;  and  in  the  middle,  1 ;  at 
which  poir.t  a  brnss  pin  is  fixed  ;  then  2.  3.  4.  5.  (3.  7.  8.  9, 
and  iO.  at  the  end,  wliere  there  is  another  pin.  These  num- 
Iiers  and  th.e  intermediate  divisions,  depends  on  the  estimated 
values  of  the  extreme  numbers,  1  and  10.  This  line  is  un- 
doubtedly tlio  most  important,  and  therefore,  requires  a  more 
particular  illustration. 

Idiistration  1.  'I'he  first  one  may  be  considered  1.  10. 
100.  or  1000 : — 2  in  the  same  manner,  20,  200,  &,c. 

2.  Th<^  first  1,  may  be  called  one  tenth,  one  hundre.^,  one 
lhou3ai:dtli  part,  d:c.  ;   and  2.  two  tenths  or    two    l»undrtths. 

3.  Now  if  the  first  1  is  called  1,  the  middle  1  is  computed 
10  ;  and  2  :\t  iis  rV-Ijt  hand  20,  3  is  30  and  10  at  the  end  100  : 
lijo  next  2  *  30  &c.  making  the  middle  1,  100;  the 
next  2,  200  ,    >       .'  and  10  at  the  end  1000. 

4.  If  the  first  I  is  estimated,  one  tenth  part,  the  Dfixi  2  is 
two  tentii  parts,  and  the  middle  1  is  one,  and  the  next  2  h 
two,  and  10  at  the  end  is  ten. 


tradesman's  guide.  2db 

5.  If  the;  first  1  is* counted  one  hundreth  part,  the  next  2 
is  two  hundreth  parts;  the  middle  1  is  ten  hundreth  parts  ;  the 
next  two  hundredth  part,  in  wiiich  case  the  middle  1  is  called 
ten  hundreth  part,  or  one  tenth  p^rt,  and  the  next  2  two  tenth 
parts;  and  10  at  the  end  is  counted  1- 

6.  As  the  figures  increase  or  diminish  i;i  value,  thus  like- 
wise, must  the  intermediate  strokes  or  subdivisions  ;  that  is, 
if  the  first  1  at  the  left  hand  is  counted  1,  then  2  ne<t  follow- 
ing is  2  and  each  subdivision  hetrreen  them  is  one  tenth  part, 
and  in  like  manner  to  the  middle  1,  which  in  this  case  is  10, 
the  next  is  20  ;  then  observe,  tlie  longer  strokes  between  1 
and  2  must  be  counted  from  the  centre  1,  eleven,  twelve, 
where  there  is  a  brass  pin;  then  13.  14.  15,  sometimes  a-lon- 
ger  stroke  than  the  rest  ;  then,  IG.  17.  IS.  19.  20,  at  the 
iigure  2;  and  the  same  method  is  to  be  adopted  in  regard  to 
the  short  strokes,  between  the  figures  2  and  3  and  4  and  5 
d:c.  which  are  to  be  counted  as  unites. 

7.  If  one  at  the  left  hand  is  10,  the  figirres  between  it"and 
the  middle  1  are  common  tens ;  the  subdivisions  between 
each  figure,  unites :  from  the  iiriddlo  1  to  10  at  t1ie  end,  each 
figure  is  hundrelhs  ;  and  between  these  figures  each  longer 
division  is  ten.  By  attending  to  these  directions  it  will  be 
easy  to  find  the  divisions  representing  a  given  number. 

LJxa^npIe  1.  Suppose  the  point  representing  tiie  number  l2 
is  required — take  the  division  at  the  figure  1  in  the  middle 
for  the  first  figure  of  l2  ;  and  for  the  second  figure,  count  two 
tenths  on  longer  strokes  to  the  right  hand,  and  the  last  is  the 
point  representing  l2  where  the  brass  pin  is  fixed. 

2.  Suppose  the  number  22  is  required  ;  the  first  figure 
begins  2.  1 — take  the  division  to  the  figuie  2  and  for  the 
sec(Uid  figure  count  two  tenths  onward,  which  is  the  point 
'•''nresenting  22. 

3.  Suppose  172s  is  required — take  the  middle  1  for  the 
...ot  figure  1  ;  for  7  count  onward  as  before  which  is  1700; 
and  as  the  remaining  figjures  are  28  or  nearly  30,  not**  the 
point  whicii  is  8-l0  nearly,  for  the  distance  between  the  marks 
7«fe  8,  the  point  representing  1728. 

4.  When  the  point  which  represents  435  is  required,  from 
the  4  in  the  second  interval  count  towards  5  on  the  right  ; 
three  of  the  larger,  and  one  of  the  smaller  divisions,  the 
smaller  being  half  way  between  the  marks  3  and  4,  which  is 
the  division  denoting  435  ;  and  thus  with  other  numbers, 
which  is  easily  efi'ected  with  a  little  practice. 


1l§6  *nfi    ARTISI-    ANiJ 

The  frations  foanc!  in  this  line  must  be  called  decimals,  or  if  olbtf* 
wise,  they  are  not,  must  b«3  reduced  to  decimals  which  is  readily  done 
by  exlondin^  the  compasses  from  the  denommatoi,  to  the  numerator, 
the  extent  of  whicii,  if  laid  in  the  same  way  from  1  in  the  midciie  or 
right  hand,  will  reach  to  ine  decimal  required. 

Example.  The  decimal  fraction  equal  to  3-4  is  required; 
extend  frcm  4  to  3,  which  extent  wll  reach  tVoni  1  on  the 
middle  to  75  towards  the  left  hand;  thus,  in  i^ke  manner  of 
any  other  vulgar  fraction. 

The  method  of  pe.  forming  Multiplication  on  this  line, 
is  by  extending  from  1  to  the  muUipiier,  the  extent  oi  whiclv 
will  reach  from  the  multiplicand  to  the  product. 

Example.  Find  the  product  of  l6  nrtultiplied  by  4;  extend 
from  1  to  4;  the  extent  will  reach  from  16  to  64  th<3  required 
product. 

For  Division  extend  from  the  divisor  to  Unity;  the  ext^lfit 
will  reach  from  the  dividend  to  the  quotient. 

Example.  Required  to  divide  64  by  4;  extend  from  4  to  1 
which  extent  will  reach  from  64  to  16  the  quotient 

By  the  Rule  of  Three,  questions  are  solved  on  this  line. 

Example.  Extend  from  the  first  to  the  second  line,  which 
extent  will   reach  from  the  third  to  the  fourth  or  answer. 

It  bhoald  be  noticed  that  by  extending  to  the  left  from  the  first  num- 
ber or  term  to  the  second,  you  must  also  extend  to  the  left  from  the 
third  to  the  lourth,  and  thus  contrawiee. 

Example.  If  7  inches  are  the  diameter  of  a  circle,  and  21^ 
in  circumference,  what  is  the  circumference  of  another  circle 
14  inches  in  diameter?  Extend  from  7  to  22,  which  extent 
will  reach  from  14  to  44  the  same  way. 

The  superficial  contents  of  any  Parallelogram  is  found  by  extending 
from  1  to  the  breadth  ;  which  extent  will  reach  from  the  length  to  the^ 
superficial  contents. 

Example.  Suppose  a  board  15  inches  in  width  and  27  feet 
long,  extend  from  1  to  1  foot  3  inches,  or  1,25,  which  extent 
will  reach  from  27  feet  to  33,75,  the  superficial  contents. 

The  solid  contents  of  a  Bale  or  Box  is  found  by  extending  from  1  to 
the  breadth,  which  extent  will  reach  from  the  depth  to  a  fourth  number; 
and  the  extent  from  1  to  that  fourth  number,  will  reach  from  ihe length 
to  the  solid  contents. 

Example  1.  The  solid  contents  of  a  square  pillar  is  re- 
quired, length,  21  ft.  9  in.  breadth  1  foot  3  inches. 

The  extent  from  1  to  1,25  reaches  from  1,25  the  deplh,  t© 
1?56   the  contents  of  one  foot  in  length. 


TRADESMAN'S  GVIDE.  20*? 

2d.  The  extent  from  1  to  1,56,  reaches  from  the  lengtb 
21,75,  to  33,9  or  nearly  34,  the  salid  contents  in  feet. 

3.  To  find  the  solid  contents  of  a  piece  of  timber  1,25  feet 
wide,  and  0,56  feet  deep,  and  36  feet  long. 

Extend  from  1  to  7,  which  extent  will  reach  from  36  tm 
25,2,  the  solid  contents. 

The  tonnage  of  bales  may  be  ascertained  by  this  method,  by  being 
divided  by  50,  gives  the  answer. 

A  TABLE  OP  BOARD   MEASURE 

Extending   fron  4   to    100   feet  in   length    and  36*inches  in 

width. 
Illustration, — Draw  out  the  slide  to  the  place  where  36 
coincides  with  12  on  the  fixed  part  : — count  the  first  1  an  the 
fixed  part  lO  ;  begin  at  4,  on  the  fixed  part  4,  so  on  to  10  at 
the  center,  nnd  thus  to  HK)  on  the  right  hand  to  A — begin  oft 
the  slide  at  4  and  reckon  at  different  lengths — 

Fixed  part  "^locoi^ooooju-^ojoocoooiooooicoo* 

1-^ 

Slide  ^^^Tl^S)S'^$5'^^<^'^'=='»^'='»'='>vr5ooo 

Miscellarteous  Examples, 

1.  There  are  42  feet  in  a  board  14  feet  long,  36  inches 
wide  ;  how  many  feet  in  27  boards  of  the  same  dimensions? 
draw  ihe  sh'de  to  the  place  where  27  coincides  with  the  centre 
I  ;  opposite  42  on  the  fixed  part  is  the  answer  1 134,  on  the 
slide. 

2.  A  log  I2  feet  long,  24  inches  in  diameter,  cuts  15  boards, 
20  inches  broad — draw  out  tlie  slide  to  the  place  where  20 
will  be  oposite  12 — 20  is  the  answer  for  one  board — draw 
out  the  slide  lill  15  comes  against  the  center  1  on  the  fixed 
part,  and  against  20  on  the  fixed  part  is  300,  the  answer  in 
board  measure,  on  the  slide. 

3.  A  los^  2  feet  in  diameter  and  under — 2  inches  on  each  side 
allowed  for  slab,  1-5  for  sawcalf,  1  board  for  wane — from  24  to 
36  inches  in  diametej,  3  inches  for  the  slab,  1-5  for  sawcalf^ 
and  two  boards  for  wane. 

4.  A  log  28  inches  at  the  small  end,  will  cut  18  boards, 
only  16  measured — draw  out  the  sli<^e  till  22,  the  breadth  of 
the  board  comes  against  12 — and  against  14,  the  length  on 
the  fixed  part,  is  the  answer  25  3-4  for  one  board  on  the  slide; 
now  draw  out  the  slide  till  16,   the  number  of  boards,  cojttb 


^98  THE    ARTIST   AN© 

ftgainst  the  center  I :  to  find  the  residue;,  say  the  log  is  14  fcr. 
long,  the  answer  m  the  slide  is  414  feet. 

5.  A  log  14  feet  long,  36  inches  at  the  small  end  slabed, 
leaves  the  board  30  inches  wide  ;  1-5  for  sawcnlf,  leaves  24 
and  2  wane  leaves  '22 — draw  out  the  slide  till  30  comes 
against  12  on  the  fixed  part,  and  under  14  on  the  fixed  part, 
is  found  35  on  the  slide;  then  draw  out  the  slide  till  22 
comes  against  the  center  I  ;  and  against  35  will  be  found  770 
©n  the  slide,  which  is  the  answer  for  a  log  36  inches  in  diam- 
eter and  14  feet  long. 

6.  A  log  20  inches  at  the  small  end,  and  16  feet  long  cuts  13^ 
boards  wliich  are  16  inche.%  wide,  and  only  12  measured — 
how  many  feel — answer — 255. 

7.  A  log  16  inches  in  diameter  14  feet  long  cuts  nine  boards, 
and  only  8  measured  ;  makes  112  feet  on  the  slide. 

Method  of  measuring  Square  timber  in  sol  id  feet. 
Illustration.  Draw  cut  ihe  sl.de  to  the  left  hcino,  till  the 
length  of  the  rimbor  found  on  the  slide  comcides  with  12  oft 
the  ffirt  line — ihen  of>posite  tlte  inches,  the  stick  is  square  on 
the  girt  line,  and  the  number  of  cubic  feet  on  the  slide  is 
found. 

Example,  To  measure  a  stick  of  timber  60  feet  long  and 
from  5  lo  40  inches  square — draw  the  slide  to  the  left  hand, 
ti?i  6  on  the  slide  calling  it  60  ;  coincides  with  12  on  the  girt 
line,  and  against  5  on  the  slide,  is  0  42-l00h  on  the  giit  line, 
the  same  answer  is  found  by  drawing  the  slide  to  the  right, 
but  the  divisions  are  not  so  easily  distinguished  without  much 
practice. 

By  letting  the  slide  remain  all  the  questions  proposed  above 
snay  be  solved  in  a  short  time;  the  answers  are  as  follows^ 
computing  the  timber  at  60  feet  in  length. 


TltADESMAN^S    GUIDE.  299 


Inches.  Cubic  feet. 

Inches.  Cubic  feet. 

Inches. 

.  Cubic  feet. 

square,    in  the  stick. 

square,  in  the  stick. 

square. 

in  ihe  stick. 

5           10,42 

13          70  1-2 

23. 

2'^0 

6         15. 

14          82 

23  1-2. 

231  3-4 

7        20. 42 

14  1-2   88 

24. 

242 

7  1-2  23  .-3 

15          94 

24  1-2 

250 

8          26  2-3 

15  1-2   loO  1-2 

25. 

260 

8  1-2  30  1-10 

16          1061-2 

26. 

28..'  1-2 

9        33  1-2 

17          120  1-3 

27. 

303 

9  1-2  37  2-3 

18          135 

28. 

327 

10      41  2-3 

18  1-2   142 

29. 

352 

10  1.246 

19          150 

30. 

375 

1 1        50.  42 

19  1-2   158 

31. 

402 

11  1-2  55 

20          16623 

32. 

4  6 

12        60 

20  1-2  174  2-3 

35. 

5  0 

121-2  65  1-5 

20  3-4.  180 

38. 

602 

21           184  2-3 

40. 

66^ 

22           202 

To  measure 

Hcicn  Timber  that 

is  not  square. 

HxamjAe,  I.  The  solid  feet  in  a  stick  of  timber,  50  ie^i  in 
length,  and  7  by  lO  inches — is  required — draw  out  ihe  slide 
till  50  coincides  wilh  I2  on  the  ihe  girt  line,  and  ,«gainsi  tlie 
thickness  7  iuches  found  on  the  girt  line,  17  is  found  on  the 
slide,  which  is  the  answer  at  7  inches  sn.uare — 3  times  7 — 11  ^ 
inches  will  remain,  and  50  feet  long  yet  to  find,  wiiich  to  ob- 
tain draw  the  slide  to  the  right,  till  2l'on  the  slide  coincides 
wilh  12  on  the  line  marked  A;  tlien  agansi  50,  the  lengih  tound 
on  A,  is  87  1-2  on  the  slide — this  must  be  divided  by  I2  and 
and  it  will  give  7  feet  3  1-2  inches  or  7  1-4  which  being  ad- 
ded to  the  l7,  gives  24  1-4  feet,  the  con  Lent ;  of  the  stick. 

2  To  find  the  solid  feet  in  a  stick  45  feet  long  ^7  inches 
wide,  22  inches  thick — draw  out  the  slide  till  45  on  the  slide 
coincides  with  I?  on  the  girt  line;  then  over  22  found  on  the 
girtlk\e  will  be  I5l  1-2  on  the  slide,  which  gives  the  dimen- 
sions of  a  stick  45  feet  long  and  t'-^  inches  square — now  5X 
22,  remain=^lIO,  which  find  on  the  slide,. and  let  it  coincide 
with  I  ?  on  A  ;  then  opposite  45  on  A  is  413  «>n  the  sltde, 
which  being  divided  by  12  gives  34  1-3  added  to  I5l  1-2  gives 
nearly  186  for  the  answer. 

5  To  find  the  solid  feet  in  a  stick  of  timber  60  feet  long 
30  inches  wide  and  14  inches  thick — draw  out  tKe  slide  till  60 
on  the  slide,    coincides  with  I2  on  the   girt  lino,    thea     over 


1^00 


irUE    AilTiST   ANU 


£4  on  the  girt  line  is  81  2-3  on  the  slide ;  by  doubling  this  ii 
gives  the  consents,  equal  to  28  by  11  and  the  2  left  is  2  by  14, 
which  is  1-7  of  14,  divide  8l  ^-3=11  2-3 — then  add  81  2-3, 
S{  2-3,  II  2  3=175  the  answer — >r  tinJ  the  avern  ^^e  square 
=  '0,5.  Then  fi>id  20,5  on  the  girt  line,  and  directly  ovei-  \i  on 
the  slide  is  175;  observing  to  draw  out  the  slide  till  the  length 
of  the  stick  in  feet  coincides  vviih  I2  on  the  girt  line. 

4  To  find  the  solid  feet  of  a  stick  of  timber,  ^5  feet  long 
^5  inches  wide  and  20  thick. 

Draw  out  the  slide  till  55  coincides  with  12  as  before,  then 
over  20  on  the  girt  line  is  nearly  153 — which  being  divided 
by  4  and  the  quotient  added,  19 1  1-3  feet  is  the  answer.  Or 
for  the  5  inches  left  say  5  times  20  is  lOO — the  square  root  of 
which  is:  lO  ;  no^  look  on  the  slide  over  10 — 38  1-3  is  found 
as  before— Or  cast  it  into  a  square — as  9  by  4  multiplipd 
gives  36 — the  square  root  of  which  is  Q  the  answer — or  oast 
the  log  into  board  measure,  by  drawing  the  slide  agairrst  30 
the  widtli,  on  the  slide  under  l2  on  the  fixed  pait  A — then 
under  60,  the  length  on  the  fixed  part,  is  150  on  the  slide,  the 
number  of  square  feet  in  one  board — then  lay  l4,  the  width 
on  the  slide,  under  1  on  the  fixed  part,  then  against  150  on 
the  fixed  part,  which  gives  2l00  feet  boards  on  the  slide — 
now  divide  by  12  by  drawing  1  on  the  slide,  against  12  on  the 
fixed  parr,  then  against  2; 00  on  the  fixed  pait  will  be  found 
175  on  the  slide,  ihe  answer  in  cubic  feet. 

Method  of  Gauging  round  timhei\ 
Illustration,  Let  the  gauge  point,  on  he  girt  line  be  l3,54 
inches — ^to  find  the  contents  of  a  stick,  bring  the  length  of  the 
timber  found  on  the  slide  to  coincide  with  the  gague  point — 
then  the  diameter  in  inches  or  parts,  found  on  the  girt  line, 
will  coincide  with  the  number  of  cubic  feet  on  the  slide. 

Ex.  Suppose  a  stick  l2  feet  long  and  15  inches  in  diam- 
eter— h  'w  many  cubic  fefil  against  15  inches  is  15  feet  and 
in  like  manner  air  linst  20,  26  1-2 — 30,59 — 35,80,8  feet. 

Some  ruleo  are  incorrect,  but  the  following  trial  will  prove  them. 
Pass  the  slide  to  the  ri^ht  hand  till  1  on  the  slide  coincides  with  2  on 
the  fixed  part,  wh«'n  2 -in  the  slide  should  coincde  with  4  on  the  fixed 
parN  continue  to  draw  th^  slide  till  1  coincides  with  3  on  the  fixed  pfirt 
then  2  .n  ij(r  slide  should  coincide  with  6  on  the  fixed  part,  till  1  or\ 
the  slidr^  c  )irH!:des  with  4  on  the  fixed  part  then  2  on  the  slide  should 
coincide  wl')  3  on  the  fix-^d  part — till  1  coincides  with  5,  then  2  will 
coincide  with  the  center  1 — till  I  coincides  with  5  1-2 — then  2  will  co- 
incide with  11— till  1  coincides  with  6 — then  2  will  coincide  vyith  12> 
and  contiaue  to  do  the  sam*-  till  you  have  ^one  throuuh  th.  Inn-,  and 
if  the  rule  is  correctly  graduated,  the  result  will  be  as  above  staled. 


tradesman's  guide.  301 

The  line  marked  SIN,  corresponds  to  the  Logarithmick 
sines  of  che  degrees  of  the  quadrant,  and  begins  at  the  left 
hand,  and  is  numbered  onward  to  the  right,  thus,  1.  2.  3.  4.  5. 
6.  7.  8.  9.  XO.  then  20.  30.  &.c.  ending  at  90o  at  a  brass 
centre  pin,  similar  as  at  the  right  hind  of  the  lines. 

The  line  marked  V  S  corresponds  to  the  Log.  Versed 
Sines  of  the  degrees  of  the  quadrant,  and  begins  at  th?^  right 
h;ind  opposite  90^^  on  the  sine  ;  and  numbered  onvard  to  the 
left,  thus,  10.  20.  30.  &c.  ending  at  the  left  hand,  at  about 
169°.  Each  of  the  subdivisions  from  10  to  30  is,  generally, 
two  degrees — from  thence  to  90,  are  single  degrees,  thence  to 
the    end,  each  degree  is  divided  into  lo  minutes. 

The  line  marked  TANG  corresponds  tj  the  Log.  Tangents 
of  the  degrees  of  tiie  quadrant  and  begins  at  the~left  hand, 
and  is  numbered  towards  the  right,  thus,  1.  2.  3.  4.  5.  to  10. 
20.  30.  40.  and  45.  at  a  fixed  brass  pin  under  §0°  on  the  sines 
— from  thence,  it  is  numbered  backwards  50.  60.  70.  80.  to 
89  ending  at  the  left  hand  where  it  begins  at  one  degree. 
The  subdivisions  are  much  like  those  of  the  sines. 

If  you  havG  an  extent  in  your  dividers  to  b^  sot  off  from  any  number 
less  than  45  deg.  on  the  linf  of  tanirents  towards  the  right,  and'  is 
found  to  reach  beyond  the  mark  4.>d«or.  observe  how  far  it  extends 
beyond  that  mark,  and  net  it  oft*  towards  the  left,  and  mark  the  degro© 
it  ialls  upon,  the  number  sought,  wh.ch  must  exceed  45  dv.g.  On  the 
contrary,  if  you  are  to  set  off  a  distance  to  the  right,  irom  a  number 
greater  than  45  deg.  you  must  proceed  as  before,  remembering  that  the 
answer  will  be  less  than  45  (ic'g  and  considering  the  degrees  always 
more  than  45  deg  precisely  as  if  they  were  marked  on  the  continuation 
©f  lh«  line  to^the  right  hand  cf  45  deg. 

The  line  marked  JMER,  (meridional  parts)  begin  at  the 
right  hand  ;  is  numbered  10.  20.  30  to  the  left  hand,  ending 
at  87  deg.  which  with  the  line  marked  E  P  (equal  parts)  are 
used  together,  only  ir»  Mercator's  sailing.  The  upper  line 
shows  the  degrees  of  the  meridian,  or  latitude,  in  Mercators 
chart,  which  corresponds  to  the  degrees  of  longitude  on  the 
lower  line. 

Grindstones,  are  usually  sold  at  the  quanies  by  the  stone 
which  is  computed  at  ^4  inches  diameter  and  4  thick.  Rule, 
multiply  the  square  of  the  diameter,  in  inches,  by  the  thick- 
ness in  inches,  and  divide  the  product  by  2304  which  gives 
the  answer. 

To  find  the  number  of  stone  in  one  of  36  in.  diameter  and 
8  in.  :hick;  36  by  36 — 1296  square,  by  8,  103S8, which  divided 
KY  2304—4  i-2  ang.  •^S 


SOZ  THE    ARTIST   AN1> 

Bi/  th^,  Gunters  rule,  by  CK^aiis  of  the  line  of  numbers. 
Extend  from  48  to  the  diaineier  ;  continue  ihut  extent  three 
times  its  length  froin  the  tliickneiis  and  ir  will  reach  to  the 
number  of  stones  required  ;  so  in  theforegojiig  exiimple,  extend 
from  48  to  36  che  diamefer  ;  Ci>ntini:e  ih;  textent  three  iimesits 
length  from  the  thickness  wiiich  is  8  inches,  and  it  will  reach 
to  4.  5.  or  4  ^-2  tiu*  answer. 

There  is  a  line  marked  iVIL  on  the  Gunters  rule  which  is  joined  to  a 
Hne  ot  cords  and  shovvd  hyw  rniny  miic!*  of  eastinirs  and  wastiwrs  cor- 
reaponds  to  a  degree  of  ionrruade  in  every  degree  of  latitude  ;  and  as 
this  is  found  also  oa  iau:it  of  ih  phiia  scales,  it  is  not  d«eiaod-nec  jssary 
to  explain  its  uses,  or  itie  cominoa  prooleins  of  nautical  asvronomy  par^ 
ticularly  as  they  arc  more  acuraie  to  perform  by   Logarithm*. 

Op  the  sliding  Rule. 
This  Rule  is  of  the  sune, dimensions  of  the  common  Gun- 
ler*s  Rule.  The  fixed  part,  has  similar  lines,  which  is  used 
with  dividers  in  the  same  manner,  as  has  been  described,  it 
being  sufficient  to  observe  there  are  two  lines  »)f  numbers,  viz. 
a  line  of  Log uithmick  sines,  and  a  Ime  of  lo^arithmick  tan- 
gents on  the  slide. 

The  slide  is  designed  to  be  shifted  so  as  to  fix  either  face 
of  it  on  either  side  of  -.he  fixed  ,>art  of  the  rule,  as  the  nature 
of  the  question  required  co  be  solved  may  be,  vvhich  if  question* 
in  arithmetic,  irigoriom-Jtry,  &c.  let  the  proportion  be  so  sta- 
ted, that  the  first  and  tUJrd  terms  are  alike,  and  of  course  the 
second  and  fourth  terms  will  agree — then  bring  the  first  term 
of  the  analogy  on  the  fixed  pait  opposite  the  second  term  on 
the  slide,  or,  the  first  nnd  third  term  mav  be  found  on  th© 
slide,    and     he    second    and    fourrh  on  rhe  fixed  part. 

In  multiplication  and  divinion,  unity  should  be  considered  as  one  of 
the  terras  of  analogy. 

Multiplicaton, — By  multiplication,  set  I  on  the  line  of  num- 
bers of  the  fixed  part  opposite  one  of  the   factors  on  the  line 
of  numbers  on  the  slide — then  r;^ainst    the  other  factor  on  th« 
fixed  part  will  be  found  the  product  i»n  the  slide. 
Miscellaneous  flxamjtlts. 

To  find  the  product  of  5  by  12 — draw  the  slide  out  till  1 
on  the  fixed  part  coincides  vvith  5  oa  thf^  slide— «then  opposite 
12  on  the  fixed  part  will  be  found  6C=the  product  on  th© 
slide. 

The  prodqct  of  50  by  12  required — ^Aiot  moving  the  slidle^ 


tradesman's   OViD£.  SOS 

count  6  to  be  50 — count  12  as  before — then  opposite  I2  oa 
the  fixed  part  will  be  found  600  on  the  slide. 

Place  th&  slide  as  before;  estimate  5  for  500  and  12  at  1200, 
and  the  slide  gives  600,000  for  the  answer. 

The  product  of  17  by  25 — draw  out  the  slide  till  1  on  the 
fixed  part  coincides  with  17  on  the  slide — then  opposite  25 
on  the  fixed  part  is  found  425  on  the  slide. 

17  by  I7--draw  out  the  slide  till  1  on  the  fixed  part  coin- 
cides with  17  on  the  slide — then  opposite  17  on  the  fixed 
part  is  289  on  the  slide. 

Place  the  slide  as  before — opposite  50  on  the  fixed  part 
will  be  found  850  on  the  slide. 

The  slide  laying  at  17  as  before,  reckon  50  or  5  to  be  op- 
posite 500  on  the  fixed  part,  and  8500  is  found  on  the    slide. 

Place  the  slide  as  before,  count  17  to  be  1700,  count  3  to 
be  300  on  the  fixed  pan;  then,  opposite  300  on  the  fixed  part 
will  be  found  510,000  on  the  slide. 

21  1-2  by  20 — draw  out  the  slide  till  the  center  1  on  the 
fixed  part  coincides  with  2l  1-2  on  the  slide — then  opposite 
20  on  the  fixed  part  will  be  found  430  on  the  slide 

5  by  2  1-2 — reckon  the  first  1  on  the  fixed  part  to   be  I-IO 
— the  center  I  count  1 — draw  out  the  slide  till  1  on  the  fixed 
part  coincides  with   5  on   the    slide — opposite   2  1-2  on  the 
fixed  part  will  be  found  12  »-2  on  the  slide. 
Division, 

Illustration, — Place  the  divisor  on  the  line  of  numbers  of 
the  fixed  part  opposite  1  on  the  slide,  then  against  the  divi- 
dend f>und  on  the  fixed  part,  will  be  found  the  quotient  on 
the  slide. 

Ex.  1.  Required  to  divide  60  by  5.  Set  5  on  the  fixed 
part  against  1  on  the  slide  ;  then  against  60  on  the  fixed  part 
is  12  =  the  quotient  on  the  slide. 

Ex.  2.  400  by  27 — set  27  on  the  fixed  part  opposite  1  on 
the  slide;  then  against  400  oa^the  fixed  part  will  be  found  l4 
22-27  or  about  14  4-5  on  the  slide. 

Not  moving  the  slide,  and  placed  as  in  example  2,  we  have 
the  following  result,  having  gone  the  length  of  the  fixed  part 
to  A,  on  the  statement  : 

Divisors  27 — dividend  400=quotient  14  4-5  or  22-27-:-500 
=  18  1-2  or  18  14-27-: -600=22  2-9  or  22  i.4-:-700=25 
25-27  or  26  nearly-:-800=29  17-27  or  29  2-3-:-850=31 
13-27  or  31  l-2-:-900=33  l-3~:-1000=37  1-27  or  37, 

To  divide  any  number  from  700  to  6000,  that  is,  at  B   on 

56* 


S04  Till:  ARTIST  ANiy 


the  slide,  the  full  extent  ol'  ihe  sl:ac.  From  the  stnlement 
di^w  out  the  si?  .e  on  A,  to  ihe  leit  iiand  oi'  ihe  cent/e  1, 
to  he  figure  6,  .i'pjeseiiijjig  60  on  the  fixed  part,  over  1  on 
tlio  slido,  -iX'ii  aga;i).si  7  rcjh».?»onirnu  700  on  ihe  fixed  pai  f, 
will  be  fouiiJ  ii  ;--3  on  the  slide  ;  not  ni  »V2ng  the  slide  we 
will  iind  die  foUowjajz  answer.^: —    ^ 

D  visjrs  c-died6!0 — •Lvui;;nd  700.  quotient,  11  2-3~:~800 
—  s3  -  -:_c)00"  5-:-'000=  6/-3-:- :000=::r3:n-3-:-3vjOU 
50-:-4000=:l>6  i-3-:~5000=S3  l-o-:-600d^=i<JU,  Ending 
at  xj  on  iheiighi  hand  of  tno  i>l;de. 

Bi/  the  Rut'  of  Three. 
MissceUaneoiis  KxampUs.  If  3  lbs.  beef  cost  21  cts.  what 
will  fioiii  30  io  iOO  U)s.  I — oring  3  on  the  letJer  A,  of  \he 
fixed  pa  i,  on  die  line  of  numbers  against  21  on  the  line 
marlved  B  on  ihe  slide — :hen  aj^imst  30  on  xha  fixed  part  on 
A,  will  be  found  on  die  slide,  $  MO — .nd  opposite  35  lbs. 
will  be  $2.43  iO— 2.S0;  50— J.jO;  60— 4.20  ;  75—5.25; 
90—6.30;   100—7.00. 

U  4  1-2  yds.  cost  $23,  whit  will  20  yds.  1  Draw  out  the 
slide,  till  23  coincides  with  4  1-2  on  the  fixed  part — dien  op- 
posiie  20  on  the  fixed  part  will  be  found  $l0/,  on  the  slide 
— by  not  moving  the  slide  at  A,  on  the  fixed  part,  lOO  yds. 
will  be  found  io  iho  answer  on  die  slide=$5. 11. 

If  4  lbs.  of  sugar  cost  $1.50,  what  will  i-0  lbs.]  bring  4 
on  th3  line  of  c  irnoers  on  die  fixed  part,  opposi  e  $1.50  on 
the  line  of  numbers  on  the  slide — tlien  opposi  e  .0  on  the 
line  of  numbers,  on  he  fixed  part  will  be  found  §7.50  on  the 
slide — hy  not  moving  the  slide  opposite  10,  on  A  is  found 
— 15.00  on  the  slide,  and  against  80,  on  A  is  found  $30,  and 
at  A,  100  lbs.  cm  the  slide,  on  B  is  found  $37.50  — A  BCD 
on  the  right  of  the  scale. 

To  find  the  circumferance  of  a  circle  the  diameter  of  which 
is  ^'0. 

Draw  ont  the  slide  till  22  on  the  sli«!o  coincides  with  7  on 
ihe  hxad  part,  then  against  -'0  on  the  fixed  part  is  found 
6'i'0-7or  () .  3-4  «>n  the  slide — let  the  sPde  remain,  and  against 
25  on  the  fixed  part,  is  78  4-7  on  the  slide— and  against  60 
on  the  fixed  part  is  188  4-7  on  ihe  shde — an^  against  100  at 
A,  on  the  fixed  part^-^  is  314    -7  on  the  slide. 

If  1  yd.  cost  $9.00  what  wdl  5  16  cost? — draw  out  the 
slide,  tid  9  on  the  slide  coincides  W'lh  16  on  the  fixed  part, 
tlien,  opposite  5  on  the  fixed  part  is  found  on  the, slide  $^.83 


tradesman's  «uii>e  305 

Examples, 

Board  Measure.  To  measure  a  board  or  plank  12  feefc 
Ion??  and  12  inches  wide  : — 12  on  the  fixed  part  to  the  right  of 
the  centre  1  is  reckoned  12  feet  in  length — but  12  on  the 
slid«  giv  is  12  to  12,  or   12  feet. 

12  feet  long  and  19  inches  wide — draw  out  the  slide  till  19 
coincides  with  12  on  the  fixed  part ;  that  n.akes  the  board  19 
feet=the  answer  on  the  slide — 19  inches  the  answer  in  feet. 

14  feet  long — 20  inches  wide — draw  out  the  slide  till  20 
inches  coincides  with  12  on  the  fixed  part,  and  against  14  on 
the  fixed  part,  is  23  1-3  fe^it  the  answer. 

22  feet  long  20  inches  wide — draw  out  the  slide  till  20  in- 
ches coincides  with  12  on  the  fixed    part,  and  against  22   on 
the  fixed  part  is  36  3-4  feet  on  the  slide,  the  answer. 
GUAGING. 

Illustrations,  First,  find  the  number  of  cubic  inches  in 
the  body,  the  contents  can  be  determined  in  gallons,  bushels, 
&.C.  by  dividing  the  number  of  cubic  inches  in  a  gallon,  bush- 
els, &c.  respectively.  A  wine  gallon  by  which  most  liquors 
are  measured,  contains  231  cubic  inches.  A  beer,  ale,  or  milk 
gallon  contains  282  cubic  inches.  A  bushel  of  corn,  malt,  &c. 
contains  2150,4  cubic  inches.  This  measure  is  subdivided 
into  8  gallons,  each  of  which  contains  268,8  cubic  inches'. 

In  the  following  rules,  the  dimensions  of  a  cask  is  suppose^!  to  be  givea. 
in  inches,  and  decimal  parfs  of  an  inch. 

To  find  the  number  of  gallons  or  bushels  in  a  vessel  of  a 
cubic  form,  divide  the  cube  of  one  of  the  sides  in  inches,  by 
23l,  and  it  gives  wine  gallons;  divide  the  same  cube  by  282 
and  it  gives  beer  gallons;  and  divide  by  2150,4,  and  it  gives 
the  number  of  bushels  the  vessel  will  hold. 

Example,  To  require  the  number  of  wine  and  beer  gal- 
lons, also  the  bushels  contained  in  a  box,  the  sides  of  which 
is  50  inches.  Multiply  50  by  50=2500  by  50^=125000 
dividedby  231=541  1-4 gallons,  wine  measure;  now,  125,000 
by  28^=443,26  gallons  beer  measure  ;  again,  125,000.0  by 
2150.4=58.1   bushels. 

To  find  the  number  of  gallons  or  bushels  contained  in  a  bod^ 
of  a  cylindrical  form. 

Illustration,  Multiply  the  square  of  the  diameter  of  either 
end  or  base  by  the  length  of  the  cylender,  and  divide  the  pro- 
duct by  294.12  and  the  quotient  will  be  the  number  of  win© 
gallons;    divide  the  same  number  by  359,05,  which  will  g^iv« 


306  THE    ARTIST    AND 

the  number  of  beer  or  aie  g  lions  ;  and   Hvido  tbe  product  by 
i^/'Jci,   \iid  iiie  qjoi;cni  w\d  be  the  nujuber  oi  Dusliels. 

The  above  uuuTbers  for  divisors  are  toimd  by  dividing  231,  282, 
2150. 4»  oy  tr»o  decimal,  7854 — cwo  cypneis  are  Jithxcd  in  ine  rollowiiig 
•xaiupie  lo  the  ^routjct  to  v^quai  Jit  nuaibei  ol  dtciuials  in  the  divisor, 
w<iicli  .niKe.  i.ic  qav.ui;ni  the  nuiiio-r  oi^ailons,  bal  Lhe  oUicr  cyphcra 
added  to  me  remainder  giv«^8  Gecimai5». 

Exumplt.  riit3  iiuniDei  ol'gcJlons  required  in  a  cylinder, 
the  <Ji.*iiieter  ut  ii^-base  being  five  leev^'oO  inches,  and  Ma 
lecjgui  i-i  t:'e;=  :  do  jnchv.^s — ri  hv  oO=:  J6i>0  by  ^56=56  i  OUO, 
the  div:.a;  nd  divided  by  4  v4.  i  :.=  i^iXJ.ii  answer. 
To  jiad  ttie.  number  of  gtilLias  oi  basnets  contained  in  a  hody 
oj  tktjorm  oj  a  pyramid  or  cone, 

lUattration.  Mu]u|jty  ihe  dit-a  of  the  base  of  the  pyra- 
niia  or  coue  Dy  oi;e  iiiird  of  its  perpondicular  heighv — the 
product  divided  by  ioi  gives  \he  answer  in  wine  gal]<'n3  ;  fli- 
vide  by  "2^  Z  gives  the  answer  in  beer  measure;  by  :iii50.4 
the  answer  is  gjven  in  bushels. 

£lxamplc.  The  number  of  beer  gallons  required,  contained 
in  a  pyramid,  the  ba^tr  oO  inches  square,  porj>cud:cular 
hoi^h:  6J  inches. 

30  inches,  side  of  the  square  base  multiplied  by  30=pro- 
duct  900  muhiplied  by  20  one  third  of  tbe  height  =::laOOO 
divided  by  :282  inches  in  a  beer  gallon- — answer  63.8. 

The  area  of  a  basp,  whither  square,  trini»;;^ular  or  circular,  or  any 
othor  ibrm  —multiplied  by  one  ihird  the  perpendicular  heighls  giveg  its 
Boltdily. 

To  find  the  number  of  gallons  or  bushels,  contained  in  ft 
vess;;!  in  the  form  of  a  ^rustum  of  a  cone. 

Illustration.  Miiltiply  »he  top  and  bottom  diameters  to- 
gether, and  to  the  product  add  one  ihiid  of  ihe  square  of  the 
diHeience  of  the  same  diameters  ;  tiien  miihiply  this  sum  by 
the  perpendicular  heigln,  and  divide  the  product  by  >'9<?.  1^ 
for  wine  gallon's — 359.05  for  beer  g^^fllohs-:    273S  for  bushels. 

Example,  To  fmd  the  contents  m  wine  gallons  of  a  cone, 
the  botiom  of  which  is  40  inches,  ihe  top  30  inches,  and  the 
perpendicular  hei:,hl  60  inches. 

Forty,  bottom  diameter,  tlivided  by  30,  top  diameter  = 
difference  '0,  mulii}>lied  bv  i  0=100  square  of  difference,  di- 
vided by  3=13.3,  one  third  \\.q  ^quaf  *.  Au'"ain,  3'),  top  di- 
ame'pr,  muhiplied  by  forty,  bo-tom  diam(*te?=:  J  ^00 ;  to 
which  add  33.3,  tlie  square:  prr»duct  1233/1,  mi'tiplied  by 
six.v,  perpendicular  h-ich  1  =  73998.00  divided  b^  294.12, 
product  251*59  gallons,  wine  measure. 


T^o  Gauge  a  Cask, —  illustration,  Meisure  the  head  di- 
ttmetor,  tiu?l  shjtild  thert?  be  any  diflforcnce  in  the  heads,  add. 
both  toi^echer  and  divido,  by  2,  thus  obtaining'  an  average — - 
maasure  also  the  diameter  at  tbo  buiig,  takiug  the  measure 
inside  jf  the  cask,  then  measure  the  length  of  the  cask  mak- 
ing proper  aUowance  for  the  thickness  of  th?i  heads— havin*;^ 
these  measures — lO'.v  take  the  dillerence  between  the  head 
and  hMrijr  diameters,  multiply  this  ditierence  ky  62  and  add 
ihe  prodiict  to  the  head  di^meter^  the  sum  will  be  the  mean 
diameter — multVply  the  square  of  this  by  the  len2:th  of  the 
cask,  and  divide  the  prodiict  by  234.12  for  wine  o59.05  for 
beer  and  by  2738  for  busheis. 

The  deelmil,  62  is  eonfimonly  used  by  ^aiigGrs,  to  find  thio  mean 
cliameter  ;  bat  if  the  slaves  are  ntiirly  strai<yht,  it  would  be  more  accu- 
sate  to  use  55or  less,  btitif  on  th^;  contrary  ihoy  are  very  carvious,  64, 
05  or  more  should  be  used,  hut  when  the  staves  are  straight, the  decimal 
51  may  be  ru  >3t  pro;)er  Li  every  case  ^'reat  attcRtiori  shoiud  be  given 
to  llie  make  of  the  cask. 

Example,  Suppose  the  hung  diameter  of  a  cask  is  34.5 
the  head  diamoier  30.7,  tifter  aihwvijig  for  the  thickness  of 
the  heads — '53.3  inches  the  length,  how  njany  wine  frallons 
does  It  contain?  34.5  bun^  diameter,  su])stracted  by  50i7  the 
head  diameter — -product  3,8  mutiplied    by  the  decimal,  62— 

product  1^356 

30.7  head  diameter. 


33  056  mean  do. 
33.056 

These  fi^jurca  multipled  make  1092.699.136        C  call  the  decimal, 

1092.67    t  .  67 

59.  }3  len^h  oa  the  iaaide. 

327801 
9S31030 
546:535 


*^d4.12  I  645003.101  1  219.3  ans. 

<jaugers  use  callipers  in  taking  dimensions  of  casks  but  a  common 
pule  ')r  a  staff  may  be  used  :  but  a  more  expeditious  way  is  by  the  line 
ei  numbers  on  Guuter's  Scale,  or  the  Sliding  Rule. 

7'o  Gauge  casks  by  the  line  of  nnmhers  on  the  GunUr'^ s  scaU 
or  sliding  rule, 
JUastratlon,     Make  murks  on  the   scale,  on  the   callipers. 


$0S  THE    AtlTIS'f    ANS> 

:\t  tlie  points  17.15  and  18,95  inches  and  at  52.33  inch^ei?, 
which  liUnjbers  are  the  square  roots  of  294.1^?,  and  359.05, 
and  of  2738  re?pectivfc!y— -genorally  a  brass  pin  is  fixed  on 
the  callipers  ai  each  ot  these  points — having  your  scale  thus 
prepared — extend  fror.)  1  icvvards  the  left  hand  to  62,  or  less, 
if  the  staves  be  nearly  straight — that  extent  will  reach  from 
the  difference  between  the  head  and  bung  diameters  to  a 
number  at  the  left  hand,  which  number  added  to  the  head 
diameter,  w'lW  give  the  mean  diameter — then  put  one  foot  of 
(he  comiasses  on  the  guage  point:=17.15,  for  wine  gallons, 
18.95,  for  beer  gallons,  and  52.33  for  bushels — and  extend 
the  other  foot  of  the  compasses  to  a  number  denoting  the 
mean  diameter — this  extent  turned  over  twice  the  same  way 
fi'om  the  length  of  the  cask,  will  give  the  number  of  gallons 
or  bushels  respectively. 

In  the  preceding  illiistratton,  tlie  extent  from  1  io()'2,  will  reach  from 
3.8  to  2.4  nearly,  which  added  to  30. 7  ^rivcs  the  mean  diamcter=33.1, 
then  the  extent  from  the  gauge  point,  J7.ir)  to  33.1  turned  over  tvvic'tt 
from  the  length  59.3  will  reach  to  220.9  wine  gallons — to  use  theguagf^ 
point  J  8.95,  the  answer  will  be  in  beer  gallons,  or  52  33  the  answer  will 
be  in  bushels. 

Gnaging  casks  hi/  ihe  sliding  rule. 
Illustration,  On  the  line  marked  D,  is  the  guage  point 
marked  VV  G  where  are  17.15  inches,  a  little  to  the  right  of 
the  long  mark,  that  is  over  the  centre  of  G — also  over  A  G 
on  the  same  scale  is  18.95  or  18  19-20  ver}-  near  the  long 
mark  over  the  centre  of  G  ;  here  is  the  gauge  point  for  tiie 
ale  or  beer  gallons,  as  the  other  was  for  wine  gallons — now 
set  the  length  of  the  <:ask  found  on  the  slide  agaiiist  the 
gauge  point  on  D,  and  against  the  mean  diameter  on  D  the 
answer  will  be  found  on  the  slide — allow  for  the  thickness  of 
both  heads-  1.1  J-2  or  2  inches  in  measuring  the  length  of  a 
cask,  according  to  the  size  of  the  cask. 

Take  the  head  diameter  close  to  the  outside,  and  for  small  casks  add 
3-10  of  an  inci] — for  casks  containing  30,  or  40,  or  50,  add  4-10  inch; 
for  larger,  add  5  or  G  tenths,  and  the  same  will  be  very  near  the  head 
diameter  within.  In  taking  the  bung  diameter,  observe  in  moving  the 
rod  or  staff  backward  and  forward,  if  there  is  any  \'ariation  as  to  the 
thickness  of  the  staves  oppcsitc  the  bung  whether  some  are  thinner  or 
thicker  than  they  ought  to  be,  in  which  case  make  the  necessary  allows 
once. 

Example,  How  many  gallons  will  a  cask  contain  the  bung 
diameter  of  which  is  34.5  inches,  the  head  diameter  30.7. 


34-r> 
30.7 

2  I  65.2 

32.6 
5 

33.1  mean  diameter. 
Length  of  the  cask  within— 59.3 — now  draw  out  the  slide 
till  59.3  on  the  slide  coincides  with  the  gauge    point  on    the 
girt  line,  for  wine  gallons,  and  against  33,1  on  the  girt  line  is 
found  on  the  slide  isi20.9  wine  gallons. 

The  g'dnge  point  for  bushels  is  placed  on  the  girt  line  at 
13  85-1000  inches,  as  it  would  run  off  the  rule  on  the  righr. 
For  the  points  for  gallons,  reverse  it  back  to  the  loft  of  those 
points. 

Illustration.  Draw  out  the  slide,  till  the  length  of  a  square 
box  coincides  with  the  gauge  point  on  the  girt  line,  opposite 
13  383-1000  inches  ;  then,  against  the  nunibe*-  of  inches  th© 
box  is  square,  found  on  the  girt  line  ;  and  on  the  slide  the 
number  of  bushels. 

Example.   Suppose  a  box  7.75  inches  square  and  30  feet  in 
length,  also  begining  at  7.75  andexiendins^  to  40  inches  square, 
•siauanq      <^^  ^^      ^-^      «^<^«  »> 

ill  be  found  S        cc  o  '^  o  I-  00  o  o  cc  o  T^  ^  o  o  c»  t^ 

lO  O  r^  ,-,  r-   r^  rH  Oi-C^^ 

Against  '-'    ^r-it-^^r-.r-.OJt^JCvJC^G^C^COCO'BP 

If  the  box  is  more  than  40  inches,  say  CO  inches  and  20 
feet  \ovig^  draw  out  the  slide  to  the  left  hard  till  20  feet,  the 
length  found  on  the  slide,  coincides  with  the  gauge  point, 
found  on  the  girt  line,  viz.  13.385  inches- — then  ag^^iust  the 
width  Qi  the  box,  namely  60  inches,  found  on  the  girt  line, 
is  found  on  the  slide  399,  calling  the  figures  on  the  girt  line, 
tens,  and  those  on  the  slide  will  be  hundreds,  and  thus  of  any 
lit  her  number. 

Suppose  a  box  30  feet  long  from  40  to  245   inches  square, 
Against  40  will  be  found  9,G7   bushels. 
60  598  1-2 

100  1675 

1 20  2500 

150  8790 

190  6000 

M5  9950 


:M0  '       Tin:     ARTIST  AKB 

To  find  the  noniber  of  bnshcls  a  eyHndricuHcysk  conUhiS 
or  h«»w  w'duy  bushels  of  limber  a  log  will  make  proviiliwg  it 
be  a  perfect   cylinder„ 

li  lust  ration.  Draw  cut  the  sUde  until  the  gauge  point, 
I5,00l.  or  nearer  l5,000,l5,fouad  on  the  girt  line,  shall  coin- 
cide with  the  length  of  the  eylinder  in  feet,  fo tin d  on  the 
sliae,  then  opposite  the  diameter  of  the  cylinder,  found  on 
the  gin  line  in  inches,  are  the  number  of  bushels,  found  ou 
the  slide. 

Examjjle*  Suppose  the  cylinder  SCO  feet  is  laid  to  the 
guage  point — then  against  7»  or  70  inches  for  a  diameter  h 
found  6444  bushels,  which  is  the  answer  on  the  slide. 

Method  for  cutting  otf  any  number  of  cubic  feet  of  any 
diameter,  «»f  roi^nd  timber. 

1[  hist  rat  km.  Suppose  the  number  of  feet  to  be  cot  off  is 
3  and  the  dianieter  7  1-2  inches — draw  out  the  slide  until  ^> 
vvill  coincide  witli  7  1-2  on  the  hxed  part,  then  against  the 
gauge  point  l3.54  inches  is  found  the  length  to  be  cut  off. 

Example,  II'  $'^.15  buy  1  foot  of  timber^  how  much  wiU 
$iObuy1  Ans,  4.65  cubic"' feet. 

This  timber  is  4.3  inches  in  diametor  ;  what  is  the  Icn^^sh 
of  the  stick'? — lay  4.65  feci  on  the  slide,  opposite  4.3  inches 
on  the  girt  line  and  opposite  13.54  inches  on  the  girt  line 
will  be  found  46»5  feet,  the  length  of  the  stick  on  the  slicje^ 

For  square  tiinber  draw  out  the  slide  so  that  tho  nnra'M^r  of  inches 
the  £/tick  when  square,  found  on  the  iiX'tl  part,  coincides  with  tii»  num- 
ber of  feet  on  the  slide — then  against  12  ia  found  the  number  of  feet 
in  length  to  be  cut  off. 

The  method  of  casting  iijterest  on  the  sliding  rule  for  on 
3'^ear. 

lllusirotion.  The  principle  or  number  of  dollars  is  found 
on  A-^—put  the  per  cent  on  the  slide  against  tbe  center  i  — 
then  opposiu?  the  principal  is  found  the  intiuest,  estin^aiing 
dollars  as  centi'.  To  ascertain  the  interest  for  davs  find  the 
number  ef  daj^s  for  one  year,  or  365,  on  the  fixed  part  A,. 
;;v'hen  the  slide  m-ust  be  drawn  so  far  that  tbe  interest  for  one 
3^ear  be  found  to  coiucide  with  'dQ,b  day? — now  on  the  fixed 
part  A  observe  the  number  of  days  you  Wish  to  get  the  inter- 
e  t  for,  and  under  that  on  ibe  slide,  is  found  tbe  interest  for 
the  day  required. 

Examples,  What  is  tho  ii;terest  of  S33.-^S  for  one  3^ear 
aud  twenty-five  days  at  6  per  c^nt,  \s\.  For  one  year  by  fol- 


tradesman's  guide.  311 

lowing  the  above  direction,  is  found  $20 — then  notiee  365 
days  on  A  and  draw  out  the  slide  till  $20  coincides  with  it, 
or  under  365  days,  then  look  for  25  days  on  A,  and  on  B, 
under  25  will  be  $i,33  i-3,  the  answer  for  25  days. 

What  is  the  interest  of  $1000  for  one  year  and  36  days 
at  7  per  cent. — draw  out  the  slide  till  7  on  the  slide  coincides 
wilh  the  centre  1  and  against  1000  on  the  right  hand  at  A 
will  be  found  70  on  the  slide.  Then  lay  70  on  the  slide 
against  365  days  on  the  fixed  part  and  against  36  on  the 
slide  will  be  found  $6,88.  Ans.  $76.88. 

^  9  '^ 


;-  inOi>coCiO»oO»oOir5<^ 


5  S*. 


o    2    rt  ^ 


^   >   o   §   re 


D  ^S  'S     ^     ^     ^         C*    ^    -^    Tf   O^    C>i   G^   G'J 
on   r-Q  "  "        ■ 

O    ^    fcjD    _ 


a.  I 

^     O       O         ^    ^    CO    rH 


;^«S§?^?feSS?2?.t:rW«, 


o  -S  s  •&  =^  g-  Q  T~Tir-7^ — ■ 


o  •*- 


-5  ^^'-'  = 


^r-sj  limit 

;:;  ^  M  v2  Q   js,  o   x)   G  c   ^^ 

2 
7 


SOLID  MEASURE  OF  ROUND  TIMBL'K. 

8  ft.     Oft.  10  ft.  lift.  12  ft.     13  A.    lift.  15  ft.     16  f! 

Ion!'"      long  lon^  long  long  Jong  long  lon^r  kng 

.rf;am.  p^o  p£.  a  a  g  p  p 

lu.       ats  OS  %  ^  ^  5.  5. 

tnch.     I"        I  II  III  I  I 

6  1.6     l.S  2.0       2.1  2.3  2,5f  2.7  2.9  3.1 

7  2.1      2.4  2.7        2-9  3.2  3,5  3,7  4.0  4.2 

8  2,8     3.1  3.5        3.8  4.2  4.5  4.8  5.2       5.5 
g     3.5      3.9  4.4        4.S  5.3  5,7  6.1  6.G  7.0 

10  4.3     4.9  5A       6.0  6.5  7.1  7.6  8.1  8.7 

11  5.3     5.9  6.6       7,4  7.9  8.5  9.3  9.8  -iO.^ 

12  6.3     7.1  7.8  8,6  9.4  10.2  11,0  11.8  12.5 

13  7.3      S.:y  9.4  10.0  11.1  11.9  12.5  13,8  14.6 

14  8.5     9.6  10,6  11.7  12.8  13.9  14.9  l6.0  17.0 

15  9.8   11, i  12,4  13-.6  14.9  l6,l  17.2  18.5  19.7 

16  11.2   12.6  14.0  15.3  16.8  18.2  19.5  20.8  22.3 

17  12.6   14.1  15.7  17.3  18.9  20*4  21.8  23.5  25.0 

18  14.1    15.9  17.7  19-4  21.3  22.8  24..5  26.4  28.2 

19  15.7   17.7  19.7  21.6  23.5  25.5  27.3  29.3  31.3 

20  17.5   19.6  21.6  25.9  26.2  2S.2  30.3  32.5  34.(' 

21  19.2  21.5  23.8  26.3  28.7  3i.O  33.3  35. S  3S.1 

22  21.0  23.6  26.3  28.8  31.5  34.0  36.6  39.2  41.8 

23  22.9  25.9  28.8  31.'^  34.5  37.3  40.2  42.8  45.7 

24  25.0  28.4  31.3  S3.3  37.6  40.6  43.6  46.7  49.6 

25  27.2   30.7  34.0  37.3  40.7  44.0  47.4  50.7  53.9 

26  29.4  32.1  36.8  40.4  44.0  47.7  51.3  54.3  5S,o 

27  31.6  35.6  29.7  43.2  47.4  51.3  55.0  ^S.9  63.0 

28  33.9  38.4  42.5  46.6  51.0  55.2  59.2  63.5  67.6 

29  36.3  41.0  45.5  50.0  54.5  58.9  63.4  68.0  72.4 

30  39.0  43.9  49.0  53.5  r.8.4  63.4  68.0  73.3  77.7 

31  41.8   47.0  52.2  57.2  62.5  67.7  7^.7  78.2  83.3 

32  44,5   52.2  55.6  6l.2  66.7  72.4  77.5  S3. 5  88.7 

33  47,2  53.3  59.1  65.0  71.0  76.S  82.5  8S.6  94.5 

34  50.3   56.3  62.9  69.0  75.3  81.4  S7.^  94.3  00.6 

35  53.0   59.8  66.5  73.0  79.8  86.4  02.8  99.5  106.8 

36  56.0  63.2  70.5  79.0  84,4  91.3  98.0  105.5  11-^0 

37  59.4  67.0  74.5  81.8  89.5  i)6.8  104.7  112.0  119*^5 

38  62.8  70.6  78.8  86.3  94.4  102.5  110.0  117.7  126  0 

39  66.3  74.4  83.3  91.0  99.3  108.3  lUi.9  124. T  139.6 

40  6i^.6  78.3  87.3  95.7   104.4  113.4  124.0  130.8  139.5 


tradesman's  guide.  si 5 

MEASURE  OF  ROUND  TIMBER.—Cnntinued. 


17  ft. 

18  ft. 

19  ft. 

20  ft. 

21  ft. 

22  ft.  23  ft, 

24  ft. 

25  ft. 

26  U 

long 

long 

lODfJ 

longf 

long 

long    long 

long 

lonn^ 

long 

p 

P 

O 

9 

O 

P-       9 

O 

O 

n 

3,3 

5.9 
7.5 

9.3 
11.2 
13.4 
16.7 
18.3 
21.1 
23.8 
26-8 

bo.i 

33.5 
57.2 
-10.9 

!4.7 

ij.l 

57.7 
f2.G 
67. 5 
72.6 
77.7 
83.5 

59.4  94.5    99.5  105.3  111.0  116.0  121.4  126.8  131.5  137.0 

95.5  101.0  106.8  112.4  118.0  124.0  129.5  135.5  140.6  145.5 
101.5  107.3  113.4  119.5  125.4  131.5  138.0  144.0  149.0  155.0 

107.5  1  I  3.8  120.0  126.7133.0  139.4  145.7  152.5  158.6  164.0 
114.0  120.5  127.2  135.0  141.0  147.7  154.7  l6l.5  167.5  174.0 

120.6  127.5  135.1  142.2  149.0  156.5  163.5  171.0  178.0  185.0 
127.6  135.3  143.0  150.9  157.6  164.5  173.5  181.5  188.0  195.5 
134.8  142.6  150.8  159.0  166.5  174.5  183.0  191.0  19S.0  206.0 
142.0  150.5  159.0  167.9  170.0  184.4  192.5  202.0  208.5  217.0 
149.5  158,0  1^7-0  1760  185.0  193.5  204.0  213.2  218.5  22S.0 


S.5 

3.7 

3.9 

4.1 

4.3 

4,5 

4,7 

4.9 

5.1 

4.8 

5.1 

'o,3 

5.7 

5.9 

6.1 

6.4 

6.7 

6.9 

6.3 

(j.6 

7.0 

7^3 

7.7 

8.0 

8.4 

8.8 

9.1 

8.0 

8.4 

9.0 

9.4 

9.7 

10.2 

10.3 

11. 1 

11.5 

9.S 

10.4 

11.0 

11.5 

12.1 

12.6 

15.2 

13.7 

14.2 

11.9 

12.6 

13.3 

13.9 

14.6 

15.3 

15.9 

16.6 

17.3 

14.2 

15.0 

15.8 

16.6 

17.4 

18.2 

19.1 

19.8 

20.5 

17.1 

17.6 

18.5 

19.5 

20.4 

21.3 

22.2 

23.0 

23.9 

19.3 

20.7 

21.4 

22.5 

23.6 

24.5 

25.7 

26.7 

27.8 

22.3 

23.6 

24.7 

26.2 

27.4 

28.6 

29.7 

31.0 

32.3 

25.2 

26.7 

28.2 

29.5 

31.0 

32.3 

33.7 

35.0 

36.5 

28.3 

30.0 

31.6 

33,3 

34.9 

3C).3 

38.0 

39.6 

41.0 

31.9 

3S,G 

35.4 

37,2 

39.0 

40.7 

42.5 

44.3 

46.0 

35.4 

37,b 

39.4 

41.5 

43,3 

45.2 

47.3 

49.4 

51.2 

39.2 

41.5 

43.7 

46.0 

48.3 

50.3 

52.5 

54.7 

56.7 

43.1 

4^X) 

48.4 

50.4 

53.0 

j5.2 

57.7 

60.0 

62.5 

47.4 

50.2 

52.7 

55.2 

58.1 

60.7 

63.5 

G6.0 

68.7 

51.8 

54.8 

57.7 

60.8 

63,7 

G6,)l 

69.5 

72.3 

75.2 

56.1 

59.5 

62.9 

66.2 

69.4 

72,3 

75.4 

78.6 

81.9 

61.4 

64.8 

68.3 

71.8 

75. .3 

78.5 

82.3 

85.7 

88.5 

66.4 

70.2 

74.0 

77,6 

81.5 

85.3 

88.7 

93.5 

96.0 

71.5 

75.4 

79.5 

83.5 

87.7 

91.5 

96.0 

99.3  103.4 

77.2 

S\.3 

85.6 

90.0 

94.5 

98.5 

103.2  ior.3  111.3 

82.4 

87.2 

91.5 

96.3 

101.0  105.6  110,7 

114.8  119.5 

88.4 

93.5 

98.5  103.4  108.8  113.5  118.6  123.3  12B.0 

314  THE    ARTIST    AND 

MEASURE  OF  ROUND  TIMBER -^Continue¥. 

27  ft.     28  ft.     29  ft.     30  ft.     31  ft.     32  ft.     33  ft.  34  ft.     35  ft.  36  ft 

long      long      long      long       lo"g      long       long  long      long     long 

oaooo    o    o    oop 

ooooo      o      o      ooc 

03.33       3        3        P        t3»S 


WJ 

m" 

Oi 

50 

« 

OT 

» 

tn 

oo 

M 

6.3 

5.5 

5.7 

5.9 

6.1 

6.3 

6.5 

6.7 

6,9 

7.1 

7.2 

7.5 

7.8 

8.0 

8.3 

8.6 

8.8 

9.1 

9.4 

9.6 

9.4 

9.7 

10.1 

10.3 

10.8 

11.1 

11.5 

11.9 

12.3 

12.6 

11.9 

12.4 

12.8 

13.1 

13.7 

14;2 

14.6 

15.1 

15.5 

15.9 

14.8 

15.4 

15.9 

16.4 

17.1 

17.6 

18.2 

18.7 

19.3 

19.7 

17.9 

18.6 

19.2 

19.8 

20  6 

21.2 

21.7 

22.5 

23.2 

23.7 

21.3 

2:^.1 

23.0 

23.6 

24.4 

25.4 

26.1 

26.7 

27.7 

28.4 

24.9 

25.8 

26.7 

27.7 

28.6 

29.5 

30.6 

31.4 

32.3 

33-3 

2S.9 

30.1 

31.2 

32.1 

33.3 

34.3 

35.4 

36.5 

37.6 

38.7 

33.5 

34.7 

36.1 

37.3 

38.5 

39.7 

41.1 

42.2 

43.3 

44.5 

37.9 

39.3 

40.7 

42.0 

43.4 

45.0 

46.3 

47.7 

49.2 

50.,]. 

42.6 

44.2 

45.6 

47.2 

48.6 

50.5 

52.0 

53.4 

55.2 

56.5 

47.8 

49.7 

51.3 

52.7 

54.6 

56.0 

58.3 

60.1 

62.0 

63.6 

53.3 

55.1 

57.0 

58.8 

61.1 

63.0 

65.0 

67.0 

69.0 

70.9 

59.2 

61,3 

m.^ 

65.5 

67.2 

70-2 

72.2 

74.4 

76.7 

79.0 

05.0 

67.2 

69.7 

72.0 

75.5 

76.7 

79.5 

81.7 

84.4 

86.5 

7  J.  5 

74.0 

76.5 

79.0 

82.0 

81.5 

87.2 

89.5 

92.5 

95.4 

78.5 

81.0 

83.7 

86,0 

89.5 

92.4 

95.5 

98.3  101.2104.5 

8r».3 

88.0 

91.2 

94.2 

97.5; 

K)0.8  104.0  107.0  110.8  113.5 

92.5 

95.6 

99.0  102.7  106.0  109.5  ] 

113.0  115.7119.5 

133.0 

99.7  10^3.5  107.5  111.2  114.7  118.5  122.0  125.8  129.5  133.0 

107.7  U1.7  115.5  119.4  123.3  127.5  131.5  135.2  139.5  142.5 

116.0  120.0  121.7  128.8  132.7  137.5  141.5  145.5  150.3  151.4 
124.2  128.7  133.0  13S.0  142.0  116.4  150.6  155.5  161.0  165.0 

133.2  136.0  143.1  148.0  152.4  157.0  162.6  167.0  172.5  177.5 

142.3  117.5  152.7  158.3  163.0  169.0  174.0  179.0  182.4  190.0 

152.1  157.3  163.0  169.0  174.0  180.0  185.5  191.0  197.0  202.0 

161.8  167.0  173.0  179.7  185.4  191.2  197.0  202.5  208.0  214.0 
171.5  178.0  181.0  190.5  196.0  202.5  208.2  214.3  220.0  227.0 
182.0  188.7  194.7  202.5  208.2  214.0  220.5  227.0  234.0  240.0 
192.5  199.0  206.0  213.0  218.5  226.5  233.5  210.0  247.0  255.0 

206.0  211.0  217.5  225.0  232.5  240.0  247.5  254.3  262.5  269.5 

214.1  222.1  228.5  236.1  214.0  253.5  261.5  268.0  276.4  281.0 
226.3  231.0  212.0  251.0  258.0  267.0  275.0  283.2  292.5  313.0 
237.5  245.3  254.5  263.7  272.0  280.0  238.5  297.3  306.4  316/2 


TRADESMAN  S    GUIDE.  S15 


MEASURE 

OF   ROUNE 

>  TIM! 

3r:R,- 

Con  tin  1 

aed. 

o7  ft. 

38  ft. 

3Uft. 

40  ft. 

41  ft. 

42  ft- 

13  ft. 

44  ft. 

45  ft. 

4G   ft 

long. 

long. 

long 

long 

long 

long 

long 

long 

long 

long 

a 

o 
«> 

g 

3 

§ 

9 

3 
M 

o 

3 
Ct> 
3 

OB 

9 

i3 

9' 

3 

1 

O 
o 

3 
3 

3 

9 

St 

7.3 

7.4 

7.7 

7.8 

s.o 

8.2 

8.4 

8.7 

8.8 

9.0 

9.9 

10.2 

10.3 

10.4 

10.5 

11.3 

11.5 

11.7 

12.0 

12.3 

12.9 

13.3 

13.7 

14.0 

14.3 

14.7 

15.1 

15.4 

15.7 

16.1 

16.3 

16.8 

17.3 

17.7 

18.1 

19.0 

19.1 

19.4 

19.8 

20.4 

20.3 

20.7 

21.6 

21.7 

22.3 

22.9 

23.5 

24.0 

24.5 

25.3 

24.4 

25.2 

25.7 

26.4 

27.7 

28.7 

29.0 

29.2 

29.6 

30.5 

29.2 

29.9 

30.8 

31.5 

32.2 

33.0 

33.9 

34.7 

35.4 

36.4 

34.0 

35.0 

36.1 

36.8 

37.7 

38.7 

39.7 

40.5 

41.4 

42.5 

39.G 

40.7 

41.7 

42.7 

43.5 

44.-7 

45.9 

46.9 

48.0 

49.4 

45.8 

47.0 

48.4 

49.5 

50.6 

51.7 

52.3 

53.2 

55.5 

.^7.0 

51.7 

53.3 

54.5 

55.7 

57.0 

58.5 

60.3 

61.5 

62.8 

64.6 

58.2 

59.7 

62.5 

62.9 

64.2 

66.0 

67.7 

69.4 

.70.7 

72.7 

65.4 

67.0 

69.0 

70.5 

72.3 

74.2 

76.0 

77.6 

79.5 

81.5 

72.8 

74.7 

76.7 

78.7 

80.4 

82.5 

?^4.6 

86.5 

88.4 

90.8 

81.0 

83.3 

85.5 

87.5 

89.0 

91.5 

04.5 

96.3 

98.5  100.5 

88.8 

91.3 

93.7 

96.0 

98.4  100.8  10S.4  105.5 

108.3  110.5 

97.7  100.5  103.2  106.0  108.6  111.0  US. 5  116.0  118.4  121.5 
107.3  110.0  115.0  115.5  119.5  121.3  124  5  127.3  129.5  133.0 
116.6  U9.5  123.0  126.0  129.0  132.0  135.0  138.7  141.5  144.5 
127.0  130.0  133.3  137.3  140.4  143.5  147.3  150.5  153.7  157.0 
137.5  141.5  144.4  148.0  151.5  155.0  159.0  162.7  166.5  170.5 
147.5  151.0  155.5  155.5  158.5  160.0  167.0  171.0  175.0  183.0 
159.0  163.0  167.0  172.0  175.2  180.2  184.7  188.5  193.0  197.0 
17^.7  174.5  178.0  182.0  188.0  192.8  197.0  201.5  206.0  21  l.O 

183.0  187.5  192.5  197.0  202.0  206.5  211.5  215.0  221.6  225,0 

195.1  200.5  205.0  2110  214.5  220.0  225.2  231.0  237.0*242.0 
207  2  212.4  218.0  224.0  228.0  334.5  241.0  245.4  252.5  257.5 
22  1.0  226.5  232.5  238.2  243.5  249.0  256.1  262.0  267.5  273.0 
234.0  239.0  246.0  ^53.0  258.0  264.0  271.5  276.5  283.5  289.0 
247.0  254.0  262.0  "268.0  274.0  282.1  ^87.0  294,0  301.5  307.5 
262.5  267.5  276.0  284.0  2^9.0  296.0  304.0  310.3  317.5  325.0 
276.5  28D.0  293.5  300.0  307.0  314.5  322.7  328.0  336.5  344.0 
292.5  300.0  309,0  316.5  324.0  3152.1  337.5  345.0  355.0  363.2 
309.0  316.5  326.2  334.0  341.2  349.0  357.1  366  4  37.^.0  384.0 
3:^^,0  333.0  341.4  349.5  359.0  367.3  377.0  385.2  S94.0  4034 


51b  THE    ARTIST    AND 

By  the  foregoing  Table  the  solid  measure  of  any  stick  of  round  timber, 
can  be  found  at  sight  frora  (3  to  40  inches  in  diameter,  and  from  8  to  4ii> 
feet  in  length.     It  rises  one  inch  in  diameter  and  one  foot  in  length  at 

a  time.  The  left  hand  column  on  the  first  page  gives  the  inches  in 
diameter;  and  the  other  columns  the  contents,  which  are  given  in  cubic 
feet  and  tenths  of  a  foot.  Over  the  top  of  the  columns  is  placed  the 
length  at  the  top,  than  the  inches  in  diameter  at  the  left  hand  column, 
and  against  it  under  the  length,  to  the  right  will  be  found  the  contents 

A  TABLE, 

Showing  the  rates  a  boat  weigh'no^  with  its  load  fifteen  tons, 
and  a  wagon  of  tlie  same  weight,  is  impelled,  the  one  on  a 
canal  and  the  other  on  a  railway,  which  is  stated  in  pounds 
and  in  horse  power — reckoning  one  horse  power  equal  to 
180  pounds. 

Boat  on  a  Canal.  Wagon  on  Railroad. 

Mileg  per  hour,  power  in  lbs.  Horse  power,  power  in  pounds.  Horse  power. 

2  33  1-5  100  1-2 

4  133  2-3  102  1-2 

6  300  13-4  105  1-2 

8  533  3  109  1-2 

12  1200  7  120  2-3 

16  2133  12  137  3-4 

20  3325  18  156  1 

Dr.  Ariiistrong  observes,  that  a  horse  travelling  at  the^  usual 
rate  that  wagons  move,  would  with  ease,  under  favourable 
circumstances,  draw  twenty  tons  ;  but  Mr.  Fulton  says,  that 
five  tons  to  ahorse  is  the  average  work  on  railways,  descend- 
ing at  the  rate  of  three  miles  per  hour,  and  one  ton  upwards 
with  the  same  speed. 

Mr.  Telford,  an  experienced  engineer,  observes,  that  on  a 
railway  well  constructed  and  laid  with  a  declivity  of  fifty  feet 
in  a  mile,  one  horse  will  readily  take  down  wagons  containing 
twelve  or  fifteen  tons,  and  bring  back  the  same  with  four  ton? 
Ib  them. 


tradesman's  dUIDE. 

I'he  following  is  a  list  of  the  average  weigbt  of  pipes  oi 
Jiliereiit  diameters  in  the  clear,  with  the  thickness  required 
to  bear  a  pressure  of  300  feet  head  of  water. 

Diameter   Tiiickiiess  of*  pipe      Weight  per  running  yd. 

in  inches.         in  inches  cwt.     qrs.       lbs. 

2  4-16  0  i  '2 

3  4-16  0  1        l6 

4  5-16  0  2  4 
0  6-16  1  0  0 
8               8-16  1         1       21 

10  9-16  2  0  8 

12  9-16  2  2  18 

16  10-16  3  2  0 

20  10-16  5  0  0 

CHAPTER  XLI. 

Allowances  for  Drafts^  according  to  Laiv. 
0n  any  quantity  (if         100  lbs.  or  ,    ll2lbs.     lib. 

Above  100  lbs.  and  not  exceeding  200  2 

200  do.  300         ,  3 

300  do.  1000  4 

*'      1000  do.  1800  7 

'*     1800  do.  9 

Usual  allowance  at  the  Custom-House,  which  is  consid- 
ered equal  to  that  of  the  law  : — Sugar,  Barrels,  2  lbs.  do. 
Tierces,  4  lbs.  do.  Hogsheads,  7  lbs.  do.  Boxes,  4  lb;  do. 
cases,  1-2  per  cent.  All  other  goods  lialf  per  cent,  except 
teas,  which  have  the  turn  of  the  beam. 

Allowance  for  Leakage  and  Breakage. 
Two  per  cent,  allowed  on  llie  gauge  ^n  all  merchandise. 
Ten  per  cent,  on  all  Boer,  Ale,  and  Porter,  in  bottles. 
Five  per  cent,  on  all  other  liquors  in  bottles,  to  be  deduc- 
ted from  the  invoice  ;    or  it  shall  be  lawful   to  compute  th^ 
duties  by  tale,  at  the  option  of  the  importer,    at   the  time  of 
entry. 

l^ares  accordiag  to  Law,  and  Actual  Weight, 
C5^Those  tares  not  marked  actual  are  according  to  law. 

Almonds,  per  cent  actl. 

AUim,  casks,  12      do      do 

Bristles,  cronstadt,  12  per  cent  actl. 
Butter,  do 

Beef,  do 

Cordage,  matts,      1  3-4  p.  c.  actual. 


Camphor,  crude  in 

tubs,              35 

do 

dio 

do         refinded, 

do 

Candles,  boxes,          8 

do 

Cassia,  matts,             8 

do 

do 

do  chests,  160  lbs.  20 

do 

d9 

51b  THE    ARTIST    AND 

By  the  foregoing  Table  the  solid  measure  of  any  stick  of  round  tinnher, 
can  be  found  at  sight  frora  (3  to  40  inches  in  diaaintcr,  and  from  8  to  4iT 
feet  in  length.     It  rises  one  inch  in  diameter  and  one  foot  in  length  at 

a  time.  The  left  hand  column  on  the  first  page  gives  the  inches  in 
diameter;  and  the  other  columns  the  contents,  which  are  given  in  cubic 
feet  and  tenths  of  a  foot.  Over  the  top  of  the  columns  is  placed  the 
length  at  the  top,  then  the  inches  in  diameter  at  the  left  hand  column, 
and  against  it  under  the  length,  to  the  right  will  be  found  the  contents 

A  TABLE, 

Showing  the  rales  a  boat  weighing  with  its  load  fifteen  tons, 
and  a  wagon  of  the  same  weight,  is  impelled,  the  one  on  a 
canal  and  the  other  on  a  railway,  which  is  stated  in  pounds 
and  in  horse  power — reckoning  one  horse  power  equal  to 
180  pounds. 

Boat  on  a  Canal,  Wagon  on  Railroad, 

Miles  per  hour,  power  in  lbs.  Horse  power,  power  in  pounds.  Horse  power. 


2 

33 

1-5 

100 

1-2 

4 

133 

2-3 

102 

1-2 

6 

300 

1  3-4 

1 05 

1-2 

8 

533 

S 

109 

1-2 

12 

•   1200 

7 

120 

2-3 

16 

2133 

12 

137 

3-4 

20 

3325 

IS 

156 

1 

Dr.  Armstrong  observes,  that  a  horse  travelling  at  th^  usual 
rate  that  wagons  move,  would  with  ease,  under  favourable 
circumstances,  draw  twenty  tons  ;  but  Mr.  Fulton  says,  that 
five  tons  to  ahorse  is  the  average  work  on  railways,  descend- 
ing at  the  rate  of  three  miles  per  hour,  and  one  ton  upwards 
with  the  same  speed. 

Mr.  Telford,  an  experienced  engineer,  observes,  that  on  a 
railway  well  constructed  and  laid  with  a  declivity  of  fifty  {eei 
in  a  mile,  one  horse  will  readily  take  down  wagons  containing 
twelve  or  fifteen  tons,  and  bring  back  the  same  with  four  tons 
i»  them. 


in  inches. 

in  inches 

2 

4-16 

3 

4-16 

4 

5-16 

G 

6-16 

8 

8-16 

10 

9-16 

12 

9-16 

1(3 

10-16 

20 

10-16 

tradesman's  guide.  317 

The  following  is  a  list  of  the  average  weight  of  pipes  of 
Jiiferent  diameters  in  the  clear,  with  the  thickness  required 
to  bear  a  pressure  of  300  feet  head  of  water. 

Diameter   Thickness  of  pipe      Weight  per  running  yd. 

cwt.  qrs.  lbs. 
0  12 
0         1       iG 

0  2         4 

1  0         0 

1  1         21 

2  0         8 

2  2       18 

3  2         0 
5         0  0 

CHAPTER  XLL 

Allowances  for  Drafts^  according  to  Laio. 
■0n  any  quantity  (if         100  lbs.  or  .    Il2lbs.     1  lb. 

Above  100  lbs.  and  not  exceeding  200  2 

**        200  do.  300         .  3 

300  do.  1000  4 

*'      1000  do.  1800  7 

"•     1800  do.  9 

Usual  allowance  at  the  Custom-House,  which  is  consid- 
ered equal  to  that  of  the  law  : — Sugar,  Barrels,  2  lbs.  do. 
Tierces,  4  lbs.  do.  Hogsheads,  7  lbs.  do.  Boxes,  4  lb;  do. 
cases,  1-2  per  cent.  All  other  goods  lialf  per  cent,  except 
teas,  which  have  the  turn  of  thn  beam. 

Allowance  for  Leakage  and  Breakage. 
Two  per  cent,  allowed  on  the  gauge  f)n  all  merchandise. 
Ten  per  cent,  on  all  Boer,  Ale,  and  Porter,  in  bottles. 
Five  per  cent*  on  all  other  liquors  in  bottles,  to  be  deduc* 
ted  from  the  invoice  ;    or  it  shall  be  lawful   to  compute  the 
duties  by  tale,  at  the  option  of  the  importer,    at   the  time  of 
entry. 

T^ares  accordiag  to  Law,  and  Actual  Weight. 
(S;j^Those  tares  not  marked  actual  are  according  to  law. 

Almonds,  per  cent  actl. 

Alum,  casks,  12      do      do 

Bristles,  cronstadt,  \%  per  cent  actl 
Butter,  do 

Beef,  do 

Cordage,  matts,       1  3-4  p.  c.  actual. 


Camphor,  crude  in 

tubs,         '      35 

do 

do 

do         refinded, 

do 

Candles,  boxes,          8 

do 

Cassia,  matts,             8 

do 

do 

do  chests,  160  lbs.  20 

do 

d9 

518 


THE  ARTIST  ANt> 


Cinnamon,  chests,  actual, 

do     mats  J  do 

Cl'ivos,  do 

Coooa,  bags,  1  per  cent, 

do     casks,  10         do 

do     croons,        10        do     do 
Chocolate,  boxes,    10         do 
CofTi  e,  hai^s,  2         do 

do         do  double,    4  lb         do 
do         baJes,  3  per  cent   do 

do         casks,         12         do       do 
Cotton,  bales,  2         do 

do    cerooue,  ()         do 

Currants.^  casks,     12         do      do 
Cheese,  hampers 

or  baskets,       10         do 
do  boxes,  20         do 

Conper,  casks,        12         do 
Crtndy  S*i2;ar    in 

baskets  5         do      do 

do  Sujrar  in  boxes  10         do     do 
Corks,  sacks,    12  and  15  lbs.    do 
Fio-s,  boxes,       GO  lbs.  9  lbs.  actual 
do    half  do     30         5  1-4       do 
do     qr.     do      15  3  1-4        do 

do   drrim.s,       10  per   ceat.      do 
d  )    frails,  5  do  do 

Flonr,  Wheat,  do 

Glae,  acrual. 

Ginger,  do 

Gunpowder,  do 

lodT^o,  bans  or  mals3  per  ct.  act'l 
do    oerooiis,       '        10      do       do 
do   barrels,  12      do       do 

do   oihei  casks,       15     do       do 
do  cases,  20     tio        do 

Looking  Glasses, 

French,  30  per  ct.  actual, 

Lines,  do 

L   rd,  do 

M  -^-  casks  or kegs,33  per  ct.  act'] 
I«>atmegd,  lingers,  21  per  ct.  act'l. 
Nails.  Criflks.  8        do 

Oelire,  French,  22  per  ct.  act'! 

Po'ppei ,  bags,  2  per  cent, 

do     bales,  5         do 

do     ca.sktf,  12        do 

PinicDto,  bags,  3        do 

do     bales,  5        do  actual 

do     casiis,  16       do 

Prunes,  actual. 

Poi-".  do 

Pkaisin.s,  Malaga, 

boxes;  G  lbs.  7  Von.  act  1. 


do      do     jars.     5  dd 

do     do    casks  12  do 

do  Smyrna,  do  12  per  cent    do 
Sugar,  bao-s  or  mats,  5  per  cent, 
do    casks,  " ^ 

do    boxes, 
do     cannibters. 
Soap,  boxes. 
Sails,  Glauber,  in 

casks. 
Shot,  in  casks, 
Steel, 

Tea,  Bohea,  che.=;ts, 
do  1  2  do 

do  1-4  do 

do  Ilyson,  or  other  Green,  chests 
70   or   upwards,  g-rosf^,  20    lbs. 
do  S<mchong,  chests  dO  lbs.  20  ^' 
do    Souchona",  chests   80    lbs.  and 
upwards,  gros.-,  22  lbs 

Every  box  of  other  tea,  not  loss 
than  50  lbs.  nor  more  than  70  lbs. 
ofror.s,  18  lbs. 

On  all  other  boxes,  aceoifding   to 
invoice,  or  actual  weight. 
Twine  casks,  12  per  cent, 

do     bales,     3     do 
Tallow,  ceroons,  10  per  ct.  actual. 


12 

do 

15 

do 

,^5 

do  act'l 

10 

do 

8 

do 

3 

do 

do 

70  lbs. 

36  " 
90  '< 

do         ca^ks,      J 2   do  do 

Vitriol,  blue  or  Reman,  .  do 

Venitian  Rtd,  do 

White.  Paris,  do 

Whiting,  do 

\y  Ilea t  of  all  kind;?,  d c 

In  some  instanc(?s  as  stated  in  t  , 
furegoin<r?  the  actual  tares  have 
been  determined  ;  but  the  packages 
may  vary  as  to  i  heir  make  and  size; 
in  that  case  they  must  be  weitjiied 
again,  provided  always,  that  whwn 
the  original  invoices  of  any  of  the 
said  a-iiicles  are  produced  at  the 
llime  of  making  eritry  of  such  arti- 
icles,  and  the  tare  or  tarts  ap},'<  ar 
jtlu'rein,  it  shall  be  lawful  for  the 
[Collector  and  naval  ofticer,  where 
[there  is  one,  i(^  they  see  fit,  with 
'(he  cojjsent  of  the  impc-iter.  con> 
•jgnee.  or  Ciuiisignees,  to  ej^timate 
Iht  said  tare  or  tares  aecordinif-  to 
iuch  invoice  ;  but  if  not  determiiitci 
•it  the  time  ct  entry,  the  fare  or 
i.Ares  as  above  shall  be  gi anted  ot 
allowed. 


tradesman's  guide.  319 

CHAPTER  XLII. 

Abstract  of  Tonnage^  Duties,  S^c, 
On  American  vessels  six  cents  per  ton  ;  on  French  vessels 
ene  dollar  per  ton  ;  and  on  British  vessels  from  other  places, 
and  all  other  foreign  vessels,  two  dollars  per  ton  j  fifty  cents 
per  ton,  light  money,  if  from  ports  to  which  vessels  of  the  U- 
nited  States  are  not  permitted  to  go  and  trade  ;  but  from  all 
other  ports  fifty  cents  tonnage  and  fifty  cents  light  money. 

All  vessels  of  the  United  States  arriving  from  foreign  ports, 
are  subject  to  fift}^  cents  per  ton,  unless  all  the  officers  and 
two-thirds  of  the  crew  are  citizens  of  the  United  States. 

TARIFF  OF    ARTICLES. 
To  he  Weighed  and   Gauged,   (Excepting   Iron  or  articles 
of  Iron  and  Steel.) 
dCf^  All  articles  that  are  subject  to  an  ad  valorem  duty,  are 
not  specified  in  this  Tarifi*. 

Ale,  beer,  and  porter,  in  bottles  20  c  per  gallon,  do  in  casks 
15  c  do.  Alum,  $2,50  per  1 12  lbs.  Almonds,  3  c  per  lb. 
Brandy,  see  spirits.  Bacon,  3  c  per  lb.  Beef  2  c  do.  Bristles, 
3  c  do.  Butter,  5  c  do.  Books  printed  in  Latin  or  Greek,  since 
the  year  1775,  when  bound,  15  c  do.  do  when  unbound,  13  c 
do.  do  printed  in  Englsh  since  1775,  when  bound,  30  c  do.  do 
when  in  sheets  or  boards,  26  c  do  Cables,  tarred,  4  c  per  lb. 
Cordage,  do  4  c  do.  do  untarred,  5  cdo.  Camphor,  crude,  8  c 
do  refinrcd,  12  c  do.  Candles,  tallow,  5  c  do.  do  wax,  6  c  do. 
do  spermaceti,  8  cMo.  Cassia,  Chinese,  6  c  do.  Cinnamon,  25  c 
Cloves,  25  c  do.  Cocoa,  2  c  do.  Chocolate,  4  c  do.  Cofiee,  5  c 
per  lb.  Cotton,  3  cdo.  Currants,  3  c  do.  Cheese,  9  c  do.  Cop- 
peras, $2,00  per  112  lbs.  Candy,  Sugar,  12  c  per  lb.  Corks, 
12  c  do*  Coals,  6  c  per  bush.  Figs,  3  c  per  lb.  Fish,  dried, 
foreign  caught,  $1,00  per  112  lbs.  Flour,  wheats  50  c  do.  Gin, 
see  spirits.  Ginger,  2  c  per  lb.  Glass  ware  of  cut,  not  speci- 
fied, 3  c  do.  All  other  articles  of  glass,  2  c  do.  Glue,  5  c  do 
Gunpowder,  8  c  do.  Hemp,  $1  per.  ton.  Hams  and  other 
bacon,  3  c  per  lb-  Herrings,  smoked,  $1,00  per.  112  lbs. 
Indigo,  15  c  per  lb.  Iron,  pig,  62  1-2  per  112  lbs.  do  round 
or  braziers'  rods,  of  3-lOto  8-l6  of  an  inch  diameter,  inclu- 
sive, 3  1-2  c  per  lb.  do  nails  or  spike  rods,  slit,  3  1-2  c  do. 
do  in  sheets,  3  1-2  cdo.  do  for  hoops,  3  1-2  c  do.  do  slit  or 
rolled,  for  band  iron,  scroll  iron,  or  casement  rods,  viz.  one 
inch  by  1-4,  1  1-2  by  1-8,  1  1-8  by  1x8,  S  1-2  c  do  Lard, 
$  c  do.  Lead,  in  pigs,  bars,  or  sheets,  3  eaio.  do  red  or  white. 


320  THE    ARTIST   AND 

dry  or  ground  in  oil,  5  c  do.  Looking-Giasses,  2  c  do.  L^nes 
5  c  do,  Molasses,  lO  c  per  gallon.  Mace,  lOO  c  per  lb.  Oil, 
castor,  4\)  c  per  g^illon.  do  hnseed,  hemp,  and  rapeseed,  25  c  do 
Oil,  olive,  HI  casks,  25  c.  per  gallon,  do.  spermaceti,  foreign, 
25  c.  do.  do  whale  and  other,  15  c.  do.  do  of  vitriol  3  c.  per 
pound.  Ochre,  yellow,  dry,  1  c.  do.  do  in  oil,  1  l-'i  c.  do. 
Oats,  10  c.  per  bushel.  Poiatoes,  10  c.  do.  Paper,  folio 
and  quarto  post,  all  kinds,  iO  c.  per  pound,  do.  do.  foolscap, 
and  all  drawing  and  writing,  17  c.  do.  do  printing,  copper- 
pi  ite,  nnil  sidiner's,  10  c.  do.  Sheathing,  binder's,  boxboards 
and  wrapping:  p. J.per,  3  c.  do.  .\ll  other  kinds,  15  c.  do, 
Parkthread,  untarred,  5  c.  do.  Pepper,  8  c.  do.  do  Cay- 
enne, 15  c.  do.  Pimento,  6  c.  do.  Plums,  4  c.  do.  Prunes  4 
c.  do.  Pork,  2  c.  do.  Rnm,  see  spirits.  Raisins,  Mus.  4  c. 
do.  do  in  jars  and  boxes,  4  c.  do.  All  others,  3  c.  do.  Rope, 
ciar  or  coiar,  grass,  5  c.  do.  Spirits,  from  grain,  1st  proof 
4 '  c.  per  gallon.  2d  do  45  c.  do.  3d  do  48  c.  do.  4th  do  52 
c.  do.  5th  do  60  c.  do.  Above  5ih  proof,  75  c.  do.  Spirits, 
from  other  materials  than  grain,  1st  and  ^d  proof  38  c.  do, 
3d  do  4  '  c.  do.  4tJi  do  48  c.  do.  5th  do  57  c.  dp.  Above  5th 
proof,  70  c.  do.  Sugars,  brown,  3  c.  per  pound,  do  white^ 
clayed,  4  c-  do.  do  do  powdered,  4  c.  do.  do  lump,  lO  c.  do 
do  loaf,  12  c.  do.  do  candy,  12  c.  do.  Soap,  4  c.  do.  Snuff, 
12  c.  do.  Salt  Petro,  refinVd,  l3  c.  do.  Salts,  Glauber,  3  c. 
do.  do  Epsom,  4  c.  do.  Seines,  5  c.  do.  Shotj  3  1-3  c.  do. 
Steel,  $1  50  per  112  lbs.  Sheet  iron,  3  1-2  c.  per  pound. 
Salt,  ^20  c  per  56  lbs.  Teas,//c;/7i  China,  viz  :  Bohea,  12  c, 
do.  Souchong  and  other  black,  25  c.  do.  Imperial,  Gunpow- 
der, and  Gomee,  50  c.  d^.  Hyson  and  Young  Hyson,  40  c. 
do.  Hyson  Skin  and  other  green,  28  c.  do.  Teas,  from  any 
other  place,  viz  :  Bohea,  l7  c.  do.  Souchons^,  and  other  black; 
34  c.  do.  Imperial,  Gur.powder,  and  Gomee,  6S  c.  do.  Hy- 
son and  Young  Hyson,  56  c.  do.  Hyson  Skin  and  other  gieen 
38  c.  do.  T:^liow,  1  c.  do.  Vinegar  8  c.  j:^r  gallon .  Vitriol, 
blue  or  Rom ^.n  4  c.  per  pound.  Venetian  red,  (Ochre)  dry, 
1.  c.  do.  do  crround  in  oil,  1  1-2  c.  do.  Whiskey,  see  spirits. 
Wine,  Madeira,  Burgundy,  Champaign,  Rhenish  and  Toka}^ 
lOO  c.  per  gallon.  d^»  Sherry  and  St.  Lucar,  60  c.  do.  do 
L  •'>on.  Oporto  and  o^her  w  nes  of  Portugal,  50  c.  do.  do 
Sicily,  50  c.  do.  do  TenerifTe,  Fa^'dl,  and  other  wines  of 
the  western  i^>les,  40  c.  do.  do  ixoX  enumerated,  when  impor- 


TRADESMAN  S    GUIDE.  321 

ted  in  bottles  or  cases,  30  c.  do.  All  other  when  imported 
Otherwise  than  in  bottles  or  cases,  15  c.  d(\  Wares  of  cut 
glnss,  not  specified,  3  c.  per  pound.  White,  Paris,  1  c.  do. 
Whiting,  1  c.  do.  Wheat  of  ail  kinds,  25  c.  per  bush.  AVheat 
Flour,  50  c.  per  112  lbs.  Yarns,  iintarred,  5  c.  per  pound. 

Note.  The  exporter  or  exporters  of  any  goods,  wares  or 
merchandise,  shall  give  twonty-four  hours  notice  of  their  inj 
tention  to  export;  and  six  hours  for  disulled  spirits. 

The  above  duties  relate  to  importations  in  American  ves- 
sels. An  addition  of  ten  per  cent,  is  imposed,  if  brought  in 
foreign  bottoms,  excepting  English,  from  the  British  United 
kingdoms,  Sweden,  Hamburg,  Bremen  and  Lubec.  Olden- 
burgh  and  Norwegian  vessels,  which,  by  treaty  enjoy  the 
same  privilege  as  our  own  ships.  Teas  however,  pay  an  ex- 
tra duty,  as  will  be  fonnd  in  the  tariff*. 

All  articles  subject  to  duty,  imported  into  the  United 
States,  not  having  been  landed  more  than  one  year,  are  al- 
lowed a  drawback  of  the  duties  (with  the  exception  of  salted 
and  pickled  Fish  and  Provisions,  Fish  Oil,  Butter  and  Play- 
ing Cards)  subject  to  a  deduction  of  two  and  a  half  per  cent, 
except  spirits,  which  is  two  cents  per  gallon,  and  three  per 
per  cent,  on  the  amount  of  duties. 

By  an  Assay  of  parts  of  a  dollar  made  at  the  Mint  it  ap- 
peares  that  lOO  dollars  in  quarters  of  the  ordinary  circulation 
are  worth  only  >  -  -  -       §94^  44 

100  dollars  in  eights    -  -  -  -  90,  52 

lO  dollars  in  sixteenths     -  -  -  8,  94 

Making  the  value  of  quarters  about  23  1-2  cents, 

Ninepenny  bits   11  cents. 

Sovereign  fourpenny  bits  5  cents. 

The  United  States  quarters  (an  Eagle  on  them)  are  worth 
23  cents,  all  other  quarters  as  they  have  been  called^  nine- 
penny  and  fourepenny  bitts  as  above  stated — old  pisteerens 
sixteen  cents,  half  pisteerens  eight  cents. 

It  will  he  perceived  by  the  above  article  that,  the  United 
States  Bank  has  struck  down  our  Spanish  small  change,  and 
that  probably  all  foreign  coins  will  ultimately  become  sup- 
planted with  American. 


INDEX. 


TER. 

PAGE. 

Introductioii, 

5 

General  Fpiuciples  of  Chemistry, 

5 

Caloric, 

7 

Thermo  aieter, 

8 

Water. 

10 

Earths  and  Alkalies 

11 

Acids  and  ShUs. 

12 

Simple   Combustibles, 

14 

Oxides  and  Corabiisiion, 

17 

Ol'  the  Gases. 

19 

Ebcrrlci  3 , 

29 

Galvanism, 

32 

L^ght, 

33 

Miscellaneous  Matter, 

35 

Soaps  and   Pomades, 

42 

Artist  and  Mechanic, 

44 

Intiuence  of  Premiums, 

4G 

Balance  of  Trade, 

47 

Mineralogy, 

48 

Classitlcatjoa  of  Minerals, 

30 

The  irt  of  Assaying  Ores, 

I. 

II. 

III. 

IV. 

V. 

VI. 

vn. 

VIII. 

XI. 

X. 

XI. 
XII. 

XiU. 
XJV. 


XV. 

XVI. 

Method  of  ascertaining:  the  Speciiic  Gravity  of  Bodies  70 

XV  n.  The  Aft  of  Workaifr  Motals,  72 
XVill.   Glass, 

Art  of  Manufacturing,  '     87 

Art  of  Gilding,  Silvering,  Plating  and  Glazing,  89 

Art  of  Mannfactijring  Foils,  101 

XIX.  Art  of  Engraving  and  Etching,  103 

XX.  Art  of  Sculpture,  111 
Art  of  Priiiiinir,                                        '  113 

XXI.  Art  of  Painting,  118 

XXII.  OfPaints^,  122 

XXIII.  Art  of  making  Varnishes  13C> 
Of  Japans,  Oils,  Bronzing  Sac,  135 

XXIV.  Art  of  making  Glues,  Pastes,  Starch  &c.  lt>5 

XXV.  Art  ot  Dying,  l69 

XXVI.  Art  of  Calico  Priming,  189 
J^XVIf.  Art  of  Bleaching,  VjO 
?CXVIII.  Art  ofDistillijtion,  202 

Of  Brewing  to  produce  inflammcible  spirits,        203 


\ 


INDEX, 

Gf  Malt;                                                    ,  20^ 

Of  Hops  207 

Water  for  Brewing,  207 

Brewing  Vessels,  207 

Of  what  is  procured  by  Distillatiaflj  207 

Bodies  proper  for  distillation^  209 

XXIX..    Fermentation,  211 

Rectification,  219 

Filtration,      *  222 

XXX.  Colouring  Spirits,.  223 
Imitation  Spirits,  22i 
JNeutralized  Spirits,  228 
Areometer,  231 

XXXI.  To  make  Spirit*  of  Wine,  231 
Sugar  Spirits,  232 
Cherry  Brandy,  232 
Rasin  and  Apple  Spirits,  233 
Cordials,  234 
Of  Wines,  234 
Miscellaneous  Articles,  239 
Table  of  the  most  celebrated  mineral  Waters,     ^44 

XXXII.  Useful  Receipts,  246 

XXXIII.  Commerce  256 
Channels  and  Progress  of  Trade,  265 
Manufactures,  266 
Depression  of  Trade,  ^266 
Progress  of  Manufactures,  late  discoveries,  &c.  268 
Reported  distress  among  Manufacturers  272 

XXXIV.  Laws  relative  to  Spirits,  Wine:^,  Teas,  &c.       275 

XXXV.  On  Credits,  277 
Hints  to  Mechanics,  280 
Advantages  of  Promptness,  281 
Excellent  Rules,  281 

XXXVI.  Sugar,  282 
Teas,  283 
Tobacco,.  287 
Flour,  287 
Cotton,  287 

XXXVII.  Mensuration,  288 
Log  Table,  288 
Solid  measure  of  Square  Timber,  288 

XXXVIII.  Gunters  Rule,  294 


INDEX. 

Sliding  Rule,  ^  302 

Gauging,  305 

XXXrX.  Admeasurement  of  round  Timber,  3l2 

XL.         A  Table  Showing  the  Power  of  Steam,  311 

Horse  Power  on  Canal  and  Railroad,  3l6 

Diameter  of  Pipes  and  pressure  of  Water,         317 

XLl.         Allowance  for  Drafts,  3 if 

Tares,  317 

Tonnage,  319 

Duties,  319 

In  the  article  on  chlorine,  the  following  article  was  inad- 
vertently omitted. 

Chlorine  has  recently  been  used  with  great  swccess  in  re- 
moving animal  effluvia. 

A  French  Surgeon  of  great  eminence  has  lately  discovered 
that  chlorine  has  the  wonderful  power  of  decomposing  and 
destroying  several  of  the  most  deadly  poisons,  and  among 
others  the  salive  of  the  mad  dog. 

The  mode  of  applying  it  is  to  make  a  strong  wash,  by  dis- 
solving two  table  spoonfuls  of  the  chlorulet  of  lime,  in  half  a 
pint  of  water,  and  instantly  and  repeatedly  bathing  the  parts 
bitten.  It  has  proved  successful  within  six  hours  after  the- 
animal  has  been  bitten, 

ERRATA. 

Page  16,  17  line  from  top  for   compound  read  compounds, 
do.  72.  8  line  from  top  for  temporary  road  tempering, 
do.  129,  14  line  from  top  for  lead  cotonr  read  lead  colour, 
do.    '62  3  line  from  botoni  for  It  was  read  It  is. 
do.  271  14  line  from  top,  after  longer  read  particularli/, 
do.  286,  22  line  for  all  those  difficulties  are  howemr  read  the 
difficulties  proceding  from  errors  ivhich  occur  in   conse(j[uenck 
fff  a  substitution  of  tares  are^ 


